Professional Documents
Culture Documents
EDITORS
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthagopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
Editors
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthagopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
It is our proud privilege to welcome you all to the Sixth International Congress on
Computational Mechanics and Simulation (ICCMS2016) which is being held at Indian
Institute of Technology Bombay (IIT Bombay), organized and hosted jointly by Department
of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay and Department of Structural Engineering, Veermata Jijabai
Technological Institute (VJTI) Mumbai.
The ICCMS2016 has five plenary speakers, who are eminent researchers from different
parts of the world. Apart from the plenary sessions, six concurrent technical sessions have
been scheduled on each day of the congress for the oral presentation of all accepted
papers. Keynote speakers and session chairmen are leading researchers from the thematic
areas of the respective sessions.
Lastly but not the least, we would like to thank all the volunteers for their dedication and hard
work for making ICCMS2016 a huge success.
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthgopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
~................•
'f1'~' ~
-
~
'11'('11<1 l'Il~1 I ~ ~,,~
Office 2572 3488, 2576 7001
tu
~, ~ 400076, m«f
Res.
EPABX
2572 3738. 25768000
2572 2545. Extn.: 7001 (0). 8000 (R) e
Indian Institute of Technology Bombay Fax 91-22-2572 3546 (Direct). 2572 3480
3
Powai, Mumbai -400076, India E-mail director@iitb.ac.in
khakhar@iitb.ac.in
c-
Website: www.iitb.ac.in l»
Devang V. Khakhar,
~fct.~,~
Director <
Message
I am delighted to note that liT Bombay has taken the initiative, way back in the year
2000, in founding the Indian Association for Computational Mechanics (IndACM), an
affiliate of International Association for Computational Mechanics (IACM) to bring
together researchers, especially young researchers, working in the area of
Computational Mechanics on a common platform and has been conducting the
International Congress on Computational Mechanics and Simulation (ICCMS) on a
regular basis. I am also happy to note that liT Bombay and the VJTI have joined
hands to organize the Sixth ICCMS2016 at liT Bombay on 27 June to 1 July 2016.
A distinct discipline of Computational Mechanics which could stand alone on its own
merit started growing its roots in the nineteen hundred sixties with the development of
a revolutionary computational method - the finite element method and the
simultaneous innovations in the design of digital computers. In simple terms,
Computational Mechanics is concerned with application of discrete numerical methods
to describe the behaviour of real life physical phenomena governed by the principles of
mechanics. Computational Mechanics has enabled transformation of much of the
classical Newtonian mechanics into practical discrete numerical procedures and tools
to understand complex natural physical phenomena. These tools are now used
extensively in both developed and developing world for design and simulation in
manufacturing, transportation, communication, defence and may allied fields. Recent
innovations in Computational Mechanics are already making great strides in quantum,
molecular and biological phenomena. Computational Mechanics has made profound
impact on many facets of life, including medicine, energy conservation and national
security. It is well-recognized that scientists and engineers of India and of Indian origin
outside the country have played a very significant role in this development.
~
Devang Khakhar
VJTI
Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute
(Central Technological Institute, Maharashtra State, INDIA)
H. R. Mahajani Marg, Matunga. Mumbai 400019
Tel.No. +91 2224198101-02 Fax:+91 2224102874
www.vjti.ac.in
Message
Hosting the sixth international congress jointly with the premier institute of the
country, the liT Bombay is a matter of pride for my Institute, the VJTI. This four days
event will provide a platform to the researchers, academicians, and the practitioners
to share their experiences, discuss the recent developments and the trends, and I
am sure it will definitely be a value adding experience for all.
D.G. Kakde
Sixth International Congress on
Computational Mechanics and Simulation
Patrons
Devang Khakhar, Director, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Omprakash G. Kakde, Director, VJTI Mumbai.
Mentor
Tarun Kant, Institute Chair Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Congress Chairs
Yogesh Desai, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
Abhay Bambole, Professor and Dean R&D, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Organizing Secretaries
Prakash Nanthagopalan, Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Sandeep S. Pendhari, Associate Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Vivek B. Deshmukh, Associate Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Members
Sauvik Banerjee, Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Deepankar Chaudhary, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
T. I. Eldho, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
Subimal Ghosh, Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
K.K. Sangle, Professor and Head, Structural Engineering Department, Dean Infrastructure and Planning, VJTI
Mumbai.
M. A. Chakrabarti, Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Nissar Khan, Sr. Tech. Superintendent, Heavy Structures Lab, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Advisory Committee
Sondipon Adhikari, Swansea, UK | Satya Atluri, Irvine, USA
Sudhir K Barai, Kharagpur, India | Romesh Batra, Blacksburg, USA
Mallikarjuna Bennur, Detroit, USA | Atul Bhaskar, Southampton, UK
S K Bhattacharyya, Roorkee, India | Gautam Biswas, Guwahati, India
Erasmo Carrera, Torino, Italy | C S Desai, Tucson, USA
Subhasish Dey, Kharagpur, India | B K Dutta, Mumbai, India
A J M Ferreira, Porto, Prtugal | Ranjan Ganguli, Bengaluru, India
Somnath Ghosh, Baltimore, USA | S Gopalakrishnan, Bengaluru, India
Ramana Grandhi, Dayton, USA | Vijay Gupta, Los Angeles, USA
Thomas J R Hughes, Austin, USA | Nagesh Iyer, Chennai, India
C S Jog, Bengaluru, India | Shailendra Joshi, Singapore
Rakesh Kapania, Blacksburg, USA | Santosh Kapuria, Delhi, India
B L Karihaloo, Cardiff, UK | Ashwini Kumar, Gandhinagar, India
Jyant Kumar, Bengaluru, India | G R Liu, Cincinnati, USA
Sudhakar R Marur, Pune, India | Vasant Matsagar, Delhi, India
Sanjay Mittal, Kanpur, India | R Narasimhan, Bengaluru, India
P Nithiarasu, Swansea, UK | J Tinsley Oden, Austin, USA
Nimal Rajapakse, Burnaby, Canada | L S Ramachandra, Kharagpur, India
Manas Chandra Ray, Kharagpur, India | J N Reddy, College Station, USA
Debasish Roy, Bengaluru, India | Anand V Singh, London, Canada
Ram Kumar Singh, Mumbai, India | N Swaminathan, Cambridge, UK
Ramesh Talreja, College Station, USA | Tayfun Tezduyar, Houston, USA
Contents
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
Plenary Sessions
1 Robust Finite Element Modelling Approaches to Systemic Circulation Flow and Heat 1
Transfer
Hasan H., Cocckerelli A. and Nithiarasu P.
Keynote Sessions
5 Free Edge effects in Sandwich Laminates Under Tension, Bending and Twisting Loads 9
Dhanesh N. and Santosh Kapuria
i
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
10 Numerical Studies of Piezoelectric Composites Using Nurbs for Geometry and Field 14
Functions
Singh A.V. and Raj V.
11 Clean Water and Clean Energy Production: simulation Using Finite Element Method 15
Seetharamu K.N., Spandana K.R., Parikshit B.
15 A Fast-Multipole Unified Technique for the Analysis of Potential Problems with the 19
Boundary Element Methods
Ney Augusto Dumont and, Hélvio De Farias Costa Peixoto
Bio-Mechanics
ii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
004 Effects of Heat and Mass Transfer on MHD Flow of Blood Through an Artery With 33
Stenosis Having Variable Viscosity
Tripathi B. and Sharma B.K.
Bridge Structures
009 Numerical and Analytical Modelling of Reinforced Concrete Circular Columns Under 50
Torsion
Mondal A., Ghosh T., Gangan A. and Suriya Prakash S.
010 Analysis of Spherical Dome with Openings Using Finite Element Method 54
Khan S., Bambole A.N., and Murgudkar H.C.
Composite Structures
016 Finite Element Modelling of FRP Composite Joints Considering Bolt Torque 79
Mandal B. and Chakrabarti B.
iii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
017 Thermal Stress Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates and Open Cylindrical Shells 83
Punera D. and Kant T.
018 Bending and Buckling Analyses of Composite Laminates with and Without Presence 87
of Damage and its Passive Control with Optimized Piezoelectric Patch Location
Maiti D.K. and Sreehari V.M.
019 Static Response of Wind Turbine Blade Under Actual Loading Effect 91
Choudhury S., Sharma T. and Shukla K.K.
023 Theoretical Study on Basalt Fiber Reinforced Composite (BFRC) Sandwich Panel 107
Under Flexure
Raj S., Bharathkumar B. H. and Ramesh Kumar V.
024 Effect of Delamination Size and Location on the Dynamics of Thin Pretwisted Strips 111
Salunkhe S.B. and Guruprasad P.J.
025 Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response Using FEM 115
Bhar A. and Shakya R.
027 Static Analysis of Functionally Graded Beam for Power-Law Variation of Elastic 124
Modulus
Pendhari S. S., Mahajan M., Dhangare P. M. and Gujar P.
031 Seismic Analysis of Multistorey Building Using Steel Concrete Composite Columns at 140
Soft Storey
Patil S., Jangave S.K and Patil R.S
iv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
032 Ballistic Impact Response of Laminated GFRP Composite Plate: Experimental and FE 144
Analyses
Ansari M.D.M. and Chakrabarti A.
033 Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending 148
Subjected to Concentrated Loads
Raval D. and Bambole A. N.
034 Vibration Damping Capacity of Carbon Nanotubes Based Hybrid Composite Spherical 153
Shell Panel
Swain A. and Roy T.
035 Buckling Analysis of Composite Laminated Skew Plate of Variable Thickness Under 157
Biaxial Compression
Priyanka Dhurvey
037 A Method for Accurate Transverse Normal Stress Evaluation in Laminated Composites 165
Using Simple HSDT
Deshmukh M.B. and Bhar A.
038 Tensile and Compressive Buckling Analyses of Stiffened Laminated Composite Panels 169
Rajanna T., Banerjee S., Desai Y.M. and Prabhakara D.L.
039 Stress and Failure Analysis of Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Tubular Socket 173
Joint of Laminated FRP Composites
Nimje S.V. and Panigrahi S.K.
040 Non-Linear 3D Finite Element Analysis of Adhesively Bonded CFRP Lap Joint 177
Lavjiit Singh., Mahesh M. S. and Nimje S.
041 Stochastic Natural Frequency of Composite Plates Using Kriging Model 181
Dey S., Mukhopadhay T., Chakrabarty S., Chowdhury R., Adhikari S., Karmakar A.
and Spickenheuer A.
042 Numerical Modeling of Flow Around Cylindrical Bridge Piers With and Without Pile- 185
Cap
Gautam P., Vijayasree B.A., Eldho T. I., Behera M. R. and Mazumder B. S.
043 Modified Kinetic Streamlined-Upwind Petrov Galerkin Method for Euler Equations of 189
Gas Dynamics
Jagtap Ameya D.
044 High Enthalpy Simulations for Shock Wave Boundary Layer Interaction 193
Desai S., Kulkarni V. and Gadgil H.
v
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
045 Design and Testing of Axial Fans for Cooling Engines 197
Abdulazeem D., Baruah A. and Kumar S.
046 Aakalan - A Third Order Finite Volume Solver for Unstructured Meshes 201
Bapat C. J.
048 Numerical Simulation Of The Turbulent Air Flow In The Narrow Circular Channel 209
With Centre-Cleared Rib Vortex
Bhattacharyya S., Chattopadhyay H., Biswas N., Rakshit A. and Roy A.
049 Cost Effective CFD Methodology to Predict the Free Surface Movement Inside Tank 213
Periyasamy S., Shinde G., Joshi A. and Nikam K.
051 Development of Bhism for Performance Based Blast Resistant Design of Reinforced 220
Concrete (RC) Structures
Kumar S. and Sharma H.
052 CFD Simulation of Stratification/Dispersion of Helium Layer by Two Heat Sources 224
and Their Interaction in a Thermally Stratified Vessel
Gera B., Ganju S. and Patel R. J.
053 An Experimental and CFD Based Study to Improve Thermal Performance of Car 228
Radiator Using Twisted and Wire Mesh Inserts by Varying Mass Flow Rate
Jain S. K., Sharma M., Saini D., Sharma V., Dadhich M. and Prajapati O.S.
056 CFD Simulation and Experimental Validation of a Vertical Intake System 239
Samhitha C. D. and Eldho T. I.
058 Numerical Study of Effect of Density and Aspect Ratio on Oscillatory Exchange Flow 246
Through a Circular Opening in Horizontal Partition
Singh R. K., Alam M. and Gera B.
vi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
059 Numerical Modelling of Laminar Diffusion Flames Over a Hybrid Unstructured Grid 250
Preetirekha B., Amaresh D., Gadgil H. and Ganesh N.
060 Thermal Comfort Analysis of a Room Using Radiant Cooling System: A CFD Based 253
Study
Sharma N.K., Gunjan G., Dhakara M., Choudhary M., Gupta N. and Gupta P. K.
061 Study of Natural Convection in a Wavy Porous Enclosure in Presence of Magnetic 257
Field
Sarkar C., Pandit S. K. and Dalal D. C.
062 Vortex Structure of Incompressible Viscous Flows in a Lid(s) Driven Cavity With 261
Wavy Wall
Karmakar H. and Pandit S. K.
063 Optimization of Simple Air Duct Heat Exchanger by Perforated Plates : A CFD Based 265
Study
Mittal S., Sharma V., Sharma V., Jain S. K., Dadhich M. and Jangid A. K.
064 ADPI Calculation for Thermal Comfort in Operation Theatre With Angular Diffuser 269
Rahate S.D., Waghmare S. A. and Deshmukh P.D.
065 CFD Simulation of Combined Buoyancy and Pressure Driven Hot Gas Flows Through 273
Square Opening Using Salt Water Analogy
Gera B., Singh R. K. and Alam M.
066 Computational Study of Hypersonic Flow Past a Spherically Blunted Nose Cone 277
Ashish Narayan, Rakesh Kumar and Narayanan S.
067 Energy Deposition in Supersonic Flow Past a Hemisphere Using OpenFoam 280
Dhurandhar S. N. and Bansal A.
068 Assessment of Pulsatile Waveforms on the Blood Flow Dynamics in Intracranial 283
Aneurysm
Basumatary M. , Natarajan G. and Mishra S. C.
070 Numerical Study on Effect of Airfoil Pin-Fin Location in Tube Fin Heat Exchanger 291
Jaganathan A., Deepakkumar R. and Jayavel S.
071 A Sharp Interface Immersed Boundary Method for Inviscid Compressible Flows 295
Brahmachary S., Natarajan G., Kulkarni V. and Sahoo N.
072 Lattice Boltzmann Simulation of Mixed Convection Around a Heated Square Cylinder 299
Placed in a Lid Driven Cavity
Gera B. and Singh R. K.
vii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
073 An Immersed Boundary Method for Mixed Convection Flows With Large Temperature 303
Gradient
Kumar M. and Natarajan G.
074 Genuinely Multidimensional Cure for Numerical Shock Instability in a Contact 307
Preserving Riemann Solver
Simon S. and Mandal J. C.
075 Numerical Simulation of Lid-Driven Square Cavity Using Staggered Grid Based Finite 311
Volume Method
Varma I. J., Maniyeri R. and Kang S.
076 Numerical Investigation of NACA 0025 and NACA 0021 of straight blade Darrieus 315
turbine for Hydrodynamic Application
Patil B.S., Kumar K., Thakare H.R. and Narkhede M.M.
077 Water-Gas Two Phase Flow Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline-A CFD Study 320
Senapati S. K and Dewangan S. K.
078 Numerical Investigation of Flow Through Steam Turbines Using the Mixing Plane 324
Method
Shukla S., Mishra R., Chaudhary N. and Suman S.
080 Steady Flow Computations Using HLL-CPS Scheme With Low Mach Number 332
Correction
Gogoi A. and Mandal J.C.
081 Investigation of 3-D Flows in a Tandem Compressor Cascade With Various Chord 336
Ratios
Sherin S. B., Manas M. S. and Shine S. R.
082 Prediction of Flow Parameters for a Flow Past Rows of Staggered Cylinders Using 340
Artificial Intelligence Methods
Sharma N. and Singh U.
083 Effect of Corrugation Geometry on Power Consumption and Friction Factor in a 344
Channel
Bharath Ram R. , Sudharsan T. S. and Naren P. R.
085 Experimental and Numerical Study on Wake Evacuation Effects in Expansion 352
Deflection Nozzles
Mohan K., Munjal P., Vishak S. and Vaidyanathan A.
viii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
086 Numerical studies of a shell-and-tube PCM based heat storage unit 356
Samanta H., Roy P.C. and Barman N.
088 Numerical Investigation of Evolving Flow Structure Around Ahmed Body Mounted 364
with Solar Panel of Different Configuration
Mohammad Rafiq B. Agrewale and Maurya R.S.
090 Effect of Winglet Corrugation for Improved MAV Aerodynamic Performance 371
Dwivedi Y. D. and Donepudi Jagadish
091 CFD Analysis of Perfusion Kinetics in Brain Tumor with DCE-MRI Derived Model 375
Bhandari A., Bansal A., Singh A. and Sinha N.
092 Numerical Investigation on Effect of Moving Vanes and Vehile Velocity on Exhaust 379
Flow of Engine in Armoured Combat Vehicle
More R.R., Patil B.S., Lagad R.B. and Trikande M.W.
093 CFD Simulation of Cascade Fin Flow at Low Subsonic Speeds and High Angles of 383
Attack
Tripathi M., Mahesh M.S. and Misra A.
094 Boyancy Driven Heat Transfer Effect in Room Ventilation due to Discrete Heat 387
Sources
Gupta N. and Nayak A. K.
095 Evaluating Differences in Airflow Patterns for Similar Rural Kitchens using CFD 391
Ronita Bardhan, Ramit Debnath and Rangan Banerjee
Fluid Mechanics
096 Hydraulic Performance Analysis on Corrugated Type Plate Heat Exchanger 396
Kumar B., Singh D. and Singh S. N.
097 Effect of rotation and baroclinicity on heat transport and turbulent convection in 400
annular flow
Banerjee A.K., Bhattacharya A. and Balasubramanian S.
099 Thermo-Hydraulic Simulation of Oxidizer Booster Pump for Semi-cryogenic Engine 407
Thomas B.G., Unnikrishnan Nair P., Sarangi S.K. and Narayanan V.
ix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
101 High Fidelity Simulation of Flow Over a Flapping Wing Using Parallel Computing 415
Bose C., Gupta S. and Sarkar S.
5102 Reduction of Secondary Flow Losses in Linear Turbine Cascade by Boundary Layer 419
Fence
Kiran K. N. and Anish S.
Fluid-Structure Interaction
103 3D Coupled CFD-FEA Dynamic Stall Analysis of 5 MW NREL Wind Turbine 423
Baseline Rotor
Fatima N. and Gopal K.V.N
104 Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter 427
Aircraft
Vashistha R. and Gogoi A.
106 Fluid-Film Dependent Added Mass and Added Damping for Parallel Plates 436
Verma G., Eswaran M., Sengupta S., Ram Reddy G., Mammen S. and Bhattacharya S.
108 Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions 444
Hoskoti L. and Mahesh M. S.
111 Damage Detection in Composite Beams Using Vibration Based Method 457
Joshi S.P. and Dawari V. B.
112 Fatigue Analysis of Concrete Members Under Variable Amplitude Cyclic Loading 461
Jeshna C. C., Bhowmik S. and Ray S.
x
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
113 Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor and Crack Growths Modeling of Double Edge 465
Cracks Laminated Composite Plate Subjected to Tensile and Shear Loadings Using
XFEM
Lal A., Mulani S. B., Kapania R. K. and Singh B. N.
115 Meshfree Analysis of Cracked Panel Repaired by Bonded Composite Patch 473
Pathak H., Singh A. and Singh I.V.
116 Determination of Size Independent Fracture Energy for Various Grades of Concrete 476
Beams- Three Approaches
Hemalatha T., Ramachandra Murthy A. and Aravindan M.
117 Obtaining Fracture Properties of FRC by Inverse Analysis Using the PGSL 480
Optimization Algorithm
Stephen S. J., Raphael B. and Gettu R.
118 A Linearized Toughness Model for Concrete by Considering Toughening Mechanisms 484
Simon K. M. and Kishen J. M. C.
119 Meshfree Analysis of Beams and Columns in the Presence of Initial Damage 488
Gupta A. and Arun C. O.
122 Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack 500
Subjected to Biaxial Load Using X-Fem
Palekar Shaiesh P. and Achchhe Lal
123 Numerical Studies on the Influence of Notch Depth and Location on the Natural 505
Frequency of Indeterminate Beams
Stuti M., Varun K., Kalyana Rama J. S. and Ramachandra Murthy A.
124 Influence of Notch to Depth Ratio on Fracture Process Parameters of Plain Concrete 509
Beam Using Concrete Damaged Plasticity Model
George J., Kalyana Rama J. S., Siva Kumar M. V. N., Vasan A. and Ramachandra
Murthy A.
xi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
130 Failure Assessment in Aluminium Plate Using Continuum Damage Mechanics 531
Nawab S. and Thakkar B.
131 Effect of Flexural Cracks on Behaviour of RCC Beams Under Torsion 535
Bariya M. and Thakkar B.
132 Nonlinear Analysis of Fiber Wrapped Reinforced Concrete Beams With Cohesive 539
Model
Chakraborty S., Jha D. K., Reddy G. R. and Srinivas K.
133 Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J- 542
R Curve
Kumar P., Dutta B. K., Chattopadhyay J. and Shriwastaw R. S.
134 Study of Various Damage Indices Under Seismic Loading- A Review 547
Parekar S. D. and Datta D.
135 Characterization of Near Crack Tip Stresses for Fracture Testing Specimens from 551
Strength Mismatch Weld
Kumar S. , Singh P. K. and Patel R. J.
Geo Mechanics
136 Effects of Intermediate Principal Stress on Shear Localization During Tunnel 555
Excavation
Sisodiya M. and Das A.
137 A Numerical Study on a Rock Slope Failure with the Rate, State, Temperature and Pore 559
Pressure Friction (RSTPF) Model
Singh A. K. and Singh T. N.
138 Redistribution Principle Approach for Evaluation of Seismic Active Earth Pressure 563
Behind Retaining Wall
Maskar A.D., Madhekar S. N. and Phatak D. R.
xii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
139 Three Dimensional Computer Simulation of Laterally Loaded Monopile Foundation 567
for Offshore Wind Turbine
Deshmukh R.R. and Sharma V. K.
140 Effect of Soil Structure Interaction on Vertical Irregularity in Framed RC Structure 571
Dhadse G. and Mohod M.
141 Numerical Modeling of Reinforced Copper Slag Embankment using Plaxis 3D 575
Athulya G.K., Choubey M. and Mandal J. N.
Heat Transfer
143 Solution of Stochastic Heat Conduction Problem Using Galerkin Based Polynomial 582
Correlated Function Expansion
Chakraborty S. and Chowdhury R.
145 Comparison of Flow and Heat Transfer Characteristics in Triangular and Sinusoidal 590
Shaped Wavy Channels
Harikrishnan S. and Tiwari S.
146 Thermal Behaviour Analysis of V-Through Flat Plate Solar Water Collector: An 594
Experimental and CFD Based Study
Jangid A.K. , Sharma N. K., Jain S. K., Dadhich M., Sharma V. and Agarwal D.
147 Effect of Location of Heat Source and Rayleigh Number on Natural Convection in A 598
Square Cavity Using Thermal Lattice Boltzmann Method
Patil M.Y., Patil A.J. and Sewatkar C.M.
148 Computational Analysis of Flow and Thermal Characteristics of Pin-Fin Heat Sink 602
Manogna J., Deepakkumar R. and Jayavel S.
149 Visualization of Thermal Transport in Discretely Heated 2-D Complex Solid 605
Geometries
Narasimha Suri Tinnaluri and Jaya Krishna Devanuri
150 Numerical Simulation of Natural Convection With Radiative Heat Transfer in a Cavity 609
Parmananda M., Khan S. and Dalal A.
151 LBM Simulation of Free Convection in an Enclosure Containing Heat Generating Low- 613
Pr Fluid
Gera B. and Singh R.K.
xiii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
152 Natural Convection in an Open Cavity With Surface Mounted Electronic Components 617
Muthukrishnan S. and Madhusudhana R. Gavara
153 Design, Manufacturing and Performance Analysis of Different Thermoplastic Gears in 621
the Gearbox for Moped
Gupta A.R., Aloni S.N. and Datey S.N.
155 Numerical Analysis Off low Boiling Heat Transfer in Single Horizontal small diameter 628
channel using VOF Multiphase Model
Jignesh R. and Kumar K.
156 Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque 631
Induced Vortex
Aravind G.P., Muhammed Rafi K. M., Fahd Bin Abdul Hasis and Deepu M.
158 Numerical Analysis of Natural Convection Around a Pair of Heated Cylinders inside a 640
Cold Square Enclosure
Chauhan S. P. and Thakur H.
160 Thermal Design and Analyses of Lithium-Ion Battery for Rover of an Interplanetary 648
Missions: Modelling and Simulation
Jayaraman S.., Channi A., Bindagi S.V., Srinivasan M.S., Satyanarayana, Ravindran
R., Barve S.G. and Sharma A.K.
Hydrodynamics
162 A Study on River Bed Degradation Due to Mining of Coarser Top Sediment 652
Barman Bandita and Sarma A. K.
163 Two Phase Interface Model for Transport Phenomena During Sublimation of Crystals 656
and Vapor Phase Reaction
Sawant R., Inamdar S.R., Karimi I. A. and Kulkarni B. D.
164 Flood Plain Simulation of an Urban River Catchment: A Case Study 660
Zope P.E., Eldho T. I. and Jothiprakash V.
Material Modelling
xiv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
165 Ballistic Studies of Boron Carbide Tiles against 7.62 mm AP Projectile 664
Savio S. G., Srivathsa B. and Madhu V.
166 Inclusion Modelling in Concrete With the Extended Finite Element Method 668
Thirumalaiselvi A., Anandavalli N. and Rajasankar J.
169 Analysis and Optimization of Multi-Plate Wet Clutch With Different Friction Materials 681
Shaha U. and Tembhare G.U.
171 FE Based Investigation of Heat Effected Zone and Temperature Distribution in Copper 688
and AISI 304 Stainless Steel Weldment
Singh G., Saxena R.K. and Pandey S.
172 Mechanical Behaviour of Epoxy Matrix Under Tension, Compression and Shear Using 692
DIC: Experiments and Numerical Modeling
Gupta M. and Mahajan P.
173 Study of Agglomerate Breakage in a Shear Flow Using Numerical Simulations 696
Akiti N., Hapgood K. and Khakhar D.
174 Prediction of Compressive Strength of Concrete with Natural Aggregates and Recycled 700
Aggregates Using M5’ Model Tree Algorithm
Jain S. and Barai S.V.
175 Evaluation of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Geofoam Creep Using Plaxis 3D 704
Beju Y.Z. and Mandal J. N.
xv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
180 Length Scale Effect on the Deformation Behaviour of Bio-Inspired Nanocomposites 724
using Molecular Dynamics
Mathiazhagan S.and Anup S.
183 Kinematic and Dynamic Analyses of 3-Link Cooperative Manipulators Handling 736
Hazardous Chemicals
Ranjan R. and Dwivedy S. K.
184 Pendulum Impact Test on Thermally Damaged Reinforced Concrete Frames 740
Singh Tarvinder, Sharma Shailesh, Parmar R. M. and Reddy G.R.
186 Stroke and Tolerance Stack Up Analysis of an Automotive Side Door Latch 748
Vinod Kumar R., Elango M. and Udupa N.
187 Effect of Nonlinearities in the Suspension of Heavy Goods Vehicles on Vehicle Road 751
Interaction
Joshi S., Vichare C., Pable M.J. and Seshu P.
188 Inverse Dynamic Analysis of Axial Piston Pump Using Augmented Newton-Euler 755
Formulation
Milind T. R. and Mitra M.
189 Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: 759
Validation, Comparison and Parametric Studies
Milind T. R. and Mitra M.
190 Boundary Element Modeling of the Acoustic Radiation of an Axial Piston Pump: 764
Numerical Implementation
Milind T.R. and Mitra M.
xvi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
191 Numerical Modeling of the Structural Acoustic Radiation and Sound Pressure Fields 768
of an Axial Piston Pump
Milind T.R. and Mitra M.
192 Displacement & Arrest of Occupant on Automotive Seat System in Frontal Dynamic 772
Crash Condition: Anti-Sub Feature on Seat Cushion
Dharmadhikari V. D. and Chougule V.N.
Multi-Phase Flow
193 Modelling and Simulation of Cyclic Oxidation of Thermal Barrier Coatings using 776
FEM
Srivathsa B., Meena Kumari V., S. Gokul Lakshmi and Das D.K.
194 Numerical Study of Effects of Particle Diameter and Particle Volume Fractions on 781
Dispersed Gas-Particle Flows Through Vertical Channels
Kotoky S., Dalal A. and Natarajan G.
195 CFD Modelling of Gas Bubble Formation in a Stagnant & Co-Flowing Liquid Medium 785
Prasad V. K., Singh S. P. and Chatterjee D.
196 The Role of Consistency in the Simulation of High Density Ratio Flows 789
Patel J.K. and Natarajan G.
198 Analysis of Droplet Solidification During FCI in Severe Accident of Nuclear Reactors 797
Ghosh B. and Mukhopadhyay D.
200 A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil 805
With Open foam in HPC
Alomoy Banerjee and Barman S.
201 Numerical Heat Transfer Analysis of Pin Fin With Ellipsoidal Beads 810
Madhumitha R., Arunkumar S., Balachandar C. and Venkatesan M.
202 Topology Optimization of Pre-Mixing Zone in a T Shaped Micromixer for Enhanced 814
Mixing
Madhumitha R., Arunkumar S., Ravichandran V. and Venkatesan M.
203 Comparative Study of Coal Combustion in Air and O2/CO2 Environment 818
Rajneesh Vachaspati, Om Prakash Singh, and Ray T. K.
xvii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
205 The Waste Materials as Partial Replacement of Fine Aggregate in Concrete-Outlet 827
Ramana P.V., Manish M. and Kunal B.
207 An Efficient Locking Free Multiscale Finite Elements for Free Vibration Analysis of 834
Carbon Nanotubes
Singh S. and Patel B.P.
208 Displacement Analysis of a Compliant Micro-Gripper Using PRBM & FEA Method 838
Darawade P.B., Shendge M.P., Deshmukh A.S., Jain S.S., Joshi R.S. and Mitra A.C.
209 Adaptive Multiscale Finite Element Method for Simulation of Heterogeneous Material 842
Patil R., Mishra B.K. and Singh I.V.
Non-Linear Mechanics
215 Effect of Circular Web Perforation in Rectangular Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) 865
Tubular Beams – A Finite Element Study
Sonu J.K. and Singh K.D.
216 Structural Performance of Elliptical Hollow Steel Tubular Braces Under Ultra Low 869
Cycle Fatigue Loading
Narendra P.V.R. and Singh K.D.
xviii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
217 A Comparative Study on Effect Fibre Volume Fraction on Ex-Situ BMG Composites 873
Through Unit Cell Simulations
Gouripriya S., Sinha S.A. and Tandaiya P.
219 Estimation of Local Stresses and Strains for Notched Geometries Using Non-Linear 881
Analysis
Khatawate V.H., Dharap M.A. and Moorthy R.I.K.
221 Analysis of a Nonlinear Flexural Wave-Breathing Crack Interaction in A Slender Beam 889
Using Wavelet Spectral Finite Element Method
Joglekar D. M. and Mitra M.
223 Non- Linear Behaviour of Laterally Restrained Beams With Sinusoidal Corrugated 897
Web
Baskar K. and Sadananda H.I.
226 Nonlinear Computational Analysis of Multi Strand Helical Wire Rope Isolators 909
Patel N. and Kumaraswamy A.
228 An Improved Approximation Strategy for Multi Objective Evolutionary Optimization 918
Chatterjee T. and Chowdhury R.
229 Design and Optimization of Brake Slack Adjuster for Light Commercial Vehicle 922
Braking System
Karwande S.V.
xix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
230 Stability Preserving Runge Kutta Method Using Genetic Algorithm 925
Neelan A. G. And Nair M. T.
231 A Refined Time Series Model for Structural Health Monitoring 929
Lakshmi K. and A. Rama Mohan Rao
233 Computational Mechanism on Large Deformable Bodies Using Novel Technique 937
Ramana P.V.
235 A review on Applications of Meshless Methods to Flow and Transport Processes in 942
Porous Media
Boddula S. and Eldho T.I
236 The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations Using Novel 946
Technique
Ramana P.V. and Gupta S.
237 Modelling and Analysis of Metal Drilling Process Using Experimental Study and Finite 951
Element Method
Ponnusamy Pandithevan and Vinayaga Muruga
239 Finite Element Simulation of PZT Induced Guided Wave Modes in Isotropic 959
Cylindrical Shells
Jayesh P. and Bijudas C.R.
240 A Computer Numerical Simulation Study Between System Level and Component 963
Level Model of a System Under Design
Hariram Shanmuganathan
241 Optimizing the Design of Engine Timing Chain System of Passenger Car 967
Shinde A.P.
242 Novel Algorithms for Simulation of Free and Moving Boundary Problems 971
Rangarajan R.
xx
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
244 Optimization of Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers by Minimizing the Entropy 978
Generation Using Bat Algorithm
Tharakeshwar T.K., Seetharamu K.N., Durga Prasad B. and Kumar B.
246 A Study on the Behaviour of the Basis Functions in Differential Quadrature Method 986
for Elasto-Static Problems
Durga Rao S.S. and Sethuraman R.
247 Multi-Block Structured Grid Generation using Algebraic Techniques for Complex 990
Rocket Models
Kumaravel G. and Unnikrishnan C.
248 Effect of Friction Between Punch & Die on Springback in 60 Degree V Bend 994
Sayyad V.M., Phalle V.M., Vishwadeep C. H. and Patil S. S.
249 A Computer Simulation Model for Smartly Actuated Dorsal Fin With Compliant 998
Mechanism and Shape Memory Alloy
Govindarajan G. and Sharma R.
250 Comparative Study of Metallic and Composite Belly for Belly Landing of a Light 1002
Banakar P. and Akshatha H. T.
251 Heat Transfer Enhancement of Heat Exchanger Using Porous Medium: A CFD Based 1006
Study
Sharma V., Mittal S., Sharma N.K., Jain S.K., Sharma V. and Dadhich M.
252 Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium Using the Operator 1010
Splitting Technique
Tinesh Pathania
253 Characterization of Flow and Thermal Behaviour of Product Gas Constituents in the 1015
Throat-Less Downdraft Gasifier
Kane A. A., Maurya R. S., Tiwari I. and Lobo S.
255 Design and Development of Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using 1023
Computational Techniques
Maradkar R. R. and Maurya R. S.
xxi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
Smart Structures
257 Dynamic Response of an Asymptotically Correct Piezoelectric Sensor With a Tip Mass 1033
Banerjee S. and Roy S.
258 Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures Using a Refined Time-Reversed 1037
Lamb Wave Method
Kapuria S. and Agrahari J. K.
259 FE Modeling of Sandwich Beam With Two-Plane Edge Debonding of Piezoelectric 1042
Shear Actuator
Venkat Rao K., Raja S. and Munikenche Gowda T.
261 Impact of Irregularity on the Propagation Behavior of Surface Wave in a Layered 1051
Piezoelectric Structure
Singh A. K., Kumar S. and Mahto S.
262 Detection of Damage in Surface-Mounted PZT Transducers using Voltage Amplitude 1055
Spectrum
Ashwin U., Sathyanarayana C.N. and Raja S.
264 Finite Element Analysis of a Piezoelectric Plate Based on First Order Shear 1063
Deformation Theory
Pendhari S. S., Jadhav S.S., and Patil V.
265 Behaviour of Polypropylene Fibre Reinforced Concrete Pavement Under Static Wheel 1067
Load
Mohod Milind and Kadam K. N.
267 An Experimental Study of a Novel Energy Scavenger Cum Vibration Absorber 1075
Vishvanath Allamraju K. and Srikanth K.
268 An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of 1079
Dielectric Elastomer Actuators With Unequal Biaxial Prestress
Bajpayee S., Joglekar D. M. and Joglekar M. M.
xxii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
269 Radial and Thickness Mode Calculations of PZT-5H Disc by Using Ambient 1084
Vibrations
Vishvanath Allamraju K.
270 Vibration Based Hybrid Energy Harvester for Broadband Harvesting 1088
Rajarathinam M. and Ali S. F.
272 Rayleigh Wave Propagation in Liquid Layer Lying over a Pre-Stressed Orthotropic 1097
Half-Space
Chudhary S. and Sahu S. A.
273 Thermostructural Design of an Unconventional Section with Stiffened and Unstiffened 1100
Panels
Jayanthi G. and Jain P.C.
274 An Experimental Study on Slender Hollow Circular Stainless Steel Columns with 1104
Single Circular Perforation Subjected to Axial Compression
Lalthazuala R., Konjengbam D. Singh
275 Gauge Widening/Condemning of Parabolic Profile Locomotive Wheels While Braking 1008
with Composite Brake Blocks
Vineesh K.P., Vakkalagadda M.R.K and Racherla V.
276 Flexure of Fixed Thick Beam Using Trigonometric Shear Deformation Theory 1112
Dahake A. G., Manal S. S. and Sawant R. M.
277 Micromechanical Modelling of Spiral Wound Gasket Under Uniaxial Compression 1116
Rino Nelson N., Siva Prasad N. and Sekhar A. S.
278 Analysis of Prestressed Hollowcore Slabs With Openings: A Numerical Study 1120
Sameer K. Sarma P. and Surya Prakash S.
280 Static Analysis of Doubly Curved FGM Panel on Rectangular Plan-form 1127
Bahadur R., Upadhyay A. K. and Shukla K. K.
281 Static Analaysis of Doubly Tapered Thin Walled Composite Box Beam Under Axial 1131
Loading
Tushar Sharma, Murari V. and Shukla K.K.
xxiii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
283 Study of Rayleigh Wave in Orthotropic Layer Lying Over an Orthotropic Half-Space 1139
With Initial Stress
Singhal A. and Sahu S. A.
284 Energy Absorption Characteristics of Aluminium Alloy 6061 Square Corrugated Tubes 1142
Under Axial and Oblique Impact Loading
Rawat S., Upadhyay A.K. and Shukla K.K.
286 Fragility Based Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of Reinforced Concrete Framed 1150
Structures b
Veerendra Kumar P. and Siva Kumar M. V. N.
287 On Plane Strain Problems of Eccentric Elastic Rings in Bipolar Coordinate Systems 1154
Desai P. and Pandya V.
291 Buckling Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates Using Inverse Hyperbolic Shear 1170
Deformation Theory
Kulkarni K., Singh B.N and Maiti D.K.
292 Evaluation of Coupled Partial Models Using Graph Theory and Sensitivity Analysis 1174
Naik A. and Balu A. S.
294 Adaptive Refinement Strategy for Crack Propagation Analysis Using EFG Method 1182
Bhavana S. S. Patel, Babu K. S. N., Katta V.
xxiv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
296 Experimental Investigation of Hollow Stainless Steel Square Stub Column With Single 1190
Perforation Under Axial Compression
Sanasam Vipej Devi, Konjengbam Darunkumar Singh
297 Large Deformation Analysis of Point Supported Conoidal Shells Using Element Free 1194
Galerkin Method
Watts G., Pradyumna S. and Singha M.K.
299 B-Spline Wavelet Finite Element Method for 1D Bi-Material Problems in Elasto- 1202
Statics
Vadlamani S. and Arun C.O.
300 Floor Response Spectra Considering Structural Nonlinearity Effect: Experiments and 1206
Analysis
Kothari P., Parulekar Y. M., Reddy G. R. and Shenai G.V.
302 Layerwise Solution for Nonlinear Static and Dynamic Stability of Laminated 1215
Composite Plates Using B-Spline Finite Element Method
Susmita Mondal and Ramachandra L.S.
303 Strength of Fixed Ended Circular, Square, and Flat Oval Hollow LDSS Slender 1219
Columns Under Axial Compression
Sachidananda K., Singh K. D.
304 Effect of Cross-Sectional Shape on Compressive Strength of LDSS Stub Columns 1223
Brahma J., Singh T.G., and Singh. K. D.
305 Static and Free Vibration Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates: Mechanical, Thermal 1227
and Hygrothermal Loading
Dhinde M. and Desai Y.M
306 Study of Indentation of an Elastic Layer Substrate by a Rigid Wedge Indenter Under 1231
Plane Strain Conditions
Karuriya A.N. and Bhandakkar T.K.
308 Effect of Damping on the Dynamic Response of a Beam With Non-Ideal Boundary 1239
Supports
Mahapatra Kavikant, Panigrahi S.K. and Gaur Abhishek
xxv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
309 Retrofitting and Rehabilitation of Elevated Water Tank After Investigation of 1244
Corrosion Status by Using Nondestructive Techniques
Nayak C.B. and Thakare S.B.
310 Validation of Theoretical Stress Concentration Factor for Varying Notched Geometries 1248
Using FEA
Khatawate V.H., Dharap M.A. and Moorthy R.I.K.
311 Force Based Linear Static Analysis of 2-D Curved Tapered Timoshenko Beam 1252
Elements
Rajapakse R.M.C.M., Wijesundar K.K. and Dissanayake P.B.R.
312 Effect of Cover to Longitudinal Reinforcement of Square RC Column for Axially 1256
Compression Testing.
Narule G. and Bambole A.N.
313 Non Local Analysis of Laminated Plates using Third Order Shear Deformation Theory 1260
Considering Surface Stress Effects
Raghu P. and Rajagopal A.
315 Growth of Yield Front in Statically Indeterminate Bar by Using Domain 1268
Decomposition Method
Nayak P. and Saha K.N.
316 Behaviour of RC Shear Wall With and Without Opening Using Concealed Bracing 1272
Mahadik S. N. and Bhagat S. R.
317 Design and Testing of Compressor Mapping Test Cell for High Horse Power 1276
Turbocharger
Kumbhalkar S. and Khairnar H.P.
318 Acceptable External Loads on Nozzle of a Pressure Vessel by Non-Linear Finite 1280
Element Method
Pranitha Prabhakaran and Jadhav P.A.
319 Simplified Approach for Seismic Analysis of Base Isolated Multi-Storeyed Structure 1284
Nagender T., Parulekar Y. M. and Reddy G .R.
321 Large Deflection Analysis of Leaf Spring Under Three Point Bending 1291
Ghuku S. and Saha K.N.
xxvi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
322 Linear Static Analysis of a Structural Member by Finite Element Method 1295
Bandgar S. and Kshirsagar S. D.
324 Semi-Analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending 1303
Sawarkar S., Pendhari S. and Desai Y. M.
326 Inverse Problem on a Timoshenko Beam Using Time Domain Spectral Finite Element 1312
Method
Kulkarni R.B., Gopalakrishnan S. and Trikha M.
328 Inspection of Adhesively Bonded Lap Joints Using Spectral Finite Element Method 1319
Paunikar S. and Gopalakrishnan S.
330 Simulation of Quarter Car Model for the Shock Absorber Compliance with Rubber 1327
Bush and Washers
Barethiye V., Pohit G. and Mitra A.
332 Numerical Investigation into Effect of Cell Size of Honeycomb Core on the Free 1335
Vibration Behaviour of Polymer Nano-Composite Sandwich Beams
Royal Madan, Rajesh Kumar Bhushan, Santosh Kumar Sahu and Rama Sreekanth P.S.
333 A FE Model for Dynamic Behavior of a Functionally Graded Rotor-Bearing System 1339
Debabrata G., Debabrata C. and Rajiv T.
xxvii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
334 Seismic Behavior of LNG Tank Isolated by Double Variable Curvature Friction 1343
Pendulum System
Patel F.V., Soni D.P. and Chauhan N.H.
335 Seismic Response of Short-Period Buildings With Special Reference to Response 1347
Reduction Factor
Pingale O., Madhekar S.N. and Pore S.M.
336 Dynamic Behaviour of Communication Antenna for Space Missions: Modeling and 1351
Simulation
Jataraman S., Trikha M., Somashekar V.N., Kamesh D, Venkatesh K. and Ravindra M.
337 Nonlinear Analysis of Active Vibration Absorber With Self Sensing and Actuating 1355
PZT Actuator by Acceleration Feedback
Mohanty S. and Dwivedy S K
339 Use of Top Weak Storey of Multistoreyed Building as a Tuned Mass Damper for 1363
Seismic Response Mitigation
Deshmukh S., Ghadage J., Gunjal K., Hoke A., Kawle D. and Madhekar S.
340 Seismic Vibration Control for 20-Story Non-Linear Benchmark Building: A State-of- 1367
The-Art Review
Moyade R. and Madhekar S.
341 Optimization of Passive Vehicle Suspension System by Genetic Algorithm Using 1371
Matlab/Simulink
Mitra A C , Desai G.J., Patwardhan S.R. , Shirke P.H., Kurne W. M. H. and Banerjee
N.
345 Free Vibration Analysis of Isotropic Moderately Thick Spherical and Conical Shell 1387
Panels Using a Four Node Discrete Kirchhoff Quadrilateral Flat Shell Element.
Kulkarni S.D., Chopade V.S , Badhe A.S. and Dagade V.A.
xxviii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
346 Free Vibration Analysis of Functionally Graded Sandwich Plates Using Four Node 1391
Discrete Kirchhoff Quadrilateral Element Based on Reddy'S Third Order Shear
Deformation Theory.
Deshpande G.A. and Kulkarni S.D.
349 Flow Induced Vibration Design of Heat Exchanger Tubes Subject to Cross Flow 1403
Patil G.V., Dharap M.A., Moorthy R. I. K. and Khot T. K.
350 Dynamics of a 2D Curved Cantilever Timoshenko Beam Element Using Force Based 1407
Finite Element Formulation
Kasun Dharmasiri, Wijesundara K.K., Dammika A.J. and Dissanayake P.B.R.
352 Influence of the Poisons Ratio on the Eigen Values of PZT Discs for Uniaxially Loaded 1415
Energy Harvesters
Viswanath K. Allamraju and Srikanth K.
354 Application of Energy Harvester for Controlling the Propeller Induced Vibration and 1422
Generating the Electricity
Viswanath K Allamraju and Srikanth K.
356 Evaluate the Performance of Quarter Car Suspension System With Nonlinear 1431
Hysteresis Magnetorheological Damper
Hemanth K., Lohit S. K., Hemantha Kumar and Gangadharan K. V.
357 Dynamic Modeling & Simulation of Dual Clutch Transmission With Mechatronics 1435
Unit
Deotarey Rahul
358 Analysis of Natural Frequencies and Loss Factors in Sandwich Composite Plates With 1438
Magnetorheological or Electrorheological Elastomer Core
Gopal K.V.N., Sharma P., and Garg M.
xxix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
359 Seismic Risk and Loss Assessment of Open Ground Storey RC Structures 1442
Gautham A. K. and Gopikrishna
360 Vibrational Analysis and Detection Crack Parameter in Clamped-Clamped Beam 1446
Using Cascade Artificial Neural Network
Banerjee A. and Pohit G.
363 Fault Diagnosis of Anti Friction Bearing Using Daubechies Wavelet 1458
Patil Sangram S. and Phalle V.M.
365 Response of an Elastic Plate With a Constrained Interior Point Under the Effect of 1466
Grazing Sound
Swapnil Sapkale,.Sucheendran M. M. and Shakti Gupta
367 Dynamic Characteristics of Retrofitted RC Frame Building with Yielding Type X- 1470
Shaped Metallic Elasto-Plastic Damper
Madheswaran C.K., Prakashvel J., Sathishkumar K. and Ashmimonisha I.
368 Application of Friction Dampers for Improving the Seismic Performance of Structures: 1474
An Overview
Pednekar S.C., Iwalekar A.A. and Bambole A.N.
369 Earthquake Analysis Of Concrete Gravity Dams: Some Recent Development 1479
Maity D. and Mandal A.
370 Free Vibration Finite Element Analysis of a Circular Cylindrical Shell 1483
Rawat A., Matsagar V. and Nagpal A.K.
xxx
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: We have been developing a parallel partitioned simulation system to solve large
scale real world’s coupled problems. This paper describes some key technologies of the
system, and demonstrates its practical performance and effectiveness through solving
various kinds of real world’s problems.
Keywords: Coupled analysis; Partitioned approach; Parallel computing; FSI.
_______________________________
______________________
4
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: An accurate analytical solution for predicting the free edge effects in
sandwich laminates under tension, bending and twisting loading is presented. The
recently developed mixed-field multiterm extended Kantorovich method (MMEKM)
has been used to obtain the solution of the governing equations, which are developed
using the Reissner-type variational principle. The present mixed-field approach
enables the exact and point-wise satisfaction of traction-free edge and interlaminar
continuity conditions for displacements and stresses. The numerical results presented
for different loadings and lay-up show rapid convergence of the iterative series
solution. The comparison of the present results with the detailed FE solution shows
good agreement. The present solution captures the singularity of stresses in the free
edge region by showing the rise in its peak magnitude with the number of terms in the
solution. The presented accurate 3D elasticity based solution can act as a useful
benchmark for assessing the accuracy of solutions obtained from other approximate
methods.
________________________________
Abstract: The objective of the paper is to present the advanced methodologies for
fracture analysis and damage tolerant evaluation of metallic structural components
for efficient and safe design of structural systems meeting the functional criteria. An
efficient and novel Numerically Integrated-Modified Virtual Crack Closure Integral
(NI-MVCCI) technique has been demonstrated for 4-noded bilinear, 8-noded (regular
& quarter-point), 9-noded Lagrangian and 12-noded cubic isoparametric family of
finite elements. Another advanced numerical method, Extended Finite Element
Method (XFEM) for fracture analysis of cracked stiffened panels has been discussed.
Methodologies for crack growth and remaining life assessment of structural
components under constant and variable amplitude loading have been presented.
Brief description on residual strength evaluation has been provided. Numerical
studies on fracture analysis to compute Strain Energy Release Rate (SERR), G and
stress intensity factor (SIF) and remaining life assessment and residual strength
evaluation have been conducted and the results are compared with the respective
analytical/experimental results.
Keywords: Crack closure; Linear elastic fracture mechanics; Stress intensity
factor; Strain energy release rate; Damage tolerant design;
Remaining life; Residual strength; Extended finite element method
_____________________________
12
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: nageshiyer@acsir.res.in
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
___________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: Nimal.Rajapakse@carleton.ca 13
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper deals with the response studies of piezoelectric sandwich
composites by the energy method. The equation of motion is deduced from the
principles of minimum potential energy. To do this displacement and electrical fields
are required as a priori. Hence, the above said field functions are described by Non-
Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) in two and three dimensional domains and
applied against static and free vibration analyses of thin and very thick sandwich plates
and piezoelectric prismatic bar. Nonlinear variation of the electric potential is
considered through the thickness and modelled by a discrete layer-wise linear scheme.
The present formulation is successfully validated against a finite element code.
__________________________________
Abstract: A physically based continuum plasticity model for metals from the
consideration of non-equilibrium thermodynamics is presented. The modeling is
accomplished in a two-temperature framework that appears naturally by considering
the thermodynamic system to be composed of two weakly interacting subsystems,
namely the kinetic vibrational and configurational subsystems. While the atomic
vibrations of plastically deforming metals form the kinetic vibrational subsystem,
much slower degrees of freedom in terms of the motion of defects constitute the
configurational subsystem. Both subsystems assume their own temperatures and fall
out of equilibrium from each other because of the externally imposed driving.
Dislocation density characterising the configurational subsystem is considered to be
the state variable for the present development. The continuum model accommodates
finite deformation and describes plastic deformation in a yield-free framework via a
microforce balance along with the conventional macroforce balance.
Keywords: Metal viscoplasticity; Non-equilibrium thermodynamics; Two-
temperature framework; Dislocation density
_______________________________
_________________________________
_______________________________
the bone. To analyze the structures of discussed physical principles associated with
complicated geometry and materials which forced oscillations to determine its impact on
are not homogeneous, FEA is used. FEA is vibration exercises. (Gupta and Tse, 2014)
primarily based on a computer interface. For studied about the vulnerability of the femur
modelling of the complicated shapes and bone to fracture as it is the highest load
inhomogeneous material properties, FEA is carrying bone of the human body.
accepted widely and considered as an
alternative tool in the field of Biomechanics. VIBRATIONAL ANALYSIS OF
The femur is considered as the largest and FEMUR
longest bone of the human skeletal system. It For analyzing various characteristics of the
is also called as the thigh bone. The hip joint femur bone, finite element modelling is
is formed by the femur in connection with the considered as the best tool as it exactly
pelvis at the proximal end and knee joint is approximates the result. The accuracy of
formed in connection with the tibia at the finite element modelling depends mostly on
distal end. The highest percentage of the the consideration of geometry, loading
weight of the body is taken by the femur; conditions and boundary conditions. The
hence it carries the maximum chances of geometry of femur bone varies from person
bone fracture. Some previously available to person. Practically the bones are
literature on vibrational behaviour of femur anisotropic and nonlinear materials. But for
bone can be cited as follows. the ease of analysis, they are taken as
Koch (1917) analyzed the structural isotropic and linear in nature. Their
mechanics of the femur and examined properties are also taken as elastic for
various loads applied to the femur and the analysis.
response of the femur to these loads. Toridis The various properties of the femur bone
(1969) studied about determination of are approximated as below:
mechanical stresses developed in the femur
Material density ρ = 866 Kg/m3
under various loading conditions. Piotrowski
and Wilcox (1971) developed a computer Poisson’s ratio γ = 0.4
operated program for the calculation of Young’s modulus E = 7.585 GPa
torsional and bending stresses developed in
the femur. (Rybicki, Simonen and Weis, For restriction of motion created by the
1972) used a mathematical model to examine adjacent bones during normal sitting or
the effects of muscle forces on the femur and standing, a fixed-fixed boundary condition is
the stresses thus developed (Khalil, Viano taken for the analysis at both knee joint and
and Taber, 1981) identified the resonant hip joint. In order obtain the responses of the
frequencies and mode shapes of the femur by femur, modal analysis is performed by finite
applying both analytical and experimental element tools. The governing equation of
methods. (Gdoutos, Raftopoulos and Baril, dynamic response is given as follows:
1982) critically reviewed about the M x C x K x 0 (1)
mechanical behavior of human femur.
(Stenfelt, Hakansson and Tjellstrom, 2000) Where [M] = Mass Matrix
examined about patterns of vibration in bone [C]= Damping Coefficient matrix
conducted sound using a skull added with
[K]= Stiffness matrix
damping material. (Rittweger, 2010)
23
Vibrational Characteristics of Femur Bone
REFERENCES
Gdoutos E E Raftopoulos D D and Baril J D
1982 A critical review of the
24
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The fixation of fracture of a bone can be done by using different implants
such as screws, plates and nails. The bone in human body is usually exposed to axial
compressive load, torsional load (Twisting moment) and bending load. Among these
three types of loadings, axial compressive force and torsional load are being exerted
Therefore the objective of this research work is to deduce the stability against axial
compressive, torsional load and combination of both the loads following
instrumentation of implants such as plate and screws (Only screws or plate with
screws). Over and above, the stresses due to the axial compressive force and twisting
moment are usually seen to play in bones exposed more for movements (as seen in
upper limb) as lower limb is required for stability. So the objective of this work is to
find out the effectiveness of screw with plate and screw following fracture fixation in
consideration to axial and torsional loading. Plate and screws are commonly used in
upper limb fracture fixation where emphasis is laid down on mobility. From the Finite
Element Analysis (FEA) of the bone, plate, screw model (using MIMICS & Solid
Works) and theoretical analysis, it is observed that the screw and plate arrangement
provides maximum resistance to the fracture site for maintaining stability following
compression of the fracture site. The deformations and the magnitude of stress were
also found to be less in comparison to the independent screw arrangements for
fracture fixation.
Keywords: Screw; plate; stability; fracture; FEA; theoretical.
finite element solid model [Zhang et al., that 3-D finite element solid model of femurs
2013] of femurs in partial has been analyzed In partial volume is more close to the real
by exposing the volume using the CT scan bone and fit for FEA when compared to the
data and conducted the finite element analysis results by rendering the whole volume. A
(FEA) considering different materials for parametric study [Haase and Rouhi, 2013]
cortical bone, cancellous bone and pulp have been performed based on finite element
cavity. The compressive stress was found to analysis on the bone-screw models to
be in the medial surface of the femur i.e. in evaluate the stress shielding of the stimuli by
the calcar femorale. They have concluded comparing the stress and strain.
energy density (SED). It has been found from Theoretical Analysis
the study that, stress and SED have been The stress and strain developed in the bone
transferred between the bone and screw can be formulated considering the internal
which can be attributed to the stimuli transfer energy as function [Ciarlet and Ayache,
parameters. However, it has been observed 2004]. The stress matrix has been presented
that transfer of both stimuli has been in equation (1), where the components are the
increased with the screw with angle thread combination of normal stresses and shear
and small diameter and transfer of stress has stresses acting along the X, Y and Z
been increased with the reduction of the directions.
screw's elastic modulus. In both the cases
σ = xx , yy , zz , xy , xz , yz
t
SED has been found to decrease which [1]
signifies that, the bone-screw model analysis
requires the proper assessment of SED. A The strain and the external stress are related
comprehensive study of the different fixation as per the equation (2) exhibiting a linear
techniques [Taljanovic et al., 2003] have been elastic model.
[2]
performed and from the study, it has been σ=Ce
observed that the internal and external Considering the equilibrium conditions of the
fixators are basically used for bone fracture system under consideration and following
healing. Even bone grafts are also adopted by laid down boundary conditions, the
surgeons for stabilization of fractured bone. equilibrium equations can be described as;
MATERIALS AND METHODS xx xx xx [3.1]
Fx 0
x x x
The different materials involved in the
xy yy yz [3.2]
analysis are bone and stainless steel. The Fy 0
x y z
material properties for the bone has been
xz yz zz
considered with respect to the grey scale Fz 0 [3.3]
x y z
value obtained from MIMICS software. For Through finite element method, the stiffness
stainless steel the material properties such as and the force can be related as per the
density, Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio equation (4).
are considered as 7750 kg/m3, 193 GPa and
K U F
0.31 respectively. [4]
Where, U is the vector containing the
The bone and implant assembled models are displacement of the pth node and expressed as
analyzed using two methods such as equation (5).
Theoretical analysis and Finite element
analysis (FEA). U= u 1, x , u u
1, y , u u u
1, z , .................... n, x, n, y, n, z t [5]
26
Analysis of Implants used for Stabilization of Fractured Bone
27
Dash et al.
The dental implant placed into the bone well as geometry [Frisardi et al., 2012].
serves as an anchor for the prosthetic device Cortical Bone is outer shell of bone is 2mm
as shown in Figure.1 and it is one of the thick and inner bone is called as cancelleus
better preventive maintenance procedures in bone. The elastic material properties of the
dentistry. Bone is a complex anisotropic, cancellous and cortical bones have used in
porous, viscoelastic and composite. It is also the study are shown in Table 1.
non homogeneous in material properties as
Table 1. Elastic Material properties
Materials Modulus of elasticity Poisson's ratio
Ex = Ey = 12600, Ez = 19400 µ xy = 0.3, µ xz = µ yz = 0.253
Cortical Bone
Gxy = 4850, Gxz = Gyz = 5700 µ yx = 0.3, µ zy = µ zx= 0.39
Ex = Ez = 1148, Ey = 210 µ xy = 0.055, µ xz = 0.322, µ yz = 0.010
Cancellous Bone
Gxz = 434, Gxy = Gyz = 68 µ yx = 0.010, µ zy = 0.055, µ zx= 0.322
Twist Drill Tool, E = 104000 G = 38806 0.34
Titanium Ti- 6al-4V
31
Mahajan and Kadam
32
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper, the effect of heat and mass transfer on blood flow through
a stenosed artery subject to the action of external magnetic field is investigated.
Effects of viscosity variation and variable hematocrit at the arterial wall have been
duly taken care of in the study. Governing equations have been modeled by taking
blood as incompressible magneto hydrodynamic (MHD) Newtonian fluid. The
highly nonlinear momentum equations are simplified under the assumption of mild
stenosis. Homotopy analysis method (HAM) is used to solve nonlinear equations of
momentum, temperature and concentration profile. The effects of Hartmann
number, variable hematocrit parameter on velocity, temperature and concentration
have been analyzed with the help of graphs.
Keywords: Newtonian Fluid; Incompressible fluid; Stenosis; Magneto hydro
dynamical fluid (MHD); Hematocrit; Homotopy analysis method
(HAM).
𝑟 𝑚
where h(r)=H[1-� � ].
𝑅0
∂p
= 0, (3)
∂r
∂p 1 ∂ ∂w 1
= [r ( )] + 𝑎2 [( − (𝑚 +
∂z r ∂r ∂r 𝑟
𝑚−1 ∂w 1 ∂ ∂w
1)𝑟 ) + (1 − r m ) ( )]
∂r r ∂r ∂r
1 1−𝑟 𝑚
–[(M2 + ) +𝑎2 ( )]w (4)
Z 𝑍
Figure 2(b). Velocity variation with
1 ∂ ∂θ ∂w 2 change in Magnetic field M
[r ( )] +𝐸𝑐 𝑃𝑟 � � =0(5)
r ∂r ∂r ∂r
1 1 ∂ ∂σ 1 ∂ ∂θ
[ (r ( ))] + 𝑆𝑟 [ (r ( ))] =0(6)
Sc r ∂r ∂r r ∂r ∂r
where
34
Effects of Heat and Mass Transfer on MHD Flow of Blood through an Artery with Stenosis Having
Variable Viscosity
REFERENCES
Liao S J1995 An approximate solution
technique not depending on small
parameters a special example
International Journal of Nonlinear
Figure 4. Variation in temperature with Mechanics 30(3) 371-380.
change in porosity parameter Z
Mekheimer Kh S EI Kot M A
2008Themicropolar fluid model for
blood flow through a tapered artery
with a stenosis. Acta MechSin 24
637-644.
Nadeem S Akbar Noreen Sher Hayat T
Hendi Awatif A 2011Influence of
heat and mass transfer on Newtonian
biomagnetic fluid of blood flow
through a tapered porous arteries with
a stenosis Journal Transport in
Porous Media 91 81-100.
Sinha A and Mishra J C 2014 MHD flow
of blood through a dually stenosed
artery effects of viscosity, variable
Figure 5. Variation in concentration hematocrit and velocity-slip The
with change in Schmidt number
Canadian Journal of Chemical
CONCLUSION Engineering 92 23-31.
35
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
37
A Novel Computer Model for Bone’s Adaptation to Mechanical Environment
38
Goyal and Prasad
Table 1: Coefficients of various parameters responsible to predict new bone formation thickness at various locations
of mid section tibia of C57BLJ6 mice in case of cantilever bending at periosteal =-22.8
Para. (1-6) Fx Mx Si Ci R pi 1/ Age
Coeff. (1-6) 209355 20217 -4.5 9.3 0.6 -88
Para. (7-12) CRT F TCE NLTE M xCi M y Ci
Coeff. (7-12) 0.7 -0.34 0.011 -0.001 -338109 -411995
Para. (13-18) Si Ci Si Rpi Ci Rpi Fx M y Ci M x M y Ci M x Si Ci
Coeff. (13-18) -220 0.05 0.6 1426600 137739 18251
Para. (19-24) M y Si Ci M y Ci Rpi Si Ci Rpi Fx Rpi Fx M y Si Ci M xCRT
Coeff. (19-24) 22190 -0.2 -9 0.4 66 0.04
Para. (25-30) Si / Age Si CRT Si NLTE C Rpi i
2
FxC Rpi i
2
Rpi / Age
Coeff. (25-30) 17 0.1 -0.0003 4.7 -14.5 1.2
Para. (31-36) Rpi F Si Ci / Age Rpi Ci / Age Fx Rpi Ci / Age M x SiCi / Age Rpi Si Ci / Age
Coeff. (31-36) 0.005 889 -4 11 291 4
Para. (37-42) CRTSi Ci CRTCi Rpi CRTSi Ci Rpi FM x Si Ci FM y Ci Rpi TCESi Ci
Coeff. (37-42) 37 0.003 0.3 0.1 -0.002 0.9
Para. (43-48) TCESi Ci Rpi NLTEM xCi NLTESi Ci NLTECi Rpi NLTEFx M y Ci NLTEFxCi Rpi
Coeff. (43-48) 0.006 -0.0025 -0.04 -0.00015 -0.007 0.0003
Para. (49-54) NLTEM x SiCi NLTESi Ci Rpi M y Si C i
2
M y SiCi Rpi M x M C 2
y i
2
Si2Ci Rpi
Coeff. (49-54) 0.008 -0.0007 -33 1.3 5 -0.09
Para. (55-60)
Si C Rpi
i
2
M x M y Si C i
2
M y S C i
2
i
2
S C Rpi
i
2
i
2
Si Ci R 2
pi
M x M y SiCi Rpi
Coeff. (55-60) 1.3 -4.4 12 -0.6 0.03 0.05
Para. (61-66)
M y S Ci Rpi
i
2
M y Si Ci R 2
pi S Ci R
i
2 2
pi M x M y C Rpi i
2
M y Si C Rpi i
2
M y Ci2 Rp2i
Coeff. (61-66) -0.008 -0.005 0.0014 -0.11 0.3 0.0115
Para. (67-72)
Si C R i
2 2
pi M x M Si C
2
y i
2
M SiC Rpi
2
y i
2
M y S C R i
2
i
2 2
pi M y Si C R i
2 2
pi Ci2
Coeff. (67-72) -0.02 -0.1 -0.08 -0.13 0.002 -136
Para. (73-78)
( M y Ci ) 2
( Si Rpi ) 2
(Ci Rpi ) 2
(M x M y Ci ) 2
(M y Ci Rpi ) 2
(SiCi Rpi )2
Coeff. (73-78) 26 -0.005 -0.04 0.3 -0.001 0.006
39
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
In Eq. 1, ε0, ν0 μ0, k and l are Zysset-Curnier QUANT3D [Ketchman and Ryan, 2004].
(ZC) model constants, ρ is the volume These values are put in Eq. 1 to compute the
fraction and mi is the eigenvalues of the compliance matrix of all samples. A
fabric tensor. ZC constant can be evaluated comparison for stiffness components
using the linear regression analysis over a obtained from FE and ZC model is shown in
number of sample data. figure 1.
The main aim of this paper is to present the Bounds for each sample have been evaluated
two different methods for finding out the using the anisotropic composite materials
anisotropic elastic behaviour of trabecular bounds relations [Cowin et al., 1999; Yoon et
bone. Both the methods are applicable to any al., 2002] to compute the effective properties
random oriented porous media (e.g. snow). (isotropic effective Young’s moduli and
First method is finite element method based isotropic effective Poisson’s ratio) of each
and is commonly used to find anisotropic sample. RVE size for sample 1185 and sub-
elastic behaviour of porous materials. samples (1185_1 to 1185_8) have been
Whereas the second method is Zysset- predicted considering isotropic effective
Curnier model based which is microstructure Young’s moduli (Eeff) and isotropic effective
based. Poisson’s ratio (νeff) as a deciding parameter.
Table 1. µ-CT image details of five
SAMPLE DETAILS AND FEA
different trabecular bone samples.
FE simulation on image based finite element Sample Resolution Cubic size Cube side
models built from μ-CT images is carried out (µm) (pixels) length
on 29 trabecular bone samples. These 29 (mm)
samples are extracted from 5 samples out of 1003 59.9 301 16.77
which three are bigger samples (1003, 1185 1224 30.0 301 8.38
and 1289) that are partitioned into eight parts 1185 59.9 301 16.77
making the physical dimension equivalent to 1122 30.0 301 8.38
other two samples (1122 and 1224) making a 1289 59.9 301 16.77
total 29 samples (8.38 mm). Micro-CT details Table 2. ZC model constant
of 5 samples is shown in table 1.
ZC parameters
Compliance matrix for each sample is Sample
ε0 ν0 µ0 k l
computed using the homogenization All 0.85 0.18 0.29 2.20 -0.91
technique. Periodicity mixed uniform
boundary condition [Pahr and Zysset, 2008]
are imposed on all μFE models for the
computation of compliance tensor. The
Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio of
trabeculae are assumed to be 1 GPa and 0.22
respectively.
effective property vs. volume (%) is drawn as has the knowledge of microstructural
shown in figure 2 and figure 3 to predict the parameters.
correct RVE size. From figure 2 effective RVE size is within the range as given in
property are getting converge at 40% of the previous literature (3-5 mm of side length)
cubic volume size. for trabecular bone.
Appendix I
A1
CONCLUSION
ZC model stiffness components are
comparable with the FE based stiffness
components with a coefficient of
determination 0.7792. ZC model is
morphology based and therefore this REFFERENCE
approach can well predict the anisotropy of a
porous material. This approach can be Cowin Stephen C 1985 The relationship
applied to any porous random media, if one between the elasticity tensor and the
42
Singh et al.
43
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present work an analysis has been made on internal fixation plates.
For analysis purpose, bone, screws and metal plates are chosen. Finite Element
analysis is made using ANSYS software. Parametric and validation models are
considered and their results are compared. The models discussed reveals insight into
the nature of applied fixation plates. Axial compressive loading are stable in nature
but may cause stress shielding in bones and hence resulted in bone loss, screw tear
and fixation failure. Parametric study, gives the possibility to reduce the problem by
decreasing the plate thickness and angle.
Keywords: Internal Fixation; Bone; Cantilever; Stress
INTRODUCTION
METHODOLOGY
Internal fixation is a process that involves Present study is done with finite element
surgical implementation of implants for the software ANSYS. Analysis is done on stress
purpose of repairing a bone. Internal fixators shielding of two bone plate models, one is
include bone, screws and metal plates. Metal parametric model and other one is validation
plates for internal fixation of bones are being
model. Validation model deals with a range
used for more than 100 years. Although
of static loading conditions on a three
initial shortcomings such as corrosion and
dimensional model of a self-compressing
insufficient strength have been overcome,
stainless steel plate applied to an Plexiglas
more recent designs have not solved all
tube which represents of bone post-union.
problems. It is the goal of researcher to Subsequent parametric models involve the
develop a plate that accelerates fracture changes in plate thickness, position of
healing while not interfering with bone
screws, and angle of coverage of plate over
physiology [Rouhi G., 2006].
the bone surface.
The introduction of rigid plates had by far the
Initial observations reveal that with the
greatest impact on plate fixation of fractures.
increase in thickness of plate and the angle of
It has been suggested scientifically that bone
coverage of plate over the bone surface
loss is mainly caused by stress shielding but
reduces the stresses that develop on the
not with the interference with the cortical
underlying bone. Comparison is made
perfusion secondary to bone plate contact. In
between two models one is the ideal case and
internal fixation of bone the bone plates are
the other represents a practical situation i.e.
fastened to the bone on its tensile surface.
fixed bone model and control bone model.
The main problem in the internal fixation of
The fixed bone model is modelled as the
bone is the difference in stiffness of plate and
plate is rigidly fixed to the surface of the
bone which causes alteration in normal
bone this result in the elimination of
loading conditions of the bone [1985-2006].
separation of plate and the bone. This also
allows the transfer of normal and shear
stresses from the plate to the bone and vice r0 is the distance from neutral axis when a
versa. Under different loading conditions the force F is applied Practically the bone is not
Von Mises stresses are observed in each case rigidly fixed to the surface of the bone but
as it is one of main failure criteria in any instead it is fixed with screws. A model
material [Cheal et al. 1983]. Three types of representing this situation is made in and is
loading conditions are used for the fixed plate being analyzed. The stainless steel plate is
model; fixed to the bone surface with four titanium
1. The axial stress which acts along the axis screws. There is also change in the
of the bone. parameters the thickness of the plate is
changed from 3 to 4.5 mm and the angle of
2. The bending moment that place in the coverage is also changed from 60 to 90
first case. degrees. A four-point bending moment
3. Eccentric force which is similar to the produces high value of stress in the model, as
axial force but the axial of loading is not symmetry exists in the model only one-half
along the central axis of the bone. of the models are used for the analysis.
REFERENCES
Cheal E J Hayes W C White A A 1985. Stress
analysis of a compression plate
fixation system and its effects on
long bone remodelling Journal of
Biomechanics 18(2) 141-150
Cheal E J Hayes W C White A A Perren S M
Figure 4 Effect of applied bending 1983. Stress analysis of a simplified
moment (a) Equivalent strain distribution compression plate fixation system for
and (b) Equivalent Stress distribution fractured bones Computers and
Structures 17(5/6) 845-855
stresses due to plate and screw tensions
requires complex models such a model is Perren S M 2002. Review Article: Evolution
designed in ANSYS to analyze the stresses. of the internal fixation of long bone
fractures Journal of Bone and Joint
The application of axial stress results in Surgery 84-B(8) 1093-1100
bending moment of the composite fixed bone Rouhi G 2006. Theoretical aspects of bone
model and its magnitude is maximum at the remodelling and resorption processes:
fracture plane. It was observed that the PhD Thesis, University of Calgary,
application of eccentric axial stress results in
2006.
increase of equivalent stress at the outer edge
of bone contact region and its value is not
significant if a bending moment is applied.
However, all the three loading conditions
result in the increased value of stresses at the
fracture site.
46
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Bangladesh has a very high road accident fatality rate with official figures
indicating more than 60 deaths per 10,000 motor vehicles. Everyday around eight
persons die in road accidents. The actual rate of fatality is likely to be even higher. As
a result, it is a matter of concern to deal with the after effects of accidents. Without
understanding the biomechanics of a human body that falls victim to an accident, it’s
difficult to take proper actions to mitigate the effect. This paper focuses on the
accidental injury & Biomechanics analysis with a view to increase health safety.
Keywords: Accident; Biomechanics; Fatality.
INTRODUCTION
The problems related to the accident
reporting system and the data derived from it,
as reported by Quium (1995), have not been
resolved and official statistics are prone to
under reporting. The number of accidents has
increased by 43% between 1982 and 2000,
while the number of fatalities has increased
by around 400% within the same period
[Louis Burger, 2005]. In Dhaka City, 15 to Figure 1. Stress Strain curve of a human
20% of accidents involve minibuses, cars or bone
buses. In Bangladesh as a whole, buses and
trucks are each involved in more than 20% of THE MECHANISM OF WHIPLASH
accidents [Maniruzzaman and Raktim Mitra] INJURIES
So it’s important to understand the after In a normal human’s neck, the cervical spine
effects and biomechanics of a human body has a lordotic shape [Galasko et al., 1993] In
during an accident. Necessary actions can be rear-end collisions, the passenger seat moves
taken by understanding the phenomena. towards the impact, and the back part of the
seat applies force to the body of the
ACCIDENT AND BIOMECHANICS
passenger. As the seat pushes the result of
When an accident occurs & a person falls to this force the lower part of the neck moves in
victim, shockwaves occur in the body & the same direction. At the moment of the
cause stress and strain in the organ. If the impact, the lordotic shape of the neck
type & size of stress exceed the strength of disappears, and the cervical spine straightens
the tissue, the injury occurs. As the body of the passenger continues to be
pushed, the head moves backwards, and the guideline for Roads transport authority to
extension starts. establish road safety in Bangladesh
49
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper compares the efficiency of tension stiffened softened truss
model (TS-STM) and a nonlinear finite element (FE) model to predict the behaviour
of reinforced concrete (RC) circular columns under torsional loading. Predictions of
the models are calibrated with test data on two circular columns taken from literature.
Overall torque – twist behaviour and average strain in the transverse reinforcements
were parameters for comparison. It is observed that both the models predicted the
overall torsional behaviour of the test specimens reasonably well. However, the peak
twist and post peak behaviour were better captured by the TS-STM. Average strain in
transverse reinforcements predicted by the TS-STM was also closer to the measured
values compared to the FE predictions. On the whole, it can be concluded that, TS-
STM performs better than nonlinear FE model in capturing the overall response of
circular RC columns subjected to torsional loading.
Keywords: Circular RC columns; Torsion; Nonlinear finite element analysis;
Softened truss model.
STRAIN IN REINFORCEMENT
Strain in the transverse reinforcement of
specimen H/D(3)-T/M()-1.32% measured
during experiment is compared with
predicted values as shown in Figure. 3. It was
observed that, TS-STM predicted strain
values are closer to the experimental data
compared to FE predictions.
Figure.3 Strain in transverse
reinforcement
CONCLUSIONS
The FE model developed in this study
efficiently predicts overall torsional response
reinforced concrete circular columns
including the strain in reinforcement.
However, TS-STM was found to outperform
the proposed FE model in regards to accuracy
of prediction. Peak twist and post peak
torsional response was better captured by the
a) H/D(3)-T/M()-1.32% TS-STM. Besides, local behaviour like strain
in transverse reinforcement predicted by TS-
STM showed better correlation with
measured values compared to FE predictions.
On the whole, it may be inferred from this
study that, TS-STM is relatively more
accurate than the proposed FE model in
predicting overall torsional response RC
circular columns.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This analytical work is carried out as part of
the project funded by SERB, Department of
b) H/D(6)-T/M()-0.73%) Science and Technology, India. Their
financial support is gratefully acknowledged.
Figure.2.Overall torque - twist
Experimental data used in this study was
behaviour
carried out as a part of a project funded by
NEES-NSF-NEESR, USA, the National
University Transportation Centre, and the
Intelligent Systems Centre of Missouri S&T,
52
Mondal et.al.
USA. Their financial support during the PhD Mondal T G and Prakash S S 2015 Effect of
work of second author is also gratefully Tension Stiffening on the Behavior of
acknowledged. Reinforced Concrete Circular Columns
under Torsion Engineering Structures
REFERENCES Journal Elsevier 92 186-195.
Abaqus Analysis User's Manual 6.11 Prakash S S 2009 Seismic Behavior of RC
Dassault Systèmes Simulia Corporation, Circular Columns under Combined
Providence RI USA. Loading Including Torsion PhD Thesis
Department of Civil Engineering
Hsu T T C 1968 Torsion of Structural Missouri University of Science and
Concrete - Behavior of Reinforced Technology Missouri USA.
Concrete Rectangular Members
Torsion of Structural Concrete SP-18 Zimmermann S 2001 Finite Elemente und
American Concrete Institute Detroit MI. ihreAnwendung auf physikalisch und
geometrischnichtlineareProbleme
Jankowiak T and Lodygowski T 2005 Report TUE-BCO 01. 05. Technische
Identification of Parameters of Universitat Eindhoven Niederlande.
Concrete Damage Plasticity
Constitutive Model Foundations of
Civil and Environmental Engineering 6.
53
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Dome structures are widely used in the field of construction technology
such as nuclear reactors, pressure vehicles, space vehicles, roofs of industrial
buildings, etc. Domestic applications includes domes in mosques, auditorium, igloos,
etc. The dome structure require certain number of openings which are essential for
services like maintenance, ventilation etc. The main aim of this study is to perform
finite element analysis of Spherical Dome with openings under static loading which
result from the self-weight of dome and a concentrated load at the crown to obtain the
most economical size of opening that can be provided at different locations and to
obtain the optimum location (in terms of angle with horizontal) at which an opening
of a particular size can be provided. Equations have been developed for most
economical aspect ratio and optimum angle at which openings should be provided for
various cases of Spherical Dome with 2/4/6 number of openings. Variations in
maximum stress intensity produced in the dome due to increase in aspect ratio and
increase in angle of opening have been shown.
Keywords: Spherical dome; most economical aspect ratio; Optimum location of
openings; Maximum stress intensity; Maximum stress zones;
ANSYS.
55
Analysis of Spherical Dome with Openings Using Finite Element Method
56
Khan et al.
57
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Design of the bridge truss possesses a very high degree of complexity, due
to involvement of large number of parameters. Such design process comprises many
challenges and in order to carry out design, a designer requires knowledge expertise,
capability to take intuitive decisions. To carry out the efficient design, a large
database generated is used interactively with the conventional methods, which in turn
can optimize the design process. The said database comprises of knowledge from
different experts, books, rules etc. An algorithm which uses the knowledge or
database, and carry out the design in similar manner in which an expert, with all the
necessary knowledge is termed as an Expert system. In present work, an Expert
system is developed which aims for the optimum design of the bridge trusses for the
IRC loading.
Keywords: Truss bridge design; Expert system; Artificial Intelligence;
Optimization
ANALYSIS OF TRUSS
Stiffness matrix method is used for the truss
analysis by the. Skyline method is used for
the matrix formation.
OPTIMIZATION OF THE TRUSS The design process has broadly four steps,
MEMBERS conceptual design, preliminary design,
analysis for the dead and live loads, and the
59
Expert System for Bridge Truss Design
final detailed design. Conceptual design knowledge base. The inference can work
consisting of selecting the type of truss, and both forward and backward ways in order to
its configuration in terms of height, number achieve the desired goal. The GUI can plot
of panels etc. The type of bridge is selected the truss configuration, loads, influence line
based on the heuristic and knowledge base. diagrams (Figure.2). The developed Expert
Number of panels are selected based on the system has provision to the user to override
machine experimentation. The preliminary the values suggested by the system. User can
design process is selection of the initial cross alter the design parameters based on his/her
section of the truss members. Expert system judgement, in addition to the suggestions by
initially classifies the members in 4 groups Expert system. A numerical study is carried
viz. bottom chord members, top chord out on a 52 m span truss bridge
member, inclined members, vertical
members. Constant cross section is assumed
as a starting point and subsequently the
optimization is carried out based on the
experimentation study. The minimization
function is as follows
𝑊 = 𝑤 𝑥 ∑(𝑥𝑖𝐿𝑖)
The minimization of the above equation is
subjected to following equations,
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑡 … 𝑗 ∊ 𝑗1
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑐 … 𝑗 ∊ 𝑗1
⃒𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 ⃒ ≤ 𝜎𝑠𝑡𝑟 𝑟
𝑖 = 1,2,3 … . 𝑛
𝐾𝑖 𝐿𝑖
≤ 𝑆𝑖
𝑟𝑖
𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 𝛿𝑎 Figure.3: Tree Diagram for Machine
The relationship between minimum radius of Experimentation
gyration and the area of cross section is
worked out for optimization. W14 section is DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION
used for the reference. It is observed that the The Expert system developed can provide an
piece wise linear regression fit approximates optimum truss design for four types of truss
the minimum radius of gyration. based on the IRC loading. The knowledge is
obtained through machine experimentation.
ARCHITECTURE OF EXPERT
The recommended truss for a particular range
SYSTEM
of the truss is divided into number of spans.
The interactive Expert system is developed in Several design alternatives consisting
the C language. The architecture of the different number of panels and heights
Expert system comprises of Knowledge Base, pertaining to constraints are carried out. The
Parameters, Rules, Control Boards (CB), optimization is carried out subsequently. The
Inference System and GUI. (Figure. 2) The most optimum shape of the truss among the
parameters comprises of main parameters spans is obtained. A linear regression
like length, truss type etc. The rules define between span length and key layout
the conditions. The control blocks are main parameter is established as
building blocks which interact with the
60
Bambole et al.
Abstract: In this paper free vibration analysis is carried out on a simply supported steel
beam of I cross section. Experimentation is carried out on a steel beam of 6m span. The
BDI (Bridge Diagnostics, Inc.) system is used for data acquisition. Accelerometers were
used to catch the vibration response of the beam. The Natural frequency values were
obtained using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm. FE modelling is carried out
using ABAQUS software. Block Lanczos method is used to perform modal analysis.
For theoretical validation the Euler-Bernoulli beam theory is used. The theoretical,
experimental and analytical values are compared. Good agreement between the
theoretically calculated natural frequency, analytical and the experimental natural
frequency is seen after comparison.
Keywords: Natural frequency; Euler-Bernoulli; ABAQUS; Modal analysis; Block
Lanczos
THEORETICAL APPROACH
DIMENSIONS OF BEAM
Flange Width = 50mm
Flange Thickness = 5mm
Beam Height = 100mm
Web Thickness = 4mm
Length of Beam= 6000mm
Figure 2. Frequency Plot from FFT
By using equation (20) the theoretical values
obtained for the first three modes are shown The experimental values obtained for the first
in Table 1. two modes are shown in Table 2.
64
Kamble et al.
Figure 5. Mode 3
Table 3. Analytical Natural Frequency
65
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
incorporates both, transverse shear strain and nonzero linear strains associated with the
transverse normal strain. To implement this displacement field in Eq. (1) are:
theory, a suitable C0 continuous 𝜕𝑢𝑜 𝜕2 𝑤𝑏 𝜕2 𝑤𝑠
εx = −𝑧 + 𝑔(𝑧)
isoparametric finite element with 8 degrees of 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑥 2
2 2
freedom (DOFs) per node is considered to 𝜕𝑣𝑜 𝜕 𝑤𝑏 𝜕 𝑤𝑠
εy = −𝑧 2
+ 𝑔(𝑧)
minimize the computational exercise without 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 2
′ (𝑧)𝑤
affecting the solution accuracy. The material ε𝑧 = 𝑓 𝑠 (2)
properties of functionally graded material 𝜕𝑢𝑜 𝜕𝑣𝑜 𝜕2 𝑤𝑏
𝛾𝑥𝑦 = + − 2𝑧 +
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
plate are assumed to vary continuously 𝜕2 𝑤𝑠
through the thickness of the plate, according 2𝑔(𝑧)
𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
to a power-law distribution of the volume 𝜕𝑤𝑠
𝛾𝑦𝑧 = (𝑔′ (𝑧) + 𝑓(𝑧))
fraction of the constituents. The effect of the 𝜕𝑦
plate parameters such as aspect ratios, side to 𝜕𝑤 𝑠
𝛾𝑥𝑧 = (𝑔′ (𝑧) + 𝑓(𝑧))
thickness ratios, and volume fraction index 𝜕𝑥
on the natural frequencies of FGM plates is It is evident from Eq. (2) that in the present
presented for various boundary conditions. theory both, transverse shear strain and
The comparative and convergence study of transverse normal strain exist which is the
proposed theory is also accomplished with novelty of the present theory. Further
assumption is made to ascertain the Co
the available published results available in
continuity as ϕ x =w b , x ϕ y = w b,y , 𝜃 x = w s , x
R
open literature.
, 𝜃 y = w s,y.
R
68
Gupta and Talha
Highest frequency parameter is seen in the the available exact 3D elasticity solutions.
case of all edges clamped boundary condition The results reflect that the fundamental
(CCCC), whereas, the lowest frequency frequencies decrease with increasing the
parameter is observed for Clamped –Free volume fraction index as well as side-to-
boundary condition (CCFF).
thickness ratios.
Table 2. Frequency parameter ω� for
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with all edges Table 5. Frequency parameter ω
� for
clamped (CCCC) SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Clamped
-Free (CCFF) boundary condition
Volume fraction index ‘n’
b/a a/h Volume fraction index ‘n’
0 0.5 2 10 100 b/a a/h
5 0.7385 0.5089 0.3982 0.3435 0.3225 0 0.5 2 10 100
1 10 0.2314 0.1595 0.1252 0.1082 0.1011 5 0.4325 0.2967 0.2331 0.2023 0.1891
20 0.0647 0.0446 0.0351 0.0303 0.0283 1 10 0.1214 0.0836 0.0657 0.0569 0.0531
5 0.6685 0.4608 0.3602 0.3108 0.2919 20 0.0319 0.0219 0.0173 0.0150 0.0139
√2 10 0.2078 0.1432 0.1124 0.0971 0.0908 5 0.3094 0.2122 0.1666 0.1447 0.1353
20 0.0578 0.0398 0.0313 0.0271 0.0253 √2 10 0.0866 0.0596 0.0468 0.0406 0.0379
20 0.0227 0.0156 0.0123 0.0107 0.0195
Table 3. Frequency parameter ω
� for
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Simply REFERENCES
supported (SSSS) boundary condition
Abrate S 2008 Functionally graded plates
Volume fraction index ‘n’ behave like homogeneous plates
b/a a/h
0 0.5 2 10 100
5 0.4890 0.3359 0.2651 0.2291 0.2138 Composites Part B—Engineering 39
1 10 0.1567 0.1080 0.0849 0.0733 0.0685 151–158.
20 0.0463 0.0319 0.0251 0.0216 0.0202
5 0.3786 0.2605 0.2050 0.1771 0.1655
Ferreira A J M Batra R C Roque C M C Qian
√2 10 0.1164 0.0803 0.0630 0.0544 0.0509 LF Jorge RMN 2006 Natural
20 0.0341 0.0236 0.0185 0.0160 0.0149 frequencies of functionally graded plates
Table 4.Frequency parameter ω
� for by a meshless method Composite
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Simply Structures 75 593–600.
supported –Clamped (SSCC) boundary Gupta A and Talha M 2015 Recent
condition development in modeling and analysis
of functionally graded materials and
Volume fraction index ‘n’
b/a a/h structures Progress in Aerospace Sci.79
0 0.5 2 10 100
5 0.6903 0.4753 0.3719 0.3212 0.3015 1-14.
1 10 0.2130 0.1468 0.1152 0.0996 0.0931
20 0.0589 0.0406 0.0319 0.0276 0.0258
Koizumi M 1997 FGM activities in Japan
5 0.6282 0.4327 0.3383 0.2922 0.2743 Compos Part B 28 1–4.
√2 10 0.1923 0.1325 0.1040 0.0899 0.0840 Talha M and Singh B N 2010 Static
20 0.0529 0.0364 0.0286 0.0248 0.0231
Response and Free Vibration Analysis
CONCLUSION of FGM Plates using Higher Order
Shear Deformation Theory Appl. Math.
In this article, the cosine function based shear Model 34(12) 3991–4011.
deformation theory is proposed for Uymaz B and Aydogdu M 2007 Three-
investigating the free vibration response of dimensional vibration analysis of
FGM plates. This theory account for both the functionally graded plates under various
transverse shear and normal deformations of boundary conditions J. Reinf. Plastic
the plate. Free vibration of FGM plates with Compos.26(18) 1847–1863.
various boundary constraints are carried out Vel S S and Batra R C 2004 Three-
assuming the variation of material properties dimensional exact solution for the
follows power law distribution. The present vibration of functionally graded
rectangular plates J Sound Vibr.272(3)
computational solutions are compared with
703–30.
69
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
performance of the ECC retrofitted masonry depicts the nomenclature and descriptions of
beams. beams used in the study. All beams were
tested under four-point loading and subjected
The objective of the present study is to
to monotonic load till failure. The schematic
analyse the flexural response of clay brick
of 4-point loading arrangement for beam is
masonry beams externally strengthened with
shown in Figure 1.
precast ECC sheet on tension face and/ or
both on tension as well as compression face Table 1.Mix proportion of ECC in Kg/m3
of masonry beams. Moreover, numerical
Super Recr
modelling has been done for validations and Cem Silica Fly-
Water Plastici on
parametric study to predict the effect of span- ent Sand ash
zer Fiber
to-depth ratio using commercial finite 620 620 620 290 8.5 26
element software ABAQUS.
Table 2. Details of beam specimens
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS
Specimen
A total of 7 clay-burnt brick masonry beams Specimen Details
ID
of size 230 mm (width) x 110 mm (depth) Numerically modelled masonry
CB-A
and 860 mm length were cast. The masonry control beam
beams have nine brick units with eight mortar Experimentally tested masonry
CB-E
joints, each of approximately 20 mm control beam
thickness. Out of the 7 beams, 2 beams were Numerically modelled sandwich
SB-A
masonry beam
strengthened on bottom (tension face) with
Experimentally tested sandwich
ECC sheet of 35 mm thickness and 2 beams SB-E
masonry beam
were strengthened on both the compression Numerically modelled tension
TSB-A
and tension faces like sandwich beam with strengthened masonry beam
ECC sheet of 35 mm thickness. The other Experimentally tested tension
TSB-E
three beams acted as control beams (i.e., strengthened beam
unstrengthened). Epoxy was used as bonding
material for strengthening purpose. The mix
proportion of cement mortar used for casting
of masonry beams was 1:3 (cement: sand).
The beams were cured for 28 days before
testing. The five-brick prisms compressive
strength of masonry and the compressive Figure1. Schematic loading arrangement
strength of 70.7 mm cubes of cement mortar
are 2.85 MPa and 21.67 MPa, respectively. NUMERICAL MODELLING
Generally, ECC mix consists of cement,
Numerical modelling was performed using
micro silica sand, fly-ash, water, super
commercial finite element software,
plasticizer, and polymeric fibers to reinforce
ABAQUS (2011). All the parts were created
the mix. Present study used polyester fibers
as a three dimensional (3D) deformable solid
of triangular shape with a trade name Recron
part.The concrete-damaged plasticity model
3s CT-2424 supplied by Reliance, India. The
of ABAQUS was used to model ECC and
mix proportion of ECC is presented in Table
masonry as it precisely accounts the
1. The 28-days compressive strength of the
nonlinear behaviour. This nonlinear material
150 mm ECC cube is 55 MPa. Table 2
71
Experimental and Numerical Simulation of ECC Strengthened Masonry Structures in Flexure
properties reflect the material behaviour experimental result (TSB-E) and shown in
beyond elastic range. The plasticity figure 4. The nature of load versus deflection
parameter such as dilatation angle have been curve is observed to be similar.
taken as 30° and 37° for masonry and ECC,
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
respectively. Solid elements C3D8R, i.e.,
linear 8 nodes iso-parametric three The effect of span-to-depth ratios (L/d) on
dimensional brick elements with reduced the flexural response of strengthened beams
were examined by the numerical modelling
integration were used for masonry and ECC.
using ABAQUS.
The element type COH3D8, i.e., 8 nodes
three dimensional cohesive elements was 12
used for epoxy and cement mortar. The
10
cohesive elements were finely meshed
compared to solid elements. 8
Load (kN)
Num (SB-A)
6
2.5 Exp (SB-E)
4
2 2
Num (CB-A)
Exp (CB-A) 0
1.5
Load (kN)
0 1 2 3 4
Mid-Span Deflection (mm)
1
Figure3. Numerical validation of
0.5 sandwich masonry beam response
0 8
0 0.5 1 1.5 7 Num (TSB-A)
Mid-Span Deflection (mm)
6 Exp (TSB-E)
5
Load (kN)
72
Singh et al.
L/d=4.3
6 L/d=12 tension and/ or compression with precast ECC
strips.
4 i. The numerical responses obtained using
2 ABAQUS closely capture the experimental
responses of ECC strengthened clay-burnt
0
0 1 2 3 brick masonry beam.
Mid-Span Deflection (mm) ii. For a given bonding agent of particular
thickness, the load carrying capacity of
Figure 5. Effect of L/d ratio on flexural sandwich beam is higher in comparison to the
responses of sandwich beams (SB) corresponding tension strengthened beam.
The span-to-depth ratios of the beams were iii. The effect of span- to-depth ratio on the
changed from 4.3 to 12 for sandwich beam flexural response of masonry beam depends
and from 5.4 to 12 for tension strengthened on the type of strengthening. The load
beams. While changing the span-to-depth capacity of tension strengthened as well
ratio, the depth of tension strengthened or sandwich beams decreases while deformation
sandwich beams were kept constant while capacity increases with increase in L/d ratio.
length was varied.As observed from Figure. 5
for sandwich beams the peak load is obtained ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
for the smaller span-to-depth (L/d) ratios, i.e.,
for 4.3 and similar response is observed for This project is a part of Department of
tension strengthened beams also (Figure. 6). Science and Technology (DST), Govt. of
However, the maximum deformation India sponsored research project (No.
capacity with reduced load carrying capacity SR/S3/MERC/0051/2012).The financial
is observed for the larger span to depth ratio support of DST is highly appreciated.
for L/d=12.
REFERENCES
7
6 Dassault Systèmes Simulia Corporation
5
L/d=5.4 2011Abaqus analysis user’s manual 6.11
Load (kN)
74
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
solutions. As per the author’s knowledge, mid-surface of the plate. The plate is
there is no solution exist for an orthotropic subjected to arbitrary boundary conditions
rectangular plate with arbitrary boundary with all the edges having different types of
condition using zig-zag theory. In this support. Transverse deflection and in-plane
paper, a closed-form analytical solution for displacements u x and u y are expressed as
rectangular composite plate with an arbitrary (Kumari and Kapuria, 2011)
boundary condition at all edges is presented
w( x, y, z) w0 ( x, y); (1)
here.
u( x, y, z) u0 ( x, y) zw 0d ( x, y) R k ( z) 0 ( x, y)for zk 1 z zk (2)
THEORETICAL FORMULATION where
Consider a laminated rectangular plate u 0 =[u 0 x u 0 y ]; w0 d =[w 0, x w 0, y ]; 0 =[ 0 x 0 y ]
(Figure 1) of total thickness h, made of L and Rk(z) is 2x2 matrix dependent on
perfectly bonded layers of cross-ply material properties. Using the plate constitute
composite materials. The composite material equation and governing equilibrium equation
is orthotropic with respect to the principal of plate, weak form of governing equations is
material directions x1, x2 and x3, where the expressed as:
plane of symmetry x1-x2 is parallel to the
[( A
a b
u
21 0 x , x A22u0 y , y A24 w0,xx A25 w0, yy A27 0x ,x A2,10 0 y , y N y ) N y
( A33 (u0x , y u0y ,x ) 2 A36 w0,xy A38 0x , y A39 0 y ,x N xy ) N xy
( A83 (u0x , y u0 y ,x ) 2 A86 w0,xy A88 0x , y A89 0 y ,x Pyx ) Pyx (w0, y [w0, y ]) w0, y
( A10,1u0x ,x A10,2u0 y , y A10,4 w0,xx A10,5 w0, yy A10,7 0x ,x A10,10 0 y , y Py ) Py (3)
( A51u0x ,x A52u0 y , y A54 w0,xx A55 w0, yy A57 0x ,x A5,10 0 y , y M y ) M y ( N x, x N xy , y ) u0x
(M xx, xx (Vy M xy , x ), y pz ) w0 ( Pxy , x Py , y Qy ) 0 y (w0,x [w0,x ]) w0,x ( N xy , x N y , y ) u0 y
( Px, x Pyx, y Qx ) 0x ( A11u0 A12u0 A14 w0, A15 w0, A17 0 A1,10 0 N x ) N x
x ,x y,y xx yy x ,x y,y
The additional equations any one of them at time is used for solution as follows:
(M
a b x, x (Vx M xy , y ) 2 A63 (u0x , yy u0 y ,xy ) 4 A66 w0,xyy 2 A68 0x , yy 2 A69 0 y ,xy ) (Vx M xy , y )dydx 0
(M
a b y, y (Vy M xy , x ) 2 A63 (u0x ,xy u0 y ,xx ) 4 A66 w0,xxy 2 A68 0x ,xy 2 A69 0 y ,xx ) (Vy M xy , x )dydx 0
Out of which, one is used as primary variable Depending upon boundary condition, at
and other is calculated after the solution. particular direction (x or y), maximum 6
Total we have 17 equations out of which 16 variables at one edge can be prescribed. For
will be used for obtaining solution. The example along x axis (0, a), maximum 12
boundary variables specified at particular variables can be prescribed, there we can
edge. solve only 12 ODE equation at a time.
u0 n / N n , u0 s / N ns , w0 / (Vn M ns , s )
w0,n / M n , 0 n / Pn , 0 s / Pns
76
Two-Dimensional Static Analysis of Composite Plate Subjected to Arbitrary Boundary Conditions using Extended
Kantorovich Method
In this step, functions fl (1 ) are assumed, for variations fl are arbitrary, the coefficients
77
Kumari et al.
78
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Three-dimensional finite element models have been developed for the
analysis of single-lap single-bolt and double-lap multi-bolt composite joints using
finite element code ABAQUS. Solid brick element has been used to model the joints.
The present finite element model has been validated by comparing the load-
displacement behaviour and the surface strains with numerical and experimental
results available in literatures. The effects of element types and variation in mesh
density have been studied. The effect of including the grip area has also been studied.
A parametric study has been performed considering different values of bolt torque in
each bolt of the double-lap multi-bolt composite joint.
In this paper, 3D finite element models have have been defined, namely, (1) between
been developed for the analysis of laminated laminated plates, (2) between bolt and plate
composite bolted joints. Solid brick element holes, (3) between bolt and washer holes, (4)
available in finite element code ABAQUS between laminate and washers and (5)
has been used to model the joints. The effects between washers and bolt head/nut.The bolt
of element types and variation in mesh pre-load has been incorporated using the
density have been studied. The effect of BOLT LOAD option available in ABAQUS.
including the grip area has also been studied.
A parametric study has been performed RESULTS
considering different values of bolt torque in Joint stiffness, out-of-plane displacement,
each bolt of the double-lap multi-bolt and surface strains have been calculated for
composite joint. single-lap single-bolt and double-lap multi-
bolt composite joints. The present results are
FORMULATION compared with those obtained by McCarthy
A3D finite element model of the laminated et al. (2005b).The effect due to change in
composite bolted joint is required to model a element types and variation in mesh density
laminated composite bolted joint. Solid brick have been studied. The effect of including the
element available in ABAQUS has been used grip area has also been studied. A parametric
to develop the three dimensional FE model. study has been performed for the double-lap
For the joint portion of the plate near the multi-bolt composite joint considering
bolt-hole, finer meshing is provided as shown different values of bolt torque in each bolt.
in Figure 1.The mesh size has gradually The joint geometry considered for the single-
became coarser away from the hole to match lap single-bolt joint is shown in Figure 2. The
with the remaining parts of the plate, carbon/epoxy material (HTA/6376) with
modelled with coarser mesh size. unidirectional material properties (Table 1)
has been used for the laminated plates as
described in McCarthy et al. (2005b). Two
different lamination schemes have been
considered: (i) quasi-isotropic with [45/0/-
45/90]5s lay-ups, (ii) zero-dominated with
[(45/02/-45/90)345/02/-45/0]s lay-ups.
The joint stiffness and maximum out-of- The plot of out-of-plane displacements along
plane displacement obtained from the present edge 1 obtained from present analysis and
analysis considering quasi-isotropic layup are available in literature are presented in Figure
compared with the results reported in 3.The results for the validation purpose have
McCarthy et al. (2005b) in Table 2. The been generated using eight nodded C3D8R
results match quite well. elements. The variation in results due to
change in element type will also be reported
Table 2. Joint stiffness (kN/mm) and in full length paper. The effect of modelling
maximum out-of-plane displacement the grip area has also been studied.
(mm)of the composite joint. The joint geometry considered for the
double-lap multi-bolt joint is shown in Figure
Present McCarthy et 4. The double-lap multi-bolt joint consists of
al. (2005b) three bolts with 36 mm center to center
Joint stiffness 31.62 31.5 distance.
81
Mandal and Chakrabarti
REFERENCES
Gray P J and McCarthy C T 2011 A highly
efficient user-defined finite element for
load distribution analysis of large-scale
bolted composite structures Composites
Science and Technology71 1517–1527.
Lawlor V P McCarthy M A and Stanley W F
82
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A higher order shear and normal deformation theory (HOSNT) is presented
to study the thermoelastic behaviour of functionally graded (FG) plates and open
cylindrical panels with diaphragm supported ends. Present theory considers the effect
of transverse shear strains as well as thickness stretching of the shell structure. A
refined thickness criterion with consideration of first power term of thickness to
radius of curvature ratio is used to extend the theory to moderately thick shells.
Material volume fraction is assumed to be following simple power law gradation in
thickness direction for elastic modulus while Poisson’s ratio is considered to be
constant throughout the thickness. Analytical solution for one dimensional heat
conduction equation is used to consider the variation of temperature through the
thickness of the shell. Principle of minimum total potential energy is used to derive
the system of equations along with necessary boundary conditions. A trigonometric
variation is assumed for displacement and thermo-mechanical loading terms which
reduces system of partial differential equations (PDEs) to ordinary differential
equations (ODEs) in terms of Fourier amplitudes. The orthogonality condition of
trigonometric functions further generates system of algebraic equations with constant
coefficients. Results for FG isotropic cylindrical panel are presented and compared
with available solutions in the literature. An excellent agreement is met with the
available solutions and present theory qualifies to be the closest to the three
dimensional (3D) solutions. Also, FG plates are considered as a special case of shell
structures and results are compared with available 3D solutions.
Keywords: HOSNT; Functionally Graded (FG) plates and shells; thermo-
mechanical.
functionally graded materials can generate Small strain and small displacement
moisture potential within their structure. This relationship in curvilinear coordinates with
84
Thermal Stress Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates and Open Cylindrical Shells
R
2
3j α j Tdz
Rmin
(4)
h
approach of taking << 1 . Where Q ij refers to coefficient of compliance
Rmin matrix, α i denote coefficient of thermal
Stress resultants can be expressed in expansion and T is the thermal variation
simplified manner for thermal effect through the thickness.
inclusion.
SOLUTION APPROACH
N FN 0 0 ε NT The set of above thermal stress resultants
0
= N ij FIS 0 γ ij − 0 (3) contribute to non-homogeneous part of
FTS γ iz 0
Qi 0 0 partial derivative equations with
displacement parameters as dependent
Here N represents all normal stress resultants
variables. Separation of variables approach
and couples, N ij represents in-surface shear
can be applied to convert given PDEs to
stress resultants and couples and Qi ordinary differential equations assuming
represents transverse shear stress resultants double trigonometric series solution for
and couples. Following the similar displacement parameters. With these simply
representation FN denotes rigidity matrix for supported boundary conditions are also
normal stress resultants/ couples; FIS denotes satisfied. Non homogeneous terms i.e.
external loading and temperature change are
in-surface shear stress resultants/couples
also expressed in double trigonometric series
while FTS denotes transverse shear stress
following eigen function expansion approach.
resultants/couples. NT represent contribution ∞ ∞
of thermal change on the constitutive model. T = ∑∑ (T ( z )) mn sin α m x sin β nφ (5)
=
m 1=
n 1
N = { N1 , N 2 , A, M 1 , M 2 , B, P1 , P2 , D, C1 , C2 }
T
,
Temperature distribution through thickness is
Tt − Tb dξ
γ ij = {γ 120 , λ120 , χ12 , κ12 , γ 12* , λ12* , χ12* , κ12* }
T 2
T ( z=
) Tt − h ∫ λ (ξ ) (6)
Qi = {Q1 , Q2 , S1 , S 2 , T1 , T2 , J1 , J 2 }
T 2 z
dz
∫ λ ( z)
,
85
Punera and Kant
Pure Thermal u w
L ×10−6 L ×10−6
Bottom Middle Top Bottom Middle Top
L/h= 3D 0.08492 -0.7862 -1.699 5.522 5.635 6.021
10
Present 0.04813 -0.82684 -1.74455 5.53719 5.65856 6.06212
Abstract: This work presents an efficient technique to enhance the bending and
buckling characteristics of a smart composite plate. This paper discusses about the
employment of piezoelectric fibre composite patches (PFCP) in their optimized
location using unified particle swarm optimization (UPSO) for enhancing the
performance and thereby reducing the effects of internal flaws. A finite element
formulation based on Inverse Hyperbolic Shear Deformation Theory (IHSDT) for
handling bending and buckling analysis of a smart composite plate is used in the
present work. The obtained results are matched with those existing in the literature
and various parametric studies are performed. In addition to the best performance,
reduction in weight of piezoelectric material is obtained as we employ a segmented
piezo patch to overcome the degradation in buckling strength due to damage in a
composite plate, which indeed addresses the design issues.
Keywords: Composite plate; Finite element method; Piezoelectric fibre
composites; Optimization.
each solution and is referred to as a particle. they are near the fixed end in a cantilever
Mathematically, the positions of ith particle plate. Obviously, once the actuator patches
(xi) in a swarm of S particles is a D- are optimally placed, the effects due to
dimensional search space, provides a damage are suppressed and the bending and
candidate solution for the problem. The buckling capacity of composite laminates are
position and velocity of the particles at tth enhanced. The detailed results are omitted
iteration can be represented by xi(t) = (xi1, xi2, here for sake of brevity.
xi3, ……….., xiD) and vi(t) = (vi1, vi2, vi3…….., viD) 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
; where i S. Motion of each particle to new 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
positions during the search process is based 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
on the previous best position of itself and the
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
best position so far found by any individual
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
of the population. Here the population and its
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
individuals are referred respectively as
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
swarm and particles. The swarm is updated
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
by velocity and position update. Algorithm
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
will lead to a converged solution after several
iterations. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
than what they are expected to. In addition to Franco Correia V M Mota Soares C M and
other reasons, if we use segmented PFCPs Mota Soares C A 2003 Buckling
over a composite substrate considerable optimization of composite laminated
weight reduction is obtained. The present adaptive structures J Compos Struct 62
work provides the optimal placement of 315–321.
PFCP actuators. Investigations are carried out Parsopoulos K E Vrahatis M N 2002 Recent
on application of optimized piezo locations in approaches to global optimization
strengthening structures, thereby controlling problems through Particle Swarm
the deformations (due to external forces or Optimization Nat Computing 1 235-306.
caused as an effect of a flaw present in the
system) and increasing the critical buckling Sreehari V M Linju Joseph George and Maiti
load. It is observed from this work that UPSO D K 2015 Bending and buckling analysis
is a very promising optimization technique of smart composite plates with and
and can be successfully applied to find the without internal flaw using an inverse
maximized buckling loads of smart hyperbolic shear deformation theory J
structures. ComposStruct.doi:10.1016/j.compstruct.20
15.11.045
REFERENCES Sreehari V M and Maiti D K 2015 Buckling
and post buckling analysis of laminated
Bent A A 1997 Active Fiber Composites for
composite plates in hygrothermal
Structural Actuation Ph. D. Thesis,
environment using an Inverse hyperbolic
Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
shear deformation theory J Compos
Cambridge.
Struct 129 250-255.
90
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The paper presents the static analysis of realistic wind turbine blades. A
modern 9.2m long rotor blade of NPS-100 is modelled with different order of
polynomial variation of twist throughout the span of blade. The variation of aerofoil
(NREL S821, S825 and NACA 2412) is also employed in the present work. The
actual load acting on wind turbine blade is been extracted through Blade Element
Momentum (BEM) theory. The blade models have been generated using NuMAD and
analysis is performed using FE simulation tool ANSYS.
Keywords: Realistic Wind Turbine Blade; Blade Element Momentum (BEM)
Theory; FE Simulation.
Figure 1: Wind turbine blade (a) NuMAD model (b) Meshed rotor blade in ANSYS
turbine blade is obtained by applying the
1.2
actual load which is computed through BEM
theory. A realistic 9.2 long rotor blade is 1 root transition body
modelled with different aerofoil and twist
Chord (m)
0.8
variation throughout the span of blade.
0.6
MODELLING & SIMULATION
0.4
Sandia National Laboratories has developed a
user friendly preprocessor software NuMAD 0.2
(Numerical Manufacturing and Design Tool),
0
which is used to model realistic three
0 Blade Length
5 (m) 10
dimensional wind turbine blades as shown in
Figure. 1(a).The external and internal
geometry, material layup and stacking
sequence are provided by NuMAD (Berg &
Resor, 2012).The output file from NuMAD is
an ANSYS code which is imported in
ANSYS to create the FEM model of the rotor
blade. The variation of material properties
along the span is also taken into account. The
material chosen for each segment is taken
from the literature (Locke and Valencia,
2004). The meshing of the rotor blade is Figure 3: Different order polynomial
created using SHELL 281 element (Figure. curves for twist variation along the span
1b). The blade is modelled as cantilever i.e.
blade element theory, the total span is
fixed at root ends and free at the tip end.
discretized into N segments. The rotor is
The realistic load acting on the wind turbine
assumed to have an infinite number of blades.
blade is complicated due to irregular shape of
A correction factor known as the Prandtl’s tip
the aerofoil and varying air pressure
loss factor is taken into account.
throughout the aerofoil along the span. Thus,
to have an estimate of the actual static load The BEM theory provides an iterative
acting on the rotor blade, a simplified theory procedure to determine the axial and
known as the Blade Element Momentum rotational induction factors. Estimation of the
(BEM) theory is implemented. The BEM induction factors allows us to compute the
theory combines the integral momentum aerodynamic forces per unit span which can
theory to the blade element theory. An be integrated throughout the span to find the
actuator disc model is considered in the load distributions. The local lift and drag
momentum theory and the flow is assumed to forces per unit span can be computed as
be steady, incompressible and laminar. In the
92
Static Response of Wind Turbine Blade under Actual Loading Effect
Figure 4: (a) Actual load acting on the rotor (b) Flap wise deformation after solution
(Hansen, 2008); tangential aerodynamic loads computed from
pL = Cl (α ) * (1 2 ) * ρVrel2 c(r ) (1) the BEM code is linearly distributed
throughout the span. The gravity load is
pD = Cd (α ) * (1 2 ) * ρV c(r )
2
(2)
rel maximum when the rotor is horizontal. The
These forces can be projected along the combination of above loads is applied to the
normal and tangential direction to the rotor rotor blade in ANSYS as shown in Figure.
plane to obtain the flap wise and edgewise 4(a).The actual loading condition causes the
aerodynamic forces. These are; rotor to bend mainly in the flap wise direction
=pN pL cos φ + pD sin φ (2) as shown in Figure. 4(b).Thus, for the design
=pT pL sin φ − pD cos φ (4) of wind turbines, the aerofoils and twist
orders which give the minimum flap wise
Same aerofoil profile and twist variation is deformations are considered to be better.
implemented in BEM code, as used in Maximum deformations for S821 aerofoil
modelling to compute the actual aerodynamic with different order of twist variations is
loads acting on rotor blade. given in Table 2. It has been observed that
the linear twist distribution for the aerofoils
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION showed better results compared to the other
A realistic 9.2 m long NPS-100 rotor blade order of twist variations for S821 profile.
which uses NREL S821 aerofoil with loading Furthermore, the blade having constant twist
at tip is chosen as a case study for validation. throughout the span produces least tangential
The span wise chord variation is shown in force and thus least power. Also, the flap
Figure.2.The results obtained show a good wise deformations for the constant twist are
agreement with the results previously somewhat higher compared to the other twist
reported in literature and are shown in Table order variations.
1.In the present work, three different
aerofoils vizS821, S825 and NACA2412 has CONCULSION
been analyzed for different order of A realistic rotor blade having 9.2m span and
polynomial for twist variations along the span different material layup along the span has
(Figure. 3)subjected to actual loading. The been modelled and analysed in ANSYS.
actual load consists of the aerodynamic (flap Different order of polynomials for twist
wise and edgewise), centrifugal and gravity variation along the span has been
loads. The centrifugal load for each blade implemented. The blades were subjected to
elements is computed from the mass distribution realistic loading computed from the BEM
for each section. The actual normal and theory. The effects of twist variation are
93
Choudhury et al.
Table 2: Maximum deformations for S821 aerofoil for different order of twist variations
Twist Variation Flapwise (mm) Edgewise (mm) Axial (mm) Twist (rad)
Constant 408.603 -3.839 4.588 0.018773
Linear 340.194 -33.089 4.231 -0.033069
Quadratic 365.879 -34.022 4.113 -0.031732
Cubic 383.7 -29.839 4.214 -0.030853
Fourth order 416.809 -23.539 4.606 -0.04277
appreciable on the maximum deformations. Koh W X M Ng E Y K 2016 Effects of
The blade with linear order of twist variation Reynolds number and different tip loss
produced lower flap wise and edge wise models on the accuracy of BEM applied to
deflection. The tangential force produced tidal turbines as compared to
with linear twist variation is also higher and experiments Ocean Engineering 111 104-
thus the blade will generate more power. The 115.
constant twist rotor produced the maximum Lee Y J Jhan Y T Chung C H 2012 Fluid–
flap wise deflection and the least tangential structure interaction of FRP wind turbine
force which is not desirable. blades under aerodynamic effect
Composites Part B: Engineering 43(5)
REFERENCES
2180-2191.
Berg J Resor B 2012 Numerical Locke J Valencia U 2004 Design studies for
manufacturing and design tool (NuMAD twist-coupled wind turbine blades Sandia
V2. 0) for wind turbine blades: User’s Report SAND2004-0522.
guide Sandia National Laboratories
Albuquerque NM Technical Report No. Mc Kittrick L R Cairns D S Mandell J
SAND2012-728. Combs D C Rabern D A Van Luchene D
V 2001 Analysis of a Composite Blade
Cardenas D Escarpita A A Elizalde H Design for the AOC 15/50 Wind Turbine
Aguirre J J Ahuett H Marzocca P Probst O Using a Finite Element Model Sandia
2012 Numerical Validation of a finite Report Sandia National Laboratories
element thin-walled beam model of a SAND 2001–1441.
composite wind turbine blade Wind
Energy 15 203-223. Singh S K Sharma T Murari V Shukla K
K2015 Effect of airfoil shape and taper
Cox K Echtermeyer A 2012 Structural design along the blade span on static and dynamic
and analysis of a 10MW wind turbine behaviour of wind turbine blades
blade Energy Procedia 24 194-201. Proceeding of 2nd Indian Conference on
Hamdi H Mrad C Hamdi A Nasri R 2014 Applied Mechanics (INCAM 2015)230-
Dynamic response of a horizontal axis 235 IIT Delhi India July 2015.
wind turbine blade under aerodynamic Staino A Basu B Nielsen S R 2012 Actuator
gravity and gyroscopic effects Applied control of edgewise vibrations in wind
Acoustics 86 154-164. turbine blades Journal of Sound and
Hansen M O L 2008 Aerodynamics of wind Vibration 331(6) 1233-1256.
turbines Earthscan Book Co 2 45-54.
94
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper discusses about Composite framing system consisting of steel
beams acting interactively with metal deck-concrete slab and concrete encased
composite columns, which has been as a viable alternative to the conventional steel
or reinforced concrete system in the high-rise construction. It also talks about its
advantages and construction methods. Composite structure is made with the help of
composite beams, composite slabs and composite columns which is different from
the conventional ones. To support this information some images and few examples
have been given.
Keywords: Composite beam; composite slab; composite column.
story height and consequently the cost of Advantages of constructing in steel: High
cladding in a building and lowers the cost of ratio between bearing capacity and weight,
embankment in a flyover (due to lower prefabrication and high accuracy.
height of embankment). Cost of formwork Its disadvantages are low fire resistance and
is lower compared to RCC construction, need of higher educated personal.
Easy structural repair/ modification/
maintenance. Reductions in overall weight Comparing these two methods a
of structure and thereby reduction in combination of both presents the most
foundation costs. economic way i.e. higher bearing capacity,
higher stiffness and plastic redistribution.
These make the advantages for the
composite structures. In composite
construction the two different materials are
tied together by the use of shear studs at the
interface having lesser depth which saves
the material cost considerably. Thermal
expansion (coefficient of thermal
expansion) of both, concrete and steel being
is nearly same.
CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS
Figure 1. Typical Composite Floor
System
96
Steel-Concrete Composite Structure
and a working platform. It may also provide deep, in which case it is known as deep
lateral restraint to the beams during decking. Additional reinforcing bars may be
construction. Another common type of placed in the decking troughs, particularly
composite beam is one where, as with a for deep decking. The profiled decking is
traditional non-composite steel framed often designed to be continuous over two
solution, a precast concrete slab sits on top spans when acting as formwork. Composite
of the top flange of the steel beam. The slabs are normally designed to be simple
effective span range for this type of solution spanning at room temperature, but
is around 6 to 12 m, which therefore makes continuous under fire conditions.
it a competitor to a number of concrete
flooring options.
Advantages of composite beam are:
Keeping the span and loading unaltered, a
more economical steel section (in terms of
depth and weight) is adequate in composite
construction compared with conventional
non-composite construction, reduction in
beam depth and Encased steel beam sections
have improved fire resistance and corrosion. Figure 6. Re-entrant decking
97
Suresh Sahu
EXAMPLES
MILLENIUM TOWER, VIENNA,
AUSTRIA
Figure 10. Final Executed Building
CONCLUSION
From the above information and supporting
examples it is proved that composite
structures has more advantages in
comparison to the conventional steel or
reinforced concrete system in the high-rise
construction, in ways of economy, architecture,
functionality and service and flexibility.
REFERENCES
Panchal D R 2014 Int. Journal of
Figure 9. Final Executed Building Engineering Research and
Applications July 2014 124-138
No. of storey in the building is 55, with a
height of 202m. Ground floor area is www.steel construction.info for composite
38000sq.m and a capital expenditure is of structures.
about 145 million euro. Total time taken for Technology Information, Forecasting and
the erection was 8 months having maximum Assessment Council, Department of
speed of 2 to 2.5 storeys per week. Science and Technology website.
BHURJ KHALIFA, DUBAI
Over 45,000 m3 (58,900 cu yd) of concrete,
weighing more than 110,000 tonnes were
used to construct the concrete and steel
foundation, which features 192 piles buried
more than 50 m (164 ft) deep. Burj Khalifa's
construction will have used 330,000 m3
(431,600 cu yd) of concrete and 39,000
tonnes (43,000 ST; 38,000 LT) of steel
rebar, and construction will have taken 22
million man-hours. The amount of rebar
used for the tower is 31,400 metric tons -
laid end to end this would extend over a
quarter of the way around the world.
98
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
100
Orthogonal Cutting Process Modeling of Idealised CFRPs
30 MPa 40 MPa 268 N/m 1450 N/m CONLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK
REFERENCES
ABAQUS theory manual version 6.3
Pawtucke Hibbitt Karlsson and
Sorensen Inc. 2002.
Agarwal H Amaranath A Jamthe Y Gururaja
S 2015 An Investigation of Cutting
Figure 5. Orthogonal model with Mechanisms and Strain Fields during
boundary condition (Benzeggagh 1996) Orthogonal Cutting in CFRPs
101
Kubher and Gururaja
102
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The inherent high specific strength and stiffness of FRP increased their
application in various engineering fields. Further, the tailoring ability of physical and
mechanical properties helps to meet the specific design requirements. Meantime, the box-
beam applications also have been increased due to their high torsional rigidity. The
combination of FRP and box-beam is ideal for lightweight bridges. But, being a thin-
walled structure, stability is governing the design. In the FRP box-beam two type of
buckling is possible, i.e. Flange and web. To study the flange buckling, a lot of
researchers have applied the uniform compression load over the panel edges. But, when
panels become a part of the beam the state of stress will be changed which finally affect
the buckling behaviour. The number of works carried out for flange buckling behaviour
as a part of beam is meager. In this paper, flange buckling behaviour of simply supported
box-beams subjected to lateral load has been studied with the help of finite element tool
‘ANSYS 15’ by changing geometry and fiber orientation of various elements. Attempts
are made to extract various trends which are affecting the buckling behaviour; it will be
helpful to the designer.
Keywords: Flange-buckling; FRP box-beam; Stability problem.
The discrete plate method is the simplest As aforementioned many researchers have
approach to find the local buckling strength of studied the buckling of plates with various
various FRP shapes. In that, various element of unloaded edge boundary restraints and
FRP shapes treated as an individual plate and different type of load to understand the
analyzed with idealized and appropriate buckling behaviour of various FRP shapes.
boundary restraints from the adjacent plate. Some of them have studied the flange buckling
Under plate loaded by linearly varying in-plane behaviour of various FRP shapes with
load, Lopatin and Morozov (2011) studied consideration of rotational restraints, but they
with one unloaded edge is free and other is treated flange and web element as an
clamped. Zhong and Gu (2007) studied with individual plate, but when it is a part of
unloaded edges are clamped and others are structure the state of stress will be changed and
simply supported. Qiao and Shan (2005) it will affect the buckling behaviour. In this
studied various boundary restraint of unloaded paper, parametric study based on finite element
edges rotationally restraint (RR) and analysis has been conducted by changing the
rotationally free (RF) under uniform geometry and fiber orientation of various
compression load. Qiao et al. (2001) studied elements. In addition, attempt is made to
various boundary and elastic restraint extract various trends which are affecting the
condition under uniform compression and in- buckling behaviour of beam, it will helpful to
plane shear load. Housner and Stein (1975) the designer.
have studied the simply supported and clamped
plate under shear and compression load. They MODEL GEOMETRY
developed the buckling equation by using In this step, geometry of various element of
newly developed trigonometric finite- box-beam has been defined. The length and
difference method. Stroud and Agranoff (1976) cross section details of box beam as shown in
have studied the hat-stiffened and corrugated Figure 1.
panel subjected to longitudinal compression
and shear loading. Kollar (2003) developed the
explicit closed-form solutions to obtain the
buckling strength of various FRP shapes based
on proposed formula by past researchers under
axial load and bending. Kuehn et al. (2014)
have developed the analytical model to analyze Figure 1. Schematic view of the analyzed
various FRP shapes under compressive load girders
with consideration of shear deformation
effects. The developed model is based on first- NEED FOR STUDY
order shear deformation theory. They
The study of box-beam gives an opportunities
employed classical Reissner-Mindlin plate
to study the buckling behaviour of flange of
theory to analyze various FRP shapes.
the beam under true state of stress of box
Additionally, they used Rayleigh-Ritz method
beams. The simulation of these things is not so
to find the web and flange buckling load. Liu
easy in isolated plate study.
et al. (2014) have developed the analytical
In present study geometry of box-beam as well
model for plate with rotational restraint unload
as fiber orientation in various elements are
edge boundary restraints under combined in-
varied. During these studies geometrical
plane shear and linearly varying load. The
parameters of box-beam i.e. width and
influence of rotational restraint on buckling
thickness are varied along with variation of
load is also shown with the help of parametric
fiber orientation in flange and webs. Three
studies.
104
Numerical Studies on Flange Buckling Behaviour of FRP Box-Beams
fiber orientation 0°, ±45° and 90° are flexural stiffness of the flange. Further, there is
considered to cover extreme cases of a major increase in buckling stress where
orthotrophy. flange fiber orientation kept as constant and
web fiber orientation is increased from 0° to
EFFECT OF FIBER ORIENTATION 90°. This shows the effect of rotational
Fiber orientation plays very significant role in restraint offered by web to flange. Web with
deciding strength and stiffnesses properties of 90° fiber orientation gives better rotational
the laminate. Buckling depends on stiffness restraint and as a result major increase in
parameters so it gets affected substantially by buckling stress can be observed.
[VALUE [VALUE
change of fiber orientation in flange of box
bf*tw
3.50 3.30
3.00
2.50 3.05
(σb,f)
2.50
1.50
2.14
0 45 90
Flange fiber orientation (θf)
105
Kasiviswanathan and Upadhyay
buckling stress. Further, it shows that with compression and shear panels NASA TN
increase in δ buckling stress increases due to D-7996.
rotational restraint provided by web to flange. Stroud W J and Agranoff N 1976 Minimum-
Figure. 4, shows the influence of slenderness mass design of filamentary composite
of flange/web ratio (δ). panels under combined loads: design
procedure based on simplified buckling
CONCLUSION
equations NASA TN D-8257.
In the present work web buckling behaviour of
Kollar LP 2003 Local buckling of fiber
FRP box-beam was studied. Numerical studies
reinforced plastic composite structural
carried out by using ‘ANSYS 15’. True state of
members with open and closed Cross
stress and boundary conditions of web of FRP
Sections Journal of structural
box-beams can be simulated easily by this
engineering 129 1503-1513.
approach. The results clearly brings out the
significance of fiber orientation in various Kuehn T et al 2014 Local buckling of shear-
elements of box-beam as well as the deformable laminated composite beams
significance of rotational restraint provided by with arbitrary cross-sections using
web to flange buckling. discrete plate analysis Composite
Structures 113 236-248.
REFERENCES Liu Q et al 2014 Buckling analysis of
Lopatin A V and Morozov E V 2011 Buckling restrained orthotropic plates under
of the SSCF rectangular orthotropic plate combined in-plane shear and axial loads
subjected to linearly varying in-plane and its application to web local buckling
loading Composite Structures 93 1900- Composite Structures 111 540-552.
1909.
NOTATIONS
Zhong H and Gu C 2007 Buckling of
symmetrical cross-ply composite bf, bw - width of the flange and web
rectangular plates under a linearly
varying in-plane load Composite δ - Slenderness ratio of flange and
Structures 80 42-48. web
Qiao P and Shan L 2005 Explicit local q - Uniform lateral pressure load of
buckling analysis and design of fiber- beam
reinforced plastic composite structural θf, θw - Fiber orientation of flange and
shapes Composite Structures 70 468-483. web
Qiao et al 2001 Local buckling of composite t f ,t w - Thickness of the flange and web
FRP shapes by discrete plate analysis
σ b,f - Flange buckling stress of flange
Journal of structural engineering 127
245-255. E1, E2, - Lamina modulus
G 12
Housner J M and Stein M 1975 Numerical
analysis and parametric studies of the υ 12 , υ 21 - Lamina major and minor poison
buckling of composite orthotropic ratio
106
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper, analytical and finite element model has been validated with
experimental study on flexural behaviour of Basalt Fiber Reinforced Composite
(BFRC) sandwich panel subjected to two point loading. The sandwich panel
comprises of top and bottom skin, both composed of BFRC mix and flanges of profile
sheet entwined together to act as composite, whereas the core is constituted by the
web portion of profile sheet. For the analytical study, model has been proposed
adapting relative stiffness as in Euler bending theory. The finite element model has
been created as elasto plastic model along with interaction property using cohesion
and friction. The results from the finite element study and analytical model have been
compared with the experimental results of BFRC sandwich panel and are found to be
in good agreement. The model proposed can be generalised for sandwich panels
pertaining to same configuration and test setup.
Keywords: BFRC; profile sheet; skin; core; composite; bending equation;
relative stiffness; finite element; elasto-plastic model.
bonding (shear interaction)in the bottom skin experimental stress strain data of material
by attaching prefabricated segment to profile used in the panel.
sheet (Prabha et. al, 2013) using self-tapping Compositeness in the panel has been
screws(Wei et. al, 2012).The prefabricated modelled in terms of cohesion and friction at
segment is made of BFRC mix (Raj et. al, the interface between of BFRC segment and
2014) reinforced with basalt mesh. profile sheet. The FE model (Top and Bottom
Combination of both prefabrication and cast- partial tied) assuming 70% friction in both
in-situ construction technique has been top and bottom skin was found to depict the
adopted in aiming at reduced construction behaviour as obtained in the experiment. The
cost and time. A detailed and cross sectional deflected profile of the panel is shown in
view of BFRC panel is shown in Figure 1. Figure 2, for load of 36kNand 10 mm
deflection is compared with experimental
behaviour of BFRC sandwich panel (Raj et.
al, 2013) as shown in Figure 3.
109
Raj et al.
was calculated as 25.63 mm which has been Mechanics Group, Advanced Material Lab.
marked by point F in the graph. For the same This paper is being published with the kind
load of 14.97 kN, deflection was computed to permission of the Director, CSIR-SERC
be 43.94 mm for 6000 micron strain which
has been marked by point G in the graph. REFERENCES
Through analytical model, full composite Burton W S & Noor A K 1997 Structural
behaviour shown by OBCEFG of Figure 3 is analysis of the adhesive bond in a
predicted till the failure of the panel based on honeycomb core sandwich panel Finite
change in effective cross sectional area as per Elements in analysis and design 26(3)
the panel behaviour in the strain limiting 213-227.
range
I.S 456-2000 Indian Standard Plain And
30 Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practise
(Fourth Revision).
C
25 Matteis De G & Landolfo R 1999 Structural
behaviour of sandwich panel shear
20 E walls: An experimental analysis
Materials and structures 32 (5)331-341.
Load kN
15
F G Prabha P Marimuthu V Saravanan M Palani
10 Experimental Values G S Lakshmanan N Senthil R 2013
B Effect of confinement on steel-concrete
5 FE Model (Top and
Bottom partial tied)
composite light-weight load-bearing
Analytical model 2 wall panels under compression Journal
0 O of Constructional Steel Research 81 11-
0 20 40 60
19.
Deflection mm
Raj Smriti 2013 Development of Basalt Fiber
Reinforced Sandwich Panel M. Tech.
Figure 3 Numerical& Analytical Model Thesis Academy of Scientific and
Vs Experiment Innovative Research CSIR-SERC
Chennai.
CONCLUSION
Raj Smriti Smitha Gopinath Nagesh R Iyer
Through analytical and numerical studies, it 2014 Compressive behavior of basalt
can be concluded that bonding mechanism so fiber reinforced composite International
opted in making of BFRC panel (internal Journal of Structural Analysis & Design
bonding at top skin by cast-in situ and 1(1) 49-53.
external bonding in the bottom skin through Toma A Sedlacek G & Weynand K
self-tapping screws) was not able to ensure 1993Connections in cold-formed steel
full composite behaviour inside the panel. Thin-walled structures 16(1) 219-237.
The connection mechanism has to be
improved to increase the flexural capacity of Wei Lu Zhongcheng Ma Pentti Makelainen
the panel. Although, with the adopted Jyri Outinen 2012 Behaviour of shear
connections and construction methodology connectors in cold-formed steel sheeting
resulted into flexural strength of 26 kN with at ambient and elevated temperature
reduction in construction cost and time. Thin Walled Structures 61229-238.
Yu W W& La Boube R A 2000 Cold-formed
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT steel design John Wiley & Sons.
The author's thank the support rendered by
the staff of Computational Structural
110
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
under in-plane static or fatigue loading. A theory to nonlinear 1D theory using the
considerable amount of analytical models and variational asymptotic method. Delamination
numerical techniques have also been reported is included in the model by following the
on the modal behavior of composite sublaminate approach. The _nal results from
structures with delaminations. A detailed this approach will include linear as well as
review about delamination modeling in nonlinear stiffness terms that account for the
beams and its effects on the structural delamination length and location in closed
dynamics are provided by Della and Shu form. Subsequent to the 1D analysis it is
(2007). Majority of the available possible to completely recover the 3D stress
methods/techniques can be categorized into and strain fields along with the in-plane and
two classes: (a) region approach - the out-of-plane warping fields. As a first step,
delaminated laminate is divided into sub- only linear stiffness quantities are used within
laminates or segments and the continuity the 1D linear finite element method (FEM)
conditions are imposed at the delamination that is adopted to investigate the modal
junctions, each of these sub-laminates is behavior of the strip. The utility of the model
analyzed using the equivalent single layer is demonstrated by determining the natural
theories; (b) layerwise approach - the frequencies and mode shapes of a pretwisted
laminate is modeled using the layer- wise and initially curved delaminated anisotropic
theories, which are based on piecewise, layer- strip and, where possible, compared to full
by-layer approximations of the response 3D FEM and experimental results in order to
quantities in the thickness direction, in this validate the present approach. The approach
approach delamination is modeled as an shows good agreement with experimental and
embedded layer or by introducing 3D FEM results available in the literature.
discontinuity functions in the displacement
fields. Shen and Grady (1992) have RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
performed experiments to investigate the The material and geometric properties of the
modal behavior of delaminated composite composite cantilever beam used for the
beams. They also presented an analytical purpose of validation of the present models
model based on the Timoshenko beam theory are given in the Table 1. The stacking
and the cracked beam theory. These sequence used in the analysis is (0/90) 2s .
experimental and analytical results are widely Experimental, analytical and numerical
used as benchmark values by in literature. results are available in the literature for this
More recently, Kumar et al. (2013) developed type of configuration; hence it is useful .The
a generic model of modeling partial first bending natural frequency of cantilever
delamination in composite beams and delaminated beam for the case of full width
implemented using the finite element method. delamination and for different lengthwise
In the present work, an asymptotically exact delamination at different interfaces are shown
cross- sectional model coupled with in the Figure. 1. It is seen that the bending
geometrically non-linear one-dimensional natural frequency decreases as delamination
(1D) theory of modeling partial delamination size increases, irrespective of the
in composite beams is proposed and delamination location in the composite beam.
implemented using the finite element method. Similar trends are seen from the experimental
This analytical model is based on the and the 3D FEM results shown in Figure. 1.
dimensional reduction of laminated shell It is noted that at small delamination length
112
Effect of Delamination Size and Location on the Dynamics of Thin Pretwisted Strip
Table 2 : Numerical results of natural frequency (Hz) along widthwise delamination for
graphite/epoxy without pretwist and initial curvature (B – Bending , T - Torsional , E –
Extensional , Tr - Transverse)
The model was first validated by comparing with dynamic characteristics and the results
the static deformation characteristics of a obtained are compared with the results
delaminated strip made up of Winckler's type computed using 3D FEM. The comparative
study is done for various frequencies and it is
anti-symmetric layup considered in [4] (α 2 /
(α – 90) 4 / α 2 / - α 2 / (90 - α) 4 / -α 2 ). tabulated in Table 2. It is observed that the
This layup exhibits strong extensional-twist present model is able to produce the results
coupling. Later, the same model is computed
113
Salunkhe and Guruprasad
with fewer errors for various frequencies in delamination on the overall modal behavior
very less time frame compared to 3D FEM. of the pretwisted anisotropic strip with initial
curvature.
It can be observed that performance of
material drops, and the % elongation
decreases steadily as the elongation rates are
increased.
116
Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response using FEM
Constitutive Relations 2z *
V=
cnt ( z )
*
Vcnt ; 1 + Vcnt ;
The well-known reduced stress-strain h
(3)
relations for the material behaviour is 2z * 2 z *
2 1 − Vcnt and 2 Vcnt
} [Q ]{ε} (1)
{σ= h h
*
Where the elements of the [Q] matrix are where Vcnt represents some critical volume
fraction, calculated from the mass fraction of
E11 , E22 , CNT and mass density of CNT & matrix.
Q11 = Q22 =
1 − ν 12ν 21 1 −ν 12ν 21
Finite Element Formulation
ν 21 E11 ,
Q12 = Q44 = G23 , Q55 = G13 , Q66 = G12
1 −ν 12ν 21 The stiffened plate finite element developed
and used in present work consists of the
The standard symbols used at the right hand combination of a nine noded quadrilateral
sides represent the effective material plate element and a three noded beam /
properties of the CNTRC considered. It stiffener element. Further description of the
should be mentioned that these effective same may be found in Bhar (2011).
properties are determined from those of the Finally, the standard form of discretized
constituent CNTs and the matrix used, based system of governing algebraic equations for
on Molecular Dynamics theory. the static analysis of the system may be
derived using Variational procedures as
Effective Properties of CNTRC
[K ]{d } = {F } (4)
Following Zhu et al. (2012), the effective
material properties of the CNTRC are NUMERICAL EVALUATIONS
E11 =η1Vcnt E11cnt + Vm E m
Validation (Bare CNTRC Plate):The
η2 Vcnt Vm
= cnt
+ (2) details of the problems presented here can be
E22 E22 Em found in Zhu et al(2012).The plates clamped
η3 Vcnt Vm at all edges (CCCC) are considered here.
= + Further, the materials properties considered
G12 G12cnt G m *
are for the case of Vcnt =0.11, η1 =0.149 and
whereE 11 cnt, E 22 cnt and G 12 cntindicate the η2 =0.934.The results are obtained in terms
Young’s moduli and Shear modulus of
SWCNT S , respectively. Em and Gm represent of non-dimensional central deflection (w* =
corresponding properties of the isotropic w o /h), where w o is the central deflection of
the plate.
matrix. η j (j= 1, 2, 3) represent CNT
efficiency parameters. Further, Vcnt and Vm 95 CCCC, V*CNT=0.11
UD
Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
dimensional
matrix, sum of which is unity at every point. Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
Non-
FG-O
It is important to note that because of the Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
different CNT distributions within the matrix, FG-X
Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
as described in Figure 1, both of Vcnt and Vm
-5
vary across the plate thickness. Expressions 0 b/h 50
of Vcnt as function of the thickness coordinate
Figure 2.Non-dimensional central
(z) for the four types of CNT distributions, in deflection (w* = w o /h) of bare CNTRC
same order as in Figure-1, are given by plates
117
Bhar and Shakya
118
Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response using FEM
119
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
121
Coating Effect on Engine Piston Thermal Behaviour
shows the temperature distribution for mullite A comparative evaluation was made between
and alumina coated piston. the temperature distributions of the uncoated
aluminum alloy piston and the ceramic
coated piston. The maximum surface
temperature of the ceramic coated piston is
improved approximately 28% for zirconia
stabilized with magnesium oxide coating,
22% for mullite coating and 21% for alumina
than the uncoated piston by means of ceramic
coating. It is observed that the use of ceramic
coating for aluminum alloy piston increases
the temperature of the combustion chamber
of the engine and the thermal strength of the
base metal. Finally the combustion chamber
temperature increases the thermal efficiency
of the engine also increases.
Figure 5. Temperature Distribution: (a)
Mullite coated piston (3Al 2 O 3 2SiO 2 ) and CONCLUSION
(b) alumina coated piston (Al 2 O 3 ) From above analysis, we can conclude the
The maximum surface temperature on the following:
piston crown of the Aluminum alloy piston is • With the use of TBC maximum surface
determined as 295.86 °C. The maximum
temperature raised by 28% and hence
surface temperature on the piston crown for
zirconia coated aluminum alloy piston is helps to increase the thermal efficiency of
determined as 377.07 °C, for mullite Coating engine as well as improves combustion
it is 360.6 °C and for Alumina coating it is and reduce the emission.
357.45 °C.
• Zirconia coated piston have maximum
surface temperature in comparison to other
coating. Hence a better choice for TBC for
IC engines.
REFERENCES
Buyukkaya E 1997 Effects of thermal barrier
coating on a turbocharged diesel engine
exhaust emissions Sakarya University
Figure 6. Comparison of surface Mechanical Engineering Department
temperature variation for uncoated and Ph. D. thesis Institute of Sciences and
coated piston Technology Turkey.
Figure 6 represents the temperature Cerit M 2011 Thermo mechanical analysis of
distribution comparison curve of uncoated a partially ceramic coated piston used in
Aluminum surface temperature of coated an SI engineSurface & Coatings
pistons is more than that of uncoated piston. Technology 205 3499–3505.
While among the coated piston the zirconia Muchai J G Kelkar A D Klett D E and
coated piston has maximum surface Jagannathan S 2002 Thermal–
temperature. Mechanical Effects of Ceramic Thermal
122
Babu et al.
123
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
z
and the 2D equations of equilibrium are, xz Bz
z x
zx z
Bz 0 The above PDEs defined by Eq. (7) can be
x z reduced to a coupled first-order ODEs by
(3)
x xz
Bx 0 using Fourier trigonometric series expansion
x z for primary dependent variables satisfying
Further, it is assumed that the Poisson’s ratio the simple support end conditions at x = 0
is constant through the thickness and and L.
m x
variation of Young’s modulus through the u ( x, z ) um ( z ) cos
beam thickness is given by, m L
(8)
2z h m x
k
E ( z ) EM ( EC EM ) (4) w( x, z ) wm ( z )sin
2h m L
Where EM and EC are the elastic modulus at Substituting Eq. (8) and its respective
the bottom and top surface of beam, derivatives into Eq.(6) and further, use
respectively. And k is the material gradation orthogonality conditions of trigonometric
index ( k 0 ).Also, it is assumed here that functions, the following ODEs are obtained,
FG material is isotropic at every point.
Therefore, material constitutive relations for
FG beam can be written as,
x C11 C12 0 x
z C21 C22 0 z (5)
0 C33 xz
xz 0
125
Static Analysis of Functionally Graded Beam for Power-Law Variation of Elastic Modulus
127
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: An efficient and robust design methodology is presented for sandwich core
Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) bridge decks by integrating finite element analysis
(FEA), design of experiments, response surface methodology (RSM) and genetic
algorithm. The sandwich core bridge deck considered in this study consists of
composite laminated plates at faces and isotropic material as core which is fixed on
two opposite edges whereas other two edges are assumed to be free. The panel is
subjected to self-weight and imposed live load according to IRC loading conditions.
The ply thicknesses of top and bottom face plate, depth of core and fiber orientation
of different layers are considered as basic design parameters for structural
optimization. The most important parameters influencing governing criteria (i.e.,
deflection) are determined using FE analysis results based on D-optimal design of
experiment algorithm and analysis of variance (ANOVA). Optimum dimensions are
finalized using genetic algorithm interfaced with response surface model while
satisfying strength and serviceability criteria.
Keywords: Laminates; Finite element analysis; Statistical properties/methods;
Response surface methodology.
core Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) bridge of the panel. Usage of response surface
decks/panels as illustrated in a flowchart in instead of computationally cumbersome finite
Figure 1. The proposed optimization element analysis for optimization engine
methodology is simple, robust and efficient accounts for time saving characteristics of the
due to its time saving characteristics. Nature methodology. Optimum configurations are
of proposed methodology enables to use it for checked against failure and serviceability
material, geometrical and structural criteria.
component optimizations of sandwich core
bridge deck/panels for different boundary and MODELLING
loading conditions. Initial configurations and
The various components of bridge deck i.e.
range of design parameters conforming to the
bottom face plate, sandwich core and top face
design constraint specifications and
plate are generated in the part module of
manufacturing constraints are decided by trial
ABAQUS/CAE and assembled. Elements used
and error using GUI of ABAQUS/CAE.
for face plates and sandwich core foam are
conventional 4 node shell elements (S4R:
Conventional Stress/Displacement Shell, 4-
node linear element geometry) and 8 node
brick elements (C3D8R: standard 3D
stress/Displacement solid element, 8-node
linear brick element) respectively.
The interaction between the adjacent
components is defined using tie constraint
which ensure the perfect bond between the
adjacent components. As model has two
different types of elements i.e. one solid
linear brick element and other is shell
element. Therefore, it is important to define
interaction between the two different element
types. The interaction is defined using shell
to solid coupling in interaction module. The
analysis is done using the general static
loading option. The model is validated with
refined higher order shear deformation theory
(RHSDT) as proposed by Khandelwal et
Figure 1.Flow chart for proposed al.(2012) (Table 1).
optimization methodology Table 1.Model verification
Responses i.e., deflections for design points Case(span 2 m) Deflection(mm)
generated from D-optimal code are obtained
using modified python script of Top ply thick./core ABAQUS RHSDT
ABAQUS/CAE. Non-significant parameters depth/bottom ply
affecting deflection are screened out by thick.
performing Analysis of variance (ANOVA).
18/150/18 2.64 2.53
A predictive model for deflection in terms of
critical design parameters is created using 14/200/14 2.50 2.43
response surface methodology (RSM). The
response surface is coupled with genetic 10/250/10 2.64 2.44
algorithm to find the optimum design 6/300/6 2.67 2.44
parameters corresponding to minimum cost
129
Optimisation of Sandwich Core FRP bridge Deck
130
Gangwar et al.
In the present study, following objective MATLAB and optimisation is performed for
function equation is used: minimum cost incorporating four different cost
weightage parameters i.e. N as 1, 0.25, 0.4, 0.6.
𝐶 = 𝑉𝑓𝑟𝑝 + 𝑁 × 𝑉𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 Table 3 summarise the optimum design
configurations for span 2 meter.
Obtained response surface from reduced model is
integrated with genetic algorithm toolbox of
REFERENCES
Adali S Summers E B Verijenko V E 1994
Minimum weight and deflection design
of thick sandwich laminates via symbolic
computation Composite Structures 29
145-160.
Aref A J Alampalli S He Y 2005
Performance of a fiber reinforcement
131
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In construction industry, CFRP composites are widely used for retrofitting
and rehabilitation of columns and bridge piers so as to enhance the service life of
structures. The slenderness of the column largely influences the confining strength of
FRP wraps. The main objective of this paper is to study the slenderness effect on
reinforced concrete circular columns confined with fiber reinforced polymer
composites on strength parameter and compare the results with the variable
slenderness ratio unwrapped RC circular column specimen. The experimental
program included twelve RC circular column specimens which consisted unwrapped
and wrapped columns with slenderness ratio in the range of two to four. The
slenderness effect study was established through the comparison of experimental and
modelling results in terms of the ultimate axial strength, axial and lateral strain. The
experimental results showed that for RC circular concrete specimens, the variation in
slenderness ratio significantly affect on the confinement effectiveness when compare
with unwrapped and wrapped column specimens. The results of experiments and
computational modelling comparison clearly demonstrate that the strength
performance and ductility behaviour of unwrapped and CFRPC wrapped reinforced
circular columns are predominately influenced by change in slenderness ratio.
Keywords: Carbon fiber reinforced polymer; Circular columns; Slenderness
ratio; Rehabilitation
different lengths. Out of these, six specimens compression testing machine with loading
were control specimens and remaining were rate of 2.5 KN/sec. Data acquisition (DAQ)
confined with one layer of CFRP sheet. system was used to measure the readings
Strain gauges were pasted to measure strains from the instrumentation. The strain gauge
in steel, concrete and CFRP. To find load and readings were taken and established
deflection, load cell and LPs were installed. relationship between effect of slenderness
All the specimens were tested on a 300T ratio and strength parameters.
U400-1
U400-2 62.3 19.45
U400-3
84.54 82.42
W400-1
W400-2 114.97 35.48
W400-3
U800-1
U800-2 58.27 18.19
U800-3
90.1 90.16
W800-1
W800-2 110.77 34.59
W800-3
133
Slenderness Effect on Behaviour of CFRP Wrapped RC Circular Column
Pmax Δmax
Specimen Py (ton) Δy (mm) μ % increase in μ
(ton) (mm)
134
Narule et al.
REFERENCE
135
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Composite materials are very light in weight with higher strength and
stiffness, and are very helpful in applications like aerospace, aircraft, automotive,
energy, infrastructure etc. Though composite materials are strong enough, but
sometimes when subjected high impact loading or shocks, they lacks in the stiffness
which changes the dynamic responses of the structure, which modifies the modal
parameters like natural frequencies, mode shapes, damping etc. So these modal
parameters can be used to judge the variation in stiffness or damage occurrence in the
composite structures. This paper deals with the modal analysis of composite
cantilever beam using ABAQUS (FEA) software. Model of composite cantilever
beam for two different fibre orientations, for quasi isotropic [0/45/-45/90] s and for
unidirectional with all layers of 0⁰orientation has be made in ABAQUS finite element
analysis software and modal analysis of the beam is performed for both the fibre
orientations. Natural frequencies for first five modes of bending from ABAQUS
(FEA) software are compared with natural frequencies by analytical method for
validation of ABAQUS (FEA) results. It is observed that there is good agreement
between the natural frequencies obtained from ABAQUS (FEA) and analytical
calculation.
Keywords: Composite beam; Modal analysis; ABAQUS (FEA).
analytical formula with same beam ABAQUS (FEA) results for beam with fibre
dimensions and material properties used in orientation [0/45/-45/90]s for first three
ABAQUS (FEA) modelling. Comparison of modes are shown in Figure.1 to Figure.3
results from both methods i.e. ABAQUS
(FEA) as well as analytical method is done to
check whether the results obtained from
ABAQUS (FEA) are in the range of results
from analytical method. For analytical
calculations of natural frequencies, formula
used is given in equation (1) and value of
modulus of elasticity in equation (1) is taken
as equivalent modulus of elasticity calculated
from nine engineering constants of carbon
fibre using MATLAB code for quasi
isotropic beam.
Figure 1. Mode 1 for [0/45/-45/90]s
𝑐𝑛 𝐸𝐼
𝑓𝑛 = � (1)
2𝜋 𝑚𝐿4
Where,
f n = Natural frequency of cantilever beam
n= No of modes, n=1, 2, 3…..
E= Modulus of elasticity
L=Length of cantilever beam
I= Moment of inertia of cantilever beam
m=Mass per unit length of cantilever beam
C n = Constant (changing) for every mode
137
Modal Analysis of Composite Beam Using ABAQUS (FEA)
1 46.5286 46.048
2 291.58 287.89
3 820.07 803.10
4 1599.86 1565.3
5 2644.73 2569.6 Figure 6. Mode 3 for UD with all 0⁰
REFERENCES
138
Navale et al.
139
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Due to increase in population, car parking space is major concern. Hence
trend has been set up to use ground floor for parking purpose. Literature shows that,
large number of reinforced concrete (RC) building with soft storey damaged by
earthquake shaking due to many structural deficiencies such as, column with
insufficient confinements, strong beam weak column, formation of plastic hinge at
beam-column joint, opening of 90 degree ties, poor detailing in beam-column
connection joint etc. This paper includes seismic analysis of multistorey frame
structures using steel concrete composite column (SCC) section in soft storey. The
structure with SCC column section is analyzed and compare with general RCC frame
structure by using response spectrum and pushover analysis method. The parameters
compare from analysis are displacement, base shear, plastic hinges, time period of
mode shapes and performance point. Commercial software SAP2000 v16 is used for
analysis. The result shows that plastic hinge formation during earthquake at beam-
column joint can improved performance with use of steel reinforced composite
column section at soft storey.
Keywords: Pushover analysis; Soft storey; Steel reinforced composite column.
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
For Zone IV, medium soil and 0.05% of
Figure 1. Plan of building G+14 and damping response spectrum graph is as,
G+20
This models are analysis by response
spectrum method. From this we take time
period for mode shape and calculate target
displacement for each storey given in fema-
356. This displacement is use for pushover
141
Seismic Analysis of Multistorey Buildings using Steel Concrete Composite Columns at Soft Storey
12000
1 2 0 00
10000
8000
8000
6000
4000
4
4000
00
2000
2 0 0..02 0..04 0 ..0 6 0..08
0 0..02 0 ..0 4 0 ..0 6 0..08 0..1
142
Patil et al.
143
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present work, impact behaviour of laminated GFRP composite plate
has been studied with experimental work as well as FE analysis. Material
characterization of GFRP based on material stress/strain criteria has been carried out
and implemented in the present FE model to study the progressive damage evolution
in composite plate due to ballistic impact. Experimental impact tests on GFRP
laminate is performed by pneumatic gun. Numerical results obtained from the present
FE model in terms of residual velocity and damage pattern in composite plate are
compared with the results from experimental impact tests which show good
agreement. Shock effect due to impact is also considered in the material model of
composite plate. Pressure wave generation in composite plate due to impact is studied
in detail. Results from the present FE model show, delamination is the dominant mode
of damage in laminated composite plate under impact due to matrix failure in tension.
Many new results are presented which should be useful for the researches in this field.
Keywords: GFRP; Material characterization; FE analysis; Ballistic impact.
NUMERICAL MODELING 0
0 200 400 600
Three dimensional numerical models of Incidence velocity (m/s)
composite plate of size 140 x 140 x 3.12 mm3
Figure. 2. Variation of residual velocity
and blunt impactor (steel 4340) of diameter
with incidence velocity
19 mm and mass 52 gm are made in
It is observed that the residual velocity
AUTODYN (Figure. 1). Hexahedron brick
obtained from the present FE model is more
element is assigned to the numerical models
than that obtained from the results of
with Lagrangian process. Interaction between
experimental impact tests (Figure. 2). This
plate and impactor is defined by gap
difference may be due to the frictional loss of
interaction method with gap size of 0.05 mm
energy of impactor. However, frictionless
and frictionless contact.
contact is defined between impactor and plate
145
Ballistic Impact Response of FRP Composite Plate: Experimental and FE analyses
Acceleration (m/s.s)
frame is presented in Figure. 3. It is observed
that most of the damage occurs due to -0.4
Vi=40 m/s
delamination i.e. failure of matrix in tension. Vi=100 m/s
-0.6
Due to high incidence velocity, some part of
composite plate flown off with impactor -0.8
(called Plug).
-1
Figure. 4 shows the acceleration-time
histories of impactor at different incidence Figure. 4. Acceleration-time histories of
velocities during penetration in laminate. At impactor
lower incidence velocity (Vi=40 m/s), Figure. 5 shows the pressure wave variation
fluctuation in acceleration of impactor is on the back face of composite plate from
observed which means that the penetration centre to the boundary along x axis at
resistance offered by laminated composite is different time frame. It is observed that as the
more at lower incidence velocity. time passes, magnitude of pressure decreases
but concentration area of pressure increases.
Nature of pressure also changes from positive
t=0.015 ms
to negative during penetration process of
impactor.
800
700
Delamination t=0.04 ms 600
500
Pressure (MPa)
400 t=0.015 ms
300 t=0.027 ms
Plugs erosion t=0.041 ms
t=0.068 ms 200
100
0
-100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
-200
-300
Distance (mm)
Figure. 3. Progressive damage evolution
in composite plate at Vi= 274.5 m/s
Figure. 5 pressure wave on the back face
Pressure applied by impactor at impact point of composite plate at Vi=274.5 m/s
appears like a wave that travels throughout
the body of composite. This pressure wave
causes the generation of various stresses in
laminate.
146
Ansari and Chakrabarti
Pagano (1969) elasticity solutions for through thickness variations of stresses and
laminate under cylindrical bending under deformations has been presented which can
sinusoidal load were extended for uniformly be considered as benchmark solution.
distributed and line load by Pagano and
Wang (1971) modelling line load as FORMULATION
uniformly distributed load over narrow strip. A laminated composite orthotropic plate
Pagano (1970) elasticity formulation for bi- consists of ‘N’ no. of unidirectional laminae
directional bending under sinusoidal load was with material symmetry axis parallel to the
extended by Savithri S. and Varadan T. plate axes x, y, z as shown in figure-1(a) has
(1992) to bi-directional bending of laminated been considered for formulisation. The plate
composite plates for uniformly distributed is considered to be simply supported as
and concentrated loads (small patch load). shown in figure-1(b). The concentrated load
Savithri and Varadan (1992) used Fourier ‘Q’ is positioned on the top surface of
formulations that simulates concentrated load laminate is also shown in figure-2.
as uniformly distributed loading over a small
square area of width=0.05a. However exact
formulation for concentrated load has not
been presented yet.
In present work 3-D elasticity formulation for
bi-directional bending of simply supported
laminated composite plates subjected to
concentrated load modelled with the help of
double Fourier series is presented. Present
formulation is based on Pagano’s (1970)
formulation for bi-directional bending of
laminated composite plates subjected to
sinusoidal loading.
As the concentrated load could not be
represented by continuous loading function
Savithri and Varadan (1992) has observed
that Fourier series do not converge at the
point of discontinuity. In the present
formulation as the point load has been Figure 1. General laminate plate
modelled as exact point load thereby number
of discontinuity has been reduced to one.
In order to avoid the mathematical
disturbance and get reliable results the
response of the plate is evaluated at a short
distance away from the location of point load.
Since the load has been formulated with
single discontinuity convergence of results is Figure 2. Laminate subjected to
achieved with significantly less no. of concentrated load
harmonics as compared to formulations
presented by Savithri and Varadan (1992). A generic load qz(x ,y) expressed as Fourier’s
Solutions for few problems in detail with series approximation:
149
Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending Subjected to
Concentrated Loads
150
Raval and Bambole
S z z
z z
z
151
Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending Subjected to
Concentrated Loads
REFERENCES
Pagano N J 1969 Exact solutions for
composite laminates in cylindrical
bending Journal of Composite Materials
3 398-411.
Pagano N J 1970 Exact solutions for
rectangular bidirectional composites and
sandwich plates Journal of Composite
Materials 4 20-34.
Pagano N J and Wang A S D1971 July
Further study of composite laminates
under cylindrical bending Journal of
Composite Materials 5 521-528.
Reddy JN 1997 Mechanics of Laminated
Composite Plates: Theory and Analysis
CRS Press Florida.
Savithri S and Varadan T K 1992 Laminated
plates under uniformly distributed and
concentrated loads ASME Journal of
Applied Mechanics Brief notes 59(1)
211-214.
152
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The present work proposes a numerical model to evaluate the elastic
properties as well as to analyse dynamic responses of hybrid composite shell
structures which consists of conventional carbon fiber (CF) as reinforcing phase and
multiwalled carbon nanotubes (MWCNTs) based polymer as matrix phase. The Mori-
Tanaka based strength of material method has been implemented to determine the
elastic properties of such hybrid composite structures. An eight noded shell element
having five degrees of freedom at each node has been used for modeling and analysis
of such hybrid shell structures. Stress resultant-type Koiter’s shell theory has been
used and no restriction has been imposed on the magnitude of curvature components
to capture the deep and shallow shell cases. Twist curvature component has also been
incorporated to keep the strain equations complete. The transverse shear effect has
also been considered according to the Mindlin’s hypothesis. The Rayleigh damping
model has been implemented in order to study the effect of carbon nanotubes (CNTs)
on damping capacity of such hybrid composite shell structures. Different types of
shell panels (such as cylindrical, spherical, elliptical and doubly curved) have been
analyzed in order to study the time and frequency responses. Results indicate that the
elastic properties as well as damping properties of such hybrid composite structures
improved with the addition of CNTs as compared to conventional carbon fiber
reinforced composites (CFRCs) laminates and effects of some important parameters
on the vibration characteristic of such hybrid composite shell structures have also
been presented.
Keywords: Carbon fibre; Polymer-matrix composites (PMCs); Nano-structures;
Vibration; Finite element analysis (FEA); Numerical analysis
whereas few studies presented that addition (PMNC) have been obtained by using the
of 2% CNT in matrix phase can lead to Mori-Tanaka method. In second phase,
1000% increase of the loss modulus of a bar effective properties of the hybrid composite
under axial cyclic loading (2005). which is a combination of CNT based
polymer matrix and carbon fiber is
From the literatures review, it is cleared that
determined using strength of material
strength, load bearing as well as wear and
method.
fatigue resistance capacity increases when
CNTs is blended in the polymer matrix phase
in the proper ratio. Research work in this
field is already initiated but detail modelling
and analysis of CNTs based hybrid composite
structures is still unrevealed. So, the present
work focuses the effects of randomly oriented
CNTs, carbon fiber on vibration
characteristics of hybrid composite shell Figure 1. Various constituents of CNT
structures. The Mori–Tanaka method based based hybrid composite.
strength of material method is implemented
to obtain the elastic properties of hybrid FINITE ELEMENT (FE)
composite material which is made up of FORMULATION AND ANALYSES
sixteen layers with stacking sequence of [0 /-
The stress-resultant type Koiter’s shell theory
45/ 45/ 90]2s. An eight noded shell element
has been considered in the present finite
considering shear deformation effect
element formulation of the hybrid composite
according to the Mindlin’s hypothesis has
shell structures. The effect of shear
been formulated for finite element modelling.
deformation to the Koiter Shell theory based
Obtained elastic properties have been used to
on the Midlin’s hypothesis (2010) has also
study the impulse responses of such hybrid
been considered in the present FE
shell structures. The damping characteristics
formulation.
of such hybrid composite shell structures has
been implemented based on the Rayleigh The shell geometry used for the present
damping model in order to study the effects formulation has been developed using an
of CNTs on the settling time i.e. how fast the orthogonal curvilinear coordinate system
system responses reach to steady state under with the mid-plane of the shell assumed to be
impulse loading. Frequency response the reference surface as shown in Figure. 2
analyses have also been carried out to study
the effects of CNTs on the resonance
frequencies and absolute amplitudes of
frequency responses of such various hybrid
shell structures.
a parametric domain through the suitable to verify the present shell finite element code
exact parameterization. Two independent developed, the static and free vibration
coordinates (1 , 2 ) in the parametric space analysis has been performed for the
have been considered as the mid-surface laminated spherical composite shell and
curvilinear coordinates of the shell. The validated.
normal direction coordinate to the middle
surface of the shell has been represented by z TRANSIENT RESPONSES OF THE
. The reference surface or the shell mid- HYBRID COMPOSITES DUE TO
surface can be described in the global IMPULSE LOADINGS
cartesian coordinates in terms of the position Various simple supported spherical
vector as composite shell structures on the square base
r (1 , 2 ) X (1 , 2 )iˆ Y (1 , 2 ) ˆj Z (1 , 2 )kˆ (1) (a = b) have been analyzed under the impulse
loading. In all the cases, the shell panel has
Where, iˆ , ĵ and k̂ are unit vectors along the been subjected to an impulse load of 10 N at
X, Y and Z axis, respectively. the center up to 10 time steps and impulse
responses of the panels have been calculated
EQUATION OF MOTION with a time step of /10 where the time
The dynamic finite element formulation has period is corresponding to first natural
been derived by using the Hamilton’s frequency of the system. In all the cases, the
principle as follows global responses are calculated considering
t2 first ten modes. The main purpose of this
[ (T U ) W ]dt 0 (2) present study is to analyze the effects of
t1 CNTs on the maximum response and settling
time of the shell panel. The settling time is
T is the kinetic energy of the system, U is the calculated as the time required to reach the
elastic strain energy and W is the external amplitude of vibration to 5% of maximum
work done by the force on the structure. After amplitude. The Figure. 3 shows the transient
putting the energy expressions in Equation responses of such shell panel for R/a = 5 and
(2) and taking first variation, the equation of a/h = 10.
motion can be written as
M uue d e Kuue d e F e (3)
Simply supported and clamped supported of these plies are different along the
boundary conditions are considered for the laminate’s axis. When theses plies are
analysis. dropped at different locations in a laminate,
the rise of out of plane stresses at each drop-
off may be different to the stiffness of the
dropped plies. The global-local approach has
been used for analyzing the laminates with
variable thickness. So, the location of the ply
drop-off was kept away from both load and
constraint locations to avoid their
interference. The laminate is assumed to be
linearly elastic until the point of delamination
[Varughese et al., 2001]. A five layer
composite laminated plate 120mm long and
100mm wide with two ply drops has been
Figure 1 Geometry of Laminated Skew
analyzed under biaxial in-plane compression
Composite Plate with Ply Drop
load as shown in figure 1. The thickness of
So for the analysis five different layup each lamina is taken as 0.75 mm. Detail of
configurations are selected including 00, 450 five different layup configurations
and 900 fibres as they are most commonly considered for analysis are given in Table-1.
used practically. The stiffness contributions
Table 1. Layup Configurations
Stacking sequence and Lengths for the laminated composite with ply
Layup drop-off (mm)
configurations Thick Taper section Thin
Thick section Thin section
section (1/20 ply ratio) section
LC 1 [(0/90] 2 /0] [0/90/0] 60 15 60
LC 2 [(90/0] 2 /0] [90/0/0] 60 15 60
LC 3 [(-45/45] 2 /0] [-45/45/0] 60 15 60
LC 4 [-45/45/0/90/0] [-45/90/0] 60 15 60
LC 5 [-45/45/90/0/0] [-45/0/0] 60 15 60
158
Buckling Analysis of Composite Laminated Skew Plate of Variable Thickness Under Biaxial
Compression
(c)
(a)
(d)
(b)
Figure 2- Variation of buckling load with
skew angle for different layup
configuration for simply supported and
(b) clamped supported
(e)
Figure 3- Variation of buckling load with
skew angle for different ply drop ratio for
(a)LC1, (b)LC2, (c)LC3, (d)LC4 and(e)
LC5 layup configuration
(a)
EFFECT OF TAPER ANGLE ON
BUCKLING LOAD
The effect of taper angle on buckling load is
investigated by considering three different
ply drop ratio (Th/L) for analysis as 1/20,
1/18 and 1/16 for simply supported boundary
condition for different layup configurations
are shown in figure 3. It is observed that as
ply drop-off ratio changes from 1/20 to 1/16,
the buckling load increases for all layup
configuration, it is because the laminate
(b)
159
Priyanka Dhurvey
160
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
defined as the deformation caused on the flat Using Eq. (1), spring-in has been calculated
parts due to tool-part interaction whereas for the considered CFRP part with predefined
spring-in is the difference in angle caused lay-up sequence, thickness and geometrical
during process in angled components such as dimension as 0.57° analytically.
in L and C shaped components. Various
studies have been conducted so far to NUMERICAL APPROACH
determine the effect of various parameters on The geometry modelling and finite element
deformation of the composite part during the simulation has been carried out using
autoclave processing. In cured thermoset ABAQUS software. Various analysis like
composite part, enclosed angle is changed thermo-chemical, flow compaction and stress
from original angle due to material deformation have been performed for L-
anisotropy. During curing process in shaped 2D laminate to predict spring-in
autoclave machine, chemical shrinkage takes deformation using COMPRO plug-in with
place due to polymerization. Extrinsic factors ABAQUS. The AS4/8552 Hexcel prepreg
such as tool-part interaction condition, tool system considered as a composite part
material used may also have major impact on material with symmetric lay-up sequence
spring-in [Fernlund et al., 2002]. [0/90]6s and aluminum as a tool material used
in simulation. The composite part and
ANALYTICAL APPROACH metallic tool is meshed with 420 and 527
The spring-in deformation has been elements using 3D-stress hex elements with
determined for L-shaped CFRP component quadratic geometric order. Tool part
using analytical approach by considering interaction properties are assigned in which
various assumptions. The lay-up sequence, coefficient of friction is kept as 0.15 and
thickness and geometry for the L-shaped part limiting shear stress as 40000 N/m2. The
as well as for the aluminum tool has been methodology adopted for the numerical
considered as fixed parameter for the approach as a flow chart format as shown in
calculation for spring-in deformation. Figure 1.
An analytical model as given in Eq. (1) have In the thermo-chemical module, heat transfer
been developed for determining spring-in of coefficient of 80 W/m2 K on top of composite
L shape laminate [Radford and Diefendorf, and 20 W/m2 K on bottom of the tool is
1993]. The anisotropy components such as applied as boundary conditions. The degree
longitudinal coefficient of thermal expansion of cure vs. time plot is obtained for the given
can be determined using laminate plate curing cycle of the composite part as shown
theory [Albert, 1997] and transverse in Figure 2. The deformed shape of L-shape
coefficient of thermal expansion can be composite part is gained from stress-
calculated from lamina properties using the deformation analysis. During tool removal
methods described by Pagano [Pagano, step, symmetric boundary conditions are
1974]. applied on the composite part which results
into spring-in deformation. The deformed and
un-deformed shape for the L-shaped part is
shown in Figure 3. From that, spring-in angle
is calculated as 0.66° using simple
mathematical calculations.
162
Prediction of Spring-in Deformation for L-shaped CFRP Components
Figure 1. Methodology for Numerical Simulation using ABAQUS with COMPRO plug-in
Figure 2. Degree of Cure vs. Time Plot Figure 3. Deformed and Undeformed
Shape of Composite L-shaped Part
163
Shah et al.
Abstract: Transverse shear and normal stresses play important role in causing
delamination of laminated and sandwich plate / panel structures. Conventionally, in
the post-processing phase of a displacement based finite element analysis (FEA), the
transverse shear stresses are recovered by integrating the first two of the stress
equilibrium equations and then the transverse normal stress is recovered from these
transverse shear stresses, by integrating the third stress equilibrium equation.
However, a new method for transverse shear stress recovery using a least square of
error (LSE) method and a semi refined higher-order shear deformation theory
(SRHSDT7), based on simple equivalent single layer approach, was developed earlier
by the second author. The present work is an extension of the same, for recovery of
transverse normal stresses in such laminated plates. The novelty of the method lies
with the fact that, instead of recovering transverse normal stress from transverse shear
stresses, it is obtained directly from the primary displacement solutions obtained from
the FEA, by using the LSE method and the third stress equilibrium equation. The
present method is found to yield very accurate results, when compared to elasticity
solutions due to Pagano, as well as FE or other numerical solutions based on
computationally costly layerwise theory or complex mixed Variational theorems. Due
to the simplicity and robustness of the method, it can be used for accurate transverse
normal stress recovery in any arbitrary laminate configuration, including in sandwich
plates, for which it is an important factor.
Keywords: Laminated Composite, Transverse Normal Stress Recovery, Least
Square of Error Method, Semi Refined HSDT, Finite Element
Analysis
INTRODUCTION delamination failure. Hence, delamination
FRP laminated composites, due to their failure analysis of such laminated composites
advantages like high strength-to-weight ratio, is an essential part of their proper analysis
design flexibility, ease of replacement etc.; and design processes. The transverse stresses
have found widespread application in are known to have considerable influence on
different engineering industry, especially for the delamination failure and hence accurate
weight-critical structural applications. Such evaluation of the transverse stresses is
laminated composite plate/panels frequently important for delamination analysis of such
act as important load bearing components. composites.
However, because of inherent weakness of Generally, for laminated composites,
laminae interfaces, such laminated displacement based analyses are more
composites are highly susceptible to popular over the stress based mixed analysis
procedures, due to relative simplicity of the method of transverse shear stress recovery at
former. Within these displacement based the post-processing phase, using a least
procedures, the two-step approach of using a square of error (LSE) method applied to the
simple two dimensional ‘equivalent single stress equilibrium equations based on the
layer theory’ (FSDT or some HSDT) to semi refined HSDT (SRHSDT7), also
obtain the primary displacement solution and proposed by them.
inplane stresses and then recovering the
This work extends the last mentioned work,
transverse stress components applying the
particularly for computation of transverse
stress equilibrium equations is quite common.
normal stress using the LSE method
For this purpose, superiority of the HSDTs presented therein, along with the same
over the FSDT and simplicity of such HSDTs SRHSDT7. However, since the formulations
over layerwise and zigzag theories is well here are little bit different than those used for
known. Naturally, a number of different the transverse shear stress recovery, they
HSDTs have been put forward by the deserve to be presented separately. In this
research community over the years, on which work, the transverse normal stress field
a comprehensive review can be found in Bhar
through the thickness at a point of the
(2011), wherein a semi refined HSDT
laminate is considered as a cubic polynomial.
(SRHSDT7) was also proposed.
Then it is computed through the thickness
The approach of recovering the transverse somewhat similarly as in Bhar and Satsangi
stresses at the post-processing phase of a (2011), as briefed in next section.
displacement based analysis, using the three
dimensional stress equilibrium equations, THEORETICAL FORMULATION
was discussed perhaps for the first time in Since the same HSDT (SRHSDT7) is used
open literature by Pryor and Barker (1971) for describing the plate kinematics, as can be
and then by Lo et al. (1978). Later, some found in Bhar (2011) or Bhar and Satsangi
other variants of such approach were also (2011), the process of obtaining the primary
presented by Chaudhuri (1986) and some displacement solution remains the same. So
others. The important similarity amongst all here we start directly with discussion on
these works, and many at later times, is that recovery process particularly for the
the second stage solution for the transverse transverse normal stress ( ). Notations for
stresses are obtained by through the thickness symbols used, are those used conventionally,
integration of the 3D stress equilibrium unless mentioned otherwise.
equations, performed layer by layer.
The well-known third stress equilibrium
Towards some new developments, Kant and equation, using which is to be recovered,
Menon (1991) developed a finite difference is given by
based method applied to the 3D equilibrium
equations, for obtaining the transverse (1)
stresses at the post processing phase. After Here we assume the to be recovered
more than a decade, Hossain et al. (2004) through the thickness of an arbitrary point
briefly presented a transverse stress recovery P(x,y) at the reference plane, as a cubic
technique from the equilibrium equations polynomial of the thickness coordinate (z)
based on a weighted residual method, for corresponding to p-th layer, as
laminated shell panels. More recently, Bhar
and Satsangi (2011) formulated a new (2)
166
A Method for Accurate Transverse Normal Stress Evaluation in Laminated Composites Using Simple
HSDT
REFERENCES
plates subjected to in-plane uniform edge matrix form by considering either tension or
loading. A relatively less number of papers compression in-plane edge loads (Kumar et al.
deal with the vibration and stability problems 2003):
under the action of non-uniform in-plane
edge compressive loads. However, the tensile
M q K P KG q 0 (1)
buckling characteristics of a panel are where [K], [KG] and [M] are assembled
sparsely treated in the literature. It is worth system stiffness, geometric stiffness and mass
mentioning that to the best of the authors’ matrices respectively.
knowledge, no comprehensive work has been The governing equations for the buckling and
carried out on the tension buckling of vibration problems can be obtained by
stiffened laminated composite plates reducing Eq. (1) as follows:
subjected to partial edge loading. In this Static Buckling problem: When {𝑞̈ } = {0}
work, the tensile and compressive buckling Eq. (1) reduces to a static case as
of laminated stiffened panels are investigated
with the influences of various parameters like K q Pcr KG q 0 (2)
partial edge load length and its position, ply- Vibration problem: When the plate vibrates
orientations and stiffener parameters. under the action of in-plane compression or
tension edge loads, Eq. (1) reduces to
THEORETICAL ANALYSIS
K q P KG q - 2 M q 0 (3)
In the above Eq. (3), if P is equal to zero, the
equation represents a free vibration problem
without in-plane load. If the in-plane load
exists, then for a particular value of P, the
square of the frequency (ω2) becomes zero
Figure 1. Geometry of the stiffened and then the corresponding load represents
panel. the critical buckling load.
P/2 P/2 c/2
b
P P
P P c P/2 P/2 c/2 c FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION
(a) (b) (c)
In this study, a 9-node heterosis plate element
Figure 2. (a) Partial edge load from one is employed with five degrees of freedom
edge;(b) Partial edge load from two (DOFs) u, v, w, θx, and θy at all edge nodes
adjacent edges.
and four DOFs such as u, v, θx, and θy at the
The stiffened laminated composite panel interior node. In order to develop heterosis
considered in this work is simply supported element, the serendipity shape functions are
on all four sides. The geometry of the used for transverse displacement w, and
stiffened panel of length a, width b, thickness Lagrange shape functions for remaining
h along x, y and z axes respectively is shown DOFs that includes u, v, θx, and θy as shown
in Fig.1. The typical loading cases considered in Fig. 3. This type of element exhibits
in this study are shown in Fig. 2. improved characteristics as compared to 8-
node serendipity and 9-node Lagrange
GOVERNING EQUATIONS elements (Butalia et al. 1990). A computer
The governing differential equation of motion code is developed using FORTRAN language
for a discretized structure can be written in to perform all the necessary computations.
170
Tensile and Compressive Buckling Analyses of Stiffened Laminated Composite Panels
8-N Serendipity 9-N Heterosis 9-N Lagrange and attains minimum γcr at c/b = 0.5 and θ =
(±90o)2. The similar phenomena is again
observed at c/b = 0.0. It may be due to the
higher restraints at c/b = 0.0 and 0.5.
Node with u, v, w, θx, θy degrees of freedom
Node with u, v, θx, θy degrees of freedom 140
130 c/b
Figure 3. Different types of plate 120 bp p
0.0
11000 P c
P 0.2
The ratio of thickness of plate to the width of 10000
0.3
9000
0.4
the plate (h/b) is considered as 0.01, the 8000 0.5
7000
length to breadth ratio (a/b) is 1.0 and the 6000
5000
material properties E11/E22 = 25, G12/E22 = 4000
load changes towards the centre of panel, the Ply orientation (+/+/-)
value of γcr generally increases and attains Figure 6. Variation of tensile γcr for
maximum γcr at c/b = 0.5 and θ = (±0o)2. different edge load length from both ends
However, the value of γcr continuously and ply-orientations.
decreases with the further increased ply-angle
171
Rajanna et al.
80
75
b
P/2 P/2 c/2
F formation of compressive zone at some
70
Non-dimensional frequency ( ) 65
P/2
simply supported panel
P/2 c/2 E locations of panel.
60
55 D
50
45
40
CONCLUSION
35
30
c/b In case of tensile load, the frequency initially
A 0.0
25
B 0.1
20 C
C 0.2
increases with the load and starts decreasing
15
D 0.3
10
5
B E 0.4 at certain values of load. But, when the load
A F 0.5
0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400
is compressive, the natural frequency keeps
Non-dimensional load ( decreasing. As expected, the fundamental
Figure 7. Variation of (ω
̅ ) vs. tensile load frequency becomes zero at respective
for (15/-15)2 layup stiffened panel. buckling load. The compressive buckling
load is more pronounced at θ = (±0)2 for c/b
TENSILE BUCKLING OF STIFFENED = 0.0 and 0.5 and θ = (±30)2 to (±45)2 for c/b
PANELS = 0.1 to 0.4. In case of tensile load, the γcr is
It is observed from Fig. 5 that the tensile significant at (±0)2 layup and it is keep on
buckling load γcr increases with the increased decreasing with the increased ply-angles.
c/b and found to be significant at higher c/b
(= 0.5) and insignificant at c/b = 0.0. It may REFERENCES
be due to the fact that the buckling load Butalia T S Kant T and Dixit V D 1990
depends on the strength and area of Performance of heterosis element for
compressive zone. This compressive zone bending of skew rhombic plates
rapidly decreases with the increased tensile Computers and Structures 34(1) 23-49.
zone at higher c/b ratio and resulting rapidly Kumar L R Datta P K and Prabhakara D L
increase of tensile buckling loads. 2003 Tension buckling and dynamic
stability behaviour of laminated
The same phenomenon can also be observed
composite doubly curved panels
for the stiffened plate with edge load from subjected to partial edge loading
both ends as shown in Fig. 6. In this case, the Composite structures 60(2) 171-181.
tensile buckling loads are comparatively less
Leissa A W and Ayoub E F 1988 Vibration
as compared to that of the previous case and buckling of a simply supported
(tensile load from one edge). It may be rectangular plate subjected to a pair of
attributed to the formation of compressive in-plane concentrated forces Journal of
zone nearer to the weaker portion of the panel Sound and Vibration 127(1) 155-171.
i.e., central zone of the panel. It is also Rajanna T Banerjee S Desai Y M and
observed from Figs 5 and 6 that there is no Prabhakara D L 2016 Effect of partial
appreciable variation in the buckling load edge loading on vibration and buckling
beyond (30o)2 ply-orientation. characteristics of stiffened composite
plates Latin American Journal of Solids
and Structures, an ABCM Journal
VIBRATION OF STIFFENED PANELS 13(5) 854-879.
It is observed from Fig. 7 that the natural Satish Kumar Y V and Mukhopadhyay M
frequency initially increases with the load. As 2000 A new triangular stiffened plate
the load further increases, the frequency element for laminate analysis
starts decreasing and becomes zero at the Composites Science and Technology
onset of tensile buckling load. The deceasing 60(6) 935-943.
nature of frequency is mainly due to the
172
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
can be exploited for testing purposes, their The geometry and configuration of bonded
applicability in an industrial context is not tubular socket joint analyzed is shown in
straightforward. The recent development of Figure 1. The socket and both the tubes of
nanotechnologies and their applications in the tubular socket joint are made of Gr/E
adhesives lead to strong improvements in laminated FRP composites (T300/934) with
terms of mechanical properties of the ply configuration [0/90] s. The material
polymer and of the joint. It is possible to vary properties along with their strength values
continuously the elastic modulus of the for tubes/socket and adhesive are shown in
adhesive by controlling the percentage of Table 1 and 2. The adhesive thickness (δ =
reinforcement, obtaining so called 0.1 mm), total length of the structure (2L =
functionally graded adhesives (FGA) 178 mm), outer radius of tube (r1 = 14.4
[Spaggiari A et al. & Stapleton S et al. 2012]. mm), outer radius of socket (r2 = 16 mm),
Kumar and Scanlan (2010) also provided an tube thickness (t1 = 1 mm), coupling
analytical framework study for stress analysis thickness (t2 =1.5 mm), coupling length (2c
of a shaft-tube bonded joint using a = 26 mm) and gap between the tubes (g =
variational technique. Functionally modulus 0.2 mm) have been adopted from literature
graded bond line (FMGB) adhesives were [Das and Pradhan, 2011]. The adhesively
employed in order to reduce peak peel and bonded tubular socket joint structure
shear stress levels. Those investigators found subjected to axial loading of 10 MPa is
that there was a significant decrease in peak considered for stress analysis. Two types of
peel and shear stress levels in FMGB adhesives namely mono-modulus and
compared to those of mono-modulus functionally graded adhesives are used to
adhesive materials. However, their research bond both the tubes with socket. The
was limited to tubular joint made of isotropic material gradation profile for functionally
adherends. graded bond line is expressed as:
for (± c/2 ≤ z ≤ ± c)
and modulus ratio ‘R’ is expressed as
(3)
174
Stress and Failure Analysis of Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Tubular Socket Joint of Laminated
FRP Composites
Ez 127.50 (GPa)
Er 4.80 (GPa)
Eθ 9.00 (GPa)
Gzr= Gzθ 4.80 (GPa)
Gθr 2.55 (GPa)
υzr = υzθ 0.28
υθr 0.41
Figure 3. Peel stress (σrr) distribution
along the interface of tube and adhesive
Table 2. Elastic properties of epoxy
with varied modulus ratios 'R' for graded
adhesive
tubular socket joint.
E 2.8 (GPa)
υ 0.4 The peel and shear stress distributions at the
interface of tube and adhesive are shown in
Figures 3 and 4. Modulus ratio 'R=1' refers
to mono-modulus adhesive. Figures 3 and 4
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
show that peel and shear stress magnitudes
Adhesively bonded tubular socket joint are maximum at both the free edges of
experiences two vital modes of mechanical coupling region and at the centre of the
failure; failure onset at the tube/socket- joint. However, highest magnitude of
adhesive interfaces due to excessive peel stresses are observed at both the free ends of
and shear stresses and cohesive failure coupling region. Further, effects of graded
within adhesive bond layer. Such failure adhesive on magnitudes of peel and shear
occurs/propagates from the stress singularity stresses are clearly reflected from Figures 3
points which are called interfacial failures. and 4. Results indicate that when there is
175
Panigrahi and Nimje
CONCLUSIONS
Tubular socket joint with functionally
graded adhesive will retard the possibility of
failure initiation by reducing peak levels of
out-of-plane stresses by which structural
integrity of joint can be improved
significantly.
REFERENCES
Cognard J Y 2008 Numerical analysis of
edge effects in adhesively-bonded
176
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Conventional metallic structural joints with mechanical fasteners and weld
joints are rapidly being replaced with composite bonded joints for the last few decades
in the aerospace industry. This is because of their high strength to weight ratio, lesser
cost and low stress concentrations. Slowly, such joints are getting adapted in various
industries including automotive sector. Experimental evaluations require specialized
equipment and skilled technicians which are time consuming and costly. Analytical
methods are too idealistic as various assumptions are involved. Finite Element
Method overcomes these limitations and evaluates precise results. Accurate modeling
of adhesively bonded joints remains a challenging task. In this paper geometrically
non-linear 3D models are used for both the adherend (CFRP) and the adhesive
(epoxy) in the lap joint which is subjected to tensile loads to analyse the de-bonding
behaviour, loads and stresses. The results are compared with the experimental data
available.
Keywords: FEA; CFRP; lap joint; geometric non-linearity.
hybrid (bolted/bonded) joints with flexible bonded joints are being included in the global
adhesives. They did 2D plane strain and 3D models where adhesive layer is discretised
analyses, and used the hyper-elastic Mooney– with very fine meshes resulting in high
Rivlin potentials to model flexible adhesives. degree of freedom model.
Campilho (2012) et al. developed a FE model In this paper finite element model of a single
of single-lap joint based on cohesive zone lap bonded joint with composite adherend is
model (CZM), and discussed the influence of modeled with the aim of establishing the
the cohesive law parameters of a triangular model as accurately as possible. The model
CZM. and properties are referred from the work of
Nowadays, as we have achieved a good Jianfeng Li et al. (2015).
progress in computational capabilities, the
Table 1. Properties
CFRP (T300 /QY8911) J116B
E 1 =135 GPa, E 2 =8.8 GPa, E=1 GPa
E3=8.8 GPa, G 12 = 4.5 GPa, G=0.38 GPa
G 23 = 4 GPa, G 13 = 4.5 GPa, ν=0.3, σ =14 MPa
ν 12 =0.33, ν 23 =0.35, ν 31 =0.0216 τ =14 MPa
ρ = 1414 kg/m3 ρ = 600 kg/m3
178
Non-linear 3D Finite Element Analysis of Adhesively Bonded CFRP Lap Joint
The adhesive layer was meshed using 10 Figure 3 shows the load vs. displacement
elements through its thickness to capture the curve from finite element analysis which
stresses and deformations accurately. The shows that the failure load is 7.5 kN. Curves
meshing in the adherends in the joint region for different adherend thicknesses are not
was same as that of adhesive layer in loading shown here.
direction and width wise. Figure 2 shows the
meshing in x and y axis in which area in
contact with the adhesive layer is densely
meshed. Since the most important effects
occur at the overlap ends, refinement of the
mesh in this region would improve the
accuracy of the model. In this example a
uniform mesh models the whole overlap;
however, the use of finer meshes in those
regions where stress concentrations are
expected is recommended.
CONCLUSION
The finite element model of the joint is
established. We can see that the behaviour of
the graph is non-linear and this non-linearity
increases with increase in adherend thickness.
We can easily plot shear stress curve and peel
stress curve along the adhesive length of the
Figure 1. Lap Joint joint.
REFERENCES
Banea M D da Silva L F M 2009 P I Mech
Eng L-J Mater 223(1) 1.
Campilho R D S G Banea M D Neto J A B P
da Silva L F M 2012 Modelling of
single lap joints using cohesive zone
models: effect of the cohesive
parameters on the output of the
Figure 2. FE mesh of the joint simulations Journal of Adhesion Science
and Technology 88 513–33.
RESULTS
179
Singh et al.
180
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper, the stochastic natural frequency for laminated composite
plates is mapped by using Kriging model. The Kriging model is employed as
surrogate and is trained by using Latin hypercube sampling. Subsequently the
stochastic first three natural frequencies are quantified with Kriging based uncertainty
quantification algorithm. The convergence of the proposed algorithm for stochastic
natural frequency analysis of composite plates is verified and validated with original
finite element method (FEM). The sample size and computational cost are reduced by
employing the present approach compared to traditional Monte Carlo simulation
(MCS).
Keywords: Composite plate; Kriging; uncertainty quantification; stochastic
natural frequency
GOVERNING EQUATIONS
A laminated composite cantilever plates is
considered as shown in Figure 1. An eight
noded isoparametric quadratic element is
considered in finite element formulation.
Using Hamilton’s principle and Lagrange’s
equation, the dynamic equilibrium equation Figure 1. Laminated composite plate
for the equation of motion of free vibration
system can be expressed as KRIGING MODEL
(1)
[ M (ω )] [δ] + [ K (ω )] {δ } = 0 The Kriging model [Cressie, 1990] postulates
In the above equation, M( ω ) and [K( ω )] are a combination of a known function employed
the mass and stiffness matrix, respectively for simulation of required output (natural
and {δ} is the vector of generalized frequency) is expressed as,
coordinates. The governing equations are (3)
y ( x) = y0 ( x) + Z ( x)
derived based on Mindlin’s theory
incorporating transverse shear deformation. where y(x) is the unknown function of
For free vibration, the random natural interest, x is an m dimensional vector (m
frequencies [ω n (ω ) ] are determined from the design variables), y0 ( x) is the known
standard eigenvalue problem using QR approximation (usually polynomial) function
iteration algorithm. For the composite plate, and Z(x) represents is the realization of a
the natural frequencies of are obtained as: stochastic process with mean zero, variance,
1 (2) and nonzero covariance. The covariance
ω 2j (ω ) =
λ j (ω ) matrix of Z(x) is given as
(4)
Cov[ Z ( x ) , Z ( x )] = σ R [ R ( x , x )]
i j 2 i j
where j = 1, 2, 3, . . . . . . . . , nmod e
where R is a (p × p) correlation matrix and
Here λ j (ω ) is the j -th eigenvalue of matrix
R(xi, xj) is the correlation function between
A = K −1 (ω ) M (ω ) and nr indicates the any two of the p-sampled data points xi and
number of modes retained in this analysis. xj. R is an (p x p) symmetric matrix with ones
along the diagonal. The correlation function
To implement the effects of material and
R(xi, xj) is specified by the user, and a variety
manufacturing uncertainties, a set of random
of correlation functions exist. Using Gaussian
variables representing laminate mechanical
correlation function
properties, density and orientation angles is
n 2
chosen. The randomness in these variables R( x , x ) = exp − ∑ θ k xki − xkj
i j
(5)
can be quantified either experimentally or k =1
using simulation codes. To the best of the
182
Stochastic Natural Frequency of Composite Plates using Kriging Model
where n is the number of design variables, θ k considered in the present analysis are as
is the unknown correlation parameters used to follows:
fit the model, and xki and xkj are the k-th (a) Variation of ply-orientation angle only:
components of the sample points x i and x j ,
θ (ω ) = {θ1 θ 2 θ 3 ........θ i ......θ l }
respectively. The predicted estimates, ŷ of (b) Combined variation of ply orientation
the response y (x) at random values of x are angle, elastic and shear modulus and mass
density:
defined as Kriging predictor
g {θ (ω ), E1 (ω ), E 2 (ω ), G12 (ω ), G23 (ω ),
yˆ ( x) = βˆ + r T ( x) R −1 [ y − f βˆ ] (6) µ12 (ω ), ρ (ω )} = { Φ 1 (θ1 ..θ l ), Φ 2 ( E1(1) ..E1(l ) ),...
.....Φ 3 ( E 2 (1) ..E 2 (l ) ) ,Φ 4 (G12 (1) ..G12 (l ) ),
The estimate of variance between underlying ......Φ 5 (G23(1) ..G23(l ) ), Φ 6 ( µ12 (1) ..µ12 (l ) ),
global model β̂ and y is estimated by
.......Φ 7 ( ρ1 ..ρ l )}
where θ i , E 1(i) , E 2(i) , G 12i , G 23(i) , μ 12(i) and
1
σˆ 2 = ( y − f βˆ ) T R −1 ( y − f βˆ ) (7) ρ i are the ply orientation angle, elastic
p moduli, shear moduli, Poisson ratio and mass
where y is the column vector of length p that density, respectively and ‘l’ denotes the
contains the sample values of the frequency number of layer in the laminate. In present
responses and f is a column vector and study, three layered graphite-epoxy
βˆ = ( f T R −1 f ) −1 f T R −1 y and symmetric angle-ply laminated composite
r T ( x) = [ R( x, x1 ), R( x, x 2 ),....R( x, x p ) ]T with cantilever shallow plate is considered with
deterministic length, width and thickness of
the sample data points {x1 , x 2 ,...............x p } .
1 m, 1 m and 5 mm, respectively. Material
Now the model fitting is accomplished by properties of graphite–epoxy composite [Qatu
maximum likelihood (i.e., best guesses) for and Leissa, 1991a] considered with
θ k . The maximum likelihood estimates (i.e., deterministic mean value as E 1 = 138.0 GPa,
“best guesses”) for the θ k in Eq. (5) used to E 2 = 8.96 GPa, G 12 = 7.1 GPa, G 13 = 7.1
fit a Kriging model are obtained as GPa, G 23 = 2.84 GPa, μ = 0.3, ρ=1600 kg/m3.
Max. Γ (θ k ) = −
1
2
[
p ln(σˆ 2 ) + ln R ]
(8) Table 1 presents the finite element mesh
convergence study for non-dimensional
where the variance σ2 and |R| are both fundamental natural frequencies validated
functions of θ k , is solved for positive values with results obtained by Qatu and Leissa
of θ k as optimization variables. After (1991b). Figure 2 represents the probability
obtaining Kriging based surrogate, the density plot for validation of results obtained
random process Z(x) provides the by Kriging model with traditional Monte
approximation error that can be used for Carlo simulation (MCS). Figure 3 shows the
improving the surrogate model. scatter plot for validation of Kriging model
with original finite element model.
STOCHASTIC APPROACH BY
KRIGING CONCLUSIONS
The layer-wise stochasticity in material and This presents a Kriging based approach for
geometric properties are considered as input uncertainty quantification in natural
parameters. The individual and combined frequencies of laminated composite plates.
cases of layer-wise random variations The computational cost is reduced by using
Kriging compared to MCS. The results are
183
Dey et al.
presented for fundamental natural frequency geometric properties to illustrate the proposed
considering individual and combined approach.
stochasticity in ply orientation, material and
184
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
SOLUTION METHODS
Steady state and pressure-based solution for
absolute velocity formulation was done for
(b) both the cases.
Figure 1. (a) Isometric view of The turbulence models solved for the domain
computational domain for uniform cylinder; were viscous standard and realizable 𝑘 − 𝜀
(b) Zoomed in view of mesh
models. In general, 𝑘 − 𝜀 turbulence model is
the most commonly used two-equation model
for the simulation of turbulent characteristics
of flow. It gives the description of turbulence
by solving two partial difference ‘transport’
equations.
The simulation for all the cases were done for
an average velocity 0.33 m/s applied on the
(a)
inlet boundary. For pressure-velocity
coupling, SIMPLE scheme was adopted.
186
Numerical Modelling of Flow Around Cylindrical Bridge Piers with and Without Pile Cap
experimental results at few locations and dimensional flow field around circular
found to be in reasonable agreement. piers Journal of Hydraulic Engineering
130 91-100
Beheshti A A and Ataie-Ashtiani B 2010
Experimental study of 3-dimensional
flow field around a complex bridge pier
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 136
143-154
Fluent Manual 2012 Manual of FLUENT
ANSYS FLUENT
(a)
(b)
Figure 5. Comparison of Stream-wise
velocity profiles obtained in Numerical
Simulation and Experiments: (a) For
Uniform Cylinder; (b) For Cylinder with
Pile Cap.
REFERENCES
Ali K H M 2002 Simulation of flow around
piers Journal of Hydraulic Research 40
161-174
Salaheldin T M, Imran J and Chaudhry M H
2004 Numerical modeling of three-
188
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Upon taking moments with suitable moment Taking moments with suitable moment
function vector one can recover the Euler
equations of gas dynamics. function and using the
linearity property of moment operator one
GOVERNING EQUATIONS can obtain
where
where
190
Modified Kinetic Streamlined-Upwind Petrov Galerkin Method for Euler Equations of Gas Dynamics
Figure 1. Sod’s shock tube problem Figure 2. Lax’s shock tube problem
191
Jagtap Ameya
CONCLUSION
In this paper a modified KSUPG (m-KSUPG)
scheme based on thermal velocity is
proposed. Proposed scheme is free from
computationally expensive error and
exponential functions and hence it is more
efficient than the KSUPG scheme. Moreover,
192
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Shock wave boundary layer interaction (SWBLI) along with real gas
effects is studied numerically in the present work. Both the phenomena have
potential to influence strongly the aerothermodynamics of the flow. For present
numerical investigations, a finite volume unstructured solver is employed to solve
coupled Navier Stokes and species continuity equations. Convective fluxes are
calculated using well known AUSM scheme and tested in high enthalpy ramp
induced SWBLI case. All flow features like separation shock, reattachment shock,
separation region, plateau pressure etc. were found very well captured by present
solver. In present study, the effects of wall condition and leading edge bluntness on
SWBLI are also examined. Adiabatic wall condition is found to show more
upstream influence, separation bubble size and high plateau pressure and hence,
strong interaction is observed in comparison with isothermal wall condition. Efforts
are made herein to verify mitigation of SWBLI by providing leading edge
bluntness. For present free stream conditions, leading edge bluntness made SWBLI
strong rather than weak. Therefore, prior study is required for effective
implementation of blunt leading edge SWBLI mitigation technique.
Keywords: Real gas effects; Shock wave boundary layer interaction; blunt
leading edge
Some of the earlier findings in SWBLI deal real gas effects in SWBLI cases.
with perfect gas assumption [John et al.,
2014; Marini, 1998; Coët and Chanetz, RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
1993] wherein various flow features like To assess SWBLI with real gas effects,
upstream influence location, separation freestream Mach number M ∞ =7, static
bubble size, peak pressure and peak heat temperature T ∞= 600 K and pressure
transfer rate are predicted with assumption P ∞= 1600 Pa are considered. For present
of ideal gas flow. Later few studies are laminar conditions, a sharp leading edge
concentrated on high enthalpy effects in flat-plate geometry of length 50 mm
their SWBLI investigations [Tchuen et al. followed by a 15o inclined compression
2008; Davis and Sturtevant, 2000] and ramp is taken for investigations. This
various other cases [Desai et al., 2016]. freestream and geometry conditions are
Some of the studies verified the earlier tested in various cases for different gas
literature reported co-relations for the models.
upstream influence location, separation
bubble size, peak heat flux and plateau EFFECT OF WALL CONDITION
pressure by the numerical simulation based
results [John and Kulkarni, 2014]. In present studies, adiabatic and isothermal l
(T w - 500K) wall conditions are tested for
In view of such limited findings for SWBLI earlier described conditions. A Mach
at high enthalpy conditions, present contour obtained from numerical simulation
investigations are planned to analyse the is shown in Figure. 1 for adiabatic wall
proposed interaction for 15° ramp attached conditions. In this figure, all flow features
to a flat plate. Reacting flow version of in are found very well captured. Wall skin
house developed solver USHAS friction coefficient and pressure distribution
(Unstructured Solver For Hypersonic are plotted in Figure. 2 (a) and Figure. 2 (b)
Aerodthermodynamic Applications) has for both cases. More upstream influence,
been employed herein. This version of the high plateau pressure and high re-
solver accounts for five species (N 2 , O 2 , attachment shock are evident from Figure. 2
NO, O and N) with temperature dependent (b) for adiabatic wall condition. Here, skin
properties and eleven prominent friction coefficient plot is used for accurate
dissociation-recombination reactions among estimation of separation bubble size. The
them. There is a provision in this version of stream wise negative region length of skin
USHAS by which reaction part of the solver friction coefficient gives idea of separation
can be made silent to simulate the frozen bubble size. The obtained separation bubble
flow condition. For present simulations, sizes are tabulated for all gas models in
AUSM scheme is used for inviscid flux Table 1. It was noticed that adiabatic wall
computations. Studies with perfect, frozen condition shows much larger separation
and non-equilibrium flow solvers are region in comparison to isothermal wall
conducted to evaluate the prominence condition which is consistent in all gas
between thermal and chemical non- models. Higher upstream influence, thicker
equilibrium in this SWBLI. Such hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer,
investigations are found essential in case of larger wall gradients are the main reasons
SWBLI in the presence of high temperature for the same.
real gas.
CONCLUSIONS
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY SWBLI with high enthalpy free stream
Governing equation of two dimensional conditions have been demonstrated in
(2D) N-S equations and species continuity present study. It was found that frozen and
equations are solved for investigation of non-equilibrium flow shows almost same
194
High Enthalpy Simulations for Shock Wave Boundary Layer Interaction
trend whereas differences have been upstream influence, large separation bubble
observed with respect to perfect gas flow. It size, high plateau pressure are noticed in
is noticed that the real gas tend to reduce the adiabatic wall case in comparison to
size of the separation bubble. High isothermal case.
Figure 1. Mach number contour for SWBLI simulations for reacting gas flow
with adiabatic wall condition.
b).
Figure 2. Effect of wall conditions on distribution of wall parameters (Reacting
gas model). a).Surface skin friction coefficient & b). Surface pressure.
195
Desai et al.
196
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This project aims to establish the correlation between test results and CFD
simulation. Also sensitivity of different turbulence models has been studied. To
establish comparative results (±10% test result) exact modelling of wind tunnel is
must. Experimental test has been performed in Air flow performance tester and CFD
simulation is carried out with FEM based CFD solver ‘Acusolve’. The inputs for the
axial fan are volumetric flow rate (m3/hr) and speed (rpm). Final answer is pressure
difference between outlet and inlet. By changing volume flow rate and rpm the graph
between pressure difference (Pa) and rpm is drawn. Different cases by changing mesh
and zone refinement are compared and also different turbulence model such as Spalart
Allmaras (SA), SST model are discussed. Modelling of fan done by using solid
works, for surface meshing ‘Hypermesh’ had been used.
Keywords: CFD; Sensitivity; FEM; Volumetric flow rate; Zone refinement;
Volume meshing; Boundary condition.
198
Design and Testing of Axial Fans for Cooling Engines
u t =ῤ ῠf v1
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
x3
f v1= The main aim of this work is to match test
x3+ Cv13
results with CFD simulation results by
ῠ
x= changing parameters like rpm and flow rate
𝑣
and getting results in the form of pressure
The wall-damping function, fv 1 , is a damping difference at inlet and outlet. From figure6 it
factor between zero and one. At high is clear that with refinement of mesh around
Reynolds numbers the function tends to unity fan and also because of adding zone mesh at
and is equal to the kinematic turbulent downstream for SA answers are within 10%
viscosity. The viscosity affected region of the range to test results. But still for higher rpm
boundary layer must be solved, which at 3370 and 3326 answers are not acceptable.
requires a y+-value of approximately one. So for this reason SST is used for finer mesh
by keeping all other conditions same.
KW SST MODEL
Because of changing turbulence equation
The k-ω SST turbulence model, proposed by from SA to SST answers are within range of
Menter (1993), combines the stable 10% of actual test results (see figure7). From
performance of the k turbulence model in the this is understood that by SA is predicting a
free stream region with the k-ω model which flow for lower rpm and for higher rpm SA is
is characterized by the simplistic yet accurate not as accurate as SST. So to validate this
prediction of the near-wall region. These two point rpm kept constant at 3150 only mass
models are added together by a blending flux is changed and this is solved by using
function which activates the appropriate SA as turbulance equation (see graph
model in the separate regions. It also allows figure8). For rpms lower than 3250 SA is
for smooth transition between the two giving answers which are within 10% of the
models. Furthermore, performance in flows actual test results. But for rpms more than
with adverse pressure gradients and wake 3250 SA is not as accurate as SST. From this
regions are improved by limiting turbulent it is clear that for CFD analysis of axial fan
viscosity. This model proves to be reliable for this air performance tester actual
and accurate for a wide variety of flows. modelling of test setup, with proper meshing
at critical regions and selection of turbulence
SOLUTION PROCEDURE equation creates big impact on final
Actual modelling of fan is to be done by simulation answer.
considering inlet same as that of tunnel From figure6 it is clear that SA is giving
dimensions and outlet to replicate same test predicting good results except for two rpms
conditions. Also in actual case fan is tested that is at 3370 and 3326rpm. So for these two
with back mount (shroud) which is also to be cases velocity magnitudes are generated to
added in geometry. First grid independence compare the flow capture around fan in SA
study is to be done with two different types and SST. For convergence the solution is run
of mesh, coarse and fine. In finer mesh, zone for 100 iterations at 20 CPU’s for 2hrs. SST
mesh and finer mesh around fan is
199
Abdulazeem et.al.
is combination of Kw and K it is more accurate than SA. Upto certain rpm range SA
accurate for higher speeds than the SA predicts well but after that limit it is difficult
model. From following figure it is clear that to get accurate solution, so SST can be used
SA is not capturing the flow seperation which above those levels. Here pressure drop is
is occuring at the back mount, which is easily increases as mass flux is decreasing, this is
capturable by the SST. If rpm is below 3250 because of vaccum effect created by fan.
SA is predicting good flow and giving
answers within range of 10% of actual test
results.
20
Test_resul
10 ts
Pressure difference
Coarse_m
esh
Fine_mes
0 h
15 Error band
Pressure_difference
Test_results
10 Finemesh_SA
5 Finemesh_SST
Figure 10 Velocity magnitude comparison
0 between SST and SA for 3370 rpm
3000 3100 3200 3300 3400
-5 RPM REFERENCES
Figure 7 Graph rpm vs pressure Jain S and Deshpande Y 2009 CFD
difference for finer mesh by using SA and modelling of a Radiator Axial Fan for
SST Air Flow Distribution International
12 Journal of Mechanical, Aerospace,
10
Industrial, Mechatronic and
Manufacturing Engineering 6.
Pressure difference
8
Test_results
6 Dushyant D. Devendra Singh D. 2013 CFD
Simulation_
4 SA Analysis of Axial Flow Fans with
2
Skewed Blades International Journal of
Emerging Technology and Advanced
0
0 0.5 Mass_flux 1 1.5 Engineering 3(10).
Mohd Yusoff S Azraai S B Wan Mokhtar
Figure 8 Graph mass flux vs pressure Wan Abdullah 2009 CFD Modelling of
difference at constant rpm by using SA Air Flow Distribution from a Fan
International Conference on
CONCLUSION Applications and Design in Mechanical
The flow of axial fan around region is studied Engineering 11 – 13
numerically and through simulation. By using Tushar C A Shivprakash B 2014 Design and
AcuSolve it is easy to match test results with Analysis of Engine Cooling Fan
simulation results. Also efficiency of International Journal of Current Engg
simulation can be controlled within range of and Technology ISSN 2277 INPRESSO.
10% efficiency. From work it is clear that for
such type of applications SST is more
200
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Aakalan is a new numerical solver for applications that require high
accuracy. It has been designed to work with structured, unstructured or polyhedral
meshes. Aakalan maintains high accuracy of the numerical solutions by using
quadratic interpolations for spatial reconstruction of all variables and their gradients.
Numerical problems involving incompressible and compressible fluid flow and heat
transfer are solved using a segregated pressure based finite volume method.
Additionally, a series of new higher order limiters have been developed to solve
problems involving discontinuities and extremely high gradients. Aakalan can thus
become a very effective tool for engineers, designers and researchers working in
many different areas like aerodynamics, multiphase reacting flows, aero-acoustics,
electro-magnetics etc.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; CFD; Unstructured mesh; High accuracy;
Higher order scheme; Quadratic interpolation;Higher order limiters.
202
AAKALAN- A Third Order Finite Volume Solver for Unstructured Meshes
made of triangles only. The solver is able to The next problem is chosen to demonstrate
resolve the shock very well. This problem the performance of the solver on a
shows that the flux limiters used in Aakalan computational mesh made of different cell
work equally well with unstructured meshes. types. Figure 4 shows contours of x-direction
velocity for flow over a sphere with Reynolds
number of one hundred. The computational
mesh used for solution of this problem is
made of triangular non-uniform prisms near
the solid boundary and non-uniform
tetrahedra away from the boundary. Some of
the cells in this mesh are highly non-
orthogonal and skewed. The drag coefficient
due to the flow around the sphere is
calculated to be 1.2 using this mesh. This
Figure 2.Mach 2.0 flow over a wedge. value is slightly higher than the
experimentally determined value of
The next problem is chosen to test the
approximately 1.0 (Munson et al. 1990).
working of the solver with high aspect ratio
However, the error in the drag coefficient can
cells. The variation of skin friction
be reduced by using a computational grid
coefficient (c f ) with Reynolds number for
R R
CONCLUSIONS
Figure 3.Variation of skin friction A new third order finite volume solver for
coefficient (c f ) with Reynolds number for
R R
generic unstructured meshes has been
turbulent flow over a flat plate. developed. All variables and gradients are
203
Bapat C.
204
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The numerical solution for the unsteady incompressible viscous flow in a
rectangular cavity [Dalai, 2014] is obtained by solving the time dependent
ω n +1
=
(d x ) ( )
− c xij ω ijn++11 + d x + c xij ω ijn−+11 solution is obtained when
ij
1 + 2d x + 2d y ψ ij − ψ ij ≤ 10 and ω ij − ω ij ≤ 10 .
n +1 n −10 n +1 n −10
+
(d y ) ( )
− c yij ω in++11j + d y + c yij ω in−+11j + ω ijn
...(5)
First the results are obtained in the lid-
driven square cavity for validation purpose.
1 + 2d x + 2d y These results are validated with Erturk et al.
(2005). The Figure 1 shows that the
and computed u and v-velocity profiles along the
ψ ijn+1 + ψ ijn−1 ψ in+1 j + ψ in−1 j center of the cavity match very well with
+ + ω ijn Erturk et al. (2005) velocity profiles at
∆x 2
∆y 2
Reynolds numbers 1000 and 20,000. The
ψ ijn +1 = ..(6)
2 2 present result is computed using grid sizes
+ 2
∆x 2
∆y 1002x1002 whereas the Erturk et al. (2005)
result is computed in the grid sizes 601x601.
∆t ∆t
Where d x = , c x ij = , The number of grid points for the rectangular
Re ∆x 2
Re ∆y 2 cavity along x-direction is 257, 513 and 1002;
∆t ∆t and the number of grid points along y-
c xij = u ijn , c yij = v ijn and Δx and Δy are
2∆x 2∆y direction is computed by multiplying the
the grid sizes along the x and y-directions aspect ratio (A) with the corresponding grid
respectively. points along the abscissa. Using these grid
sizes, the solutions were computed up to
The vorticity value along the boundary walls maximum Reynolds number 20,000. The
are evaluated from Eq.(4) using Taylor series results have been computed for aspect ratio
expansion. The coupled Eq.(1) and (2) along range 0.1 to 0.9. The study of flow properties
with boundary conditions, Eq.(3) & (4) are includes the observation of stream function
solved using Gauss-Seidel iteration and vorticity contours in the cavity and
techniques in a single loop. The time step thorough visualization of location of main
chosen for the solution is the CFL time step. sub-eddies in the first primary eddy and
Though the discretised Eq.(1) is implicit in counter rotating primary eddy.
nature but the time step chosen for that
scheme is explicit in nature. The steady state
Figure 1(a) u-
Figure 1 (b) v-
Figure 1©u- Figure 1(d) v-
velocity, Re=1000
velocity, Re=1000.
velocity, velocity, Re=20000
Re=20000.
Figure.1 Validation of u and v-velocity profiles at Reynolds number 1000 and 20,000.
206
Unsteady Flow in A Rectangular Lid-Driven Cavity
Figure 2(a) stream function contour at Figure 2(b) Stream function contour at
Re=100. Re=20,000.
Figure 3(a) The stream function contours Figure 3(b) The stream function contours
at Re=100. at Re=5000`
Figure 4 (a) The stream function contours Figure 4(b) The stream function contours
at Re=1000. at Re=15000.
counter rotating primary eddy can be said as downstream corner eddies with increase of
first type. Reynolds number in a particular aspect ratio
which shows the reverse trend to that of lid-
The Figure 3(a) shows a cavity of aspect ratio
driven square cavity.
0.4 in which the primary eddy does not
contain separatrix up to Reynolds number REFERENCE
1000. At Reynolds number 1000, the counter
Jagadish B S 1977 Numerical study of
rotating primary eddy is developed due to the
transient and steady induced symmetric
growth of left corner eddy along the lower
flows in rectangular cavities Journals of
horizontal wall of the cavity. This second
Fluids Engineering 526-530.
primary eddy is located near the left vertical
wall of the cavity. This counter rotating Dalai B Laha M K 2014 Chapter 4
primary eddy does not contain separatrix and Incompressible viscous flows in two and
it becomes full grown primary eddy at three dimensional lid-driven cavity PhD
Reynolds number 5000 as shown in Figure 3 thesis, Indian Institute of Technology
(b). This type of flow patterns are continued Kharagpur.
up to aspect ratio 0.6. This type of Erturk E Corke T C and Gockol C 2005
development of counter rotating primary Numerical solutions of 2-D steady
eddy can be said as second type. incompressible driven cavity flow at
From the Figure 4(a) and (b), the separatrix is high Reynolds numbers International
totally absent in the primary eddies in the Journal of Numerical Methods in Fluids
cavity of aspect ratio 0.7. Here the counter 48 747-774
rotating primary eddy is formed due to the Roache P J 1987 Chapter 8: Semidirect
growth of the left corner eddy and the methods for nonlinear equations of
secondary eddy along the left vertical wall of fluidynamics114 - 115 in Elliptic
the cavity. The number of counter rotating Marching Methods and Domain
primary eddies become two at Reynolds Decomposition CRC Press New York
number 15000. By that time the first primary
eddy has grown to a big circular primary
eddy as shown in Figure 4(b). It is also
observed that the appearance of the number
of counter rotating primary eddy increases as
the aspect ratio of the cavity is increased up
to 0.7 and that decreases suddenly when the
cavity reaches the aspect ratio 0.8. This type
of development of counter-rotating primary
eddy can be said as third type.
CONCLUSION
From the above discussion, it is clear that
there are essentially three types of
development of counter rotating primary
eddies within the aspect ratio range 0.1 to 0.9
and their appearance in aspect ratio ranges
are: (1) 0.1-0.3 for first type, (2) 0.4-0.6 for
second type and (3) 0.7-0.9 for third type.
Their location also varies for three ranges of
aspect ratios. Another close observation will
also ensure that the growth of the upstream
corner eddies become faster than the right
208
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
change of flow regime from laminar through In the present investigation, at constant
intermittent to turbulent. angular ribs of Ɵ = 60⁰ with six different
centre clearances were considered, i.e. C = 0,
0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 and 0.6. The geometrical
configuration of the circular tube with centre
cleared angular ribs discussed in the present
work is shown in Figure 1. Air enters the
channel at an inlet temperature, T in of 300 K
and wall temperature, T wall of 500 K.
Uniform wall temperature boundary
condition is considered with no slip. The
range of Reynolds number employed is
Figure 1 Schematic diagram of 10,000 to 1,00,000. At inlet, a uniform profile
computational domain is used with a level of turbulent intensity of
Varun et al. (2007) reviewed the geometry of 5% even in the laminar regime following
roughness used in heat exchangers and Abraham et al. (2009).
reported the optimum geometry of roughness The governing equations are discretized on a
that is adapted in case of solar air collectors. non-uniform structured grid using finite
Hans et al. (2009) studied the basic geometry volume method and transition - SST model
of roughness element employed by various has been used which predicts the change of
researchers to enhance the thermal efficiency flow regime from laminar through intermittent
of solar air heaters. In view of the search for to turbulent. The velocities and pressures
optimal roughness pattern, few decent were predicted using semi implicit pressure
roughness geometries have been compared linked equations (SIMPLE) scheme. The
on the basis of thermo-hydraulic interpolation of the gradients of velocities
performance. Bhushan et al. (2010) presented and temperature used the third-order accurate
their attempt to classify and examine the scheme. While the gradients for intermittency
geometry of artificial roughness used in the (γ), turbulent kinetic energy, specific
ducts of solar air collectors. Chandra et al. dissipation rate, and momentum thickness
(2003) explained the thermal characteristics used second order accurate upwind scheme.
in a square channel with continuous ribs on The discretized equations are then linearized
one, two, three, and four walls and found that using an implicit scheme and solved
the heat transfer and pressure drop increase iteratively using Ansys Fluent 15, 3d double
with the rise in the number of ribbed walls. precision solver. The convergence criteria for
It is evident from the review above the continuity, momentum and energy are set at
arrangement of inclined ribs inside a circular 10-4, 10-5, and 10-7 respectively.
duct provide better mixing; this new type of
ribs with holes could provide even better RESULT AND DISCUSSION
enhanced heat transfer from the wall. The
By doing computations, the result obtained
aim of this work will be to put forth the
findings of heat transfer and thermal for heat transfer and friction factor
performance of this novel inclined ribs characteristics in the plain channel are
attachment. verified in terms of Nusselt number and
friction factor. The predicted results from the
MATHEMATICAL MODEL proposed correlations are shown in Figure 2-
210
Numerical Simulation of the Turbulent Air Flow in the Narrow Circular Channel with Centre-Cleared
Rib Vortex Generator
3. According to this figures, the present heat transfer enhancement with similar trend
results are in good agreement with the Dittus pattern in comparison with the plain channel
Bolter correlation for Nusselt number and and thus, the Nu increases with the rise of
Blasius correlation for friction factor with Reynolds number. One can see from the
tolerances of ± 1.3 % and ± 1.5%, Figure 4 that the small centre cleared ribs
respectively. shows some promising result in terms of
Nusselt number. The rib with no centre
clearance gives the best result.
results in a swirl of the flow. The flow trough solar collector used in environmentally
blockage due to the presence of the ribs is a sound and increasingly cost effective solar
vital factor to cause a high pressure drop. The thermal electric power plants. Expecting that at
ribs nature causes a regular boundary layer higher Reynolds number the performance will
separation and re-attachment. be better also.
REFERENCES
Abraham J P Sparrow E M Tong J C K 2009
Heat transfer in all pipe flow regimes:
laminar, transitional/intermittent, and
turbulent International Journal of Heat
and Mass Transfer 52557–563.
Menter F Esch T Kubacki S 2002 Transition
modelling based on local variables
Proceediing of Fifth International
Symposium on Engineering Turbulence
Figure 6. Variation of Turbulence Modeling and Measurements Mallorca
Intensity with Reynolds number for Spain.
different centre clearance Varun S R P Singal S K 2007 A review on
Turbulent Intensity at the exit of the channel roughness geometry used in solar air
is shown in Figure 6. Turbulent dies out for heaters Solar Energy 81 1340–50.
low Reynolds number (Re = 1000) and
Hans V S Saini R P Saini J S 2009
increases with increasing Reynolds number.
At the entry of the tube the turbulent intensity Performance of artificially roughened
is given 5%. From the Figure 6, it can be seen solar air heaters—A review Renewable
that the highest level of turbulent intensity is and Sustainable Energy Reviews 13
about 15% at Reynolds number of 80,000 – 1854–1869.
1,00,000.
Bhushan B Singh R 2010 A review on
CONCLUSION methodology of artificial roughness used
in duct of solar air heaters Energy 35
The numerical friction factor and Nusselt 202–212
number data for turbulent flow through a
circular channel fitted with centre cleared ribs Chandra P R Alexander V R Han J C 2003
have been presented. The heat transfer in term Heat transfer and friction behaviour in
of Nusselt number has been evaluated. Centre rectangular channels with varying number
cleared ribs performs significantly better than of ribbed walls International Journal of
the plain channel. This research finding is Heat and Mass Transfer 46 481–495.
useful in designing tubes carrying solar
thermal air preheater mass of air in parabolic
212
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Free surface movement of fluid inside a tank has a significant impact on
the stability of an aerial vehicle and high speed automobiles. Another challenge is to
configure a tank to ensure a continuous fluid supply from tank to pickup line. Multi-
Phase Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Simulation helps engineers in better
visualization of free surface movement of fluid inside a tank caused by the
translational/rotational motion of the vehicle and assists in designing an anti-sloshing
tank of required payload capacity. 2D and 3D Simulation of a Rectangular tank of
dimensions (175x 175x 550 mm) with translational motion has been carried out in two
different methodology Grid movement method and Body force method . Water level
considered as 50% by volume.
Establishing a cost effective CFD methodology to predict the free surface movement
is the main focus of this paper. Grid movement method requires input as transient
velocity profile as against acceleration for Body force method. Although body force
method gives some ease in numerical point of view, Grid movement method
apparently mimics translational/rotational motion of a tank as in reality. Numerical
simulation is performed using open source solver OpenFOAM® and commercial
finite volume solver ANSYS Fluent. Computed results are in good agreement with
experimental observations available in literature.
Keywords: Sloshing; Grid Movement Method; Body Force Method; Correlation;
Open Source Solvers
surface which is governed by the Navier Where u is the velocity, p the pressure, ρ the
Stokes equation and continuity equation. density, g the acceleration of gravity, Fs is
𝜕𝑢 1 body force, and µ is Viscosity of the mixture.
+ ∇. (𝑢𝑢) = − ∇𝑝
𝜕𝑡 𝜌
𝜇
+ ∇. [ (∇𝑢 + ∇𝑢𝑇 )] + 𝜌𝑔
𝜌
+ 𝐹𝑠
𝛻. 𝑢 = 0 (2)
Mathematical point of view Body force and also validated with the experimental
method gives some ease whereas Grid results.
movement method apparently mimics the
reality. It is observed that before impact the fluid
inside the tank oscillates without any intense
SIMULATION CONDITIONS change in the centre of mass and the kinetic
energy of fluid is very minimal too. Peak
The tank is filled 50% by volume and
kinetic energy occurs at the time of impact
allowed to follow a rectilinear motion for
and extreme change in centre of mass
1.98 seconds and suddenly comes to a stop.
observed for few seconds post impact.
Please refer Khezzar et al.,(2009) for detailed
experimental procedure. The motion data To get the cost effective solution simulation
captured experimentally is shown in the is set up in Open Source solver:
Table.1. OpenFOAM®. Results from open source
simulation are also in line with the
Table 1. Operating conditions of the Tank
experimental and computational results by
Water level (%) 50 the commercial solver.
215
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Mixed convection in a square enclosure filled with porous medium having
two wavy vertical walls is studied numerically using our recently proposed higher
order compact (HOC) scheme proposed by Pandit and Chattopadhyay (2014). The top
and bottom walls of the enclosure are allowed to move in its own plane at a constant
speed, the bottom wall is heated nonuniformly while all other walls maintained at
constant cold temperature. The relevant parameters in the present study are Darcy
number ( Da ) ( 10 −3 ≤ Da ≤ 10 −1 ), Grashof number ( Gr ) = 10 4 , Prandtl number ( Pr )
( Pr = 0.71 ) and Reynolds number ( Re ) ( 10 ≤ Re ≤ 1000 ). Three cases are considered
depending on the direction of moving horizontal walls. The objective of this study is
to examine the flow field and heat transfer inside the cavity for different cases and
different values of parameters especially Darcy numbers, Reynolds numbers. The
results show that decreasing Darcy numbers and Reynolds numbers decrease the
strength of convection.
Key words: Mixed convection; Porous medium; HOC scheme; Nonuniform
heating.
sinusoidal temperature profile while for other wall is moving left. In case 3, both walls are
three walls including the wavy wall are moving in right direction. Bottom wall is
maintained at constant cold temperature. Al- heated sinusoidally with the expression
T ( x ) = [1 − cos( 2πx )]
Amiri et al. (2007) examined the momentum
and energy transport processes in a lid-driven
1
(3)
2
cavity with a wavy bottom surface. The The velocity boundary conditions are
cavity is exposed under a vertical temperature assumed to be no-slip on solid boundaries.
gradient by subjecting the bottom wall to a The fluid is assumed to be incompressible,
relatively higher temperature than the top lid. Newtonian and laminar. Here, fluid is air
with the Prandtl number 0.71.
Review of these previous studies indicates
that there are a very few studies with the The governing equations for unsteady mixed
effect of the moving walls during mixed convection flow using conservation of mass,
convection in the wavy enclosure to transport momentum and energy can be written in
of energy and momentum. The aim of the terms of non-dimensional streamfunction-
present study is to present a numerical model vorticity (ψ , ς ) formulation as follows:
to investigate the characteristics of flow and
∂ 2ψ ∂ 2ψ
thermal fields in wavy vertical surfaces with − − =ς (4)
∂X 2 ∂Y 2
horizontal moving walls. We have considered ∂ς 1 ∂ 2ς 1 ∂ 2ς ∂ς ∂ς 1
three different cases depending on the − − +u +v + ς
∂t Re ∂x 2
Re ∂y 2
∂x ∂y Re Da
direction of moving walls. The bottom wall Gr ∂T
= 2 (5)
heated sinusoidally while the other walls are Re ∂x
maintained at a constant cold temperature. ∂T 1 ∂ 2T 1 ∂ 2T ∂T ∂T
− − +u +v =0 (6 )
We have computed the results using our ∂t Re Pr ∂x 2 Re Pr ∂y 2 ∂x ∂y
recently proposed fourth order accurate The dimensionless boundary conditions are
compact scheme [Pandit and Chattopadhyay, as follows: u = 0, v = 0 and T = 0 for x = 0
2014] on nonuniform grids. and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
are not shown for the brevity of the Figure. 5 shows the heat transfer rates in
manuscript. terms of local Nusselt number on the bottom
wall for different Darcy numbers in all cases
Results are shown for various parameters
with Re=1000. It is observed that local heat
such as Darcy number ( Da ), Prandtl number
transfer rates increase with increases of
( Pr ), Grashof number ( Gr ) and Reynolds
Darcy number for mixed convection
number ( Re ). We have considered Da and
dominant regimes. It is also seen that due to
Re are within 10 −3 ≤ Da ≤ −10 −1 and sinusoidal temperature distribution, the local
10 ≤ Re ≤ 1000 respectively for the nusselt number curve is in sinusoidal type.
numerical simulations. The effect of Darcy
number for Pr =0.71, Re =1000 and CONCLUSIONS
Gr = 10 4 is shown in Figure. 2, Figure. 3 and Mixed convection flow within a wavy square
Figure. 4 for case-1, case-2 and case-3 enclosure filled with porous medium has
respectively. been studied in the present investigation.
Three cases are considered depending on the
In case-1, for Da = 10 −3 , as the Reynolds
direction of moving horizontal walls. The
number increases, the inner rotating cells
natural and forced convection effects are
moving more closely to the left top corner
prominent at higher Da ( Da = 10 −1 ). The
and right bottom corner which is shown by
streamline contours. With the increase in effect of mixed convection on the
Darcy number, streamlines show that the temperature distributions is further quantified
main circulation (anti-clockwise direction) by Nusselt number (Nu). The lid velocity
fills the entire cavity and minor cells effects significantly in all the cases for
(clockwise direction) visible near the middle different Darcy number and Reynolds
of wavy vertical walls of the enclosure (see numbers. It is also found that Nusselt
Figure. 2). It is noticed here that the strength numbers are quite small and having fewer
of the circulation increases as Darcy number variations with distance for low Darcy
numbers. Local heat transfer rates increase
increases. For Da = 10 −3 the value
with high Darcy number for mixed
ofψ max = 0.0254 , while for Da = 10 −1 , the convection dominant regimes. It is noted here
value ofψ max = 0.1126 , indicating more heat that in the full length paper we have
transfer within the cavity. In case-2 since the discussed more results in detail.
physical configureration is just opposite of REFERENCES
case-1, we see the mirror image of case-1
(see Figure. 3). In case-3 (see Figure. 4), we Adjlout L Imine O Azzi A and Belkadi M
observed that for all Darcy number two 2002 Laminar natural convection in an
inclined cavity with a wavy wall
symmetric circulation occur with respect to
International Journal of Heat and Mass
horizontal central line in which a clockwise Transfer 45 2141-2152.
rotating cell is induced by shear force near Al-Amiri A Khanafer K Bull J and Pop I
the upper wall and an anticlockwise rotating 2007 Effect of sinusoidal wavy bottom
cell near the bottom wall. As Da number surface on mixed convection heat
increases to Da = 10 −2 and Da = 10 −1 we see transfer in a lid-driven cavity
International Journal of Heat and Mass
that, together with the symmetrical
Transfer 50 1771-1780.
circulations, two small circulations attached Dalal A and Das M 2005 Laminar natural
near the middle of right wavy wall. convection in an inclined complicated
218
Chattopadhyay and Pandit
Figure 2. Case-1: Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71,
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
Figure 3. Case-2: Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71,
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
Figure 4. Case-3 Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71.
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
219
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
failure processes virtually impossible. In the diaphragm station coalesce to form the
order to conduct experiments frequently and shock front which propagates in to the low
tackle above situation, the design and pressure section (Anderson, 2003). As the
development of laboratory based blast shock front moves in to the low pressure
simulation without use of explosive is section, simultaneously, an expansion wave
indispensable. In order to design and propagates in the opposite direction of the
development of blast simulator there are two shock front until it reflects back from the end
methods: (a) Impact based, (b) Shock tube wall of the BHISM. This reflected expansion
based. There is limitation of impact based wave will move faster than the shock front
blast simulator, negative phase of the blast and at particular location expansion wave
wave will be not achieved but Shock tube will interact with the shock front in the driven
based blast simulator is simulating blast wave section of the BHISM. After interaction of
properly. reflected expansion wave with shock front we
will achieve similar profile as the above
This research deals with the design and
stated blast wave.
development of shock tube based blast and
heavy impact simulation mechanism
(BHISM) in laboratory condition which can
be used for the testing and validation of RC
structures and design methodologies.
can be used to adjust the length of driver of compressible flow. Inviscid viscous model
from 2 m to maximum up to 6 m to achieve is selected to neglect viscous dissipation in
proper Friedlander’s profile for particular current research. The boundary of shock tube
shock-over pressure. Carbon steel is selected is set as wall including end wall of the driver
for manufacturing of BHISM (This is due to section. The two zone of the shock tube is
the availability of large diameter pipe in this created using interior boundary condition.
material grade only). The cylindrical tube is End wall of the driven section is set as non-
mounted with flanges for connecting with reflecting surface in outlet boundary
each other using 32 no. of 30 mm diameter condition to make it open type shock tube
bolts. The end wall of shock tube is welded to which is requirement of BHISM. For the
circular tube and there is provision for filling tracking of transient shock wave explicit
gas in driver. The thickness of end wall is 50 formulation (four stage Runge – Kutta is
mm. The cross-section of driver is uniform of used) and AUSM flux type is selected for the
external diameter of 600 mm and thickness computation of flux vectors. For spatial
38 mm. The cross-section of driven section discretization least squares cell based
changes from 600 mm diameter circular gradient and to account convective terms 2nd
section to 3 m × 3 m square section. The order upwind scheme is selected. The CFL
material and thickness of diaphragm may number is set as 1 for the calculation of time
vary on the basis of test requirements but the step for stable solution and convergence
ultimate strength of choosen diaphram (also [Lamnaouer, 2010], (Fluent theory guide,
called bursting pressure) will never exceed release 15, 2013).
the maxium factored pressure (FOS = 3)
withstand by the wall of driver tube.
REFERENCES
Agrawal A K and Yi Z 2008 High Precision
Analysis of Blast Events on Highway
Figure 5:Variation of Pressure and shock Bridges University Transportation
front along longitudinal direction inside Research Center CCNY New York NY
BHISM after bursting of diaphragm at 10031.
time t= 5.50049 ms.
Anderson J D 2003 Modern compressible
flow with historical perspective.
McGraw – Hill New York 007 100665 6
206-213.
Ansys Fluent theory guide Release 15.0
Nov.2013 628-644
Gilbert F Kinney and Kenneth J Graham
2013 Explosive shocks in air Springer
Science & Business Media 978-3-642-
86682-1 1-17 88-106.
Figure 6: Variation of Pressure and shock Kleinschmit N and Feng R 2011 A Shock
fronts along longitudinal direction inside tube technique for blast wave simulation
BHISM after bursting of diaphragm and studies of flow structure Interactions
in shock tube blast experiments M. S.
thesis graduate school - University of
Nebraska-Lincoln 10-11.
Lamnaouer M 2010 Numerical modellig of
the shock tube flow fields before and
during ignition delay time experiments
at practical conditions Ph. D. thesis
Graduate school- University of Central
Florida Orlando and Flor 12-17.
Figure 7: Simulated Blast wave at various
location of driven section of BHISM
223
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: 3D transient CFD simulations have been performed to quantify the effect
of heat sources on the distribution of a cold helium pocket in a thermally stratified
vessel using the commercial code CFD-ACE+. These tests were planned to assess the
capability of the convective flow induced by the two heat sources to eliminate a
helium pocket which could form in the lower region of the vessel made of stainless
steel. Three different heaters, installed on the vessel wall were used to heat the upper,
middle and lower part of the facility. The facility has compartments consisting of an
inner cylinder and a ring plate. The temperature of upper and middle heater was
increased linearly to 413 K while lower heater was maintained at 295 K during heat
up phase lasting about 7 hours to create thermal stratification. In the next phase, a
helium rich mixture was injected in the colder, lower region of the vessel and a
stratified helium pocket was created in the lower half of the vessel inner compartment.
In the third phase the power of two box type heaters (representing the recombiner)
placed at higher elevation was raised linearly, while injection of helium was
continued. In fourth phase helium injection was stopped and the power of box type
heaters (BTH) was linearly decreased. The fifth phase of experiment was the
evolution of stratified atmosphere. The effect of BTH on stratification/ dispersion of
helium layer has been compared with the results of no BTH.
Keywords: Recombiner; Containment; Reactor Safety; CFD.
225
CFD Simulation Of Stratification/Dispersion Of Helium Layer Effect By Two Heat Sources And Their
Interaction In A Thermally Stratified Vessel
(a). Test 0
(a). Test 0
(b). Test 1
(b). Test 1
(c). Test 2
(c). Test 2
(d). Test 3
226
Gera et al.*
fraction contour at the end of relaxation Due to operation of BTH some quantity of
phase for all these tests are shown in figure4. helium moves from inner compartment to
outer compartment during injection
phase.After the helium injection is stopped,
helium diffuses very fast in next phases of
experiment. In test 1, 2 and 3 BTH power
was linearly decreased in 1 hour and
relaxation phase was continued for next 2
hours.
CONCLUSION
(a). Test 0 3D transient CFD simulations were
performed to analyse the effect of two heat
source located at upper region on elimination
of helium pocket formed in lower region of
the vessel. The important conclusions from
this study is summarized here.
• The heat sources are not able to
efficiently displace the rich helium cloud
formed in lower region of a thermally
stratified vessel as the position of the heat
(b). Test 1
source is at higher elevation.
• It is required to judicially place the
PAR (simulated as heat source) to remove all
the hydrogen present in the vessel. For this,
simulations will be performed with different
locations of heat sources in future.
REFERENCES
Babic M Kljenak I and Mavko B
(c). Test 2 2006Numerical study of interaction
between npp containment atmosphere
and passive autocatalytic recombiners
Proceeding of International Conference
Nuclear Energy for New Europe
Slovenia.
Gera B Sharma P K Singh R K and Vaze K
K2011CFD analysis of passive
autocatalytic recombiner interaction
with atmosphere Kerntechnik 76 98-103
(d). Test 3
227
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
increased with the increase of volume Where m. is the mass flow rate, Cp is the
concentrations and specific heat of nanofluid specific heat, To isoutlet temperature and Ti
was decreased with the increase of is inlet temperature of fluid
nanoparticles volume concentrations overall The average temperature inlet and outlet of
heat transfer co-efficient increases temperature of fluid for the calculation of
comparison with water up to 9%. To increase heat transfer coefficient is
the heat transfer rate using twisted tape
To +Ti
radiator dissipate the west heat generated Tbulk = (2)
2
during combustion process. Heat transfer
mechanisms are use in many industries in And heat flux is
cooling application. Q
𝑞= (3)
𝐴
EXPERIMENT SETUP
A = DL (4)
A simple line diagram is presented in figure 1
of experimental setup. The set up consist a Where A is the surface area of heat transfer
water tank, a fan and a centrifugal pump. The
water is heated by a heating rod up to50oC The heat transfer coefficient is determined by
and then centrifugal pump is used to inlet the using is
hot water in radiator. Total three type of 𝑞
ℎ= (5)
study is done by using this set-up first use Twall –Tbulk
h.Dh
𝑁𝑢 = (7)
k
Cp
Pr = (8)
k
inlet of the fluid flow is designed as mass insert. The Nusselt number increases as the
flow inlet to the normal direction of wall Reynolds number increases for both of fluids.
surface boundary. The mass flow rate is
varied 0.003-0.006 kg/sec at 323 K. The
outlet is described as the pressure outlet. The
heat convection applies on wall of tubes and
with the convective coefficient 70W/m2k
calculated experimentally and free stream
temperature is taken 300K.
REFERENCES
Figure 2. Variations in Nusselt number Ahmad Azari Masoud Derakhshandeh 2015
with Reynolds number An experimental comparison of
convective heat transfer and friction
In the case of wire mesh, it is observed that
factor of Al2O3 nanofluids in an insert
the Nusselt numbers are maximum but in the
tube with and without twisted tube
case of simple flow we obtained the Nusselt
inserts Journal of the Taiwan Institute of
numbers are minimum which is shown in
Chemical Engineers 1–9.
figure 2.
Bodius Salam Sumana Biswas Shuvra Saha
From figure 3 it is observed that heat transfer
Muhammad Mostafa K Bhuiya 2013
rate is higher as compare to simple design
Heat transfer enhancement in a tube
and Re is also increased in case of wire mesh
using rectangular-cut twisted tape insert.
insert.
Procedia Engineering 56 96 -103.
CONCLUSION Changzhao Pana Yuan Zhoua Junjie
The present CFD and experiment based study Wanga2014When volume concentration
is carried out to measure heat transfer increases specific heat decreases
coefficient, heat flux for water through Computers and Chemical Engineering
simple radiator, twisted tape, wire mesh 69 59–65.
230
Jain et al.
NOTATION
Cp Specific heat of air at constant pressure
(J/kg.K)
Dh Hydraulic diameter (m)
H Heat transfer coefficient (W/m2.K)
K Thermal conductivity of air (W/m.K)
L Effective plate length for heat transfer (m)
m. Mass flow rate (kg/s)
Q Heat transfer rate (W)
Ti Inlet temperature of air (K)
To Outlet temperature of air(K)
Tatm Atmospheric temperature (K)
Tbulk Bulk temperature(K)
Vm Mean velocity (m/s)
Nu Nusselt number (-)
Re Reynolds number (-)
p Pressure drop(N/m2)
231
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Direct Simulation Monte Carlo (DSMC) There are two major stages involved in
approach, originally proposed by Bird, is simulation using DSMC method at each time
undoubtedly the most successful specialised step:
computational technique, derived from a 1. Move: Move all particles in ballistic
statistical mechanical representation of the motion
behaviour of individual particles comprising 2. Collide: Collisions of particles within
the flow. cells
*
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sagg7.ume2014@iitr.ac.in 232
Aggarwal and Bansal
As compared to CPUs, we get large number The accuracy and efficiency of the new GPU
of processing units in GPUs. GPUs are now implemented code would be assessed with
easily available in computers. Graphical the simulation of three-dimensional rarefied
Processing Unit, developed by NVIDIA gas flow around a space crew capsule
corporation, provides a large number of cores returning into the atmosphere of Earth
(up to 2500 cores). The cell based [Hollis, 2010; Shang and Chen, 2013]
calculations and individual particle tracking
can be done much more efficiently on a GPU. Table 1. Collision Model Runtime
In this paper, the GPU parallelization is GPU CPU 1
implemented at the level of molecular
movement and inter-molecular collisions. 0.006 sec (approx.) 0.07 sec
The accuracy and efficiency of the new GPU (approx.)
implemented code would be assessed with
the simulation of rarefied gas flow around a CONCLUSION
space crew capsule returning into the The test on tutorial case has given promising
atmosphere of Earth. result at initial stage. The discussed method
of implementation would reduce
CUDA IMPLEMENTATION computational expense of dsmcFoam, using
Compute Unified Device Architecture CUDA platform. This significantly reduces
(CUDA) is a parallel computing platform time taken for simulation of rarefied gas
233
GPU Implementation of DSMC Simulation Using dsmcFoam Solver
REFERENCES
Bird G A 1961 Molecular gas dynamics and
the direct simulation of gas Oxford:
Clarendon Press 1961.
Hollis B R Blunt-body Entry Vehicle
Aerothermodynamics: Transition and
Turbulence on the CEV and MSL
Configurations 40th Fluid Dynamics
Conference and Exhibit Chicago 4984
June 2010
NVIDIA CUDA C Programming Guide
Version 7.0 NVIDIA Corporation 2015.
Scanlon T and Roohi E. and White C. and
Darbandi M and Reese J 2010 An open
source, parallel DSMC code for
rarefied gas flows in arbitrary
geometries Computers & Fluids 39
2078-2089 2010
Scanlon T White C Schuebler M Brown R
and Reese J 2011 Thermochemistry
Modelling in an Open-Source DSMC
Code28th International Symposium on
Shock Waves Manchester UK July 2011
145-151
Shang Z and Chen S 3D DSMC Simulation
of Rarefied Gas Flows around a Space
Crew Capsule Using OpenFOAM Open
Journal of Applied Sciences 3 35-38
2013.
Su C C Smith M R Kuo F A Wu J S Hsieh C
W and Tseng K C 2012 Large-scale
simulations on multiple Graphics
Processing Units (GPUs) for the direct
simulation Monte Carlo method
Journal of Computational Physics
7932–7958
234
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Detailed CFD based simulations are required to be performed for assessing
the hydrogen distribution behaviour in steam condensing environment in the multiple
compartment geometry of the containment. An accurate prediction of the hydrogen
distribution behaviour is important for the management of hydrogen in the
containment under accident conditions. Hydrogen distribution studies for a reactor
containment (Kaiga) in dry air and in presence of condensing steam environment have
been performed. 3D model of Kaiga containment was used along with concrete
structural model. Parametric studies have been performed by changing the location
and orientation of hydrogen release in fuelling machine vault and its effect on
hydrogen distribution was studied in dry environment. After that CFD analysis has
been performed for hydrogen distribution in steam condensing atmosphere. Time
varying hydrogen release obtained from accident analysis code has been considered in
this analysis. Containment environment temperature, pressure and steam
concentration conditions after loss of coolant accident (LOCA) obtained from
accident analysis code has been provided as initial conditions to CFD code
FLUIDYN.
Keywords: Hydrogen Distribution; Steam Condensation; Containment; CFD.
and model the relevant phenomenon. CFD governing equations for mass, momentum,
codes give detailed distribution, energy and species conservation and
concentration profile and derived quantities, turbulence in the fluid domain have been
but are highly time consuming and modelling solved using FVM. The species equations
various processes like spray, direct contact have been solved for individual gaseous
condensation is difficult. However efforts are species. The phase change, evaporation and
being made to model various phenomenon condensation are modelled by adding the
relevant to nuclear reactor containment in appropriate source or sink term to the species
CFD codes and to use them for detailed equations for the liquid phase and the
safety calculations [Heitsch et al., 2010, equation for the corresponding vapour. For
Prabhudharwadkar et al., 2011]. The steam modelling wall condensation, the convective
condensation model is incorporated in heat transfer coefficient is obtained by using
commercial CFD code FLUIDYN. In the Reynolds analogy formulation and the mass
present work the commercial CFD code transfer coefficient is calculated based on
FLUIDYN has been used to simulate Chilton-Colburn empirical analogy between
hydrogen distribution in dry atmosphere and heat and mass transfer. In the simulation
condensing steam atmosphere. complete 3D geometry of the Kaiga
containment is modelled. Typical
CFD MODEL containment system of Indian PHWR is
FLUIDYN-MP is a general purpose multi- depicted in figure 1. Isotropic Reynolds
physics CFD code with capability to handle averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) turbulence
single/multi-phase, multi-component, multi- models was applied. The fluid in the vessel is
fluid, transient incompressible and modelled as a composition and temperature
compressible flows with heat transfer, dependent ideal gas mixture of its constituent
turbulence, chemical reactions, free surfaces, components (hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen and
etc. It uses finite volume method (FVM) steam). The solid walls and solid internal
based fluid flow solver and finite element structures of the containment are modelled to
method (FEM) based solver for stress and take into account the effect of heat
thermal analysis of structures. The flow and conduction and heat capacity.
structural solvers are coupled by exchanging
the forces, heat flux and mesh movement at
each time step. In order to handle two phases,
specifically arising due to steam
condensation, models have been built in the
code based on homogenous equilibrium
model (HEM). The bulk condensation model
is based on the concept of thermodynamic
super saturation of the steam in gaseous
environment with an empirical relaxation
constant for incipient bulk condensation
initiation. The wall condensation is based on
wall condensation theory in conjunction with
the gas mixture transport towards the wall by
Figure 1. IPHWR containment system.
diffusive and convective modes. The
236
CFD Simulation Of Stratification/Dispersion of Helium layer effect by two heat sources and their
interaction in a Thermally Stratified Vessel
Hydrogen is released from a break in reactor were obtained from the accident analysis
header located in fuelling machine vault (FM code ASTEC have been used to define the
vault). Three different configuration and initial conditions for the simulation. The time
orientation of injection source has been varying hydrogen mass flow rate injecting
considered. Vertically upward injection from downward has been specified at the source
the bottom of the FM Vault, horizontal located in the top of FMV. The hydrogen
injection from the centre of the FMVault and mole fraction contour at vertical mid plane of
vertically downward injection from the top of Kaiga containment after 5000 seconds for
the FM Vault have been considered. The this case is shown in figure 3. The
mesh of the model is shown in figure 2.The concentration of hydrogen is high in fuelling
geometry is discretized by unstructured cells machine vault i.e. injection room.
and a constant time step was used. Second
Apart from this the performance of
order upwind scheme in space and first order
FLUIDYN has been compared with other
implicit scheme in time was adopted.
code. For this a reported case of dry
hydrogen distribution in Kaiga containment
was simulated. 4%v/v hydrogen corresponds
to free air volume of Kaiga containment was
injected from a source of size 0.5 m X 0.5 m
in 3 different configurations and orientation
in fuelling machine vault for 1200 seconds.
After that injection was stopped and
simulation was continued for next 3600
seconds. An inter-code comparison was
Figure 2. Mesh and geometry of Kaiga performed against the results reported in open
containment. literature and a good agreement was
observed.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Detailed CFD based simulations have been
performed for assessing the hydrogen
distribution behaviour in the multiple
compartment geometry of the containment.
These calculations are required to be
performed for the post-accident condensing
steam conditions prevalent in the
containment. With the augmentation in the
capability of CFD code FLUIDYN at BARC
to model condensing steam atmospheres, Figure 3. Hydrogen distribution in
hydrogen distribution studies for Kaiga condensing steam environment (H 2 Mole
containment in presence of condensing steam Fraction at 5000 s).
environment has been performed. A 3D The results of hydrogen distribution in dry
model of the Kaiga containment has been environment for the case of vertically
used. As a first step, post-LOCA temperature, downward injection from the top of the FM
pressure and steam concentration conditions Vault are shown in figure 4. The hydrogen
in various compartments of the containment layer stratifies in top of the FM Vault,
237
Gera et al.*
thehydrogen moves towards the dome region including condensation Nucl. Eng.
and stratification occurs in that region. Design 240 2176–2184
Prabhudharwadkar D M Iyer K N Mohan N
Bajaj S S Markandeya S G 2011
Simulation of hydrogen distribution in
an Indian nuclear reactor containment
NuclEng Design 241832–842
Royl P Rochholz H Breitung W Travis J R
and Necker G 2000 Analysis of steam
and hydrogen distributions with PAR
mitigation in NPP containments Nucl.
Eng. Design 202 231–248
(a). 300 s
(b). 1200 s
CONCLUSION
In the present study, the general purpose CFD
code has been used to study hydrogen
distribution in Indian PHWR containment in
dry and condensing steam environment. An
inter code comparison exercise was done to
evaluate the performance of FLUIDYN for
hydrogen distribution in dry environment
against other commercial code. Later
FLUIDYN has been used to simulate
hydrogen distribution with time dependent
hydrogen release in hypothetical accident
scenario in presence of steam condensation.
REFERENCES
Heitsch M Baraldi D and Wilkening H 2010
Simulation of containment jet flows
238
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Pump sump has its applications in many fields like thermal power plants,
lift irrigation, water supply etc. Hence the need for proper design and analysis of
pump sumps is increasing. For the efficient performance of the pumps, proper
design of pump sump is necessary as the flow entering the pump is a key factor.
Though there are many guidelines for the design of pump sumps as each system is
situation specific, appropriate model study is required. Studies are carried out on
scaled models by conducting experiments to check the design and modifications to
the intake geometry are done depending on the extent of deviations. But physical
model studies are expensive, time consuming and complex. Hence numerical
modelling of the pump sump using CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics) software
can be done to get appropriate design. In this study the numerical modelling is
carried out using ANSYS FLUENT and the results obtained are found to be in good
agreement with the experimental ones.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; Physical Modelling; Vertical
Intake; Sump; Vortex; Numerical Investigation; FLUENT
flow. The intake system consists of a For the CFD analysis of pumps the
leading channel, forebay and a sump following governing equations are used
consisting of 6 pumps. Experiments were 1. Mass Conservation Equation
carried out for the critical conditions i.e at
minimum water level for three different set 𝜕𝑝 𝜕( 𝜌𝑢𝑗 )
+ =0 (1)
of discharges at various pump operating 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
conditions. For each run of the experiment, 2. Momentum Conservation equation
the velocities were noted at the inlet, 𝜕 𝜕
(𝜌𝑢𝑗 )+ (𝜌𝑢 𝑗𝑢𝑖 + 𝑝𝛿𝑖𝑗 − 𝜏𝑖𝑗 ) +
transition zone, forebay and the sump 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
chambers to observe the flow 𝜌𝑔→ +𝐹 = 0 →
(2)
phenomenon. Flow visualization studies Where and gravitational and external body
are carried out to observe the formation of forces respectively.
surface vortices if any. Vortimeters are
installed in the pumps to know the 3. Energy conservation equation
formation of vortices in sump chambers. 𝜕𝑒 𝜕
+ (u (e+p) - u i𝜏𝑖𝑗 − 𝑞𝑗 )=0 (3)
The number of rotations made by the 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
vortimeter in one minute were noted down
in order to calculate the swirl angle. Where ρ is fluid density, u is flow velocity
Velocities are measured using vector field, p is pressure,𝜏𝑖𝑗 is normal
Programmable Electro Magnetic System stress, e is energy, t is time, 𝛿𝑖𝑗 is
(P-EMS) and discharge is measured using Kronecker symbol (𝛿𝑖𝑗 = 1 when i =
flow meter. Obtained velocities and swirl j,𝛿𝑖𝑗 = 0 when i ≠ j), q is heat flux.
angle are checked for acceptance criteria
according to Hydraulic Institute Standards RESULTS
(1998). If there are any deviations from the
In this section CFD results obtained from
acceptable limits, necessary modifications
ANSYS Fluent are presented. Numerical
to be made in the model like installation of
analysis is done for a static case. The aim
baffle plates, flow splitters, guide vanes,
of the analysis is to understand the flow
ramps etc to improve the flow conditions
behaviour. The results which are obtained
can be suggested.
experimentally are compared with that of
Further for the physical model discussed the numerical ones. Boundary conditions
above, a CFD model has been developed. are given as close as possible to get the
Numerical simulation is carried out using simulated results near to the experimental
FLUENT software (Hong and Jia, 2007; ones. The closeness of the results depends
Gerard and Abir, 2010; Meena et al., upon the meshing, material property. cell
2013). The 3D geometry of the model was zone and boundary conditions and local
constructed in SOLIDWORKS and the conditions which are prevailing.
model was imported to FLUENT and the Simulations are carried out for various
simulation has been carried out by operating conditions of the pumps at
imposing appropriate boundary conditions varying discharges of 15.592(2F) and
Simulation is done in steady state using 7.792 lps (1F).
𝑘−∈ model for the estimation of variables
At some points there is much variation
like velocity distribution, swirl angle and
from that of experimental results. It is
stream line patterns (shown in Figure 2).
because of various local factors in the
The velocities obtained numerically were
experimental run, which cannot be
compared with that of experimental ones
included in the software, due to the lack of
and found to be near satisfactory (shown in
options as the software packages are
Figure 3).
considering many ideal boundary
MODELLING
240
CFD Simulation and Experimental Validation of a Vertical Intake System
Velocity (cm/s)
100
The geometry of the flow domain is 80
constructed in solid works, meshing is 60
40
done in ANSYS workbench and post 20
processing of the results is carried out in 0
CFD post. Simulation is carried out at two 1 2 3 4 5 6
different discharges for 2F and 1F Grid points
conditions. experimental numerical
25
20 Gerard Bois and Abir Issa 2010 Numerical
15 simulation of flow field in water
10 pump sump and inlet suction pipe
5
0
25th IAHR symposium on Hydraulic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 machinery and Systems September
Grid points 2014 Timisoara Romani 272-281.
experimental numerical
Hong Xun and Jia Hong 2007 Numerical
Figure 3: Comparison of velocity simulation of 3D turbulent flow in the
profile inside sump chamber P1 for 2F multi intake sump of the pump station
Journal of hydrodynamics 19 42-47.
241
Samhitha and Eldho
242
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this work, CFD simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft is done, using CFD
package ANSYS Fluent 15.0. French single engine amphibian aircraft LISA Akoya is
taken as example. A three dimensional transient model with dynamic mesh feature is
used to enable movement of aircraft across space. The take-off and landing require
motion on air-water interface, hence Volume of Fluid method is used. Hydrodynamic
pressure and viscous forces on aircraft body are recorded with time during those
processes. The drag results are compared with available experimental and empirical
data. The amphibian model is made without wings for simplification. Instead their
effect is simulated using user-defined functions to simulate aerodynamic lift and drag
forces. Another objective is to test the stability during take-off and landing. Grid
independence test is performed to test the correctness of simulation.
Keywords: Seaplane, Dynamic mesh, VOF.
capabilities to simulate waves. Experiments VOF method for tracing water surface and
require careful controlled environment and a dynamic mesh for motion of aircraft is used,
number of equipment for setup. Although VOF equations due to Thien et. al. (2015) are
initial validation of such packages is based on shown in Eq. 1, with C as volume fraction.
experiments, but once they are validated, they
can be used for every phenomenon that has
anything to do with fluid flow.
Designing an amphibian aircraft requires (1)
additional components which produces Proper value of time step and solvers are to
certain difficulties like additional drag and be selected so the solution doesn’t have
weight. Also special pilot training is required divergence and negative mesh volume errors.
to acquaint them with water surface Simulation results can be used to calculate
characteristics to make landing and take-off coefficient of drag and compare with
safe. available data.
Landing on water surface provides many
GEOMETRY
problems so these should be taken care of as
pointed by Snorri Gudmundsson (2013). 3D model of LISA Akoya aircraft is created
Excessive impact forces from water, using SOLID WORKS. Its Isometric view is
excessive water spray are some challenges shown in following Figure 1. As discussed
that appear during landing. Hence vehicle before, only fuselage part is created for
should be controllable and in hydrostatic simplification of problem. Details of tail are
stability in this process. not modelled as mostly external flow over
aircraft’s front body is to be studied.
Although take-off is comparatively easier (in
terms of stability), but it must be kept in mind Computational domain is created in ANSYS
that take-off distance should be preferably around the main body of aircraft. Whole
below 1.5 km, and vehicle must take-off domain is meshed using ANSYS Fluent
before 60 seconds. mesh in tetrahedral elements as shown in
Figure 2. Mapped meshing is avoided as it
In this work, a French aircraft LISA Akoya is
offers problems to dynamic mesh. Certain
used for simulation. Its details are briefly
aspects of dynamic mesh are to be taken care
shown in table 1. ANSYS Fluent is used as
of to prevent negative mesh volumes error.
the CFD package. Model of aircraft is created
in modelling software SOLID WORKS. To CONCLUSION
simplify the problem, only fuselage is
This work includes motion of amphibian
modelled and analysed. Wings are not
aircraft during take-off and landing and the
created, in fact, their functions like stability
forces it experiences in those conditions.
and providing lift are provided using external
Different techniques like dynamic mesh,
loads and restricting degrees of freedom.
VOF are key features in this FSI problem.
Complicated geometry features and details of
tail part are omitted for simplification.
Aircraft velocity and other features are taken
from its available data sheet.
This is quite a complex case of fluid structure
interaction as motion of aircraft through air
and water is to be traced. So care is to be
taken in choosing correct parameters during
simulation setup. Transient flow and K-ω
SST turbulence model is used.
244
Numerical Simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft: Estimation of Hydrodynamic forces and Stability during
take-Off and Landing
Quantity Value
(i) Max Take-off weight 650 kg
(ii) Length 7m
(iii) Wing Span 10.9 m
(iv) Height 2.9 m
(v) Max Velocity 250 km/hr
245
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
openings. A lot of research has been done to the water plume in the upper compartment
study this buoyancy exchange flow across the using a 2-D three beam LDV system.
opening using salt water/fresh water. It is
difficult and very expensive to do study with NUMERICAL DETAILS
a full-scale model, therefore the salt To simplify the numerical computation a
water/fresh water experiment is not only an cylindrical geometry was chosen, the
effective way but also an economical compartment diameter was evaluated so that
approach to study this mixing phenomenon. the compartment volume remains the same as
The liquid system has its advantage over a in the experiments. The simulations were
gas filled system in performing a heat carried out with a 2D axisymmetric
transfer experiment: there is no need to cover assumption. The geometry consisted of a
the test section with insulation as the density cylinder of radius (R) 0.215 m and height
driven flow is isothermal and flow 0.316 (H 2 ) and 0.265 m (H 1 ) of lower and
visualization is very easy. upper chambers respectively separated by a
In-house buoyancy modified turbulent CFD thin partition, containing a hole of diameter
code for a buoyant pulsating exchange flow (D) 0.0508 m (2 inches). A sketch of the
through a circular opening in a horizontal simplified geometric configuration used for
partition of small thickness have been used. CFD computation is shown in Figure 1.
In the present work, the effect of L/D and
∆ρ/ρhas been studied by investigating
numerically the pulsating exchange flow for
partitions of finite thickness over the range
0.008<=L/D<=0.9 and 0.012<=∆ρ/ρ<=0.2.
The flow coefficient as suggested by Epstein,
(1988) was numerically computed and
compared with the experimental results for
validation of the code. The frequency of
oscillation was determined from Figure 1. Simplified geometric
configuration for CFD computation.
instantaneous velocity at the opening
location. The axisymmetric, incompressible, unsteady
The geometry was chosen from the momentum, species, turbulence and
experimental setup of Conover et al., (1995). continuity equations were solved using in-
The setup consisted of two compartments house CFD code based on the well-
separated by horizontal partition plate was established pressure-based FVM using
made of transparent material for ease in flow SIMPLE algorithm. For modelling the
visualisation. The lower compartment was turbulence realizable k-ε model has been
0.381 m square by 0.316 m high. The upper used with standard wall function and
compartment was 0.381 m square by 0.265 buoyancy modification. Interpolation to the
high. An insertion plate with a 0.127 m cell faces for the convective terms was
diameter hole at the centre was sealed to the performed using a third-order QUICK
partition plate by an O-ring. Holes 0.0508 m scheme. Second-order central differencing
(2 inches) in diameter were served in the was used for the diffusive terms. Second-
plates of varying thickness to be used as order-accurate Crank-Nicolson scheme was
vents. Velocity measurements were made in used for the temporal differencing.
247
Numerical Study of Effect of Density and Aspect Ratio on Oscillatory Exchange Flow Through a Circular
Opening in Horizontal Partition
0.10
showed that the flow velocities are highly
0.05
transient and unstable. The FFT analysis has 0.00
been performed to evaluate the dominant -0.05
pulsation frequency and shown in figure -0.10
248
Gera et al.
0.15 20
Magnitude
0.00 10
-0.05 5
-0.10
0
-0.15 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
0 50 100 150 200 Frequency (Hz)
Time (s)
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
(c). ∆ρ/ρ=0.1
0.15 Figure 3. Typical FFT analysis results for
Axial Velocity at a Point (m/s)
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
Figure 2. Axial velocity at the center of (a). ∆ρ/ρ=0.012
opening location for different ∆ρ/ρ.
8
6
Magnitude
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
(b). ∆ρ/ρ=0.05
Frequency (Hz)
(a). ∆ρ/ρ=0.012
15
12
Magnitude
0
(c). ∆ρ/ρ=0.1
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Frequency (Hz)
(b). ∆ρ/ρ=0.05
20
15
Magnitude
10
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Frequency (Hz)
249
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A full conservative mathematical framework has been developed for the
numerical simulation of quasi-incompressible flows including reaction kinetics in
open domains. In the present work a low Mach number formulation has been adopted
to simulate the flow physics associated with the variation in density associated with
the gradients of temperature and species concentration. For the reaction kinetics only
single step reaction mechanism has been adopted. Discretization of the governing
equations is carried out using finite volume method (FVM) on unstructured grid. A
first order Euler implicit scheme is used for the time discretization. The spatial
discretization is carried out on a collocated grid system. To avoid the checker-board
problem of pressure distribution, momentum-interpolation technique is used. The
developed solver is used to study the flame configuration of a coflowing laminar
diffusion flame in a vertical channel. Both finite rate and infinite rate chemistry model
is incorporated in the solver and the results are compared. It has been found that the
solver is able to predict quite correctly the flow physics for this type of flow
problems.
Keywords: Finite Volume Method; Low Mach Number Flows; Laminar
Diffusion Flames.
used numerical formulations is the low Mach incompressible algorithm as well and
number approximation to handle the quasi- concluded that the incompressible model
incompressible flow regime of fluid results in a much smaller flame height.
mechanics. This flow regime is generally The objective of the present work is to
encountered in situations where although develop an indigenous, in-house generalized
Ma< 0.2, the flow field cannot be assumed to 3D basic solver for the numerical study of the
be incompressible. The major difference of laminar low Mach number reacting diffusion
this near incompressible limit with that of flames. The developed solver has been
incompressible methods is that the validated against two different flame
divergence free condition of velocity field is configurations: under ventilated and over
not satisfied in the quasi-incompressible ventilated diffusion flames.
limit. This field of fluid mechanics has
immense applications in various fields, for LOW MACH NUMBER APPROACH
example, natural convection with large The inherent idea behind this approximation is to
temperature difference, combustion in energy decouple the acoustic speed from the flow
conversion devices, meteorological flows etc. velocity. This decoupling allows a substantial
The pioneering work low Mach formulation relaxation on time step constraint which is
was carried out by Paolucci (1982). limited by Courant-Friedrich-Lewy (CFL)
Following the work of Paolucci, Ru Li (2012) condition.
in his thesis work performed numerical The basic outcome is that in the zero
simulations of naturalor mixed convection for Mach number limit (Ma→0), the pressure
small or large temperature differences in field can be decomposed into two parts as
vertical channels. Pember et al. (1998) p (x, t ) = P(t ) + ∏(x, t )
(1)
presented an adaptive projection algorithm
for modelling un-steady, low-Mach reacting where 𝑃�(𝑡) is referred to as the
flow in an unconfined region using simplified thermodynamic pressure whereas π (x,t) is
kinetics. They used a model based on low called hydrodynamic pressure since it is
Mach approximations that consists of directly related to modifications of the
evolution equations coupled with a constraint velocity field. All the thermodynamic
on the divergence of the flow.Day and Bell quantities are not dependent on π. As such a
(2000) extended the work of Pember et al. new unknown (𝑃�(𝑡)) comes into the picture
and needs some special treatment for the
(1998) by introducing the use of a symmetric
numerical treatment. The divergence
operator-split approach for the simulation of constraint on the velocity field is given by:
laminar reacting flows with complex
∇ ⋅ (λ∇T ) + ∑ ρDk ∇Yk ⋅ ∇hk +
1
chemistry. They reported that although ∇ ⋅u =
ρC p ,mixT k
variable-coefficient pressure poison equation
W
∇ ⋅ (ρDk ∇Yk ) +
1 W 1 hk
is somewhat more expensive but it can
ρ
∑W ∑
ρ W
− ω k
C p ,mixT
handle high density contrast supto k k k k
diffusivity, molecular weight, total enthalpy Both the two methods of treating the
(chemical+sensible), source term for species chemical reaction rate i.e., finite rate and
k respectively. infinite rate chemistry models are tested with
the present formulation and the results are
NUMERICAL METHOD
compared. Also the capability of the
For the discretization of the governing developed solver is checked for predicting
equations, finite volume method(FVM) with the different flame configurations, i.e.,
unstructured meshes is used. The advantage underventilated and overventilated, for
of unstructured meshes is observed in laminar coflowing diffusion flames.
complex geometries where generation of
structured meshes is too complex. The ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
variables are collocated in space. The This Study is funded by a grant from DAE-
pressure-velocity decoupling has been BRNS, Government of India.
overcome by the momentum interpolation
method proposed by Rhie & Chow (1983).A REFERENCES
variable coefficient pressure-poison equation Dalal A Eswaran V and Biswas G 2008 A
is used. The discretization procedure used in Finite Volume Method for Navier-
the present work has been adopted from the Stokes Equations on Unstructured
work of Dalal et al. (2008). Meshes Numerical Heat Transfer Part
B 54 238-259
PROBLEM DEFINITION Day M and Bell J 2000Numerical simulation
For the validation of the present solver, a of laminar reacting flows with complex
coflowing methane-airlaminardiffusion flame chemistry Combustion Theory
configuration has been selected. The Modelling4 535-556
schematic of the problem is given below. Lee T Lin C and Chen L 2006)A lattice
boltzmann algorithm for calculation of
the laminar jet diffusion flame Journal
of Computational Physics215 133-152
Li R2012 Numerical simulations of natural or
mixed convection in vertical channels-
Comparisons of Level-Set numerical
schemes for the modeling of immiscible
incompressible fluid flows Ph.D Thesis
Université PARIS-EST
Pember R B Howell L H Bell J B Colella P
Crutchfield W Y Five land W A and
Figure 1. Schematic of overventilated Jesse J P 1998 An adaptive projection
laminar diffusion flame method for unsteady, low-mach number
combustion Combustion Theory
A single-step reaction mechanism with 5
Modelling 140 123-168
species has been taken for the present work.
Rhie C and Chow W 1983 Numerical study
The stoichiometric reaction for methane-air
of the turbulent flow past an airfoil with
mixture can be written as:
trailing edge separation The American
𝐶𝐶𝐻𝐻4 + 2(𝑂𝑂2 + 3.76𝑁𝑁2 ) Institute of Aeronautics and
→ 𝐶𝐶𝑂𝑂2 + 2𝐻𝐻2 𝑂𝑂 + 7.52𝑁𝑁2 Astronautics21 1525-1532
252
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A perfect level of thermal comfort is crucial parameter for the building
designing and environment. Natural ventilation is the best phenomena for obtain the
perfect level of thermal comfort in buildings. This Research presents the results of a
Computation Fluid Dynamic (CFD) study of 3 D room model of straight pipe radiant
cooling system which has installed in Jaipur, Rajasthan. The dimension of radiant
cooling system is vertical height; width and length are 500mm, 500mm, 700mm
respectively. In this system, piping system having 1-inch diameter pipes. An attempt
has been made to study the effect of different mass flow rates varies between 0.07
kg/s to 0.10 kg/s, different position like as upper, middle, bottom of piping system
into the ceiling part and examine the effect of water and nano fluid with different
volume fraction 0.3%, 0.6%, 1%.
Keywords: CFD; Nano Fluid; Volume Fraction; Radiant cooling system.
south direction, radiation enter through different position lower, middle, upper
window and create a temperature difference. respectively. Assume that wall of room is
In the CFD study, assume that ceiling is made by concrete material. Table 1 resumes
made by gypsum power and piping system the fluid properties that can be used into CFD
can be assembling into ceiling section with study.
255
Naveen et al.*
Figure. 5 shows the variation of room office for subtropical region Building
temperature with mass flow rate at ceiling and Environment 48
zone for different piping system like as Corgnati S P Perino M Fracastoro G V
lower, middle, upper. In case of 0.1% nano Nielsen P V 2009 Experimental and
fluid is maximum cooling capacity at 0.08 numerical analysis of airand radiant
kg/s mass flow rate for ceiling zone- lower cooling systems in offices Building and
piping Environment 44 801–806.
Dong Xie Yun Wang Hanqing Wang
CONCLUSION Shunquan MoMaili Liao 2016
This paper showed the result of CFD study Numerical analysis of temperature non-
for radiant cooling system. Radiant cooling uniformity and cooling capacity for
system is the efficient way of cooling in capillary ceiling radiant cooling panel,
building industries. The results yield the Renewable Energy871154-1161.
following conclusions: Khan Y R Khare R Mathu J Bhandari M
In the case of ceiling zone- lower Performance Evaluation of Radiant
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1% Cooling System Integrated with Air
volume fraction gives the maximum System under Different Operational
cooling temperature which is 294.46 Strategies S03787788(15)00239-X.
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
Kyu-Nam R K Woo K 2015 A 50 year
In the case of ceiling zone- middle
review of basic and applied research in
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1%
radiant heating and cooling systems for
volume fraction gives the maximum
the built environment Building and
cooling temperature which is 294.61
Environment 1-25.
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
In the case of ceiling zone- upper Saba S Peter M Thijs D Dominique D Jan C
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1% 2012 Coupled CFD radiation and porous
volume fraction gives the maximum media transport model for evaluating
cooling temperature which is 295.11 evaporative cooling in an urban
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate. environment J. Wind Eng. Ind. Aerodyn
Cooling Capacity of radiant cooling 104–106 455–463.
system is maximum in case of lower Simos O Agis M Papadopoulos 2013
piping system with 0.1% volume Performance of radiant cooling surfaces
fractionnano fluid gives the maximum with respect to energy consumption and
cooling temperature at 0.08 kg/s mass thermal comfort Energy and Buildings
flow rate. 57 199–209.
REFERENCE
Catalina T Virgone J Kuznik F 2009
Evaluation of thermal comfort using
combined CFD and experimentation
study in a test room equipped with a
cooling ceiling Building and
Environment 44 1740–1750.
Chiang W H Wang C Y Huang J S 2012
Evaluation of cooling ceiling and
mechanical ventilation systems on
thermal comfort using CFD study in an
256
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
these studies, it is noted here that the study of where the nondimensional parameter
electrically conducting fluid flow has many Pr, Da , Ra , Ha are the Prandtl number,
applications in magnetohydrodynamic Darcy number, Rayleigh number and
(MHD) generators, plasma studies, nuclear Hartman number respectively. u, v are the
reactors, geothermal energy extraction, velocity components along x − and
boundary layer control in aerodynamic. y − direction respectively, and T is the
Raptis et al. (1982) have analysed
temperature.
hydromagnetic free convection flow through
a porous medium between two parallel plates. The dimensionless boundary conditions are:
Chamkha (2000) has considered MHD free
u = 0, v = 0 , T = 0 for x = 0 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
convection flow from a vertical plate
embedded in a thermally stratified porous
u = 0, v = 0 , T = 0 for x = 1 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
medium with Hall effects.
The aim of the present study is to investigate u = 0, v = 0, T = sin( 2πx ) for y=0 and
the characteristics of flow and thermal fields 0 ≤ x ≤1
in a square enclosure with wavy vertical
walls having fluid saturated porous medium u = 0, v = 0, T = 0 for y = 1 and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 .
in presence of magnetic fields.
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
The investigated domain is a two dimensional
square cavity with wavy walls on both the
left and right sides. We have used
transformation technique to find the grid
structure shown in Figure. 1. The left and
right vertical wavy walls with amplitude 0.05
are given by (1) and (2), respectively, Figure1. (a) Schematic diagram of
the cavity and boundary conditions (b)
f 1 ( y ) = 1 − 0.05(1 − cos(4π (1 − y )) (1)
Mesh structure.
f 2 ( y ) = 1 − 0.05(1 − cos(4πy ) ) (2)
The fluid considered here is Newtonian,
The governing equations representing the 2D incompressible, electrically conducting and
unsteady incompressible viscous fluid flows laminar in the enclosure filled with a porous
and heat transfer are Navier-Stokes (N-S) medium. All the walls are maintained with
equations which in nondimensional constant cold temperature except the bottom
streamfunction-vorticity (ψ − ζ ) formulation wall which is heated sinusoidally. A
of the conservation of mass, momentum and magnetic field has been applied in the
energy as follows: perpendicular direction of the domain.
4, we have shown streamline contours for attached to the left wall. Again at Da=0.1 this
Darcy numbers 0.0001, 0.001 and 0.1. It is secondary left wall vortex breaks down into
seen that for a fixed Rayleigh number (Ra) two different size vortices. It is also seen that
=1000, as Darcy number (Da) increases the keeping fixed Ra at 100000, as Hartman
centre of the primary vortex moves upwards number (Ha) increases to 70, the left wall
and the size of the secondary vortices at the vortex remains attached to the left wall
bottom left and right corners decreases while without breaking down into several vortices
the size of the vortices at the top left and right but the size of this vortex increases.
corner increases. It is interesting to note that In Figure. 5, Figure. 6 and Figure. 7, we have
as Ra increases say for Ra=100000 at lower presented the corresponding isotherm
Da (=0.0001), the size of the secondary vortex contours. It is seen that for Ra=1000, there is
at the bottom right corner decreases and the no such significant variations in the isotherm
size of the vortex at the bottom left corner contours for increasing Da numbers but there
increases. At Da=0.001, the bottom left and is a significant change in isotherm contours
the top left secondary vortices coalesce to for higher Ra=100000 and higher Ha.
form a bigger secondary vortex in size
z
Figure 2.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=1000,
Figure 3.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=1.
Figure 4.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=70.
259
Sarkar et al.
Figure 5 contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=1000, Ha=1.
Figure 6.Isotherm contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=1.
Figure 7.Isotherm contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=70.
262
Vortex Structure of Incompressible Viscous Flows in A Lid(S) Driven Cavity with Wavy Wall
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the cavity with boundary conditions for different orientations
of the walls.
.
(a) (b)
Figure 2. (a) Horizontal velocity profile (b) vertical velocity profile for undulation zero.
Figure 3. Case-1, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 – 1000.
263
Karmakar and Pandi
Figure 4. Case-2, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 –
1000.
Figure 5. Case-3, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 –
1000
Figure 6. Case-4, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 –
1000.
264
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The air heat exchangers are widely used device in industries to save the
energy by improving performance. The finned tube heat exchangers are important
because of the direct impact of fluid on energy. In the present research, experiments
were designed to study the optimization of simple duct type air heater by applying
perforated plate structure in it for various designs and therefore we employ three basic
designs that are experimentally investigated and results are also compared with simple
duct type air heat exchanger. The first design is simple duct, second design in single
hole perforated plate, third design is double hole perforated plate. The results are
investigated for two and three number of perforated plates for single hole and double
hole. All the designs are installed in two or three parallel installation combinations.
Like inclined installation in duct type heat exchanger which are not investigated in
experimental work are also solved using CFD modelling tool. The energy input to the
heat exchanger was taken from the sun and the practical application of this type of
device is also known as solar air heater. The results show that the heat transfer of
perforated plate air heat exchangers are found more 10-15% as compare to simple
duct type air heater. The major problem of applying perforated plate structure in cross
section in path of air movement is pressure drop but this problem is resolved by
considering design parameters like hole diameter, gap between hole and others.
Keywords: Perforated plates; CFD; Heat Exchanger
increase [Esen H 2008]. Roughness and solar The analysis is performed on five designs, the
insulation are the two important parameters first design is simple duct, second design in
on which the point of maximum effective single hole perforated plate, third design is
efficiency depends. Several configurations of double hole perforated plate. The results are
SAHs have been developed in literature. investigated for two and three number of
Various designs, with different shapes and perforated plates for single hole and double
dimensions of the air flow passage in plate hole. The diameter of hole for single hole
type solar air collectors have been tested perforated plate and double hole perforated
[Hachemi 1995,Yeh HM 1999]. The thermal plates are 25mm and 20mm respectively. The
performance of SAH is increased by different absorber plate and perforated plate is made of
pitch of 90o broken wire rib roughness [Sahu aluminium having dimensions 1000mm x
MM 2005]. The use of fins and corrugated 500mm and 500mm x 100mm respectively as
surface inside the channel increases the shown in figure 1 and 2. The glass is
convective heat transfer rate by increasing the mounted on the perforated plate solar air
heat transfer area and turbulence [Youcif-Ali heater to absorb solar radiation.
2006,Wenxian L 2006]. The maximum
thermo hydraulic efficiency of the Double MODELING EQUATIONS
pass V-corrugated plate solar air heater is
The heat transferred from heated absorber
17.4% higher than that of the Double pass
plate to air is calculated as the amount of heat
finned plate solar air heater [A.A. El-Sebaii
which is gained by air that is
2011].The natural convection inside the
channel formed by a flat cover and a Q = m. Cp( To – Ti )
.
Where m is the mass flow rate, Cp is the
wavelike absorbing plate was numerically
specific heat of air, T o isoutlet temperature
simulated [Gao WF 1996].
and T i is inlet temperature of air.
SIMULATION MODEL The bulk temperature of air for the
calculation of heat transfer coefficient is
To + Ti
Tbulk =
2
The heat transfer coefficient is determined by
using
𝑄
ℎ=
A(Tap – Tbulk )
Where T ap is absorber plate temperature,
Figure 1. Layout of simulation model
T bulk is bulk temperature and A is total
convective heat transfer area.
The Reynolds number and Nusselt number is
calculated by using
ρVm Dh
𝑅𝑒 =
µ
h. Dh
𝑁𝑢 =
k
Figure 2.Different Simulation model of where D h is hydraulic diameter, V m is mean
solar air heater velocity of air, ρ is density of air, µ is
266
Optimization of Simple airDuct Heat Exchanger by Perforated Plates: A CFD based study
dynamic viscosity and k is thermal The Reynolds numbers are found in the range
conductivity of air. The calculation of friction of 7000 to 14000 for air that shows the
factor is turbulent flow. The Nusselt numbers for all
2Dh ∆p the configurations are found in the range of
𝑓=
ρ(Vm )2 L 170 to 315 as shown in figure 3. Where S,
2p1h, 2p2h, 3p1h and 3p2h shows the Simple
Where ∆p is the pressure drop along the tube
duct case, 2 perforated plates with 1 hole, 2
length and V m is the average velocity of the
perforated plates with 2 hole, 3 perforated
fluid in the tube.
plates with 1 hole and 3 perforated plates
CFD ROLE AND OBSERVATIONS with 2 holes respectively.
268
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper describes the computational fluid dynamics (CFD) analysis of
Operation Theatre (OT) with inlet angular diffuser which is the major requirement
of heat ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) in medical applications. Angular
diffuser system gives laminar airflow, uniform temperature and velocity distribution
throughout the critical zone of OT. The air velocity, temperature with air diffusion
performance index (ADPI) values are determined by testing 7 angular diffuser
systems with same inlet air condition and the room geometry. The inlet air and
room environment conditions follow ASHRAE and NABH standards. It was
observed that angular diffuser provides better cooling and flow distribution
throughout OT with desired ADPI value for human comfort. Angular diffuser with
different angles shows different ADPI values with and without overhead lamp but in
acceptable range. Best angle for diffuser is selected on the basis of distribution of
temperature, velocity and corresponding ADPI values.
Keywords: Air diffusion performance index; Computational fluid dynamics;
Angular diffuser; Operation theatre.
flow pattern and comparison to get the best maintaining the above requirements. The
value of flow angle and analytical Air conditioned air is discharge from ceiling and
Diffusion Performance Index (ADPI) reached to surgical bed (Figure 2). The
approach for human comfort in terms of laminar airflow can be maintained by its
temperature and velocity in critical zone. inlet low velocity but it gets disturbed by
obstacles and is converted in turbulent.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
In designed OT the inlet velocity is given as
In OT the most important requirement is to 0.4 m/s and outlet considered as zero
maintain the health of patient and surgeons. pressure gradient. These inlet condition
The highly bacteria contaminated space in formed positive pressure inside the
OT is above surgical site since this it is operation room. Velocity plots of 7 OT and
usually close to contaminated source like flat diffuser are given in following figures.
patient, surgical instruments etc. as shown
in figure 1.
270
ADPI Calculation for Thermal Comfort in Operation Theatre with Angular Diffuser
271
Rahate et. al
272
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
pressure generated inside the room will also intrusive techniques i.e. Planar Laser Induced
govern the flow through opening in Fluorescence (PLIF) technique can easily be
horizontal partition. In this case fire induced used and can provide concentration data at all
smoke flows are driven through the outlet points in a plane throughout the flow.
vent by both, pressure and buoyancy forces, CFD simulations of such experiments have
the first due to the finite volume flux of the been conducted. In the reported experiments
source, and the second due to the unstable [Le Quesne, 2010] scaled compartment of
stratification across the outlet vent. Thus the size 0.375 m X 0.25 m X 0.25 m was placed
nature of flow through opening whether in a large compartment 1.075 m X 0.675 m X
unidirectional or bidirectional, is governed by 1.05 m connected through a square opening
both pressure and density difference across in horizontal partition. Both the
the opening. Zone based fire model calculates compartments were filled with fresh water; a
the smoke transport using standard vent plume of salt water was injected vertically
models based on pressure difference using downward in small compartment to simulate
flow coefficient that do not accurately take in the heated plume. Salt water layer height,
to account the buoyancy component of the flow rate through opening, stratification in
flow. Openings in horizontal partitions are the compartment was recorded. Various
also widely used in ceiling for natural experiments were conducted by varying the
ventilation and produce flow, which are size of opening and density of injected salt
unstable with irregular oscillatory behaviour water.
even the temperature difference is low. A sketch of the geometric configuration used
for CFD computation is shown in Figure
Salt water modelling technique is a useful
1.An inner compartment (IC) is placed in a
tool to simulate fire induced flows, which
large compartment. Both the compartments
takes into account most of the flow
were filled with fresh water initially and salt
characteristics, allows for good flow
water was injected in the inner compartment
visualization [Yao, 2006]. In salt water
from top wall (IC_T). A square hole was
modelling, turbulent buoyant salt water
made in IC_T for salt water injection. The
moving in fresh water is used to substitute for
location of injection can be varied (side,
turbulent buoyant hot gas moving in cold gas.
centre and corner). The inner compartment is
Since it is difficult and very expensive to do
connected through outer compartment by
study with full-scale model, therefore the salt
opening in side wall (IC_S) and/or opening in
water/fresh water experiment is not only an
bottom wall (IC_B). The IC_S opening size
effective way but also an economical
was varied from door (0.2mX0.1m), window
approach to study this mixing phenomenon.
(0.1mX0.1m) and slot configuration
The liquid system has its advantage over a
(0.3mX0.1m). The opening in IC_B was
gas filled system in performing a heat
square shape of various size 50, 75, and 100
transfer experiment: there is no need to cover
mm.
the test section with insulation as the density
driven flow is isothermal and flow
NUMERICAL DETAILS
visualization is very easy. The salt-water
flows have features consistent with fire- The computer code has been developed in
induced flows and provide an excellent test- order to predict the 3D behaviour of the
bed for CFD turbulence models used in such movement of salt water in fresh water in a
applications. Due to transparent set up non- large enclosure. The 3D time dependent
274
CFD Simulation of Combined Buoyancy and Pressure Driven Hot Gas Flows through Square Opening
using Salt Water Analogy
Navier-Stokes equation with the species analogy. The behaviour of buoyant turbulent
transport was solved by using Patankar’s plume, ceiling jet, effects of horizontal and
SIMPLE algorithm. In the present CFD vertical opening has been investigated in an
model, high Re k-ε model with standard wall integrated manner.
function and buoyancy modification has been
incorporated for modelling turbulence. The k-
ε model was chosen because it has been
thoroughly validated, handles buoyancy
effects and has minimum computational
requirement. The governing conservation
equation for mass, momentum, species
transport, turbulent kinetic energy and
dissipation rate has been solved.
(a). 5 seconds
IC_T
IC_S
IC_B
(b). 10 seconds
275
Gera et al.
CONCLUSION
The numerical model accurately predicts the
movement of salt water plume in fresh water.
The opening creates a restriction in flow of
salt water to outer compartment and layers of
salt water are formed in inner compartment.
The analogy simulates the filling of smoke
due to fire in a chamber having an opening in
ceiling.
REFERENCES
Le Quesne M A 2010 Saltwater modelling of
fire gas flow through a horizontal
ceiling opening ME Thesis University of
Canterbury Christchurch New Zealand.
Yao X and Marshall A W2006Quantitative
salt-water modelling of fire-induced
flow Fire Safety Journal 41 497–508.
276
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper numerically investigates the flow past a spherically blunted nose
cone at a Mach number of 5.8. The effect of different nose cone geometries on the
aerodynamic (i.e., flow/shock) characteristics such as pressure coefficient,
aerodynamic drag, shock detachment distance, location and shape of bow shock
formed ahead of the nose cone are studied in detail. The shock detachment distance,
location and shape of bow shock, etc have numerous applications in the design of high
speed aerodynamic vehicles such as space shuttles, missiles, rockets etc. The pertinent
parameters that play a significant role in affecting the aerodynamic characteristics of
nose cones are semi-cone angle (θ c ), bluntness ratio (i.e., ratio of nose cone radius to
cone base radius (r/R)) etc. The two different semi-cone angles (5o, 60o) and bluntness
ratios (0.4, 0.8) will be investigated in the current study to ascertain the effect of nose
cone geometries on the aerodynamic characteristics and hence an attempt will be
made to enhance its performance. The velocity vector (Figure. 3) indicates
deceleration near the nose, re-acceleration through the sideways of the nose cone as
well the formation of recirculation zone. The Mach number contour (Figure. 4)
depicts the shape and location of the bow shock formed ahead of the nose as well as
the shock detachment distance. These features are expected to be highly dependent on
r/R and θ c which will be discussed in detail in the full length manuscript.
Keywords: Nose cone, shock detachment distance, pressure coefficient, Aerodynamic
drag.
flow/shock) such as drag, pressure Cw1 = 3.21 , Cw 2 = 0.3 , Cw3 = 2.0 , Cv1 = 7.1 )
coefficient, detachment distance etc are are used for modelling turbulence.
scarce. Thus, an exhaustive numerical
simulation is carried out in the current study
to predict the aerodynamic characteristics of
spherically blunted nose cones of different
configurations, which forms the key
objective of the present study.
278
Computational study of hypersonic flow past a spherically blunted nose cone
CONCLUSIONS
The influence of different nose cone
geometries such as semi-cone angles,
bluntness ratios on the aerodynamic
characteristics of the spherically blunted nose
cones at a Mach number of 5.8 are studied in
detail. The two different bluntness ratios (0.4,
0.8) and semi-cone angles (5o, 60o) will be
investigated in the current study to determine
the influence of nose cone geometries on the
aerodynamic characteristics such as
aerodynamic drag, shock detachment
distance, location and shape of bow shock
etc., which finds immense applications in the
design of entry vehicles such as space
shuttles, missiles etc. The velocity vector
(Figure. 3) obtained from the preliminary
studies represents the flow deceleration
ahead of the nose followed by re-acceleration
through the sideways. It also portrays the
existence of flow recirculations behind the
nose cone. The detachment distance as well
as the structure of bow shock formed ahead
of the nose cone are well represented by the
Mach number contour (Figure. 4).
REFERENCE
By Marvin I Kussoy 1967 Hypersonic
Viscous Drag on Cones in Rarefied
Flow. National Aeronautics and space
administration.
279
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this project effect of energy deposition in the supersonic flow past a
hemisphere is studied using OpenFoam software. Energy deposition in front
hemisphere disturbs the shock waves and pressure distribution around the hemisphere.
Drag coefficient changes as the pressure distribution changes. The purpose of this
study is to figure out changes in drag force applied on the hemisphere due to energy
deposition in front of the hemisphere. During energy deposition process the
temperature of the source goes more than 5,000K, at this temperature energy emitted
or absorbed by the species around the hemisphere due to chemical reaction between
the species present and radiation heat transfer are modelled in the simulation. Most of
the deposited energy lost in vibrational energy and dissociation etc. Energy deposition
source is modelled as energy added in the form of pulse. For simulation purpose fluid
is assumed as inviscid and reacting gas. Euler’s equation with ideal gas will be
applied to simulate.
Keywords: Energydeposition; Radiative heat transfer; Chemical reaction; Drag.
modeled as energy added to the previous The specific heat at constant pressure (C p ) for
steady state solution to the centerline. Flow is this study is assumed to the function of
simulated using Euler’s equation with ideal temperature. The species contains in the
gas shown in Eq. (1): atmosphere have different C p value for
∂ρ different temperature.
+ ∇.( ρ u ) = 0
∂t Simulation is performed using OpenFoam
∂ ( ρ u)
∇.(u ⊗ ( ρ u )) + ∇p = 0 software. Mesh file is created using the
∂t Gambit-2.4.6 software and total number of
∂e cells in the mesh is 10,368. Axis symmetry
+ ∇.(u (e + p )) = 0
∂t mesh is created to reduce the simulation time.
p = ρ RT (1) Domain size of the mesh made big enough to
properly visualise the shock wave formation
Where e is internal energy per unit volume, ρ and the interaction of shock wave with the
is density (kg/m3), u is velocity (m/s), p is blast wave. Mesh used for the study is shown
pressure (pas), t is time (s), R is universal gas in figure 2.
constant and T is temperature (K).
During the energy deposition chemical
reaction take place as the temperature of the
region goes more than 5,000K. In the
simulation species present at the atmosphere
during the process are 5 (N 2 , O 2 ,NO, O and
N) and 11 chemical reactions for dissociation
and recombination of air are considered from
Shuen (1990).The ions, free electrons and
associated reaction steps are not included in
the reaction. The chemical reactions between Figure 2. Mesh
the species are:
AB considered as inlet, CD considered as
O 2 +M=2O+M
outlet, EFG is considered as hemispherical
N 2 +M=2N+M wall and axis symmetry condition is applied
for BD. Flow is taking place from AB to CD.
NO+M=N+O+M
Condition for the simulation are:
O+NO=N+O 2 Free stream Mech number = 3.45
O+N 2 =N+NO Free stream static pressure = 13.1 kPa
N+N 2 =N+N+N Free stream static temperature = 77.8 K
O 2 +O=2O+O Pulse Energy = 13, 127 and 258 mJ
281
Energy Deposition in Supersonic Flow Past A Hemisphere Using Openfoam
CONCLUSION
It can be concluded when energy is deposited
in front of the hemisphere for drag reduction
by considering radiative heat transfer and
heat transfer due to chemical reaction. This
method will give result, nearly equal to
realistic result.
REFERENCES
Adelgren R G Elliott G S and Knight D D
2001 Energy Deposition in Supersonic
Flows AIAA Paper 885 1-33
Anderson K and Knight D D 2011 Thermal
and aerodynamic effect of energy
deposition on blunt body in supersonic
flow AIAA Paper 1024 1-12
Azarova O A Knight D D 2015 Drag force
control for hemisphere-cylinder under the
action of laser energy deposition European
drag reduction and flow control meeting
(EDRFCM2015)105-106
Mortazavi M and Knight D 2014 Numerical
simulation of energy deposition in a
supersonic flow past a hemisphere AIAA
Paper 944 1-18
Shuen J S Liou M S and Leer B V 1990
Inviscid flux-splitting algorithms for
real gases with non-equilibrium
chemistry Journal of computational
physics 90 371-395
282
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
𝜕𝑢𝑗 𝜕𝑢𝑗 𝜕𝑝 1 𝜕 𝜕𝑢𝑖 𝜕𝑢𝑗 (2) The pulsatile waveforms used in this work
+ 𝑢𝑖 =− + µ� + � are characterised by the pulsatility index (PI)
𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑗 𝑅𝑒 𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑗 𝜕𝑥𝑖
and is defined as,
where, Eqs.(1) and(2) represent continuity 𝑃𝑆𝑉 − 𝑀𝐷𝑉 (3)
𝑃𝐼 =
and momentum equations respectively in �
𝑈
normalized form.u j , t, p, μ and Redenote where, PSV and MDV denote the peak
Cartesian velocity components, time, systolicand minimum diastolic velocity
pressure, viscosity and Reynolds number respectively and 𝑈 � represents the mean
respectively. Re is defined as ρU ∞ L ∞ /μ ∞ ,for velocity. PI is the parameterthat measures the
Newtonian fluid, where ρ is the density of the variability of velocity in arteryover one
fluid, U ∞ , L ∞ and μ ∞ re the reference cardiac cycle. Eq.(3) can be expressed
quantities of velocity, length and viscosity equivalently in terms of the Reynolds
respectively. Blood flow is isothermal, number,
laminar, two-dimensional and cerebral artery 𝑅𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝑅𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑛 (4)
𝑃𝐼 =
wallis non-distensible are the assumptions ����
𝑅𝑒
made by the present study. where, Re max is the peak systolic Reynolds
Fractional step method is used to solve the number, Re min is the minimum diastolic
Reynolds number and ���� 𝑅𝑒 is the time-
incompressible Navier-Stokes equations
averaged Reynolds number over a cardiac
implicitly. The momentum equation for the cycle.
normal face velocity arising from the hybrid
staggered/non-staggered framework based on The two different waveforms (low and high
FVM is solved using Newton-Krylov solver PI) in non-dimensional form are constructed
[Natarajan and Sotiropoulos, 2009]. The from the baseline waveform 𝑢 = 𝑢(𝑡) by a
pressure correction equation is solved using scaling process defined by (Gosling and
algebraic multigrid reconditioned GMRES King, 1974)
����))-a)b+c
𝑢 = ((1 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(4𝛼 2 𝑡/𝑅𝑒 (5)
solver. The aforementioned non-line a rand
where, a, b and c are the scaling factors to
linear systems of equations are solved
obtain low and high PI, and α is the
employing the open source libraries (PetSc) Womersley number. Parameter α is the
and (LiS) respectively. measure of the ratio of unsteady inertia force
284
Assessment of Pulsatile Waveforms on the Blood flow Dynamics in Intracranial Aneurysm
to the viscous forces and is defined as hybrid meshes (unstructured cells inside the
𝐷
𝛼 = � � �ωρ/µ∞ , where ω is the frequency aneurysmdome and quadrilateral cells in the
2
of the cardiac cycle. parent artery).The setting of flow parameters
for the low (a) andhigh (b) PI waveforms
The solution domain is shown is Fig. 1 with ����= 96, α = 3.3, PI=
flow simulations are (a)𝑅𝑒
boundary conditions and is discretised with
���� = 96, α = 3.3,PI= respectively.
and (b) 𝑅𝑒
parent artery into the dome of the aneurysm. by transcranial Doppler ultrasound J.
Consequently, this is referred to as the Neurosurg.63 890-898.
“vortex ring mode”, where the dome does not Shibeshi S S and Collins W E 2005 The
exhibit a single pattern of vortex and intense rheology of blood flow in a branched
unsteadiness is observed at different phases arterial system Appl. Rheo.15 398-405.
of the cardiac cycle. However, the low PI Perot B 2000 Conservation properties of
case resembles to the driven cavity flow, a unstructured staggered mesh schemesJ.
steady flow and is referred to as the “cavity Comput. Phys.159 58-59.
mode”, where parentartery flow is delineated Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2011
from the recirculation flow at all instants of IDeC(k): A new velocity reconstruction
the cycle. Furthermore, a thin layer of algorithm on arbitrary polygonal
vorticity is emanated from the proximal end staggered meshes J. Comput. Phys. 230
of aneurysm into the dome at all time of the 6583-6604.
cardiac cycle. The present results collectively Basumatary M Natarajan G and Mishra S
reproduce the global flow dynamics in (Le et C2014 Defect correction based velocity
al., 2010) however the simulations are reconstruction forphysically consistent
performed on realistic three-dimensional simulations of non-Newtonian flows on
unstructured grids J. Comput. Phys.272
configuration.
227-244.
CONCLUSION Le T B Barazjani I and Sotiropoulos F 2010
The global flow dynamics in the intracranial Pulsatile flow effects on the
aneurysm is strongly affected by the nature of hemodynamics of intracranial aneurysm
pulsatile inlet waveform while it is J. Biomech. Eng. 132 1-11.
marginally influenced by the choice of fluid Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2009
to model blood. The results of non- Adaptive finite volume incompressible
Newtonian fluid, additionally the Navier-Stokes solver for 3D flows with
complex immersed boundaries
investigations of instantaneous wall shear nd
Proceedings of the 62 APS-DFD
stress and oscillating shear index will be Annual Meeting, Minneapolis 2009.
presented in the full length article. In
addition, a follow-up study is underway in http://www.mcs.anl.gov/petsc 2013
Accessed20-02-2013.
presence of the externally applied magnetic
field. http://www.ssisc.org/lis 2013 Accessed 20-
02-2013.
REFERENCES
Blazek J 2001 Computational Fluid
Ku D N1997 Blood flow in arteries Ann. Rev. Dynamics Principles and Applications,
of Fluid Mech.29 399-434. volume 1. Eslevier Switzerland 152-192.
Lindegaard K-F Bakke S J Grolimund P Gosling R G and King D H 1974 Arterial
Aaslid R Huber P and Nornes H 1985 assessment by Doppler shift ultrasound
Assessment of intracranial Proceedings of the Royal Society of
hemodynamics in carotid artery disease Medicine 67 447-449 197
286
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
can potentially cause damage or, in some mesh motion tetrahedral re-meshing based on
cases, overturn the seaplane. edge swapping may be used.
The main problem with amphibians, in spite Moving mesh FVM is based on the integral
of their ability to fly, move on water and form of the governing equation over an
land, is that it is limited in speed. Their air arbitrary moving volume, V, bounded by a
performance is compromised due to the closed surface, S. For a general tensorial
increase of the water components added to property φ it states:
the aircraft. There is lack of efficient and
economical floating ideas for a modern 𝑑
� 𝜌𝜑 𝑑𝑉 + � 𝜌𝑛. (𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠 )𝜑 𝑑𝑆
seaplane design. 𝑑𝑡
𝑉 𝑆
There are a number of challenges in − � 𝜌𝛾𝜑 𝑛. ∇𝜑𝑑𝑆 (1)
computational modelling of the fluid
𝑆
structure interaction effects during take-off
and landing of an amphibian. These = � 𝑠𝜑 𝑑𝑉
challenges occur mainly in modelling the 𝑉
288
Modelling and Optimization of an Amphibian Aircraft using OpenFOAM
Figure 2. Mesh
289
Joshi and Bansal
REFERENCES
Canamar A and Smrcek L 2012 Advance
Seaplane Conceptual Design Adapting
Trimaran Boat Hull Concept 28th
International Congress of the
Aeronautical Sciences
Demirdzic I and Peric M 1988 Space
Conservation law in finite volume
Calculation of fluid flow International
Journal of Numeric Method in Fluids 8
1037-1050
Jasak H 1996 Error analysis and estimation in
the Finite Volume method with
application to fluid flows PhD Thesis
Imperial College University of London
Jasak H 2009 Dynamic Mesh Handling in
openFOAM 48th AIAA Aerospace
Sciences Meeting Orlando Florida
Jasak H and Tukovic Z 2010 Dynamic Mesh
Handling in openFoam applier to fluid
Structure interaction simulations V
European conference on Computational
Fluid Dynamics ECCOMAS CFD 2010
Lisbon Portugal 14-17 June 2010
Jasak. H and Vukcevic V and Christ D Rapid
2014 Free Surface Simulation for
Steady-State Hull resistance with FVM
Using OpenFOAM 30th Symposium on
Hydrodynamics Hobart Tasmania
Australia November 2014
Langley M Seaplane 1935 Float and Hull
Design Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons LTD
London UK
Weller H G and Tabor G and Jasak H and
Fureby C 1998 A tensorial approach to
Computational continuum mechanics
using object oriented techniques
Computers in physics 12 620-63
290
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Compact heat exchangers are used in many domestic and industrial systems
such as electronic cooling, refrigeration, automobile engine cooling, etc. Even a small
increase in the effectiveness of heat exchanger considerably reduces the total energy
consumption. Heat transfer enhancement may be classified as active, passive or
compound. Active methods require additional power whereas passive methods make
use of the spatial surface geometry and compound methods simultaneously use more
than one method. In this paper, a spatial surface geometry (airfoil pin fin inserts) has
been employed to enhance heat transfer. The objective of the project is to enhance the
heat transfer of the heat exchanger using airfoil pin fin inserts and to study the effect
of location and orientation of the airfoil pin fin inserts on overall performance of the
heat exchanger. To enhance the heat transfer and overall performance of the heat
exchanger, symmetric airfoil fin pins as secondary fins are inserted symmetrically
between the tubes. Three-dimensional numerical simulations are carried out in the
laminar flow regime (in the velocity range 0.5 to 2.0m/s). Finite volume based solver,
ANSYS FLUENT 15.0 is used for the flow computations. The position of airfoil pin
fin insert has been varied along flow and transverse direction and their performance
characteristics are studied.
Keywords: Numerical investigation; Fin and tube heat exchanger; Secondary
fin; Airfoil pin fin inserts; Fin location.
Figure 1.Schematic of tube geometry and airfoil pin fin in the computational domain
292
Numerical Study on Effect of Airfoil Pin-Fin Location in Tube Fin Heat Exchanger
VALIDATION
The numerical solution methodology and
(a)
computational domain of the present work
has been validated with the experimental
results of Wang et al. (2000) The validated
results of present work in terms of pressure
drop closely match with the experimental
results of Wang et al. (2000) as shown in
Figure. 2. With this validation, the further
study of airfoil pin inserts in the plain fin
region (b)
is
carried Figure.3 Flow field corresponding to SWT
out C=0.25D top position v=2.0m/s
(a) Streamline plot (b) Velocity contour
The airfoil pin fin insert has been placed at
the 0.25Pt from the bottom of the
computational domain. Since airfoil has not
Figure.2. Validation results
obstruct the flow of air directly the pressure
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION drop has been found to be lesser for the case.
Due to the provision of airfoil pin fin insert
To study the effect of position of airfoil pin-fin closure to the tube 2 the wake region near the
insert along transverse direction the simulation tube 1 was not disturbed so the heat transfer
has been carried out for two different positions coefficient has been reduced for SWT
SWT C=0.25D Top and SWT C=0.25D bottom. C=0.25D bottom position case. Hence the
The airfoil pin-fin insert has been placed at overall performance of this case is found to
the 0.25Pt from the top of the computational be lesser than SWT C=0.25D case. As the
domain. Since airfoil pin-fin insert has not velocity increases the effect of wake region
obstruct the flow of air directly the pressure around tube 1 increases therefore the overall
drop has been found to be lesser for the case. performance of SWT C=0.25D bottom
Due to provision of airfoil pin-fin insert position case decreases. The wake region can
closure to the tube 1 the large wake region be witnessed from Figure 4.
was found near the tube and airfoil pin-fin
insert. So heat transfer coefficient has been
dropped for this case. Further overall
performance is found to be lesser than the
SWT C=0.25D case. As the velocity (a)
increases the effect of wake region increases
therefore the overall performance of SWT
C=0.25D top position case decreases. The
wake region can be witnessed from Figure 3.
293
Jaganathan et al.
REFERENCES
Chen H T and Lai J R 2012 Study of heat-
transfer characteristics on the fin of two-
row plate finned-tube heat exchangers
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 55 4088-
4095.
294
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
296
A Sharp Interface Immersed Boundary Method for Inviscid Compressible flow
CONCLUSIONS
Figure 4. Pressure contour for flow past In this present work, we develop a hybrid
sphere at M∞=8 cartesian immersed boundary method based
flow solver for simulating inviscid
297
Brahmachary et al.*
298
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Isothermal Wall T C
2004]. During the last few years, many
academic and industrial problems have been H
Y
successfully solved using LBM and it plays X
an increasingly important role in engineering
Figure 1. Problem definition along with
research and applications. boundary conditions.
The geometry of the enclosure considered for
the analysis is depicted in figure 1. In the
NUMERICAL DETAILS
present study, fluid flow and heat transfer in
a lid-driven cavity with a square cylinder has For the present computation a D2Q9 lattice
been investigated. The topwall of the cavity has been chosen, where 2 represents the
moves to the right direction at constant spatial dimension and 9 represents the
velocity and is kept at a constant low number of velocities in the truncated velocity
300
Lattice Boltzmann Simulation of Mixed Convection Around A Heated Square Cylinder Placed in A Lid
Driven Cavity
301
Gera and Singh
(c). Ri =1
(d). Ri =10
REFERENCES
Chen S and Doolen GD 1998 Lattice
Boltzmann method for fluid flows Annu
Rev Fluid Mech 30329–364.
Cheng T S 2011 Characteristics of mixed
convection heat transfer in a lid-driven
square cavity with various Richardson
and Prandtl numbers Int J Therm Sci 50
197-205.
De A K and Dalal A 2006 A numerical study
of natural convection around a square,
horizontal, heated cylinder placed in an
302
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
The governing equations for fluid flow and order convection scheme while central
heat transfer which are non-dimensionlised differencing is adopted for the viscous terms.
with suitable length (L), velocity (U), and An implicit solution approach which is first
temperature (∆T) scales, for two dimensional order accurate in time is employed and the
quasi-incompressible flows can be written as, resulting non-linear system of equations is
solved using the Newton-Krylov approach.
∂ρ
+ ∇ ⋅( ρu) = 0 (1) The momentum field at the cell centroids is
∂t
∂( ρ u) then reconstructed using a defect--correction
+ ∇ ⋅( ρuu) = −∇p + C1 (∇ ⋅τ ) + C2 (1 − ρ)eˆ y (2) algorithm as described in Natarajan and
∂t
∂( ρT ) Sotiropoulos (2011). The auxiliary
+ ∇ ⋅( ρuT )= C3∇2T (3) momentum equations are then used to define
∂t
a source term for the pressure--correction
Poisson equation, which is a variable
where, u and T are non-dimensional velocity
coefficient equation with a source term also
in Cartesian directions and temperature
derived from the divergence condition. This
respectively. Non-dimensional coefficientC 1 , equation is again linear and is solved using
C 2 and C 3 are tabulated in Table 1 where SAAMG--preconditioned GMRES via the
LiS library. This is a segregated approach,
non-dimensional parameters Prandtl,
which is popularly employed for genuinely
GrashofGay-lussac, and Reynolds number
incompressible flows, and we have extended
are defined as follows.
the methodology to handle quasi--
ν g β L3 (T − Tc ) UL
incompressible flows such as those
Pr = , Gr = 2h , β(Th − Tc ),
Ga = Re = encountered in natural convection with large
α ν ν
temperature differences in the present work.
Table 1.Non-dimensional coefficient of The velocity V b, temperature T b, and position
governing equations of immersed body are defined by appropriate
governing equations. The cells inside and
C1 C2 C3 outside the body are identified in a suitable
1 1
manner and the volume fraction of the solid
Force convection
- (VOS) is computed and then used to identify
Re RePr
304
An Immersed Boundary method for Mixed convection flows
(a) (b)
5
Figure 1:Isotherms (a) and streamlines (b) at Ra=10 and offset distance is (0.2).
305
Kumar and Natarajan
306
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Numerical shock instabilities plague the most advanced contact preserving
Riemann solvers available today in one form or the other. The contamination of
physical quantities produced by these instabilities may have catastrophic
consequences in engineering applications if left unresolved. For example carbuncle
phenomenon could cause errors in the prediction of maximum heat transfer rate at
stagnation point of blunt body in hypersonic flow. Some studies have indicated a
connection between the inaccuracies arising from dimensionally split extensions of
such intrinsically one dimensional schemes to multidimensions and these instabilities.
The present investigation has shown that genuinely multidimensional modelling of an
otherwise shock unstable scheme might act as a possible cure.
Keywords: Carbuncle phenomenon; Riemann solvers; Genuinely
multidimensional schemes; Numerical shock instability.
309
Simon and Mandal
310
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
311
Varma et al.
CONCLUSION
Figure 6. Stream lines for parallel wall
motionRe=400. In this paper, we have numerically studied
the fluid dynamics of lid-driven square
313
Varma et al.
cavity using staggered grid based finite Patil D V et al 2006 Lattice Boltzmann
volume method. The numerical model is simulation of lid-driven flow in deep
validated by comparing our numerical results cavities computers and fluids 35 1116–
with that of the other researcher’s results for 112
the case of single wall (top wall) motion. An Perumal A and Dass A K 2011 Multiplicity
excellent agreement is obtained between our of steady solutions in two-dimensional
numerical result and that of other lid-driven cavity flows by Lattice
Boltzmann method Computers &
researcher’s results proving the reliability for
Mathematics with Applications 61
our code. Further, numerical simulations are 1051-1061
carried out using the same developed model
to capture the vortex dynamics of two sided Perumal D A 2012 Simulation of flow in two
sided lid-driven deep cavities by finite
lid-driven square cavity for different
difference method Journal of Applied
Reynolds numbers. We strongly believe that Science in the Thermodynamics and
the developed code can be easily extended to Fluid Mechanics61-6
study the fluid dynamic features of various
Perumal D A and Dass A K 2010 Simulation
cases like effect of aspect ratio, effect of of incompressible flows in two-sided
oscillatory lid motion, effect of anti-parallel lid-driven square cavities Part I – FDM
wall motion, etc. The above mentioned CFD Letters 1(2) 13-24
works are under progress. Perumal D A and Dass A K 2010 Simulation
of incompressible flows in two-sided
REFERNCES lid-driven square cavities Part II – LBM
Blohm C H and Kuhlmann H C 2002 The CFD Letters 1(2) 25-38
two-sided lid-driven cavity experiments
on stationary and time dependent flows
Journal of Fluid Mechanics 450 67-95
Ghia U et al 1983 High-Re solutions for
incompressible flow using the Navier–
Stokes equations and a multi grid
method Journal of Computational
Physics 48 387-411
Kuhlmann H C et al 1997 Flow in two-sided
lid-driven cavities: non-uniqueness,
instability and cellular structures
Journal of Computational Physics 336
267-299
Lemee T et al 2015 Multiple stable solutions
in the 2D symmetrical two-sided square
lid-driven cavity Computers & Fluids
119 204–212
Mohammed Hasnat et al 2015 A numerical
Technique Finite Volume Method for
Solving Diffusion 2D Problem
International Journal of Engineering
and Science 4 35-41
314
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents CFD analysis carried out to study effect of two NACA
blade profiles and various number of blades on coefficient of power of straight blade
Darreius turbine for hydrodynamics applications. Results of study are noticed to be in
good agreement with published literature. CFD analysis has been carried out using
RANS unsteady calculations for three, four and five-bladed rotor configuration of
NACA 0025, NACA 0021. Also, characteristics of flow field have been investigated
for different values of tip speed ratio, to find out the influence of various blade number
and two blade profiles on flow geometric features and dynamic quantities, such as
rotor torque and power. The profiles of torque and power have been compared for the
three analyzed configurations of NACA 0025 taking as reference and the effect of
various blade numbers and two blade profiles on overall rotor performance has been
investigated. After that optimise design of straight blade Darreius turbine (vertical-axis
water turbine) for hydrodynamics applications has been proposed.
Keywords: Straight blade Darreius VAWT, CFD, NACA 0025, NACA 0021
for 3-bladed VAWT grid mesh for 3 for N=3, λ=2.43 for N=4, λ=2.16 for N=5)
blades in M Raciti Castelli
318
Numerical Investigation on Effect of Moving Vanes and Vehicle Velocity on Exhaust Flow of Engine in
Armoured Combat Vehicle
REFERENCES
Parschivoiu I 2002 Wind Turbine Design:
With Emphasis on Darrieus Concept
Presses Internationales Polytechnique
Montreal.
Darrieus G J M 1931 Turbine having its
Rotating Shaft Transverse to the Flow
of the Current U.S. Patent No. 1 835
018 December 1931.
Khan M J Iqbal M T and Quaicoe J E 2006
Design Considerations of a Straight
Bladed Darrieus Rotor for River
Current Turbines IEEE International
Symposium on Industrial Electronics
Montreal (Quebec) 9-13 July 2006.
Hill N Dominy R Ingram G and Dominy J
Darrieus Turbines: The Physics Of
Self-Starting Proc. I Meche 223 Part A:
J. Power And Energy.
Mazharul Islam David S K Ting Amir Fartaj
2008 Aerodynamic Models For
Darrieus Type Straight-Bladed Vertical
Axis Wind Turbines Renewable And
Sustainable Energy Reviews 12 1087–
1109.
Howell R Qin N Edwards J and Durrani N
2010 Wind tunnel and numerical study
of a small vertical axis wind turbine
Renewable Energy 35
Kirke B K and Lazauskas L Limitations of
fixed pitch Darrieus hydrokinetic
turbines and the challenge of variable
pitch Renevable Energy 36 893-897
Raciti Castelli M De Betta S and Benini E
2012 Proposal Of A Means For
Reducing The Torque Variation On A
Vertical-Axiswater Turbine By
Increasing The Blade Number World
Academy Of Science, Engineering And
Technology 64 206-211.
319
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Gas liquid two phase flow is encountered in many practical applications such
as in the transportation pipe line of oil industries, nuclear industries, automobiles etc. The
experimental and the analytical treatment for such flows are limited in number due to the
complex nature of flow. Also the analytical solutions for such flows are found for very
simple situations which are far from reality. Thus the use of multi-phase Computational
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) has become popular. The present work deals with the numerical
simulation of Water-gas two phase flows in a horizontal pipe line using Eulerian
modeling approach in ANSYS Fluent. The two phase flow of water with each of these
gases namely Air, Carbon Dioxide, Methane and Nitrogen Dioxide has been investigated
separately. The study focuses on the parameters affecting the solution. The effect of pipe
inclination, surface tension and pipe diameter on the volume fraction and velocity profile
has been investigated. The inclination angles used are 00, 25.8410, 36.8690, 59.3220, 900.
The surface tension values used are 0.02963, 0.04602 and 0.07182.The pipe diameter
used are 30 mm, 45 mm and 50.3 mm. It is observed that for completely horizontal pipe
volume fraction is symmetrically distributed showing peak at both top & bottom
positions of the pipe. Effect of inclination is insignificant for the horizontal velocity
distribution and has little effect on the vertical distribution of velocity. Similarly variation
in the surface tension causes changes in the velocity profile and the volume fraction.
Keywords: Two phase flow; CFD; Eulerian model; velocity profile; volume fraction
profile; pipe inclination; pipe diameter; surface tension.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are thankful to the authorities of
NIT Raipur for providing infrastructure
facility, Library facility and other resources for
Figure-2Contour of velocity magnitude writing this article.
(phase-1)m/s. (Volume Fraction contours REFERENCES
for case-1)
Iskandrani A Kojasoy G 2001 Local void
MATHEMATICAL AND NUMERICAL fraction and velocity field description in
MODELLING horizontal bubbly flow Nucl. Eng. Des.
204 117–128.
The water-gas two phase flows are governed
by the continuity and the Navier Stokes Chesters A K Hoffman G 1982 Bubble
equations. coalescence in pure liquids Appl. Sci. Res.
38 353–361.
Meshes with 838246 hexahedral cells have
been used for the simulation purpose. Steady Tomiyama A. Tamai H Zun I Hosokawa S
state pressure based solver has been used with 2002 Transverse migration of single
absolute velocity formulation. The effect of bubbles in simple shear flows Chem. Eng.
gravity has been considered in the y-direction. Sci. 57(11) 1849–1858.
321
Water-Gas Two Phase Flow Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline-A CFD Study
323
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: With the increased usage of alternate sources of energy in recent years,
steam-turbine based power plants have been forced to operate under prolonged low
load conditions. This has motivated a renewed interest in examining and
understanding the differences in the behaviour of steam at low load conditions and
that at design conditions for the existing operational turbine designs. In this context,
there is a strong need of develop the capability of performing robust and high-fidelity
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) simulations of steam flow over a range of
conditions with a low-turnaround time. In this paper we employ the Mixing Plane
Model (MPM) approach to simulate steam flow through a typical low-pressure
turbine (LPT) stage.
Keywords: Steam Turbine, Stator-Rotor Cascade System, Mixing Plane Model,
Turbulent Flow, Computational Fluid Dynamics.
the last two decades several different generation, hybrid mesh method is adopted to
approaches to handle multiple reference create blade passages and maintain the proper
frames of steam turbines have been proposed. aspect ratio near tip of the blades. A view of
Among these the Mixing Plane Method the grid is shown in Fig. 2. A mixing-plane
(MPM) is one of them. The MPM approach interface was made to link the stator-rotor
provides several computational advantages cascade system.
by giving a steady-state approximation to the
time-averaged flow field with relatively less
computational cost. Generally, time accurate
calculations of rotary domain require
substantial expanses of computational time
whereas, MPM implementation reduces the
computational time considerably. It also
removes the constraint of providing the same
periodic angle for each blade row – a feature
which gives an advantage during modelling
of a large number of blade passages with
different periodic angles. Due to these
advantages, the MPM approach can offer to
be a viable method to perform several low-
load simulations of the existing turbines with
acceptable accuracy and low-turnaround
time.
The MPM model was first conceptualized
and proposed by Singh and Denton, (1979).
They included the mixing flow between the
rotor-stator axial gaps and named it as the
Figure 1. Schematic of Computational
Mixing Plane Model (MPM). Though in the
Domain.
past application MPM approach has been
reported in literature, to the best of authors’
knowledge very few evaluations have been
performed under low load conditions over
three dimensional (3D) domains.
Thus the overarching goal of our work is to
systematically evaluate the performance of
the MPM approach in simulating full three
dimensional RANS simulations of multi-
stage turbine at low-load conditions. Toward
this goal, in this paper we present an
evaluation method on a typical low-pressure
turbine (LPT) stage. Figure 2. Schematic of grids across the
blades.
COMPUTATIONAL METHODOLOGY
Modelled LPT flow condition across the
The study presented in this paper focuses on
stage is compressible in nature hence,
a stator-rotor pair of a typical low pressure
velocity-inlet condition with u = 60 m/s at P
turbine stage. A view of the blade geometry
=100 bar pressure is set at the inlet. At outlet
and the computational domain is provided in
of the domain, pressure-outlet boundary
Fig. 1. The computational domain is created
condition is imposed. No-slip boundary
considering unequal periodic angle. For grid
325
Numerical investigation of flow through steam turbines using the Mixing Plane Method
RESULTS
Pressure contours on a plane perpendicular to
the radial direction and located at the mean
radius of the rotor blade are presented in Fig.
3. A smooth field can be observed at the
interface of the stator and rotor domains
indicating that the MPM approach is
satisfactorily approximating the actually
continuous pressure field in this zone.
In Fig. 4, we present pressure contours on the Figure 5. Schematic of Temperature
surfaces of the entire blade set. Clear contour across the set of full rotor blades
variation in the pressure field can be
observed from hub to shroud position along CONCLUSIONS
the blade height. Subsequently, variation of
We have evaluated the performance of the
the temperature field across the set of full
mixing plane model (MPM) approach in
rotor blades is also shown in Fig. 5.
simulating a stator-rotor pair of a typical low-
A quantitative validation of our simulation pressure turbine cylinder at rated design load
results has been done by comparing pressure conditions. The performance of the MPM
and enthalpy values against the heat balance approach has been found to be satisfactory in
diagram data available for the turbine under terms of general qualitative features and the
consideration. Plane-averaged value of plane-averaged quantitative values of flow
pressure field from our simulation at the variables. Based on this evaluation, the
mixing plane has been found to be within 7% authors intend to employ the MPM approach
of the reference data. in the modelling of multi-stage steam turbine
326
Shukla et al.
After a rigorous grid independence check, a accounts for the increase in Nusselt number
mesh consisting of 684,321 elements and that is clearly seen. It is also evident from the
58,835 nodes were used for the present Figure 3 that there is a significant increase in
computation. enhancement which is noticed for Reynolds
Theoretical equations for laminar model in a number 300 and above for the Ɵ = 90 and Ɵ
2-D geometry of diameter 0.5 mm and = 60.
0.5
length, 10 mm, were solved numerically for Shah and
London
heating of the working fluid which was air Plain
0.4
(Pr = 0.7). The 2-D geometry-data file was Channel
Tend (Plain
generated in ANSYS Design Modeller 16.0. Channel)
0.3
f
0.2
Correlations provided by Shah and London
(1978) were used to compare and validate the
0.1
results of the simulation. The values of the
data found from CFD simulation of the plain
0
micro-channel are quite close with the 0 500 1000
10 5
5
1
Nu
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Re
0
Figure 4. Variation of Nusselt number
0 500 1000 with Reynolds number
Re
Figure 2. Verification of the plain micro- The influences of ribs on friction factor
channel: Nusselt number characteristics are represented in Figure 5.
One can see from the figure that the friction
From the Figure 4, the Nusselt number shows factor was in the similar trend both for the
a definite trend – increase with increase in plain channel and the channel with ribs. The
Reynolds number. The addition of ribs at friction factor of the ribbed channel gradually
certain angles effectively increases the heat decreases with increasing Reynolds number.
transfer rate by disrupting the development of At a particular Reynolds number, the ribbed
the boundary layer and also by creating local channel led to higher friction factors over
turbulence and swirl flow. This phenomenon those of the plain channel. This was because
330
Bhattacharyya et al.
of the flow blockage, larger contact surface significant increase in the outlet temperature
areas, the act caused by the turbulent flow as is perceived.
well as the dissipated dynamic pressure of the
fluid due to the viscosity loss near the tube CONCLUSION
wall.
6
Thermohydraulic transport characteristics of
Ɵ = 30 Ɵ = 45
Ɵ = 60 Ɵ = 90
inclined ribs in micro channel were
5
Plain Channel investigated numerically. The simulation was
4
conducted for the micro channel with micro
inclined ribs of different angle.
3 The use of ribs provided significant
f augmentation of heat transfer with a
2
corresponding increase in friction factor. In
1 general observations, it was found that the
heat transfer, outlet temperature and friction
0
0 200 400 600 800 1 factor increased at Ɵ = 90 and Ɵ = 60. In
Re
addition, the Nusselt number increased with
Figure 5. Variation of Nusselt increasing Reynolds number while the
number with Reynolds number opposite trends were found for the case of
friction factor. The Nusselt number for the
micro channel with micro ribs has a
1.4
reasonable enhancement than those of the
Ɵ = 30 Ɵ
1.38 plain micro channel values.
1.36
Ɵ = 60 Ɵ
REFERENCES
1.34
Shah R K London A L 1978 Laminar Flow
1.32
Forced Convection in Ducts Academic
T/T0
1.3
New York.
1.28
Tuckerman D B and Pease R F W 1981
1.26
High-performance heat sinking for VLSI
1.24
0 200 400 600 800
IEEE Electron Device Letters EDL-2(5)
Re
126-129.
331
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
333
Steady Flow Computations using HLL-CPS Scheme with Low Mach Number Correction
for HLL-CPS and modified HLL-CPS and 6. It can be seen in the figures that results
scheme are shown in figure 3. It can be seen of the present scheme match well with
from figures 3 that both the HLL-CPS and analytical results. On the other hand, for
the modified HLL-CPS schemes are free HLL-CPS scheme, differences with
from carbuncle phenomenon, thus retaining analytical results of Blasius are higher at
high speed abilities. The static pressure plot Mach 0.20, which show that numerical
along the centerline is shown in figure 4 and dissipation of the HLL-CPS increases with
it can be seen that the solution of the decrease in Mach number.
modified scheme is perfectly monotone, just
like the HLL-CPS scheme.
600
500
400
HLL-CPS Scheme
Pressure
300
Modified HLL-CPS
200
Scheme
100
0
-1.6 -1.4 X -1.2 -1
10
Blasius Solution (Analytical)
8
HLL-CPS
6 Present Scheme
η
4
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
U/U∞
REFERENCES
A Garcia-Uceda Juarez A Raimo E Shapiro
and B Thornber 2014 Steady Turbulent
Flow Computations using a low Mach
Fully Compressible Scheme AIAA
Journal 52 (11).
Felix Rieper 2008 On the Behaviour of
Numerical Scheme in the Low Mach
Number Regime PhD Dissertation.
Gottlieb S and Shu Chi-Wang 1998 Total
Variation Diminishing Runge-Kutta
Schemes Mathematics of Computation
67(221)73-85.
Harten A Lax P B and Leer B 1983 On
Upstream Differencing and Godunov-
type Methods for Hyperbolic
Conservation Laws SIAM Rev 25 35-61.
Li Xue-Song and Gu Chun-Wei 2013
Mechanism and Improvement of Harten-
Lax-van Leer Scheme for All-Speed
Flows Computers and Fluids 86(5) 56-
70.
Mandal J C and Panwar V Robust 2012 HLL
type Riemann Solver Capable of
335
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The concept of tandem blade arrangement for axial compressors has been
proposed to increase the work per stage without incurring large losses. The present
work examines the 3D-flow field of NACA 65 tandem cascades with varying chord
ratios ranging from 0.43 to 1.337. A 3-D computational model using finite volume
formulation has been developed and validated against available experimental data.
Design rules such as the aerodynamic load splitting and the spacing of the forward-
and aft-blades, etc. are taken into account for finalising the cascade geometry. Flow
phenomena at different locations of the airfoils are examined.
Keywords: Tandem Blade; Axial Compressor; Cascade; Computational.
338
Sherin et al.
Figure 6. Velocity contours near the front and aft airfoil at various locations
Abstract: The flow of a fluid past bluff objects is of great interest in the subject of
industrial aerodynamics. Specifically, there has recently been much interest in the
flow past multiple rows of staggered square cylinders. In this paper, artificial
intelligence (AI) methods of adaptive network fuzzy inference system (ANFIS) and
multi-gene genetic programming (MGGP) are used to predict the flow parameters of a
fluid in such a flow. Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) technique is implemented
to obtain the basic database under the conditions of varying geometrical and flow
parameters of the system. A numerical study is initially performed using the
commercial finite element method (FEM) solver software COMSOL Multiphysics
3.3a. The input parameters taken into consideration are transverse spacing (X/a),
stream-wise gap (L/a) and inlet velocity (u) to predict the flow parameters i.e.
vorticity and velocity field. The prediction will be used to characterise the transition
of flow to chaotic state.
Keywords: Flow past square cylinder; CFD; Neuro-fuzzy; artificial intelligence
METHODOLOGY
The geometry taken into account to simulate
the flow past two rows of staggered cylinders
is shown in Figure 1. The values of input Figure 1. Schematics of the problem
parameters are continuously varied as (1 ≤ under consideration. In this figure L/a = 3
X/a ≤ 5),(1 ≤ L/a ≤ 10) and(1 m/s ≤ u ≤ 100 and X/a = 1
m/s) to obtain the values of velocity field and
Around 3/4th of the data is used for training RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
and 1/4th of the data is used for testing for
The performance of the ANFIS and MGGP
both the artificial intelligence methods.
approaches for predicting velocity field and
For the ANFIS modelled system, the hybrid vorticity parameters are analysed. For the
optimization method is used with the ANFIS approach, the average testing error is
Gaussian input membership functions and found to be close to 5%, which is a
linear output membership functions in the reasonably accurate. Figure 2 shows the plot
Sugeno fuzzy inference system. The MGGP of actual and predicted training data and
system uses a population size of 250, number testing data, while figure 4 shows the almost
of generations to be 150 and maximum tree linear relationship between the two with an
depth of 4. R2 value of 0.9984, which shows an
The results of the ANFIS prediction are extremely large degree of correlation. Figure
obtained using the Neuro-Fuzzy Design 3 shows the surface plots obtained using the
toolbox of MATLAB R2014a software, and ANFIS system.
that of the MGGP using the GPTIPS 2.0
toolbox of MATLAB (Searson, 2015).
(a) (b)
Figure 2. Distribution of (a) training data and (b) testing data, in the Neuro-fuzzy
design for variation of velocity at point C with time.
(a) (b)
Figure 3. Surface Plots of (a) velocity at point C against t and u (b) velocity at point
C against L/a and u.
341
Prediction of Flow Parameters for A Flow Past Rows of Staggered Cylinders using Artificial Intelligence
Methods
(a)
(a)
(b)
Figure 6: Distribution of the actual
and predicted data for the variation of
velocity at point C with time, (a) training
data and (b) testing data.
(b)
Similar plots are obtained for varying space
Figure 5: Distribution of (a) training
configurations at a specific time (t=1s), with
data and (b) testing data, in the Neuro-
75 sets for training data and 25 sets for
fuzzy design for variation of velocity at
testing data is used. The mean absolute error
point C with space.
is found to be 3.4239 and a correlation (R2)
Taking a similar approach, we obtain the of 0.9871 and 0.9819 is obtained for training
results of MGGP prediction, wherein 132 sets and testing data respectively.
342
Sharma and Singh
REFERENCES
Chatterjee D Biswas G 2015 Journal of Wind
(a) Engineering and Industrial
Aerodynamics 136 1-11.
Sahu M Singh P Mahapatra S S Khatua K K
Expert Systems with Applications 39
4545-4557.
Searson D P 2015 GPTIPS 2: An Open-
Source Software Platform for
Symbolic Data Mining, In: Gandomi
A H Alavi A H and Ryan C (eds.)
Handbook of Genetic Programming
Applications Springer Switzerland.
(b)
Figure 7: Correlation of actual and
predicted (a) training and (b) testing data
for data variation of velocity at point C
with time.
CONCLUSION
This paper predicts the flow parameters i.e.
the variation of velocity field and vorticity
for a flow past an arrangement of staggered
cylinders. The translation of a computational
fluid mechanics study to an AI system
considerably reduces the time in predicting
the actual output with reasonable accuracy.
The large amount of time that is required in
geometry drawing, mesh generation and final
solution will be brought down, especially in
the case of flows dealing with high velocity
(Sahu et al, 2015). Chatterjee and Biswas
(2015) state that for a flow through staggered
cylinders, two dimensional computations
may be questioned at smaller separation
343
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Corrugated channels are preferred for their enhanced heat transfer rates and
better mixing abilities. The turbulence, induced locally by the corrugation element and
increased surface area per length results in increased energy (heat) dissipation.
However, the presence of corrugation results in increased pressure drop and power
consumption per mass of fluid pumped into the system. The objective of the present
work is to simulate the hydrodynamics in 2D corrugated channels of different
corrugation geometries under a range of operating conditions and estimate the effect
of corrugation geometry on power consumption, friction factor and flow distribution.
Keywords: Corrugation; Turbulence; Power Consumption; Friction Factor.
and Table 3. The flow was analysed using result for smooth channel was validated with
water (liquid) as the fluid medium. No-slip analytical solution obtained from literature.
boundary was specified at walls. Inlet and The inlet parameter, namely velocity, was
outlet boundary was specified as velocity varied and simulation was carried out for
inlet and outflow respectively. Fluent aforementioned geometrical configurations
software was used to carry out the simulation from which appropriate results were inferred.
where in time averaged Navier-Stokes
Table 1. Geometrical details of Smooth
equations were solved. Standard K- model
Channel
was used for turbulence modelling. SIMPLE
algorithm was used for Pressure-Velocity Design Notation Value
Coupling [Patankar, 1980]. Least Squares Parameter
Cell Based method was used to discretize the Length L 120mm
convection and diffusion terms in the flow
Channel Width D 10mm
conservation equation. Normalized residual
value of 10-7 was set as convergence criteria.
Grid independence analysis was carried out
and optimal number of grid cells, found to be
58800, was arrived at. The computational
345
Effect of Corrugation Geometry on Power Consumption and Friction Factor in a Channel
1.0
corrugation was considerably less when
0.8 compared to channel with triangular
0.6 corrugation. This can be construed as
reduced power consumption in wedge
0.4
shaped corrugation as compared to
0.2 triangular corrugation when the value of
0.0 Reynolds Number increases.
0 20 40 60
No of Corrugations/side of The comparison of velocity contours for
channel wedge shaped and triangular corrugations, is
shown in Fig.3.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Two of the authors (Sudharsan T S and
Bharath Ram R) thank ISHRAE-Student
Chapter, SASTRA University and CAD-
CAM lab, SoME, SASTRA University for
the opportunity provided to learn CFD that
resulted in this mini-project.
REFERENCES
Elshafei E A M Awad M M El-Negiry EAli
A G January 2010 Heat Transfer and
Pressure Drop in Corrugated Channels
Energy 35(1) 101-110.
Henrique de Azevedo S Rigoberto Morales
E M Admilson Franco T Silvio
Junqueira L M Raul Erthal H Marcelo
de Albuquerque Lima Goncalves 2008
Numerical Simulation of Turbulent
Flow in Corrugated Pipes 12th
Brazilian Congress of Thermal
347
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
0.25
Flow Distribution Parameter (-)
0.2
0.15
(a)
0.1
0.05
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Flow Rate (lpm)
4-channel 3-channel
5-channel 8-channel (b)
0.6 Figure 4. Contours of(a) Static
Flow Distribution Parameter (-)
0.3 CONCLUSION
350
Aswin et al.
REFERENCES
Abstract: Altitude compensating nozzles are designed to adjust its effective area ratio
to the pressure ratios to which it is exposed to using active or passive mechanisms.
This would ensure ideal performance of rocket nozzles at all altitudes, thereby
improving its payload capacity tremendously. Expansion Deflection nozzles use a
stationary pintle, designed and optimised, to achieve altitude compensation. The
performance of these nozzles largely depends on the setting up of the wake region
downstream of the pintle, and achieving near ambient wake pressure. Though altitude
compensating capability of ED nozzles have been proved beyond doubts, the
anomalies reported in the achieved wake pressures points to the under ideal
performance and hence underutilisation of its real capabilities.
The work reported in the paper attempts to explore the wake evacuation effect using
experimental and numerical techniques. Experimental techniques including Schlieren
photography and wall pressure measurements are carried out on a planar ED nozzle
and the data obtained is used to validate the results from the numerical analysis. The
nozzles are subjected to NPR ranging from 2 to 5 and the results obtained are
compared to those obtained numerically. Dependence of wake pressure on the pintle
geometry is also analysed. Using the above study the mode of evacuation of the wake
isstudied and the characteristics of wake evacuation effect are deduced. Possible
methods for analyzing this effect and further steps to improve the nozzle performance
are also discussed in the current paper.
Keywords: ED Nozzle; Altitude compensation; Wake evacuation effect.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank and
acknowledge Workshop Team & APLD Lab
Team at IIST, Valiamala, Trivandrum and
Mr. Rahul Nair for their sincere efforts and
supports which lead to the realization of this
Figure 4. CFD result showing vortex work.
inside wake region
REFERENCES
pressure with altitudes corresponding to the
Taylor N and Hempsell C 2004 Optimizing
respective NPR. This indicates that the expansion deflection nozzles for vacuum
nozzle may not be delivering ideal thrust The Aeronautical Journal
performance at all altitudes. The CFD 108(1088) 515-522.
analysis shows the formation of a wake Taylor N and Hempsell C 2004 Throat flow
bubble which in fact restricts the modeling of expansion deflection
communication of the wake with the ambient. nozzles Journal of the British
The wake bubble seems to reduce in size with Interplanetary Society 57 242-250.
increase in NPR owing to the transformation Taylor N Johan Steelant Robert Bond 2011
of the nozzle operating mode from open Experimental comparison of Dual Bell
wake to closed wake mode. This effect has to and Expansion Deflection nozzles AIAA
be studied in details and any possible 2011-5688.
methods like secondary fluid injection to the Taylor N T Sato 2007 Experimental
wake or establishment of communication of measurements of an expansion deflection
wake and ambient has to be developed so as nozzle in open wake mode Journal of the
to extract maximum benefit out of these British Interplanetary Society 60(10)
nozzles. 377-386.
Wagner B and Schlechtriem S 2011
CONCLUSION Numerical and experimental study of
The experimental and numerical investigation flow in a planar expansion deflection
into the wake evacuation effect reported in nozzle AIAA 2011-5942.
ED nozzles yielded many valuable results. Wagner B Stark R and Schlechtriem S 2011
The results from CFD analysis is found to Experimental Study of planar expansion
match with experimental data. The inverse deflection nozzle flow field In 4th
relation of wake pressure with rise in NPR is European Conference for Aerospace
Sciences EUCASS.
demonstrated. The reduction in wake
pressure is however observed to be higher
than expected. The setting up of the wake
bubble and related vortex bubble is captured
in CFD simulation. Studies in future needs to
concentrate on developing techniques to
ensure adjustability of wake region to the
355
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The enthalpy based 2D numerical model of shell and tube PCM heat
exchanger unit has been used to study the melting and solidification characteristics.
The numerical model has been validated with experimental data for melting and
solidification with fin configuration. Temporal variation and melt fraction distribution
in the numerical domain with time during melting and solidification at different
locations in the numerical domain of PCM has been studied. Model predicted result
shows well agreement with results available in literature.
Keywords: Phase change material; Enthalpy based numerical model; Melting
and Solidification.
357
Numerical Studies of a Shell-And-Tube PCM Based Heat Storage Unit
The experimental plots of temperature suppression of the upper layer molten PCM
variation of thermocouple at different at higher temperature as well as the high
location are showing a good agreement with temperature gradient over the solid layer
the numerical data generated from the resides below in the cavity. The conduction
numerical model has been shown in figure 2 heat influence is much less compared to the
and figure 3, during solidification and high convective heat transfer. Though, the
melting respectively. Variation of upper section of the melt front advances
temperature with time during solidification of rapidly. The lower section moves relatively
calcium chloride hexahydrate with fin slower than the upper part shown in Figure. 5
configuration shows close agreement with the
experimental results.
The melting of calcium chloride hexahydrate
is plotted with fin configuration shown in
Figure.3. There is a fluctuation of
temperature during melting in the numerical
results at 30°C occur due to its melt near the
wall and fluctuates due to circulation. But in
the experiments, it shows gradual increase of
temperature with time and raises its sensible
heat. The experimental temperature data
Figure.4 Distribution of temperature with
available from the experimental procedure is fin at T=35°C, t=100; 1000; 3000;
showing a good agreement with the 6000sec
numerically available temperature data for
different thermocouple at different location
of the experimental domain.
literature [Ismail et. al., 2001; Lorente et. al., Authors deeply acknowledge for utilizing the
2014 ] experimental facilities procured through the
research grant by SERB, DST (Sanction No.
SERB/F/2534/2012-2013 dated 08/08/2012)
under Fast Track Scheme for Young
Scientist.
REFERENCES
Al-Abidi A A Mat S Sopian K Sulaiman M Y
and Mohammad A 2013 Internal and
external fin heat transfer enhancement
technique for latent heat thermal energy
storage in triplex tube heat exchangers
Applied Thermal Engineering 53(1)
147-156
Figure.6. Isotherm plot with fin at Brent A D Voller V R and Reid K J 1988
T=20°C, t=30; 100; 200; 500sec Enthalpy porosity technique for
modeling convection –diffusion on
phase change: application to the
melting of pure metal Numerical Heat
Transfer 13(3) 297-318
Chakraborty S and Dutta P 2001 A
generalized formulation for evaluation
of latent heat functions in enthalpy-
based macroscopic models for
convection-diffusion phase charge
processes Metallurgical and Materials
Transactions B 32(3) 562-564
Figure.7. Melt fraction with fin T=20°C,
t=30; 60; 200; 500sec Samanta H Roy P C Barman N 2015
Modeling of Solidification of CCHH
CONCLUSIONS (CaCl2, 6H2O) in a Shell-and Tube
Numerical studies of a shell and tube PCM PCM based Heat Storage Unit Procedia
heat exchanger unit has been done based on Engineering 127 816–823
enthalpy based 2D numerical model to study Ismail K A R Alves C L F and Modesto M S
the melting and solidification characteristics. 2001 Numerical and experimental
The model has been validated with study on the solidification of PCM
experimental data for melting and around a vertical axially finned
solidification with fin configuration. isothermal cylinder, Applied Thermal
Temporal variation and melt fraction Engineering 21(1) 53-77
distribution in the numerical domain has been
Lorente S Bejan A and Niu J L 2014 Phase
studied at different locations in the numerical
change heat storage in an enclosure
domain of PCM.
with vertical pipe in the center
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer 72 329–335.
359
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Fluid flow and heat transfer performance of ¼ sector non-continuous helical
baffled shell and tube heat exchanger (HBSTHEx) with 30° baffle inclination angle is
numerically simulated using multi-block structured mesh, which exhibits an
approximate spiral pitch. The results obtained with CFD. Expert-Lite, are showing well
coalescence with previous work, showing a difference of 3% in pressure drop and 7%
in heat transfer coefficient. In the present study, the mesh and CFD code, are validated.
The results of the study have been used for further investigations. One of the objectives
of the study was determination of an optimum mass flow rate for lower pressure drop
and higher heat transfer coefficient, for the same configuration by trying some
alternatives such as, (1) Changing baffle inclination angle to 40°. (2) Current geometry
shows some leakages through V-Notch (triangular region) between two adjacent
baffles. Blocking V-Notch directly, by putting wall, can suppress the leakage region.
(3) Another way of improvisation would be by putting holes on baffle leading to
decreased pressure drop and reduced velocity drop behind baffle wall, but its effect on
the heat transfer coefficient is worth studying.
Keywords: Structured mesh; CFD Expert-Lite; Mass flow rate; Pressure drop;
Heat transfer
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
Shell side flow of heat exchanger is
analysed in this paper. Configurations of
geometry are shown in Figure.1. Warm
water flows through tubes while cold water
flows on shell side.
RNG k-epsilon model is adopted for
numerical simulation, as it considers spin
and vortex in flow, and its effect on Whereas,
turbulence. C µ = 0.0845; σ k = 0.7194; σ ε = 0.7194; C ε1
The governing equations for continuity, = 1.42; C ε2 = 1.68; η 0 = 4.38; β = 0.012.
momentum, energy, in the computational
domain can be expressed as follows,
361
Heat Transfer Augmentation of Helix Changer using CFD
362
Raje et al.
Farhad N T Sirous Z M Kazem R and Reza tube heat exchangers with different
T A 2012 Baffle space impact on the baffles International Journal of Heat
performance of helical baffle shell and and Mass Transfer 84 990–997.
tube heat exchangers Applied Thermal Zhang M Meng F & Geng Z 2015 CFD
Engineering 44 143-149. simulation on shell-and-tube heat
Gao B Bi Q Nie Z and Wu J 2015 exchangers with small-angle helical
Experimental study of effects of baffle baffles Front. Chem. Sci. Eng. 9(2)
helix angle on shell-side performance 183–193
of shell-and-tube heat exchangers with
discontinuous helical baffles
Experimental Thermal and Fluid.
Lei Y G He Y L Li R and Gao Y F 2008
Effects of baffle inclination angle on
flow and heat transfer of a heat
exchanger with helical baffles
Chemical Engineering and Processing
47 2336–2345.
Muhammad M A B Nasir H Muhammad H
B Ahmer R K Kanwar N A and
Sarfaraz K 2012 CFD applications in
various heat exchangers design: A
review Applied Thermal Engineering
32 1-12.
Saeedan M and Bahiraei M 2015 Effects of
Geometrical Parameters on
Hydrothermal Characteristics of Shell-
and-Tube Heat Exchanger with Helical
Baffles: Numerical Investigation
Modeling and Optimization Chemical
Engineering Research and Design.
Salahuddin U Bilal M & Ejaz H 2015 A
review of the advancements made in
helical baffles used in shell and tube
heat exchangers International
Communications in Heat and Mass
Transfer 67 104–108.
Wen J Yang H Wang S Xue Y and Tong X
2015 Experimental investigation on
performance comparison for shell-and-
363
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Vehicle aerodynamics plays a vital role in the design and development of a
vehicle. With increasing environmental concern and depletion of conventional fuel,
solar panel mounted vehicles are gaining popularity. Roof top mounting disturb the
aerodynamics of vehicle and it needs designer’s attention to understand its impact on
vehicle performance so that corrective measures can be taken to over the problem.
Drag and lift forces are parameters of great concern which effects vehicle
performance. Using Ahmed body, a generic model of a vehicle, for aerodynamic
investigations in wind tunnel is a conventional practice. Paper deals with a numerical
analysis to assess the emerging flow configuration around different proposals of solar
panel mounting over Ahmed body. The work is executed using CFD software
ANSYS Fluent.
Keywords: Ahmed Body; Solar Panel; CFD; Aerodynamic and Vortex.
body geometry, along with Reynolds number the vehicle aerodynamics. This would be
behaviour. It showed, drag coefficient because of solar panel shape & mounting,
exhibited some sensitivity to changes in gives flow separation at the rear. Also it
Reynolds number. Parandhamaiah Gorre et contributes the development of turbulence
al. studied CFD Simulations of underbody and flow separation which affect the vehicle
electric car for drag reduction with different fuel economy and stability. So it is necessary
add-ons using Realizable k-ε turbulence to investigate the air flow analysis over solar
model. With these add-ons, coefficient of panel mounted vehicle to improve vehicle
drag reduced by 9.6%. Teddy Hobeika et al. economy and dynamic performance.
investigated various CFD solver parameters The objective of this work is to investigate
for road vehicles using different turbulence the aerodynamic analysis of solar panel
models. Result indicated that k-epsilon mounted ground vehicle. This work deals
models is more accurate for solving the with a numerical analysis to assess the
aerodynamic problems. Ranjeet Singh et al. aerodynamic parameters and emerging flow
explained past, present and future solar configuration around different proposals of
energy applications, issues, parameters and solar panel mounting over Ahmed body. The
the model structure of solar car. Neal A. modelling of Ahmed Body done by using
Allgood studied the aerodynamic CATIA and the simulation carried out by
optimization of a solar – bio-diesel hybrid using CFD software ANSYS Fluent.
vehicle. These tests proved that the designed
vehicle is aerodynamically sound with drag
coefficients 12.8% less than that of the most COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH
aerodynamic hybrid vehicle currently in use. The physics of road vehicle aerodynamics
Muhammad (2010) described CFD analysis problem involved mass and momentum
of solar car by using COSMOS floworks. variation, turbulence flow, flow separation
Result showed that frontal area, shape and and vortex formation. It is assumed that flow
material of the solar car’s body are the most is incompressible, steady state and
important parameter in order to design an isothermal. The governing equations can be
aerodynamics car. Peteris K. Augenberges written as:
(2005) discussed Aerodynamics optimization
of Solar Electric Vehicle using Wind Tunnel Continuity Equation:
using parameters such as angle of attack, ride Momentum Equation:
height, wheel fairing length, surface finish,
sealing and rear view mirror. These test
achieved net reduction in drag, as increase in
stability due to lift force reduction.
Based on literature it is observed that Ahmed
body is the best bluff body for ground In this model, turbulent viscosity is modelled
vehicle aerodynamics analysis which as:
demonstrates all characteristics involved in
an actual case of a moving car. CFD play
vital role for vehicle aerodynamics analysis In this study realizable k-epsilon model
in less time and low cost with multiple turbulence model is used. The transport
iteration as compared to wind tunnel testing. equations can be expressed as
Also it has been observed that most of the
fitment of solar panels over the vehicle body
are done only to capture the solar energy but
study and behavior of the vehicle is missing
under same condition. Any additional fitment
over vehicle body such as solar panel, affect
365
Numerical Investigation of Evolving Flow Structure Around Ahmed Body Mounted with Solar Panel of
Different Configuration
366
Agrewale and Maurya
367
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present study, numerical simulations over rocket models are carried
out in acceleration frame of reference in Eulerian approach to include the effect of
acceleration, which is generally neglected in simulations carried out at constant Mach
numbers in inertial frame of reference. Acceleration and retardation effects are studied
on a typical rocket model with cone-cylinder-flare configuration in the Mach number
range, 0.6 to 5. This study revealed that in the transonic flow regime, both
acceleration and retardation influence the transonic shock movement, but it is more
pronounced in high levels of retardations. In the supersonic regime, the influence of
acceleration is found to be negligible.
Keywords: Free-stream acceleration; Acceleration frame of reference;
Turbulence model; Transonic and supersonic.
structured single-block grid is generated modified Riemann solver. The non-linear k-ε
using algebraic techniques. The model combines the linear time-scale
computational grid over the model is shown realizable k-ε model with extra quadratic
in Figure 2. Simulations are carried out using terms for an anisotropic representation of
a commercial code, CFD++ with cubical k-ε Reynolds stresses. Grid independent studies
turbulence model. In this code, the Reynolds and validation studies are carried out for
Averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations steady state computations. Initially steady
are discretized in space using a second order state simulations are carried out at various
multi-dimensional vertex-oriented Total Mach number from 0.6 to 5. Using M = 0.6
Variation Diminishing (TVS) scheme solution as initial solution, accelerated flow
coupled with a pointwise implicit first order simulation is carried out with proper
time integration or an explicit second order boundary conditions at different levels of
Runge-Kutta (RK) integration. The finite acceleration. Similarly, using M = 5.0
volume framework adopted for the integral solution as initial solution, simulations are
conservation laws updates cell averages in carried out at different levels of retardation.
time insuring correct signal propagation via a
Beyond this regime, all the three cases regime at different levels of acceleration and
(steady state, acceleration and retardation) are retardation. This study revealed that in the
identical. Besides quantifying acceleration transonic flow regime, both acceleration and
effects, the numerical simulations in retardation influence the transonic shock
acceleration frame of reference can be used movement, but it is more pronounced in high
to study the physics of accelerating flow and levels of retardations. In the supersonic
also to quantify aerodynamic characteristics regime, the influence of acceleration is found
of a Mach number regime in a single to be negligible.
simulation, without loss of continuity. They
are discussed in detail in the main paper. REFERENCES
Arjun Sharma and Sanjiva K Lele 2011
Sound generation due to unsteady
motion of a cylinder Physics of Fluids
23 046102
Roohani H and Skews H W 2008 Unsteady
aerodynamics effects experienced by
airfoil during acceleration and
retardation Proc. IMechE Part G J.
Aerospace Engineering 222 631-636
(a) Steady state
Gledhill I M A Forsberg K Eliason P Baloyi
J and Nordstrom J 2009 Investigation of
acceleration effects on missile
aerodynamics using computational fluid
dynamics Aerospace Science and
Technology 13 197-203
Kumaravel G 2012 Investigation of
acceleration effects on rocket
aerodynamics Ph.D. Thesis Department
(b) Acceleration (100g) of Aerospace Engineering IIT Kanpur
Kumaravel G Jeyajothiraj P and E.
Ratharishnan 2015 Formation and
dissipation of Karman Vortex street in
an accelerating flow past a circular
cylinder International Review of
Aerospace Engineering 8(2) 43-55
Kumaravel G Jeyajothiraj P and
Rathakrishnan E 2015 Transonic shock
(c) Retardation (-100g) wave patterns over an airfoil in an
accelerated flow International Review of
Figure 4. Mach contours of steady and Aerospace Engineering 8(2) 56-70
accelerated flow over the rocket model at
Munoz G and Jones P 2010 The equivalent
Mach number (M) 0.95
principle, uniformly accelerated
reference frames, and the uniform
CONCLUSIONS gravitational field American Journal of
In this study, acceleration effects on a rocket Physics 78(4) 377-383
model are studied in transonic and supersonic
370
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper describes the experimental and computational work carried out at
the university facility. The experimental winglet model made of Medium Density Fiber
(MDF) board while computational model was created using CATIA V6 software
adopting NACA 0012 airfoil. The experimental work was performed in open loop Low
Speed Subsonic Wind Tunnel at Reynold Numbers 3.94x104. The CFD simulation was
performed using 3-D structured hexahedral mesh generated in ICEM CFD software. In-
viscid Euler and laminar RANS k-ω turbulent model with Finite volume method were
used. The various aerodynamic characteristics were measured and analyzed. The result
shows that the corrugation winglet produces better lift and reduced drag compared to
other two configurations tested and hence the significant performance improvement is
obtained.
Keywords: Corrugated Winglet; MAV; CFD Analysis; RANS k-ω; ICEM CFD.
the experimental study on corrugation wing spatial discretization for the computational
was also performed by Kwok and Mittal model is done by first producing surface grids
(2005), Guovu and Mao Sun (2005), Hu and using ICEM CFD figure 4 & 5. The three
Tamai (2008), Murphy and Hu (2010) also dimensional structured hexahedral mesh was
gathered quantitative results in a wind tunnel utilized for computing the flow around the
and compared a corrugated model against the model. The blended winglet meshing &
profiled airfoil. The numerical study on domain meshing is shown in figure 4 & 5. In-
corrugation on wing also carried out by Hord viscid Euler and laminar RANS k- ω turbulent
and Lian (2010), Vergas and Mittal (2004). finite volume method was used for the flow
simulation. Boundary condition is shown in
The present study is to investigate the effects
figure 6.
of winglet corrugation on the performance of
Micro Air Vehicles (MAV) wing which
RESULT AND DISCUSSION
normally fly in the Reynolds Number ranges
from 104-105. The experimental and The wind tunnel tests and CFD simulations of
computational work performed result shows all three types of wing were performed at the
that the corrugation winglet produces higher Reynolds Number 3.94 x 104. The analysis
lift and better drag reduction compared to other focused on the aerodynamic characteristics CL,
two. CD and performance (L/D).
Coefficient of Lift (CL) verses AOA (Figure 8)
MATERIALS AND METHODS and CL/CD verses AOA ((Figure 8)) shows the
The wing and the winglet geometries were experimental results., at 50 angel of attack the
modeled in CATIA V6. The airfoil used was plain wing shows lowest lift coefficient and
NACA 0012 The airfoil coordinates are other two shows almost equal. However, at 100
obtained by using MATLAB. The obtained angle of attack (AOA) the plain wing is
profile of blended and corrugated are shown in outperformed other two wings. For 15o AOA
figure 1 and 2 and 3D models is shown in the lift coefficient of blended wing is better
figure 3. The wooden rectangular wing, than the corrugated winglet. The experimental
blended wing with winglet and corrugated result for CL/CD shows that at 50 AOA, the
winglets were made by using different plain wing has least ratio and the corrugated
carpentry hand tools. The experimental wing has the highest among other two wings.
analysis was performed in an open loop wind The computational results shows that CL/CD
tunnel of test section of 0.6m x0.6m x 2 m. The for plain wing at 50 AOA and 100 AOA is
six component balance was used to get the better than remaining two, however at AOA
forces and moments with Reynold number 150 AOA the blended winglet outperformed
3.98x104 and for angle of attacks (AOA) other two.
ranging from 0o to 15o. The different winglets
configurations were tested at different angles CONCLUSION
of attack in difference of 5 degrees and the Computational and experimental analysis was
aerodynamic characteristics such as the lift and performed to understand the aerodynamic
drag their coefficient were obtained. The performance characteristics of plain wing,
372
Effect of Winglet Corrugation for Improved MAV Aerodynamic Performance
blended winglet and corrugated winglet. It was Bird Feather like winglet International
observed that the corrugated winglet lift to Journal of Aerospace and Mechanical
drag ratio found to be superior with other Engineering 6 8-13.
winglets at different AOA. Azlin M A Mat Taib C F Kasolang S
Muhammad F H 2011 CFD Analysis of
Winglets at Low Subsonic Flow World
Congress on Engineering 1 1-5.
Catalano F M Ceron-Munoz H D 2005
Experimental Analysis of Aerodynamic
characteristic of Adaptive Multi- Winglets
43rd AIAA Aerospace Sciences Meeting
and exhibits AIAA 2005-1231 Reno
Navada.
Figure 1. Corrugated Profile
Guoyu L and Mao Sun 2005 The Effect of
Corrugation and Wing Planform on the
aerodynamic Force Production of
Sweeping Wing Model Insect Wings Acta
Mech Sinica 21 531-541.
Hord K and Lian Y 2010 Numerical
Investigation oacteristics of a Corrugated
Figure 2. Blended Profile Airfoil AIAA 40th Fluid Dynamics
Conference 28 June-1 July Chicago,
Illinois.
Hu H. and Tamai M 2008 Bio-inspired
Corrugated Airfoil at Low Reynolds
Number Journal of Aircraft 45 2068-2077.
Kesel A Philippi U Nachtigall W 1998
Figure.3.3D Model corrugated Biomechanical aspects of insect wing: an
winglet analysis Using the finite element method
Computers in Biology and Medicine 28
423-437.
Kesel A B 2000 Aerodynamic Characteristics
of Dragonfly Wing Sections Compared
with Technical Aerofoil Journal of
Experimental Biology 203 3125-3135.
Kwok M. and Mittal R 2005 Experimental
Figure 4. 3D Meshing of winglet Investigation of the Aerodynamics of a
Modeled Dragonfly Wing Section AIAA
REFERENCES Region-I MA Students Conference AIAA
Reston
Hossain A Rahman A Iqbal P Ariffin M
Mohammad I I Mohammad M Abdullah A N
Mazian M 2012 Drag Analysis of an
Selim S M S 2010 Induced Drag
Aircraft Wing Model with and without
373
Dwiwedi and Donepudi
Reduction for Modern Aircraft without Whitecomb R 1981 Method for Reducing
Increasing the Span of the Wing by using Aerodynamic Drag NASA CP 2211
Winglet International Journal of Dryden Symposium.
Mechanical & Mechatronics IJMME- Zimmer H 1987 The Aerodynamic
IJENS 10 69-74. Optimization of Wings at Subsonic Speeds
Murphy J Hu H 2010 An Experimental and the Influence of the Wingtip Design
Investigation on a Bio-inspired Corrugated NASA Technical Memorandum NASA
Airfoil Experiments in Fluids 49 531-546. TM-88534.
Okamoto M Yasuda K and Azuma A 1996
Aerodynamic Characteristics of the Wings
and Body of a Dragonfly The Journal of
Experimental Biology 199 281-294.
Rees C J C 1975 Aerodynamic Properties of an
Insect Wing Section and a Smooth
Aerofoil Compared Nature 258 141-142.
Rees C J C 1975 Form and Function in Figure 5. Meshing Figure 6. Boundary
Corrugated Insect Wing Nature 256 200- of Domain condition
203.
Roche La U Roche H L 2004 Induced Drag
Using multiple Winglets, looking beyond CL vs AOA at Re=3.98x104
the Prandtl-Munk Model AIAA 2120.
0.25 plain wing
Smith M J Komerath N Ames R and Wong O 0.2
coefficient of liftCL
Journal 88 362-369. 5
blended
Vargas A and Mittal R 2004 A Computational winglet
Study of the Aerodynamic Performance of 0 corrugated
a Dragonfly Wing Section AIAA 2004- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 winglet
2319 2nd Flow Control Conference Angle of Attack AOA (deg)
Portland Oregon.
Figure 8. Ratio of CL/CD Vs AOA
374
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
term and using global AIF. However, to the temporal resolution approximately of 4
best of our knowledge no group has reported seconds for each time point. From DCE-MRI
the CFD analysis of realistic human brain images, concentration of contrast on each
tumors based on general tracer kinetic model voxel was calculated from signal intensity by
(GTKM) which includes intravascular term
using a non-linear relationship between the
and is widely used for estimation of perfusion
kinetic parameters. Accurate estimation of two mentioned in equation (i) in Table 1
AIF is necessary to get correct perfusion [Singh, 2007]. T10 was estimated using 3
maps so in this study local AIF has been used FSE image (T1W, T2W, and PDW) as
to obtain the kinetic parameter maps and to described previously [Singh, 2007]. Local
do the computational study. A comparative AIF was estimated using method described
study has been conducted between the by Singh et al (2009). These concentration
experimental and simulated results. values obtained from equation (i) were used
to fit equation (ii) to get kinetic parameter
MATERIALS AND METHODS
maps ( 𝐾 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠 , 𝑣𝑒 , 𝑣𝑝 ) at each voxel by
In this study, GTKM that is basically
Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm in
extended Tofts model [Tofts, 1997] was used
MATLAB. Pre-contrast and post-contrast
to obtain the permeability and porosity maps
image of brain of one slice along with
for the human brain tumor and normal tissue
zoomed portion of tumor are shown in Figure
with the help of DCE-MRI experiments.
1.
These maps were later used in the
computational model made in openFoam
software for determination of fluid flow
parameters like interstitial fluid pressure
(IFP), interstitial fluid velocity (IFV). GTKM
has been used in this study since it takes into
account the intravascular term which is
relevant for highly perfused areas like
tumors.
(a) (b)
MR IMAGING
DCE MR imaging was performed on a 3.0T
Ingenia MRI scanner (Philips Healthcare,
The Netherlands). Written consent from each
patient was obtained before MRI study.
Imaging was performed using a fast field (c)
echo (T1-FFE) sequence (TR/TE = 4.38 Figure 1. MR Images of brain (a) Pre-
msec/2.3 msec, flip angle = 10°, field of view contrast (b) Post-contrast (c) Zoomed
(FOV) = 240 × 240 mm, slice thickness = 6 portion of tumor.
mm, matrix size = 256 × 256. A dose of
0.1mmol/kg body weight of Gd-BOPTA COMPUTATIONAL METHOD
(Gadobenate Dimeglumine) (Multihance,
Out of the twelve slices of human brain MRI
Bracco, Italy) was administered
images, only three slices contained tumor.
intravenously with the help of a power
Computation was done for all the twelve
injector. A total of 384 images at 32 time
slices. To reduce the computation time, only
points for 12 slices were acquired with a
376
CFD Analysis of Perfusion Kinetics in Brain Tumor with DCE-MRI derived Voxelized Model
the tumor part and the surrounding brain convergence criterion was set to be 1×10−6 .
normal tissue was taken as the computational As the flow in tissue is source sink driven
domain. A rectangular volume of size flow, therefore, a zero fluid pressure and
40×36×72 𝑚𝑚3 enclosing the tumor and the velocity boundary conditions were applied at
normal tissue was created and meshed using two ends and remaining other boundaries
the OPENFoam software as shown in Figure were assigned as wall.
2. The voxel size in the rectangular volume
was in accordance with the MRI resolution
(0.9375×0.9375×6 𝑚𝑚3 ). The Continuity
and Darcy equations were coded in the
software. Values of parameters coming in
72
these equations other than perfusion
parameters were taken from literature
[Pishko, 2011]. The values of tracer kinetic
parameters obtained earlier from equation (ii)
were put at each voxel in openFoam by
declaring the variables as non-uniform field
to solve for IFP and IFV. The discretization 40
of the governing equations described above 36
was done by finite volume method. The
SIMPLE (semi implicit method for pressure Figure 2. CFD mesh enclosing tumor and
linked equations) algorithm was used and normal tissue (all dimensions in mm).
(a) REFERENCES
Jain RK 1994 Barriers to Drug Delivery in
Solid Tumors. Sci.Am.271 58-65.
Jain RK 1994 Transport Phenomena in
Tumors. Adv. Chem. Eng.19 130-200.
Magdoom K N 2012 Evaluation of a
voxelized model based on DCE-MRI for
(b) tracer transport in tumor Journal of
Biomechanical Engineering 134091004
Figure 3. Contour plots of IFP & IFV
Tofts PS 1997 Modeling tracer kinetics in
(a) IFP (b) IFV dynamic Gd-DTPA MR imaging.
Journal of Magn Reson Imaging 3 91-
DISCUSSIONS 101.
In this work, a voxelized model of human Singh A 2007 Quantification of Physiological
brain tumors has been studied based on MRI and Hemodynamic indices using T1
images. The model has been used to calculate DCE-MRI in Intracranial Mass Lesions
the fluid flow parameters like IFP and IFV JMRI 26:871-880
inside brain tumors. These two parameters Singh A 2009 Improved Bolus Arrival Time
might add diagnostic values to tracer kinetic and Arterial Input Function Estimation
parameters obtained using GTKM. This type for Tracer Kinetic Analysis in DCE-
of image based model can be made patient MRI.J Magn Reson Imaging 29:166–
176.
specific and this model can be extended to
any type of tumor like cervical, breast and Pishko GL 2011 Sensitivity analysis of an
lung tumors. image based solid tumor computational
model with heterogeneous vasculature
CONCLUSION and porosity. Annals of Biomedical
Engineering 39(9) 2360-2373.
This study provides us a good understanding
Navalitloha Yot 2006 Therapeutic
of the fluid flow within human brain tumors. implications of tumor interstitial fluid
This model also provides a good platform for pressure in subcutaneous RG-2 tumors
patient specific diagnosis. After Society for Neuro-Oncology.
determination of the perfusion kinetic Jennifer M Munson 2014 Interstitial fluid
parameters, we can employ them in the flow in cancer: implications for disease
computational model for estimating IFP and progression and treatment Journal of
IFV parameters, which might have some Cancer Management and Research
diagnosis value. 6317-328.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors thanks Dr. RK Gupta for providing
clinical data; Prof. RKS Rathore and Dr.
Prativa Sahoo for technical support in DCE-
MRI data analysis.
378
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: DRDO has developed wheeled armoured platform. Due to use of high
power engine, thermal signature needs to be reduced. Pull type forced cooling system
has been used in prototype. To reduce the thermal signature engine exhaust gases are
mixed with cooling air. During development of trials of this prototype, it was
observed that these exhaust gases with air were passing over the turret which is not
desirable in operational scenario. The work presented in this paper has the aim to
investigate effect of ‘S’ shaped vanes, which are fitted on exhaust system to exit the
exhaust with cooling air away from the vehicle, when vehicle is in motion. Therefore,
CFD analysis was carried out for different speed of vehicle with different lengths of
fixed and moving vanes combination. Further comprehensive and complete campaign
of CFD analysis & different grid independent study carried out to divert exhaust flow
outside the vehicle. Different stream line pattern has been observed for different fixed
and moving vanes combination with respect to vehicle velocity. Most effective
solution has been suggested to divert the flow of exhaust system away from turret and
vehicle.
Keywords: Exhaust system design, Combat vehicle, Moving vanes and fixed
vanes, Exhaust cooling.
382
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Grid fins are unconventional lifting and control surfaces consisting of an
outer frame supporting an inner grid of intersecting small chord planar surfaces.
Cascade fins are a new category of grid fins wherein, they do not have cross members
unlike grid fins. In thepresent work, a sequence of simulationresults obtained for
cascade fins at different angles of attack is presented. The preliminary results indicate
an increase in lift force at high angles of attackand reduction in flow separation in the
inner members. The results are in agreement with the experimental data and indicate
that cascading effect leads to a delay in flow separation.
Keywords: Cascade fins; CFD; Aerodynamic coefficients; Grid fins; Stall
conventional fins [Munawar S 2010] at chord ratio (g/c) of 0.5, thus giving it a gap
supersonic speeds and comparable at (g) of 0.05m between the plates.
subsonic speeds making them ideal for
missiles and munitions. The major
disadvantage related to these fins is increased
drag force and thus reduced aerodynamic
efficiency (C L /C D ). Thus to make them more
efficient, a lot of research has gone into
reducing their drag mostly using thin
members, sweptback configuration etc.
[Miller M S and Washington W D1998,
1993]
Thus to increase the aerodynamic efficiency,
Misra (2009) proposed a new category
termed as the Cascade fins. A cascade fin has Figure 2. Cascade of three plates
planar members placed parallel to each other
at an optimized gap-to-chord (g/c) ratio SOLUTION METHODOLOGY
[Miller M S and Washington W D1998]. It is Preliminary results (as shown in further
the absence of these cross members that sections) was obtained using the commercial
make them different from grid fins. This also CFD++ solver by solving the compressible
results in reduced drag. Theoretical study Navier-Stokes equations. In order to capture
[Belotserkovskiy S et al 1987,Miller M S and the flow separation and producing efficient
Washington W D1993] and experimental results at adverse pressure gradient
observations [Munawar S 2010, SpaceX conditions, we used the RANS based
2015] point to an enhanced lift at higher realizable k-ε turbulence model.CATIA was
angles and deviation from the conventional used to create the computational domain
stall of a flat plate making them a viable which is a cylinder of radius 0.5m and length
candidate for highly manoeuvrable devices. 1m in front and 1.4m at the rear of the fin in
In the present work, a sequence of order to capture the flow variations at the tail
simulations were carried out at velocity of 40 portion. The mesh is created using MIME
m/s for varying angles of attack. The results mesher. The mesh used is hybrid mesh
were firstly validated against experimental consisting of tetrahedral cells away from the
results obtained from the National Wind body and 8 prismatic layers and mesh
Tunnel Facility [Misra A et al. 2008] refinement close to the walls of the fins to
available in the Department of Aerospace efficiently capture the variation in flow
Engineering at the Indian Institute of parameters close to the fin walls. The mesh
Technology, Kanpur. Consequently to get quality has been increased by using the
insight into the physics of the flow regarding curvature-based refinement feature of the
stall delay, visualisation of the pressure mesher. The mesh consists of 411545
coefficient (C p ) and velocity contour will be tetrahedrals, 1573 pyramids and 50653
used. triangular prisms. The boundary conditions
are taken to be ambient conditions i.e.
FIN GEOMETRY pressure of 101325 Pa, temperature 288.16K.
The flow is maintained at 40m/s i.e. at Mach
Our cascade fin consists of a three flat plates 0.1176, and varying angles of attack of 0º to
placed parallel to each other bounded by two 50 ºin steps of 5º, and 53º. Characteristic
vertical end plates as shownin figure 2. The based inflow/outflow boundary conditions at
plates have a span (b) of 0.2m and chord the farfield, with adiabatic no-slip conditions
length (c) of 0.1m, thus an aspect ratio of 2. with a solve to wall function for the fin walls
Thickness of the plate is 0.0025m and gap-to- have been used in the simulation.
384
CFD Simulation of Cascade Fin Flow at Low Subsonic Speeds and High Angles of Attack
385
Tripathi et al.
1. Results show a delay in stall and hence to conventional planar fins 27th
prove its efficiency of cascade fins at high International Congress of the
angles of attack. Aeronautical Sciences.
2. Cascade effect leads to attached flow
on the top surfaces of middle and Space X Falcon 92015
bottom plates leading to increased lift http://www.spacex.com/falcon9.
at high angles of attack.
Zaloga S 2000 The Scud and other Russian
3. Further investigation is required to
find the cause for deviation between Ballistic Missiles New Territories Hog
experimental and simulation results Kong: Concord Publications Co.
for angle of attack between 15º and
40º. NOTATION
C L Coefficient of lift
REFERENCES
α Angle of attack
Belotserkovskiy S et al. 1987 Wings with
C P Coefficient of pressure
internal frameworkMachine Translation
FTD-ID (RS) -1289-86 Foreign g Gap between Plates
Technology Division. c Chord of plates
Ledlow T I Burkhalter J E and R J Hartfield b Plate Span
2015 Integration of grid fins for the g/c Non-Dimensional gap–to-chord ratio
optimal design of missile systems AIAA
Miller M S and Washington W D 1993
Curvature and leading edge sweep back
effects on grid fin aerodynamic
characteristics AIAA.
Miller M S and Washington W D 1998
Experimental investigations of grid fin
aerodynamics: a synopsisof nine wind
tunnel and three fight tests Proceedings
of the NATO Research Proposal Page
21 RTO-MP-5 Missile Aerodynamics
NATO Research and Technology
Organization.
Misra A 2009 Investigation of Grid and
Cascade fins for Missile Flight
Stabilization and Control Ph.D. Thesis
Indian Inst. of Technology Kanpur
India.
Misra A Ghosh A K and Ghosh K2008
Cascade fins- an alternate tail
stabilization unit AIAA 6884.
Munawar S 2010 Analysis of grid fins as
efficient control surface in comparison
386
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Based on the above studies and discussions it equation (Conservation of energy). The flow
is observed that there is a lack of studies for is driven due to the buoyancy effects created
room ventilation using solar ventilation by by the temperature differences inside the
changing different heat source locations and cavity. The density variation is assumed by
inlet air sources. In the present study a roof the Boussinesq approximation:
top solar chimney concept is used for room 𝜌 = 𝜌𝑜 �1 − 𝛽𝑇 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )� (1)
ventilation process by using an air inlet
1 𝜕𝜌
source along the lower portion of the right where 𝛽𝑇 = − ( ) is the thermal
𝜌 𝜕𝑇
vertical wall. The discrete heat sources are expansion coefficient.
placed along the left vertical wall and bottom
wall to minimize or maximize the
temperature level inside the room. The flow
is governed by two mechanisms, the
buoyancy driven flow due to inlet air and the
natural convection due to heat sources along
the vertical and bottom wall. Our aim is to
find the maximum heat and flow transfer rate
by changing the flow parameters like
Reynolds number, Richardson number with
the different placement of heat source.
Configuration-A Configuration-B
389
Gupta and Nayak
REFERENCES
Bassiouny Ramadan Koura Nader S A 2008
An analytical and numerical study of
solar chimney use for room natural
ventilation Energy and buildings 40
865-873
Bassiouny Ramadan Koura Nader S A 2009
Effect of solar chimney inclination
angle on space flow pattern and
ventilation rate Energy and buildings
41 190-196
390
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Household air pollution (HAP) affects over 3 billion people globally.
Sufficient air exchanges within the cooking space in rural kitchens can help in HAP
mitigation. Multiple built parameters like opening to wall ratio (OWR), opening area,
floor area etc. are assumed to play a significant role in airflow distribution within an
indoor environment. It is generally assumed that higher OWR enables in better air
exchange. However, given that airflow exchange is a cumulative function of built
parameters, there might be a case where similar OWR can result in varied air
exchanges. To confirm this hypotheses we compare airflow patterns in two similar
rural kitchens having same OWR, with solid fuel cookstoves. A field based survey
combined with computational fluid dynamics simulations using steady state RANS
model was used to compute the air-flow patterns. Results show that even with similar
OWR the placement of openings and their respective positioning within the indoor
space plays a significant role in improving the air flow distribution, thus increasing
the air exchange rate. The larger implication of this study is in realizing the potential
of building de-sign and its contribution to long term public health sustainability in
rural and low income areas. This study shows the explanatory power of such
engineering techniques like CFD for sustainable development.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; Household Air Pollution; Opening
to Wall Ratio; Sustainable Development
HAP mitigation strategies include addition of In this study, the air flow distribution is
chimneys to the cookstoves, shifting to analysed with the help of CFD simulations in
cleaner fuels and effective design of kitchens similar kitchens. It is generally perceived that
opening to wall ratio (OWR) is a critical spatial discretization scheme was of second
design parameter for regulating the air order: ‘UPWIND scheme’. In order to save
distribution and air exchanges within a space. time on computation, every model is
Such generalizations often overshadows the simulated for state-state RANS model
importance of the relative positioning of [Baharvand et al. 2013; DesignBuilder 2012;
openings that might also have a significant Designbuilder 2011].
role in air distribution changes, especially in Unidirectional steady state flow of wind is
rural buildings. assumed across the kitchens. The indoor air
Field survey of houses using solid fuel flow is considered to be completely-wind
cookstoves, was conducted in a village in driven. The indoor air is assumed to be at
western India. It was observed the kitchens steady state and well mixed. The indoor and
lacked compliances to basic design principles outdoor walls temperatures are assumed to be
like positioning of doors and windows for isothermal in all the directions. The kitchens
facilitating cross ventilation. Therefore, it is were assumed to have high air infiltration in
essential to employ bottom-up design the form of cracks and gaps. Both the models
techniques to address this issue, which may were simulated with Mumbai, ISHRAE, 2002
pave way towards the much needed climate file. The cookstove is assumed to be
sustainable rural habitat bye-laws. a heat source of 15000W/m2 [Li & Drysdale
1992]. It is also assumed that cookstove only
To understand the significance of airflow
effects the circulation of air in the cooking
distribution two kitchens having similar
zone.
OWR were chosen. Airflow computation is
performed between two kitchens which has
THE KITCHEN MODELS
OWR of 5%. It is hypothesised that even
under same OWR, the strategic positioning of The two kitchens chosen as study models had
openings can significantly affect the air similar OWR but varied in their other built
distribution in the functional space which can characteristics. Table 1 shows the variation in
lead to better indoor environment. built characteristics of the two kitchen
models. Figure 1 and Figure 2 illustrates the
METHODOLOGY 3 dimensional representation of the two
kitchen models.
Built environment field survey was
performed to understand the built 5%
392
Evaluating Differences in Airflow Patterns for Similar Rural Kitchens Using CFD
RESULTS
Aspect Ratio: 1:0.16:0.21
Airflow (m/s)
OWR: 5% 0.0
0.18
0.36
0.55
0.73
0.91
Orientation: North 1.09
1.27
1.46
1.64
Model: A Model: B
1.82
2.00
The air-flow distribution was found to be Typical summer week of May 14-20th, 2002
different in the two models in spite of having is used for the climate based airflow
same OWR of 5%. Model B showed more air simulation, which is illustrated in Figure 4. It
movement in the form of cross ventilation is evident that despite the kitchens being
around the kitchen space. Model A similar having same OWR, there is a drastic
experienced almost no or very little air difference in the air exchange rates between
movement throughout the space (see Figure them. The Model-B enables cross ventilation
3). This means Model B experiences better in the functional space, which resulted in 10
air exchanges throughout the cooking space, times more air exchanges in it. Experimental
thus enabling faster removal of stale air, and validation is shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6,
hence, better indoor air quality. This may be the simulation was performed for May 16,
attributed to the other built characteristics 2002 (A typical hot day in western India).
like the positioning of the windows, aspect The simulated values were extracted from a
ratio and height. It is evident that Model-B point in space which represented the user
had windows positioned to stimulate natural height during cooking in respective kitchen
cross ventilation. models (CFD monitoring point).
393
Bardhan et al.
12.00 90.00
14/05/2002 00:30
14/05/2002 05:30
14/05/2002 10:30
14/05/2002 15:30
14/05/2002 20:30
15/05/2002 01:30
15/05/2002 06:30
15/05/2002 11:30
15/05/2002 16:30
15/05/2002 21:30
16/05/2002 02:30
16/05/2002 07:30
16/05/2002 12:30
16/05/2002 17:30
16/05/2002 22:30
17/05/2002 03:30
17/05/2002 08:30
17/05/2002 13:30
17/05/2002 18:30
17/05/2002 23:30
18/05/2002 04:30
18/05/2002 09:30
18/05/2002 14:30
18/05/2002 19:30
19/05/2002 00:30
19/05/2002 05:30
19/05/2002 10:30
19/05/2002 15:30
19/05/2002 20:30
20/05/2002 01:30
20/05/2002 06:30
20/05/2002 11:30
20/05/2002 16:30
20/05/2002 21:30
Model-A Model-B
Figure 4. Simulated air change rates between the two kitchen models from May 14-20,
2002
0.40
0.35
0.30
Airflow (m/s)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
10:30
10:31
10:32
10:32
10:33
10:34
10:35
10:36
10:37
10:38
10:39
10:40
10:41
10:42
10:43
10:44
10:45
10:46
10:47
10:48
10:49
10:50
10:51
10:52
10:53
10:54
10:55
10:56
10:57
10:58
10:59
Time (hh:mm) AM
Measured Simulated
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
11:30
11:31
11:32
11:32
11:33
11:34
11:35
11:36
11:37
11:38
11:39
11:40
11:41
11:42
11:43
11:44
11:45
11:46
11:47
11:48
11:49
11:50
11:51
11:52
11:53
11:54
11:55
11:56
11:57
11:58
11:59
Time (hh:mm) in AM
Measured Simulated
and visual based indicators for sustainable Guidelines for Indoor Air Quality:
built-environment. Household Fuel Combustion p.172.
REFERENCES
Baharvand M et al. 2013 DesignBuilder
Verification and Validation for Indoor
Natural Ventilation Journal of Basic and
Applied Scientific Research 3(4) 182–
189.
DesignBuilder 2012 An Inter-program
Analysis of Computational Fluid
Dynamics Based on PHOENICS and
DesignBuilder Software 1–26.
Designbuilder S 2011 DesignBuilder
Simulation + CFD Training Guide 1–
224. Available at:
http://www.designbuilder.co.uk/downlo
adsv1/doc/DesignBuilder-Simulation-
Training-Manual.pdf.
Li Y & Drysdale D 1992 Measurement Of
The Ignition Temperature Of Wood
AOFST Symposiums 1(4) 380–385.
Lim S S et al. 2012. A comparative risk
assessment of burden of disease and
injury attributable to 67 risk factors and
risk factor clusters in 21 regions 1990–
2010: a systematic analysis for the
Global Burden of Disease Study 2010
The Lancet 380(9859) 2224–2260.
Available at:
http://linkinghub.elsevier.com/retrieve/p
ii/S0140673612617668.
Smith K R 2000 National burden of disease
in India from indoor air pollution
Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences of the United States of America
97(24) 13286–13293.
Tominaga Y et al. 2008 AIJ guidelines for
practical applications of CFD to
pedestrian wind environment around
buildings Journal of Wind Engineering
and Industrial Aerodynamics 96(10-11)
1749–1761. Available at:
http://linkinghub.elsevier.com/retrieve/p
ii/S0167610508000445.
World Health Organization 2014 WHO
395
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
in a chevron type plate heat exchanger were connected using flexible pipes and
have not been done in detail. The these flexible pipes were fixed to the
present experimental study aims to bring pressure valve panel, where the inlet and
out a clear picture about how the outlet of the measured channel were
pressure drop is affected by the flow connected to the pressure transmitter. A
distribution in a high corrugated U-type multi-meter is used to record the
PHE in presence of different sets of pressure signal from the pressure
plate packages and a wide range of transmitter in the form of voltage, mV.
Reynolds number. These pressure transmitters are
calibrated with a standard pressure
EXPERIMENTAL SETUP AND meter and the maximum uncertainty is
PROCEDURE about ±0.25%.The experiments are
The experimental set-up as shown in carried out for an adiabatic condition at
Figure 1 having heating unit (1) where Tm = 25oC.
desired hot water temperature obtain.
Cooling unit (2) as shown in Figure
consists of a maximum of 27 plates. It is
considered to investigate the flow
distribution for 21 plates (20channels)
and 27 plates (26 channels) from the
first to last channel. The digital flow
meter (3&4) has been provided in hot
and cold fluid stream, having a
maximum deviation of 2.0% from the
standard flow meter. Thermometers
(5&6) have been used at the inlet and
Figure. 1 Experimental set-up
outlet of both cold and hot fluid streams,
having a maximum deviation of 0.15%
from standard thermometer. Four
pressure transmitters (7) have been
provided near the inlet and outlet port of
cold and hot fluid stream. The digital
flow meters and thermometers are Figure. 2 Pressure tap fixed at top
connected to Programming Logic and bottom port of the channel in the
Controller (PLC) which is further tested plate of phe
connected to Human Interface (HMI)
unit, through which temperature and DATA REDUCTION
flow rate are measured and controlled.
The Reynolds number for plate heat
In addition to these, external pressure exchanger is defined on the basis of
transmitters (range from 0 kPa to 500 hydraulic diameter Dh,as
kPa) are used to measure the pressure
u ch Dh
drop along the channels connected to Re Dh = 2bLw/(b+Lw φ)
small pressure copper tube taps having a
.Since b<<Lw, Dh =2b/φ.
2 mm internal diameter which is shown
in Figure 2. The fixed pressure taps (1)
397
Hydraulic Performance Analysis on Corrugated type Plate Heat Exchanger
(4) W 2 in
The total non-dimensional pressure drop of U- 40
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
type plate heat exchanger is Distance along port, mm.
m2 Ap c
pin p o ( 2
)( ) Figure 4. variation of static pressure
tanh m nAc 2 (5) drop along the inlet and outlet port
with different mass flow rate for 27
1.05 plates PHE
Correlation line
1.00 Experimental data
Figure. 4 shows variation of static
pressure along the inlet at different mass
Friction factor, f
0.95
398
Kumar at al.
100
443.
90
80
Gulenoglu C Akturk F Aradag S Uzol N
Mass Flow Rate Inlet :0.6148
Mass Flow Rate Inlet: 1.568
S Kakac S 2014 Experimental
70
Mass Flow Rate Inlet : 1.9526 Comparison of performance of
60
three different plates for gasketed
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 plate heat exchangers International
Distance along port, mm. Journal of Thermal Science 75
Figure.5 variation of static pressure 249-256.
drop along the inlet and outlet port LU Fang LUO Yong-hao YANG Shi-
with different mass flow rate for 27 ming 2000 Analytical and
plates PHE Experimental Investigation of Flow
21 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.57
Distribution in Manifolds for Heat
86 27 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.57 Exchangers journal of
15 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.54
84 hydrodynamics 20(2) 179-185.
82
Static Pressure, kpa
REFERENCES
Acrivos A Babcock B D and Pigfords R
L 1969 Flow distributions in
manifolds Chemical Engineering
Science 10 112 to 124.
Bassiouny M K and Martin H 1984
Flow distribution and pressure
drop in plate heat exchangers-I
Chemical Engineering Science 39
693-700.
399
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
(1a)
Figure.2: Flow field on bottom; Both green
and red (or orange) dyes were put close to
the bottom, but at different radial locations.
It is found that increasing the rotation rates
(Ω) for a fixed ΔT increase the wave number
(i.e. decreases of the scale of cells). It is
assumed that these eddies are produced by
the same mechanism responsible for
atmospheric weather systems especially at
mid latitude.
COMPUTATIONAL MODELLING
The problem is symmetric with respect to the
axis of rotation. Flow phenomena on the
(1b) vertical plane in between central cold
Figure.1: Schematic of experimental set cylinder and periphery (Figure. 3) is
up simulated in ANSYS-Fluent.
401
Effect of Rotation and Baroclinicity on Heat Transport and Turbulent Convection in Annular Flow
(a) (b)
Figure.5: (a): Relative axial velocity; (b):
Relative radial velocity
B) Rotation at 8.5 rpm
(a) (b)
Figure.6: (a): Stream function; (b): Static
temperature
SIMULATION RESULT
A) Stationary (i.e. 0 rpm) -
(a) (b)
Figure.7: (a): Relative axial velocity; (b):
Relative radial velocity
(a) (b)
Figure.4: (a): Stream function; (b): Static
temperature
402
Banerjee et. al.
REFERENCES
Larcher Egbers 2005 Experiments on
trasition of baroclinic waves in
differentially heated rotating annulus
Nonlin. Processes Geophys 12.1033–
1041.
Harlander U Wenzel J Alexandrov K Wang
Figure.8: Relative azimuthal velocity
Y and Egbers 2012 Simultaneous PIV
Simulation results hint at the coexistence of and thermography measurements of
thermal plume and baroclinic waves in case partially blocked flow in a differentially
of rotating case. It also shows that impact of heated rotating annulus. Exp. Fluids 52
heating decreases with elevation. Figure.7 1077–1087.
(Left) indicates at the existence a plume
aligned parallel to the rotation axis (Taylor Vincze M Harlander U von Larcher Thand
columns) as in the case of rotating RBC. Egbers 2013 An experimental study of
These plumes aid in vertical heat transport. regime transitions in a differentially
Additionally, the inclined isotherms in heated baroclinic annulus with flat and
Figure.6 (Right) also suggests simultaneous sloping bottom topographies. Nonlin.
existence of baroclinic instability. Processes Geophys.
Furthermore, Figure.8 indicates existence of
helicity in the azimuthal velocity. On the Harlander U von Larcher Th Wang Y and
other hand, Figure.4 and Figure.5 show that Egbers C 2011 PIV and LDV-
for stationary case, although thermal plume measurements of baroclinic wave
exists but baroclinic instability does not exist. interactions in a thermally driven
rotating annulus. Exp. Fluids 51 37–49.
CONCLUSIONS
Simulations along with experiments show Seelig et.al 2012 Irregularity and singular
coexistence of thermal plume and baroclinic vectorgrowth of the differentially heated
waves This however needs to be quantified. rotating annulus flow Theor Comput.
Further simulation and experimental Fluid Dyn.
403
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: During late phase of sever accident in nuclear reactor core possibility exist
for unstable density stratification of molten corium. This leads to growth of Rayleigh-
Taylor Instability. The effects of surface tension and viscous drag on the nonlinear
two fluid interfacial mixing process induced by Rayleigh-Taylor instability are
analysed. Numerical integrations of the relevant system of nonlinear equations
describing the temporal development of the bubble and spike have been carried out. It
is seen that the magnitude of the suppression of the terminal growth rate of the tip of
the bubble height depends only on the viscous coefficient of the denser fluid through
which the bubble rises and surface tension of the interface.
Keywords: Rayleigh-Taylor Instabiity; Corium Stratification; Severe accident
0 5 10 15 20
For a fluid with uniform viscosity, the Normalised Time
integral of the momentum equation (i.e., Figure 1: Bubble Tip Growth Rate
Bernoulli relation) gives In order to study the effect of surface, the
fixed parameter are chosen as, ρ = 1.5, ch =
1
⟦𝜌 (𝜙𝑡 + 2|𝐮|2 + 𝑔𝜂) + 𝑝⟧ = 𝑓(𝑡) (4) 0.001 and μ = 1.2. The viscosity parameter
has been varied as (k/kc)2 = ½, 5, 10, 15.
where ⟦𝑄⟧ = 𝑄ℎ − 𝑄𝑙 ,. f (t) is an arbitrary The initial conditions are taken as using ξ0
function. = 0.1, ξ2 = − 0.1 and ω = 0.1. The results
for evolution of non-dimensional bubble
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION growth rate (ω) are presented in figure 2.
The evolutions of the bubble and the spike It is obvious from Figure 2 that the
are modelled by initial value problem of qualitative behaviour of RTI bubble growth
two systems of nonlinear ordinary
rate is qualitative different for different
differential equations. These equations
have been integrated numerically by values of non-dimensional surface tension
application of fourth-order Runge-Kutta considered hare.
method.
Nondimensional Bubble Growth Rate
0.3
In order to study the effect of viscosity, the h
= 1.5, = 1.2, c = 0.001
fixed parameter is chosen as, ρ = 1.5, (k/kc)2 0.2
2
(/c) = 1/2,
2
(/c) = 5
2 2
= 0.5 and μ = 1.2. The viscosity parameter (/c) = 10, (/c) = 15
bubble initally increases and then reaches Figure 2: Bubble Tip Growth Rate
asymptotic values. It is evident from this
For (k/kc)2 = ½, the growth rate
figure that as the viscosity of the heavier
monotonically reaches a steady state value;
405
On Bubble and Spike Evolution in Rayleigh-Taylor Instability
REFERENCES
Layzer D 1955 On the Instability of
Superposed Fluid in Gravitational
Field Astrophys. J. 122 1-12.
Cooper F and Dienes J 1978 The Role of
Rayleigh-Taylor Instabilities in Fuel-
Coolant Interactions Nucl. Sci. Eng.
68 308-21.
Fishburn B D 1974 Boundary Layer
Stripping of Liquid Drops Fragmented
by Taylor Instability Acta Astronautica
1 1267-84
Leclerc E and Berthoud G 2003 Modeling
of Melt Droplet Fragmentation
Following Vapor Film Destabilization
by a Trigger Pulse Nucl. Technol 144
58-74.
Ghosh B Lele H G and Dutta B K 2013
Analysis of Effect of Viscosity on
Rayleigh-Taylor Instability FMFP-
2013-024 Dec.12-14 NIT Hamirpur
India.
406
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Liquid Propulsion Systems Centre is developing the 2000 kN thrust Semi-
cryogenic engine for Indian Space Research Organisation to power the core stage of
the Unified Launch Vehicle and the Reusable Launch Vehicle. Turbo pump is a major
system which is responsible for the continuous supply of propellants from stage tanks
to the thrust chamber at required pressure and flow rate. Cavitation occurring within
the main pump is a serious issue which may lead to the failure of mission, so to avoid
cavitation a booster pump is employed. In the present study the performance of
oxidizer booster pump for semi-cryogenic engine at nominal operation, de-rated
condition and up-rated condition is analysed using the commercial ANSYS CFX
package. The pressure, temperature and velocity distribution throughout the pump is
analysed and the pump efficiency is calculated for each operating condition.
Keywords: Semi-cryogenic oxidizer booster pump; Inducer; Turbo machinery.
408
Thermo-Hydraulic Simulation of Oxidizer Booster pump for Semi-Cryogenic Engine
Temperature (K)
increases along flow direction hence static
pressure recovery occurs and the velocity 91.2
reduces. It is seen that there is a
comparatively lower pressure recovery and 91.1
higher losses in off design conditions than 91
nominal design; this is due to the fact that the
profiled ribs are designed for nominal 90.9
condition. 0 200 400 600
Axial distance (mm)
The simulation proves that the oxidizer
booster pump for semi-cryogenic engine will
Figure 3. Temperature along axial plot
meet the head rise and efficiency for nominal
as well as off design engine conditions.
REFERENCES
Demyanenko Y et al 2005 Turbopumps for
Table 6. Efficiency at various conditions
Gas Generator and Staged Combustion
Cycle Rocket Engines AIAA 2005-3946
Operating condition Efficiency (%)
Herda D A Gross R S 1995 HPOTP Inducer
Nominal (100 % thrust) 84.89 Dynamic Design Environrnent NASA
Derated (60 % thrust) 82.43 Technical Paper 3589.
Uprated (105 % thrust) 82.65 Kim H et al 2013 Efficient and Accurate
Computations of Cryogenic Cavitating
Flows around Turbopump Inducer AIAA
2013-2594.
Pressure v/s Axial distance Kiris et al 2006 High-fidelity simulations for
60% 105% 100% unsteady flow through turbopump and
20 flow liners, 44th AIAA Aerospace
Science Meeting Reno Nevada.
Pressure (bar)
15
NOTATION
10 - efficiency
𝑄 - flow rate (kg/s)
5
POUT - total pressure at outlet (bar)
0 PIN - total pressure at inlet (bar)
0 200 400
Axial distance (mm)
600
- angular velocity (rad/s)
Figure 2. Pressure along axial plot
410
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
computational cost that is negligible where 𝑈1∗ , 𝑈2∗ and 𝑎1∗ , 𝑎2∗ represent velocities
compared to DNS, yet at a resolution and and speeds of sound of fast and slow streams,
accuracy that allows us to make important respectively. Dimensional quantities are
conclusions. indicated by an asterisk. Parameters used to
METHODOLOGY FLOW characterize the reacting shear layer include
CONFIGURATION equivalence ratio φ, free stream velocity ratio
𝑟 = 𝑈2∗ /𝑈1∗ and density ratio 𝑠 = 𝜌2∗ /𝜌1∗ .
Focus of this investigation is to study the
sound generation from two dimensional PSE FORMULATION
reacting mixing layers shown in figure 1. In
the figure, streams of oxidizer and fuel get The variables of compressible Navier Stokes
mixed at the splitter plate edge; this gives rise equations (NSE) are non-dimensionalized
to instability due to velocity discontinuity. using their respective values on the high
Here, high speed stream on upper side of the speed side of the mixing layer, with length
splitter plate is the Oxidizer, denoted by scale as the initial vorticity thickness
subscript 1 and slow speed stream on the
lower side of the splitter is fuel, denoted by
subscript 2. 𝑌𝑜,∞ and 𝑌𝑓,−∞ are mass fractions
of oxidizer and fuel respectively. The
terms 𝑈1 , 𝑈2 represent velocities and 𝜌1 , 𝜌2
represent densities of fast and slow streams,
respectively. Here, y varies from −∞ to ∞
with no solid boundaries and the flow
evolves in x direction. In this investigation,
the downstream evolution of the meanflow is
modeled apriori to accommodate the use of
Linear PSE. 𝜌1∗ 𝑈1∗ 𝛿1∗
where, µ is viscosity, 𝑅𝑒𝑜 = is
𝜇1∗
Reynolds number. Here, M 1 denotes high
speed flow Mach number, Sc represent
Schmid number and assumed as unity. Here
u, v represent the streamwise velocity, cross
stream velocity, ρ the density, T the
temperature, p the pressure and Z the passive
Figure 1. Mixing layer configuration scalar used in combustion modelling. The
The chemical reaction in the mixing layer is formed flow variables vector q=[u,v,w,T,ρ,Z]
simplified by assuming a single, infinitely from the equations is decomposed into q= 𝑞�
fast step reaction + q′, where 𝑞� is the mean and q′ is the
perturbation quantity. For linear PSE, the
perturbation equations are obtained by
where F, O, P & n indicate fuel, oxidizer, linearizing the compressible Navier-Stokes
products formed and stoichiometric mass equations (3) about the meanflow, neglecting
ratio, respectively. Convective Mach number the higher order nonlinear fluctuating terms
M c is used as a generalized measure for (q′q′). An ansatz for the PSE is substituted
compressibility: into the perturbation equations to obtain the
Parabolised Stability equations [Bertolotti
and Herbert, 1991]. Ansatz (4) is defined as,
412
Noise Radiation from Compressible Reacting Mixing Layers
faithfully LPSE is able to capture the modal saturation and eventual evolution of mixing
energy content. layers. In figure 4, the validation of Lilley-
Goldstein analogy (LGE) is presented, where
pressure calculated using LGE method from
sources (LPSE) obtained from corrected
mean (solid-line) is compared with the data
(dash-dot-line) obtained from Cheung.et.al at
y = −14. In the figure we can see the pressure
calculated in the current investigation
matches perfectly with the data obtained. In
our future investigations we propose to use
vorticity thickness which replicates a real
Figure 2. Vorticity thickness variation in x. mixing layer and study effects of heat release
on farfield sound using Lilley Goldstein
analogy.
Table 1. Inlet parameter
REFERENCES
Bertolotti F P and Herbert T 1991 Analysis of
the linear stability of compressible
Figure 3. Modal energy evolution in x boundary layers using the PSE Theor.
Comput. Fluid Dyn 3 117–124.
Brown G and Roshko A 1974 On density
effects and large structure in turbulent
mixing layers Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 64 775.
Cheung L C and Lele S K 2009 Linear and
nonlinear processes in two-dimensional
mixing layer dynamics and sound
radiation J. of Fluid Mechanics 625.
Colonius T Lele S K and Moin P 1997 Sound
Figure 4. Pressure predicted from LGE. generation in a mixing layer Journal of
Fluid Mechanics 330 375–409.
For the fundamental mode, as shown in
figure 3, the integrated energy from LPSE of Day M J Mansour N N and Reynolds W C
corrected meanflow shows excellent 2001 Non-linear stability and structure
agreement with Day’s DNS, while LPSE of compressible reacting mixing layers
from uncorrected meanflow shows good Journal of Fluid Mechanics 446 375.
agreement until (x ≈ 75) when non-linearity Goldstein M E 2001 An exact form of
in DNS starts to correct the mean and plays Lilley’s equation with a velocity
an important role. It is found that saturation quadrupole/temperature dipole source
of the modes plays a vital role in sound term Journal of Fluid Mechanics 443
generation. And, LPSE with a corrected 231–236.
meanflow correctly predicts the point of
Gudmundsson K and Colonius T 2011
saturation correctly as compared to DNS. We
Instability wave models for the near-
can conclude that LPSE with correct
field fluctuations of turbulent jets
meanflow can correctly predict the point of
Journal of Fluid Mechanics 89 97–128.
414
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Numerical simulations of flow over a flapping wing with pitch and plunge
kinematics have been carried out in this research by a finite volume based
incompressible Navier-Stokes solver using parallel computing. The present study
aims to understand the unsteady aerodynamics of the pitching-plunging motion of an
NACA0012 airfoil investigating the transition in the flow topology with increasing
plunge amplitude keeping the pitch amplitude constant. A circular computational
domain has been used with unstructured meshes. Radial basis function (RBF)
interpolation based moving mesh mechanism has been utilized to implement the
motion of the airfoil. The bifurcation analysis with the plunge amplitude (ℎ ) as
thecontrol parameter reveals interesting dynamics in the trailing edge wake pattern.
The transition from periodic to chaotic wake topology with the increase of the control
parameter has been explored with the help of phase averaged vorticity contours,
frequency spectra of aerodynamic loads along with the 𝐶𝑙 - 𝐶𝑑 phase plots. The
studylooks into the parallel performance of OpenFoam package on the present
simulations as well inthe full paper.
Keywords: Flapping wing; Navier-Stokes solver; Unsteady flow field;
Bifurcations; Parallel computing.
h = 1.25
b)
Figure 3. Flow topology for different ℎ at
t/T = 25
The near field vorticity contours for ℎ = 0.5,
0.0851 & 1.25 at 25th cycle has been
presented in Figure.3. The frequency spectra
and the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase portraits for different ℎ
are shown in Figure. 4 and Figure. 5
respectively. At ℎ = 0.5 the wake topology is
periodic which dictates the aerodynamic
loads also to be periodic. The presence of a
Figure 2. Validation of flow solver
dominant frequency and their harmonics in
Sensor as obtained by Williamson et al. the frequency spectra confirms the
(2015) for moderate to high values of periodicity as shown in Figure. 4. Hence a
reduced frequencies. However, for lower clean 1-dimensional attractor has been
values of reduced frequencies all three observed in the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase portrait as
measurements corroborate each other which shown in Figure. 5(a). Howeverat ℎ = 0.851
417
Bose et al.
the flow field is no more periodic. A toroidal the computation time. The periodic flow field
structure is observed in the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase and the chaotic flow field has been
portrait in Figure. 5(b) along with addition of categorized by the help of phase averaged
new frequencies in the frequency spectra as vorticity field, frequency spectra and 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑
shown in Figure. 4. At 𝒉 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 the flow phase portraits.
topology became completely chaotic which is
confirmed through a chaotic 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase REFERENCES
portrait along with broadband frequency Shyy W Aono H Chimakurthi S K Trizila
spectra as shown in Figure. 5. Kang C K Cesnik C E S & Liu H
Phase averaged flow-field images are 2010Recent progress in flapping wing
presented to identify periodic and chaotic aerodynamics and aeroelasticity Progress
wake topology in Figure.6. The crisp pattern in Aerospace Sciences 46284-327.
represents periodicity at ℎ = 0.5 whereas it Lai J C S & Platzer M F 1999Jet
gets blurry in the chaotic regime at ℎ = 1.25. Characteristics of a Plunging AirfoilAIAA
The phase averaged vorticity field at ℎ = journal 37No. 12.
0.851is neither as crisp as the periodic phase Lentink Van Heijst GertJan F Muijres
nor as blurry as the chaoticphase which Florian T & Van Leeuwen Johan L
denotes the transition phase. 2010Vortex interactions with flapping
wings and fins can be
CONCLUSIONS unpredictableBiology letters p. rsbl
The high fidelity viscous incompressible N-S 20090806.
solver, used in the present study, is able to Koochesfahani M M 1989 Vortical patterns
capture the near field flow topology along in the wake of an oscillating airfoilAIAA
with the leading edge separation over the journal 27(9)1200-1205.
pitching-plunging wing. Transition of the Mackowski A W Williamson C H K 2015
trailing edge wake topology from periodic to Direct measurement of thrust and
chaotic wake pattern has been investigated in efficiency of an airfoil undergoing pure
the present paper. Parallel computing pitching Journal of Fluid Mechanics
techniques have been implemented to reduce 765524-543.
h = 0.5
h = 1.25
h = 0.851
Abstract: It is well known that secondary flow loses account about one third of the
total loss in any axial turbine. Modern gas turbine height is smaller and have longer
chord length, which might lead to increase in secondary flow. In order to improve the
efficiency of the turbine, it is important to understand the behaviour of secondary flow
and device mechanisms to curtail these losses. The objective of the present work is to
understand the effect of a stream wise end-wall fence on the aerodynamics of a linear
turbine cascade. The study is carried out computationally by using commercial
software ANSYS CFX. The effect of end-wall on the flow field are calculated based
on RANS simulation by using SST transition turbulence model. Durham cascade
which is similar to high-pressure axial flow turbine for simulation is used. The aim of
fencing in blade passage is to get the maximum benefit from flow deviation and
destroying the passage vortex in terms of loss reduction. It is observed that, for the
present analysis, fence in the blade passage helps reducing the strength of horseshoe
vortex and is capable of restraining the flow along the blade passage. Fence in the
blade passage helps in reducing the under turning by 70 in comparison with base case.
Fence on end-wall is effective in preventing the movement of pressure side leg of
horseshoe vortex and helps in breaking the passage vortex. Computations are carried
for different fence height whose curvature is different from the blade camber. The
optimum fence geometry and location reduces the loss coefficient by 15.6% in
comparison with base case.
Keywords: Boundary layer fence; Horseshoe vortex; Linear cascade; Passage
vortex; Secondary flow.
experimental secondary flows feature and The investigation was carried out for four
effect of boundary layer in a straight turbine different fence height named for convenience
cascade are given by Sieverding, (1985). as shown in Table 1.
Germain et. al., (2007) defines the secondary
flow as an additional flow feature due to the Details of Fence Height
presence of end walls, so it is important to
analyze the end wall. The detailed description SL. no Case no. Fence Height
of secondary flow in the boundary layer and
1 Case-0 (base case) 0 mm
its three-dimensional nature is presented
experimentally in Govardhan and Maharia, 2 Case-1 10 mm
(2012). 3 Case-2 20 mm
4 Case-3 30 mm
NUMERICAL PROCEDURE 5 Case-4 40 mm
The Durham cascade is a low speed, large mm = millimeter.
scale linear cascade for a high pressure rotor
ANSYS-CFX was used for computational
design. The blades are designed to have an
simulation in current study with transition
aerodynamic similarity same as real
SST k-ω model to model the turbulence. The
machines rather than geometrical similarity.
transition SST k-ω turbulence model was
The Durham cascade has already been
found to be most suitable for analysis of
subjected to numerous study on end wall
secondary flows [Kumar and Govardhan,
contouring and filleting the leading edge
2011; Dunn, 2009]. The transition SST model
[Mank et. al., 2014; Harvey et. al., 1999]. In
is based on standard SST k-ω equation with
this study, an attempt is made by
fully turbulence. The inlet boundary
incorporating the unique geometry of fence in
condition is velocity of 19.1 m/s along the
the Durham cascade.
flow direction, turbulence intensity of 5%
DESIGN STUDY and static temperature of 292.15 K. At the
outlet ambient conditions and the symmetric
Domain consists of single blade which is boundary conditions at mid-span was
placed exactly at one pitch distance and fence specified. All the walls are given as no slip
is positioned at fixed distance from the blade condition and adiabatic boundary condition.
camber line as shown on Figure 1. The current study was done using air as
working fluid on single blade passage with
translational periodic boundary condition at
one pitch length on either sides. High
resolution discretization scheme was chosen
for all calculations and convergence criteria
is set to 10-6 for all variables.
blade at 128% axial chord (Cax) is calculated The variation of mass averaged total pressure
for all the cases. The pitch mass averaged loss coefficient (𝐶̿̿̿̿̿
𝑃0 ) through the measuring
total pressure loss coefficient ( 𝐶 ̅̅̅̅̅
𝑃0 ) is planes from 50% axial chord (Cax) to 150%
calculated from the Eq. (1), Cax is shown in Figure 3. The trailing edge of
∫ 𝑉𝑢 𝜉𝑑𝑇 blade is 100% Cax. The variation of ̿̿̿̿̿ 𝐶𝑃0
̅̅̅̅̅
𝐶 𝑃0 = (1) along the axial direction is qualitatively
∫ 𝑉𝑢 𝑑𝑇
similar for all the computations. It was also
Where, 𝜉(zeta) is
observed that ̿̿̿̿̿
𝐶𝑃0 increases almost linearly
𝑃01 − 𝑃0 after the trailing edge of blade for the base
𝜉= (2)
𝜌𝑉12⁄ case.
2
The numerical solution for the pitch mass EFFECT OF UNDERTURNING AND
averaged total pressure loss coefficient for OVER TURNING
four different fence height in comparison
with the base case are shown in Figure 2. The The pitch mass averaged exit flow angle is
coefficient of pressure losses is more near the calculated from Eq. (3),
end wall for fence cases in comparison with 𝑉̅𝑣
base case. It is observed that the value of loss 𝛼̅ = 𝑇𝑎𝑛−1 ( ) (3)
𝑉̅𝑢
coefficients rapidly decreases from the end -55
wall up to a span of 40 mm. There is a slight
Pitchwise mass averaged exit flow
-60
increase in the value of loss coefficient from
40 mm to 70 mm for all fence cases except -65
angle in deg.
Case-2 Case-4
-85
0.8 Case-3 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Case-4
Span (S) in mm
coefficient
0.6
Figure 4. Pitchwise averaged exit flow
0.4 angle along the span
0.2
As the pressure leg of horseshoe vortex
0.0
moves towards the suction side of blade in
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Span (S) in mm the blade passage merges with counter
rotating vortex and forms a passage vortex.
Figure 2. Pitchwise mass averaged total This results in a change in the flow angle and
̅̅̅̅̅
pressure loss coefficient (𝐶 𝑃0 ) along the work output. This turning of the fluid is to
span of blade at 128% Cax. balance the static pressure gradient and
0.30
Case-0
centrifugal force. To maintain the radial
Mass Averaged Total Pressure
0.25
Case-1 equilibrium, the flow near the mid span is
Case-2
considered to be two-dimensional with
Loss coefficient
Case-3
Case-4
0.20 stream wise and tangential pressure gradient.
0.15
CONCLUSION
0.10
The conclusions are based on the present
0.05
investigations on the effect of modified fence
60 80 100
Percentage Axial Chord
120 140
leading edge and fence height on the
secondary flow losses are.
Figure 3. Mass averaged total pressure
̿̿̿̿̿ 1. Modified leading edge of fence is
loss coefficient (𝐶 𝑃0 ) along axial
successful in breaking down the
direction.
421
Kiran and Anish
Abstract: Dynamic stall is a complex aerodynamic phenomenon that occurs from the
unsteady flow around horizontal axis wind turbines resulting in amplified
aerodynamic loads and severe blade stresses. Numerical methods are computationally
expensive but can model the flow physics during dynamic stall more accurately and
overcome the limitations of many existing semi-empirical and analytical models. In
the present study Large Eddy Simulation (LES) based CFD approach together with a
sliding mesh technique was implemented to accurately model the unsteady
aerodynamics around a large flexible blade of a 3-bladed rotor. The 5 MW NREL
wind turbine’s baseline rotor was used to develop the detailed geometric and
structural models. The influence of various factors like transient wind shear, unsteady
wake behaviour and blade flexibility on the complex flow physics during 3D dynamic
stall has been studied. Factors like wake turbulence and blade oscillations amplify the
unsteady effects leading to dynamic aero-elastic instabilities like flutter and cause the
blades to fracture. The influence of blade flexibility was studied by comparing the
results from uncoupled CFD simulations with those from coupled fluid-structure-
interaction (FSI) simulations. Simulations using 3D models are important for accurate
estimation of fatigue life and determining the structural dynamic response of the
turbine blades.
Keywords: Large eddy simulation; Sliding Mesh Technique; Wake turbulence;
Fluid Structural Interaction.
424
3D CFD-FEA coupled dynamic stall analysis of 5 MW NREL wind turbine baseline rotor
Figure 2.Transition from shell mesh to Figure 3. Dynamic stall formation at x/D=0
volume mesh using transition elements (at t = 0.65s)
425
Fatima and Gopal
REFERENCES
Früh W G Angus C W Creech and A Eoghan
M 2014 Turbulence Characteristics in
Offshore Wind Farms from LES
Simulations of Lillgrund Wind Farm
Energy Procedia 59 182–189 ISSN
18766102.
Khalid S Liang Z Xue-wei Z and Ke Sun
2013 Three-Dimensional Numerical
Simulation of a Vertical Axis Tidal
Turbine Using the Two-Way Fluid
Structure Interaction Approach Journal
of Zhejiang University SCIENCE A
14(8) 574–582.
Mo Jang-Oh Amanullah C Maziar A and
Young-Ho Lee 2013 Large Eddy
Simulation of the Wind Turbine Wake
Figure 3.Pressure contours at r/R=0.6 and Characteristics in the Numerical Wind
r/R=0.7 Tunnel Model Journal of Wind
Engineering and Industrial
CONCLUSION Aerodynamics 112 11–24.
Sezer-U N and Lyle N L 2006 3-D Time-
The effect of dynamic stall formation on Accurate CFD Simulations of Wind
aerodynamic performance of the blades in Turbine Rotor Flow Fields AIAA Paper
terms of the variation of coefficient of lift with 394 0394.
time is of paramount importance for aero-
elastic analysis of wind turbine blades and is
also obtained through CFD-FEA numerical
simulations. Near wake flow is captured in
terms of the variations in flow parameters like
velocity magnitude, pressure distribution,
vorticity magnitude and turbulence intensities
at various downstream slices of the domain to
have a complete outlook of intensive near
wake development aft of rotor in case of
dynamic stall formation on the rotor. Hence,
intensive two way CFD-FEA numerical
investigation also serves to add literature in the
development of near wake models of wind
turbines useful for capturing turbine-turbine
interaction effects.
426
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The flow inside the intake of fighter aircraft is extremely complex. Due to
intake curvature and flight manoeuvres, flow at the exit of the intake becomes highly
distorted. This distorted flow adversely affects the operation of the aero-engine. Thus,
knowledge of flow distortion is essential for estimation of safe engine operating
envelope. Flow distortion at engine inlet can be measured by rake comprising of
multiple probes. However, in case of failure of rake structure, the rakeparts may get
ingested into the engine causing serious engine failure. In the present study, a fully-
coupled fluid-structure interaction study is carried out to determine the transient
loading behaviour of a rake designed for a fighter aircraft. The transient loads are used
to estimate the stress, strain and structure energy distribution. This data is used to
perform the fatigue analysis and the rake is found to be structurally acceptable.
Keywords: Pressure measuring rake; Coupled Fluid Structure analysis; Fatigue
analysis; Structural analysis; CFD analysis.
428
Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter Aircraft
429
Vashistha and Gogoi
Total Deformation
Figure 5: Result of coupled structural simulation
430
Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter Aircraft
CONCLUSION
A fully-coupled fluid-structure analysis is
carried out for a rake of a fighter aircraft. The
complex flow in the intake ahead of the rake
is well captured. The analysis shows that the
present design of rake has enough design
margins in terms of fatigue mode of failure
and the maximum stress observed is within
the elastic limit of the material. The design is
safe to operate.
REFERENCES
Corda S and Vachon M J 2005 The F-15B
Propulsion Flight Test Fixture: A New
Flight Facility for Propulsion Research.
NASA/TM 2001-210395.
Flynn D C Ratnayake N A and Frederick M
2009 Design and Calibration of a
Flowfield Survey Rake for Inlet
FlightResearch AIAA-148
Frederick M A Ratnayake N A 2010 Flight
Test Results from the Rake Airflow
Gage Experiment on the F-15B
Airplane 28th AIAA Applied
Aerodynamics Conference 28 June -1
July 2010 Chicago Illinois.
Yuhas J A Ray R J Burley R R Steenken W
G Lechtenberg L and Thornton D 1995
Design and Development of an F/A-18
Inlet Distortion Rake: A Cost and Time
Saving Solution NASA Technical
Memorandum 4722
431
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
velocities and the damping values are varied Simulation parameter details are as follows:
and fed in the code. Fluid: Water
The simulation done can be further simulated Tank Dimensions: (1000x1000x2000) mm
to investigate transmission of vibration of
reactor components in Fast Breeder Reactor Input force for Solid: 10000 N
(FBR) system for the components like Input force for Shell: 1000 N
Intermediate Heat Exchanger (IHX), Inner
Vessel, and Sub-assemblies during transient Input frequency=1Hz
load conditions.
SIMULATION MODEL
433
Investigation of Vibration Transmission in Cantilevered Structures Submerged in Fluid Considering Fluid-
Structure Interaction
Figure 3 Case 1: Solid structures inside Figure 4 Case 2: Shell structures inside
fluid fluid
Figure 5 Case 3: Solid structures inside Figure 6 Case 4: Shell structures inside
fluid fluid
434
Sumathi et al.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors are greatly thankful to the support
and motivation by Dr. S.A.V Satya Murty,
Director, IGCAR.
Figure 7 The displacement on adjacent
structure vs time for case 1 (Steel) without REFERENCES
intermediate plate Fu Y and Price W G 1987 Interactions between
a partially or totally immersed vibrating
cantilever plate and the surrounding
fluid. Journal of Sound and Vibration
118 495–513
Kerboua A Y et al. 2008 Vibration analysis of
rectangular plates coupled with fluid,
Journal of Applied Mathematical
Modelling. 32 2570–2586.
Lindholm U S et.al. 1965 Elastic vibration
characteristics of cantilever plates in
water. Journal of Ship Research 9 11-22.
Muthuveerappan G et al. 1979 A note on
vibration of a cantilever plate immersed
Figure 8 the displacement on adjacent in water Journal of Sound and Vibration
structure vs time for case 1(Steel) with 63 385–391, 539–555
intermediate plate
Abstract: Parallel plate-type fuel assemblies are often used in nuclear research
reactors where power density is more. In these reactors, the fuel assemblies are held
very close to each other to achieve high neutron flux. The present paper discusses the
development of a methodology to establish parameters like added mass coefficient
(C m ) and added damping coefficient (C v ) for fluid film between two parallel plates.
Experiments are carried out to investigate the dynamic characteristics of cantilevered
parallel plates immersed in water. Coupled-fluid-plate numerical simulations are
performed and the results are validated through experiments. It is observed that added
damping and mass parameters are dependent on fluid film thickness
Keywords: Parallel plates; Fluid film thickness; Squeezing effect; Added mass;
Added damping.
where one of the two plates is rigidly fixed in coupled-fluid-structure interaction for the
still water and carried out experimental double hexagonal fuel assemblies for a fast
validation of their work. reactor thus providing the experimental
validation to the analytical model developed
by Wilson (1991). However, most of the
present day literatures on the vibration
behaviour of closely spaced parallel plates
Fuel plates
discuss about the variation of natural
frequencies and its corresponding mode
Side plate
shapes for variable liquid gaps as presented
Inert plate by Jeong and Kang (2013) or for variable
liquid depth ratios as discussed by Jeong and
Kim (2008). The aforesaid literature available
Fuel toe
does not discuss about the variation of
characteristic parameters like added mass and
added damping for the plates.
437
Fluid-Film Dependent Added Mass and Added Damping for Parallel Plates
developed from the present study between Jeong K H Kang H S 2013 Free vibration of
added mass coefficient and fluid film multiple rectangular plates coupled with
thickness. As the film thickness decreases, a liquid International Journal of
the impedance caused due to the coupled Mechanical Sciences74 161-172.
water mass present between the plates Jeong K H Kim J W 2009 Hydro-elastic
participating along with the plate oscillation vibration analysis of two rectangular
increases. As However, lower than the plates partially coupled with a liquid
specified range of film thickness, double
Nuclear Engineering and Technology41
plate systems may behave like a single plate (3) 335-346.
system. Thus, projecting a different dynamic
behaviour of the plates. Wilson D 1991Added Mass and Damping
coefficients for a hexagonal cylinder
C m = 0.094 (d / g ) + 2.4 (2) Journal of Fluids and Structure5 503–
CONCLUSION 519.
In the present work, fluid-plate-coupled Yang C I Moran T J 1979 Finite – element
dynamic characteristics of the parallel plates solution of added mass and damping of
are investigated. Experimentally obtained oscillation rods in viscous fluids Journal
frequencies of the parallel plates for dry and of Applied Mechanics46 519-523.
water immersed conditions are found to be in Yang Y R and Zhang J Y1997Frequency
good agreement with the numerical results. It analysis of a parallel plate-type structure
is seen that, fluid film thickness sturdily in still water, Part I: A multi-span beam
affects the added mass and added damping Journal of Sound and Vibration203(5)
between the parallel plates. Added mass 795–804.
varies inversely proportional to the film
thickness while added damping is inversely
proportional to cube of the film thickness.
The analytical procedure developed by
Wilson (1991) for FBR fuel assemblies also
yields similar trends.
REFERENCES
Daogang L Aiguo L Chaohao S Junjie D
Yang H and Qingyu X 2013
Experimental Investigation on fluid-
structure-coupled dynamic
characteristics of the double fuel
assemblies in a fast reactor Nuclear
Engineering and Design 255 (2) 180–
184
Fujita K 1981 Vibration characteristics and
seismic response analysis of column
groups in liquid Bulletins of JSME24
1994-2004
439
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
or corner, a backward step, a highly divergent corner expansion is not the commonly used
channel, a closed or open cavity but also in Prandtl-Mayer expansion, but rather is
internal flows with a sudden expansion as in accurately described by the method of
a diffuser. Flow separation will result in inviscid rotational characteristics which
reverse flow causing irregular random eddies, accounts for both the entropy gradient in the
very high energy losses and low pressure boundary layer and the pressure gradient
recovery. Undesirable flow separation is upstream of the step”.
observed in turbine blades, scramjet B. F. Armaly et. al. (1983) predicted
combustor, rocket nozzles etc. Hence numerically the flow field of backward-
understanding the flow separation facing step and validated with experiments.
phenomena and its controlling mechanisms is They conducted experiments of laminar,
very important. Current study deals with transitional and turbulent flow of air with
numerical computations of supersonic flow single backward-facing step using Laser-
reattachment downstream of a rearward Doppler measurements for velocity
facing step considering the effect of heat distribution and reattachment length. The
transfer. results revealed the recirculating flow regime
of backward-facing step and separation
LITERATURE REVIEW
region downstream. The numerical results
Many experimental and numerical reported are also in good agreement with
investigations on flow separation have been experiments for specified Reynolds number
undertaken in last century. Some of the flow.
relevant experimental and numerical studies
are reported briefly here. Houshang B. Ebrahimi (1997) provides
comparison of the Navier–Stokes-based CFD
R. Dean et. al. (1956) conducted experimental models results with experimental data for
and theoretical research on flow separation in many general cases including supersonic
pure laminar, transition and turbulent flow flow over a rearward-facing step. The CFD
regimes with step, bases, compression models are Three-dimensional Upwind-
corners, curved surfaces, and configurations differenced Finite volume Flow solver
producing leading-edge separation. The (TUFF), the General Aerodynamic
separation location and point of reattachment Simulation Program (GASP) version 3, and
are the controlling factors of pressure the Generalized Implicit Flow Solver (GIFS).
distribution in the separated flows. The study The results show that the computational
also showed that as the Mach number efficiency of GASP code is better than the
increases, the stability of a separated laminar GIFS and TUFF codes.
layer also will increase.
The present numerical analysis tries to
Howard E. Smith (1967) conducted complement, extend and correlate these basic
experimental investigations on flow field for studies.
rare-ward facing step in a supersonic flow
with pressure distribution and steady state GOVERNING EQUATIONS
heat transfer distribution. The base pressure
Governing equation for a two dimensional
and the maximum heat transfer at
compressible turbulent flow can be written as
reattachment may be predicted as a function
U F G
of the Reynolds number based on step height S (1)
t x y
(ReH). The study brought out that “the rapid
441
Effect of Heat Transfer in Supersonic Flow Reattachment
Where
u
2
u P xx
u uv
xy
v
U , F
E P u Q
x
E
u
k uk k x
u
x Figure 1. Computational domain.
v
uv 0 VALIDATION AND GRID
xy F
v2 P x INDEPENDENCE TEST
yy Fy
E P v Q Experiments carried out by Smith (1967) for
G y , and S 0
H supersonic flow past a rearward facing step
v
vk k k provides wall pressure measurements. This is
y H
regarded as one of the benchmark
v 0
experiments for CFD code validation
y
[Ebrahimi, 1997]. Air approaching at Mach
Here Fx , Fy are Viscous force terms and Hκ, 2.5 with total pressure (Po) 127553 Pa and
Hε are turbulence source terms represented in total temperature (To) =344.44K is flowing
standard κ-ε turbulence model. Viscous stress past a step of height of 11.25 mm.
is computed as
A preliminary computation has been
u u j 2 u
ij ( i ij k ) performed by discretising the computational
x j xi 3 x k
(2) domain in to 1,35,000 control volumes by
maintaining 100×30 grids in step region. This
has been progressively refined to 2,56,000
NUMERICAL MODELING
control volumes and 3,18,000 control
In the present study, Roe FDS (Roe Flux volumes having 120×45 and 300×90 grids
Differencing Scheme, P L Roe) available in a respectively in step region. Grid convergence
Finite Volume Method (FVM) based has been attained with the third level of
commercial package (Ansys Fluent), has refinement (Fig. 2). Computed wall pressure
been made use for the computation of profile shows good agreement with
inviscid fluxes. experimental data, except at the point of
reattachment.
Computational domain used for the
simulation is given in Fig. 1. Entire
computational domain is initialised with free- RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
stream conditions. In order to study the effect Computations have been performed with
of heat transfer in free shear layer different heat flux values in the step region.
reattachment, prescribed heat flux boundary Reattachment point is observed to be shifted
conditions are provided on vertical rearward towards right when heat is given in to the
facing step surface (Height = H) and in the flow. Whereas a favourable pressure gradient
region of separated flow region on horizontal is observed to get generated with cooling
wall (Length = 4H). which brings reattachment closer to the wall.
442
Vidyarthi et al.
REFERENCES
Pijush K. Kundu and Ira M. Cohen 2008
Fluid Mechanics Fourth Edition Elsevier
Inc. Oxford UK
Dean R Chapma Donald Kuehn and Howard
K L 1956 Investigation of separated
Figure 3. Effect of heat flux in shear layer flows in supersonic and subsonic streams
reattachment. with Emphasis on the effect of transition
NACA Report 1356.
Streamline patterns in reattachment region Howard E Smith 1967 The flow field and
for various heat flux is given in Fig. 4. Center heat transfer downstream of a rearward
of the major vortex is shifting towards right facing step in supersonic flow Project
and it occupies more volume with the No. 7063, ARL 67-0056 The University
addition of heat. A minor vortex is also of Dayton Dayton Ohio.
formed for heat flux values above 80 W/m2. Armaly B F Durst F Pereira JCF and B
Whereas reattachment point shifts to left and Schönung 1983 Experimental and
vortices shrink with cooling. theoretical investigation of backward-
facing step flow Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 127 473- 496.
CONCLUSION
Houshang B Ebrahimi 1997 Validation
Numerical computations show that a database for propulsion computational
consistent effect of heat transfer can be fluid dynamics Journal of Spacecraft
observed, in flow pattern as well as in wall and Rockets 3 642-648.
443
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Abstract: This paper presents the results of the investigation of various
explicit time marching partitioned coupling schemes applied to the computational
Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) problem. The analysis is applied to the 1-D piston
problem with coupling between fluid and solid domain. Set of already existing
explicit coupling schemes have been tested in the framework of compressible flow
FSI computations. Two types of explicit schemes, the serial and parallel staggered
scheme are considered. Among the serial staggered scheme, conventional serial
staggered (CSS), improved serial staggered (ISS), generalized serial staggered (GSS)
are presented. For parallel staggered scheme, results of conventional parallel
staggered (CPS), improved parallel staggered (IPS) are presented in this paper. FSI
coupling code developed in MATLAB is used for comparative study of different
coupling schemes in terms of various factors such as stability, order of accuracy and
computational costs.
Keywords: Fluid-structure interaction, partitioned algorithms, coupling scheme,
Piston problem.
computational treatment and solution of each due to their great simplicity and low
subdomain (i.e. fluid, structure) — hence the computational cost. However, the loosely-
name partitioned with staggering — with the coupled staggered procedure may suffer from
aid of velocity continuity (Dirichlet) and two major problems: (a) the numerical
momentum flux (Neumann) interface instability of the coupling scheme caused by
conditions by allowing reuse of existing spurious energy production along the
codes. Such approach deals with a interface due to the time lag (b) the temporal
Lagrangian finite element formulation for the accuracy of the resulting coupled analysis
structural domain, and an Arbitrary may be sacrificed. A special treatment is
Lagrangian Eulerian (ALE) finite volume generally required to counteract the interface-
formulation for the fluid domain. The other driven energy production in the loosely-
approach for solving FSI problem is coupled staggered scheme [Jaiman et al.
monolithic approach which treats the fluid 2007]. The present study is considering
and structure as a single system and solved different explicit coupling schemes and
with a single code while using implicit applied to the common FSI bench marking
solution procedure to solve interfacial problem, the piston problem.
conditions. This approach can potentially
achieve better accuracy, but it may require EXPLICIT COUPLING SCHEMES
substantially more resources and expertise to Number of explicit coupling schemes has
develop and maintain such a specialized code been developed and tested in the framework
[Hou et al.]. The fact that the structural of aerodynamical simulation, i.e.,
system is physically much stiffer than the compressible flow FSI computations. In the
fluid system — hence time step size following, the conventional serial staggered
requirement is different — makes (CSS), conventional parallel staggered (CPS),
numerically inefficient or even impossible to improved serial staggered (ISS), improved
solve both systems using a single numerical parallel staggered (IPS), and generalized
scheme. [Guruswamy, 2002]. serial staggered (GSS) schemes are
In partitioned approach, a number of presented.
procedures have been proposed to solve the
interfacial conditions (coupling) between the THE CONVENTIONAL SERIAL
fluid and structure and can be categorised as STAGGERED (CSS)
loosely coupled (explicit) [Cebral et al.] or The conventional serial staggered (CSS)
strongly coupled (implicit) algorithms procedure is one of the most widely used
[Bolm]. The strongly coupled schemes explicit schemes to compute solutions to
typically involve predictor corrector problems in FSI. Its computational steps are
iterations to ensure the convergence at each given in algorithm 1 and are represented
coupling time step. However, these coupling graphically in figure 1.
iterations increase the complexity of the
Algorithm 1: Conventional serial
implementation of FSI analyses as well as the
Staggered (CSS) scheme [Jaiman et al.]
computational cost at each time step. On the
other hand, explicit loosely-coupled methods, For n = 0 to nend
which integrate the fluid and the structure Step (1): Transfer fluid load (Fn) to
equations once and independently at every structure.
time step, are often the methods of choice
445
Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions
Step(2): Solve structure equations Sn(Fn) = is tested. (1) a stationary analytical model (2)
Sn+1 an exact wave model for piston pressure
Step(3): Transmit Sn+1to fluid (Dirichlet calculation (3) a complete 1D compressible
BC) fluid flow model.
Step(4): solve fluid equations Fn(Sn+1) =
Fn+1
Repeat (1): transmit Fn+1 to structure
(Neumann BC)
446
Hoskoti and Mahesh
chamber as seen in figure 3(a) the chamber fluid and structure do not see each other and
pressure increases suddenly. the problem is considered as quasi-steady.
The coupling in quasi steady problem is
weak. For lower frequency, a stationary
(a) ω = 160 Hz, CTR = 1.08 analytical model is in good agreement with a
complete 1D compressible fluid flow model
as seen in figure 3(c). Therefore, further
(b) ω = 51 Hz, CTR = 5.5
investigation uses the 1D compressible fluid
flow model to test the various coupling
(c) ω =16 Hz, CTR = 17 implicit coupling scheme. Piston motion is
plotted in figure 4 for time equal to two
natural time period of the piston using CSS.
(a) ω (a) ω = 160 Hz, CTR = 1.08 (a). ω = =16 Hz, CTR = 17
(b) ω = 51 Hz, CTR = 5.5 (b). ω (b). ω =160 Hz, CTR = 1.08
Figure 4. Plot of piston motion for two
natural time periods using CSS scheme.
It is noticed for weak coupling, the CSS
scheme is stable however scheme exhibits
inability to maintain losses when coupling is
strong. There is dissipation in energy as
shown in figure 4 (b) the reason for
(c) ω =16 Hz, CTR = 17
dissipation is because it violates the velocity
Figure 3. Variation of piston pressure kinematic interface conditions. Fluid
with time displacements of two successive time steps
It is clear from figure that a complete 1D u_f=(x^(n+1) 〖 - x〗^n)/∆t is not equal to
compressible fluid flow model is more structural displacement x_s=(x^(n+1) 〖 -
sensitive to the strong coupling. It can sense x〗^n)/∆t. The interface velocities of fluid and
the sudden change in the piston pressure. structure do not match and this can leads to
Further the model-II and model-III are instability. As a remedy, the improved serial
insensitive to the shock. These models cannot staggered (ISS) procedure is proposed. The
be used to compute the pressure when detailed analysis of ISS scheme including
coupling is strong. As the CTR increases, the
447
Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions
GSS, CPS and ICPS will be explained in the Felippa C A Park K C & Farhat C 2001.
full paper. Partitioned analysis of coupled
mechanical systems Computer methods
CONCLUSION in applied mechanics and engineering
Different explicit fluid structure coupling 190(24) 3247-3270.
schemes are considered in this paper. Guruswamy G P 2002. A review of
Distinguishing factors are their stability, numerical fluids/structures interface
accuracy order, computational costs. While methods for computations using high-
some of the schemes are rather simple to be fidelity equations Computers &
implemented such as the CSS or CPS structures 80(1) 31-41.
procedures, others require more access to
Hou Gene Jin Wang and Anita Layton 2012
solver internals and assume specific time
Numerical methods for fluid-structure
integration methods, mesh adaption
interaction-a review Commun. Comput.
techniques, or equation solvers. However,
Phys 12(2) 337-377.
from a stability point of view, all schemes
suffer from the same problem. When a Jaiman R Geubelle P Loth E & Jiao X 2007
certain strength of interaction between fluid Stable and accurate loosely-coupled
and structure is reached and time step scheme for unsteady fluid–structure
restrictions are infeasible, they become interaction Proceeding of 45th AIAA
unstable. While these instabilities can be Aerospace Sciences Meeting and Exhibit
controlled rather well in compressible flow Reno Nevada 2007 334.
FSI, they become a real problem in
incompressible flow scenarios, where a
reduction of time step size results in a further
decrease of stability. A remedy can be found
in implicit coupling schemes.
REFERENCES
Blom F J 1998 A monolithical fluid-structure
interaction algorithm applied to the
piston problem Computer methods in
applied mechanics and engineering
167(3) 369-391.
Cebral J R and Lohner R 1997 Conservative
load projection and tracking for fluid-
structure problems AIAA journal 35(4)
687-692.
De Boer A Van Zuijlen A H & Bijl H 2007
Review of coupling methods for non-
matching meshes Computer methods in
applied mechanics and engineering
196(8) 1515-1525.
448
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Mathematical formulation for aeroelastic analysis of low aspect ratio box
beam structured delta wing immersed in incompressible flow is analyzed in this paper.
An algorithm based on Hamilton’s variational principle and Galerkin approach has
been used for the determination of divergence instability of a delta wing structure at
high angle of attack. The structural model incorporates non classical effects such as
anisotropy. As compared to moderate swept wing, the nonlinear lift terms
corresponding to that of vortex lift comes into effect in a highly swept delta wing.
Polhamus leading edge suction analogy concept has been used for calculating the
nonlinear terms. The box beam structure and Polhamus concept are used together for
the formulation of the stability of the fluid structure interaction problem.
Keywords: Aeroelasticity; Delta wing; Box beam structure; Nonlinear lift;
Polhamus leading edge suction analogy.
wing and inboard of the leading edges. When The proposed model employs an assumed
the leading edge is sharp the line of pressure loading distribution given by
separation is fixed along it throughout a Cunningham (1972) based on classical
considerable range of incidence. Figure1 theoretical results. Lifting line, thin airfoil,
shows the vortex flow over a delta wing. and slender wing theory results are used to
Flow attachment lines have been observed develop a general functional form for the
inboard of the vortex sheets and indicate that pressure distribution. Assume that the
air is drawn over the vortex sheets and pressure loading distribution is of the form
accelerated downward. Many methods have Eq. (1).
been developed for estimating the effect of 𝑃𝑜
∆𝐶𝑃 = 2 √((1 − 𝜉)/𝜉)√(1 − 𝜂 2 )sinαcosα
the separated vortex sheets with varying 𝜋𝑐
degrees of success. The present approach (1)
assumes that if flow reattachment occurs on where, P0 is a constant with dimensions of
the upper surface the total lift can be length, and c is the local wing chord
x−xLE
calculated as the sum of a potential-flow lift 𝜉= and𝜂 = (y/(b/2)) are the
c
and a lift associated with the existence of the nondimensional chordwise and spanwise
separated leading-edge spiral vortices. First, coordinate and αrepresents the angle of attack.
the potential-flow lift will be examined with xLE is the distance from the y axis to the
regard to the effect of high angles of attack leading edge. The wing geometry and
and modified leading-edge conditions. Then, coordinate system for the terms in Eq. (1) are
the vortex lift will be determined by a method shown in figure 2. By using that the sectional
in which the vortex flow is assumed to be lift coefficient (ccl) for the wing is calculated as
related to the potential flow about the leading given in Eq.(2)
edge.
𝑐𝑐𝑙 = 𝑃0 sinαcos2 α√1 − 𝜂 2 , (2)
By integrating over the whole span, the lift
coefficient CL,p for pure potential flow can be
determined. Further, the lift created by the
vortex in the leading edge (CVLE) is given by
𝐶𝐿𝑝 2 cos α
𝐶𝑉𝐿𝐸 = (𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − cos α) , (3)
𝜋𝐴𝑅 sin Λ
between its front and rear edges. The material (1980) for the metallic wing whose wing
of each constituent lamina is assumed to be chord varies linearly along the span while the
orthotropic. The orthotropicity angle ϕ(j) (j bending and torsional stiffness vary as the
represents the lamina) of each lamina is fourth power of the chord has been used here.
measured in the counterclockwise direction The modifications to the equation of motion
starting from the rearward normal to the y is given by the following parameters Eq. (6),
axis. In addition to these assumptions, we c(𝜂) = βcr, D22(𝜂) = β4DR22,
shall postulate that both the chordwise D26(𝜂) = β4DR26, D66(𝜂) = β4DR66, (6)
deformation and wing distortions are where β=1-𝜂(1 − 𝜎), 𝜎 is the taper ratio. For
negligibly small. a delta wing 𝜎 =0. Here, the superscript R
represents the quantity affiliated to the wing
root section. Eq. (5a) and (5b) will be
multiplied by Z0dy and θdy, respectively, and
integrated over [0,l]. Z=Z0/(b/2) and
spanwise coordinate𝜂 =y/(b/2) , followed by
the partial integration of the obtained
equations, whenever possible, results in the
equilibrium equations expressed in integral
form. The boundary conditions are given by
Figure 3. Variation of total lift over angle Z0= Z0’= θ= θ’=0, at y=0
of attack. D22 Z0’’- D26 θ’ = 0,
(D22 Z0’’- D26 θ’)’ = 0,
GOVERNING EQUATIONS D66 θ’- D26 Z0’’= 0. at y=b/2 (7)
the parameters assumed are substituted into
For the static case considered in this paper, the governing equation and simplified using
the aerodynamic terms L and T intervening in the boundary condition results in Eq. (8),
the equilibrium equations and representing 1 1
the lift and the aerodynamic torsional ∫0 β4DR22 (Zo’’)2d𝜂 - ∫0 β4DR26Zo’’ θ’d𝜂 -
moment (per unit length), respectively, are (b3/8) q cos2 Λ
1
expressed as Eq. (4) ∫0 βcr(P0sinαcos2 α√(1 − 𝜂 2 ) +
L(y) = qnSrccl, (4a) E1Ck H(𝜂) /cos Λ) Z d𝜂 = 0, (8a)
T(y) = qncSrcm, (4b)
where qn represents the dynamic pressure 1 1
∫0 β4DR66 (θ’)2d𝜂 - ∫0 β4DR26Zo’’ θ’d𝜂 -
component normal to the leading edge, Sr
represents the reference area (planform), ccl (b2/4) q cos2 Λ
1
and cm represents the sectional lift coefficient ∫0 βcr(P0(xLE+βcr/4)sinαcos2 α√1 − 𝜂 2 −
and sectional moment respectively. The 𝐶𝐿𝑝 2
((2E1xLE/C cos Λ) (𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − )
equation governing the static aeroelastic 𝜋𝐴𝑅
equilibrium of composite delta wing is (√(1 − 𝜂 2 )𝜂 + asin 𝜂) θd𝜂 = 0 , (8b)
expressed as in Eq. (5), where E1 is the proportionality constant and
(D22Zo’’) - (D26θ’)’’ = L(y), (5a) the span wise function H(𝜂),
- (D66 θ’)’ - (D26 Zo’’)’ = T(y), (5b) H(𝜂)=√(1 − 𝜂 2 )𝜂 + asin 𝜂, (9)
where Dij represents the bending and Ck=CT cos α. (10)
torsional rigidities of a composite wing, Zo The thrust coefficient CT,
represents the bending deflection positive 𝐶 2
upward along the straight reference axis CT= 𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − 𝐿𝑝 cosα. (11)
𝜋𝐴𝑅
along the span and Zo’ (=dZ0/dy) the bending It is assumed that θ (η) and Z (𝜂) will be of
slope of the reference axis and θ represents the form,
the torsional deflection of the wing section θ (η) = ζθf(η),
about the reference axis. A solution to the Z (η) = ζZW(η), (12)
equation of motion discussed by Weisshaar
451
Aravinth and Mahesh
where f(η) and W (η) are the normalized speeds. Further investigation must be carried
torsional and bending deflection functions in the present model for validation with an
assumed to satisfy the boundary conditions, experimental result as well as for nonlinear
ζθ and ζZ are the generalized coordinates. delta planforms.
Inserting Eq. (12) in Eq. (8) and invoking the
standard requirement of nontriviality for the
solution of the obtained homogenous system
of equations results in the divergence
condition.
Abstract: Over the last two decades, response surface method (RSM) has emerged as
an efficient tool for uncertainty quantification. In this method, the sample points
required for formulating the RSM are selected empirically. This often results in under
sampling or oversampling of the problem domain. In this paper, a new approach of
sampling, referred to here as, Monte Carlo intersite projected (MCIP) based sequential
experimental design (SED) is proposed to be used in conjunction with RSMs. This
method maintains a trade-off between quality and efficiency of the computation.
Every new sample points are generated optimizing intersite and projected distances
between the previous and new points. In order to illustrate the performance of the
proposed SED, two problems has been solved. For both the problems, the uncertainty
quantification has been performed by coupling the proposed SED with two popular
RSMs, namely polynomial chaos expansion and Kriging. The obtained results have
been validated by comparing with full-scale Monte Carlo simulation (MCS) results. In
both the cases, the results obtained through the proposed approach are in excellent
agreement with the benchmark solution obtained using MCS.
Keywords: Sequential Experimental Design; Response Surface Method;
Uncertainty quantification.
( )
2
∫ F − Fˆ
Error =
x
dx / ∫ F 2 dx ×100 (4)
x
Where, F is the actual values of response at Figure 1. PDF of sum of square obtained
any point and F̂ is the approximate response by n = 6, 6,105 for PCE, Kriging and MCS
at that point using the proposed approach. respectively
455
Bhattacharyya and Ray
CONCLUSION
In this paper, a novel experimental design
scheme for uncertainty quantification has
been presented. The proposed approach,
referred here as, sequential experimental
design (SED), generates the sample points in
a sequential manner. As a consequence, the
chances of oversampling or undersampling
have been nullified. The proposed SED has
been coupled with two popular response
surface methods, namely polynomial chaos
expansion and Kriging. Two numerical
problems have been solved using the
proposed approach. It has been observed that
the proposed approach performs better than
the conventional PCE and Kriging, both in
accuracy and efficiency.
REFERENCES
Bucher C G & Bourgund U 1990 A fast and
efficient response-surface approach for
structural reliability problems.
Structural Safety 7(1) 57–66.
456
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Damage can be defined as physical inability that impairs the value,
usefulness, or normal function of structure. Damage detection using non destructive
testing based on vibration based method has been carried out in this study. This study
focuses on the detection of damage by vibration analysis, whose main objective is to
exploit the dynamic response of a structure to detect, understand the damage. The
damage detection has been carried out for the fibre matrix composite beams, where
delamination is focus of study.
Keywords: composite beam; damage; delimitation; vibration method.
Table 1. Details of Composite Material used. In general contact feature two contact
Properties properties are given namely tangential which
Material deals with friction between surfaces and
Values
Properties normal contact. For tangential and normal
E 11 135.3 GPa property penalty method is used with friction
E 22 9 GPa coefficient of 0. For meshing of the parts 8
E 33 9 GPa Node brick element (SOLID 185 with
ʋ 12 0.24 enhanced strain property is used. There are
ʋ 23 0.24 100 elements defined along length, 5 along
ʋ 31 0.46 with, and 1 for layer in depth. Fixed
G 12 5.2 GPa boundary conditions are given to one face of
G 23 5.2 GPa the beam as shown in the figure.
G 31 3.8 GPa The delamination has been carried out in full
width of the beam. The damages have been
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL modelled by creating contact layers, using
To make assembly of different layers, the contact elements and target elements. By
contact between the layers is defined. Contact creating contact layers the nodes of different
properties are defined from constraint tool at laminates which are in contact have been
each two surfaces coming in contact with merged. For the condition of the
each other. Contacts defined are surface to delamination the nodes at that interface have
surface contact for plane surfaces which are not been merged so that resulting interface
in contact. represents the delaminated region.
DAMAGE INDEX
Case 2:- Damaged at (1/4) Th Span Case 4:- Damaged at (3/4)th Span
0.0006 0.00014
0.0005 0.00012
0.0004 0.0001
DI 0.0003 0.00008
DI
0.0002 0.00006
0.0001 0.00004
0.00002
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0
Element No 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Element No
459
Joshi and Dawari
460
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this work, an analytical model has been proposed to estimate fatigue life
and crack growth rate in plain concrete under the action of fluctuating loading of
varying amplitude. The model would be developed by considering the effect of
fracture process zone in the formulation. Apart from conventional parameters, loading
history and frequency effects have been taken into account. The mathematical
formulation for the fatigue crack growth law is made on the basis of theoretical
arguments using the concepts of dimensional analysis and self-similarity. The model
predictions have been compared with the experimental results and are in good
agreement.
Keywords: Dimension analysis; Fatigue; frequency; Overload.
Where coefficients g1 ,g 2 ,g 3 and g 4 and the amplitude nature. However, the parameter F
function can be obtained through an error will capture the acceleration effect which
minimization technique using available occurs due to sudden insertion of a higher
experimental results. amplitude cycle and will not remain constant.
To modify the value of F to include the
CALIBRATION OF THE PROPOSED effect of overload, calibration has been
MODEL carried out again using the same specimen
taking the whole loading region. The derived
The coefficients introduced in the proposed
model described in Eq. (4) are determined in expression for is given as,
this section through calibration with the
experimental results of Shah (Shah, 2009). Where, FD is the value obtained when only
Shah has conducted tests on three
the constant amplitude loading region is
geometrically similar three point bend beam
considered. Values of a, b and c are 1, 80.362
specimens of different sizes under sinusoidal
and 0.001 respectively.Further, similar
loading of varying amplitude. The loading
expression for FD corresponding P5 are
data applied during the experimental program
is given in Figure 1. obtained for small, medium and large
specimens.
VALIDATION OF PROPOSED
MODEL
To verify the applicability of the proposed
model with other specimens, validation study
has been done. The experimental results of
constant amplitude cyclic load test conducted
Figure 1. Loading pattern used in the on three geometrically similar three point
experiment. bend beam specimens by Bazant and Xu
(1991) has been used.Crack growth rate have
In the proposed model it can be noted that the been plotted against stress intensity factor
dimensionless parameter F is a function of range KInormalized with the independent
s t D G F and DG1 G F . For constant fracture toughness KIf. Figures 2-4 show the
amplitude loading the value of DG1 will be comparison of rate of crack growth obtained
zero. Hence, considering F as a constant for through the model predictions with
constant amplitude loading case, the values experimental result.
of coefficients g1 ,g 2 ,g 3 and g 4 was obtained
through error minimization principle using
least square technique and are found to be
1.457, 0.774, 0.430, -0.016, and 7.308
respectively. To carry out the calibration
study, experimental results on medium sized
specimens were used. It is to be noted that,
the coefficients are determined considering
Figure 2.Validation of proposed model for
the experimental data points of constant
small specimens (Bazant and Xu, 1991)
463
Jeshna et al.
CONCLUSION
In this paper, an analytical model has been
proposed to predict fatigue life and analyze
the cracking behavior in concrete members
when subjected to variable amplitude cyclic
loading.
The model has been developed using the
principles of fracture mechanics in
conjunction with the concept of dimensional
analysis and self-similarity. The proposed
model considers the effect loading frequency.
REFERENCES
Bazant Z P and Xu 1991 Size effect in
fatigue fracture of concrete ACI
464
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
by assembling matrices and vectors of each In the present crack growth analysis of
element. K and F for each element are double edge cracks laminated composite
defined as plate, Global tracking crack growth algorithm
K ijuu K ijua K ijub proposed is used that traces all discontinuity
paths at once and does not need to be
K ije = K ijau K ijaa K ijab (2)
K ij K ij K ij
bu ba bb evaluated at each individual crack
propagation step Dumstorff 2007 This
{ }
T algorithm shows satisfactory results in
Where Fi e = Fi u Fi a Fi bt 1 Fi bt 2 Fi bt 3 Fi bt 4 (3)
predicting the crack paths and can be easily
and U is the vector of nodal parameters and elegantly be incorporated into the X-
FEM algorithm by constructing function ψ
U = {u a bt1 bt 2 bt 3 bt 4 } (4)
T
whose ISO-lines run perpendicular to the
direction of principal stresses in all
=
where K ijrs ∫ (B ) DB sj d Ω
r T
i (r,s=u,a,b) (5)
Ωe integration points of the investigated
structure. However, this comes at the cost of
=fi u ∫L
Γt
i f t dΓ + ∫L i f bt d Ω (6) solving additional global system of equations
Ωe
with one degree of freedom per node.
= ∫L H f dΓ + ∫LH f d Ω (7)
bt
fi a i
t
i An ISO-line in the region Ω is then defined
Γt Ω e
as
= ∫L F f d Γ + ∫ Li Fβ f d Ω (β=1,2,3,4) (8)
btβ t bt
fi i β
Γt Ωe Y=
i {x ∈ Ω ψ ( x )= ψ iY } (12)
Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor
(MMSIF)
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The normalized MMSIF of multiple edge
For evaluating the mixed mode stress
intensity factors K I and K II of the cracks composite plate subjected to uniaxial
homogenous orthotropic plates considered in tensile, shear and combined loadings are
the present study, the domain integral method evaluated using computer programme coded
as explained by R Asadpoure (2006) is used. in MATLAB [R2014a] environment through
The mixed mode SIFs associated with
X-FEM approach.
auxiliary and actual states can be evaluated
by calculating M and solving a system of In all examples, the following average
linear algebraic equations as
material parameters which are being the
M (1) =
2 N11 K I + N12 , and M (2) =+
N12 K I 2 N 22 K II (9)
function of independent engineering
where
constants (E ij ,υ ij , G ij , i, j = 1, 2.) are used for
s µ +µ s 1 s11
N11 =
− 22 Im 1 2 , N12 =
− 22 Im + Im ( µ1 µ2 ) all orthotropic and laminated composite
2 µ µ
1 2 2 µ1 µ2 2
plates considered in this study as given by
…….. (10)
s Mohammadi (2008)
− 11 Im ( µ1 + µ 2 ) (11)
N 22 =
2 E11 ν 12 E′
E′
= ,ν ′
E11 E22 = ν 12 ν 21 ,=
δ4 = κ′
,= −ν ′
Crack growth analysis and propagation E22 ν 21 2G12
paths with MSIFs variation whereE11, E11, G12, a, α, θ and P(σ, τ and ρ)
are Young’s modulii, shear modulus, crack
length, crack angle, lamination angle and
466
Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor and Crack Growths Modeling of Double Edge Cracks Laminated
Composite Plate Subjected to Tensile and Shear Loadings using XFEM
stresses, respectively. The external stress P is simultaneously and starts oscillating which
assumed as uniaxial tensile (σ), shear (τ) and shows mixed mode fracture failure. From the
combined loading (ρ), respectively. Figure. 1 (e-f) it is observed that the
Here E' is the efficient Young’s modulus, ν' is normalized second mode SIF(KII) is greater
the effective Poisson’s ratio, δ4 is the than first mode (KI) which indicates that
stiffness ratio, and κ' is the shear parameter. though the crack tips show mixed mode
The following normalized mean MMSIF in failure, still (KII) shows dominant effects
the form of first mode SIF, KI and second than (KI)I in the fracture failure of the plate.
mode SIF, KII for tensile, shear and After certain distance, crack propagates as
combined (tensile and shear) loadings are faster rate in mixed mode SIF i.e., crack plate
represented as is going along unstable direction.
= I σ π a , K11
K I K= K II σ π a for TL
= I τ π a , K11
K I K= K II τ π a for SL
KI I (σ and τ ) π a , K11
K= K II (σ and τ ) π a
for CL
The material properties and geometry for
double edge cracks or orthotropic materials
are used in the present analysis as (unless
otherwise stated)
For double edge crack: E1=144.8 GPa, (a)
E2=10.12 GPa, G12=9.66 GPa, v12=0.27
with L=80 mm, W=10 mm and a= 4 mm in
both of the edges (unless otherwise stated). 4
Crack-1 Crack Tip
Enrichme nt Crack-2
The parameters h and W are the total length 2
and width of the plate, respectively as shown
0
in Figure. 1 (a). The crack tip and crack face
-2
enrichment functions are shown in Table 1 Crack Face
Enrichme nt
(b). Figure.1 (c) shows the stress contour of -4
0 2 4 6 8 10
crack tip and crack face enrichment
functions. It is observed that at crack tip, the (b)
stress shows highest value. Hence it is x 10
8
40
conclude that crack will propagate from tip 30 14
12
due to the highest stress. The mixed mode 20
10
crack propagation paths when combined 10
8
0 6
loadings (tensile and shear) are applied -10 4
CONCLUSION
6
The stochastic extended finite element
4 method (XFEM) is used to evaluate the
2
normalized mixed mode SIF of double edge
cracks orthotropic plate subjected to uni-axial
0
tensile, shear and combined loadings. The
-2 following conclusions can be noted from the
0 2 4 6 8 10 limited study. The normalized mixed mode
(d) SIF goes on increasing with increase the
crack length. The crack growth directions in
40
Crack1
Crack2
both of the cracks show different crack paths.
The crack near to loading is propagating
Normalized SIF KI
30
faster as compared to crack away from the
20
loading.
10
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
0
0 2 4 6 Financial support for the first author was
Number of crack growth steps
provided by Indo-US Research Fellowship
(e) Programme under the Indo-US Science and
Technology Forum (IUSSTF), under grant
40
Crack1 No. FELLOWSHIP/2012/ACHCHHE
Crack2
LAL/14-2012.
Normalized SIF KII
30
20 REFERENCES
10
Asadpoure A Mohammadi S Vafai A 2006
Crack analysis in orthotropic media
0
0 2 4 6
using the extended finite element
Number of crack growth steps
method Thin walled Struc 44(9)1031 –
(f) 1038.
Belytschko T Black T 1999 Elastic crack
Figure 1. Crack propagation path for off-
growth in finite elements with minimal
set double edge cracked [0/60°/60°/0]
remeshing Int J Num Meth Engrg 45(5)
laminated composite rectangular plate
601–620.
with left edge crack eccentric (e y /h=0.08)
subjected to tensile and shear stresses Dumstorff P Meschke G 2007 Crack
(a) geometry of the plate (b) enrichment propagation criteria in the framework of
using XFEM (c) stress contour (d) crack XFEM based structural analyses Int J
growth analysis (e) variation of Numer Anal Meth Geomech 31 239–
normalized K I with each step of crack 259.
growth, (f) variation of normalized K II with
each step of crack growth.
468
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Bulk metallic glasses (BMGs) are relatively newly developed materials which
have some unique mechanical properties like high strength and reasonable fracture
initiation toughness but have negligible tensile ductility and zero crack propagation
toughness. Porous BMGs have been recently developed in an attempt to overcome some
of the limitations of monolithic BMGs. The pores may act as barriers to a propagating
crack and may improve propagation toughness of BMGs, which may widen their
application areas. It has been shown that porous BMGs can exhibit high compressive
ductility. However, the fracture behavior of porous BMGs has not been studied so far. In
this work, the fracture behavior of porous BMGs is investigated using the finite element
method. Simulations of crack propagation are carried out using a damage plasticity model
and element removal technique. Different pore sizes and pore densities are found to have
different effects on the load carrying capacity. It is found that some combination of pore
size and density may be favorable while some other combination may be unfavorable
with regards to improvement in load carrying capacity.
Keywords: Bulk amorphous alloys; Porous bulk metallic glasses; Finite element
analysis
Experimental
simulation
2000
1500
Load(N))
1000
500
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25
Displacement(mm)
470
Mechanics of Fracture of Porous Bulk Metallic Glasses
Figure 3. Comparison of load vs. load point BMG sample. Main reason for this variation in
displacement curves for S4PB specimen load carrying capacity is as an affinity of pores
from experiment and FE simulation. to notch. Figure.5 shows contours of
logarithmic plastic strain in front of notch. It
Figure 2(b) shows a contour plot of von-Mises
can be observed that at the same load point
stress near the crack tip from FE simulation. It
displacement, specimen 3 shows plastic strain
shows a similar pattern of crack propagation
near the pore as well, which reduces the stress
(diversion from the notch plane) and secondary
concentration effect around the pore and
crack development around notch (see Figure.
redistributes the stresses developed ahead of
6(b)) as in experimental study. Load versus
the notch leading to increase in load carrying
load point displacement curves from
capacity of specimen 3.
experiment and FE simulation are presented in
Figure.3. It can be observed that the peak load Table 1. Load carrying capacity of different
is well captured in the simulations. samples
(a) (b)
Figure 5: (a) Specimen 3 shows plastic
strain develops near pore before crack
propagates, (b) Specimen 2 does not show
Figure 4. FE Mesh near notch and pores of
plastic strain near pore at crack initiation.
5% pore density and 40 μm pore size
Figure.4 shows the FE mesh around pore and
notch having 40 µm pore size and 5% pore
density (specimen-2). The mesh comprises of
total 91456 elements and 93959 nodes. Another
mesh is created with 20 µm pore size and 2%
pore density (specimen-3). Table 1 shows that
the load carrying capacity of specimen-2
decreases to 45% while it increases for (a) (b)
specimen-3 by 20% as compared to monolithic
471
Hajare and Tandaiya
Figure 6. (a) Near notch tip view showing blunting crack tip J. Mech. Phys. Solids
suppression of secondary crack in porous 33(1) 25-49.
BMG, (b) Near notch tip view showing Baran Sarac & Jan Schroers 2013 Designing
development of secondary cracks in tensile ductility in metallic glasses Nature
monolithic BMG Communications 4:2158 DOI:
It can be observed in Figure.6 that secondary 10.1038/ncomms3158
cracks develop ahead of monolithic BMG but Christopher A Schuh Todd C Hufnagel
not in case of porous BMG. Upadrasta Ramamurty 2007 Mechanical
Direction of propagation of crack in monolithic behavior of amorphous alloys Acta
BMG is slightly out of plane (seen in Figure. Materialia 55 4067–4109
2(b)) but in porous BMG, it is through pores Parag Tandaiya Narasimhan R Ramamurty U
which lie ahead of the notch and in the plane of 2007 Mode I crack tip fields in
notch as seen in Figure.7. amorphous materials with application
tometallic glasses Acta Materialia 55
6541–6552
Takeshi Wada Akihisa Inoue A Lindsay Greer
2007 Mechanical properties of porous
bulk glassy alloy prepared in high-
pressure hydrogen atmosphere Materials
Science and Engineering A 449–451 958–
Figure 7. Crack propagates through pores 961
and in notch plane for porous BMG
Takeshi Wada and Makoto Kinaka 2006 Effect
CONCLUSIONS of volume fraction and geometry of pores
on mechanical properties of porous bulk
In this work, the Anand and Su (2005) glassy Pd42.5Cu30Ni7.5P20 alloys
constitutive model with damage plasticity is Materials Research Society J. Mater. Res.
used for FE simulation of crack propagation in 21(4) 1041-1047
both monolithic as well as porous BMGs. The
5% pore density and 40 µm pore size specimen Tandaiya P Narasimhan R and Ramamurty
shows less load carrying capacity while 2% 2011 On numerical implementation of an
pore density and 20 µm pore size specimen isotropic elastic-viscoplastic constitutive
shows increase in load carrying capacity over model for bulk metallic glasses.
monolithic BMGs. It is because of effect Modelling and Simulation in Material
development of plastic strain near the pore and Science and Engineering 19 015002
secondary crack development after crack (19pp)
propagation. Tandaiya P Ramamurty U Ravichandran G and
Narasimhan R 2008, Effect of Poisson’s
REFERENCES ratio on crack tip fields and fracture
Anand L Su C 2005 A theory for amorphous behavior of metallic glasses Acta
viscoplastic materials undergoing finite Materialia 56 6077-6086
deformations, with application to metallic Viggo Tvergaard John W Hutchinson 2002
glasses Journal of the Mechanics and Two mechanisms of ductile fracture: void
Physics of Solids 53 1362–1396. by void growth versus multiple void
Aravas N and Mcmeeking R M 1985 Finite interaction International Journal of Solids
element analysis of void growth near a and Structures 39 3581–3597.
472
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents a meshfree extended element free Galekrin method
(XEFGM) approach to analyze three-dimensional composite patch repair problem
under thermal and mechanical loads. In XEFGM approach, extrinsic enrichment
technique is employed to capture material and crack discontinuities in the physical
model. The location of geometric discontinuity is traced by vector level set method. A
domain based J-integral approach is used for the evaluation of stress intensity factors.
Effectiveness of applied patch is dependent on patch material, patch size, patch shape
and adhesive material. The implemented methodology used to investigate patch repair
effectiveness in terms of stress intensity factors (SIFs).
Keywords: Patch Repaired Crack Panel; XEFGM; SIFs; Thermo-elastic cracks.
METHODOLOGY
16
1504.
14
12
10
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Crack length (mm)
475
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
G f l FPZ
(1)
Similarly, in a geometrically similar beams,
ligament length (W) is proportional to
uncracked ligament length (W-a). By
incorporating this in Equation (1), Equation
(2) is obtained as given below:
Gf l
k FPZ
W a W (2) 𝐺𝑓
Figure 1. versus W-a for UHSC
where k is proportionality constant. 𝑊−𝑎
beams
Gf
The size independent fracture energy
Further, a plot made using W a versus (W-
obtained using the above mentioned
a) shows that plot follows power law as given
procedure is presented in Table 1 along with
below:
the GF obtained from other two models such
Gf
C (W a) as RILEM and boundary effect [Murthy,
W a (3) 2013]. It is noted that the GF obtained from
where C and β are constants. As (W-a) all the three methods are in good agreement
Gf revealing any of the methods can be used for
increases, W a almost attains a constant the estimation of size independent fracture
value leading to size independent fracture energy.
energy.
477
Determination of Size Independent Fracture Energy for Various Grades of Concrete Beams- Three
Approaches
Table1. Size independent fracture energy for NSC, HSC and UHSC
Notch Rilem GF corrected Boundary Effect GF based on
Beam
to for P- δ tail Method (BEM) energy release
Mix Dimension
depth segment [Murthy et [Murthy et al. rate (From the
(mm)
ratio al. (2013)] (2013)] current study)
0.1 185 190 190
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
NSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x50x200 0.2
0.3
0.1 6195 6393 6314
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
HSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x5x200 0.2
0.3
0.1 13761 14185 13794
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
UHSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x50x200 0.2
0.3
REFERENCES
Duan K Hu X and Wittmann, F 2002
Explanation of size effect in concrete
fracture 338 using non-uniform energy
distribution Materials and Structures 35
326-331.
Landis E N Bolander J E 2009 Explicit
representation of physical processes in
concrete fracture Journal of Physics D:
Applied Physics 42 1-17.
Karihaloo B Abdalla H and Imjai T 2003 A
simple method for determining the true
specific fracture energy of concrete
Mag. Concr. Res. 55 471-481.
Muralidhara S Prasad B Karihaloo B and
Singh R 2011 Size independent fracture
energy in plain concrete beams using tri-
linear model Construction and Building
Materials 25 3051-3058.
Murthy A R Karihaloo B and Iyer N R 2013
Determination of size-independent
specific fracture energy of concrete
mixes by two methods Cement and
Concrete Research 50 19-25.
Trivedi N Singh R K and Chattopadhyay J
2015 A comparative study on three
approaches to investigate the size
independent fracture energy of concrete
Engineering Fracture Mechanics 138
49-62.
Shah S Swartz S Ouyang C 1995 Fracture
Mechanics of Concrete: Applications of
Fracture Mechanics to Concrete, Rock
and Other Quasi-Brittle Materials John
Wiley & Sons Inc New York.
479
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
480
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:gettu@iitm.ac.in
Stephen et al.
ANALYTICAL FORMULATION
An analytical model based on the concept of
a non-linear hinge is suitable for modelling
the three-point bending test of a FRC
material. The hinge is modelled as layers of
spring elements, whose behaviour is Figure 2. Stress distribution over the
governed by the constitutive relations of depth of the beam for a tetralinear
model.
concrete in the uncracked and cracked states.
The springs are attached at each end to a
vertical rigid boundary, and the strain
481
Obtaining Fracture Properties of FRCby Inverse Analysis using the PGSL Optimization Algorithm
can give σ-w curves to be used as an input for Kitsutaka Y 1997 Fracture Parameters by
numerical analysis. Polylinear Tension-Softening Analysis
Journal of Engineering Mechanics123
444–450.
Kooiman A G 2000Modelling Steel Fibre
Reinforced Concrete for Structural
DesignPh.D. Thesis Technical
University of Delft.
Löfgren I Stang H and Olesen J F 2005
Fracture Properties of FRC Determined
through Inverse Analysis of Wedge
FIGURE 4. Σ-W CURVES OBTAINED
Splitting and Three-Point Bending
FROM INVERSE ANALYSIS.
Tests. Journal of Advanced Concrete
REFERENCES Technology3 423–434.
Buratti N Mazzotti C and Savoia M 2011 Nayar S K Gettu R and Krishnan S C 2014
Post-cracking behaviour of steel and Characterisation of the toughness of
macro-synthetic fibre-reinforced fibre reinforced concrete – Revisited in
concretes Construction and Building the Indian context The Indian Concrete
Materials252713–2722. Journal 88 8-23.
EN 14651 2005 Test method for metallic Olesen J F 2001 Fictitious crack propagation
fibred concrete - Measuring the flexural in fibre reinforced concrete beams
tensile strength (limit of proportionality Journal of Engineering Mechanics127
(LOP) residual) European specification 272–280.
for sprayed concrete-EFNARC
Østergaard L 2003Early-Age Fracture
Guidelines.
Mechanics and Cracking of Concrete
Gettu R Mobasher B Carmona S and Jansen Ph.D. Thesis Technical University of
D C 1996 Testing of Concrete under Denmark.
Closed-Loop Control Advanced Cement
Raphael B and Smith I F C 2003 A direct
Based Materials3 54–71.
stochastic algorithm for global search
Gopalaratnam V S and Gettu R 1995 On the Applied Mathematics and
Characterization of Flexural toughness Computation146 729–758.
in Fibre Reinforced Concretes Cement
Sousa J L A O and Gettu R 2006
and Concrete Composites17 239–254.
Determining the Tensile Stress-Crack
Hillerborg A Modẽer M and Petersson P-E Opening Curve of Concrete by Inverse
1976 Analysis of crack formation and Analysis Journal of Engineering
crack growth in concrete by means of Mechanics132 141–148.
fracture mechanics and finite elements
Uchida Y KuriharaN Rokugo K and
Cement and Concrete Research6 773–
Koyanagi W 1995 Determination of
782.
Tension Softening Diagrams of Various
Jepsen M S Damkilde L and Lövgren I 2016 Kinds of Concrete by means of
A fully general and adaptive inverse Numerical Analysis Fracture Mechanics
analysis method for cementitious of Concrete Structures F H Witmann
materials Materials and Structures 1– (Ed) 17–30 Germany AEDIFICATIO
14. Publishers. 483
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
#
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: chandrak@civil.iisc.ernet.in 484
Simon and Kishen
bridging zone described here is assumed to modulus of concrete, D is the depth of the
be a small region near the macrocrack tip beam. The geometric factors g 2 (c/D) and R R
which resists the crack growth due to the g 3 (c/D,x/c) are taken from standard reference
R R
the bridging stress that tends to close the intensity factor at the microcrack tip and A is
crack. The crack opening displacement (δ) at a function of microcrack angle and the
any point x takes the form eigenvalue.
485
A Linearized Toughness Model for Concrete by Considering Toughening Mechanisms
condition, the crack opening displacement at of experimental data reported by Bazant and
the junction x = c-(l/2) (ie, Xu (1991). Issa et al. (2000) concluded from
δ macro │ x =δ micro │ l/2 ) is used to derive the their study that the fracture properties of
modified SIF. In this study, the microcrack is concrete are significantly affected by
considered to be very sharp (ie, β*=180o) in specimen size (D) and the maximum
order to initiate the crack propagation. aggregate size (d a,max ).
Substituting Eq. 1 and 2 into Eq. 3 and
rearranging the equation
(σ a √(πc)g 2 (c/D)=K 1 ), the modified SIF
(K Imicro macro) reduces to
l
σ b c Emicro c c − 2
K1micro = K1 21 − g3 , (3)
σ a l Emacro D D
macro
487
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper highlights the application of a numerical tool based on element
free Galerkin method (EFGM) to understand the effect of initial damage in buckling
and bending. An isotropic continuum damage model is used for modelling initial
voids. A parametric study based on number of nodes is carried out. Numerical
examples are solved and results are compared with theoretical results. A comparison,
with results obtained from finite element analysis, is also carried out. It is observed
that the presence of initial damage will act as an initial imperfection in columns and
so will reduce the critical load. EFGM is able to capture the reduction in critical
buckling load of columns and reduction in stiffness of beams.
Keywords: EFGM; Buckling; FEM; Damage
δ So A( x ) P T WP + PxT WPx , C ( x ) = P T W ,
where =
D ( n) = , 0 ≤ D(n ) ≤ 1 (1)
δS and C ( x ) = PxT W .Solving a ( x ) and
where δ So is the effective area of the
substituting in Eq. (2) will give,
intersections of all micro-cavities or micro- Λ Λ
cracks lies in area δ S . An isotropic damage u h ( x ) = ΦTu u+ ΦθT θ
which is independent of normal variable, a pT ( x ) A−1 ( x )C ( x )
where Φ u ( x ) =
δS
scalar, is defined as D = o .The concept of pT ( x ) A−1 ( x )C ( x )
Φθ ( x ) = (5)
δS Λ
σ ij u = {u1 , u2 .....un }
T
where pT ( x ) = { p1 ( x ), p2 ( x ), , pm ( x )} is a L L
489
Meshfree Analysis of Beams and Columns in the Presence of Initial Damage
=kij ∫B
T
Eo (1 − D ) IB j dx ∂Φ ui ( x) ∂Φ uj ( x) ∂Φ ui ( x) ∂Φθ j ( x)
∫ ∫
i
dx dx
Ω ∂x ∂x ∂x ∂x
Ω
Ω
∂ 2 Φ ui ( x ) =
k g ij
∂Φθ i ( x) ∂Φ uj ( x) dx ∂Φθ i ( x) ∂Φθ j ( x)
∫ ∂x ∫ ∂x
(9)
∂x 2 ∂x ∂x
dx
BiT = 2 Ω Ω
∂ Φθ i ( x ) Eq. (14) can be written as | (k − pk g ) |= 0 to
∂x 2
Λ
solve the Eigen value problem.
Force vector f is given as
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
Λ
f = Λ−T f (10) The material chosen is mild steel with
L Eo = 210 GPa and cross section is taken as
with f i = ∫Φ
T
i q ( x )dx . circular with radius of 2 cm. The span of
0
the beam is taken to be 10 m. The basis is
Λ − taken to be cubic. The weight function
Displacement vector d = Λd with
chosen in EFGM is cubic spline. Three
Λ different damage variations along the span
d = {u h ( x1 ), θ h ( x1 ),..., u h ( xn ), θ h ( xn )}T
(11) are employed in this paper viz. uniformly
− Λ Λ Λ Λ
d = {u ( x1 ), θ ( x1 ),..., u ( xn ), θ ( xn )} T distributed, uniformly varying and sine
concentrated. Damage closure effect is
neglected.
where Λ is scaling matrix consisting of
shape function values associated with all BENDING OF SIMPLY SUPPORTED
nodes (Arun et al., 2010; Sunitha et al., BEAM
2008).
A uniform distributed load of 2 N/m is
BUCKLING OF COLUMN taken over the span of the beam. A
convergence study is carried out first and
The governing equation for buckling is: the optimum number of nodes to be used in
further analysis is fixed as 28.Figure 1
d2 d 2v d 2v
o
E (1 − D ) I + p =
0 (12) shows the variation of deflection along the
dx 2 dx 2 dx 2
length of the beam. It can be observed that
Weak form of Eq. (12) is written as: inclusion of initial damage in the beam will
L reduce the stiffness and thus produce larger
∫ ( E (1 − D) Iu
0
o v − u, x pv, x )dx
, xx , xx deflection for the given load.
CONCLUSION
It is clear from the numerical result that
EFGM is a reliable tool to predict the
behaviour of beams under bending and
compressive load. Inclusion of damage in the
beam lowers the critical buckling load. It is
491
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
process when compared to ionic transport Let 𝑛 be the total number of chemical species
process in the electrolytic solution. The rate present in the electrolytic domain.The
of change of concentration fields is much domain consists of 𝑐𝑖 (for 𝑖 = 1, 2 … 𝑛 )
higher than rate of boundary propagation. concentration fields and electrical-potential
Due to this reason, steady state for ionic field𝜙 , therefore, the total number of field
transport is considered at any given time step. variables is 𝑛 + 1 . These variables are
From the literature, it is quite evident that the functions of space and time. The Nernst-
need for efficient computational method is Planck equation defines the mass transport of
required in order to circumvent the each ion as
difficulties in solving this complex system of 𝜕𝑐𝑖
= −∇. 𝑱𝑖 + 𝑞𝑖 − ∇. (𝑐𝑖 𝐯) in Ω𝐸 (1)
𝜕𝑡
equations. In this paper, a combined extended
finite method and level set method is where 𝑞𝑖 is the source/sink term due to
proposed. As the pit propagation is a moving chemical reactions in the domain, the third
boundary problem, conventional finite term is the flux density due to the velocity
method fails to capture the evolution of field 𝐯. The flux term 𝑱𝑖 is defined as
interface as ionic concentrations are 𝑱𝑖 =
𝑧𝑖 𝐹
discontinuous across the interface. XFEM −𝐷𝑖 ∇𝑐𝑖 − (𝐷𝑖 𝑐𝑖 ∇ϕ) − ∑𝑛𝑘=1,𝑘≠𝑖 𝐿𝑖𝑘 ∇𝜇𝑘 (2)
𝑅𝑇
uses a discontinuous-derivative enrichment The flux term is a combination of
formulation, by which the discontinuity in contributions from independent motion
ionic concentrations is handled and need for (diffusion and ion migration) of ion 𝑖 and
re-meshing at each step is avoided. In interaction with other ions. This model
addition to XFEM, LSM is an excellent tool describes the ionic transport in the most
used to track the interface, along with its general case, where ionic interactions are
geometry. It uses signed distance function to considered. For pitting corrosion, convective
define the interface and is evolved in time. velocity is neglected as the electrolyte is
This proposed model is validated for stainless considered as steady. Local electro-neutrality
steel 304. condition is required to be enforced as an
METHODOLOGY additional constraint on classic Nernst-Planck
equation,
In this section, a detailed formulation for
pitting corrosion in a dilute electrochemical ∑𝑛𝑗=𝑖 𝑧𝑗 𝑐𝑖 = 0 in Ω𝐸 (3)
system is described (Sarkar). Let the This constraint makes the ionic distributions
electrolytic and the solid alloy domain be linearly dependent; thereby incorporating the
represented asΩ𝐸 andΩ𝐴 , respectively, at any effect of cross coefficients 𝐿𝑖𝑘 , thru the
time𝑡. The electrode boundary Γ𝑒 is defined relation 𝑟𝑗 = ∇. (∑𝑛𝑘=1,𝑘≠𝑖 𝐿𝑖𝑘 ∇𝜇𝑘 ) defining 𝑟𝑗 as
as the boundary which is not in contact with a new variable.By formulating a constraint
the solid alloy. The anodic and cathodic minimization problem, a new variable 𝑟𝑗 can
boundaries are represented as Γ𝑎 and Γ𝑐 , be deduced as 𝑟𝑗 = 𝑧𝑗 𝜆 , where 𝜆 is Lagrange
respectively. Here, the anodic boundary multiplier used to enforce electro-neutrality
defines the boundary of the pit at any given condition as constraint. Therefore, the first
time. governing equation for mass transport of ion
𝑖 is given as
𝜕𝑐𝑖 𝑧𝑖 𝐹
= −∇. (𝐷𝑖 ∇𝑐𝑖 ) + ∇. (𝐷𝑖 𝑐𝑖 ∇ϕ) + 𝑞𝑖 −
𝜕𝑡 𝑅𝑇
𝑧𝑗 𝜆in Ω𝐸 (4)
The first term describes the ionic
concentration due to diffusion, the second
term describes electrical-potential field due to
ion migration, the third term represents
Figure 1. Domain representation
493
Numerical Analysis of Ectrochemical Model for Pitting Corrosion
source/sink contribution and the last term defined as a signed distance function, which
contributes to the interaction of each ion with allows for discontinuity at the interface.
other ions. The second governing equation Pitting corrosion is characterized by moving
describing the electrical-potential field in the boundary with time. The rate of anodic
electrochemical system is homogenous form dissolution is determined using Faraday’s law
of Gauss law, and is given by of electrolysis. The front velocity is
∇2 𝜙 = 0in Ω𝐸 (5)
calculated from the anodic current density,
and is evolved over time to track the position
Eqs. (3), (4) and (5) represents the set of
of the boundary. For this purpose, level set
equations, with appropriate boundary and
method is used (Vagbharathi). The interface
initial conditions, describing the pitting
is defined as a signed distance function,
corrosion in the domain. For the proposed
which defines the boundary by taking value
model, the following boundary conditions are
zero at the interface. The level set function is
specified: Dirichlet boundary with
approximated using standard finite element
concentration values specified, Neumann
approximation. Level set function is evolved
boundary with concentration flux specified,
in time, using TVD-Runge-Kutta scheme (3rd
electrode boundaryΓ𝑎 ∪ Γ𝑐 with flux of ions
order 3 step). Therefore, updation of FE mesh
specified, which are obtained from Butler-
is avoided as XFEM captures the new
Volmer relation. Similarly, boundary
interface position using discontinuous
conditions for electrical-potential are
enrichment functions.
specified in form of potential flux on
electrode boundary. From the proposed model, it is quite clear
that solution 𝑐𝑖 and 𝜙 is dependent on each
The weak form of the governing equations is
other, and depending on the reaction orders,
derived using Gauss divergence theorem. As
source/sink term can be nonlinear, resulting
electrode boundaries are a function of time,
in highly coupled nonlinear system of
the finite element mesh has to be re-meshed
ordinary differential and algebraic equations.
at each time. Here, extended finite element
Gauss-Seidal iterative approach is employed
method with level set method is proposed for
to determine the solution of this coupled
this moving boundary problem. XFEM uses
system. For nonlinear case, Newton-Raphson
discontinuous derivative enrichment
method is used in each Gauss-Seidal iteration
formulation for field variables in the domain.
to solve the two nonlinear systems of
The domain is discretized into finite elements
equations. To integrate in time, Crank-
(FE) containing 𝑚 nodes and the
Nicolson method is used.
concentration field is approximated as
𝑐𝑖 (𝒙, 𝑡) =
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
∑𝑠⊂𝑠𝑡𝑑 𝑁 𝑠 (𝒙)𝑐𝑖𝑠 (𝑡) + Stainless steel 304 is considered for
∑𝑒⊂𝑒𝑛𝑟 𝑁 𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡)Ψ 𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡)𝑎𝑖𝑒 (𝑡)(6) numerical analysis of the proposed model.
where, 𝑠𝑡𝑑 is the standard FE mesh with SS304 is composed of 71% iron, 19%
𝑁(𝒙) as standard FE shape functions, 𝑐 𝑠 as chromium and 10% nickel. All three metals
nodal DoF for ion 𝑖 , 𝑒𝑛𝑟 is the enriched (Fe, Cr and Ni) in the alloy undergo
FEmesh with Ψ𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡) as enrichment oxidation reactions in the pit. The pit
functions. Here, 𝑎𝑒 are additional DoF’s at chemistry undergoes 3 anodic reactions, 4
enriched nodes corresponding to 𝑐 𝑠 at cathodic reactions and 14 hydrolysis
enriched node. The matrix form of nodal reactions. Total of 20 ionic species are
values can be expressed as: considered in this system, namely, Na+, Cl-,
𝑚 OH-, H+, Fe2+, FeCl-, FeCl+, FeCl 2 , FeCl 4 2+,
𝑐𝑖 (𝑡) = [𝑐𝑖1 𝑐𝑖2 … 𝑐𝑖𝑚 𝑎𝑖1 𝑎𝑖2 … 𝑎𝑖 𝑒 ]𝑇 =
Fe(OH)+, Fe(OH) 2 , Cr3+, CrCl2+, Cr(OH)2+,
[𝑐𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑑 𝑎𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑟 ]𝑇 (7)
Cr(OH) 2 2+, Cr(OH) 3 , Ni2+, NiCl+,Ni(OH)+,
In a similar way, the level set function𝜙(𝑡)is Ni(OH) 2 .
approximated. Enrichment function is
494
Vagbharathi and Gopalakrishnan
495
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents the modeling of plane edge crack problems by XIGA
using analysis suitable T-spline. In T-spline based XIGA, both geometry and solution
are approximated using same T-spline based rational basis functions. The crack is
described by level set function. The crack face is modeled by heaviside function and
crack tip singularitries are captured using asymptotic crack tip enrichment functions.
The values of SIF are computed using interaction integral approach. The results
obtained using T-spline based XIGA are found in good agreement with B-spline
based XIGA and standard analytical solution.
Keywords: Edge Crack; T-spline; XIGA; Enrichment functions
497
Edge Crack Simulation using T-Spline Based Xiga
350
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
300
37 38 3 40 41 42 43
250
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
200
25 26 27 28
150
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
100
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 50
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure1. T-mesh defining T-spline Figure 3. Stress contour plot ( σ yy ) for
geometry an edge cracked plate
REFERENCES
σ
Belytschko T Black T 1999 Elastic crack
growth in finite elements with
minimal remeshing International
Journal for Numerical Methods in
Engineering 45 601-20.
a
Bhardwaj G Singh I V & Mishra B K 2013
L Numerical simulation of plane crack
problems using extended
isogeometric analysis Proceeding of
International Conference on Design
L
and Manufacturing (IConDM2013)
64 661-670.
498
Singh et al.
499
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
+
1 1 t1
K t t k k
FORMULATIONS =k 1 =t 1 (8)
tp2
LK ( x ) ∑ ( Ft 2 ( x ) − Ft 2 ( xk ) ) bkt2
tp 2 f
In the present work the general formulation ∑
for fracture analysis of orthotropic material =k 1= t1
by using XFEM as given by Mohammadi where cr is the set of nodes that have the
(2008) is used. In this method firstly the crack face (but not the crack tip) in their
meshing is produced by usual finite element support domain, tp1 and tp2 are the sets of
mesh. Then, to provide a higher level of nodes associated with crack tips 1 and 2 in
accuracy a few degrees of freedom are added their influence domain, respectively. u j are
to the classical finite element model in the nodal displacements (standard degrees of
selected nodes near to the crack by freedom), a h , are vectors of additional
considering the location of crack. degrees of freedom for the nodes located on
The equilibrium equations and boundary crack faces and the two crack tips
conditions for a cracked body can be written respectively.
as
∇σ + f q =0 in Ω (1)
with σ n = f on ᴦ t
t
(2)
u=u on ᴦ u
(3)
σn=0 on ᴦc
(4)
0
f t are the body force and external traction -5
-15
any curvature of the crack, a signed distance -20
-20 -10 0 10 20
function f (x 1 ) often called a level set is
defined. The angle of curvature ϕ is defined Figure 1. Plate with (a) elliptical crack (b)
by two ways; at a point if t.∇g curve ≤ 0, use the meshed model (c) crack tip enrichment
regular polar angle from –t and if t.∇g curve ≥ 0, and crack face enrichment.
ϕ is obtained by Stazi et al. (2003).
501
Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack Subjected to Biaxial
Load Using X-Fem
Table 1 Effect of random variables with COC (=0.1) on the normalized mean and
COV of MSIFs (K I and K II ).
RV’s SIF Mean COV
SOPT MCS SOPT MCS
E 11 KI 1.71942 1.71946 0.001797 0.001795
K II 0.09851 0.09852 0.007816 0.007817
ʋ 12 KI 1.71945 1.71947 0.000331 0.000330
K II 0.09852 0.09853 0.000152 0.000150
G 12 KI 1.71943 1.71943 0.003597 0.003596
K II 0.09851 0.09850 0.015734 0.015733
cw KI 1.72355 1.72357 0.052754 0.052752
K II 0.09911 0.09911 0.350955 0.350955
cd KI 1.71951 1.71953 0.007824 0.007822
K II 0.09881 0.09880 0.249257 0.249255
σ KI 1.71944 1.71944 0.003771 0.003770
K II 0.09851 0.09851 0.029843 0.029840
Φ KI 1.71943 1.71940 0.002739 0.002737
K II 0.09850 0.09848 0.011978 0.011974
502
Palekar and Achchhe Lal
mean values µ a1, µ a2 ... µ an and can be elements selected for enrichment of the crack
obtained as is shown in Fig.1 (b-c).
Since the numerical results of the SOPT
∂K I analysis of elliptical crack are not available in
( ) ( )
n
=K K I µ a1 , µ a2 ,..., µ an + ∑ xi − µ ai
i =1 ∂ai the literature, therefore the present MSIFs are
compared with sampling based MCS
( )( x ) ∂∂aKa
2
1 n n
+ ∑∑ xi − µai
2=i 1 =j 1
j − µa j I
(13) solutions to verify the validity of the present
i j
SXFEM method. The numbers of samples
In the SOPT, the mean response {K} can be used for the MCS approach are taken as
written as 10,000 based on the satisfactory convergence
=E K I" ( ) (
K I µ a1 , µ a2 ,..., µ an + ) 1
2
var { K I } (14)
of the result.
The results obtained for mean and COV of
The corresponding second variance matrix of
SOPT as shown in Table 1 is in good
response var{K I ’’} can be obtained as
agreement with the results of MCS. It is
var { K I" } = var { K I } (15) observed that the plate is more sensitive to
Similarly, the mean and variance of K II can randomness in variables cw, cd, σ and Φ as
be evaluated. the values for COV of these RV’s are higher
as compared to the E 11 , ʋ 12 and G 12 .
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The stochastic response of MSIFs is
CONCLUSION
evaluated by modelling different system Among the different random variables used
parameters as independent Gaussian random in the present study, the random variables
variables (RV’s). such as cw, cd, σ and Φ have the dominant
The basic random system variables {a i (i=1...
effect on the fracture behaviour of the plate.
7)} are defined and sequenced as;
a 1 = E 11, a 2 = ʋ 12 , a 3 = G 12 , a 4 = cw, Therefore it can be concluded that the proper
a 5 = cd, a 6 = σ, and a 7 = Φ. control of these random parameters for
where, a 1 to a 7 are Young’s modulli, reliability of composite plate with elliptical
Poisson’s ratio, shear modulus, crack width, crack is required.
crack depth, tensile stress, and lamination
angle, respectively. Keeping in mind the REFERENCES
limitation of perturbation technique, the
Hadlar A Mahadevan S 2000 Probability
coefficient of correlation (COC) in the
random input system properties is kept 10% reliability and statistical methods in
(COC= 0.1) variation from their mean values. engineering design John Wiley & Sons
Following, normalized SIFs, K I and K II are Inc. New York.
used in the present analysis.
K I = K I σ π . cw and K II = K II σ π . cw Moes N Dolbow J Belytschko T 1999 A
finite element method for crack growth
In this study a four layered symmetric without remeshing International
[0°/45°/45°/0°] laminated composite square Journal of Numerical Methods in
panel with length L (=40 mm), width W (=40 Engineering 46 131 150.
mm) and unit thickness having centrally
located semi elliptical crack with major axis Mohammadi S 2008 Extended finite element
(cw =1 mm) and minor axis (cd =0.5 mm) method for fracture analysis of
subjected to biaxially applied tensile stress σ structures Blackwell publishing ltd.
equal to unity as shown in Fig.1 (a) is Stazi F L Budyn E Chessa J Belytschko T
considered. The meshing, modelling and 2003 An extended finite element
503
Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack Subjected to Biaxial
Load Using X-Fem
504
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Every physical structural system in real context when subjected to loads or
displacements behaves dynamically. Dynamic nature of the system is mainly due to
the additional inertial forces which is a product of mass times the acceleration.
Stiffness and mass of the structural system also plays a vital role in assessing the
dynamic nature of any system. Considering the effect of dynamic nature, it is essential
to address the frequency and corresponding mode shapes of a system. The present
study deals with the dynamic analysis of statically indeterminate beams with
distributed mass with and without the notch as a part of damage induced at 0.3L, 0.5L
and 0.7L locations of the beam. Three different notch depths were considered for the
identified locations. An analysis was carried out using a finite element tool ABAQUS
6.14, to see the behavior of beams in terms of its fundamental frequency with the
increase in notch to depth ratios for three different locations. From the analysis it was
observed that frequency decreases with the increase in notch depth for both the chosen
fixed-fixed and propped cantilever beams.
Keywords: Fundamental frequency; Notch depth; Frequency ratio.
depth increases accuracy of estimation was and width 2000 mm was considered for
found to decrease. So, upper limit of crack modelling
depth had been found for both cases of beam
with one and two cracks for first three natural NUMERICAL MODELLING
frequencies and mode shapes. Mehrjoo et. al.,
The frequency extraction procedure performs
(2013) used Genetic Algorithm to locate the
eigenvalue extraction to calculate the natural
crack and its depth. Effect of crack was taken
frequencies and the corresponding mode
by modeling a rotational spring at each crack
shapes of a system. It is a linear perturbation
location and modifying the element stiffness
method.
matrix as a function of crack location and
depth. Barad et. al., (2013) investigated the The eigenvalue problem for the natural
effect of crack location and depth on natural frequencies of an undamped finite element
frequency analytically using rotational spring model is
in the models at the crack locations. Nguyen (−𝜔2 𝑀𝑀𝑁 + 𝐾 𝑀𝑁 )𝜙 𝑁 = 0
(2014) analyzed the mode shapes of cracked
beams using FEM and found sharp spatial Where MMN is the mass matrix (which is
bent in mode shapes of beams with crack. symmetric and positive definite); KMN is the
But beams with no cracks showed mode stiffness matrix (which includes initial
shapes in plane. Baviskar and Tungikar, stiffness effects if the base state included the
(2013) developed an algorithm to predict effects of nonlinear geometry); ϕN is the
crack characteristics from measurement of eigenvector (the mode of vibration); and M
natural frequency using Artificial Neural and N are degrees of freedom. When KMN is
Network. Jabboor, (2011) considered both positive definite, all eigenvalues are positive.
elastic and plastic properties while Rigid body modes and instabilities
considering both geometric and material non- cause KMN to be indefinite. Rigid body modes
linearity for dynamic analysis of the beam. produce zero eigenvalues. Instabilities
Permanent displacements under explosive produce negative eigenvalues and occur
loads, with specific velocities, were studied. when you include initial stress effects.
Yokoyama and Chen, (1998) analyzed Abaqus/Standard solves the eigen frequency
Bernoulli-Euler beam with single edge crack problem only for symmetric matrices. For the
under vibration using ANSYS. The crack Lanczos method of eigenvalue extraction we
was modeled as line spring i.e. in place of need to provide the maximum frequency of
crack a spring of zero length was considered. interest or the number of eigenvalues
Theoretical analysis was done using Nash’s required; Abaqus/Standard will determine
equation and results were compared with natural frequency and asked number of mode
experimental and analytical results to check shapes.
the accuracy of the model. For a simply
For the chosen dimensions of the beam, crack
supported beam it was found that as the crack
depth ratios (a/w) varying from 0.1 to 0.3
gets closer to the mid span, at a given depth
were considered at three locations (s/L) 0.3,
of crack, natural frequency falls.
0.5 and 0.7 of the beam. Natural frequencies
Discontinuity in mode shape was found at the
associated with first three modes were
mid span where the crack was located. For a
calculated for clamped-clamped and
cantilever it was seen that as the crack
clamped-roller edge conditions of the beam.
reached away from the support, effect of
Figure 1 shows the ABAQUS model of a
crack on the natural frequency partially
beam with varying notch depth and location.
vanished. With increase in depth of the crack,
natural frequency dropped down.
From the review of literature, a two
dimensional Euler beam of depth 200 mm
Figure 1. ABAQUS model of beam
506
Numerical Studies on the Influence of Notch Depth and Location on The Natural Frequency of
Indeterminate Beams
0.9
Without a/w = a/w = a/w =
s/L 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Crack 0.1 0.2 0.3
Crack Depth Ratio (a/w)
0.3 5.8507 5.8462 5.8417 5.8222
0.5 5.8507 5.8048 5.6894 5.4947 Figure 3. Variation of frequency ratio
w.r.t. crack depth at specified crack
0.7 5.8507 5.804 5.6989 5.4944 location for fixed-pinned beam
1 1
Fundamental Frequency Ratio
0.98 0.98
0.96 0.96
s/L=0.3 a/w=0.1
0.94 s/L=0.5 0.94 a/w=0.2
s/L=0.7 a/w=0.3
0.92 0.92
0.9 0.9
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Crack Depth Ratio (a/w)
Crack Location Ratio (s/L)
0.98
Computing 13 867 – 880
Nguyen K V 2014 Mode shapes analysis of
0.96 a/w=0.1
a cracked beam and its application for
0.94 a/w=0.2 crack detection Journal of Sound and
a/w=0.3 Vibration 333 848 – 872
0.92
Yokoyama T Chen M C 1998 Vibration
0.9 analysis of edge-cracked beams using
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
a line-spring model Engineering
Crack Location Ratio (s/L) Fracture Mechanics 59 403 – 409
REFERENCES
ABAQUS Theory Manual Version 6.7
Bakhtiari-Nejad F Khorram A Rezaeian M
2014 Analytical estimation of natural
frequencies and mode shapes of a
beam having two cracks International
Journal of Mechanical Sciences 78
193–202
Barad K H Sharma D S Vyas V 2013 Crack
detection in cantilever beam by
frequency based method Procedia
Engineering 51 770 – 775
Baviskar P R Tungikar V B 2013 Multiple
Cracks Assessment using Natural
Frequency Measurement and
Prediction of Crack Properties by
Artificial Neural Network
International Journal of Advanced
Science and Technology 54 23 – 38
Chopra A K 2014 Dynamics of Structures
Pearson Education, Inc. South Asia
438 - 454
Jabboor W 2011 Dynamic Structural
Analysis of Beams Ph. D. Thesis-
School of the Built Environment,
Heriot-Watt University 1 - 233
Mehrjoo M Khaji N Ghafory-Ashtiany M
2013 Application of genetic algorithm
in crack detection of beam-like
508
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
8
6
4
2
0
0 0.5 1 1.5
CMOD (mm)
(a) (b)
Figure1 (a) Load vs CMOD graph for Beam Specimen with Notch/Depth = 0.1 (b) Model
of Beam Specimen in ABAQUS for notch/depth = 0.1
6
Load (kN)
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
CMOD (mm)
(a) (b)
Figure 2 (a) Load vs CMOD graph for Beam Specimen with Notch/Depth = 0.2 (b) Model
of Beam Specimen in ABAQUS for notch/depth = 0.2
511
George et al.
REFERENCES
Chaudhari S V and M A Chakrabarti 2012
Modelling of Concrete for nonlinear
analysis using Finite Element Code
ABAQUS International Journal of
Computer Applications 44(7)0975 – 8887
Grass P Xenos D Nystrom U Rempling R and
Gylltoft K 2013 CDPM2 A damage-
plasticity approach to modelling the
failure of concrete arXiv: 1307.6998v1
[cond-mat.mtrl-sci].
Grassl P and Jirasek M2006 Damage-plastic
model for concrete failure International
Journal of Solids and Structures 43
7166–7196.
Jankowiak T and Lodygowski T 2005
Identification of parameters of Concrete
Damage Plasticity Constitutive model
Publishing House of Poznan University of
Technology Poznan ISSN 1642-9303.
Wu J Y Li J and Faria R 2006 An energy
release rate-based plastic-damage model
for concrete International Journal of
Solids and Structures 43 583–612.
512
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A numerical framework to study the associated damage mechanisms during single
fiber fragmentation in uni-directional fiber reinforced plastics (UD-FRPs) with 3-D repeating unit
cells (RUCs) has been developed. Three different damage mechanisms have been considered in
this work viz., matrix damage, fiber-matrix interface debonding and fiber failure. A non-linear
homogenization technique has been used to obtain the effective constitutive behavior of the 3-D
RUCs. In the present work, damage initiation and propagation of UD-FRPs has been developed
due to varying strength distribution along the fiber length.
______________________________
514
2
Damage Development During Single Fiber Fragmentation
NOMENCLATURE
Homogenized stress-strain curve
180
160
140
120
B
Stress, σ 11 (MPa)
100
80 A
60
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Strain, ε 11 (%)
(a)
(b)
515
Parambil and Gururaja
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Figure 1: (a) Homogenized stress strain curves for the 3D-RUC with varying strength
along the fiber. (b) Failed elements in the fiber corresponding to point A (c) Damage
onset at the fiber-matrix interface at point A. (d) Matrix damage at point A (e) Failed
elements in the fiber corresponding to point B. (f) Damage onset at the fiber-matrix
interface at point B. (g) Matrix damage at point B.
516
4
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Plate Girders are typically I-beams made up of separate structural steel
plates which are welded, bolted or riveted to form vertical deep web and horizontal
flanges. An edge crack was observed on the weldment of the plate girder and a study
has been carried out for ascertaining safe number of cycles for the plate girder under
anticipated cyclic loads. This study adopts a fracture mechanics based approach to
determine the crack propagation characteristics and development of crack due to
cyclic loads has been studied using Paris’ law. FRANC2D has been adopted here for
the computational simulation of crack growth and propagation. The fatigue life of a
crack in the weldment has been estimated. The approach gives significant information
regarding the fatigue life and crack propagation characteristics.
Keywords: Fatigue; Crack Growth; Finite Element Analysis; Fracture
Mechanics; Paris Law; Plate Girder; Weldment.
the effect of repeated cyclic loads which may depicted in Figure 3. The von Mises
be of much smaller magnitude than the static equivalent stress values reported in the
failure loads. Such a failure of a component
is termed as a fatigue failure. Most industrial
structures are usually subjected to cyclic
loads and are prone to fatigue failure. It is
extremely common to observe fatigue cracks
emanating in the joints/members. The
probable locations from where the cracks
may emanate are called hot-spots. Since the
analysis is carried out using finite element
method, the crack propagation problem
becomes mesh sensitive. Fatigue is the
degradation of material and subsequent crack
propagation under the influence of repeated
cyclic loads on a structure. Commonly, the
fatigue life of a component can be described
by the well-known Paris’ law [Dahlberg and Figure 1. Schematic of Plate Girder.
Ekberg, 2006]. Paris law requires two
material constants for characterization of the
crack propagation behaviour; viz., m and C.
Experiments are required for determination
of m and C [Anderson, 2005].
518
Analysis of Fatigue Crack Propagation in Plate Girder
plot are in MPa. Material properties of fatigue analysis approach has been studied.
standard industrial steel have been adopted FRANC2D has been used successfully for the
for the stress analysis .For fatigue analysis fracture analysis of cracks in weldment of the
using Paris’ law, the parameters are adopted plate girder. The approach adopted gives a
as m=3 and C =8.22192e-14 (MPa mm1/2) reasonably good description of the fatigue
(T. LASSEN 1990). The crack was allowed life of the plate girder. Fracture based
to propagate in FRANC2D simulation. The analysis should be adopted in the design
fatigue load cycles has been determined as an procedure for clearer description of crack
output of FRANC2D and has been propagation and estimation of life of the plate
reproduced in Figure 4. The crack girder.
propagation has been simulated till a crack
approaches length of approximately 20 mm.
Of course the plate girder should not be 35000
allowed to be in service till such a large crack
30000
length gets developed. A reasonable crack
25000
Number of Cycles
length at which the plate girder may be
changed/repaired would be approximately 20000
6mm, which corresponds to approximately 15000
30,000 load cycles. The decision whether this 10000
life span is sufficient depends on the number
5000
of load cycles imposed in a day and would
0
depend on the structure under consideration.
The life of the structure can be increased by -5000
introducing a smooth circular surface near the 0 5 10 15
tip of the crack to arrest the crack or by crack length (mm)
eliminating the crack from the material by
cutting some portion of the material. As Figure 4.Crack Length vs Number of
fracture mechanics requires a crack for cycles for cracked structure.
analysis of the structure a crack of 1mm has
been additionally given which may be found 40000
out during the cutting of the material, which 35000
is propagated up to a crack length of 15mm
30000
for fatigue analysis of the new structure. The
25000
number of cycles
0
CONCLUSION
-5000
Fracture mechanics based fatigue analysis of 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5
a welded plate girder has been carried out and crack length (mm)
described here. The life of the plate girder as
estimated by the Fracture Mechanics based
519
Das and Thakkar
REFERENCES
Anderson T L 2005 Fracture Mechanics-
Fundamentals and Applications
3eTaylor and Francis.
Broek D 1984 Elementary Engineering
Fracture Mechanics Martinus Nijhoff
Publishers The Netherlands
Choudhary B K Roedig M and Mannan S L
2004 Fatigue Crack Growth Behavior Of
Base Metal, Weld Metal And Heat
Affected Zone Alloy 800 AT 823 K.
Trans. Indian Inst. Met.57 639-649
Dahlberg T, and Ekberg A 2006 Failure
Fracture Fatigue An introduction
Overseas Press (India) Pvt Ltd.
Lassen T 1990The Effect of the Welding
Process on the Fatigue Crack Growth,
Welding Research Supplement2 75s-82s.
McHenry H I and Reed R P 1977 Fracture
behavior of the heat affected zone in 5%
Ni steel weldment, Welding Research
Supplement 4 104s-112s.
Prashant Kumar 1999 Elements of Fracture
Mechanics Wheeler Publishing.
Subramanian N 2008 Design of Steel
Structures Oxford university press 929-
940.
Thakkar B K 2012 Analysis of Fatigue Crack
Propagation in Gusset Plates
International Journal of Structural and
Civil Engineering Research1 87-91.
Weiss B Z Steffens H D and Seifert D K
1972Fracture Toughness of the Heat-
Affected Zone in14CrMoV69 Steel and
18Ni Maraging Steel, Welding Research
Supplement 9 449s-456s.
520
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: One of the major reasons for the joint failure in steel structures is initiation
and propagation of cracks in steel weldments. Cracks are often developed in lap joints
due to a combination of shear and flexure and are usually periodic in nature. Various
approaches have been adopted by researchers to describe the flexure crack
propagation in steel welded joints. The usual approach is to model a crack, taking in to
account the change in fracture toughness value K I c between steel plate and the welded
joint. The welded region is affected by the heat produced during welding process and
exhibits significant change in mechanical properties. Flexural stiffness and strength of
cracked members around the heat affected zones would also be significantly affected.
This paper tries to describe a study conducted on crack propagation in a welded region
between two steel plates. A fracture analysis codeFRANC2D has been adopted here to
generate a model of two welded steel plates having a crack in between. Behaviour of
the crack and stress distribution around it has been studied taking in to account the
location of crack, mode of crack, properties of welded region etc.
Keywords: Fracture Mechanics; Finite element analysis; crack propagation
behaviour; welded joint, welded steel plates; FRANC2D.
steel plate 2 is considered to be 1000 mm in (60 x 10 x 1000) mm. 1mm the weld has
width, making dimensions of both plates 1 been assumed in between both the plates. Lap
and 2 respectively as (60 x 10 x 150) mm and length of the joints taken as 10 mm.
The left edge of the upper steel plate (plate 1) direction of the crack, stress contours, etc.
has been restrained to deform in x and y were observed.
directions. A point load of 10KN was applied
on the right edge of the lower steel plate RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
(plate 2) subjecting the specimen to direct A finite element mash showing steel plates,
tension. A non-cohesive, traction-free edge weld joint and 1 mm crack is shown in the
crack of 1mm length was generated on one figure 2. Tensile load on the plate was
edge of the welded region such that the crack incremented from 10kN to 60kN in steps of
becomes parallel to the longitudinal direction 10kN. Figure 3 shows crack propagation and
of both steel plates. The point load was deformed mesh after applying lodes of all 6
gradually increased up to 60 KN and the load steps.
corresponding increase in length of the crack,
522
Analysis of Crack Propagation in A Welded Lap Joints
523
Patel and Thakkar
524
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Gusset plates are thick steel plates used to joint beam or girder to column
or to connect truss members. Connection is done with help of bolts, rivets or welding.
Cracks may be emanate in the plates while drilling a hole for connection or due to any
other phenomena. These crack propagate further while the loads are transferred to it
from the truss members. Hence, it becomes imperative for us to determine the
propagation of crack determine the limit up to which we can allow the crack to
propagate. A fracture mechanics based finite element analysis using FRANC2D has
been carried out in this work to describe the propagation of cracks.
Keywords: Crack propagation; Fracture Mechanics; Gusset plates; Finite
Element Analysis, FRANC2D.
REFERENCES
Anderson T L 2005 Fracture Mechanics-
Fundamentals and Applications 3E
Taylor and Francis.
Figure 3. Displacement of gusset plate
Broek D 1984 Elementary Engineering
Fracture Mechanics Martinus Nijhoff
Publishers The Netherlands.
Choudhary B K Roedig M and Mannan S L
2004 Fatigue Crack Growth Behavior of
Base Metal, Weld Metal and Heat
Affected Zone of alloy 800 at 823 K
Transactions of the Indian Institute of
Metals 57(6) 639-649.
Fracture Mechanics Fundamentals and
application Third edition by T L
Anderson.
Myers M M 2011 Modeling and Analysis of
Steel Gusset Plates in Truss Bridges
Under Live Load Master of Science
Thesis Graduate School New Brunswick
The State University of New Jersey.
Figure 4. Effective Stress Prashant Kumar 1999 Elements of Fracture
Mechanics Wheeler Publishing.
527
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Heavy loads are usually required to be transported using gantries or cranes
supported by deep girders which are fabricated by welding, bolting or riveting steel
plates together. There are often instances when cracks are observed on the girders due
to either overloads or fatigue. Cracks usually emanate from web-flange joints due to
heavy stress concentration there or in the high equivalent stress zones. Strength of the
girders reduce in presence of such cracks and the cracks tend to propagate when
subjected even to design loads. This paper presents a study carried out on propagation
of cracks which were observed on the upper flange of a plate girder and at the joint of
web and flange. This study adopts a Fracture Mechanics based approach to determine
the crack propagation characteristics. Simulations of crack propagation have been
carried out using a fracture analysis code FRANC2D.
Keywords: Crack growth; Fracture Mechanics; Plate Girder, FRANC2D
tension zones in the upper flange and (2) at The deformed structure after application of
the junction of web and flange. A schematic loads for the cracks introduced as per case (1)
of the cross-section of the plate girder and case (2) is shown in figure 3.
considered here for study is shown in Figure
1.
Figure 5 Case (1) Effective stress on Plate Figure 5 Case (2) Effective stress on Plate
Girder with crack on the flange side Girder with crack at the junction of flange
and web.
CONCLUSION
A comprehensive study on failure of a plate
girder under service loads and in presence of
detectable cracks has been carried out. The
crack propagation study has been carried out
using FRANC2D. The approach gives an
excellent information about whether the
presence of cracks would instigate further
crack developments or not and whether the
structure is safe under the anticipated service
loads. Further, the description of crack
propagation also indicates the expansion of
cracks under service loads.
530
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Cut-outs in a plate induces stress concentration and also influences failure
initiation and damage propagation. Orientation of cut-outs in a given plate play an
important role for stress concentrations. The main objective of this paper is to study
failure initiation and damage propagation in a plate with a cut-out at various
orientations. For the purpose, a computer program based on Finite element method,
coupled with continuum damage mechanics has been adopted. Progressive failure
analysis of a plate with cut-out has been performed and presented here.
Keywords: Continuum Damage Mechanics, Plate, Cut-outs, Finite Element,
Aluminum, Progressive Failure Analysis
order to model such progressive growth of Finite Element Mesh generated for the plate
plasticity and damage, the layered shell with cut-outs at 0o, 5o and 10o have been
element approach is found to be more presented below in figure 2, 3 and 4
convenient. The stress components of each respectively. The plate is 3000mm wide and
layer are computed at integration points 3000mm long with rectangular cut out of
(gauss points) on the mid-surface of the 1000mm wide and 1000mm long fixed at
element and these stresses are assumed to be adjacent edges have been loaded with
constant over the thickness of each layer. uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/m2.
This, results in a piecewise constant
approximation of stress, plasticity and
damage field as shown in figure.
532
Failure Assessment in Aluminium Plate using Continuum Damage Mechanics
CONCLUSION
Figure 7. Damage of Aluminium plate Analysis of aluminium plate with rectangular
with Cut-Out Oriented at 10o of 10th layer cut-out at various orientation has been carried
and 15th load step out using a computer program based on
533
Nawab and Thakkar
REFERENCES
Chandrakanth S and Pandey P C 1995 An
isotropic damage model for ductile
material Engineering Fracture
Mechanics 50(4) 457-465.
Louhghalam A Igusa T Park C Choi S and
Kim K Analysis of stress concentrations
in plates with rectangular openings by a
combined conformal mapping – Finite
element approach International Journal
of Solids and Structures
Mahdi Mirzagoltabarroshan Studying
Decreased Methods of Stress
Concentration around Holes and
Openings of Plate and Shell Structures
Body International Research Journal of
Applied and Basic Sciences
Manual de Gen4u Version 2.1
www.lacan.upc.edu
Swapnil Fegade Patil R D Stress
Concentration: An Experimental and
Analysis Of Plate With Rectangular
Cutout IJREAT International Journal of
Research in Engineering & Advanced
Technology 2(4) Aug-Sept, 2014
Thakkar B Chandrakanth S and Pandey P C
Damage Coupled Elasto-Plastic Finite
Element Analysis of Plates and Shells,
Department of Civil Engineering Indian
Institute of Science Bangalore India
Thakkar B. K Progressive Failure Analysis of
Laminated Composites using
Continuum Damage Mechanics
534
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
To study the behaviour of a cracked member Formulas for Average Crack spacing (ACI
under torsion, we first need the crack depth Approach):
and distribution in the member. Different 𝑤 = 2.2𝛽𝜖𝑠 3�𝑑𝑐 𝐴
theories predict a different distribution or
spacing of cracks. The spacing of cracks is
vital to describe the behaviour of the member
6
Deference of angle of twist
AIJ29
Figure 1. Schamatic of beam considered. 5 Farra and Jaccod23
Fehling and Kӧnig22
4
CEB-FIP Model Code 19904
Section of Beam
536
Effect of Flexural Cracks on Behaviour of RCC Beams under Torsion
Deference of angle of twist v/s Section of Beam state of the art Budapest university of
4
Technology and Economics, Hungary.
3.5
3
Architectural Institute of Japan. Standard for
Deference of angle of twist
2.5
AIJ29 Structural Calculation of RC Structures.
Farra and Jaccod23
Fehling and Kӧnig22 AIJ Tokyo 1986.
2
CEB-FIP Model Code 19904
1.5
Comite´ Euro-Internationale du Be´ ton.
1
CEB-FIP Model Code 1978 – Design
Code. Comite´ Euro-International du
0.5
Be´ ton, Thomas Telford London 1978
0
(CEB Bulletin d’Information
Section of Beam No.124/125.).
Chart 2. Variation of angle of twist when Farra B and Jaccoud J P 1992 Bond behavior,
depth of cross-section constant and width tension stiffening and crack prediction
of cross-section varies.
of high strength concrete Proceedings
of International Symposium Bond in
Comparison of Twist Angle
Concrete Riga 1992.
6
Fehling E and König G Zur
Angle of Twist(Degree)
5
Rissbreitenbeschränkung im
4 Theoritical
3 Calculation
Stahlbetonbau Beton und
2 Stahlbetonbau 1988 6 161–167 7 199–
Ansys 204.
1
Simulation
0
IS: 456 2000 “Plain And Reinforced
Concrete - Code Of Practice (Fourth
Revision) Bureau Of Indian Standards,
New Delhi.
Mahmoud E Kamara and Basile G Rabbat
Chart 3. Comparison of angle of twist 2007 Torsion Design of Structural
between Theoritical calculation and Concrete Based on ACI 318-05
Ansys Simulation. Professional Development Series
September 2007
CONCLUSION
Nicholas J Carino and James R. Clifton
A comprehensive study of cracking patterns
and their effect on torsional rigidity have NISTIR 5634 1995 Prediction of
been studied. A comparison of various Cracking in Reinforced Concrete
prepared theories have been reported. AIJ29 Structure April 1995 Building and Fire
method was found to be closure with finite Research Laboratory National Institute
element simulation than other methods. A of Standards and Technology
significant researches of torsional rigidity Gaithersburg MD 20899
was observed due to flexural cracks.
Park R and Paulay T Reinforced Concrete
REFERENCES Structure John Wiley and Sons
A. Borosnyói and Balázs G L 2005 Models Rizkalla S H Shahawi M EL and Kwok C K
for flexural cracking in concrete: the Cracking Behaviour of Reinforced
537
Bariya and Thakkar
538
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: External bonding of fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) plates has emerged as
a popular method for strengthening reinforced concrete (RC) structures. In this article,
finite element analysis of fiber wrapped RC beams are carried out and validated by
the experimental results available in literature. RC beams with different carbon fiber
reinforced polymer (CFRP) length are subjected to four points bending. A nonlinear
damage model is used for concrete with orthotropic response of CFRP and cohesive
element for the interface.
Keywords: CFRP; Cohesive model; Plastic Damage Model; Deboning.
INTRODUCTION where,
𝑅𝑒(𝑅𝜎−1) 1 𝐸𝑐 𝑓𝑐
FRP composites are built by combining a R= 2 − 𝑅𝜖 ; Re =
𝐸0
; E0 =
(𝑅𝜎−1) 𝜖0
plastic polymer resin together with
and, 𝜖 0 = 0.0025, R 𝜖 = 4, 𝑅𝜎 = 4 fc = 30 MPa
reinforcing fibers. FRP is one of the best
Steel reinforcement was modelled as elastic-
retrofitting materials for strengthening due to
perfectly plastic material with yield stress
a number of advantages, such as excellent
507MPa. For CFRP plate linear orthotropic
strength to self-weight ratio, large fatigue
constitutive model is selected with following
resistance capacity, better corrosion
material properties:
resistance, etc. RC beams with FRP
composites offer an attractive solution to E11=165 GPa, E22=E33=9.65 GPa,
enhance the behaviour of concrete in terms of G12=G13=5.2 GPa, G23=3.4GPa, ν12=ν13=0.3,
strength and ductility. Among various types ν23= 0.45.
of failure mode of FRP wrapped RC A cohesive zone model is used to represent
structures; the predominant mode of failure is large scale fracture process zone i.e., the
always the delamination of FRP sheets from CFRP-concrete interface. The initial stiffness
the parent RC structures. A damage plasticity in the elastic stage was found to be 508MPa.
model is used to model concrete in the A quadratic traction damage initiation
present study. This model has the ability to criterion is used for the initiation of softening
show two major failure modes i.e. tensile zone in cohesive model. Interface damage
cracking and compressive yielding. The evolution is expressed in terms of energy
stress strain behaviour proposed by Saenz release rate. The dependence of the fracture
was used to construct the uni-axial energy on mode mix is defined based on the
compressive stress-strain curve for concrete: Benzaggah - Kenane (BK) fracture criterions
𝐸𝑐ℇ𝑐 with critical fracture energy same along the
σc = ℇ𝑐 ℇ𝑐 2 ℇ𝑐 3
1+(𝑅+𝑅𝑒−2)( )−(2𝑅−1)( ) +𝑅( ) first and second shear directions.
ℇ0 ℇ0 ℇ0
_________________________________
Abstract: The small punch specimens are in use to determine mechanical properties of
the materials, such as yield strength, ultimate tensile strength, ductility etc. Use of such
specimens is popular whenever limited quantity of material is available for testing,
such as aged/irradiated material. In this paper, T91 nuclear material has been taken to
characterise the mechanical and fracture properties using small punch test and
numerical simulation method. The punch load v/s centre point deflection data are
collected up to fracture signified by rapid drop in load carrying capability of the
specimens. The experimental data of T91 material is then used to evaluate yield
strength and ultimate tensile strength making use of available correlations in the
literature. These material data are then used to calculate Ramberg-Osgood hardening
exponent leading to generation of complete true stress-strain data. The next task is to
determine Gurson parameters of the material using numerical sensitivity analysis to
simulate punch load v/s central deflection right up to fracture. These Gurson
parameters along with true stress-strain data are then used to numerically generate J-R
curves of the materials by analyzing ASTM standard CT specimens. Calculated J-R
curves are then compared with the experimental values quoted in the literature. The
methodology described in this paper has the potential to determine J-R curve of
irradiated material using small punch tests.
Keywords: SP Specimens; Finite Element Analysis; GTN; J-R curve
*
Author for correspondence: E-mail: pradeep.dgfs@gmail.com
542
Kumar et al
543
Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J-R Curve
deflection curves were transformed into P/ t02 Determination of all these parameters are
vs biaxial strain (ε q ) curves as shown in Fig. done by comparing numerically calculated P/
3. On utilising this concept, coefficient of t02 vs biaxial strain (ε q ) curves curve with the
friction between ball & specimen and three experimentally measured values after the
Gurson material parameters viz. nucleation maximum load in which the rate of load
void volume fraction (f N ), void volume drop/slop with the central
fraction at coalescence (f C ) & void volume displacement/biaxial strain must be same for
fraction at failure (f F ) have been evaluated both because this region of curve is the
after 15 FEA simulations using different manifestation of fracture process in the
combination of above parameters. specimen.
8000 Test-A
Test-B
7000 Numerical (FEA)
6000 T91
5000
f_N- 0.01
3000 f_C- 0.08
f_F- 0.20
µ= 0.25
2000 t0(Numerical)= 0.2336 mm
1000
0
0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6
Biaxial strain εq
Figure 3 Experimental and numerical plot of normalised load v/s central deflection and
corresponding Gurson parameters for T91
544
Kumar et al
750
T91 Estimation of the mechanical properties
J-Integral (N/mm)
545
Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J-R Curve
546
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: During strong earthquake ground motion, there is a high degree of damage
and even collapse of reinforce concrete buildings. The design approach of earthquake
resistant design of structure based on codal provision (IS 1893:2002) is to control
damage to acceptable limit such as repairable damage during moderate earthquake and
collapse prevention during strong earthquake. In recent decades there is a focus on
evaluating damage level of structure under earthquake by the use of damage index.
Local damage index helps to numerically quantify the damage state of individual
structural member whereas global damage index evaluates the damage of the entire
structure.This paper discusses some available damage indices which are now being
extensively used for evaluating structural damage. A damage index may contain only
one damage parameter or multiple damage parameters. Multi-story RC frameswith
different plan dimensions were designed according to the provision of the current
Indian code (IS456:2000) and analyzed using nonlinear static (pushover)
analysis.Their response under some strong ground motions were obtained and by using
modified Park-Ang damage index the structural damage on designed RC frames are
quantified.Damage indices are the response parameter that might be merged in the
future design procedure which gives more efficient and economical solution of damage
state of structures.
Keywords: Damage index; Pushover analysis
__________________________________
estimate the structural damage. Each of Raufaiel and Meyer, in 1987, had been
these indices could give some useful proposed member damage indicator as
information on structural damage, modified flexural damage ratio (MFDR)
considering the underlying assumptions and defined as follows:
application limits introduced by their MFDR= max [MFDR+, MFDR-] In which,
developers. Depending upon the use of +
ϕx ϕ+
y
−
damage indices, they are classified as local M+ M+
MFDR+ =
x y
and global damage indices. +
ϕm ϕ+ ;
y
+ − +
Mm My
LOCAL DAMAGE INDICES −
ϕx ϕ−
y
+ − +
Mx My
Local damage indices quantify damage in MFDR− = −
ϕm ϕ−
y
(3)
individual member at critical section. It can + − +
Mm My
have cumulative nature if loads are cyclical This damage ratio represents the ratio
and depends on motion and number of between the secant stiffness at the onset of
loading-unloading cycles, but can also be of failure, M m /ϕ m , and the minimum secant
non-cumulative nature if no cyclic loading stiffness reached so far, M x /ϕ x . The term
exist. M y /ϕ y is the initial elastic stiffness.
a) Non-cumulative indices Superscripts + and - denote the loading
direction.
Newmark and Rosenblueth, proposed in
1971 the ductility factor as a means to assess b) Cumulative Indices
damage. The factor can be expressed as a Stephens and Yao (1987) developed a
function of curvature-ϕ, rotation-𝜽𝜽 or damage function which was applied for
displacement-d, using the following evaluation of structural damage. The
equation: damage sustained during n cycles of
ϕm θm dm response was expressed as:
µr (ϕ) = ; µr (θ) = ;µr (d) = (1)
ϕy θy dy
i=n
Δδpt 1−b∗rl
Where, suffix m and y denotes for maximum D = �( ) (4)
and yield value respectively. Δδpf
i=1 i
Banon et al, (1981) presented flexural
Where, b = deformation ratio coefficient; rl
damage ratio (FDR) based on stiffness and
= relative deformation ratio defined as the
computed according to following relation:
ratio of the negative change in plastic
Mu ϕm deformation in cycle i to the positive change
FDR = (2)
Mm ϕu in plastic deformation in cycle i, Δδpt ;
Δδpf = positive change in plastic deformation
Where,Mu is the ultimate bending moment
as resulting from a pushover analysis, Mm is in a one cycle test to failure conducted at
the maximum bending moment and ϕm and relative deformation ratio of cycle i which is
equal to the deflection at failure under
ϕu are corresponding curvatures.
simple monotonic loading.
548
Study Of Various Damage Indices Under Seismic Loading- A Review
∫𝐸 ∫𝐸 ∑N
i=1 Di Ei
tanh(𝛽2 ∗ − 𝜋)� ∗ exp �−𝛽3 ∗ �� (6) Dstory = ∑N
;
𝐸𝑢 𝐸𝑢 i=1 Ei
549
Parekar and Datta
IV of IS1893:2002. Material properties are Density of brick wall and concrete 20KN/m2
assumed to be 25 MPa for concrete and 25 KN/m2 respectively.
compressive strength and 415 MPa for the
yield strength of longitudinal and shear
reinforcement. RESULTS
Multi-story RC frameswith different plan
dimensions were designed according to the
provision of the current Indian code
(IS456:2000)and IS1893:2002 and analyzed
using nonlinear static (pushover) analysis.
Their response under some strong ground
motions were obtained and by using
(a) modified Park-Ang damage index the
structural damage on designed RC frames
are quantified.
REFERENCES
Colombo A and Negro P 2005 A damage
index of generalised applicability
Engineering structures 27(8)1164-
1174.
(b)
Jiang H J Chen L Z and Chen Q 2011
Seismic damage assessment and
performance levels of reinforced
concrete members Procedia
Engineering (14) 939-945.
Park Y and Ang A H 1985 Mechanistic
(c) seismic damage model for reinforced
Figure 1. Plan dimensions of buildings concrete Journal of structural
(each bays in X and Y direction has 4m engineering.
width)
Roufaiel M S and Christian M
Other relevant data are as follows: 1987Analytical modeling of hysteretic
Live load considered on roof: 1.5 KN/m2 behavior of R/C frames Journal of
Live load considered on floors: 3 Structural Engineering 113-9.
KN/m2(25% for earthquake) Stephens J E and Yao J T 1987 Damage
2
Roof finish/ floor finish: 1 KN/m assessment using response
Brick wall on internal and external beams measurements Journal of Structural
are 150 mm thick and 230 mm thick Engineering 113 (4) 787-801.
respectively.
550
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In-service inspection of many nuclear power plants has revealed that weld
joints are more critical in comparison to base metal. Therefore fracture assessment of
the strength mismatched weld is, required from safety considerations. In recent work,
the authors have proposed a three-parameter scheme to characterize the crack tip
opening stress, for small-scale yielding, for a crack lying anywhere in the strength
mismatched weld. The proposed scheme was validated with detailed finite element
analyses using the modified boundary layer formulation. In the present work, the
previously proposed scheme has been validated by detailed finite element analyses of
different types of fracture testing specimens (such as, middle tension, compact tension
and three point bend specimens) with crack in the weld and full scale pipe weld with
through wall crack. Wide range of weld strength mismatch ratio ranging from 0.6 to
1.6 and half of weld width 5mm to 20mm are considered in the study. Details of the
results have been discussed in this paper.
Keywords: Constraint; Crack tip stress; Weld strength mismatch; Finite
element.
552
Characterization of Near Crack Tip Stresses for Fracture Testing Specimens from Strength Mismatch
Weld
553
Kumar et al.
influence of specimen geometry and type of Kumar S Khan I A Bhasin V Singh R K 2014
loading. Characterization of crack tip stresses in
plane-strain fracture specimens having
weld center crack. International Journal
of Solids and Structures 51 1464–74.
Michiba K Hiramatsu H Hasegawa H
𝝈𝒚𝒚 /𝝈𝒐
554
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Mc ≠ Me
Mc = Me
Mc = Me Mc ≠ Me
557
Sisodia and Das
Abstract: We study numerically dynamic stability of a rock slope with the rate, state,
temperature and pore pressure friction (RSTPF) model on a rock slope. It is assumed
that failure of a rock slope occurs due to thermally activated creep of the micro
contacts at the sliding interface under the conditions of quasi static equilibrium. The
present study reveals that an increase in pore pressure destabilizes the rock slope.
However, failure of a rock slope depends on relative competitions between
temperature strengthening parameter and pore pressure related parameters.
Keywords: Rock slope stability; Rate and State friction; Temperature and pore
pressure.
φ
dφ ψ g [Λ1[c1e ψ g − c2 (Tˆs − Tˆ )] − Λ 2 ( pˆ s − 1)]
The RSTF model was basically proposed ∞
RSTPF model. The RSTF model has been pressure pˆ s on time of failure t f of the rock
modified further to take into account the role
interface under the condition Ts > T ∞ .
of pore pressure ps at the slip interface for
Figure 1. presents the results concerning
undrained conditions as following the failure of a rock slope with
(Λ1 ≠ 0, Λ 2 ≠ 0) and without (Λ1 =Λ 2 =0)
thermal pressurization for c = 0 or qcr = β−1
for β =1.2 . It is clear that the thermal
pressurization owing to interaction
between shear heat and pore pressure of
water at the slip interface hastens the
failure process by reducing the effective
normal stress.
560
A Numerical Study on a Rock Slope Failure with the Rate, State, Temperature and Pore Pressure
Friction (RSTPF) Model
REFERENCES
561
Singh A. K. and Singh T. N.
562
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
E-mail:amol.maskar5@gmail.com 563
Maskar et al.
effect of wall movement on the earth pressure From the force polygon shown in Figure2,
distribution. Dubrova presented an analytical the weight of trial wedge is given by,
method in the form of redistribution
𝑾’𝒅 = 𝑾𝒅 √𝟏 + 𝜶𝟐 + 𝟐𝜶𝒄𝒐𝒔(𝟗𝟎𝟎 ) (1)
principle, which is based on different wall
movements like rotation at top, rotation at From the geometry in Figure 2, the seismic
bottom and pure translation and calculated
active earth thrust (Pd) is given by,
static earth pressure. The distribution of static
earth pressure was found to be parabolic,
which matches with all available
experimental results. In the present study,
redistribution principle with incorporation of
seismicity effect is developed and seismic
active earth pressure distribution based on
newly developed redistribution principle is
worked out. In this paper, a complete
Figure 1. Resultant force acting on
analytical study is presented, which describes
Failure plane
the behaviour of seismic earth pressure
distribution using redistribution principle, for
different soil friction angle, wall friction
angle and; horizontal and vertical seismic
accelerations, for active conditions of earth
pressures.
MATHEMATICAL MODEL
Figure 1 shows that retaining wall rotates
about point O. At each point of wall there is a
corresponding failure plane. Fi is the resultant
Figure 2. Trial Wedge of Retaining Wall
of normal and frictional forces acting on
and Force Polygon
failure plane and is inclined at an angle of Ψi
to normal. OA is pushed into soil whereas W’𝑑 sin(θ−ψ+λ)
𝑃𝑑 = (2)
sin[90−(θ−ψ−δ)]
OB pulled outward, as shown in Figure 1.
Hence, there is limiting active and passive The pressure distribution along various
condition only at bottom and top of wall heights of wall z is obtained by
respectively. The force Fi is inclined at an differentiating Pd w.r.t z
angle – ϕ at top and + ϕ at bottom; while in-
between, values of ϕ are linearly distributed.
Dubrova assumed Coulomb’s theory (1776)
and replaced ϕ by Ψ(z), which considers (3)
variation of angle of internal friction from – ϕ Eq. (3) presents seismic active earth pressure
to + ϕ for z = 0 and z = H respectively. A distribution behind the retaining wall. Out of
single failure plane, on which various forces various wall movements, the wall movement
act, is shown in Figure2, where α is as rotation about bottom is considered, where
horizontal seismic coefficient and Pd is the Ψ is an inclination of the resultant with the
force inclined to horizontal at an angle δ. ϕz
normal, given by ψ=ϕ−
H
564
Redistribution Principal Approach for Evaluation of Seismic Active Earth Pressure behind Retaining Wall
= 0.
increases from 200 to 250, 250 to 300, 300 to 0.2
350 and 350 to 400, there is reduction in static φ = 20, δ/φ
earth pressure values by 17%, 17%, 25% and = 0.25
0.4
8% respectively. This is because as soil φ = 20, δ/φ
friction angle (ϕ) increases then backfill 0.6
= 0.5
becomes denser, thus, reducing the earth φ = 20, δ/φ
pressure. As ϕ increases from 200 to 400, 0.8
= 0.75
nature of curve changes. Similarly the results φ = 20, δ/φ
are obtained with varying kh and kv. It is seen 1 =1
from Figure3, that with increase in kh from
0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and kv = 0.5kh, the active earth Figure 3. Normalized static active earth
pressure increases. pressure distribution with depth for
different values of ϕ and wall friction
COMPARISON OF RESULTS angle, δ with kh =0.0, kv = 0.0
Figure 4 shows the typical comparison of
normalized pressure distribution obtained by
565
Maskar et al.
REFERENCES
Choudhury D and Katdare A D 2014 New
method to compute seismic active earth
pressure on retaining wall considering
seismic waves Geotechnical and
Geological Engineering 32 391 - 402
Choudhury D and Nimbalkar S 2006 Pseudo-
dynamic approach of seismic active
earth pressure behind retaining wall
Geotechnical and Geological
Engineering 24(5) 1103 - 1113
566
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Monopile foundation is used as foundation for offshore wind turbine. In the
current study, a non-linear 3D analysis of monopile foundation with an elastic plastic
soil model (Mohr-coulomb), an elastic pile material (steel) and interface elements are
used to model the pile–soil interaction using MIDAS GTS-NX finite element software
package. A define soil model represent medium dense sand and hollow steel pile
within sand subjected to large lateral loading. Analysis shows that vertical
displacement of monopile is more than lateral displacement along loading direction as
well as solid stresses also maximum in the vertical direction than horizontal or lateral.
Shear stresses is also found more compared to horizontal solid stresses in loading
direction.
Keywords: FEM; Monopile; Lateral loading; Displacement; Stresses.
METHODOLOGY
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A three-dimensional (3D) finite element
model was established in order to analyse the
behaviour of monopile and finned pile. The
computations were carried out using the
finite element program system MIDAS GTS-
NX. The sand was assumed to be a linear
elastic perfectly plastic material. A non-
associated Mohr–Coulomb constitutive
model was assumed to govern the soil
behaviour for which the material parameters
are well established in geotechnical a) b)
engineering practice. An elasto-plastic Figure 1. a) Three dimensional view and
analysis under drained conditions was used b) Top view of Monopile
to model piles with the yield of the sand,
defined by the Mohr–Coulomb model, being The pile is shown in Fig. 1, were assumed to
the upper limit to the elastic behaviour of the be linear elastic mild steel material which has
sand. In the full scale analysis, the elastic soil typical properties of Young’s modulus, E p =
properties, corresponding to medium dense 200 GPa, Poisson’s ratio, ʋ p = 0.3, and unit
sand, were assumed to be: Poisson’s ratio ʋ s weight, γ p = 78 kN/m3. The yield of steel was
= 0.33, and dry unit weight γ s = 16.5 kN/m3. not considered in this study.
The Mohr–Coulomb model had an effective
friction angle ϕ’ = 35o, Dilatancy angle Ψ = NUMERICAL MODELLING
0o and effective cohesive strength c’= 0 kPa. The three-dimensional finite element
In order to account for the variation in soil program, MIDAS GTS-NX was chosen to
properties with depth, Young’s modulus was model the pile and the sand. The boundary is
assumed to increase linearly according to a cube with sides of 22.5 times the diameter
[Peng, 2010]: of the pile and a depth 2.5 times the pile
568
Three Dimensional Computer Simulation of Laterally Loaded Monopile Foundation for Offshore Wind
Turbine
a) b)
Figure 2. Meshing of a) Monopile and b)
Sand block with monopile subjected to
lateral loading
The bottom boundary was fixed against
Figure 3. Displacement along loading
movements in all directions, whereas the
direction (For 50 MN load)
‘ground surface’ was free to move in all
directions. The vertical boundaries were
fixed against movements in the direction
normal to them.
Table 1. Properties of pile
Properties Monopile
Material Steel
Modulus of elasticity 200 GPa
Length 40m
Outer diameter 4m
Wall thickness 0.05m
80
solid stresses in vertical direction.
60
Therefore it is necessary to minimise the pile
40 head displacement in vertical as well as
horizontal direction and shear stresses.
20
0 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
0 20 40 60 80
PILE HEAD DISPLACEMENT 'Y' (% PILE
The authors wish to thank Mr. Akash Sharma
DIA.) (MIDAS R & D Centre, Navi Mumbai) for
his help with the numerical simulations.
20
Peng J R Rouainia M Clarke B G 2010 Finite
element analysis of laterally loaded fin
0 piles Computers and Structures 88
0 200 400 600 800
1239–1247.
SOLID STRESSES ('SS' MN/M3)
Subhamoy B Domenico L David M W 2013
Dynamic soil–structure interaction of
Figure 6. Load against solid stresses monopile supported wind turbines in
curve cohesive soil Dynamics and Earthquake
Engineering 49 165–180.
CONCLUSIONS
The behaviour of monopile was carried out
using a 3D finite element analysis (MIDAS
GTS-NX) to generate the pile head p–y
curves and load against solid stresses (p-ss)
curve. This p-y and p-ss curve shows that,
570
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
structure interaction [Kumar et al.]. Soil Figure.1. and Figure. 2. The concrete is
structure interaction parameters such as having modulus of elastic as 22360 x 106
stresses and displacements in both structure N/m2 also Poisson’s ratio as 0.15 and unit
and support systems (Foundation + Soil mass weight for RCC is 25kN/m3.
in contact) are depends up on relative
stiffness of superstructure, foundation system
and supporting soil mass. Thus if relative
stiffness of superstructure is taken into
consideration then the structure with regular
shape is best choice but if irregular shaped
structure is considered then structural
stiffness decrease [Hosamani and Fernandes, Figure 1.Plan of Superstructure
2015]. So it is essential to study the effect of The different vertical irregularities like
irregularity for SSI analysis. Also structural Ra=25% or Rh= 6/5, Ra=50% or Rh=3/8 and
stiffness has influence on both vertical and Ra=75% or Rh=8/3are shown in Figure. 3.
horizontal irregularity. Thus in this paper
vertical irregularity like Ra=25% or Rh= 6/5,
Ra=50% or Rh=3/8 and Ra=75% or Rh=8/3
are taken into consideration. At first all the
models are analyses in E-Tabs software for
non-interaction analysis and after this same
models are analyses for soil structure Figure 2.Elevation of Superstructure
interaction effect considering soil as elastic
in Ansys 11.0. Thus paper further describes
the behavior of such vertically irregular RC
framed structure models for soil structure
interaction effect. As the models are loaded
with gravity loads as well as with lateral
seismic loads so the parameters under
comparative study are story drift and (a) (b) (c) (d)
horizontal displacement. As outer frames are Figure 3. (a). Soil and structure for
likely to be fail so analysis of only outer Rh= 10/10 (regular building) (b). Soil and
frames are displayed. structure for Rh= 6/5 (c). Soil and
structure for Rh= 3/8 (d). Soil and
METHODOLOGY structure for Rh= 8/3
Plane 82 element is used for discreatization drifts by Ansys for story no 1 to 9 is more
of frame, footing and soil mass. Whereas as compare to ETABS but for last story
contact between footing and soil are models the results are matching. Thus there is no
by TARGE169 and CONTA172. need for comparing NIA for other cases
so directly comparison between Ansys
ANALYSIS NIA and IAE are discussed in next
The gravity loading and lateral seismic points.
loading (for zone III) are calculated and 2. After considering the effect of SSI the
shown Table1. And two analyses are carried story drift increases drastically. The
out a. Non Interaction Analysis (NIA) and b. variation of about 3 mm is found without
Interaction Analysis considering soil mass as irregularity.
Elastic (IAE). 3. When irregularity is considered for Rh
6/5,3/8 and 8/3 it has been observed that
Table 1. Loading data
Rh=6/5 is worst case.
UDL Lateral Loads
Story on Also from Figure 6 (graph) it has been
Ra Ra 25 Ra 50 Ra 75
No beams 0% % % % observed that,
kN/m kN kN kN kN 1. In ETABS and ANSYS the results for
11 17.025 51.8 34.21 40.36 42.34 horizontal displacement for NIA
10 28.75 51.77 34.16 40.33 42.3 (Rh=10/10) is within 30 mm. So all the
9 28.75 51.49 33.63 40.02 42
8 28.75 50.7 32.19 39.16 41.19
cases are safe as per IS 1893 criteria that
7 28.75 49.16 29.35 37.48 39.94 displacement should not be more than
6 28.75 46.61 25.08 34.71 37.86 0.004 x height of structure i.e. = 126 mm.
5 28.75 42.81 23.01 30.56 34.76 2. But after considering effect of SSI the
4 28.75 37.49 20.12 19.81 30.43
horizontal displacement increases and
3 28.75 30.41 16.27 17.39 19.74
2 28.75 21.31 11.32 12.22 17.27 hence effect is most important.
1 18.63 9.96 5.14 5.75 8.02 3. Also IAE model Rh=10/10 shows
maximum horizontal displacement of
RESULT AND DISCUSSION about 130 mm which is more than
permissible so structure may get fail.
After applying all above mentioned loads the 4. After considering irregularity, the results
analysis is carried out on all models using E- for Rh= 6/5 case is worst.
Tabs for NIA and Ansys 11.0 for both NIA
and IAE and results for displacements are
displayed. The following Figure 4 shows the
results for Ansys. So Comparison is done
(story drift and horizontal displacement) for
E-Tabs NIA with ANSYS NIA analysis and
ANSYS NIA with ANSYS IAE and results
are displayed in the form of graphs.Thus
from Figure 5 (graph) it has been observed
that: (a) NIA Ansys (b) IAE Ansys
Displacements Displacements (Rh
1. NIA comparison for Rh 10/10 for =10/10)
ETABS and ANSYS shows that the story
573
Dhadse and Mohod
CONCLUSION REFERENCES
1. After considering the effect of SSI the
Pavan Kumar M Naidu G T and Ashok
parameter like story drift and horizontal
Kumar T Effect of soil- structure
displacement increases. interaction on high rise R.C. regular
2. ETABS and ANSYS (NIA) show almost frame structure with irregular bays
same variation so for more accuracy subjected to seismic load IJRET:
ANSYS is best option. International
3. As Structural rigidity for Rh= 6/5 is least Puneet Sharma Ankit and Ismit Pal Singh
so the structure shows worst results for 2014 Soil Structure Interaction Effect on
an Asymmetrical R.C. building with
both story drift and horizontal
shear walls IOSR Journal of
displacement. Mechanical and Civil Engineering
4. Also as irregularity changes there is (IOSR-JMCE) e-ISSN: 2278-1684
drastic change in response of building so ISSN: 2320-334X 11(3) 45-56
at geometric discontinuity locations the Sachin Hosamani Fernandes R J 2015 Soil
structure may get fail hence SSI analysis structure interaction of R.C. framed
is must. irregular building with shear walls
International Research Journal of
Engineering and Technology (IRJET)
2(4)
574
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The numerical modeling of the embankment was constructed using copper
slag –soil mix (20% soil and 80% copper slag)on the soft sub soil. The behavior of the
embankment was analyzed using computational geomechanics tool finite element method
based software ‘Plaxis 3D’. Study of the different height embankment was carried out
using with and without geotextile and geocell of various tensile strength. The suitability
was determined based on the safety and displacement criteria.The result of this study
shows that copper slag-soil mixembankment is stable up to 3m height with the addition of
geotextile. Copper slag-soil mix embankment of 4 m height is stable with the addition of
geotextile and geocell.
Keywords: Numerical modeling; Copper slag; Plaxis 3D
The properties of foundation soil and property of the geotextile and geocell are
embankment fill material are given in the given in the Table 2.
Table 1. Embankment fill is modeled using
the Mohr coulomb soil. The foundation soil RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
is modeled as soft soil. Analysis of the geotextile reinforced
Table 1: Properties of foundation soil and embankment was performed by determining
embankment fill material the factor of safety with sequentially modified
reinforcement until the target factor of safety
Subsoil Clay 1 Clay 2 Copper Unit is achieved. Generally, a value of 1.5 for the
properties slag-soil
mix factor of safety with respect to strength is
Type of Undrain Undraine Drained - acceptable for the design of stable slope.For
behavior ed A dA unreinforced embankment of 3m, 4m, 5m
ϒ unsat 16.6 16.6 23.3 kN/m3 height has a factor of safety of 1.31,1.20,1.07
ϒ sat 17.31 17.31 25 kN/m3 respectively, and for reinforced embankment
Kx 0.04752 0.04752 7.128 m/day shown in Table.3 The deformed mesh of
Ky 0.04752 0.04752 7.128 m/day embankments with and without
Lamda (λ) .05 .05 - kN/m2 reinforcements are show in Figure1.
Kappa (κ) .01 .01 - -
Elastic - - 3000 kN/m2
modulus
(E)
Poison’s - - .27 -
ratio
C 24 16 11 kN/m2
(a)
ф 1 1 38 Degre
e
ψ 0 0 0 Degre
e
Material Soft Soft Soil Mohr - -
model Soil Coulum
b
(b)
Table 2 : Properties of Geotextile and
Geocell
Parameter Name Geotextile Geocell Unit
Material Model Elastic Elastic -
model
Elastic EA 50-1500 500 kN/m
stiffness
Two types of reinforcing material were used
in this study one is geotextile and the other (c)
one is geocell. Geotextile was placed between Figure 1: Deformed mesh of a)
in two layers, one was in between the embankment of 4m height without
embankment and other layer in the middle of geotextile b) embankment of 4m height
the embankment. Geocell was placed in the with geotextile c) embankment of 4m
soft soil near to the ground .The material height with geotextile and geocell
576
Numerical Modeling of Reinforced Copper Slag Embankment Using Plaxis 3D
Table 3 : Factor of safety and displacement values of different height embankment with
varying geotextile property
________________________________
REFERENCE
Bergado D.T and Teerawattanasuk C 2008
2D and 3D numerical simulations of
reinforced embankments on soft
578
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Soil E value is one of the most important soil property used in design of
raft foundations. Numerous correlations are available in literature to determine soil E
values from field tests. These correlations give a wide range of soil E values and it is
not clear which correlation one should use for design. This is one of the main reasons
different practitioners arrive at different value of raft settlements and ground bearing
capacities. This study compares the calculated soil E values from various large scale
footing load tests with Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N values from adjacent
boreholes in order to develop a reliable correlation between the two. Additional
footing load tests reported in literature have also been incorporated and considered
while developing the correlation. Stress dependency of soil E value is also considered.
The correlation established has also been compared with numerous existing
established published correlations.
Keywords: Soil Deformation Modulus, SPT N value, Footing Load Test.
of the shear failure equations. Similar Leonards G A and Frost J F 1988 Settlement
questions regarding validity were raised of shallow foundations on granular
in the study of 5 footing load tests soils. Journal of Geotechnical
conducted by FHWA with worldwide Engineering 114(7) 791-809.
participation in interpretation.
3. The lower bound curve is almost same as
the correlation provide Japanese design
standards (E = 260N). The above
equation is valid only up to allowable
bearing capacity.
REFERENCES
Haider M. Abdul Hussein Effects of Flexural
Rigidity and Soil modulus on the linear
static analysis of raft foundations.
Daniel Thangaraj and Ilamparuthi K
Interaction Analysis of Soil-Raft-Frame
– A Parametric Study
Daniel Thangaraj and Ilamparuthi K
Interaction Analysis of MAT
Foundation and Space Frame for the
Non Linear behaviour of Soil
Meyerhoff G G 1947 Settlement analysis of
building frames.
Wardle L J and Frazier R A 975 Methods for
raft foundation design including soil
structure interaction Perth Australia
Balls S C James S and Notch 1984 Computer
analysis and design of mat foundations.
R K Bhandari and A R K Rao 1977 concept
of rigidity on foundation analysis,.
Brahma P Mukherjee S 2010 A realistic way
to obtain equivalent Young’s modulus
of layered soil Indian geotechnical
conference Bombay India 305–308.
Anagnostopoulos A et al. 2003 Empirical
correlations of soil parameters based on
Cone Penetration Tests (CPT) for Greek
soils Geotechnical & Geological
Engineering 21(4) 377-387.
Burland J B and Burbidge M C 1985
Settlement of foundations on sand and
gravel Proc., Institution of Civil
Engineers Part I 78(6) 1325-1381
581
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents a new variant of stochastic Galerkin approach for the
solution of stochastic heat conduction problem. The proposed approach, referred to
here as Galerkin based polynomial correlated function expansion (G-PCFE), utilizes
polynomial correlated function expansion (PCFE) to represent the unknown stochastic
response and Galerkin projection to decompose the stochastic differential equation
into a set of coupled differential equations. The coupled set of partial differential
equations obtained is solved using finite difference method and homotopy algorithm
(HA). A new weight matrix, to be used alongside HA, has also been proposed. The
proposed weight matrix is formulated based on the hierarchical orthogonality of the
component functions, and describes an additional condition to be satisfied by HA. The
proposed approach has been utilized for solving the stochastic heat conduction
problem. The conductivity parameter is considered to be a random and modelled as a
random process. Karhunen-Loeve expansion is utilized to discretize the random
process into number of random variables. Results obtained have been benchmarked
against Monte Carlo simulation results. It is observed that the proposed approach
outperforms the conventional stochastic Galerkin approach both in terms of accuracy
and efficiency.
Keywords: heat conduction; PCFE; stochastic Galerkin; random process.
linear set of equations by using the finite having spatial randomness (i.e., random
difference method and solved using a process) and characterised by its mean and
homotopy algorithm (HA). HA is a novel covariance function
regression tool for determining the unknown
α = 10, Cα ( x1 , x2 ) = exp ( − x1 − x2 ) ,
coefficients of an underdetermined system (2)
(i.e. number of unknown coefficients is more x1 , x2 ∈ [ −1,1]
than the number of equations). HA
The goal is to determine the function
determines the unknown coefficients by
minimizing the least squared error and u ( t , x, ω ) satisfying Eq. (1)
considering an additional condition defined
PROPOSED APPROACH
in terms of an objective function. In this
work, the hierarchical orthogonality of the = Let, i ( i1 , i2 , , iN ) ∈ N0 be a multi-index
component functions is considered to be that with i = i1 + i2 + + iN , and let N ≥ 0 be an
additional criteria.
integer. Now considering x = ( x1 , x2 , , xN )
The proposed approach has been utilized for
solving the stochastic head conduction to be the random inputs, we express the
problem. The conductivity parameter has response of interest g ( x ) as a series having
been considered to be uncertain and finite number of terms as (Chakraborty &
modelled as a random field. Karhunen-Loeve Chowdhury, 2014, 2015b)
expansion is utilized to discretize the random N
field into random variables. A convergence g ( x ) = ∑ gi ( xi ) (3)
i =0
study is performed to determine the optimal
number of random variables required. Once Definition 1: The univariate terms in
the optimal number of random variables is Equation (3) are termed as first order
determined, the proposed approach is utilized component functions. Similarly, the bivariate
to determine the mean and standard deviation terms, denoting cooperative effect of two
of the heat at different time instances. Results terms acting together, are termed as second
obtained have been validated against MCS order component function.
solution. It is found that the proposed
approach yields accurate and efficient results. Assume two subspaces R and B in Hilbert
models of PCB are created where the MSC.NASTRAN as solver for bare PCB and
components geometry is neglected. The PCB with components. Finite Element model
component effects are included by increasing consists of 16272 quadrilateral shell elements
the Young's modulus and density of the PCB with appropriate thickness and 10 rigid
FE model, so it effectively behaves as if elements to simulate fixed boundary
components were present. Sensitivity condition. Details of the PCB are
analysis of PCB finite element models was summarized in Table 1. Fixed /clamped
carried out by Amy et al. (2009). They boundary conditions are applied at nine
determined the factors of safety by using locations (PCB mounting locations) by
different simplification methods of modeling arresting six degrees of freedom for the
the PCB. nodes on the boundary of holes in PCB as
shown in Figure 1.
Dynamic responses such as accelerations,
strains are to be closely monitored and Table 1. Material Properties
controlled to achieve test results which are Parameter Value
consistent and predict the structural behavior
in reality [Jing-en Luan 2007]. In order to PCB size 250×200×2.1 mm
design electronic packaging systems for Mass of Bare PCB 208.4 gm
safety and standards criterion, the accurate Mass of PCB with 380 gm
modeling of components influence on the components (=208.4+171.6)
multi-layered PCB becomes critical and Young’s modulus of
complex due to various reasons. Numerical Bare PCB 20 GPa
model using finite elements developed to
simulate the mechanical behavior of PCB Young’s modulus of
and physical tests were conducted to validate PCB with 34 GPa
the impact performance [Yuqi Wang 2006]. components
Poisson’s ratio 0.12
In this paper, vibration analysis of a typical
PCB used for space applications is carried Boundary Condition Fixed/clamped
out. The dynamic characteristics of a PCB
are determined using FEM and
experimentally. The dynamic characteristics
include natural frequencies, mode shapes and
frequency response functions (FRF). The
analysis is done for two cases: a bare PCB
(PCB without components) and PCB with
components. The analysis results are
validated by vibration tests on PCB.
Parametric study is carried out to determine
the effect of different parameters such as Figure 1: FE Model
PCB thickness and boundary conditions on
the dynamic characteristics of the PCB. Normal mode analyses were conducted on
FE model to extract first two fundamental
FE SIMULATION MODEL natural frequencies for bare PCB as well as
PCB with components. The calculated first
In this study, a six-layer PCB used for space three natural frequencies are 322.7 Hz, 360.1
applications is considered. The PCB is Hz, 377.1 Hz and 240.3 Hz, 268.2 Hz, 280.8
modelled as isotropic plate with equivalent Hz for bare PCB and component PCB
material properties such as Young’s modulus, respectively. Mode shapes corresponding to
Poisson’s ratio and mass density. FEA these frequencies are given in Figure 2 to
simulations of PCB dynamics are made using Figure 5.
HYPERMESH V11.0 as pre-processor and
587
Dynamic Characteristics of Printed Circuit Boards: A Parametric Study
588
Jayaraman et al.
compared in Table 4. The simulation and test different parameters such as PCB thickness
results of bare PCB and that of PCB with and boundary conditions on the dynamic
components are matching well within the characteristics of a PCB. The work can be
acceptable limits. The FRFs for the third extended for random vibration and shock
natural frequency for two cases are compared analysis of the PCB.
in Table 5. Effect of thickness of PCB is
summarized in Table 6. REFERENCES
Amy R A 2009 Sensitivity analysis of
Table 3. Comparison of Fundamental
Frequencies for Bare PCB simplified Printed Circuit Board finite
element models. Microelectronics
Frequency Simulation Test % Reliability 49 791-799.
(Hz) Results Results Difference
1 322.7 311 -3.76 Jing-en Luan 2007 Dynamic responses and
2 360.1 351 -2.53 solder joint reliability under board level
3 377.1 379 0.5 drop test. Microelectronics Reliability
47 450-460.
Table 4. Comparison of Fundamental
Frequencies for component PCB Steinberg D S 2000 Vibration Analysis for
Electronic Equipment. 3rd ed. New
Frequency Simulation Test %
(Hz) Results Results Difference York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
1 240.3 236.0 -1.79 Yuqi Wang and K H 2006 Modelling and
2 268.2 255.0 -4.92 simulation for a drop-impact analysis of
3 280.8 285.0 1.50 multi-layered printed circuit boards.
Microelectronics Reliability 46 558-
Table 5. Comparison of FRFs
for third natural frequency 573.
589
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
591
Comparison of flow and Heat Transfer Characteristics in Triangular and Sinusoidal shaped Wavy
Channels
592
Harikrishnan and Tiwari
CONCLUSIONS
Flow and heat transfer characteristics of
triangular and sinusoidal shaped wavy
channels have been studied for same
geometric parameters and Re. The sinusoidal
geometry of wavy channel is associated with
higher heat transfer and lower value of
friction factor as compared to triangular
geometry. The smoothness of wall geometry
Figure 4. Module wise comparison of affects the size and strength of the
friction factor for triangular and sinusoidal recirculation region and behaviour of heat
shaped wavy channels at Re = 400. transfer. Consequently, the effect of
recirculation with surface curvature needs to
Heat Transfer be examined thoroughly to understand the
Figure.5 shows a comparison of temperature physics of the flow in wavy channels.
contours for triangular and sinusoidal wavy
channels at Re = 400. REFERENCES
Bahaidarah H M S and Anand N K 2005
Numerical study of heat and momentum
transfer in channels with wavy walls
Numerical Heat Transfer Part A 47
417-439
Goldstein J L and Sparrow E M 1977 Heat
and mass transfer characteristics for
flow in corrugated wall channel ASME
Journal of Heat Transfer 99 187-195
Ramgadia A G and Saha A K 2013
Numerical study of fully developed
Figure 5. Temperature contour for flow and heat transfer in wavy passage
triangular and sinusoidal configurations International Journal of Thermal
of wavy channel for Re = 400. Sciences 67 152-166
Ramgadia A G and Saha A K 2014
Characteristics of fully developed flow
and heat transfer in channels with
varying wall geometry ASME Journal
of Heat Transfer 136 021703-1 -
021703-15
Wang G and Vanka S P 1995 Convective
heat transfer in wavy Passage
Numerical Heat Transfer Part A
International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer 38 3219-3230
SIMULATION MODEL OR
EXPERIMENTAL SETUP
An innovative model of v-through mirrors
and tubes type solar water collector is tested.
The V-shaped mirrors with higher reflective
coefficient are used to increase the heat Figure1: Simulation Model or
inside the setup. The copper tubes are Experimental Setup
indirectly heated by solar energy due to the The total solar thermal energy gain can be
reflection of solar radiation through mirrors. calculated by total heat gained by water due
The copper tubing and SWE walls covered to temperature difference at inlet and outlet;
with 40 mm thermocol insulating material. it can be evaluated as
Direct and diffused solar radiation heats up Q c = m . Cp( To – Ti )
the outside surface of the tubes and the solar Where m. is the mass flow rate kg/s, Cp is the
radiation are absorbed by copper material of specific heat in J/(kg K), T o isoutlet
tube. The total area of the V-through solar temperature and T i is inlet temperature in K
flat plate collector system is about 1 m2 and of fluid
vertical height, width and length are 100mm, The thermal efficiency of v- through solar
650mm, 1000mm respectively. The solar water collector is evaluated by the ratio of
water heater body is divided into four heat gained by water to the total solar
sections, each section consisted of 2 tubes radiation that is
with 0.8 m long, 1.5 inch diameter and tubes 𝑄𝑐
are attached together as shown in figure (1). 𝜂𝑐 =
𝑆. 𝐴𝐶
The study is performed at different angles in Where 𝜂𝑐 shows the total thermal efficiency,
v-shaped assembly of mirrors. A c total glass area of solar collector in m2, S
solar irradiance in W/m2.
DATA EVALUATION
The heat load calculation is taken from the
The inlet of water considered as pressure
temperature difference at water outlet and
inlet which is calculated from the height of
tank efficiency and tank capacity.
tank as shown in Figure 1.
595
Thermal Behaviour Analysis of Mirror V-Through Flat Plate Solar Water Collector: An Experimental
and CFD Based Study
596
Jangid et al.
• LC-Left corner
• LM-Left middle g i ( x + ∆x, t + ∆t ) = g i ( x, t )[1 − ω s ]
(4)
• M- Middle + ω s g k ( x, t )
eq
• RM-Right middle
599
Effect of Location of Heat Source and Rayleigh Number on Natural Convection in a Square Cavity using
Thermal Lattice Boltzmann Method
The collision operators for momentum and different locations. It is noticed that the
energy distribution functions are calculated average Nusselt number is maximum at
by using the Chapman-Enskog expansion corner locations of heat source and as the
whereas the equilibrium distribution function heat source moves towards the middle it
is approximated as initially decreases and then increases.
c .u 1 (ci .u) 2 1 u 2
= wi ρ ( x, t ) 1 + i 2 + −
eq
fi (5) 8
cs 2 cs 4 2 c s 2
Left corner
c .u 7
Left middle
g i = wiθ ( x, t ) 1 + i 2
eq Middle
(6)
c s
Right corner
6
The collision step is described by eq. 3,4 and
5
the streaming step is performed to transfer
the new densities to a new location. The 4
buoyancy force is approximated by
Boussinesq approximation and the force 3
0.5
of 100×100 is found to be sufficiently 1 0
0.5
0.8 -1
-3
0.5 0 -1 -4
transition regime. 0.6
-5
-6
-3 -4
Y
-1
0
-5
-3
0.4 .5
EFFECT OF LOCATION OF HEAT -6
-1
-6 -6
-4
-5
-4
SOURCE 0.2 -3
-3
-1
-1
0
0
2
heat transfer. For maximum heat transfer the
-2
-4
4
0.8
-6 heat source should be located at the corners
-2
6
2
for the range of Rayleigh from 103 to 105.
-4
4
0
0.6
2
0
6
Y
-2
-6
-4
REFERENCES
4
0.4
-6
-2
0
0
0.2
0
-2
-2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6
0
0.8 1
conditions on natural convection flows
X
within a square cavity International
Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer
(b) Middle 4923.
Figure 3: Streamlines for(a) LC (b) M De Vahl Davis G 1983 Natural convection of
at Rayleigh number 104 air in a square cavity: a bench mark
numerical solution International
Table 1:Size of circulation zone Journal for Numerical Methods in
contributing to heat transfer Fluids 3(3) 249-264.
Configuration Area Khalil Khanafer Abdalla Al Amiri Joe Bul
2015 Laminar natural convection heat
L 0.8 transfer in a differentially heated cavity
with a thin porous fin attached to the
LC 0.67
hot wall International Journal of Heat
M 1 and Mass Transfer 87 59-70.
601
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
PROBLEM STATEMENT
Computational domain of size210 mm × 112
mm × 210 mm (Li et al. 2005) is modelled as
shown in Fig. 1. The heat sink consists of
6×6 array of fins. The domain has been
meshed using ANSYS ICEM CFD as shown
in Fig. 2.
REFERENCES
Li H Y Chen K Y 2005 Thermal-
characteristics of pin-fin heat sinks
cooled by impinging jet Journal of
Enhanced Heat transfer 12(2) 189–201.
Ledezma G Morega A M Bejan A
1996Optimal spacing between pin fins
with impinging flow J. Heat Trans.118
570-577.
Li H Y Chen K Y Chiang M H 2009
Thermal-fluid characteristics of plate-fin
heat sinks cooled by impingement jet
Energy conservation and management
50 2738-2746.
Yang Y T Peng H S 2008Numerical study of
pin-fin heat sink with un-uniform fin
height design Int. J. Heat and Mass
Trans. 51 4788-4796.
604
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present study different solid complex geometries with discretely
heated bottom wall have been considered to study temperature distribution for better
insight of thermal transport phenomena. An in-house numerical code has been
developed for the analysis of heat transport in these solid complex geometries.
Initially grid has been developed for different complex geometries. Later the
generated grid has been imported and the integral forms of the governing equations
have been discretized using collocated grid based finite-volume method. A collocated
grid based finite volume approach has been used due to i) flexibility in
accommodating irregular shapes of the domain ii) flexibility of grid distribution and
iii) yields accurate and conservative approximations. The governing equations are
solved using Gauss- Seidel iterative method. The present numerical scheme has been
rigorously validated for temperature distribution in complex domains with
commercial CFD code Ansys-fluent. Numerical results are presented in terms of
isotherms and thermal transport in 2D solid complex geometries with discretely
heated bottom wall is discussed.
Keywords: Collocated Grid; Complex Geometry; Finite Volume Method;
Isotherms;
programming and gives more accurate results
Γ 1
1
)
literature, it may be noted that for the better where
insight of heat transport in complex
geometries, several numerical methodologies
2
( 2
) ( 2
) (
2 2
) (
bno = d e + d w φne − d w + d n φnw − d e + d s φse − d w + d s φsw
2 2 2
)
were adopted and validated. In these studies the term b no arises due to non-orthogonality
grid was generated for a specific domain and of the grid and it vanishes whenever the grid
becomes orthogonal. The corner values are
later numerical analysis was performed. But
approximated using the four surrounding
in the present study a generalized code is nodal values. For instance, the north-east
developed to read mesh data for complex corner value is obtained as
domains and a collocated grid based Finite
1
Volume Method (FVM) has been employed φne= (φN + φE + φP + φNE ) (5)
4
for the analysis of thermal transport in
Similarly, ϕ nw , ϕ se and ϕ sw can be obtained.
complex domains.
METHOD OF SOLUTION
PROBLEM DEFINITION AND
The governing equations are discretized
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
using non- orthogonal domains by the finite-
Various computational solid domains and volume method. Arbitrary quadrilateral
their respective boundary conditions are meshes are chosen and numerical work has
shown in Fig. 1(a)–(e). The integral form of been carried out for complex domains.
governing equation employed for the heat Temperature values are defined at the same
transport in complex solid domains can be set of grid points which are located at the
given as centres of the cells known as a collocated
∂ ∂φ ∂ ∂φ grid arrangement. Collocated grid
∫ ∂x ∂x
∆V
Γ dx dy + ∫ ∂y ∂y
∆V
Γ dx dy = 0 (1) arrangement is chosen because the terms in
the governing equations are essentially
The expression for diffusive flux through the
east face can be obtained in terms of the identical between the different balance
projected areas and the neighbouring node equations and hence, the number of
values of ϕ can be evaluated as: coefficients that must be computed and
stored is minimized and programming is
Γ e Aey { Aey1 (φE − φP ) + Aey2 (φne − φse )}
1
simplified and exported in neutral file format.
Ve
606
Visualization of Thermal Transport inDiscretely Heated 2D Complex Solid Geometries
(d) (e)
Figure 1.Schematic diagram of the computational solid domains with the boundary
conditions
(d) (e)
Figure 3. Isotherms for different complex domains
607
Tinnaluri and Devanuri
A code has been developed to read the mesh methodology can be adopted for the analysis
from neutral file of gambit. This code acts as of thermo hydraulics in complex domains.
the link between the present in-house finite
volume numerical code and meshing REFERENCES
software. Terminated the solution the
convergence criterion is reached 10-6. Jaya Krishna D Basak T and Das S K 2008
Numerical study of lid-driven flow in
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION orthogonal and skewed porous cavity
Commun Numer Meth Engg 24 815–831
Grid generation is a crucial part of numerical
solution. Numerical code has been developed Harlow F H and Welch J E 1965 Numerical
to read the mesh from gambit and linked to Calculation of Time – Dependent
Viscous Incompressible Flow of fluid
the code developed for the visualization of with Free Surface Phys Fluids 82 182-
thermal transport. The constraint of the 2189
developed code is limited to quadrilateral
Maliska C R and Raithby G D1984 A
grid. Grid employed for considered complex method for computing three dimensional
domains in Fig.1 are (a) non uniform grid flows using non- orthogonal boundary –
(60×80), (b) non uniform grid (40×70), (c) fitted coordinates Int J Numer Methods
non uniform grid (50×60), (d) uniform grid Fluids 4 518-537
(80×80) and (e) uniform grid (80X80). The Peric M Kessler R and Schenerer G
validity of the present numerical 1988Comparison of finite volume
methodology is carried out by comparing numerical methods with staggered and
with commercial CFD code Ansys Fluent. collocated grids Computers and Fluids 16
The Comparison of isotherms for the 389-403
geometry is shown in Fig. 2, it is observed Shyy W Tong S S and Correa S M 1985
that the present numerical methodology Numerical recirculation flow calculation
agrees very well with commercial CFD code using a body – fitted coordination
systems Numer Heat Transfer 8 99-113
Ansys Fluent. The isotherms obtained by
solving energy transport equation for the Thompson J F Warsi Z U A and Mastin C W
complex geometries are shown in Fig. 3 1982 Boundary – fitted coordinate
systems for numerical solution of partial
differential equations – A review Journal
CONCLUSIONS
of Comput Physics 47 1-108
A numerical code has been developed to read Ghosh Roy chowdhury D Das S K and
the mesh from Gambit and linked to the Sundararajan T 1999An efficient solution
collocated grid based Finite volume solver method for incompressible N‐S equations
for visualization of thermal transport. The using non‐orthogonal collocated grid
governing equations are written in Cartesian International Journal for numerical
coordinate system and are discritised in the methods in engineering 45 741-763
physical domain. Results are presented in Narasimha Suri T and Jaya Krishna D 2015
terms of isotherms and mid plane A Collocated grid based finite volume
temperature profile for the considered approach for the visualization of heat
transport in 2D complex geometries
geometries. The results thus obtained are
Procedia Engineering 127 79-86
rigorously validated with commercial CFD
code Ansys Fluent Based on the study, it may
be noted that the present numerical
608
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A low Mach number formulation has been presented for the numerical
simulation of natural convection including radiative heat transfer in a cavity for large
temperature differences. Density variations arising due to large temperature
differences are tackled separately using both Boussinesq approximation and low
Mach number formulation in combination with a pressure based approach. Further a
detailed study of the inaccuracies arising due to the incompressible treatment of quasi-
incompressible flows with radiative heat transfer effects is presented. (FVM) is used
for the discretization of governing flow, energy and radiative transfer equation (RTE).
From the series of numerical experiments it is shown that Boussinesq approximation
gives inaccurate results particularly at large temperature differences, thus depicting
the supremacy of low Mach number algorithm for simulating natural convection with
radiative heat transfer in enclosures at large temperature difference.
Keywords: Finite volume method; Eulerian –Eulerian two fluid model; Drag
force; Particle volume fraction.
small. Few researchers have considered 1. Initialize all variables and all the other
compressibility effects for solving non- parameters to their initial conditions.
Boussinesq convection with radiation. Kumar
and Eswaran (2010) studied natural convection 2. Solve RTE to obtain intensity
with radiation in a 3-D cavity by using a ∂I ( s ) σ
variable density approach at significantly large
∂ s
=
− β I + κ Ib + s
4π ∫ I ( s ) Φ ( s ,s ) dΩ
4π
i i i
610
Numerical Simulation of Natural Convection with Radiative Heat Transfer in a Cavity
temperature 𝑇ℎ > 𝑇𝑐 greater than wall adiabatic and initial temperature of the
temperature. medium is 600 K and hot and cold vertical
walls are at 400 K and 800 K respectively. All
the walls are having emissivity ℰ𝑤 =1.0. The
Rayleigh number is 5 ×106 , Prandtl number
0.71 and Planck number 0.02. The results are
compared with the compressible solutions of
Darbandi and Abrar. (2014).
612
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Lattice Boltzmann simulations were conducted for the free convective flow
of a low-Prandtl number (Pr=0.0321) fluid with internal heat generation in a square
enclosure having isothermal side walls and adiabatic top and bottom walls. The
problem of free convection with volumetric heat source has represented itself in
connection with advanced engineering applications, such as water-cooled lithium–
lead breeder blankets for nuclear fusion reactors. A single relaxation time (SRT)
lattice Boltzmann method (LBM) was employed and a D2Q9 model was used to
simulate the flow field. The energy equation has been solved explicitly using Lax-
Wendroff method on the same lattice. Results have been obtained for laminar flows
for Rayleigh numbers ranging from 104 to 109. Steady state solution was obtained
under laminar flow condition. Flow and temperature fields in terms of stream function
and isotherms in the enclosure were predicted for all these cases. Nusselt number
values on side boundaries were obtained from the analysis.
Keywords: Heat generation; Low Prandtl number; LBM; free convection.
using the lattice Boltzmann method (LBM) and all other properties were assumed to be
in present work. In the last few years constant. The Rayleigh numbers was defined
significant work has been done using the as Ra = ρ 2C p g β QH 5 / k 2 µ . Where Q
LBM for simulation of various engineering
represents the rate of internal heat generation
and fundamental research problems in fluid
per unit volume and g is gravitational
flow and heat transfer. LBM describes the
acceleration. Computations have been
fluid behaviour in a mesoscopic model
performed for various Rayleigh numbers
whereas conventional CFD tools model the
ranging from 103 to 109characterizing heat
macroscopic fluid properties. LBM lies in
generation. The fluid properties considered in
between the microscopic and the
the computation are fluid density ( ρ )
macroscopic levels by modelling the fluid
=9465.0 kg/m3, viscosity ( µ ) =0.0022375
behaviour with the evolution of averaged
distributions of particles. The complex kg/m-s, thermal conductivity ( k ) =12.70
microscopic fluid behaviour of an individual W/m-K, coefficient of thermal expansion( β )
molecule is not modeled, instead distribution =0.000161 and specific heat ( C p ) =182.8
functions are used which results in ease in J/kg-K. The side walls were maintained at
modelling and accurate prediction of the 550 K in all the calculations. It was assumed
macroscopic behaviour. This method is that the fluid is Newtonian and
second-order-accurate in both space and time incompressible, the flow is laminar, and the
[Chen and Doolen, 1998]. Since the effect of viscous dissipation is negligible.
distribution function originated from The gravity acts in the vertical direction and
microscopic theory, LBM has many of the fluid density variations are neglected except
intrinsic advantages of molecular dynamics in the buoyancy term, and radiation heat
and kinetic theories, its evolution rules are transfer is negligible.
linear and local thus making the method
Adiabatic Top Wall
simpler and faster. In the present study an
LBM simulation has been carried out for Q
laminar natural convection flow in a
differentially heated square enclosure with a H Isothermal g
Isothermal
heat generating fluid of low-Prandtl number Wall Wall
enclosure.
Figure 1. Problem definition along with
The geometry of the enclosure considered for boundary conditions.
the analysis is depicted in figure 1. The
enclosure side length is H and the left and
NUMERICAL DETAILS
right walls are maintained at constant
For the present computation a D2Q9 lattice
temperature Ta . The top and bottom walls are
has been chosen, where 2 represents the
under no-slip, adiabatic boundary conditions. spatial dimension and 9 represents the
The variation in density of liquid metal was number of velocities in the truncated velocity
modeled with Bossinesque approximation
614
LBM Simulation of Free Convection in An Enclosure Containing Heat Generating Low-Pr Fluid
space. The D2Q9 lattice has the geometry of It is clear that the present simulation results
a regular Cartesian grid. Energy conservation are in good agreement with published
equation has been solved explicitly on the literature. Figure 3 show the isotherms for
same lattice. The fluid dynamics part (mass various values of Rayleigh numbers for the
and momentum evolution) is represented by configuration considered in the present work.
LBM while energy evolution is determined
by additional energy conservation equation.
Flow and energy evaluation are coupled
through body force term in LBM. This
approach provides much improved numerical
stability and has been used widely by many
researchers (Zhou et al., 2004).The scalar
transport equation has been solved explicitly
using Lax-Wendroff method on the same
lattice.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION (a). Ra =104
Further the present simulation was validated
against the results available from
Arcidiacono et al., (2001) for the free
convective flow of a low-Prandtl number
fluid with internal heat generation in a square
enclosure at Grashof number( Gr = Ra / Pr )
=107 and Prandtl number (Pr) =0.0321.
Figure 2 shows a comparison of streamlines
and isotherms of Arcidiacono et al., (2001)
with present work.
(b). Ra =105
(c). Ra =106
Figure 3. Isotherms for different Rayleigh
number.
(b). Streams lines (left) and isotherms The temperature of the fluid in the enclosure
(right) present work increases due to the increase of the internal
Figure 2. Comparison of streams lines heat generation. Higher value of heat
and isotherms with literature. generation causes a very high fluid
615
Gera and Singh
CONCLUSION
Heat transfer by natural convection in a
square enclosure with uniform internal heat
generation has been studied numerically
using LBM. The present method based on
LBM along with suitable boundary
conditions provides reliable results.
REFERENCES
Arcidiacono S Piazza I D and Ciofalo M
2001 Low-Prandtl number natural
convection in volumetrically heated
rectangular enclosures II Square cavity
AR=1Int J Heat and Mass Transf 44
537-550.
Baker J L Faw E F and Kulacki F A 1976
Post-accident heat removal—Part I: Heat
transfer within an internally heated, non-
boiling liquid layer Nuclear Science &
Engineering 61 222–230.
Chen S and Doolen G D 1998 Lattice
Boltzmann method for fluid flows Annu
Rev Fluid Mech 30 329–364.
Zhou Y Zhang R Staroselsky I and Chen H
2004 Numerical simulation of laminar
and turbulent buoyancy-driven flows
using a lattice Boltzmann based
algorithm International Journal of Heat
and Mass Transfer 47 4869–4879
616
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present study, laminar natural convection in a top open rectangular
vertical cavity mounted with three electronic components is studied. The left wall of
the cavity is a substrate which is surface mounted with three heated electronic
components. In this study, the heat transfer is examined for three wall removal cases:
(i) when bottom wall is removed, (ii) when right wall is removed and (iii) when both
the walls are removed. This study provides an estimate of how much heat transfer is
restricted by the bottom and right walls. The governing equations are solved using
Finite Volume Method (FVM) based solver. The convection is analysed using stream
function and temperature contours. Heat transfer is examined to find the effect of the
individual walls on temperatures in the cavity as wall as on the electronic
components. All he three wall removal cases shows better thermal performance than
the no wall removal case. The temperatures of the components are found to drop
highest when the bottom wall is removed.
Key words: Natural convection; Cooling of electronic; Open cavity; Thermal design
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Figure 1: Schematic of physical system
The boundary conditions are set in the
∂U ∂V
Continuity + =
0 FLUENT are as following. No slip and no
∂X ∂Y penetration condition is applied at all walls.
x -momentum At the top opening of the cavity, pressure-
∂U ∂U ∂P ∂ 2U ∂ 2U outlet condition is applied with back flow at
U +V =− + Pr 2 + 2 ambient temperature. All cavity walls,
∂X ∂Y ∂X ∂X ∂Y
including backside of the substrate, are
y-momentum specified with adiabatic condition. The top
∂V ∂V ∂P ∂ 2V ∂ 2V and bottom walls of the substrate are also
U +V =− + Pr 2 + 2
∂X ∂Y ∂Y ∂X ∂Y specified with adiabatic condition. The
heaters are specified with uniform volumetric
+GrPr 2θ heat generation. At the interfaces of different
Energy in the fluid materials, namely, substrate-fluid, heater-
∂θ ∂θ ∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ fluid, substrate-heater interfaces are specified
U +V = +
∂X ∂Y ∂X 2 ∂Y 2 with thermally coupled condition.
Energy in the substrate
∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
+ = 0
∂X 2 ∂Y 2 The numerical simulations are performed
Energy in the heaters using ANSYS FLUENT 14.0 (ans). The
Semi-Implicit Method for Pressure Linked
kh ∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ Q H 2
+ + =
0 Equations (SIMPLE) algorithm is opted for
kf ∂X 2 ∂Y 2 Wh H h pressure-velocity coupling, and the power-
The above equations are nondimensionalised law is opted for discretization of convection-
using the following definitions: U = diffusion terms. The details of the numerical
u / (α f / H ) , V = v / (α f / H ) , P= methodologies implemented in FLUENT can
618
Natural Convection in an Open Cavity with Surface Mounted Electronic Components
be found in the FLUENT manual version transfer is studied for wall removal cases: (i)
14.0. The details of SIMPLE algorithm can when bottom wall is removed, (ii) when right
be found in the book by Patankar wall is removed and (iii) when both right and
(Patankar 1981). left walls are removed. The boundary
condition for the removed wall is specified
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION with pressure inlet condition with ambient
pressure and temperature. This study
Natural convection is solved for heat transfer provides an estimate of how much heat
in an open cavity to find the convection transfer is restricted by the bottom and right
characteristics. The cavity is open at top (this walls.
is referred as the base case). Natural
convection is also solved for three wall When the cavity bottom wall is removed, it
removal cases. The base case heat transfer is becomes a vertical channel. In this case, the
compared with the three different cases ambient air is inducted through the bottom
formed when the bottom wall or/and right and makes the heat transfer different from
wall of the cavity is/are removed. The heat that of cavity with bottom wall.
Figure 2: Stream function and temperature contours for various wall removal cases.
(a)-(d): Stream function contours; (e)-(f): Temperature contours
When bottom wall is present, the coolant wall, the air inflow is mainly through the
entry is restricted from only top opening, and bottom, and the heated fluid naturally goes
the heated fluid has to again exit through the upwards and exits through top opening. The
same top opening as can be seen from strean streamlines and isotherms for cavity without
function plot shown in Figure. 2(a). The bottom wall are shown in Figures. 2(b) and
fluid has to pass in opposite directions in a 2(f), respectively. It can be seen from
restricted space. Hence, the fluid experiences streamline plot that even this is a resulting
higher resistive forces.In case of no bottom channel flow situation, flow reversal can be
619
Muthukrishnan and Madhusudhana
observed at the top opening. All the fluid temperature of the hottest point within that
comes from the bottom exits through small particular heater.
area at the top opening. The flow reversal In all the above cases it can be noticed that
spans much larger area, even though its the temperature difference between the
strength is low. However, in the base case the bottom and middle heater is higher than that
flow revarsal at the top openning is stronger. between the middle and top heaters. In all the
When the right wall is removed, the fluid on cases the top heater is the hottest heater,
the right side becomes accessible. Compared which is subjected to the highest thermal
to bottom wall removal, in the right wall risk.
removal situation the fluid can be drawn From the above table we can see that all the
from larger area; and and also from different wall removal cases perform better than the no
elevations of fresh ambient fluid. The wall removal case (base case). The
streamlines are horizontal at the right performance of the three wall removal cases
boundary before they turn to upwards are almost same. Temperatures of these cases
(Figure. 2(c). It provides almost no flow are lower than those of the base case.
reversal at the top opening. The isotherms of However, among the three wall removal
the right wall removal case is shown in cases the bottom wall removal performs best,
Figure. 2(f). The temperatures are lower than and the side wall removal performs the least.
those of the base case.When both bottom and The performance of the both walls removal
right walls are removed, the configuration case is in between the bottom wall removal
becomes heaters mounted on a vertical and right wall removal.
substrate. In this case fluid from all the
directions, except from backside of the CONCLUSIONS
substrate, is accessible as can be seen from
streamlines shown in Figure. 2(d). The Natural convection in a top cooled vertical
dimensionless temperature distribution can rectangular cavity mounted with three
be seen from Figure.2(h). In electronic electronic components is numerically
equipment the maximum temperature is one studied. The results are analysed using
of the most important design parameters. The stream function and temperature contours.
temperature maximum should be kept within The thermal performance of the base case is
safe operating temperatures. compared with the three wall removal cases.
It is found that all the wall removal cases
Table1: Comparison of Maximum perform better than no wall removal case.
dimensionless temperatures of heaters in Among the three wall removal cases, the
different wall removal cases bottom wall removal shows lowest
component temperatures, and the side wall
removal shows the least thermal
performance.
REFERENCES
Ansys fluent release 14 0 user manual.
Patankar S V 1981 Numerical Heat Transfer
and Fluid Flow McGraw-Hill, New
The thermal performance of all the above
York.
cases can be compared using the temperature
maximum as performance measure which is
shown in Table 1. Temperature varies
throughout the domain, including with in
individual heaters. In the table, maximum
temperature of a heater shows the
620
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The gearbox is one of the inherent components in any automotive system
and comprises approximately 30% cost of the total cost of the automobile. Plastic
gears also open new opportunities for more efficient transmissions in many products
along with reduced drive drive-cost, weight, noise and wear. Along with this the
gearbox is a heavy component of the automobile. To reduce drive cost, noise and
weight by replacing metallic gears by thermoplastic gears in the gearbox of identified
low power moped is the objective of this work. Initially the material is identified
among heavy engineering plastics for manufacturing of gear. The material selected is
tested in test laboratory and gears are manufactured using Hobbing process with the
same accuracy and specifications as that of metallic gears of the gearbox. The
modelling of the gearbox has been done and analysis has been carried out using
ANSYS software. The driven gear and driver pinion is replaced by cast nylon gears
and tested for different loading conditions. The experimentation is also carried out for
vibrations and noise generated by the gearbox at different RPM and compared with
existing gearbox. The results are compared with Metallic gears. It is found that Cast
Nylon gears generate less noise and vibrations and are economical than metallic gears
in the gearbox.
Keywords: Plastic gear; Material for plastic gear; Plastic gear design; Plastic
gear in moped; Necessity of plastic gear.
context, it has potential benefits in pleasure. Like most scooterettes, the Sunny is
construction; it has proved itself cost- targeted at teenagers who are eligible to get a
effective in a number of field applications. driving license for ungeared two wheelers at
Reinforced plastic is considered the best 16 years of age. The technical specification
selection from technical and economical of experimented moped i.e Bajaj sunny is
point. For mechanical engineering, plastic given in table 1.
gears are a powerful means of cutting drive
cost, weight, noise, and wear. It also opens
new opportunities for more efficient
transmission in many products.
622
Design, Manufacturing and Performance Analysis of Different Thermoplastic Gears in the Gearbox for
Moped
NOISE
VIBRATION
temp
Sr. Time Rp Temp.
.C.I
No. Duration m Nylon66(0C)
(0C)
1. 5min 50 34.5 36.8
2. 5min 90 41 43.4
3. 5min 10 43.3 46.6
4. 5min 50 46 48.1
Figure6. Von Mises Stresses
RESULT AND CONCLUSION
PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
RESULT
The various devices used during the entire
The modest use of gears can only be accepted
experiment for measurement and analysis are
by replacing metal gears as per requirement.
as follows: 1) Dial vernier calliper
Experimentation was laid down for the
2) Digital vernier calliper evolution of material properties and their
623
Gupta et al.
resistance capabilities. The process hobbing process and analysed it, with the
comprised of installing, running and then help of ANSYS 11.0 software. After studying
comparison of reinforced thermoplastic gears all the parameters, it is concluded that
with metal gears. thermoplastic gear can be used instead of
metal gears where load capacity is less and
Nylon gears have shown that the noise
light weight is the priority.
generated by them are comparatively lower
than cast iron. According to the properties of
REFERENCES
nylon plastic gears have better quality of
damping as compared to the cast iron and Kapelevich and Mc Namara 2006 Plastic
also the vibrations produces are less as Gearing for Small Engine Applications
compared to the cast iron gear. SAE Technical Paper 2006-32-0038
2006 DOI: 10.4271/2006-32-0038.
The production of thermoplastics are cheaper
than metallic gears using injection moulding Chruma J 1983 The Evolution of Nylon
process and plastic gears have the advantage Plastics in U S Automotive Applications
of less machining cost also the physical and SAE Technical Paper 830284 1983 DOI:
chemical attack over the plastic gear is of no 10.4271/830284.
use as plastics are highly resistive to the Khurmi R S and Gupta J K 2011 Theory Of
chemicals and other physiological factors like Machine S Chand Publication Chapter
water, rusting etc. No.29 Helicle Gear 1066-1079
From the performance testing we have Crippa G Davoli Gorla C and Quaranta 1993
concluded that the noise, vibration and heat Nylon Gears for Engine Timing Drives:
developed by plastic gears are less as Design and Experimental Tests SAE
compared to the cast iron or metallic gear. Technical Paper 1993-25-0635 1993.
Abstract: Experimental study of heat transfer through the helical coil during
condensation of the steam in helical coil is carried out. The purpose of the study is to
investigate the effect of the coil curvature ratio, mass flow rate of steam and inlet
temperature of steam on the heat transfer coefficient. Experimental setup is fabricated
to carry out the experimentation on coil of diameters 225mm. The result shows that
there is increase in heat transfer coefficient with increase in inlet temperature of the
steam.
Keywords: helical coil, heat transfer coefficient, coil curvature ratio
INTRODUCTION MATERIALS
For well over a century, efforts have been A helical coil is made of MS material and is
made to produce more efficient heat placed in drum filled with water. The details
exchangers by employing various methods of specifications of the coil are given table 1.
heat transfer enhancement. The study of Steam flows through the coil and water
surrounds it. Experimental setup is shown in
enhanced heat transfer has gained serious
Figure 1. Experiment is carried out for the
momentum during recent years due to various mass flow rate of the steam.
increased demands by industry for heat
exchange equipment which would be less
expensive to build and operate than standard
heat exchange devices. Savings in materials
and energy use also provide strong
motivation for the development of improved
methods of enhancement. Many times it is
imperative that the heat exchangers designed
should be especially compact and lightweight
(for example automobiles and spacecraft
applications). Also, enhancement devices are
necessary for the high heat duty exchangers
found in power plants (i. e. air-cooled
condensers, nuclear fuel rods). These
applications, as well as numerous others,
have led to the development of various heat Figure 1 Experimental Set up
transfer enhancement techniques.
METHODS
Helical coils are used in process industries, Heat transfer coefficient is calculated by the
chemical industries, refrigeration and air following ways Heat gain by the cooling water
conditioning, in water purification plants etc.
from condensation of steam which is flowing coefficient as the mass flow rate of the steam
in the coil is calculated from overall heat increases.
balance equation as: It can be seen from Fig 2 that there is
increase in the heat transfer coefficient of
Q = m ' c p (Tout − Tin ) (1) condensation with the increase in the inlet
Where temperature of the steam to the coil.
m = mass flow rate of water in the water ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
tank.
The research is being carried out under the
T out = Temperature of hot water leaving tank financial grant from TEQIP-II of VJTI.
T in = Temperature of water entering the tank.
C p = specific heat of water. 10000
627
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The present paper talks about Numerical analysis of two phase flow boiling
heat transfer in small diameter circular cross section horizontal channel with water as
a working fluid. Numerical analysis of flow boiling in 2.1 mm diameter channel has
been done in commercial CFD software ANSYS FLUENT 15 for predicting heat
transfer coefficient. Volume of Fluid (VOF) approach has been used in the numerical
analysis of flow boiling heat transfer. Numerical analysis has been performed for
different ranges of heat flux (22-80 kW/m2) and mass flux (100-500 kg/m2s). The
graphs has been plotted for heat transfer coefficient and vapour quality.
Keywords: Flow boiling; Numerical modelling; Volume of Fluid method.
contact with the channel walls and (ii) Bring varies with the diameter D for a circular tube,
fresh fluid to the walls and remove fluid whereas the flow rate depends on the cross-
away from the walls as the transport process sectional area, which varies linearly with D2.
is accomplished. The rate of the transport
process depends on the surface area, which
NUMERICAL MODELLING
Figure 2. Discretisation of 2D
Different ranges of heat flux and mass flux circular channel
has selected as boundary condition for
numerical analysis as shown in Table 1.2D
and 3D geometry of circular cross section
channel has been developed in commercial
GAMBIT software as shown in Figure 2 and
Figure 3.
Figure 2 shows the discretisation of 2D
geometry of channel with interval size of
0.05 mm while Figure 3 shows the enlarged
view of discretisation of 3D geometry of
circular cross section channel with same Figure 3. Enlarged view of Discretisation
interval size. of 3D circular channel
629
Numerical Analysis of Flow Boiling Heat Transfer inSingle Horizontal Small Diameter Channel using
VOF Multiphase Model
REFERENCES
Dharaiya V V Kandlikar S G 2012
Numerical investigation ofheat transfer
in rectangular microchannels under
H2boundary condition
duringdeveloping and fully developed
laminar flow Journal of Heat Transfer
134 1-10.
Ghiaasiaan S Mostafa 2008Two-Phase Flow,
Boiling and Condensation In
Conventional and Miniature Systems
Cambridge University Press Cambridge
121-134.
Kandlikar S G Garimella SLi D Colin S
King M R 2006 Heat Transfer And
Fluid Flow In Minichannels and
Microchannels Elsevier Ltd. Great
Britain 175-220.
Lee WSon G Yoon H Y 2012 Direct
numerical simulation of flow boiling in
a finned microchannel International
Communications in Heat and Mass
Transfer 39 1460–1466.
Magnini M Pulvirenti B Thome J R 2013
Numerical investigation of
hydrodynamics and heat transfer of
elongated bubbles during flow boiling
in a microchannel International Journal
of Heat and Mass Transfer 59 451–471.
Mukherjee A Kandlikar S G 2005 Numerical
simulation of growth of a vapour bubble
during flow boiling of water in a
microchannel Microfluid Nanofluid
Journal 11 37–145.
Qunwu H Fukagata K and Nobuhide K 2007
Numerical simulation of gas-liquid two-
phase flow and heat transfer with dry-
out in a micro tube6th International
Conference on Multiphase Flow(ICMF
2007) Leipzig Germany 1-12.
Zhuan R Wang W 2012 Flow pattern of
boiling in micro-channel by numerical
simulation International Journal of
Heat and Mass Transfer 55 1741–1753.
630
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Passive mixing mechanisms are widely used for heat and mass transfer
enhancement. Vortices generated in flow field lead to gradients that favour convective mass
transfer. Computations on enhancement of convective mass transfer of sublimating solid fuel
by baroclinic torque generated vortices in the wake of a swept ramp placed in high speed flow
is presented here. Advection Upstream Splitting Method (AUSM) based computational
scheme employed in the present study, to solve compressible turbulent flow field involving
species transport, could capture the complex flow features resulted by vortex boundary layer
and shock boundary layer interactions. Convective mass transfer is found to get improved in
regions near boundary layer by horseshoe vortex and further transported to other regions by
counter rotating vortex pair. Vortices resulted by flow expansion near aft wall of wedge and
recompression wave-boundary layer interactions also promotes convective mass transport.
Extensive computations have been carried out to reveal the role of vortices dominance at
higher Reynolds numbers in promotion of convective mass transfer in turbulent boundary
layer.
632
Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque Induced Vortex
10-5 for all residuals has attained after upstream of the oblique shock contact
125000 iterations with a CFL of 0.5. point. Reattachment compression wave is
also generated from the boundary layer
after the ramp. A high temperature
gradient region also formed upstream of
expansion wave reattachment. In short,
the present flow field of shock interaction
on a convective mass transfer boundary
layer involves many zones of sharp
Figure 2: Computational Domain gradients.
In mass transfer studies, the dimensionless
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION number used is Sherwood number (Sh)
In the present study, a swept ramp is used for which is the ratio of the total rate of mass
the The computational procedure was transfer to the rate of diffusive mass transport
validated using experimentally measured alone. Here in the present study a relative
centreline wall pressures for a similar ramp
Sherwood number is used for the
placed in supersonic flow [Donohue, 1996].
Streamline plot of the computed results for quantification of the mass transfer. Relative
the 3D domain is given in figure 3. All Sherwood number is the ratio of Sherwood
salient flow features, described before (figure number at the vortex effected area to the
1), has been captured. Sherwood number at vortex unaffected area.
It is analogous to the heat transfer
correlations with Nusselt number in terms of
Reynolds number and Prandtl number.
633
Aravind et al.
Figure 5: Variation of ShR along span isobars and results in the production of
wise direction at various axial locations baroclinic torque induced vortices which
will further enhance the convective mass
Baroclinically induced vortices are produced
the temperature gradients. An enhancement transfer.
in mass transfer and an increase in Sh R is
observed at some distance in the span wise
REFERENCES
direction because of the vortices generated Gentry M C and Jacobi A M 1997 Heat
by the sweep given in the ramp and also due transfer enhancement by delta-wing
to the horse shoe vortices. vortex generators on a flat plate: vortex
EFFECT OF REYNOLDS NUMBER interactions with the boundary layer.
The effect of Reynolds numbers on mass Experimental Thermal and Fluid
transfer enhancement in presence of Science 14 231-242.
baroclinic torque induced vortex has been Gentry M C and Jacobi A M 2002 Heat
estimated for Re= 5.0 x 107, 5.5 x 107, transfer enhancement by delta-wing-
and 6.0 x 107 levels. As the velocity generated tip vortices in flat-plate and
increases, there will be a strong drift in developing channel flows Journal of
the vortices that will result in heat transfer 124 1158-1168.
enhancement of mass transfer. Henze M. and Von Wolfersdorf J 2011.
Influence of approach flow conditions
on heat transfer behind vortex
generators. International Journal of
Heat and Mass Transfer 54 279-287.
Jacobi A M and Shah R K 1995 Heat transfer
surface enhancement through the use of
longitudinal vortices: a review of recent
progress Experimental Thermal and
Figure 6: Mass fraction along centreline
Fluid Science 11 295-309.
at different Reynolds Number
Launder B E and Spalding D B 1974 The
CONCLUSIONS numerical computation of turbulent
flows Computer methods in applied
Computationally investigated the impact mechanics and engineering 3 269-289.
of vortex generators in the convective
mass transfer enhancement. Shock Liou T M Chen C C and Tsai T W 2000 Heat
induced mixing enhancement is already transfer and fluid flow in a square duct
with 12 different shaped vortex
in use in scramjet engines. Two
generators Journal of Heat Transfer 122
longitudinal counter rotating vortex pair 327-335.
are generated along the sliding surface of
the ramp and lateral vortices are formed Liou M S and Steffen C J 1993 A new flux
due to the sweep given in the ramp. Small splitting scheme Journal of
Computational physics 107(1) 23-39.
horseshoe vortices are formed finally
because of the flow attachment to the Petersen M R Stewart G R and Julien K 2007
wedge wall. Large Pressure gradients will Baroclinic vorticity production in
be associated with the generated protoplanetary disks. II Vortex growth
compression wave which will be imposed and longevity The Astrophysical
Journal 658 1252.
on the density gradients at the oxidizer
fuel interface. This will produce Promvonge P Chompookham T
misalignment in the isopycnals and Kwankaomeng S. and Thianpong C
634
Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque Induced Vortex
635
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Corrugated plate heat exchangers have large surface area to volume ratio
and increased turbulence due to surface corrugations and thus help to improve the
energy saving capabilities in various industries. A two dimensional heat transfer study
was investigated in a triangular wavy duct with different channel heights of 12 mm,
14 mm and 16 mm for a single corrugation angle. The commercial code FLUENT was
used to study the flow features. The wall temperature was kept constant for the study.
The results showed that V- shaped corrugated channels have a major impact on heat
transfer enhancement. A low Reynolds number k-Ɛ turbulence model was employed
to account for the turbulence in the flow. Therefore, these types of heat exchangers
with V-shaped corrugation are preferred for various equipment for energy savings.
The numerical results showed that the variation of average plate temperature, Nusselt
number with Reynolds numbers were within the range of ± 7 from available data.
Average Nusselt number increased in corrugated plate from a value of 6 to 14 while
that of parallel plate channel varied from 4.5 to 5.0. As the channel height decreases,
the average Nusselt number increases. Also the goodness factor (j/f) increased with
decreasing channel height so the best performance was observed for the corrugation
with channel height of 12 mm. For wide variety of engineering applications like
heating, air conditioning unit and waste heat from the exhaust of an engine,
corrugated channel is a favourable alternative.
Keywords: Corrugations; Turbulence; Thermal boundary layer; k-Ɛ
Turbulence model.
usual shell and tube heat exchangers with assumptions, the governing equations can be
very large surface area to volume ratio. written as [Smith and Pongjet, 2008]
The assessment of performance showed that Mass:
wavy channels give rates of heat transfer when
∂
operated at transitional Reynolds number. ( ρ ui ) = 0 (1)
Islamoglu and Parmaksizoglu, (2003) ∂xi
investigated the correlation for fully developed where ui is the axial velocity,
Nusselt number and friction coefficient for air
Momentum:
flowing inside corrugated channels of plate heat
exchangers. The experiments were performed for ∂
two different values of channel height 5mm and
∂x j
( ρ ui u j ) =
10mm for a single corrugation angle of Reynolds
number in the range of 1200 to 4000.They found ∂ρ ∂ ∂ui ∂u j 2 ∂ui
that as the channel height is increased, the − + µ + − δ ij
∂xi ∂x j ∂x j ∂xi 3 ∂x j
pressure gradient decreases but the friction factor
∂
increases. Moreover performance considering
flow area goodness factor slightly decreased
+
∂x j
(
− ρ ui′u ′j )
(2)
.They also performed a numerical study using
Energy:
finite element methods for the corrugated heat
exchanger channel and the results were compared ∂
ui ( ρ E + p ) =
with the experiment results Islamoglu and ∂xi
Parmaksizoglu, (2004). Faizal and Ahmed,
∂ c p µt ∂T
+ ui (τ ij )
(2012) performed experimental studies on a
k +
corrugated plate heat exchanger for a small ∂x j Prt ∂x j eff
(3)
temperature difference. They investigated the
Here E is the total energy,
channel height between the plates to determine
the configuration that gives the optimum heat E=c p T+p/ρ+u2/2,Pr t is the turbulent
Prandlt number and (τ ij ) is the deviatoric
transfer for water. Three different spacing such as
6mm, 9mm and 12mm were used. eff
stress tensor,
∂u j
2 ∂ui ∂ui
(τ )=
ij eff
∂ x
µeff
− µij
3
+
∂∂x j
x
δ ij
(4)
i j
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation (ε) The average Nusselt number as a function of
equation Reynolds number for different channel
heights is plotted in Fig 2. It was observed
∂ ∂ µt ∂ε
( ρε ui ) = µ + + that with the decrease in channel height
∂xi ∂x j σε ∂x j Nusselt number increases.
C1ε ( ε / k ) Gk − C2ε ρ ( ε 2 / k ) (6)
Here G k represents the generation of
turbulent kinetic energy due to mean velocity
gradients, σ k and σ ε are effective Prandlt
numbers for turbulent kinetic energy and rate
for dissipation, respectively; C1ε and C2ε are
constants and µt is the eddy viscosity and is
given as:
µt = ( ρ Cµ k 2 ) / ε (7)
Fig. 2: Average Nusselt Number versus
The empirical constants for turbulence model Reynolds number for corrugated plate of
are arrived by comprehensive data fitting for a different channel heights.
wide range of turbulent flow (Launder and
Spalding,1974) and (Versteeg and CONCLUSION
Malalasekera,1995) by Numerical study was performed to
Cµ =0.09, C1ε =1.47, C2ε =1.92, investigate the heat transfer and flow
characteristics in a 2D-corrugated channel for
σ k =1.0, σ ε =1.3. (8) turbulent flow with Reynolds number 400-
2000. The results of the average Nusselt
Numerical procedure number, goodness factor (j/f) in different
Two dimensional continuity, momentum and channel heights were presented.The heat
energy equation were solved numerically. transfer characteristics for corrugated
The standard k-ε turbulent was selected. The channels are different than flat plate as flow
upwind and central difference methods are interruption occurs along with recirculation
used for convections and diffusion and reattachment. The convective heat
respectively. The FLUENT was used as the transfer is enhanced heavily as thermal
solver and post –processor. The boundary layer is interrupted because of the
discretization was done using the PRESTO corrugation.
method for pressure and second order
upwind method for momentum, energy,
turbulent kinetic equation and turbulent
638
Dutta et al.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
“Development of an innovative model of
Combined Heat and Power from Purely
Producer Gas Based Engine Alternator
System for Partial Conventional Energy
Substitution of Tea Processing Industries in
North-East India” Funded Science and
engineering Research Board, Govt. of India:
2012-2016.
REFERENCES
Faizal M & Ahmed M R 2012 Experimental
studies on a corrugated plate heat
exchanger for small temperature
639
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
641
Numerical Analysis of Natural Convection Around a Pair of Heated Cylinders Inside a Cold Square Enclosure
18 120 120
16
δ = 0.3
δ = 0.3
100 δ = 0.5 100 δ = 0.3
δ = 0.5
14
δ = 0.5 δ = 0.7
80
δ = 0.7
12 80
δ = 0.7
Nulft sqr cyl
10
Nuen
60
60
8
6 40
40
4
20
20
2
0
0 0 1 2 3 4 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
S S
S
35 120 120
30
100 δ = 0.3 100 δ = 0.3
δ = 0.3 δ = 0.5 δ = 0.5
δ = 0.5
25
80
δ = 0.7 80
δ = 0.7
Nurgt tilted sqr
Nulft tilted sqr
20 δ = 0.7
Nuen
60 60
15
40 40
10
20 20
5
0 0 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
S S S
16 100 100
δ = 0.3(xc=0.15)
14 δ = 0.3(xc=0.15) δ = 0.3(xc=0.15)
δ = 0.5(xc=0.25)
δ = 0.5(xc=0.25) 80 δ = 0.5(xc=0.25) 80
δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
12 δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
10
Nurgt trg cyl
Nulft trg cyl
60 60
Nuen
6 40 40
4
20 20
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
S S S
642
Chauhan and Thakur
6 6
En(Ra10 ) Left Cyl(Ra 106) Right Cyl(Ra 10 )
5.6
Square Square
Square Rhombus
15.5 15.5 Rhombus
5.4 Rhombus Triangle Triangle
Triangle
5.2
5.0
14.5
14.5
4.8
4.6 14.0
14.0
4.4
13.5
4.2 13.5
4.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
13.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 13.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
δ δ
δ
643
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract:Design codes in India (IS 456-2000, IS 1642-1989) like most of the codes
around the world specify minimum cover to reinforcement to obtain a specific fire
resistance rating (FRR). FRR is usually determined by standard fire test. The problem
associated with limited information provided by the experiments for determining the
complex behavior of concrete under fire, is well substituted by the use of numerical
techniques. In this paper a 3D Finite Element (FE) model for portal frame is
developed for studying its thermo-mechanical response using different parameters,
which are grade of concrete (M30, M40 and M60), grade of steel rebar (Fe250, Fe450
and Fe500), types of aggregate (carbonate and siliceous) and different fire exposure
conditions of one, two and three sides of beams (only sides; only bottom; sides and
bottom) exposed to fire. With the progress of fire, the variation of stress from top
surface to bottom of beam is no longer linear. The stresses changes randomly along
the depth. The effect of grade of steel is significant when only sides are exposed to
fire. It happens due to the low rise of temperature the middle bottom steel.
Keywords: Fire Resistance Rating; Finite Element.
MODELING 5100 mm
5100 mm
1-14φ
GEOMETRIC DETAILS OF PORTAL
FRAME 2-12φ
Dimensions of beam analysed by tested by
Wu et al. (1993) is extended to be used as a Figure 2: Cross Section of beam
part of portal frame. Columns were designed
645
Parametric Investigation of Portal Frame at Elevated Temperature
-20
-20 -20 Fire Exposure
Bottom
-40
Sides
-40 -40 Bottom and sides
-60
Figure 3: Comparison of Mid Span Deflection for Different Fire Exposures for M40 concrete
646
Sharma et al.
CONCLUSIONS
The temperature rise in siliceous aggregate is
more than carbonate aggregate owing to the
high thermal conductivity.
647
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
The 5S3P Li-Ion battery is as shown in the modelled with orthotropic material properties
Figure 1 with one of the sleeve options. The such as Thermal Conductivity and IR
overall size of the battery is 131×95×75 mm. emittance. Computer simulations of the
The side walls are 1.5 mm thick, while lugs battery thermal behaviour are made using I-
are 2.5 mm thick. The details of Li-Ion DEAS (2011) as pre-processor and TMG as
battery are as summarized in Table 1. solver. Simulation model consists of solid,
quadrilateral and triangle shell elements with
appropriate thickness and contact
conductance couplings to simulate the
conduction heat transfer. Material property
details of the battery elements are
summarized in Table 3. Computational
model is as shown in Figure 2.
Table 3. Material Properties
TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications on the temperature of the Figure 2: Computational Model
battery are as shown in the following Table 2.
THERMAL DESIGN
Table 2. Temperature Specifications
Battery in this particular mission used for
Non-operating
Design limits limited power requirement during roll down
(Storage) limits
MinTemp MaxTemp MinTemp MaxTemp from the lander and short shadow periods.
-400C 500C -300C 400C The thermal inertia of the battery takes care
of rise in temperature during these
COMPUTATIONAL MODEL operations. To maintain the battery
temperature during rest of the mission where
In this study, a Lithium-Ion battery used for limits are narrow, battery needs to be
Rover is considered. The battery cell is conductively as well as radiatively. GFRP
649
Thermal Design and Analysis of Lithium-Ion Battery for Deep Space Missions: Modelling and Simulation
washers are used for conductive isolation and from -300C to the required value with
MLI is used for radiative isolation. Battery is two different heater power options.
placed inside warm electronics box which is Heaters are located on the two side plates
having low emittance face inside. Cells are of the sleeve.
attached to the sleeve with RTV adhesive. At
Case-1:
certain phases of mission, battery can go as
low as -300C and it may be in discharged It is cold case and both the enclosure and
condition. Battery needs to be heated to 00C deck are imposed at -30°C. In this case, 5 W
before charging is initiated. This is heater is equally distributed on two sides of
accomplished by design of suitable heaters. the sleeve. Time required for the sleeve lug
point to reach a temperature of -100C, 00C
THERMAL ANALYSES and 100C are presented in Table 4. Also the
temperature gradient in the sleeve and cells at
Purpose is to check the adequacy of given
those times are presented. Figure 3 shows the
sleeve design from thermal point of view.
temperature distribution on the sleeve and
Since battery makes a sub system of a rover,
cells at the end of 147 minutes.
the relevant boundary conditions are taken
from rover thermal analysis. Following three
cases are considered:
i. Hotcase: Rover under Sunlit condition
ii. Coldcase: Rover under non sunlit
condition for a long duration
iii. Battery charging case
First two cases validate the adequacy of
thermal control and Third case is used design
suitable heater when battery is under cold
conditions.
650
Jayaraman et al.
CONCLUSIONS
Lithium-Ion Battery used for a Rover of an
interplanetary mission is analyzed from
thermal point of view for a given sleeve
design. The battery temperatures are
maintained within the design temperature
limits during both hot and cold environments.
The heater power for charging case can be
either 5 W or 10 W depending on the mission
constraint of time required to reach 0oC. It
takes 103 minutes with 5 W and 47 minutes
with 10 W.
REFERENCES
Gilmore D G 2002 Spacecraft thermal
control hand book V1: Fundamental
technologies 2nd ed. Aerospace Press
California.
Megahed A 2007 Thermal Design and
Analsis for a Battery Module for a
Remote Sensing Satellite Journal of
Spacecrafts and Rockets 44(4) 920-926.
651
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
ICCMS2016 ICCMS2016
Abstract: Sediment mining from river bed or flood plain causes change in river
morphology. In the present study, river bed degradation due to sediment mining is
estimated using an earlier developed mathematical model for non-equilibrium
sediment transport. The developed model was operated with flux vector splitting finite
difference technique for estimation purpose and the sediment mass conservation
equation of river bed particles coupled with both continuity and momentum equations
of sediment laden water were used to perform the numerical experiments. This study
has incorporated two horizontally stratified bed layers as an extension over the earlier
study considering only single bed layer. The performance of this model is checked by
the same numerical scheme for predicting the degradation profile of exposed river bed
after the removal of upper coarser sand layer.
Keywords: Sediment mining; River bed degradation; Non equilibrium sediment
transport; Flux vector splitting finite difference technique.
653
A Study on River Bed Degradation Due to Mining of Coarser Top Sediment Layer
ensured at this stage due to the lack of of Hydraulic Engineering 117 1145-
experimental or real field data. 1164
Cao Z 1999 Equilibrium near bed
concentration of suspended sediment
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 125
1270-1278
Cao Z Day R and Egashira S 2002 Couple
and decouple numerical modelling of
flow and morphological evaluation of
alluvial rivers Journal of Hydraulic
Engineering 128 306-321
Cao Z and Pender G 2004 Numerical
modelling of alluvial rivers subjected to
interactive sediment mining and feeding
Advances in Water Resources 27 533-
546
Figure 1. Comparison of river bed profiles
for both numerical experiments at 32 Cao Z Pender G Wallis S and Carling P 2004
days. Computational dam-break hydraulics
over erodible sediment bed Journal of
CONCLUSIONS Hydraulic Engineering 130 689-703
This study shows that sediment mining Cheng N S 1997 A simplified settling
induces degradation of river bed and velocity formula for sediment particle
propagation of degradation depends on Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 123
sediment characteristics of bed materials. 149-152
There are the possibilities of impacts of many Chen D Acharya K and Stone M 2010
other factors on mining caused degradation Sensitivity analysis of non equilibrium
which can be considered in future studies. adaptation parameters for modelling
mining-pit migration Journal of
REFERENCES Hydraulic Engineering 136 806-811
654
Barman and Sarma
655
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: We present a transport phenomena model (TPM) for a two phase system,
where solid crystals sublimate while submerged in liquid product. The liquid product
forms at liquid-vapor interface and the height of liquid layer above the crystals is
almost constant in that transport properties remain invariant. The derived model is
subject to bifurcation analysis and steady state behavior of the system is analyzed.
Keywords: Interfacial kinetics; Liquid-solid interface; Sublimation of crystals in
liquid phase; Bifurcation analysis.
Now, we will give a minimum description species that are two reactants and one liquid
of the reaction model using transport product are, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 𝜑𝑘 + ∇ ∙ (𝜌𝑘 𝜑𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙
phenomena theory and later see how 𝒋𝑘 ;
𝑘 𝑘 𝑘
bifurcations can be computed and stability 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈𝜑𝑘 〉 ) + ∇ ∙ (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈𝜑𝑘 〉 〈𝒗𝑘 〉 ) =
behavior of steady state branches can be −∇ ∙ (〈𝒋𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝒋𝑡𝑘 〉) + 𝐽𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝐽𝑘 = 0 ; 〈𝒋𝑡𝑘 〉 =
analyzed using established bifurcation theory −〈𝜌𝑘 𝜑�𝑘 𝒗�𝑘 〉 . Writing a notation, 𝜒𝑘Γ =
based on reductive perturbation theory. 1
− ∫𝐴 𝜌𝑘 𝜁𝑘 (𝒗𝑘 − 𝒘𝑘 ) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 ; where,
𝑉0 𝑘
TRANSPORT PHENOMENA 𝜒𝜖{𝑴, 𝑄, 𝐽} ; 𝜁𝑘 𝜖{𝑣𝑘 , ℎ𝑘 , 𝜑𝑘 } . And, Γ𝑘 =
MODEL 1
− ∫𝐴 𝜌𝑘 (𝒗𝑘 − 𝒘𝑘 ) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 . Also, 𝜒𝑘 =
𝑉0 𝑘
Since the net volume that is considered 𝜒𝑘Γ + 𝜒𝑘ϖ ; and correspondingly, ϖϵ{𝜏, 𝑞, 𝑗} .
constant as transport properties and reaction Further, the corresponding interfacial
conversion remains invariant as a steady quantities are denoted as, 𝜒𝑘ϖ =
state, we do volume averaging for transport 1
− ∫ 𝜉 ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 ; and respective term
phenomena occurring at interface. Thus, 𝑉0 𝐴𝑘 𝑘
we express the volume average as expressions are, 𝜉𝑘 𝜖{−(𝜏𝑘 − 𝑝𝑘 𝑰), 𝒒𝑘 , 𝒋𝑘 } for
the three transport processes.
1
〈𝜙𝑘 〉𝑘 =� 𝜍 𝜙 𝑑𝑉
𝑉𝑘 𝑉0 𝑘 𝑘 Extending the arguments to a two phase,
liquid and solid phases, we can write
where𝜙𝑘 is a state variable for 𝑘 𝑡ℎ phase in relations, 𝜀𝑠 + 𝜀𝑙 = 1; also, we find that in
TPM and 𝜍𝑘 is a phase fraction as a functional orthogonal coordinates, we have, 𝐴𝑠 = 𝐴𝑙 =
form. When, 𝜍𝑘 = 1 , we have, volume 𝐴𝑖 ; as at interface cross section is the same.
fraction, 𝜀𝑘 ≜ (𝑉𝑘 ⁄𝑉0 ); ∑𝑘 𝜀𝑘 = 1. We also Further, we note that, 𝒘𝑠 = 𝒘𝑙 = 𝒘. It is
obtain from volume averaging assumption a seen that, in presence of dissipative effects,
relation 1
𝑴𝜏𝑘 = ∫𝐴 (𝜏𝑘 − 𝑝𝑘 𝑰) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 =
𝜕𝜙𝑘 𝜕〈𝜙𝑘 〉 1 𝑉0 𝑘
〈 〉= − ∫𝐴 𝜙𝑘 𝒘𝑘 ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴
𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑡 𝑉0 𝑘 + 𝑝̅𝑘𝑖 ∇𝜀𝑘 + 𝑴𝑑𝑘 . Thus, average
where𝑤𝑘 velocity for mass transport, and 𝒏𝑘 interfacial stress and dissipative effects given
is outward vector normal to interface of by 𝑴𝑑𝑘 give us the total interfacial stress.
phase k. At the end of analysis, we obtain a Also, the net difference between interfacial
1
result, ∫ 𝒏 𝑑𝐴
𝑉0 𝐴𝑘 𝑘
= −∇𝜀𝑘 . stresses of two phases, i.e. liquid and solid is
expresses as, 𝑝̅𝑠𝑖 − 𝑝̅𝑙𝑖 = 𝜎𝛿̅ ; where 𝜎 is
Thus, the microscopic (exact mass), surface tension and 𝛿̅ is the mean curvature
macroscopic mass, interfacial mass balances of two phase interface. For crystals as solid
and dispersive flux equations come out as, phase submerged in liquid the interfacial
𝜕𝑡 𝜙𝑘 + (∇ ∙ 𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) = 0 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ momentum flux source as due to surface
𝑘
(𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉 ) = Γ𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 Γ𝑘 = 0. tension effects is given as, 𝑴𝑖 =
1
Similarly, the momentum balance equations ∫ 𝜎𝛿𝒏𝑠 𝑑𝐴 = −𝜎𝛿̅∇𝜀𝑠 .
𝑉0 𝐴𝑘
are given as, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 + ∇ ∙ (𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) =
−∇𝑝𝑘 + ∇ ∙ 𝜏𝑘 + 𝒃𝑘 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ Then summing up we obtain a relation for
(𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ (𝜀𝑘 〈𝑝𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ interfaces between two phases and presence
𝑗
(〈𝜏𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝜏𝑘𝑡 〉) + 𝑴𝑘 + 𝜀𝑘 〈𝒃𝑘 〉𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝑴𝑘 + of dissipative effects as, ∑𝑖 ∑𝑗 𝑴𝑖 = 0 ;
𝑴𝑖 = 0 ; 〈𝜏𝑘𝑡 〉 = −〈𝜌𝑘 𝒗 �𝑘 〉 . Also, the
�𝑘 𝒗 where indexes i, j denote, 𝑖𝜖{𝑠, 𝑙}, which are
energy transport equations are, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 ℎ𝑘 + ∇ ∙ two phases, and 𝑗𝜖{Γ, 𝑑} that respectively
(𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ℎ𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ 𝒒𝑘 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈ℎ𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ denote interfacial and dissipative effects.
(𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈ℎ𝑘 〉𝑘 〈𝒗𝑘 〉𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ (〈𝒒𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝒒𝜏𝑘 〉) + There are two more average quantities that
𝑄𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝑄𝑘 = 0; 〈𝒒𝜏𝑘 〉 = −〈𝜌𝑘 ℎ�𝑘 𝒗 �𝑘 〉. we need to define to complete the set of
relations, and are, 〈𝑝𝑙 〉𝑙 = 𝑝̅𝑙𝑖 , and here i
The mass transport equations of chemical refers to interface condition. Also for solid
657
Two Phase Interface Model for Transport Phenomena during Sublimation of Crystals and Vapour Phase
Reaction
658
Sawant et al.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
REFERENCES
Bird R B Stewart W E Lightfoot E N 1960.
Transport Phenomena Wiley New York
Appendix A.
Inamdar S R 2014 Branching behavior of
field dynamics of resonators of left-
handed materials Applied Physics A
(Springer) 117(2) 621-627.
659
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Flooding is one of the most severe natural hazards occurring frequently in
coastal cities around the world. Being a natural hazard, it cannot be fully avoided but
to minimise the losses of property and human beings, preventive measures can be
taken. Flood plain simulation modelling for different storm flow conditions is one of
the preventive measure technique from which the flood mitigation, evacuation, flood
warning and flood preparedness management planning system can be prepared in
advance. Flood plain simulation modelling gives the results in terms of the flood
extent as well as flood depth along the alignment of the river catchment. In this study,
flood simulation mapping has been carried out for Koparkhairane catchment of Navi
Mumbai, India. Hydrologic modelling is carried out by integrating hydrologic
engineering centres, hydrologic modelling system (HEC-HMS) model with HEC-
GeoHMS model. Hydraulic modelling has been performed by using River analysis
system software (HEC-RAS). Flood plain maps for 10 year and 100 year return
period’s storm conditions have been generated by integrating HEC-GeoRAS model
with GIS. The generated flood plain maps can be used for preparation of flood
mitigation, flood preparedness, evacuation management system and drainage design
in advance.
Keywords: Hydrologic modelling; Hydraulic modelling; Flood plain simulation.
friction slope of channel, g is the acceleration by exporting the water surface extent and
due to gravity, h c is depth of the flow in profile file in HEC-GeoRAS as post
channel and x, t are spatial and temporal co- processing process. For extraction of
ordinates. Moment correctional factor is attributes of spatial geometric data,
considered equal to 1. triangulated irregular network (TIN) is used.
Flood plain maps for the rainfall depth of 10
It is assumed that S fc is approximated from
year and 100 year return periods are shown
Manning’s equation for steady flow by:
in Figure 1 and Figure 2 respectively. The
1 ( 2/3) (1/ 2) flood extent area for 10 year return period is
Q= R S fc A (3)
nc 2.64 Sq. km whereas for 100 year return
period, it is 2.94 Sq. km. Flood plain maps
where R is hydraulic radius and nc is also denote the flood depths. From the flood
Manning’s roughness coefficient for Channel plain extent and flood depth, water resource
flow which may be increased to account for engineers can get idea for design of the
other energy losses such as expansions and effective drainage system.
bend losses. In HEC-RAS, the one
dimensional unsteady flow equations are CONCLUSIONS
solved by four-point implicit finite difference Pre estimation of flood plain maps for
scheme. Geometry file has been prepared different flow conditions is necessary to
with HEC-GeoRAS software in Arc GIS. minimize the economic as well as human
Flood hydrographs generated from HEC- losses. In this study, HEC-RAS with
HMS are used as input in HEC-RAS and integration of HEC-GeoRAS is used for
water surface extent and profiles are flood plain modelling. Integration of
generated for storm flow depth of 10 year hydrologic and hydraulic models with GIS
and 100 year return periods. and remote sensing can be used as an
effective tool for generation of flood plain
and flood hazard mapping. The generated
flood plain maps in this study can be used by
the local municipal organization and planners
for flood mitigation, preparedness planning.
REFERENCES
Anderson D J 2000 GIS based hydrologic
and hydraulic modeling for flood plain
delineation at highway river crossing
MSc Thesis The University of Texas
Austin.
FFC (Fact Finding Committee) 2006
Maharashtra State Govt. Committee
Report 31-130 (unpublished).
Guhathakurta P Sreejith O P Menon P A
2011 Impact of climate change on
extreme rainfall events and flood risk in
Figure 2 Flood Plain Simulation Map-
India J. Earth Syst. Sci. 120 359–373.
100 year return period
Gul G O Harmancroglu N Gul A 2010 A
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION combined hydrologic and hydraulic
Flood plain maps for the rainfall depth of 10 modeling approach for testing
year and 100 year return period are generated efficiency of structural flood control
662
Zope et al.
663
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Simulation studies on Depth of Penetration (DOP) test with steel confined
boron carbide tile backed by aluminum alloy 6063 against 7.62 mm AP projectile
were carried out. Johnson-Cook (JC) material model was used for steel projectile,
confinement and backing aluminium alloy. Johnson-Holmquist material model (JH2)
was considered for boron carbide tile. Suitable model parameters for all the materials
were chosen from published literatures. An optimized mesh size and erosion strains
were used. Both experiment and simulation were carried out for reference DOP on
150 mm dia and 100 mm thickness backing material. For residual DOP on the backing
material 5mm and 6mm thicknesses of boron carbide tiles and backing thickness of 50
mm were considered. This paper essentially discusses the results and validation of the
simulations with experimental results of DOP.
Keywords: Boron carbide; DOP test; modeling and simulation; 7.62 mm AP.
ballistic tested is tightly inserted into the slot The dimensions of hot pressed boron carbide
present in a steel plate, by using a brass shim tiles used for conducting ballistic
in the gap between the tile and the steel plate. experiments were of 40 mm diameter and a
The tile fitted steel plate is placed over the thickness of 5 and 6 mm. Six experiments
6063-T6 aluminum alloy backing, with were performed for each tile thickness. The
enough thickness to make the backing semi- diameter of steel confinement used in
infinite. confining boron carbide tile was 150 mm.
The experimental results of DOP tests are
given in Table 1.
Table 1.Experimental results of
Reference and Residual DOP.
Sr. Tile Tile Projectile DOP
No. thickness density Velocity (mm)
(mm) (g/cm3) (m/s)
1 5.5 2.46 811 20
2 5.3 2.46 816 24.5
3 5.4 2.45 802 10
4 5.2 2.46 815 26
5 5.1 2.47 809 19.5
6 5.1 2.47 817 11.5
7 6.3 2.46 814 19
8 6.3 2.46 810 10
9 6.2 2.47 809 4.5
10 6.5 2.45 810 6.5
11 6.2 2.45 801 23.5
12 6.4 2.46 806 15
13 Nil Nil 820 54
Figure 1.Schematic representation of the
DOP test (a) Residual DOP (b)
NUMERICAL MODEL
Reference DOP in the backing material.
Dynamic problems are generally described
All the experiments were performed with the
using a wave equation. For impact related
7.62 mm AP projectile. The projectile core
problems, travelling wave form as a solution
has a diameter of 6.1 mm and total length
of the wave equation is considered. In this
(cylindrical shaft + ogive) of 28.4 mm with a
study of DOP test, Johnson and Cook (JC)
mass of 5.3 g. The cylindrical shaft was of
model (1985, 1994) is used for backing,
length 22 mm and radius of 3.05 mm. Also
confinement and Projectile materials.
the ogive length and ogive radius were of 7
Similarly, for boron carbide we used Johnson
mm and 9.56 mm respectively. In this
and Holmquist modified JH2 model (2011)
experiment the ammunition was fired with a
along with failure and damage evolution
muzzle velocity of 820 ± 15 m/s. For all
functions. The JC model strength and failure
DOP experiments, the diameter of backing
parameters considered are shown in Tables 2
Al 6063 alloy was maintained as 150 mm.
and 3 respectively. JH2 model parameters for
The backing thickness of this plate was kept
boron carbide are shown in Table 4.
at 100 mm for reference DOP and at 50 mm.
665
Ballistic Studies of Boron Carbide Tiles against 7.62 mm AP Projectile
Property Value
Shear Modulus, (GPa) 197
Bulk Modulus, K1 233 Figure 2.Change in projectile velocity
pressure constant, K2, (GPa) -593 during penetration for hard steel
pressure constant, K3, (GPa) 2800 projectile in simulation of residual DOP
HEL, (GPa) 19
Intact Strength Constant, A 0.927
Intact strength exponent, N 0.67
Strain rate constant, C 0.005
Fractured Strength Constant, B 0.7
Fractured strength exponent, M 0.85
Max. Fracture strength ratio 0.2
Hydro Tensile Limit, T, (GPa) - 0.26
Damage Constant,D1 0.001
Damage Constant,D2 0.5
Bulking Constant, β 1.0
Figure 3.Simulation of fracture observed
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION on steel confined boron carbide ceramic
against 7.62 mm AP.
A quarter symmetry models of projectile and
target were used for numerical simulations Simulation studies on reference DOP showed
using ANSYS AUTODYN 14.0. Projectile that the plastic strain of 3.1 on Al 6063
normal impact velocity was assumed to be produces a DOP of 58.1 mm. In case of
820 m/s. residual DOP on 6mm tile thickness, a
marginal reduction of plastic strain to 2.7
The variation in projectile velocity with produces a significant reduction of DOP of
penetration time is shown in figure 2. It was 5.8 mm on Al6063. Further, it is important to
found that the deceleration of projectile is note that the generation of strong stress wave
faster in case of residual DOP simulation in results in projectile and ceramic
666
Savio et al.
667
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
been used extensively [Schlangen and van approximation takes the following form
Mier, 1992], but are found to have a major (Moes et al 1999)
drawback in that the results obtained show a
u(x) = ∑ NI (x)uI + ∑ NJ (x)ᴪJ (x)aJ (1)
strong dependence on the lattice geometry I∈Kall J∈Kenr
considered. On the other hand, continuum
where Kall is these to fall nodes, Kenr is
based models have proven to provide
these to enriched nodes, NIx) is the nodal
reasonable trade-off between the
shape function, ᴪJ(x) is the enrichment
computational efficiency and accuracy of the
function, I represents conventional nodes, J
response obtained [Niknezhadet al. 2015].
denotes enriched nodes, uI is the
This approach is being used in the present
conventional nodal degree off reedom
study. Though the finite element method
(DOF), aJ is the additional nodal DOF, and
(FEM) based continuum modelling has been
hence, for the two-dimensional case, for
widely used in research, difficulties in the
example, each enriched node has four DOFs
meshing are still encountered when complex
in total (i.e. two conventional DOFs and two
problems involving discontinuities (e.g.
additional DOFs).
inclusions and cracks) are considered. To
overcome this, in the past decade, researches
have been carried out by adopting extended
finite element method (XFEM) for modelling
discontinuities (Unger and Könke2006). The
key advantage of this method is that it can
model discontinuities without conforming the
mesh with the discontinuities (Daux et al.
1999). However, the advantage of this Figure 1.llustration of the XFEM and
method has not been exploited well for FEM mesh with inclusions and voids lie
mesoscale modeling of concrete which inside the domain
involves explicit modeling of inclusions. As
a step towards this, in the present work, the MESOSCALE MODEL BASED ON
idea of XFEM based two dimensional UNIT CELL APPROACH
continuum modelling to consider aggregate
RVE of concrete of dimension 100 mm
as a rigid inclusion in cement mortar matrix
consisting of a single aggregate surrounded
using unit cell approach is proposed.
by cement mortar matrix is considered for the
BRIEFING ON THE XFEM present study [Ghouse et al 2011]. The
diameter of aggregate is chosen as 20 mm.
The extended finite element method is an RVE with one circular aggregate under
efficient numerical tool to solve problems uniaxial tension is examined through the
involving geometric discontinuity. The XFEM implemented in MATLAB. In this
essence of XFEM is that the mesh is first case, aggregate (inclusion) is relatively hard
generated regardless of the internal boundary and so can be considered as rigid. For rigid
(e.g. see Figure 1). The discontinuity inside inclusion problem, enrichment function ᴪJ(x)
the domain is then modeled by incorporating is chosen to be
enrichment functions associated with the
discontinuity in the finite element ᴪJ (x) = ∑|φJ |NJ (x) − |∑ φJ NJ (X)| (2)
approximation. In XFEM, the displacement J J
669
Inclusion Modelling in Concrete with the Extended Finite Element Method
whereφJare the nodal level set values for the noded quadrilateral plane stress elements are
material interface level set function. The used to mesh two different phases of unit
interface bounds an open region Ω. The level cell. FE mesh used consists of 3050 linear
set function φ(x(t),t) is a continuous function, quadrilateral elements with 3151 nodes.
where x(t) is a point in the domain Ω Corresponding mesh for XFEM has 2501
[Sukumar et al. 1997]. The level set function elements with 2602 nodes. The maximum
has the following properties displacement obtained from both XFEM and
φ(x(t), t) < 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑥 ∈ Ω FEM is almost same (i.e. about 350 µm). The
φ(x(t), t) > 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑥 ∉ Ω (3) maximum principal stress predicted from
φ(x(t), t) = 0 for x ∈ interface region
XFEM and FE simulation at the interface is
1.288 MPa and 1.279 MPa, respectively. The
The material properties of matrix and contour plot of the normal stresses obtained
inclusion are given in Table 1. In the 2D using the two approaches is presented in Fig.
XFEM analysis under uniaxial tension, plane 3. Very good agreement between the
stress condition is assumed. Boundary solutions obtained by the two methods is
condition adopted is shown in Figure 2(a). observed.
Discretized unit cell in XFEM highlighting Exact solution for elastic analysis of circular
enriched nodes is shown in Figure 2(b). inclusion in a plate under uniaxial tensile
Gauss quadrature rule is used to carry out load has been derived [Shioya 1967]. The
numerical integration. For the inclusion maximum principal stress on the interface
problem under study, interface elements are using this method is given by the expression
partitioned into several triangular elements, 1
σmax = T {
over which integration is carried out. (1 + υ) + (1 − υ̅)Г
2
+ } (4)
(3 − υ) + (1 + υ̅)Г
E
Г=
̅
E
where T is the applied tensile stress, υ and
υ̅ are Poisson’s ratio of matrix and inclusion
respectively, E andE ̅ are Young’s modulus of
matrix and inclusion respectively. When plate
is subjected to a tensile stress of 1 MPa, and
Figure 2. (a) Unit cell showing substituting elastic properties given in Table 1
boundary conditions; (b) Discretized and in equation 4, maximum principal stress is
XFEM mesh computed to be 1.291 MPa.The difference in
maximum principal stress predicted by XFEM
VALIDATION OF XFEM SOLUTION is around 0.6% when compared to analytical
In order to assess the accuracy of the XFEM solution. The difference is very small which
for modeling inclusions, XFEM solution is shows the efficiency of adopting XFEM in
compared with the finite element (FE) modeling inclusions in mesoscale modeling of
solution. Uniaxial tensile stress of 1MPa is concrete. However, further study is needed to
applied on RVE and linear static analysis is explore the applicability of XFEM in
carried out using ABAQUS software. Four- mesoscale modeling with several inclusions.
670
Thirumalaiselvi et al.
671
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
the use of virtual testing. In virtual testing, paving have been studied. There is still a gap
starting materials are characterized and their of optimizing the surface materials for
performance predicted via the use of permeable pavements pervious concrete. At
computer models. This should result in ambient temperature conditions, a dosage of
savings in both resources (materials, 5 fl oz/cwt provides between 60 and 90
equipment, calibration etc.) and time, as 28 minutes of extra working time. Hydration
days of concrete performance can be controlling admixtures can eliminate
simulated in just a few hours of computer inconsistencies and performance variability
time. An additional benefit of virtual testing that may be brought on by the need to re-
is the capability to perform a large number of temper mixtures at the job sites. Along with
“what-if” type computations to explore new the HCA, VMA or viscosity modifying
material systems and optimize existing ones, admixtures may be beneficial to the
e.g., what is the optimum sulphate content performance of pervious concrete. The use of
and form for a particular cement or how will VMAs results in better flow, quicker
the performance of a cement change if its discharge time from a truck, and easier
Blaine fineness is increased by 10 m2/kg. placement and compaction. Furthermore,
Long-lasting structure is very important if it VMAs prevent drain down, and may increase
both compressive and flexural strength of
is to survive the harsh environment that it is
pervious concrete. It should be noted that not
often exposed to. In some rural places, where
all VMAs are made with pervious concrete in
there is no maintenance culture, it is all the
mind, and therefore, care should be taken
more imperative. The places like hot marine
when choosing the right VMA for pervious
coastal waters constitute an aggressive
installation. Mixtures with latex modifiers
environment that has been found to be
might allow utilization of pervious concrete
deleterious to concrete, leading to premature
in high speed pavement applications.
deterioration that affects the strength and
durability characteristics of concrete
MATHEMATICAL BACKGROUND
structures. One of the major forms of
chemical attack on concrete is the chloride This model consider the cylinder sample
ingress. This ingress leads to corrosion of depicted which produced total volume of V =
reinforcement, reduction in strength, AL where A is the cross section area of the
unserviceable structures, and structures that specimen and L is known to be the length,
are aesthetically poor. The corrosion verification of this sample is through two
products put surrounding concrete in tension pressurized reservoirs, this produced the
thereby causing tension cracking and spalling upstream at φu and the downstream one at φd
of the cover of concrete. The attendant . These initial values can be expressed as
adverse structural influences are: loss of upstream and downstream pressures are φ1
bond between the reinforcement and and φ0 respectively. In this condition
concrete, loss of steel area, and loss of application of partial differential expression
stiffness. The total effects of these are serious which should govern pressure variation as a
durability problems because of reductions in function of length and period φ(x, t) within
the strength, serviceability and aesthetics of the sample which is expressed as but in this
concrete structures. The permeable RC study concrete materials where considered,
structures have been utilized as a potential lack mix design application that has lead
tool of Water Sensitive Urban Design to poor compressive strength in concrete, this
manage natural water. However, the previous has also developed to so many structural
studies conducted mainly concentrated on damage, the focus of this study are to
water quality and pollution control through determine the rate of permeability and there
permeable RC structures and, only the relation with the concrete constituent.
properties of base course materials in
permeable pavement system and segmental
673
Mathematical Model for Reinforced Concrete Problems
(𝜕∅
𝜕²∅ 𝜕∅
+ b (𝜕∅
𝜕²∅ 𝜕∅
𝑎
𝜕𝑥²
+ b 𝜕𝑥
)² = 𝑐
𝜕𝑡
𝑎 𝜕𝑥
)² = 𝑐 𝜕𝑡
𝜕𝑥²
Eq(1)
c Lt ϕ = aLx ϕ + b N ϕ
Consider IC’s as ϕ(x,0) = sin∏x and BC’s
ϕ(x=0,t) = sin∏x ; ϕ’(0,t)= - sin∏x aLx ϕ = c Lt ϕ - b N ϕ
𝜕² 𝜕 𝑐 𝑏
Lx = ; Lt = ; No =(ϕo)² Lx ϕ= Lt ϕ – N ϕ
𝜕𝑥² 𝜕𝑡 𝑎 𝑎
𝑐 𝑏
No = (sin∏x)2 ϕ = ao + a1x+ (Lx)-1 Lt ϕ - N ϕ
𝑎 𝑎
c Lt ϕ = aLx ϕ + b N ϕ ϕ0 = ao + a1x
𝑎 𝑏
ϕ = ao + (Lt)-1 Lx ϕ + N ϕ At x=0
𝑐 𝑐
ϕ0 = sin∏t = ao
ϕo= ao = sin∏x
𝑎 𝑏
ϕ0’ = -sin∏t = a1
ϕ1 = (Lt)-1 Lx sin∏x + No
𝑐 𝑐 ϕ0 = sin∏t (1-x)
𝑡𝑎 𝑏
ϕ1 = ∫0
𝑐
Lₓ ϕo + 𝑐
sin²∏x
ϕ1 = ∬ 𝑐
1 𝜕
ϕ0 – b N0
𝑎 𝜕𝑡
𝑎 𝑏 1−𝑐𝑜𝑠2∏𝑥
ϕ1 = - ∏2sin∏x.t + t N0 = sin²∏t (1-x²)
𝑐 𝑐 2
it is also vibrated for compaction, this Ramana P V and Raghu Prasad B K 2012
compaction will only reduce the rate of void Novel techniquefor fracture of laminated
and decrease the rate permeability in the uni-direction comp. Journal of Springer
concrete structure, but it will not avoid 37 33-57.
permeability, the rate of permeability
determine the rate of void ratio and porosity
deposited in concrete structural component.
Considering the equation by applying novel
technique; the variables in the system were
represented, by the application of
mathematical tools, a constant C1 and C2
where establish as the equation were derived
where φ represent pressure, a, b, c, this
condition expresses the entire variables.
CONCLUSION
The model established consider all the
variables in the system that influence the
transport of water in concrete structure,
initially, concrete attained strength by curing
the structure component, but when it has
attained the required strength, the fluid
passing through the macropores established
is through the influence of permeability, this
will decrease the structural compressive
strength, water transport on the structure are
caused by the variables on the model
developed. Applying the mathematical
expression will definitely monitor the rate of
water migrating on concrete structure, the
variable that allows the water transport has
been expressed. The permeability influence
that relate with the macropores between the
constituent of the concrete is the mixture of
fine. Sand, cement, water and coarse
aggregate, including the mixture and
compressibility of concrete placement
through compaction are expressed base on
various rates. The model can be simulated to
develop the theoretical values that can be
compared with the experimental values for
validation of permeability coefficient in
concrete structure.
REFERENCES
Ramana P V 2014 An Emerging technique
for Hyperbolic engg problems SEC 2014
Delhi.
675
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The main objective of this work is the development of a material model
that can predict complex phenomenon such as wrinkling in flexible membrane
structures. In particular, the material under consideration in this study is Nitrile
Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Material properties necessary for the model development
were determined from uniaxial tests on NBR at different loading rates based on IS
3400(2012) standards. The NBR samples however showed inconsistent deformation
response at loading rates of 50 mm/min. Hence, the tests were repeated as per ASTM
D-412standard. Dynamic Mechanical Analysis(DMA) in the frequency range 10 - 985
Hz were also performed on these samples to obtain values of key parameters, viz.,
dynamic strain, storage modulus, instantaneous modulus, complex modulus, and loss
tangent. The results obtained offer interesting insight and answer many questions
related to the phenomena of wrinkling. A material model, which incorporates
deformation response features observed in the experiments, is developed following
the framework of variational asymptotic method (VAM). Within this framework,
wrinkling can be incorporated using principal strain criteria of tension field theory or
in the development of the kinematics through the deformation gradient tensor.
Material model development is validated and numerically implemented in UMAT for
structural scale applications.
Keywords: Wrinkling; VAM; PVC; NBR; DMA; UMAT
category of highly flexible structures; the key loading conditions [Berdichevsky, 1979;
difference between these elastomers and Burela and Harursampath 2012]. The present
others like PVC is that the former undergo work focuses on the experimental results and
strains of around 200 to 300 % with large discusses the broad framework of VAM for
deformations, while the latter undergo large model development.
deformations with much smaller strains.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A common problem that both these materials
face is that of wrinkling, which is the The present study is aimed at testing and
inability of an envelope or patch or elastomer simulation of NBR elastomer (popularly
to resist compressive loads; resulting in known as nitrile rubber), which has shown
buckling. Modelling of wrinkling is a wrinkling in biomedical applications.
formidable challenge, and prediction of its Though some test about NBR are available in
onset and the response of the material is quite literature, e.g., [Saleesung et al., 2010], more
difficult. Wrinkling can be handled in tension tests were carried out in this study to
field theory approach, as well as in generate data for simulations from wrinkling
bifurcation theory approach (as a post point of view. Further, if material
buckling behaviour) [Cao and Hutchinson, modelling(with and without wrinkling) is to
2012]. Two approaches are commonly used be attempted; and various simulation
while dealing with such materials; one being strategies investigated, some specific
hyper elastic material behaviour and other parameters of NBR elastomers are needed,
being viscoelastic behaviour, though viz., time dependent behaviour, static stress
combinations cannot be ruled out. Materials and strain behaviour, dynamic strains,
such as PVC and LDPE (Low Density Poly instantaneous, long term and short term
Ethylene) fit under the class of viscoelastic modulus, performance at various elongation
materials, while materials such as elastomers rates, and the effect of biaxial loading.
fall under hyper elastic materials. Many In this study, a test-setup was developed that
material models and strategies are available can apply uniaxial and biaxial traction on the
to deal with both these materials. Some of test specimens. Fresh compound of NBR was
these are Prony series, Viogt model, procured and cured at 1600 C for about 20
convolution integrals for viscoelastic minutes. Initially, it was decided to test the
materials [Deng and Pellegrino 2012], and performance of NBR at different elongation
Neo-Hookean, Ogden, Mooney Rivlin, rates ranging from 50 to 500 mm/min, as per
Marflow, polynomial energy density IS 3400(2012) standards for rubber. Test
functions for hyperelastic materials [Martins specimen were gripped in the jaws, with
et al., 2006]. There have been many inter-jaw distance varying from 40 to 50 mm.
contributors in this field, e.g., Deng and The samples were prepared in a manner to
Pellegrino (2012), Gerngross and Pellegrino permit averaging of results. Since the load
(2007), Akita and Natori (2008), Nayyar et deformation curves could be obtained using
al.(2014), to name a few. A viable alternative the set-up, experiments were performed to
to the above methodologies is a model based determine the elongation at break and to
on variational asymptotic method (VAM), carry out accurate strain based investigation.
which can naturally capture the overall However, inconsistent results were obtained
material response and consequently the when the sample were subjected to
development of wrinkling under appropriate
677
Material Modelling and Simulations of Highly Flexible Structures
elongation rates of 50 mm/min elongation be seen that the sample tested at elongation
rates. rate of 50 mm/min was showing a different
trend compared to others.
Further tests were performed on a Dynamic
Mechanical analyser (DMA) with a Figure. 2 shows breaking stress as a function
frequency ranging from 10 to 985 Hz with a of different elongation rates. As can be seen
span of 25 Hz. The breaking stress was in the Figure, some in consistencies were
determine as per ASTM D-412 standards for observed in breaking stress with respect to
static tests, and ASTM-D 5992 standards for strain rates, with the peak value observed at
dynamic tests. The tests also generated an elongation rates of 300 mm/min. Results
values for instantaneous, long term, short are found to be consistent with those
term, compliance, dynamic strains, Young’s obtained with ASTM D-412. The test results
Modulus, Tangent modulus, and Loss shown in Figure. 1 and Figure. 2 correspond
Modulus. Tests were also performed for to IS 3400 (2012) standards.
stress relaxation, to get force retention when
initial compression is set to be equal to
14.7% of the specimen axial length of 12
mm. Observations were taken for seven
different temperatures ranging from 30 to
900C. The tests were conducted over a period
of eight days, and the temperature readings
were noted down after every hour. All data
has been generated with a view to help in
carrying out better material modelling, and
develop more robust and sophisticated
models to predict material behaviour of Figure 2. Breaking Stress v/s Elongation
elastomers with and without wrinkling. Rates
Another study was carried out which looked
at the variations in % elongation when the
material samples were subjected to different
elongation rates, as shown in Figure. 3.
678
Pawar et al.
decreases steadily as the elongation rates are Ghatkopar for providing all the facilities
increased. required for testing.
CONCLUSION REFERENCES
In general, the experimental results have Akita T and Natori M C 2008 Sensitivity
shown the significant role of geometrical Analysis Method for Membrane
nonlinearity in the overall deformation Wrinkling Based on the Tension-Field
response of the materials. Except for one Theory AIAA Journal 46(6) 1516–1527
sample (which showed inconsistent doi:10.2514/1.33187.
behaviour at elongation rate of 50 mm/min), Berdichevsky V 1979 Variational-
the results obtained using both the standards Asymptotic Method of constructing a
(viz., IS3400 (2012) and ASTM D-412) Theory of Shells AIAA Journal 43(4)
showed good agreement with each other. 664–687 doi:10.1016/0021-
Since testing as per the two different 8928(79)90157-6.
standards involved different dimensions with
different gage length, width and thickness, Burela R G and Harursampath D 2012 VAM
the results are applicable to general class of applied to dimensional reduction of
loading which such type of material may face non-linear hyperelastic plates
in actual practice. A sudden jump in material International Journal of Engineering
behaviour was observed in terms of stress Science 59 0–102.
generated at 300 % elongation rate and doi:10.1016/j.ijengsci.2012.03.019.
physical reasoning to rationalize this Cao Y and Hutchinson J W 2012 From
characteristic is yet to be completely wrinkles to creases in elastomers: the
developed. Currently, a material model based instability and imperfection-sensitivity
on the VAM is being developed for the of wrinkling Proceedings of the Royal
analysis of flexible structures made of Society A: Mathematical Physical and
materials under study in this work. VAM as a Engineering Sciences 468(2137) 94–
mathematical tool has been successfully used 115 doi:10.1098/rspa.2011.0384.
in the development of material and Deng X and Pellegrino S 2012 Wrinkling of
geometrically nonlinear beam, strip and plate Orthotropic Viscoelastic Membranes
models and as a viable alternative to classical AIAA Journal 50(3) 668–681
micromechanics approach for the prediction doi:10.2514/1.J051255.
of material properties of heterogeneous
Gerngross T and Pellegrino S 2007
materials. For the sake of brevity, the model
Modelling of Anisotropic Viscoelastic
details and the description of the framework
Behaviour in Super-Pressure Balloons
is not provided here. In this work VAM will
1–15.
be used for material model development for
capturing deformation response like Martins P a L S Jorge R M N and Ferreira a J
wrinkling. M 2006 A comparative study of several
material models for prediction of
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS hyperelastic properties: Application to
The authors are extremely thankful to silicone-rubber and soft tissues Strain42
IRMRA, Thane, and Attuned Polymers Ltd 135–147doi:doi:10.1111/j.1475-
1305.2006.00257.x
679
Material Modelling and Simulations of Highly Flexible Structures
680
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
In this paper comparative study of friction includes multi-plate wet clutch of EN15 as
surface has done with different materials in core discs material and Cork composite,
order to reduce deformation and increasing Kevlar, SF-MC2, and HCC as friction
the service life of the clutch. This study materials.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Table 1. Material Properties (EN-GJS-400-15)
Property Value Property Value
Hardness 150 BHN Ultimate Tensile Strength 572 MPa
Elasticity 7107 GPa Tensile Yield Strength 503 MPa
Poisson's Ratio 0.33 Density 2.81 g/cc
Shear Modulus 26.9 GPa Shear strength 331 MPa
CTE, linear 250°C 25.2 µm/m°C Thermal Conductivity 130 W/m-K
3D MODELLING OF CLUTCH
3D modelling of clutch plates is done using
CATIA V5. Though multi-plate clutch
having 10plates (5 friction plates+5 pressure
plates) but in this paper a simplified clutch
model is used for analysis. Clutch assembly
then export to ANSYS 16.0 for further
analysis. All dimensions are kept constant
throughout the process in order to get better
results. Figure 1 shows the friction plate and Figure 1. Friction Plate
figure 2 represents pressure plate
682
Analysis and Optimization of Multi-Plate Wet Clutchwith Different Friction Material
FE MODELLING
The next step in modelling process is to
create a 3D finite element model for static
structural analysis using ANSYS 16.0.
Assembly created in CATIA V5 is imported
in ANSYS keeping all the dimensional data
and coordinate system untouched.
Figure 2. Pressure Plate In FE model friction surface and core disc
are considered as flexible or deformable
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING bodies while the pressure plate is considered
Since this paper includes calculation of as rigid body. The interface between core
deformation of the friction surface, hence disc and friction surface is bonded contact
uniform wear theory is applied for the and the interface between friction surface and
analysis. According to uniform wear theory pressure plate is modelled as frictional
following equation is used to find the applied asymmetric contact. Both contacts are
torque, defined by augmented Lagrangian contact
𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝜏 = 𝑛𝜇𝑅𝑊 (1) algorithm in both tangential and normal
Where, directions.
𝑛 = 𝑛1 + 𝑛2 − 1 (2) Meshing of assembly is done by proximity
n= no. of pairs contact surfaces and curvature setting keeping asymmetric
n 1 = no. of friction plates Newton-Raphson analysis process.
n 2 = no. of pressure plates
𝑅1 +𝑅2
𝑅= (3)
2
R=Mean radius of friction surface
R 1 = External radii of friction Surface
R 2 =Internal radii of friction Surface
W= Axial force
µ= Coefficient of friction
WEAR MODELLING
Figure 3. Meshing of Friction Plate
The wear at friction-pressure plate interface
is modelled on macro level and not on detail RESULT
molecular level. This phenomenon is based
Solution of FE model of clutch plate using
on local level wear law used to find relation
Cork as friction material calculates different
between the depth of wear hat particular
results viz. total deformation, max axial
point and distance s that the point slides
stress, Max. Shear stress, directional
against the interacting surfaces.
deformation, von Mises stress, etc. But for
683
Shaha and Tembhare
this paper we choose only Total deformation clutch Tribology International 505 154-
and Max. Shear stress. 164.
Total deformation= 0.06 mm Archard J F 1953 Contact and rubbing of flat
Max. Shear stress = 3035 MPa surfaces Journal of Applied Physics 24
981-988.
Ingram M Spikes H Noles J Watts R 2010
Contact properties of a wet clutch
friction material An International
Journal on the Science and Technology
of Friction Lubrication and Wear 43
815-821.
Kumar M Kodaganti V 2013Wet clutch
Figure 4. Meshing of Pressure plate modelling techniques Master’s Thesis In
The Automotive Engineering, Chalmers
University of Technology Goteborg
Sweden 21-31.
Podra P Andersson S 1999 Simulating
sliding wear with finite element method
Tribology International 32 71-81.
Soderberg A Andersson S 2009 Simulation
of wear and contact pressure distribution
at the pad-to-rotor interface in a disc
brake using general purpose finite
element analysis software An
Figure 5. Maximum Shear Stress International Journal on the Science and
Technology of Friction Lubrication and
CONCLUSION Wear 267 2243-2251.
This paper discuss how FE model is used for
analysis of deformation and shear stress on
different friction materials. During
engagement of clutch plates maximum shear
stress as well as von Moises stress is
developed at edges of friction surface. We
can compare the results of different friction
materials and choose best possible friction
material in order to increase the life and
performance of the clutch assembly.
REFERENCES
Abdullah O I Prof Schlattmann S 2012 The
effect of disc radius on heat flux and
temperature distribution on friction
684
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper, an FEM based numerical approach has been implemented on
a three-point bend test specimen to evaluate the flexural strength of NBG-18 nuclear
graphite. The flexural strength has been evaluated from the known values of tensile
and compressive strength of the graphite. NBG-18 has a significantly higher
compressive strength compared to its tensile strength. Hence, Drucker-Prager
plasticity model has been implemented in the present work. The model has been
developed based on a bi-axial fit of Mohr-Coulomb yield surface. Since the measured
values of tensile and compressive strengths of NBG-18 have a lot of scatter, thus a
pair of compressive and tensile strength is assigned to the plasticity model. The
flexural strength is obtained for a large number of such pairs of tensile and
compressive strengths selected randomly as per their frequency of occurence in the
experimental data. The results obtained from the simulation are compared with the
experimaental data, and it is observed that the simulation overpredicts the flexural
strength.
Keywords: Flexural strength; Plane stress; Drucker-Prager plasticity model;
NBG-18.
pair of tensile and compressive strength from the statistical distribution of the same
given as input to model is assigned randomly given in Hindley et al., 2012.
in accordance with the frequency of its The schematic representation of a three-point
occurrence in the experimental data. Mean bend specimen along with boundary
and standard deviation of flexural strength condition is shown in Figure 1. The geometry
obtained by simulation are compared with ofthe specimen is as per ASTM D7972. The
the same obtained experimentally. elastic properties for the NBG-18 (Philippe et
al., 2012)are taken as E=11.5 GPa and ν =
METHODOLOGY 0.2.
For the evaluation of the flexural strength of The finite 10 mm
the nuclear graphite grade NBG-18, FEM
10 mm
based numerical formulation has been
implemented. The stress-strain behaviour of
50 mm
the material is considered as elastic-perfectly
plastic. Due to large difference in the Figure 1.Schematic representation of 3-
strength values of tension and compression, point bend specimen.
the simple Von-Mises based plasticity
models cannot be used for the prediction of element analysis has been performed many
the flexural strength. Therefore plane stress times to evaluate the flexural strength using
based Drucker-Prager plasticity model with the different pairs of tensile and compressive
associative/non-associative flow rule has strengths. The results obtained are
been implemented (Neto et al., 2008). statistically fitted in both normal and Weibull
The frequency of occurrence of a pair of distributions.
tensile and compressive strength is obtained
Table 1. Statistical parameters obtained by fitting flexural strength data based on
simulation and experimental results
686
Numerical Evaluation of Flexural Strength of NBG-18 Graphite
0
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
CONCLUSIONS
This paper presents a FEM based approach
for the prediction of flexural strength of
NBG-18 nuclear graphite. Drucker-Prager
model has been implemented such that the
yield surface fits the Mohr-Coloumb surface
biaxially in tension and compression. The
predicted flexural strength range from 25-50
MPa while the experimental data ranges from
18-38 MPa. Thus, it can be concluded that
the numerical simulation over predicts the
flexural strength.
687
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Dissimilar material welding of AISI-304 stainless steel and copper are used
to utilize corrosion resistance of stainless steel and heat conductivity of copper to
enhance the performance characteristics of the heat exchanger. Due to the large
differences in material properties, there is uneven partitioning of the heat at the joint
interface in such dissimilar welding. Welding arc is traversed at a suitable offsetting
from the joint interface to compensate for the heat loss at the joint interface between
two plates. Experimentation for the understanding and analysis of the process
involving dissimilar welding becomes a cost intensive process. In the present work,
finite element method is employed for the simulation of dissimilar welding of AISI
304 stainless steel and Copper using MSC Marc 2014®. The method is employed to
obtain the temperature distribution and heat affected zone (HAZ) at different off-
setting distances.
Keywords: FEM, Temperature Distribution, Copper, AISI 304 and GTAW.
performed through experimental methods. In elements mesh used have a total 151200
the present work, a finite element model is hexahedral elements and 175160 nodes
developed to simulate the welding of (Figure. 2). The process parameters for
dissimilar couple consisting of Copper and simulation are
AISI 304 stainless steel. The welding is
assumed as a thermal analysis model
involving the high intensity of localized heat
source viz. Goldak’s double ellipsoidal heat
source model (2005) which is moving at a
predefined speed along a specified path. A
commercial FE software MSC Marc(R) is
employed to develop the transient non-linear
model. The model is employed to predict
temperatures distribution and heat affected Figure. 1. Isometric solid model of AISI
zone during butt welding. The study is 304 and Copper (mm)
performed to find the effect of off-setting of
the welding arc from the weld interface Table 3. Parameter of GTAW process
during gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW).
No. of Experiments
Due to the off-setting of the welding arc, the
study becomes difficult due to the 1 2 3 4 5
introduction of thermal contact resistance at Off-setting
0.5 1.0 1.25 1.50 1.75
the joint interface. (mm)
Electrode
Diameter 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING (mm)
Polarity DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE
A 3D finite element model is employed for N N N N N
welding simulation. The typical chemical Voltage (V) 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
composition and thermo-physical properties Current (A) 80 80 80 80 80
of the materials are given in Tables 1 and 2.
Welding
1.85 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.85
Speed (mm/s)
Table 1. Chemical Composition Arc
Materi
M
efficiency 50 50 50 50 50
al C Si P S Cr Ni Cu Fe (%)
Name n
Shielding gas
0. 0. 18 8 8 8 8 8
AISI 0. 2. 1. 8- __ Ba arc (L/min)
304
04 00 -
08 0 0 10 _ l.
5 3 20 The double ellipsoidal model is given by:
Coppe --- --- --- --- 99 ---
r
--- -- ---
-- -- --- - .9 - For the front side heat source:
Table 2. Physical Properties 6 3 f f ηQ −3 x 2 −3 y 2 −3 z 2
f ( x, y , z ) = v exp 2 exp 2 exp 2
abc f π π a b c
Thermal
Thermal Specific f
Material Density Expansion
Conductivity Heat (1)
Name (Kg/m3) coefficient
W/(m.K) J/(Kg.K)
(K)
AISI For the rear side heat source:
8000 1.8e-005 16 500
304
6 3 f rη Q −3 x 2 −3 y 2 −3 z 2
f ( x, y , z ) = v exp 2 exp 2 exp 2
Copper 8900 2.4e-005 387 390 abcrπ π a b cr
(2)
The geometric dimensions of problem
domain are given in Figure 1. The solid where x, y and z are the local coordinates of
model of the plates are generated using Solid the double ellipsoid model aligned with the
works(R), then the model is imported in weld line. The fractions f f and f r are the
Patran(R) 2010 through IGS format. The finite parameters for defining the fraction of the
689
FE Based Investigation of HAZ and Temperature Distribution in Cu and AISI 304 SS Weldment
heat deposited in the front and the rear of the Roughness (m), P is contact pressure (Pa),
welding arc, respectively. In the present H c is surface micro-hardness (Pa).
work, f f is selected as 1.4 and the f r is
selected as 0.6. The power of the welding
heat source (Q) is calculated by using
following empirical:
ηVI
Q= (3)
v
The parameters a is the weld width, b is the
weld penetration depth, c f and cr are the
forward length and rear length in the weld (a) (1)
path.
(b) (2)
691
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
matrix Poisson’s ratio creates a tri-axial stress As shown on figure 1(a) a tensile specimen
state. mold is shown. Three different specimens are
The other dominant factor which makes shown in figure 1(b). Silicone mold casting
characterization of polymers more complex method was preferred over CNC cutting of
as compared to metals is that of the effect of specimens out from a slab due to the cost
hydrostatic component of stress. On the effectiveness and eliminating the surface
contrary most metals, the deformation and cracks that forms due to tool tip cutting over
the failure stress of polymers are greatly the specimen.
affected by the hydrostatic pressure. It is
often observed that, while the neat resin
shows rather brittle fracture behaviour at a
very low tensile strain, it yields and shows
considerable plastic deformation in uniaxial
compression or in pure shear (Kinloch 1986).
Figure 2. Shear test setup (using Iosipescu fixture) with DIC for strain measurement
693
Mechanical Behaviour of Epoxy Resin under Tension, Compression and Shear using DIC: Experiments
and Numerical Modeling
Now resin is casted in these molds and cured For describing the pressure–dependent
at room temperature for 24 hours and then behaviour a quadratic yield surface was
post cured at 80° C in an oven. After chosen by Ernst et al. (2010). is described
complete curing the specimens were polished below.
on polishing papers of different grades with f (σs , σ t ) =σ 2 vm − a 0 − a1p (1)
flowing water on the polishing wheel. where
Stress-strain curve of epoxy matrix RIM135
1 3
under tension and shear are available in work p = σii & σ vm = sijsij
done by Ernst et al. (2010). Ernst et al. 3 2 (2)
reported that it behaves near to brittle in σ 2 − 3σ 2s
tension and ductile in shear. The ductile a0 =3σ 2s & a1 = 3 t (3)
σt
nature in shear doesn’t show any hardening.
Compression tests and its modelling are not The hardening curves are as below:
pl pl
included in his work. Compression tests with σ t =σ t (ε ) & σs =σs (ε ) (4)
cylindrical specimens as shown in figure 1 A non-associative flow rule is used to
were performed on ZICK UTM 100 kN determine the direction of flow. The plastic
capacity at 1mm/min displacement controlled potential used in current work is used
rate. Its stress-strain behaviour is shown in different as compared to that used by Ernst et
figure 3. In compression it yields at a higher al. The square root is removed to match up
stress (83 MPa) compared to that in tension the order with that of yield function ‘f’.
(60 MPa), and also behaves ductile with
g = σ 2 vm + αp 2 (5)
hardening. Failure strain of 0.4 is nearly
similar to that in shear as reported in Where
literature. 9 1 − 2v p
α = * (6)
2 1 + v p
Table 1. Summary of the implementation
algorithm for the polymer constitutive
model.
694
Gupta and Mahajan
REFERENCES
Abstract: Wet granulation consists of three granulation rate processes: wetting and
nucleation, consolidation and growth, and breakage and attrition. Of these, breakage
and attrition are the least understood. Breakage and attrition play an important role in
high-shear wet granulation. To understand the breakage phenomena, Discrete Element
Method (DEM) simulations were performed in a 3-dimensional shear flow. An
agglomerate was generated at the center of the simulation box, in order to study its
breakage behaviour. The effect of formulation properties such as, cohesive medium,
agglomerate shape, agglomerate size, on the breakage behaviour of the agglomerate
was studied using DEM simulations in a shear flow. Simulation results showed that
the formulation properties have significant influence on the breakage behaviour of the
agglomerate.
Keywords: Breakage; Discrete Element Method; Granulation; Shear flow.
simulations were performed with a The shear flow simulation was allowed to
spherical cluster (agglomerate) and a run till the system reaches steady state.
rectangular cluster and to study the effect Then, an agglomerate of 2 mm was
of size of the agglomerate, simulations generated at the center of the simulation
were performed with two different size (2 box by assigning the cohesive energy
mm and 1 mm) agglomerates. Simulation densities to the particles. The JKR model
results have showed the significant was used for the contacts with cohesion
influence of formulation properties on the [Johnson et al., 1979]. Four different
breakage behaviour of the agglomerate. cohesive energy densities of equal number
were assigned to the particles in the
SIMULATION METHODOLOGY agglomerate. Subsequently, the simulation
Simulations were performed in a three- was run in order to study the breakage
dimensional shear flow using open source behaviour of the agglomerate. Figure 2
LIGGGHTS software [Kloss et al., 2012]. shows the image of the agglomerate at
The simulation box was chosen to be 50d × time, t=0 sec. The medium particles
26d × 25d (except wall particles) long, (surrounding the agglomerate) have been
wide and high, respectively, in x, y and z rendered invisible in figure 2 in order to
directions. Periodic boundary conditions observe only agglomerate. In the
were used in the x and y directions. The simulation, different particles are
simulation box was filled with particles of differentiated by assigning the different
a size range of 190-210 μm. The diameter type number (different types are shown by
of wall particles (400 μm) was taken as different colours in the figure 2). Cohesive
double of the diameter of free flowing energy densities used (in the cluster) in the
particles in order to increase the roughness. present simulation are 2.725×105 J/m3,
Gravity was not considered in the system. 2.825×105 J/m3, 2.925×105 J/m3 and
The bottom was kept stationary and the top 3.025×105 J/m3. All the simulations were
wall was moved with a fixed velocity of repeated for five times with a different
1.414 m/s in the simulations. Figure 1 initial position file and a different initial
shows the snapshot of the simulation at cluster each time.
time, t=15 sec. The colour indicates the
velocity of the particles as shown in the
scale.
697
Study of Agglomerate Breakage in a Shear Flow using Numerical Simulations
CONCLUSIONS
Effect of formulation properties on the
Figure 3. Effect of agglomerate agglomerate breakage is studied using
shape on its breakage. DEM simulations in a shear flow.
To study the effect of cohesive medium on Simulation results shows that, cohesive
agglomerate breakage, simulations were medium takes more time for breakage than
performed using both cohesive medium and the non-cohesive medium, non-spherical
non-cohesive medium. Cohesive medium is cluster takes less time for breakage as
698
Akiti et al.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to express their
gratitude to the Prime Minister's
Fellowship Scheme for Doctoral Research,
India, and Procter & Gamble (China) for
their financial support.
REFERENCES
Cundall P A and Strack O D L 1979 A
discrete numerical model for granular
assemblies Geotechnique 29(1) 47-65
Iveson S M, Litster J D, Hapgood K and
Ennis B J 2001 Nucleation growth and
breakage phenomena in agitated wet
granulation processes: A review Powder
Technology 117(12) 3 – 39
Johnson K L, Kendall K, Roberts A D (1971)
Surface energy and the contact of elastic
solids Proceedings of the Royal Society
of London Series A 324 301-313
Kloss C Goniva C Hager A Amberger S and
Pirker S 2012 Models, algorithms and
validation for open source DEM and
CFD-DEM Progress in Computational
Fluid Dynamics 12 140-152
Reynolds G K Fu J S Cheong Y S Hounslow
M J and Salman A D 2005 Breakage in
granulation: A review Chemical
Engineering Science 60 3969-3992
699
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Concrete mix proportions are proposed by empirical equations and do not
account for slight modifications. The mix design becomes primitive in case of
introduction of new parameters as research progresses such as accounting for new
kinds of admixtures, super-plasticizers or binders. Structures nearing service life have
to be demolished and new establishments constructed in place of them which creates a
great impact on the environment in terms of the waste produced and the natural
resources needed. In such times, concrete recycling is a new avenue and its use in the
industry is not well established. The existing codes of practice do not account for
recycling aggregate and consider only natural aggregates. Hence the need for design
mix of recycled aggregate arises. Considering the strength prediction problem here as
a classification domain of input space, it is modelled using M5’ model tree algorithm.
The study conducted shows the performance promised by such a model to be accurate
within statistical error.
Keywords: Concrete compressive strength; M5’ model trees; Prediction model
on the input parameters provided to the programming searches the program space to
model. find a function fitting the data given as
Recycled aggregate concrete does not have shown in a study done to model prediction of
proper equations for mix design like natural velocity field [Gholami et al., 2015].
aggregate concrete. The works done aim at Decision trees search the data space working
identifying differences between the equations as a classifier on the input variables to split
to be used predicting strength for the two the space into regions and fit them with
varieties of concrete and hereby establish linear models as demonstrated by the study
working equations to ease the mix design conducted on predicting heart disease.
process. In general concrete is prepared as [Dangare et. al. 2012].
per mix design from codes of practice. Such Motivation to choose M5’ model tree
models aim at producing better estimation algorithm. Traditional methods of regression
models for preparing concrete by controlling analysis are not able to capture the effect of
the materials used which shall be the model variation in various types and qualities of
input parameters. The modelling aims at materials such as addition of fly ash,
producing linear reproducible equations admixtures or aggregate replacement since
which can be easily used to estimate the they employ error minimization. Non-
compressive strength of concrete on the basis traditional methods employ various other soft
of the selected input parameters. computing tools such as ANN which tend to
give a complex non-mathematical, symbolic
LITERATURE SURVEY relation between input and target variables.
Concrete compressive strength can be Use of gene expression programming
modelled by various methods which have employs search through program space and
been actively used in various applications. since concrete is a non-linear model,
Conventional methods such as linear identifying such relations becomes a hefty
regression models have been used in task. Also these methods become
modelling fatigue model fatigue strength of computationally demanding and hence time-
plain, ordinary and lightweight concrete consuming. Decision trees result in fewer
subjected to compressive stress [Tepfers and factors of significance than traditional
Kutti, 1979] and logistic regression models regression and neural networks, hence with a
have been used in mapping of landslide simpler structure produce accurate results as
hazard at Selangor, Malaysia [Lee and for predicting electrical energy consumption.
Pradhan, 2007]. These methods aim at [Tso and Yau, 2007).
producing linear predictors by way of error MODEL DEVELOPMENT
reduction in continuous domain or binary
The prediction model is being modelled
variables respectively. Unconventional
taking different varieties of concrete
methods work by the principle of mapping
considering natural aggregates, recycled
data into non-linear relationships by way of
aggregates, fly ash, silica fumes and different
artificial neural networks like in a research
proportions of admixtures and water cement.
conducted on predicting landslide for a
Natural Aggregate Concrete: A total of 103
susceptibility study. [Bui et al., 2015] where
data points have been taken from UCI data
the target variable is represented in terms of a
repository [Yeh, 1998] natural aggregate
weighted sum of inputs expressed by a non
concrete. For this problem, the following
linear mapping. Genetic expression
input parameters have been considered for
701
Prediction of Compressive Strength of Concrete with Natural Aggregates and Recycled Aggregates using
M5’ Model Tree Algorithm
the concrete: Slag; Cement; Water; Fly ash; For ease of understanding the models have
Coarse aggregate; Fine aggregate; Super been denoted as follows:
plasticizer. The target output is the mean
compressive strength of the concrete in 28 • NA-D1: Model taking Cement, Slag and
days measured in MPa. Fly Ash as separate entities.
Recycled Aggregate Concrete: A total of 99 • NA-D2: Model taking Cement, Slag and
data points have been collected and used for Fly Ash as sum given by Binder
• RA-D1: Model taking Cement, Silica
modelling for concrete with aggregates under
fume, Fly Ash, Chemical Admixtures,
replacement of natural aggregate by recycled Mineral Admixture as separate entities.
aggregate through referring to various • RA-D2: Model taking Cement, Silica
reference papers [Dilbas et al., 2014], [Rahal, fume, Fly Ash, Chemical Admixtures,
2007], [Cassucio et al., 2008], [Ravindrarajah Mineral Admixtures as sum given by
and Tam, 1985], [Kou et al., 2007], [Duan et Binder
al., 2013], [Butler et al., 2013] and [Kou, RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
2006] on recycled aggregate concrete. For
The simulations for models have been carried
this problem, the following input parameters
out using R software and studies have been
have been considered for the concrete: Silica
performed for mean error and correlation
fume; Sand; Cement; Water; Fly ash; Coarse
between predicted values of compressive
aggregate; Fine aggregate; Recycled
strength and actual values. The values have
aggregate; Chemical admixture; Mineral
been tabulated in Table 1.
admixture; Super-plasticizer. The target
output is the mean compressive strength of
the concrete in 28 days measured in MPa.
model tree algorithm Construction and Open channel bend using a gene
Building Materials 94 137-147. expression programming model Flow
Bui D T Tuan T A Klempe H Pradhan B and Measurement and Instrumentation 46
Revhaug I 2015 Spatial prediction 189-192.
models for shallow landslide hazards a Kou S C 2006 Reusing recycled aggregates
comparative assessment of the efficacy in structure concrete Ph.D. Thesis - The
of support vector machines artificial Hong Kong Polytechnic University 75-
neural networks kernel logistic 188
regression and logistic model tree Kou S C Poon C S and Chan D 2007
Landslides 12 1-18. Influence of fly ash as cement
Butler L West J S and Tighe S L 2013 Effect replacement on the properties of
of recycled concrete coarse aggregate recycled aggregate concrete Journal of
from multiple sources on the hardened Materials in Civil Engineering 19 709-
properties of concrete with equivalent 717.
compressive strength Construction and Lee S and Pradhan B 2007 Landslide hazard
Building Materials 47 1292-1301. mapping at Selangor Malaysia using
Casuccio M Torrijos M C Giaccio G and frequency ratio and logistic regression
Zerbino R 2008 Failure mechanism of models Landslides 4 33-41.
recycled aggregate concrete Rahal K 2007 Mechanical properties of
Construction and Building Materials 22 concrete with recycled coarse
1500-1506. aggregate Building and environment 42
Concrete Slump Test data donated by Yeh I 407-415.
C from UCI repository Ravindrarajah R S and Tam C T 1985
https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets/C Properties of concrete made with
oncrete+Slump+Test. crushed concrete as coarse aggregate
Dilbas H Şimşek M and Çakır Ö 2014 An Magazine of Concrete Research 37 29-
investigation on mechanical and 38.
physical properties of recycled Tepfers R and Kutti T 1979 Fatigue strength
aggregate concrete (RAC) with and of plain, ordinary and lightweight
without silica fume Construction and concrete ACI Journal Proceedings 76
Building Materials 61 50-59. 635-652.
Duan Z H Kou S C and Poon C S 2013 Using Tso G K and Yau K K 2007 predicting
artificial neural networks for predicting electricity energy consumption A
the elastic modulus of recycled comparison of regression analysis,
aggregate concrete Construction and decision tree and neural networks
Building Materials 44 524-532. Energy 32 1761-1768.
Frank E Wang Y Inglis S Holmes G & Yeh I-Cheng 1998 Modeling of strength of
Witten I H 1998 Using model trees for high performance concrete using
classification Machine Learning 32(1) artificial neural networks, Cement and
63-76. Concrete Research 28 1797-1808.
Gholami A Bonakdari H Zaji A H Akhtari A
A and Khodashenas S R 2015
Predicting the velocity field in a 90°
703
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
thickness of EPS geofoam. Padade and geofoam for this analysis is calculated by
Mandal (2012) carried out FEA using Plaxis using the Eq. (1) given EDO (1992).
2D software to visualize horizontal 𝜐 = 0.0056𝜌 + 0.0024 (1)
displacements and deviator stress-strain patterns
of EPS geofoam. The material EPS geofoam Where ρ is density of EPS geofoam (kg/m3).
was modeled as a Mohr-Coulomb model.
They concluded that finite element analysis Table 1. Material properties of EPS
results reasonably agreed with experimental geofoam used in FEA
study. In order to study the creep behaviors
ρ c ϕ E ti σf
of EPS geofoam, many researchers have υ
3
(kg/m ) (kPa) (°) (kPa) (kPa)
performed tests on different sizes and shapes
of EPS of geofoam samples. However, no 12 28.75 1.25 1611 88 0.1
creep studies have been carried out on 15 32.25 1.38 2769 169 0.1
numerical modeling of EPS geofoam. The
present study objectives to investigate EPS 20 37.5 2.25 5086 219 0.12
geofoam creep using Plaxis 3D software with
different densities. The effect of low density
of EPS geofoam on creep behavior is
reported. Further, the results related to
vertical displacement pattern and creep
strain, were validating with experimental test
data.
increase with an increase in the duration. It is kg/m3 densities of EPS geofoam. The
also observed this variation is the same for comparison graph shows that the creep strain
all the densities of EPS geofoam. The total behavior determined by FEA was smaller
vertical displacement visualization of EPS than that by experimental data.
geofoam with different densities is shown in
Figure 2.
Table 2. Comparison of creep strain values obtained from experiments and FEA
Time EPS12 EPS15 EPS20
(days) Axial strain (%) Axial strain (%) Axial strain (%)
Exp. FEA Var. Exp. FEA Var. Exp. FEA Var.
1 3 2 33 1 0.9 10 0.2 0.2 29
55 9 7 22 5 3 31 1 0.6 37
110 15 11 27 10 7 29 4 2.6 34
220 27 20 26 22 16 29 10 6.7 33
S= degree of saturation (in fraction, 1m and 3m for two sites is modeled. Free
maximum = 1.0); field peak pressure is calculated and is
D = Scaled distance, m/kg1/3 applied on the spherical crater boundary.
FLAC3D model is given in Fig. 1. Brick zone
Eq. (1) will be used to estimate free field size is taken as 25 m × 20 m × 11 m and 25
pressure at explosion crater boundary. Free m × 20 m × 13 m. Element size in all the
field peak pressure can be calculated using directions are kept as 0.5m. Soil is modeled
present PPV model for soil sites. Seven and as Mohr-Coulomb model. Soil input
two field data for saturated clay and saturated parameters to FLAC3D namely Young’s
alluvium sand site of Leong et al. (2007) and modulus, Poisson’s ratio, shear modulus,
Charlie et al. (1992) have been selected bulk modulus, cohesion and angle of friction
respectively. The details of the field data are are estimated.
shown in Table 1.
It is proposed to model the soil subjected to
blast in FLAC3D and measure PPV at various
points and compare with the field data. After
blast, PPV is calculated from presently
developed model. Summary of field blast
parameters is given in Table 1.
Measurement
Blast Charge Measurement
Author Type of soil points away
depth, m weight, kg depth, m
from blast, m
Leong et
Saturated clay 1 4.352 1 1.5
al. (2007)
Leong et Partially saturated 1.6, 2, 3, 4.3
2, 2.5 4.352 2, 2.5
al. (2007) sand and 4.8
Charlie et Saturated
3 0.0045 0.1 6.1, 12.2
al. (1992) alluvium sand
are not readily calculated. However, these Comparison of PPVs for saturated clay with
relationships are not required since the IS 6922 (1973) and Drake and Little (1983)
design of protective structures/foundations to model is done. It is observed that Drake and
resist shock loads is based on the peak values Little (1983) gives highest value of PPV and
of the induced motion rather than the actual FLAC gives lowest PPV value. IS 6922
motion-time relationships (UFC 3-340-02, (1973) gives lower PPV value than the field
2008). PPV value. The possible reason could be
Blast is not explicitly simulated in analysis. only one site constant for soil in empirical
Blast free field pressure is applied at the relationship for PPV in IS 6922 (1973). The
crater boundary. Pressure is applied normal possible reason for Drake and Little (1983)
to the crater boundary which is uniformly providing highest value is sensitivity of
attenuation constant. Comparison of PPVs
distributed along the crater boundary. The
for partially saturated sand with FLAC, IS
geometry of the crater and the dynamic load 6922 (1973) and Drake and Little (1983)
condition are symmetrical around a results is done. In this case, PPV obtained
horizontal axis through the centre of the from FLAC gives highest value for lower
crater. The crater diameter is taken as 1 m. scaled distance and lowest value for higher
The sites of Leong et al. (2007) and Charlie scaled distance. The possible reason could be
et al. (1992) have been modeled. due to partly saturated soil. Comparison of
PPV for coarse sand is done. It is clear that
ANALYSIS OF RESULTS field value gives highest PPV and IS 6922
(1973) gives lowest value. It is also observed
FLAC3D results for both the soil sites are that IS 6922 (1973) provides lower PPV
presented here. Comparison of PPV values value than field value in case of soil unlike in
obtained from field and FLAC3D results is soil where, it provides conservative value.
presented in Table 2. The results have been Hence, IS 6922 (1973) provides closer value
compared with the results obtained by using of PPV in case of soil.
TM 5-855-1 (1986).
History of particle velocity versus time at PARAMETRIC STUDY FOR
saturated clay, partially saturated sand and CALIBRATION OF FLAC3D
coarse sand sites at various distances away SIMULATION
from the blast is plotted. For saturated clay, Mesh size is varied beyond elements at
the particle velocity versus time history plot distances way from blast point. It is observed
is obtained at distances 1m, 1.5m and 3.3m that as y-dimension of element increases, the
away from the blast point using Mohr- PPV value decreases. Young’s modulus,
Coulomb model. For partially saturated sand, Poisson’s ratio, run time and time step are
the particle velocity versus time history plot also varied. It is observed that the effects of
is obtained at distances 1.6m, 2m, 3m, 4.3m, variations of these parameters on PPV are not
4.8m and 6.5m away from the blast point significant. Effects of various parameters on
using Mohr’s Coulomb model. Comparison PPV in FLAC3D are studied.
of PPV values obtained from field and
FLAC3D is presented. It is observed that PPV CONSTITUTIVE MODEL OF SOIL
from obtained from TM5-855-1 is more than
Mohr-Coulomb model has been used to
the field value for saturated clay and partially
model soil. To know the sensitivity of model,
saturated sand. However, for coarse sand,
three other models namely Drucker Prager,
PPV obtained from TM5-855-1 is less than
Double yield and Shear hardening models
the field value. PPV obtained from FLAC is
were used to model Sites. From the plots of
less than the field value in most of the cases.
the particle velocity versus time history for
shear hardening model, Drucker Prager
710
Kumar et al.
model and Double yield model, PPV was User’s Manual Itasca Consulting Group
estimated and presented. It is observed that Minneapolis Minnesota USA
Mohr Coulomb model gives PPV which is IS 6922 1973 Criteria for Safety and Design
very close to field value. Hence, Mohr- of Structures subject to Underground
Coulomb model will be adopted in further blast BIS New Delhi
soil structure interaction under blast loading.
Kumar R 2015 Responses of shallow
MESH SIZE foundations in soils and rocks subjected
to blast loadings PhD thesis IIT
The varied mesh size is presented. The
Bombay
results of PPV for these mesh sizes for Mohr-
Coulomb model is presented. It is observed Leong E C Anand S H Cheong, K. and Lim,
that if element size increases, PPV decreases. C. H. 2007 Re-examination of peak
Hence, optimum size of mesh should be stress and scaled distance due to ground
selected. Mesh size plays important role in shock International Journal of Impact
modelling blast wave propagation. Drucker- Engineering 34 1487–1499
Prager model and Mohr-Coulomb model TM 5-855-1 1986 Fundamentals of
have been fixed and mesh size of model has Protective Design for Conventional
been varied. It is observed that mesh size of Weapons United States Department of
1×1×1m gives best correlation with field the Army Technical Manual U.S.
value. Hence, mesh size of 1×1×1m will be Department of the Army Vicksburg MS
adopted in further Soil structure modelling
under blast loading. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 3-340-02
2008 Structures to resist the effects of
CONCLUSION accidental explosions Department of
Defense United States of America
Modelling of shock wave propagation has
been done with FLAC3D to calibrate the W A Charlie Jacobs F J and Doehring, D O
model for further carrying out soil-structure 1992 Blast induced liquefaction of an
interaction modelling. Peak pressure is alluvial sand deposit Geotech. Testing J.
applied at the crater using the PPV model ASTM 15(1) 14-23
developed by the authors. Mohr-Coulomb
model has been found to give best
correlations with the field data. The effects of
mesh size, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio
and time step on FLAC simulation were also
presented. The mesh size of 1mx1mx1m
gives best correlations with the field value.
Validity and suitability of FLAC3D were
established by comparisons with existing
empirical formulae for PPV.
REFERENCES
Drake L J and Little C D J 1983 Ground
shock from Penetrating Conventional
Weapons U.S. Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station
Vicksburg Mississippi, 1-6
FLAC3D 2009 Fast Langragian Analysis of
Continua in 3 Dimensions, Version 4.00
711
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
INTRODUCTION MICROSTRUCTURE-GUIDED
CONSTITUTIVE MODELLING
Modification of traditional Portland cement-
based concrete through incorporation of The current approach involves generation of
supplementary cementitious materials and 3D virtual microstructure based on
development of non-conventional cement- microstructural features obtained from 3D
free binding materials for improved high resolution synchrotron image of the
sustainability are being increasingly popular material. Generation of RVE is accomplished
in recent years. Traditionally trial and error- here using the Lubachhevsky-Stillinger
based experimental testing is being used for algorithm [Lubachevsky and Stillinger 1990].
property-evaluation as well as design of such This algorithm employs non-overlapping
new materials without looking into the real particles on a cubical RVE. First, the desired
phenomena occurring at the Nano/micro level number of particles is randomly distributed
of the composites that dictate macro-scale inside the periodic bounding box with
behavior. But, significant improvement in random initial velocities of the particles. The
computational power for mathematical radius of each particle is initialized as zero.
modelling and numerical simulation in recent The radius of ith particle (ri) in the next event
years raises the possibilities of is a function of the growth rate (gi), which is
microstructure-based design and tailored to attain the desired particle size
development of such new micro- distribution, as shown in Eq. 1.
heterogeneous materials through numerical
dri
simulation. The effective elastic properties of gi (1)
heterogeneous materials have traditionally dt
n1
been predicted using effective media theories, n
The growth rate between time t and t is
self-consistent schemes, and various computed using a finite difference scheme as
analytical homogenization methods. follows:
However, in many cases, these
methodologies only give estimates or bounds ( ri n 1 ri n )
gi (2)
for the macroscopic properties. Furthermore, t
these techniques have been proved to be The particle radii are then updated using the
insufficient when the stiffness contrast growth rate and time increment. The position
between the phases is large or when large of particle “i” is also updated considering a
inclusion volume fractions are incorporated constant velocity between time nodes.
[Idiart et al. 2009]. This paper presents a Checks for particle contacts and post-contact
micro-mechanical numerical model for velocities are made in each time step, and all
determination of macroscopic material particle positions are updated using a forward
properties of novel cementitious materials Euler scheme. These steps are repeated and in
towards microstructure-based design of such the process of iterations the particles change
materials. position in the bounding box, collide and
grow in order to obtain the desired volume
___________________________
fraction. Finally, the obtained microstructural and the analysis is implemented through
information is scripted in python language to ABAQUSTM solver. Thus this approach
be imported to ABAQUSTM for finite element simulates a strain- (or displacement)
implementation. controlled test scenario. To efficiently handle
post-processing of the simulated element
After generation of the microstructure, the
stresses/strains, a homogenization module is
representative volume element (RVE) is
developed to obtain effective volume-
meshed with a Python script and periodic
averaged RVE stress/strains or effective
boundary conditions are implemented on the
homogenized Young’s modulus of the
RVE as nodal displacement constraints
material. The numerical simulation approach
through a Python language program. A
is summarized in Figure 1.
uniaxial strain is then applied on the RVE
Thus synchrotron XRT is used to quantify the geopolymers) using the Mori-Tanaka
pore structure alone in this study. method. Furthermore, fly ash particles with
cavities and the unreacted fly ash particles
The intrinsic elastic property of component
are homogenized together. Thus, pores,
phases in the fly ash geopolymer is classified
unreacted fly ash (including those with
and quantified using statistical
cavities) and the matrix (partially activated
nanoindentation. Figure 2(c) shows the peaks
fly ash homogenized with the N-A-S-H gel)
obtained through statistical deconvolution of
are used as the different microstructural
the histogram. Four characteristic peaks are
phases in numerical simulation. The size
observed in the histogram. The peaks were
distribution of unreacted fly ash (starting
assigned to different solid phases based on
material) as obtained from laser diffraction is
microstructural observation.
used in numerical simulation since unreacted
For simplification, partially activated fly ash fly ash particles could not be segmented
is homogenized with the N-A-S-H gel (which separately from partially activated fly ash in
is the major reaction product in fly ash-based XRT.
Figure 2. (a) Original XRT image, (b) 3D image after pore segmentation (two-phase;
pore and solid), and (c) deconvoluted component peaks for the four distinctly
identifiable microstructural phases in the solid component of the fly ash geopolymer
obtained from nanoindentation. The area under each deconvoluted peak is the fraction
of that respective solid phase in all solids in the paste.
714
Das et al.
Figure 3: Step-I: (a) FE model showing the unreacted fly ash and matrix; (b) stress
distribution (MPa) under an imposed strain of 0.12%, and (c) the constitutive
relationship in the linear elastic regime.
Figure 4: Stage-II: (a) FE model showing the matrix (from Stage-I) and the pores ; (b)
stress distribution (MPa) under a strain of 0.1%, and (c) the constitutive relationship in
the linear elastic regime
Abstract: To capture the size effects predominant at the nano scale, different nonlocal
theories of elasticity have been proposed in the literature. In the present paper, the
buckling behaviour of nano beams is investigated using different nonlocal elasticity
theories. The governing equations for different nonlocal theories such as Eringen’s
stress gradient theory, second order strain gradient theory (with both negative and
positive nonlocal coefficients), modified couple stress theory (MCST), modified strain
gradient theory (MSGT) and Mechanically-based theory are derived considering
Euler-Bernoulli beam finite element. A detailed parametric study is carried out to
investigate the efficacy of different nonlocal theories for the prediction of critical
buckling load of SS, CC, CS and CF nano beams. It is observed that critical buckling
load decreases with the inclusion of nonlocal effect through Eringen’s model and
second order strain gradient model with positive sign, but depicts increasing trend for
other nonlocal models. The nonlocal effects are found to be significantly
overestimated through MCST and MSGT with the same value of nonlocal parameters.
Keywords: size effect; nonlocal theory; couple stress; stress and strain gradients.
Eringen’s stress gradient theory (SGT) Using the homogenization approach for the
assumes that the stress at a point is displacement field of the discrete media, the
strain gradient elasticity model based x and ξ are considered. The components of
constitutive relation with positive nonlocal the position vectors x and ξ are given by
coefficient (PSGT) can be written as (Chang x = [x z ]Tand ξ =[ ξ ζ ]T , respectively.
and Gao, 1995):
The nonlocal potential energy of the beam
= (
σ ij Cijkl ε kl + l 2ε kl ,mm ) (3) forms the basis for the additional stiffness
due to the distance decaying mutual body
Considering an additional equilibrium forces and is given by (Di Paola et al., 2011):
equation for moment of couple to constrain
the free floating nature of the couple stress U snl ( η ) = (1 / 4) ∫∫ g[r T η]2 dV (ξ ) dV ( x) (10)
tensor, the strain energy expression for
MCST is given by (Yang et al., 2002): where η( x, ξ, t ) = u(ξ, t ) − u( x, t ) is the
= Us
1
2V∫ ( σ ij ε ij + mijs χ ijs )dV (4)
relative displacement between points x and
ξ , r ( x, ξ ) is the unit vector associated with
where mijs is symmetric part of the couple the direction x − ξ and g ( x, ξ ) is a distance
decaying attenuation function.
stress tensor and χ ijs is the symmetric
curvature tensor. The additional constitutive In the available literature, the effectiveness of
relation is given by: different nonlocal models to capture scale
effects has not been studied and is the main
mijs = 2l 2 µχ ijs (5) aim of this work. The variational statements
for linear elastic isotropic Euler-Bernouli
The strain energy using MSGT (Lam et al., beam incorporating the above models are
2003), constructed as a function of the derived and finite element formulation is
symmetric strain, dilatation gradient, developed considering 3-noded element with
deviatoric stretch gradient and symmetric quintic variation of the transverse
rotation gradient tensors, can be written as: displacement along x. The buckling
=
Us
1
2 V∫
(σ ijε ij + piγ i + τ ijk(1)ηijk(1) + mijs χijs )dV (6) characteristics of nanobeams are investigated
employing the developed FE models.. The
where pi and , τ ijk(1) are higher order stresses, essential boundary conditions of all the
nonlocal theories discussed are same as those
γ i is dilatation gradient and ηijk(1) is deviatoric of the classical theory.
stretch gradient. The additional constitutive
relation can be given by: RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
pi = 2l02 µγ i (7) The dimensions of the nanobeam is taken as
length (L) = 17.11 nm, width (B) = 2.282 nm
τ ijk(1) = 2l12 µηijk(1) (8) and height (h) = 0.34 nm [Allegri et al.,
2013]. Young’s modulus (E) and Poisson’s
ratio (υ) are taken as 1.1 TPa and 0.3,
mijs = 2l22 µχ ijs (9) respectively [Ansari et al., 2012]. The
variation of non-dimensional critical
where l0 , l1 and l2 are the nonlocal
buckling load [ N= cr N cr × ( L2 / EI )] with
parameters associated with dilatation
different values of the nonlocal parameters is
gradients, deviatoric stretch gradients and
found out for all the nonlocal theories
rotation gradients, respectively. The MCST is
considered above. The results for four
a special case of the MSGT when the effects
different boundary conditions are given in
of dilatation gradient and deviatoric stretch
Tables 1-4.
gradient are neglected.
In the mechanically based theory (MBT), two
arbitrary points in a beam having coordinates
717
Buckling of Nanobeams using Different Nonlocal Theories
Table 1. Non-dimensional critical buckling load ( N cr ) for simply supported (SS) beam.
718
Babu and Badri
In MSGT, all three nonlocal parameters are Eringen A C 1972 Linear theory of nonlocal
kept same. The results from Tables 1-4 elasticity and dispersion of plane waves
depict that the non-dimensional critical International Journal of Engineering
buckling load decreases with the increase in Science 10 425-435
the nonlocal parameters for the stress Eringen A C 1983 On differential equations
gradient and the strain gradient model with of nonlocal elasticity and solutions of
positive sign. Its value increased with the screw dislocation and surface waves
increase in the nonlocal parameter for rest of Journal of Applied Physics 54 4703-
the nonlocal models. 4710
CONCLUSION Lam D C C Yang F Chong A C M Wang J
and Tong P 2003 Experiments and
It can be concluded from the results theory in strain gradient elasticity
presented that the range of nonlocal Journal of the Mechanics and Physics
parameters used for SGT, NSGT, PSGT and of Solids 51 1477-1508
MBT are not appropriate to be used for
MCST and MSGT which show extremely Yang F Chong A C M Lam D C C and Tong
large differences from the classical theory. P 2002 Couple stress based strain
Further studies through atomistic simulation gradient theory for elasticity
are required to arrive at the values of International Journal of Solids and
nonlocal parameters for each model. Structures 39 2731-2743
Appendix: Additional Formulae
REFERENCES
Aifantis E C 1992 On the role of gradients in Symmetric curvature tensor:
the localization of deformation and
fracture International Journal of
χ ijs
= (θ i, j + θ j ,i ) 2 (11)
Engineering Science 30 1279-1299 Rotation vector:
Allegri G Scarpa F Chowdhury R and
Adhikari S 2013 Wave propagation in
1
( curl ( u ) )i
θi =
2
(12)
periodically supported nanoribbons: a Dilatation gradient:
nonlocal elasticity approach Journal of
Vibration and Acoustics 135 041017 γ i = ε mm ,i (13)
Ansari R Gholami R and Rouhi H 2012 Deviatoric stretch gradient:
Vibration analysis of single-walled
ηijk(1)= ( ε ij ,k + ε jk ,i + ε ki , j )
1
carbon nanotubes using different
3
gradient elasticity theories Composites:
− δ ij ( ε mm ,k + 2ε mk ,m ) + δ jk ( ε mm ,i
1 (14)
Part B 43 2985-2989
15
+ 2ε mi ,m ) + δ ki ( ε mm , j + 2ε mj ,m )
Chang C S and Gao J 1995 Second-gradient
constitutive theory for granular material
with random packing structure Distance decaying attenuation function:
International Journal of Solids and x −ξ
E −
Structures 32 2279-2293 g ( x, ξ ) = e l (15)
2lA2
Di Paola M Failla G Sofi A and Zingales M
2011 A mechanically-based approach to
non-local beam theories International
Journal of Mechanical Sciences 53 676-
687
719
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
721
Size Dependence in Mechanical Behaviour of Polystyrene Micropillars under Compression
rigid flat indenting surface. For all the barrels at the final stages of the deformation.
diameters of tested PS micropillars, their The bottom face of the sample is on a thin
respective geometry is modeled and is film instead hard surface and cannot expand
simulated as that of experimental conditions. freely as compare compression test of bulk
samples. Also, friction between the sample
the indenter is not controlled. The stress
strain plots are obtained by fitting the load
displacement behavior with a constitutive
model for amorphous polymers. The fits are
obtained by varying the important parameters
of the constitutive model. Figure 5 shows fits
for a micropillar of diameter 45 μm. Yield
exhibited by pillars are governed by the
athermal yield stress (S 0 ) in the model. This
quantity (Figure 5), as well as the stress at
which yielding occurs, increases with
decrease in diameter.
723
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Length scale dependent deformation mechanisms have been a huge source
of interest with the advancement in the fields of nanoscience and nanotechnology.
Studies in nano crystalline materials have shown that the deformation mechanism
changes with the reduction of grain size beyond a critical size. In the present study,
we investigate the effect of length scale on the nanocomposites, primarily on bio-
inspired nanocomposites. In order to obtain the deformation behavior of nanoscale
material with atomistic details, molecular dynamics (MD) is used. The present study
shows that the model nanocomposite materials exhibit the transition in the
deformation behaviour similar to that of observed in nanocrystalline materials with
reducing length scale. However, in the nanocomposite materials, the dislocation
activities are limited only to the soft matrix. This study would be useful in providing
design guidelines in the production of advanced materials.
Keywords: Mechanical properties; Nanocomposites; Molecular dynamics.
COMPUTATIONAL METHOD
In order to obtain the generic understanding
of the effect of size on the overall mechanical
behaviour of the nanocomposite, the concept
Figure 1.Details of the simulated
of model material is used. To create the model. (a) unit cell of 2D hexagonal
model material, the interatomic force is lattice (b) 2D hexagonal lattice structure,
modelled using Lennard-Jones (LJ) potential. (c) regularly staggered model (Red
The LJ potential is given by Eq.(1), where σ colour refers to platelet and blue colour
&𝜖are referred to as the LJ parameters which refers to matrix)
are respectively zero-energy interatomic The two dimensional crystal lattice and
distance and bond strength of the interatomic nanocomposite model used to study the
potential. length scale effect of bio-inspired
𝜎 12 𝜎 6 nanocomposite model is shown in the Figure.
𝜑(𝑟) = 4𝜖 �� � −� � � (1)
𝑟 𝑟 (1). The subplot (a) shows the unit cell of the
Further, we follow the traditional convention lattice structure used and subplot (b) shows
of using reduced units in order to obtain the the hexagonal crystal lattice. The
generic mechanical behaviour of the nanocomposite model made of this
nanocomposites. The mineral platelets are hexagonal lattice is shown in the subplot (c).
hard, brittle and strong. In contrast, the Once the initial atomic positions and inter-
protein matrix is soft, ductile, and weak. atomic potentials are defined for the
There is a need to implement different nanocomposite model, the initial atomic
mechanical behaviour for different velocities and boundary conditions are
constituents. Therefore, the values of 𝜖 for necessary for running a molecular dynamics
platelet, matrix and their interaction are (MD) simulation. The initial velocity
chosen as 1, 0.1 and 0.1 respectively. This distribution of atoms is determined from the
leads to the strength and modulus value of temperature of the model. In our simulations
platelet 10 times that of matrix. The value of in order to focus on the effect of structural
σ is kept unity for all the constituents to effect, the temperature value of 0.0001 (in
maintain uniform lattice structure. These reduced units) is used, leading to very small
values of σ and 𝜖 are representative values
725
Effect of Length Scale on the Mechanical Behaviour of Bio-inspired Nanocomposites
atomic velocities. The boundary conditions increase in the stress levels are observed due
are determined from the type of numerical to the arrest of (i)the movement of
experiments to be performed. We do dislocation, (ii)the growth of cracks, and
computational uni-axial tensile tests by (iii)the emission of dislocation itself. Further,
applying constant strain-rate in the vertical a significant reduction in the stress levels are
direction. Therefore, nanocomposite is observed due to (i)the nucleation of
modelled with free and expandable boundary dislocations, (ii) nucleation of cracks, and
in the Y-direction and periodic boundary (iii) growth of cracks. Moreover, the bigger
condition in the X-direction. Further models show the nucleation of a central
modelling settings are used similar to that of nanocrack in the gap between the platelets.
used in the literature [Mathiazhagan and This nanocrack grows with the strain.
Anup, 2016]. Further, the open source MD
solver, LAMMPS, is used to model and solve
the equations of motion of the atoms with a
time-step (∆t) of 0.001. Solving the
Newton’s equations of motion, the position
and velocity of every atom are obtained until
the model undergoes complete failure. The
stress and strain at each time-step of the
simulation is calculated. The following
section, we discuss how the deformation and
failure mechanisms occur with different
length scale of the model.
REFERENCES
Buehler M J 2008 Atomistic modeling of
materials failure Springer New York.
Ji B and Gao H 2010 Mechanical principles
of biological nanocomposites Annu. Rev.
Mater. Res.40 77–100.
Mathiazhagan S and Anup S 2016 Influence
of platelet aspect ratio on the mechanical
727
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Peridynamic analysis is being carried out for linear micro-elastic material
for an infinite bar. Dispersion curves are compared between non-local continuum
theories. Results show that for the propagating modes, peridynamic material to be a
low-pass filter with an escape frequency, in accordance to the Eringen stress gradient
theory. Perdynamics gave an excellent agreement with long-range interactions of 1D
spring mass lattice within the first Brillouin zone.
Keywords: Peridynamics; Dispersion; Escape frequency; Lattice dynamics; Non-
locality.
A 1D periodic lattice of identical particles that of the peridynamics and then the
of mass m placed at a distance 𝑑to each bracketing method is applied, if necessary.
otheris considered. A mass at a location n Numerical values used for the calculations
interacts with N number of its neighbours in
are, 𝜌 = 7850 kg/m3, E = 200 * 109 Pa and L
a symmetrical way. Interaction is assumed
= 1 m.
as a linear spring with constant
𝐾𝑛−𝑟,𝑛 between particles at n-r and n for –N RESULTS
≤ r ≤ N. Then, the equation of motion is
given as Dispersion pair for a considered frequency
2 N
d ξn – wavenumber range is shown in the figure
m = ∑ K n−r,n [ξn−r − 2ξn + ξn+r ] (3)
dt 2 1. Characteristics that can be seen are as
r=0
where, 𝜉𝑛 is the displacement of the particle follows. For an angular frequency there are
at location x =nd from a origin. Here n and infinite values of wavenumber. In the figure
N are natural numbers. only four complex modes are shown. There
is maximum value of 𝜔 after which no real
Fourier transform of the equations of pair exists.There is a frequency band within
motion of models is done by assuming its which multiplicity in real wavenumber
solution of the form of a plane waves given increases. Multiplicity is infinite at a single
as, frequency, whose value is given as√(( 𝐶̅ 𝐿)/
u(x, t) = e−i(kx−ωt) (4) 𝜌). This is defined as escape frequency.
The relation between the wave
parameters𝜔(𝑘) is known as the dispersion Group speeds of complex pairs, excluding a
relation. band of frequencies around this maximum,
Dispersion relations are obtained as follows. are unbounded. Within this band complex
Substitution of Eq. (4) into Eq. (1) gives pair damp with propagation, that is, these
L are in-homogenous waves. Group speed for
2
ρω = ∫ C̅(ξ) [1 − cos kξ] dξ
2 all the real pairs is bounded. Hence, the
L
−
2 only propagating waves along the bar are
Applying Eq. (2) and carrying out due to the real pairs. Group speeds of these
integrating gives pairs are shown in the figure 2.Further, from
kL
ρω2 sin ( 2 ) plots the following characteristics can be
1− = (5) seen. For lower values of pairs, slope of the
C̅L kL
2 curve is straight line, that is, classical
Consider displacement u as 𝜉𝑛 for a discrete behaviour for long wavelengths is captured.
particle located at x =nd. Then substitution As frequency increases multiplicity in real
of Eq. (4) modified with above wavenumber increases, thus, resulting in
considerations into Eq. (3) gives, multiple positive and negative real group
N
2 speeds. Group speed is approaching escape
2
ω = ∗ ∑ K n−r,n [1 − cos(krd)]
m
(6) frequency as a ‘sink’. This behaviour was
r=0 also found recently by Mikata (2012).
Equations of motion and dispersion laws for
classical and gradient theories are
summarized in Gopalakrishnan (2013).
Dispersion pair (𝜔, 𝑘) are calculated by root
bracketing method at a given value of
angular frequency for transcendental
dispersion equation Eq. (5). The pair for
gradient models is calculated by first
choosing the value for scale factor as that
which captures the characteristics closely to
729
Dispersion Properties of Linear Microelastic Peridynamic Bar
Figure 1. Real and complex valued Figure 2. Group speeds for the dispersion
dispersion pairs of peridynamic bar.𝑘𝐿is pairs for peridynamic bar.
non – dimensional wavenumber. This was studied by Jirásek (2004;
Dispersion from different models is Zimmermann (2005) with the nearest
compared as shown the figure 3.All models neighbour interactions. The dispersion real
have captured classical theory for lower pair of peridynamics is given as input to the
values of pair. Difference in the models is dispersion law of long-range interactions of
with respect to higher values of the pair. the lattice to obtain the constant coefficients
Strain gradient theory of order 2 has two of the equation Eq. 6. Coefficients contain
branches. Group speed shows that upper spring constant between n and n-r particles
branch gives unbounded values for lower and mass of particle. They quantify the
values of pair, hence not a physically strength of interaction between neighbours.
reasonable mode. Stress gradient theory and Method of least squares is used for this
strain gradient theory of order 2 have a purpose. The obtained curve fit from
maximum frequency after which there are considered range of peridynamic real pair is
no propagating waves. Strain gradient shown in the figure 4.For number of
theory of order 4 has no multiplicity as well neighbours of 21 atoms it gave an excellent
as maximum frequency. match to the peridynamic pair with error
around 0.02 percent. Coefficients are almost
DISCUSSION constant and small after 15 neighbour
interactions for the considered range of
As the results show each model has wavenumber.
respective characteristics with some
similarities and differences to each other for
a range of values of the pair. To know
applicability of a model it is contrasted with
the atomic dispersion laws.
730
Mutnuri and Gopalakrishnan
NOTATION
REFERENCES
731
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Ultra - thin polymer coatings (150 – 200 nm) on various su strates (hard,
soft, and elastomeric) are gaining significant attention in these days because of a wide
variety of applications. However, extracting nano-mechanical properties of thin films
are extremely difficult because of substrate effect, pile-up and viscoelastic behavior of
polymers. In this work, 150 nm PMMA film was deposited on various substrate
namely glass (hard), epoxy (soft) and silicone (elastomer) by applying the spin
coating. Depth sensing quasi-static nanoindentation experiments were conducted to
obtain mechanical properties. Substrate effect and pile-up were considered in
evaluating Young’s modulus and hardness. Two-dimensional finite element
simulations of the Berkovich indenter was used to examine the elastic-plastic
properties of different thin-film substrate combinations. Nanomechanical properties
obtained from experiments and finite element simulation were compared with the
analytical models. Limitations of each technique were discussed and compared.
Keywords: Thin Film; Nanoindentation; Hardness; Pile-up; Viscoelasticity
733
Evaluating Thin Film Mechanical Properties Applying Nanoindentation: Computational, Experimental
and Analytical Study
Figure 1 PMMA thin film on Glass substrate (a) Piezo image showing pile-up observed
after nanoindentation experiment (b) Finite element simulation showing pile-up at
penetration depth of penetration 80 nm
Nano-Scratch Techniques to
Investigate Near Surface Material
Properties Associated With Scuffing of
Engineering Surfaces General Motors
Corporation 61801 1–157.
Bolshakov A Pharr G M 1998 Influences of
pileup on the measurement of
mechanical properties by load and
depth sensing indentation techniques J.
Mater. Res. 13 1049–1058.
doi:10.1557/JMR.1998.0146.
Barletta M Gisario A 2011 The role of the
substrate in micro-scale scratching of
epoxy–polyester films, Appl. Surf. Sci.
257 4449–4463 doi:10.1016 /j.apsusc.
2010.12.090.
Zhang T- Xu WH 2002 Surface Effects on
Nanoindentation J. Mater. Res. 17
1715–1720. doi:10.1557/JMR.
2002.0254.
He J L Veprek S 2003 Finite element
modeling of indentation into superhard
coatings Surf. Coatings Technol. 163-
164 374–379. doi:10.1016/S0257-
8972(02)00628-X.
Xu Z-H Rowcliffe D 2004 Finite element
analysis of substrate effects on
indentation behaviour of thin films
Thin Solid Films 447-448 399–405.
doi:10.1016/S0040-6090(03)01071-X.
Pelegri A A Huang X 2008 Nanoindentation
on soft film/hard substrate and hard
film/soft substrate material systems
with finite element analysis Compos.
Sci. Technol. 68 147–155.
doi:10.1016/j.compscitech.2007.05.033
.
Yu N Polycarpou A Conry T F 2003
Experimental Analytical and Finite
Element Studies of the
Nanoindentation Technique to
Investigate Material Properties of
Surface Layers Less Than 100
Nanometers Thick 61801.
735
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
INTRODUCTION et. al. (1987) for PUMA 560 robot and shown
in figure 2 and corresponding Link
Many chemicals that we deal with in coordinate parameters upto four axes have
laboratories or in pharmaceutical industries been given in table 1.
are found to be of dangerous nature that may
potentially harm handlers of such chemicals.
For handling such chemicals cooperative
manipulators can be employed as shown in
figure 1 to minimize the risk to the handlers
of the chemicals. In this paper kinematic and
dynamic analyses of manipulators that handle
such chemicals cooperatively and may be
Figure 2. Link coordinate system for the
operated remotely have been done. PUMA 560 type manipulator up to gripper
Table 1. Arm link coordinate parameters
of 6-axis robot
Link coordinate parameters
Joint θ i di ai αi
i ( rad) ( m) ( m) ( rad)
1 θ1 0 0
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of
cooperative PUMA type manipulators
handling hazardous chemicals 2 θ2 0.149.09 0.431.8 0
3 θ3 0 -
The link coordinate system for the 0.02032
manipulator has been supposed to be as in Fu
737
Kinematic and dynamic analyses of 3-link cooperative manipulators handling hazardous chemicals
738
Rajesh Ranjan*
739
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract:In order to design safe and economic structures, it is important to know the
behavior of concrete under extreme loading conditions like dynamic behavior of fire
damaged structures.The objective of this paper is to present an experimental study on
fire and post fire dynamic response of Reinforced Concrete (RC) frame.It will be
helpful to understand seismic behavior of fire damaged structures during earthquake
after-shocks.Due to its very high complexity, there are not many experiments which
shows the effect of fire on dynamic behavior of structures. This study will help in
benchmarking of both computer and analytical models of post fire dynamic response
of structure.
Keywords: Fire; RC Frame; Impact; Residual Strength; Experiment.
S1
FIRE TEST
The frame were instrumented with 80 nos of
thermocouples to measure temperature across
the cross-section of beams, columns and slab. Figure 4. Location of thermocouples in
For measuring furnace temperature 5 slab
thermocouples were used, one at centre of It can be observed that the core region of
each bay and one at centre of frame. In member reaches its peak temperature during
addition to this, three thermocouple were the cooling phase. Although the temperature
used near columns to measure the spatial of the air starts decreasing but the gradients
variation of furnace temperature with height. in the column and slab are still inward, this
The thermocouple location in mid height leads to increase in core temperatures.
1000
section of column is shown in Figure 2 and TC 66
800
the recorded temperature readings are shown TC 67
Temperature ( C)
TC 68
in Figure 3. 600
1000 400
TC 56
800 TC 55
200
Temperature ( C)
TC 54
600 TC 51 0
TC 52 0 60 120 180 240 300
400 TC 49 Time (min)
TC 48
200 Figure 5. Thermocouple reading at S2
0
0 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480
Time (min)
PENDULUM IMPACT TEST
Figure 3. Thermocouple reading at mid The pendulum impact test setup is shown in
height section of column Figure 6. The dynamic response of frame was
Thermocouples were placed at three recorded with 11 nos. of accelerometers. The
locationsS1, S2, and S3 along the diagonal acceleration recorded at impacted side of
connecting columns. There were three frame below 350 mm from top of the slab is
shown in Figure 7. Displacements of frame at
741
Pendulum Impact Test on Thermally Damaged Reinforced Concrete Frame
15
10
Accelaration (g)
0 100
-25 0
-50 Loc 4 -100
Loc 5 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
-75 Time (sec)
Loc 6
-100 Loc 7 Figure 10. Strain gauge reading of frame
-125 Loc 8
-150
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 Maximum acceleration of pendulum is 20g.
Time (sec)
The corresponding peak acceleration near top
Figure 8. Horizontal displacement at slab. of frame is around 13g. The maximum strain
742
Tarvinder et al.
readings in column are mostly in the range of structural engineering 135(11) 1408-
500 microns to 600 microns during the 1417.
impact. Horizontal displacement of frame at
the level of slab is 125 mm with residual EN 1992-1-2 2004 Design of Concrete
deflection of 75 mm. Cracks are visible in Structures Part 1-2: General Rules-
inner surface of beam-column joints and Structural Fire Design Brussels.
footing column joints due to pendulum
Kamath Praveen Umesh Sharma Virendra
impact. Crushing of concrete also noted at the
location of contact of pendulum and frame. Kumar Pradeep Bhargava Asif Usmani
Bhupinder Singh Yogendra Singh Jose
Torero Martin Gillie and Pankaj Pankaj
CONCLUSION
2015 Full-scale fire test on an earthquake-
To study behavior of structural member damaged reinforced concrete frame Fire
under extreme load, frame was subjected to Safety Journal 73 (21-19).
elevated temperature and post fire impact
test. Observation of temperature profile of Shah A H Umesh K Sharma Pradeep
structure during heating and cooling along Bhargava G R Reddy Tarvinder Singh
with post fire dynamic response of structure and Hitesh Lakhani 2015 A full scale fire
were presented and discussed. test on a pre damaged RC framed
The migration of moisture plays an important structure Advances in Structural
role in the thermal distribution of the RC Engineering 2259-2274 Springer India
specimen and leads to an elongated plateau at 2015
100 °C. High water content may lead to delay
in maximum core temperature of the
specimen thus influence the fire resistance of
the member
The experiment result shows high
degradation in stiffness and strength of
structural members when subjected to
elevated temperature. Due to the thermal
damage, response of the structure member to
high rate loading is highly influenced.
A database is generated for modelling
analytical and computer models and to
further enhance the understanding of post fire
dynamic response of structure.
REFERENCES
Chang Y F Chen Y H Sheu MS and Yao GC
2006 Residual Stress-Strain Relationship
for Concrete after Exposure to High
Temperatures Cement and Concrete
Research 36(10) 1999-2005.
Dwaikat M B and Kodur V K R 2009
Response of restrained concrete beams
under design fire exposure Journal of
743
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract:Safety of structures under impact load has always been an area of utmost
importance in nuclear industry. In the advent of fire, properties of concrete degrade
due to high temperature experienced by Reinforced Concrete (RC) member which
ultimately leads to reduction in member capacity. The response of these deteriorated
members in the event of internal missiles and equipment drop needs to be properly
understood. To address the above issue experimental results of fire damaged RC slab
under impact load is presented in this paper.
A 2 m × 1.7 m RC slab of 150 mm thickness was used in the present study.
Reinforcement of 8ϕ @ 150 mm c/c distance in longitudinal and transverse direction
was provided on both faces with a clear cover of 25 mm. Instrumentation for the test
included thermocouple, strain gauge and load cells. One side of slab was exposed to 1
hour ISO 834 standard fire, and then cooled naturally. There were surface cracks and
the colour of the surface changed to light grey with pinkish tint at the end of cooling
phase. Spalling was not reported in the specimen. The maximum temperature in the
rebar was noted around 530 ºC. Impact was induced on exposed face by dropping
punch of 588 kg from a height of 3 m. The specimen failed in punching mode, the
projectile punched through the slab breaking the top rebar layer and rested on the
bottom rebar layer.
Keywords: Fire; RC Slab; Impact
wade, 2002; Bailey &Toh, 2007]. Due to its fire in vertical position. Instrumentation
very high complexity, there are few during fire tests included thermocouples. Five
experiments which shows the effect of fire on different locations namely A, B, C, D, and E
impact resistance of slabs.The main objective were chosen for thermocouples and were
of this study is to understand experimentally placed along the depth as shown in Figure. 2.
the performance of RC slab subjected to fire At all locations five thermocouples were
and post fire impact loads. This study will placed at 10mm, 55mm, 100mm, 145mm and
help in benchmarking of both computer and 190mm from the exposed surface. Thus in all
analytical models of post fire impact 25 thermocouples were used to record the
behaviour of slabs. temperature variation across the dimensions
of slab to study the thermal response of the
The tests were performed at the test facilities
slab at elevated temperature. Thermocouple 1
at The Automotive Research Association of
to 5 were used at location A, 6 to 10 at
India (ARAI), Pune. The experimental results
location B, 11 to 15 at location C, 16 to 20 at
for various tests are presented in this paper.
location D and 21 to 25 at location E.
SPECIMEN DETAILS Thermocouple reading are shown in Figure.
The plan dimensions of the slab is 1700mm 3.
X 2000mm having thickness 150 mm. The
1700 mm
schematic arrangement of test set up is shown
in Figure. 1. Reinforcement provided for
150mm thick slab is 8ϕ @ 150mm both ways 400 mm
A B
with clear cover of 25mm. To prevent local
500 mm
crushing near support during drop test
2000 mm
LOC 08
LOC 09
400
LOC 10
200
observed at location A & B. This is attributed to ambient temperature. It was tested for
to the vertical gradient inside the furnace impact on exposed face by dropping punch of
during the test. Temperature near bottom was 588 kg from a height of 3 m as shown in
higher as compared to those near top since Figure 5.Both top and bottom face of slab
the burners were located near the bottom of was instrumented with strain gauges in same
the furnace. It can be observed that the core locations. The impacting side of slab was
reaches its peak temperature during the referred as top and the other was referred as
cooling phase. At 55 mm from the exposed bottom.
surface the temperature rose quickly to 100
°C and thereafter a plateau is observed. This
may be attributed to moisture in the slab.
Since evaporation is endothermic process
there is a dip observed in temperature just
after the plateau region.
There were many surface cracks in slabs after
fire test and the color of the surface changed
to light grey with pinkish tint as shown in
Figure 4. The tint is basically a characteristic
of the chemical composition of the aggregate
used.There was very minor spalling near the Figure 5. Still image during impact
bottom of the slab, which can also be
attributed to casting defect. The spalling was Strain reading for location 3 which is at 300
not sufficient enough to directly expose mm distance on both sides from center of
reinforcement to fire. slab, is shown in Figure. 6 and Figure.
7.Letter ‘V’ was used to indicate strain gauge
parallel to longer side and letter ‘H’ was used
for strain gauges parallel to shorter side of the
slab. Slab after impact is shown in Figure. 8.
1000
TOP_3V [UE]
0 TOP_3H [UE]
Microstrain
-1000
-2000
-3000
14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5
Time [s]
IMPACT TEST
After exposing the slab to elevated
temperature, it was allowed to cool naturally
746
Sharma et al.
REFERENCES
1000
Bailey C G and Toh W S 2007 Behaviour of
0 Concrete Floor Slabs at ambient and
elevated temperatures Fire Safety Journal
-1000
14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 42 425–436.
Time [s]
Lim L and and Wade C 2002 Experimental
Figure 7. Strain at location 3 (Bottom) Fire Tests of Two-Way Concrete Slabs
Fire Engineering Research Report.
NEA/CSNI/IRIS 2010 Improving Robustness
Assessment Methodologies for Structures
Impacted by Missiles IRIS 2010 Final
Report published by OECD.
Sugano T Subota H Y Kasai N Koshika S
Ohnuma WA von Riesemann D C Bickel
and M B Parks 1993 Local damage to
reinforced concrete structures caused by
impact of aircraft engine missiles Part
Test program method and results Nucl
Figure 8. Bottom view of slab after impact Eng Des 140 387–405.
CONCLUSION Zineddin M and Krauthammer T 2007
There were many surface cracks in slab after Dynamic response and behavior of
fire test. The color of the surface changed to reinforced concrete slabs under impact
light grey with pinkish tint at the end of loading International Journal of Impact
cooling phase. The experiment result shows Engineering 34 1517–1534.
high degradation in stiffness and strength of
structural members when subjected to
elevated temperature. Due to the thermal
damage, response of the structural member
subjected to high rate loading is highly
influenced. High strain readings were
observed during impact test because of
numerous micro cracks and degradation in
material property due to elevated
temperature. The specimen failed in punching
mode, the projectile punched through the slab
breaking the top rebar layer and rested on the
bottom rebar layer.
A database is generated for modelling
analytical and computer models and to
747
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper gives a clear review of the performance of an Automotive Side
Door Latch, as it plays a vital role in the vehicle design. The study mainly
concentrates on different strokes and its variation with respect to the tolerance
allocated for different child parts. A complete Automotive Side Door Latch along
with Child Lock feature was built according to standards. Different strokes namely
Free Travel, Operating Travel and Full travel of the Latch was calculated and cross
verified the same. Tolerance allocation for different child parts was done as per
standard manufacturing requirement and the model is rebuilt along with tolerance.
The variation in stroke value caused due to tolerance in child parts is calculated
considering different parameters like maximum tolerance limit and minimum
tolerance limit of child parts and it’s positioning during assembly. Complete variation
i.e. tolerance stack up with all possible combinations was done. A variation of <±1
mm was found when the Latch is released from outside of the Automotive whereas
<±1.5mm when release from inside of the Automotive. By this analysis we can say
the Automotive Side Latch meets up the requirements.
Keywords: Automotive Latch; Stroke; Tolerance Allocation; Tolerance Stack up.
INSIDE OPERATING
10.8 9.7 9.8 11.3 12
RELEASE TRAVEL
FULL TRAVEL 13.9 13.8 13.7 14.7 14.5
FREE TRAVEL 3.7 3 3.3 4.3 4.7
OUTSIDE OPERATING
8.3 7.5 7.7 8.6 9.3
RELEASE TRAVEL
FULL TRAVEL 10.9 10.8 10.8 11.5 11.5
CONCLUSION REFERENCES
An Automotive Side Door Latch was built Evaluating LATCH System Ease of Use and
and base stroke calculation was done as Key Features in New
shown in the paper. Tolerance Allocation Jay Bang et al 2008 Optimization of a Hood
was done successfully and Tolerance Stack
Latch System Bachelor of Science
up analysis was carried for different
Thesis - Worcester Polytechnic Institute
conditions and found a variation of ±1.5mm
United States.
for Inside Release and ±1mm for Outside
Release. This variation is optimal for the Suguna Thanagasundram et al 2010 Real-
continuous working of Automotive Side time Simulation of a Vehicle Door
Door Latch. Locking Mechanism on a Hardware-in-
the-Loop Platform Research Gate
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 231582194.
I would like to thank IFB Automotive Pvt. Vehicles AAA Foundation for Traffic Safety.
Ltd., Bangalore for providing me an
opportunity to carry out the project in its
Organisation. I also would like to thank Mr.
Sandeep Musti, Assistant Manager and all
the team members for their support and
Guidance.
750
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: India has the second largest road network in the world (~3.3 million km)
and about 65% of goods transport takes place by road. However, it is observed that
the condition of roads deteriorates over time leading to huge losses estimated to be
around INR 10000 crore per year due to poor quality of roads (Vijayaraghavan,
2007). The Govt. of India invested nearly INR 70000 crore for the construction of
National Highways like the Golden Quadrilateral# and East-West; North-South
corridors##. One of the major causes of road damage is the force exerted by multi-
axle, Heavy Goods Vehicles (HGVs) on the road. Hence, research is being done in the
field of suspension design attempting to reduce road damage along with other design
criteria. The vehicle suspension can be designed to have variable stiffness and
damping to achieve better trade-off between performance measures than possible with
a linear passive suspension. The present study involves analysis of nonlinearity in the
suspension for a quarter HGV model. The nonlinear system is compared with linear
suspension model for goods-safety and road damage criteria. The aim of the study is
to address the issue of nonlinearity in suspension system in influencing the dynamic
forces exerted by the vehicle on the road.
Keywords: Nonlinear Suspension; Road Damage; ISO 8608; Heavy Goods Vehicle
N
h ( x)
= ∑
i =1
2.∆n.Gd ( ni )
(6)
× cos ( 2π ni x + Φ i )
where
Gd ( n0 ) = a constant depending upon road class
n0 = standard wavenumber (cycles/m) = constant ,
n = wavenumber (cycles/m)
damage and goods safety over purely ISO 8608:1995 (n.d.) Road surface –
linear suspension. reporting measured data, Draft Proposal
• Different magnitudes of static deflection ISO/DP 8608 Mechanical Vibration
constraints give different values of optimal International Organization for
suspension parameters.
Standardization 1995
• Beyond a threshold value, increased
damping does not have any noticeable Metwalli S M 1986 Optimum Nonlinear
effect on the sprung mass acceleration and Suspension Systems Journal of
road damage. This value is in the range of Mechanisms Transmissions and
0.5*104 to1.5*104 Ns/m for the selected Automation in Design 108(85) 197–202.
sprung mass and unsprung mass
parameters, which nearly corresponds to Pable M 2011 Optimization of Passive
the critical damping value considering Suspension Systems PhD Thesis IIT
simplified one-degree-of-freedom model Bombay.
for sprung mass.
• The peak suspension travel has been found Rao S S 2003 Mechanical Vibration Fourth
to be < 0.1m for all the combinations of Edition Pearson Education Inc.
parameters (K 1s , K 3s and C s ). Silveira M Pontes B R and Balthazar J M
2014 Use of nonlinear asymmetrical
SUMMARY AND FUTURE WORK
shock absorber to improve comfort on
In this work, quarter HGV suspension model passenger vehicles Journal of Sound and
involving cubic nonlinear stiffness has been
Vibration 333(7) 2114–2129.
studied. Responses in terms of RMS
acceleration and dynamic forces Sun L Cai X and Yang J 2007 Genetic
characterizing the goods-safety and road algorithm-based optimum vehicle
damage respectively, have been analysed. suspension design using minimum
Similar response analysis is required to be
dynamic pavement load as a design
carried out for nonlinear models with
asymmetric damping model of damper. This criterion Journal of Sound and Vibration
parametric study would give insight into 301(1-2) 18–27.
optimization of the suspension system Vijayaraghavan TAS Impact of transportation
parameters. infrastructure on logistics in India
REFERENCES Logistics Spectrum US 35(1) 12-16.
Abstract: In the present work, the analytical modeling of the inverse dynamics of an
axial piston pump mechanism is carried out to predict the bearing and constraint force
reactions. The governing dynamic equations of motion (EOMs) are developed using
the augmented Newton-Euler formulation. The governing equations are solved to
obtain closed form expressions for the constraint reactions. A numerical rigid MBD
model of the pump mechanism is also developed. The results from the analytical
modeling are compared with the numerical results. The parametric studies are carried
out using the analytical model to understand the influence of design parameters on the
frequency domain magnitudes of the constraint reactions.
yi − R i
− R iptnsheX − Fpressure
i
(2) mp p ptnsheY − R ptnbrlY
i
0
zip − R iptnsheZ − R iptnbrlZ
M i mp 0
Where is the mass-inertia tensor,
i +
θ
p 0
=
0
(4)
756
Inverse Dynamic Analysis of Axial Piston Pump using Augmented Newton-Euler Formulation
(5)
757
Milind and Mitra
REFERENCES
Lee S Song J Choi W Hong D 2003 Position
control of a Stewart platform using
inverse dynamics control with
approximate dynamics Mechatronics 13
605-619
CONCLUSION
In the present work, the inverse dynamic
modeling of the axial piston pump using the
analytical approach is presented. The
governing dynamic equations are developed
using augmented Newton-Euler formulation.
The dynamic equations together with the
kinematic equations are solved to obtain the
constraint reactions. A comparison of
analytical and numerical results showed a
close agreement. The parametric studies were
conducted using the analytical model and
showed that the sensitivity of the constraint
reactions to design and operating conditions.
758
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
759
Author for Correspondence: E-mail:TRMilind@eaton.com;
Milind and Mitra
760
Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: Validation,
Comparison and Parametric Studies
Q
external forces, and dr is the quadratic
Shoe
velocities q r (0) .
In flexible multibody dynamic modeling the Piston
Where f
is MBD model by incorporating component
the generalized coordinates of the flexible flexibility. Figure 4 shows the flexible MBD
body,
M is the mass matrix of the flexible
f
model of the axial piston pump and the global
coordinate systems used.
body,
K f
is the stiffness matrix of the
flexible body,
Df
is the damping matrix,
Cqf
is the constraint Jacobian matrix of the
flexible body,
f is the Lagrange
multipliers associated with the flexible body,
F
and f is the vector of generalized external
forces acting on the flexible body. Equations
(2) and (3) together constitute the governing
equations of a combined rigid and flexible
multibody system.
NUMERICAL MODELING
Figure 4. Rigid-Flexible MBD Model
In the following paragraphs, the numerical
modeling details of the rigid MBD model of Table 1 lists the different constraints
an axially actuated pump with nine pistons is defined in the MBD model.
761
Milind and Mitra
762
Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: Validation,
Comparison and Parametric Studies
763
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Boundary element method is one of the commonly adopted techniques for
modeling the acoustic radiation. There are several steps in the numerical
implementation of the BE method which influence the results. In the present work,
numerical implementation of BE framework for predicting the acoustic radiation from
an axial piston pump is carried out. The studies are conducted to understand the
influence of the different numerical BE implementation factors on the results.
Keywords: Acoustic Radiation; Boundary Element Method; Axial Piston Pump;
computational acoustics. The Figure 1 shows Figure2 shows the boundary element model mesh
the schematic representation of indirect of pump.
boundary element modeling.
(2)
The matrix form of the equations with the
unknown densities is given by, Figure 3. BE model and Field point mesh.
~
B C σˆ i fσ
C T = ~
D µˆ i f µ
(3) RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Figure 4 shows the comparison of the field
The pressure at the field points are computed as,
[ ] {µˆ }
point mesh versus model mesh method of
p(r ) = [Aσ ]{σˆ i } + Aµ i (4) computation of the sound power.
NUMERICAL MODELING
Numerical modeling of the pump acoustic
radiation is carried out in the commercial
software LMS Virtual lab.acoustics®. The
765
Boundary Element Modeling of the Acoustic Radiation of An Axial Piston Pump: Numerical
Implementation
Figure 4. Comparison of sound watt level Figure 6. Variation of sound watt level
(SWL) computation method. (SWL) with BE element size.
766
Milind and Mitra
767
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
768
Milind and Mitra
MATHEMATICAL BACKGROUND
The numerical modeling of the pump is
carried out using the finite element method.
The governing equation for vibration
modeling of the pump is given by,
(2)
Further, the generalized coordinate can be
expressed as {q } = {c}e iωt where {c} is the modal
coefficients, ω is the angular frequency of the
forcing function. Thus, the solution of equation
(1) provides the required displacements at the
frequencies of the forcing function.
The numerical modeling of the acoustic
radiation is carried using the boundary
element method. The governing equation in
the indirect boundary element method is
given by,
∂G (r , r0 )
(
+
p ( r ) − p −
( r ) )
Figure 2. Boundary element model
∂n
0 0
dΓ(r )
p(r ) = ∫ + −
∂p (r0 ) ∂p (r0 ) 0
Γ ( )
− G r , r0 − RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
∂n ∂n
Figure 3 shows thecomparison of the
(3)
simulation results with the experimental
NUMERICAL MODELING results.
The numerical modeling of the vibration Figure 4 shows the normalized sound
behavior is carried out in ANSYS® and pressure fields in the horizontal plane.
acoustic radiation is carried out in LMS Figure 5 shows the normalized sound
Virtual lab.acoustics®. The Figure1shows the pressure fields in the vertical plane.
finite element model of the axial pistonpump
assembly and Figure 2 shows the boundary
element model mesh of the axial piston
pump.
769
Numerical Modelling of the Structural Acoustic Radiation and Sound Pressure Fields of An Axial Piston
Pump
770
Milind and Mitra
771
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Occupant Safety for both an adult and child is equally important in vehicle
dynamics. Lot of research and experimental studies are done worldwide to define
safety regulations for an automobile in order to provide adult and child safety. Based
on different studies conducted worldwide researchers felt a need of making Seat Belts
mandatory for automotive seating. Hence Government of United States developed
vehicle safety regulations and imposed them on vehicle manufacturers. FMVSS 209,
use of Seat belts was made mandatory for automotive seating in order to hold the
occupant safely on seat in any dynamic crash condition. These regulations are then
called as legal regulations and imposed on the vehicle manufacturers so that vehicle
manufacturers should produce safe cars. It became mandatory for vehicle
manufacturer to comply with these legal regulations in order to sale the vehicle in
United States or in European market. In this work efforts are put to design a feature in
automotive seating in order to prevent the occupant from sliding under the seat belt.
Here in this paper some facts on Vehicle dynamics (Vehicle Front Impact), Occupant
response to these dynamic situations and based on this dynamic situation need of anti-
sub feature in automotive car seat for the safety of adult occupant is studied and
demonstrated.
Keywords: Vehicle Safety; Vehicle dynamics; FEA.
other crash configurations and seating pulls the seat belt. This pull is nothing but the
positions when additional data from a larger impact pull, seat belt retractor locks the belt,
number of crashes has been collected. hence occupant forward motion is restricted
as seat belt is now locked because of impact
To prevent occupant from injuries in front
load. In this condition occupant shoulder is
impact government made use of seat belts
loaded as occupant tries to move forward and
compulsory. Hence this study is conducted
belt is locked. Maximum allowable force on
considering the vehicle has seat belts to
the occupant shoulders ranges from 4 KN to
ensure the occupant stays on the seat in front
7 KN. Belt retractors are designed with load
impact dynamic crash condition. Front crash
limiters. That means the moment occupant
of the vehicle can happen in different speeds.
shoulders reached certain loads (4-7 KN)
Here in the study the crash speed of 56 kmph.
retractor release the load balances it so that
In vehicle front impact occupant moves
occupant shoulders will not see excessive
forward direction. We know that in any
loads and face any injury. Once the occupant
impact attachments see major load always. In
forward motion is restricted occupant moves
vehicle front impact Four seat mountings
starts moving downwards. Hence seat
(Seat is mounted on vehicle floor with the
cushion will see the loads vertically
help of four bolts) and 3 seat belt mountings
downward from occupant downward
(Seat belt installed in automotive car is called
movement. The max loads coming on
as three point belt system, one point is at
cushion area is around 10Kn. Cushion is
retractor, second point is seat belt buckle and
allowed to deform @ 50 to 70mm based on
third point is another end of the seat belt
the design requirements that means if cushion
mounted in vehicle floor.) So overall four
doesn’t deform loads will go on occupant and
seat anchorage and 3 seat belt anchorages are
if cushion deforms excessively then there are
getting loaded severely in vehicle front
chances that occupant may slip under the
impact. Seat belt mounted in with the two
belt.
ends. One end of the belt is attached to the
retractor and other end of the belt is mounted In this condition of excessive deformation so
on the vehicle floor. Retractor winds the belt cushion structure feature of cushion structure
which it is not in use. Retractor works on which prevents occupant slipping under the
inertia locking principle i.e. when the belt is belt is termed as “Anti-submarining” feature.
pulled with the jerky motion, inertia lock Study conducted here proves that anti-sub
basically locks the seat belt and doesn’t allow feature of seat cushion helps occupant to pass
coming out of retractor. There is a tongue on the loads as well as to prevent occupant to
which is inserted in the seat belt. Tongue has slide pass under the seat belt.
a male lock and seat belt buckle forms female
lock. When seat belt tongue is pulled and METHODOLOGY AND
locked in the seat belt buckle it actually GEOMETRIC MODELLING
forms third anchor point. When seat belt is OCCUPANT DYNAMICS IN BEFORE
locked it forms two loops. One is over the AND AFTER FRONT IMPACT
shoulder of the occupant and another over the
In Frontal impact as occupant forward
laps of the occupant.
movement is restricted by seat belt, occupant
In front impact as occupant moves forward starts moving downward and loading cushion
because of inertia, shoulders of occupant
773
Displacement and Arrest of Occupant on Automotive Seat System in Frontal Dynamic Crash Condition:
Anti-Sub Feature on Seat Cushion
CONCLUSION
The Engineering analysis and CAE given
better direction for design. Without
antisubmarine bracket cushion cannot hold
occupant in place and there are chances of
Figure 3.Bracket Cross Section
occupant slipping under the belt.
774
Dharmadhikari and Chougule
REFERENCES
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and
Regulations U.S. Department of
Transportation, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
http://www.unece.org/trans/main/
https://www.araiindia.com/Draft_AIS_Standa
rds.asp
http://www.globalncap.org/
http://www.ancap.com.au/
http://www.euroncap.com/
http://www.iihs.org/iihs/topics
http://www.c-ncap.org.cn/c-
ncap_en/index.htm
775
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A thermal barrier coating (TBC) system has been analyzed for residual
stress build up during thermal cycling using finite element method (FEM). A mass
balance based coupled field multi physics model has been developed to simulate
dynamic growth of thermally grown oxide (TGO) and the consequent stress build up
in TBC system. The model prediction agrees well with experimentally measured
TGO growth during thermal cycling. The predictions of the model in terms of stress
build up also agree with reported experimental and simulated results.
Keywords: Thermal barrier coatings; Thermally grown oxide; residual stress;
Modelling and simulation.
VALIDATION OF MODEL
The validity of model was verified by
comparing the simulated thermal profile with
the experimentally measured profile. Figure 2
shows that the calculated temperature from
the model matches reasonably well with the
experimental values. The experimental
profile shows that the rate of rise in Figure 4. Stress (x) distributions at
temperature during heating and rate of mid-point of TBC/TGO interface.
temperature drop during cooling are slightly
steeper as compared to the model prediction. INFLUENCE OF TGO GROWTH ON
Predicted TGO (alumina) mass growth STRESS BUILD-UP
during thermal cycling has been compared Figure 4 presents the variation of stress at the
with experimental results as shown in Figure middle of TBC/TGO interface (x) during
3. The deviation between the two curves can first thermal cycle. It can be seen that the
be attributed to the fact that TGO growth is dynamic growth of TGO leads to nearly three
no longer on plane surface as assumed in the times high stresses as compared to without
model. However, the model prediction is TGO. It can be observed that the stress
reasonably accurate at longer oxidation relaxation during cooling also occurs at a
durations. much slow rate in the presence of TGO. It
can be expected that TGO growth introduces
H C a complex stress state which leads to the
ooling
eating observed slow stress relaxation. The variation
of normal stress (y) in the first cycle in
presence of TGO as compared to when TGO
is absent is shown Figure 5. During the
cooling cycle the variation is similar to that
observed for x (Figure 4.). Such difference
in the magnitude of stresses between the
Figure 2. Temperature distribution at cases when TGO is present and it is absent
TBC/TGO interface. can also be seen in terms of rate rise in stress
778
Srivathsa et al.
during 1000 thermal cycles, as plotted in support. This work is carried-out under the
Figure 6. project DMR- 294.
REFERENCES
Chen Xiao Zhang Yue and Gong Sheng 2005
Finite element analysis of stresses and
interface crack in TBC system Trans.
Non-Ferrous Met. Soc. China 15(2)
457-460.
Figure 5. Stress (y) distributions at mid- Clarke D R and Levi C G 2003 Materials
point of TBC/TGO interface. design for the next generation thermal
barrier coatings Annu. Rev. Mater.Res33
383-417.
COMSOL Multiphysics 2014 Comsol A B
Stockholm Sweden.
Evans A G Mumm D R Hutchinson J Meier
G H and Zettit F S 2001 Mechanism
controlling the durability of thermal
Figure 6. Stress y) gradients during
barrier coatings Progress in Materials
thermal cycling.
Sci. 46 505-553.
CONCLUSIONS Hsueh C H and Fuller E R 2000 Analytical
A mass balance based two-dimensional modeling of oxide thickness effects on
model has been developed to simulate residual stresses in thermal barrier
dynamic growth TGO in a TBC system using coatings Scripta Materialia 42 781–787.
COMSOL multi-physics code. Residual Hutchinson J W He M Y and Evans A G
stress build-up in a TBCs during 1000 2000 The influence of imperfections on
thermal cycles has been calculated. the nucleation and propagation of
Temperature distribution and mass of buckling driven delamination Jl. of
alumina deposited during thermal cycling mechanics and physics of solids 48 709-
calculated using the numerical model 734.
reasonably matches with experimental
Mao W G Jiang J P Zhou Y C and Lu C2011
values. Overall, the predictions of the model
Effects of substrate curvature and radius
agree with the experimental as well as
deposition temperature and coating
simulated reported results. It has been
thickness on the residual stress field of
demonstrated conclusively that the TGO
cylindrical thermal barrier coatings
growth play an important part in determining
Surface &Coatings Technology 8-9
the TBC’s durability.
205-211.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Miller R A 1997 Thermal barrier coatings for
aircraft engines: history and directions
We express our earnest thanks to Dr. Samir V
J. Therm. Spray Technology635-42.
Kamat, Outstanding Scientist and Director
DMRL for his constant encouragement and Piotr Bednarz 2007 Finite Element
guidance. We also thank DRDO for financial Simulation of stress evolution in
779
Modelling and Simulation of Cyclic Oxidation of Thermal Barrier Coatings using FEM
780
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
was treated with Lagrangian approach in found out by the concept of volume fraction
which each particle is tracked individually which is defined as the ratio of volume
inside the computational domain. The occupied by that phase to the total volume
behaviour of the flow for various inlet values under consideration. This is mathematically
defined as:
of Reynolds number, particle Stokes number
∆VP
and void fraction was mainly studied in these α = lim (1)
∆V → 0 ∆V
works. Another significant work in Where α denotes the volume fraction of a
simulations of dilute laminar gas-particle particular phase, ΔV P is the volume occupied
flows was carried out by Passalacqua and by that phase in the neighbourhood of the
Fox (2011). In this work, a third-order point of interest and ΔV is the total volume
quadrature based moment method coupled occupied by the two phases together in the
neighbourhood of that point.
with a fluid solver has been applied to
Two-fluid model is one of the three modeling
simulate dilute gas-particle flow in a vertical approaches of two-phase flows in which both
channel with particle phase volume fractions the phases are considered separately. In this
between 0.0001 and 0.01. The effect of model, the two phases have own independent
particle phase volume fraction on the flow velocity fields and other properties flowing
has been studied extensively. Similar work under the influence of the same pressure
was carried out by Passalacqua et al. (2010) field. The interaction between the phases is
taken care by introducing extra source terms
in which numerical simulations of laminar
known as exchange coefficients in the
gas-particle flows were carried out for governing equations of both the phases. In
particle Stokes numbers 0.061 and 0.61 in a the present work, a two-way coupling is
2D vertical channel. The effect of particle considered between the phases which mean
Stokes numberin the overall flow through the that both the phases have influence on the
channel has been explained in this work. flow dynamics of each-other. This is
achieved by introducing a drag force term in
The objective of the present work is to the momentum equations of both the phases.
numerically study the effects of change of The effect of particle-particle interactions has
inlet particle phase volume fractions on not been considered in this work.
steady state gas phase velocity profiles in
vertical channels. Also for a constant set of NUMERICAL METHODS
inlet particle and gas phase volume fractions, The numerical solver used to solve the above
the changes in velocity profiles will be mentioned problem is developed using finite
studied for particles with different diameters. volume method (FVM) where the entire
solution domain is sub-divided into a number
EULERIAN-EULERIAN APPROACH of cells (finite volumes). The co-ordinates of
TWO-FLUID MODEL the vertices of these cells are read directly
from a CGNS (CFD General Notation
In Eulerian-Eulerian approach, the two System) grid file. Collocated grid
phases are considered as inter-penetrating arrangement has been used where all the
continua and instead of tracking each dependent variables are defined at the
individual particle in the flow field, the centroid of each individual cell. The FVM
particle phase is collectively solved using uses integral form of governing equations
fluid like equations. As a result, it becomes which can be written for each individual cell
relatively easy to implement, solve and adopting the following procedure.
interpret the particle phase along with the
fluid phase equations. The relative amount of 1) During integration over the cell volume
each phase present in the flow domain is the values of the variables are assumed to be
782
Numerical Study of Effect of Particle Diameter and Particle Volume Fractions on Dispersed Gas-Particle
Flows through Vertical Channels
constant and equal to its value at the cell velocity profiles for changes in particle
centre. diameter are shown in Figure. 2.
2) Similarly during the surface integral over
the cell face, the value of the variable is
assumed constant throughout the surface and
is equal to the face center value.
3)The values at the face centres are evaluated
using volume interpolation.
The discretization procedure used to
discretize the governing equations follows
the work of Dalal et al. (Dalalet al.2008).
PROBLEM DEFINITION
The laminar particle laden flows will be
analysed for the problem of laminar gas-
particle flow through a vertical channel. The
schematic of the problem is given in Figure. Figure 2. Variation of particle velocity
1.
with particle diameter at constant volume
fractions.
It is seen that the maximum steady state
particle velocity decreases with increase in
particle diameter. It is due to the fact that the
motion of the particles with larger diameters
is more influenced by their inertia and gravity
force.
Again the variation of gas velocity with
particle volume fraction for constant particle
diameter of 100 μm is shown in Figure. 3.
It can be seen that as particle phase volume Dalal A Eswaran V and Biswas G 2008 A
fraction is increased from 0.005 to 0.01, the finite volume method for Navier-Stokes
maximum steady state velocity attained by equations on unstructured meshes
the gas phase decreases. This can be Numerical Heat Transfer Part B 54(3)
238-259.
attributed to the fact that with increase in
particle phase volume fraction, the amount of Luo R Kant T and Yang X 2003 Laminar
drag acting on the gas phase increases which light particle and liquid two phase flows
in a vertical pipe International Journal
in turn reduces the steady state maximum
of Multiphase Flows 29 603-620.
velocity of the gas phase.
Passalacqua A and Fox R O 2011 Advanced
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS continuum modelling of gas-particle
This Study is funded by a grant from DAE- flows beyond hydrodynamic limit
BRNS, Government of India. Applied Mathematical Modelling 35
1616-1627.
REFERENCES
Passalacqua A Fox R O Garg R and
Barton I E 1996 Computation of dilute Subramaniam S 2010 A fully coupled
particulate laminar flow over a quadrature based moment method for
backward facing step International dilute to moderately dilute fluid-particle
Journal for Numerical Methods in flows Chemical Engineering Science65
Fluids 22 211-221. 2267-2283.
Booras G and Krantz W 1976 Dispersion in NOTATION
the laminar flow of power-law fluids
through straight tubes Industrial and FVM Finite Volume Method
Engineering Chemistry Fundamentals αg Gas phase volume fraction
15(4) 249-253.
αs Particle phase volume fraction
784
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
786
CFD Modelling of Gas Bubble Formation in a Stagnant & Co-Flowing Liquid Medium
10-5 sec is considered. Implicit method for act as an attaching force or as a detaching
time integration with NITA (Non-Iterative force depending on the relative magnitude of
Time Advancement) transient formulation is the velocities of the co-flowing liquid and the
used and some User Defined bubble. If the bubble velocity is higher than
Functions(UDFs) are used to apply the the liquid mean velocity then the liquid
boundary conditions at different inlet points. inertia force will act as an opposing force
These functions are written by the help of (attaching force) and vice-versa. Figure.2
Fluent defined macros and then complied demonstrates the qualitative features of the
using Fluent compiler and finally hooked bubble evolution with time for given
with Fluent solver to impose desired parameters. The first snap depicts the
boundary conditions. A uniform grid velocity profile imposed at different inlets for
structure is used to discretize the entire gas and liquid phases. After having a closer
computational domain. The smallest division look at the time sequence profiles, one could
along both radial and axial directions are easily divide the bubble formation process
taken as 0.1525 mm. A comprehensive grid into two stages, viz. expansion stage and
sensitivity study is also conducted using collapse stage. In the expansion stage, the
three different grid sizes 100×150, 135×200 total upward (detaching) forces are in balance
and 200×300. with the total downward (attaching) forces
and the period of this stage is called the
The properties of the fluids(liquid & gas)
expansion time. The bubble expands in the
used are given in the following table :
radial direction but the tip of the bubble
Table 1. Properties of the reference propagates downstream due to the
fluids: air-water system at 20°C. momentum of directly incoming gas stream.
Any imbalance between attaching and
Property Value
detaching forces will cause the
ρl 998.12 kg/m3 commencement of collapse stage where in a
ρg 1.188 kg/m3 visible neck forms (at t = 40 ms) which will
ultimately lead to the detachment. The
µl 1.0016 ×10−3 Pa-sec velocity vector field near the bubble interface
µg 1.824 ×10−5 Pa-sec demonstrates that during this entire period,
σ lg 72.8 ×10−3 N / m the surrounding liquid plays a significant role
in the bubble breakup process. The lower part
RESULTS of the surface of the detached bubble
becomes concave towards the liquid. The
The formation, expansion, necking and
reason for this concavity is the retraction of
detachment of a gas bubble is governed by
the surface immediately after bubble breakup
the interaction of several forces such as the
from the orifice.
buoyancy, pressure, gas momentum, surface
tension, liquid inertia and drag/fluid viscosity DISCUSSION
forces. In case of stagnant liquid ambience
An axi-symmetric numerical simulation is
the first three forces come under the category
performed to analyze the dynamics of gas
of detaching forces whereas the last three
bubble formation from a submerged orifice in
forces come under attaching forces.
an immiscible Newtonian liquid under the
However, in case of co-flowing liquid
condition of constant gas flow rate using a
ambience the liquid inertia force may either
finite volume based commercial CFD solver
787
Prasad et al.
Ansys Fluent. The study demonstrates the results obtained by VOF and CLSVOF
differences between the dynamic effects of methods. However, the interface captured by
stagnant and co-flowing surrounding on CLSVOF is superior than that captured by
bubble evolution and detachment. Both VOF VOF method alone; (iv) during the bubble
and CLSVOF methods are used to capture breakup process, the surrounding flowing
the evolving interface. The computational liquid plays an important role because it
solution describing the incipience, growth, compresses the gas stream and forms neck
necking and eventually detachment from the which ultimately leads to the detachment; (v)
submerged orifice is presented. the co-flowing liquid ambience is preferred
Velocity Vector t = 0ms t = 10ms over the stagnant liquid ambience in order to
at inlet BC prevent the bubble coalescence phenomenon.
REFERENCES
Ansys Fluent, ver. 14.02011 Theory Guide
Ansys Inc. USA.
Badam V K Buwa V F Durst 2007
Experimental Investigations of
Regimes of Bubble Formation on
t = 20 ms t = 30 ms t = 40 ms
Submerged Orifices under Constant
Flow Condition The Canadian
Journal of Chemical Engineering
85 257-267.
Chakraborty I Biswas G P S Ghoshdastidar
2011 Bubble generation in quiescent
and co-flowing liquids International
t = 60 ms t = 80 ms t = 100 ms Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer544673-4688.
Majumdar S SChowdhury 2010 Novel
therapeutic application of
microbubbles for targeted drug
delivery. International Journal
of Pharma and Bio Sciences11-9.
Ranade V V 2002 Computational flow
modeling for chemical reactor
Figure. 2. Time sequence profile of
engineering 5 Academic Press St.
bubble growth, neck formation, and
Louis MO USA.
bubble breakup for We = 4.35, Re =
SussmanM E G Puckett 2000 A coupled
690.48, Bo = 0.31 and V r = 0.88.
level-set and volume-of-fluid
Some of the important observations are as method for computing 3D and axis
follows: (i) it is observed that there are two symmetric incompressible two-phase
stages in the entire bubble formation process, flows. Journal of Computational
namely the expansion stage and the collapse Physics162 301-337.
stage; (ii) higher value of co-flowing liquid Zaleski S 2005 Interface tracking-VOF in:
Lecture Given at Course:
velocity leads to a faster bubble collapse
Industrial Two-phase Flow CFD Von
dynamics and thus creates smaller bubble Karman Institute for Fluid Dynamics
size with enhanced bubble formation Belgium.
frequency and reduced formation time; (iii)
not much difference is witnessed between the
788
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In numerical development of the fluid flow algorithms for high density
ratios, researches are focused on the consistent formulations. To enforce the
consistency, numerous sophisticated and the computationally expensive approaches
are proposed in the literature. In this work, through the numerical experiments, we
demonstrate that the inconsistent formulation can also produce accurate results in
specific cases associated with high density ratios. Furthermore, we present a criterion
that indicates whether the consistency is must or an inconsistent is sufficed to generate
the stable solutions.
Keywords: Inconsistent; High density ratio; Stability criterion; Volume-of-fluid.
density ratio also inconsistent formulation Froude number hence the higher convection
can generate inaccurate results. Lower velocity triggered this asymmetric pattern.
Figure 1. Time plots of Rayleigh–Taylor instability for density ratio 7 with Re = 1000 and
F r = 0.1 on unstructured grid
AIR BUBBLE RISING IN WATER simulation is carried out for high density ratio
1000 and viscosity ratio 100 with constant
For the next test case we consider rising of a
time step 0.001 and Weber number 0.125.
bubble in stagnant fluid. Following the
numerical simulation of Hysing et al. (2008) Figure 2 depicts the time evolution of the
a bubble of diameter D=1 is placed at (1 × 1) mass centre of the bubble and the rising
in velocity. Present results in the inconsistent
formulation are compared with the results of
A rectangular tank of cross-section (2 × 4) Hysing et al. (2008), with good agreement.
which is subdivided into 80426 triangular Despite the high density ratio, in this test case
elements. Slip condition is given on the side inconsistent formulation produce the accurate
walls and no-slip on the top and bottom results. The lower value of the Reynolds
walls. The Reynolds number and Froude number may be the reason for this
numbers are 3.5 and 1 respectively. The improvement.
(a) (b)
Figure 2. Time evolution of (a) bubble mass center (b) rising velocity for density ratio
791
Patel and Natarajan
792
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
the interaction potential based approach Shan al., 2009). Shan and Chen (Shan and Chen,
and Chen (1993) is widely utilized due to its 1993) proposed an LB model with inclusion
ability to implement boundary conditions of interaction potential for multiphase and
easily for the fluid phases with different multicomponent fluid flows. The present
densities, viscosities and wettabilities. Zhang study uses the S-C model since it takes into
(2011) has reported a detailed review on the account interactions at the microscopic level
utilization of LBM in microfluidics. between the fluid molecules which is the sole
cause of the mixing or the separation of the
phases. The separation of fluid phases or
FORMULATION
components in the S-C model is automatic
LBM is a powerful simulation technique and is preferred because of its convenience in
which has attracted interest from researchers handling fluid/solid interaction.
in computational physics for studying fluid
Interaction force among the particles is
flow and transport process. LBM serves as a
mediator between micro-scale and macro- incorporated in S-C model using an altered
scale by considering behavior of a collection velocity in the equilibrium distribution
of particles as unit. The properties of the function. The new momentum taking the
collection of particles are represented by the interaction force into consideration is
distribution functions. LBM considers a expressed by the parameter ρk ueq which is
spatially discretized form of the continuous given as.
Boltzmann equation. The computer algorithm ρ k=
u eq
k ρ k u ′ + τ k Fk
is simple and consists of collision and
streaming steps as follows: where u′ is an extra component on the top
due to addition of interparticle interaction for
(i) Collision step: each component. Total force acting on the kth
component taking into account the
f k ( x, t ) − fi k ( eq ) ( x, t )
fi k ( x + ciδ t , t + δ t ) − fi k ( x, t ) =
− i interparticle interaction is given by F k which
τk
includes fluid/fluid interaction F 1k ,
where fi ( x, t ) is the number density
k
fluid/solid interaction F 2k , and external force
distribution function for the kth component in F 3k [Martys and Chen 1996] and is expressed
the ith velocity direction at position x and by
time t, and δt is the time increment. The
relaxation time of the kth component in lattice Fk = F1k + F2 k + F3k
unit is given as τ k whereas f i
k ( eq )
( x, t ) is The interaction force F 1k between the
the corresponding equilibrium distribution particles of kth component at location x and
function. k th component at location x′ is assumed to
be proportional to the product of their
(ii) Streaming step: effective mass ψ(ρ k ).
−ψ k ( x ) ∑∑ Gkk ( x, x ′ )ψ k ( x ′ )( x ′ − x )
s
fi k ( x + ciδ t , t + δ=
t) fi k ( x, t + δ t ) F1k (x) =
x ′ k =1
where i represents the direction of
momentum. Details of the LB methodology The interactive force between the fluid and
are well described in the literature by several wall is given as (Shan and Doolen, 1996)
investigators (Kang et al., 2005; Mukherjee et
794
Three-Dimensional Deformation of a Droplet on a Square Duct Wall Considering Wetting Effect
−nk ( x ) ∑ g kw nw ( x ′ )( x ′ − x )
F2 k ( x ) = PROBLEM SPECIFICATION
′
x The present study deals with the simulation
where of deformation and spreading behaviour of a
n w = number density of the wall, which is a three-dimensional spherical immiscible
constant at the wall and zero elsewhere. droplet adhere to the duct wall. A square duct
g kw = interactive strength between the of aspect ratio 10:1 has been taken and a
component k and the wall. droplet is placed on one of the wetted wall of
F 2k is the force that is perpendicular to the the duct as shown in Fig. 1. The droplet is
wall. Hence, it does not affect the no slip placed in the presence of shear flow. The
boundary condition. It may be noted that the density ratio droplet fluid to the carrier fluid
inclusion of fluid/solid interaction does not is considered to be 1 in the present study. The
have any influence on macroscopic equations study has been performed for different
since F2k only exists at the interface of solid combinations of Reynolds number, Capillary
and fluid. g kw is negative for wetting fluid numbers and viscosity ratios.
and positive for non-wetting fluid.
Gravitational force is given by, REFERENCES
F3k ρ=
= kg mk nk g Gunstensen A K Rothman D H Zaleski S and
where g is gravitational factor. The total Zanetti G 1991 Lattice Boltzmann
density and momentum density of model of immiscible fluids Phys. Rev. A
multicomponent flow are given by 43 4320–4327.
ρ = ∑ mk ∑ fi k He X Y Chen S Y and Zhang R Y 1999 A
k i lattice Boltzmann scheme for
ρ u = ∑ mk ρ k u k incompressible multiphase flow and its
application in simulation of Rayleigh-
Taylor instability J. Comp. Phys. 152
642–663.
Kang Q Zhang D and Chen S 2005
Displacement of a three dimensional
immiscible droplet in a channel J. Fluid
Mech. 545 41–66.
Martys N S and Chen H 1996 Simulation of
multicomponent fluids in complex
three-dimensional geometries by the
lattice Boltzmann method Phys. Rev. E
53 743–750.
Mukherjee P P Wang C Y and Kang Q 2009
Meso-scopic modeling of two-phase
behavior and flooding phenomena in
polymer electrolyte fuel cells
Electrochim. Acta 54 6861–6875.
Figure 1. Computational domain and Shan X and Chen H 1993 Lattice Boltzmann
sectional view of the domain. model for simulating flows with
795
Bhardwaj and Dalal
multiple phases and components Phys. Swift M Osborn W and Yeomans J 1995
Rev. E 47 1815–1819. Lattice Boltzmann simulation of
nonideal fluids Phys. Rev. Lett. 75 830–
Shan X and Doolen G 1995 Multicomponent
833.
lattice-Boltzmann model with
interparticle interaction J. Stat. Phys. 81 Zhang J 2011 Lattice Boltzmann method for
379–393. microfluidics: models and applications
Microfluid Nanofluid 10 1–28.
796
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
2000
models is important to evaluate the debris
bed characteristics.
1.0
0.6
0.4
798
Analysis of Droplet Solidification during FCI in Severe Accident of Nuclear Reactors
REFERENCES
Gutierrez-Miravete E et al. 1989 A
Mathematical Model of the Spray
Deposition Process Metall. Trans 20A
71-85.
Quist W E and Lewis R E 1986 The Need for
Rapidly Solidified Powder Metallurgy
Aluminum Alloys for Aerospace
Applications Rapidly Solidified Powder
Aluminum Alloys (eds. Mahy H P et al.)
ASTM.
799
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
modelling of the micromixer takes in effect solved with the species transport equation
dimensions and spacing between ribs to shown in Eqn.3 in the flow field. Two fluids
optimize the distribution of these are modelled with different concentration of
recirculation zones to enhance the mixing dilute species based on the inlet mass fraction
efficiency. of dilute species in both the fluids. The
concentration of the fluid at a particular
NUMERICAL MODEL location is modelled using transport of dilute
In the present work, a microchannel species equation shown in Eqn. The
comprising of two Y shaped inlets and Continuity equation is given as:
single outlet is modelled. The 2D numerical
v 0
model used for numerical experiments is t (1)
shown in Figure. 1.
The Navier-Stokes equation is given as:
v
t
vv p . v v T g F
(2)
Species transport equation is given as
801
Numerical Analysis of Micromixer with Flow Disturbing Ribs
|𝐶−Cavg|
∑𝐸𝑙𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛 section increases, thereby leading to an
Cavg
𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
𝑀= (6) enhanced mixing. Moreover, at the
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑓𝐸𝑙𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
downstream of the rectangular ribs, adverse
Here Cavg is the concentration of the fluidic pressure gradient develops leading to
medium at a local space when the fluids are boundary layer separation. This induces local
completely mixed. In the present case it is vortices which further enhance the mixing.
arithmetic mean of both the inlet The streamline plot for channel with and
configurations without ribs shown in Figure. 3 ascertains
this.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Flow in Smooth microchannel
Initially, a smooth microchannel without ribs
is modelled to visualize the separated flow
and extent of diffusion. Figure. 2 shows the
concentration plot for a micro mixer without
ribs. Completely separated blue and red
regions indicate the flow is separated. The
separated flow regime obtained in the Figure 3. Effect of rectangular rib
channel coincides with the experimental
The average mixing index in zone ‘C’ for a
results of Shou-Shing et al. (2013) which
smooth channel is found to be 0.7 whereas
validates the present numerical model.
for a channel with single rib is found to be
0.4. It is to be noted that in the present work a
lower value of mixing index pertains to the
case with more efficient mixing. Thus we can
see that the flow constriction as a result of rib
and the formation of vortices play a role in
the enhanced mixing in the flow channel with
Figure 2. Concentration plot for
ribs. A considerable amount of numerical
Conventional T shaped micromixer
experiments is made in the present work to
FLOW IN A RIBBED CHANNEL study the effect of flow constriction and
recirculation length in the enhancement of
The amount of mixing is found to increase mixing.
with increasing length. As the length of the
channel increases, the dilute species diffuse EFFECT OF RECIRCULATION
which leads to effective mixing. It is also LENGTH
seen from the numerical analysis and earlier
published results that with an increase in The length of the recirculation can be varied
velocity, the effect of convective transport is by changing the spacing between the
more and the mixing gets enhanced. Thus, in consecutive ribs. It is seen from the analysis
the present work, an attempt has been made that with the increase in the number of ribs,
to use rectangular ribs in the microchannel there is an increase in the number of
which will reduce the area of cross section. recirculation. It should be noted that in the
Since the mass conservation is employed the present work, the ribbed zone is constrained
local velocity at the reduced area of cross to zone (B). Thus increasing the number of
802
Srikarthikeyan et al.
ribs implies decreasing the spacing between through the constricted space. The increased
the ribs when the rib width is kept constant. convective velocity increases the mixing
The increase in the number of local between the fluids. In order to further
recirculation is found to enhance the mixing increase the velocity of the fluid, rectangular
more effectively. The effect of mixing with ribs are introduced on both sides of the
increase in the number of ribs is shown in microchannel. It is seen that with the
Figure.4 introduction of ribs on both the walls of
rectangular channel, there is an increase in
the formation of recirculation in addition to
flow constriction. This is found to enhance
the mixing efficiency considerably. This is
Figure 4.Effect of increase in number of shown in Figure. 6.When introducing ribs in
ribs. (Mixing index is 0.32) both the walls, staggered arrangement of ribs
It was also seen from the numerical analysis is found to be more efficient because of the
that the effect of length of recirculation zones recurrent formation of recirculation zones.
on enhancement of mixing is considerably
less when compared to the effect of decrease
in distance between vortices. Thus the mixing
effectiveness is found to be high when the
ribs are close to each other with a
considerable distance provided for the
formation of vortices. Too close the ribs, the
recirculation lengths becomes too less,
leading to a flow pattern similar to the one
observed without the formation of vortices. Figure 6. Ribs along both the walls
In order to still increase the formation of (Mixing index (a) 0.08 and (b)0.15
close recirculation zones, a stepped It can be seen from Figure. 6 and based on
rectangular rib is used that enhances the the analysis that even in the case of ribs along
mixing efficiency when compared to the one both the walls the mixing increase with
with regular rectangular ribs. This is shown increases with increase in number of ribs as
in Figure. 5 reasoned earlier. In the present work the best
mixing index of 0.04 (which indicates 96 %
mixing) was obtained for stepped rectangular
Figure 5 Mixing in a stepped cone ribs formulated on both sides of the channel.
(mixing index 0.25) This can be reasoned based on the combined
effect of flow constriction and formation of
EFFECT OF FLOW close recirculation zones.
CONSTRICTION
CONCLUSION
Analysis has been done by varying the height
In the present work, a micro reactor with
of the ribs. The mixing efficiency is found to
rectangular ribs are numerically analysed for
increase with increase in the height of ribs.
effective mixing. Formation of recirculation
This can be reasoned based on the increase in
zones and flow constriction were found to
velocity of the fluid as the flow passes
play the leading role in the enhancement of
803
Numerical Analysis of Micromixer with Flow Disturbing Ribs
REFERENCES
Andreussi Tommaso Chiara Galletti Roberto
Mauri Simone Camarri and Maria
Vittoria Salvetti 2015 Flow regimes in
T-shaped micro-mixers Computers &
Chemical Engineering 76 150-159.
Stogiannis I A Passos A D Mouza A A Paras
S V Pěnkavová V Tihon J 2014 Flow
investigation in a microchannel with a
flow disturbing rib Chemical
Engineering Science 119 65-76.
Lee Chia-Yen Wen-Teng Wang Chan-
Chiung Liu and Lung-Ming Fu 2016
Passive mixers in microfluidic systems:
Areview Chemical Engineering Journal
288 146-160.
Nguyen N T Wereley S T 2002
Fundamentals and applications of
microfluidics Artech House.
N T Nguyen Z Wu 2005 Micromixers—a
reviewJMiMi 15R1.
Shou-Shing Hsieh Jyun-Wei Lin Jyun-Hong
Chen 2013 Mixing efficiency of Y-type
micromixers with different angles
International Journal of Heat and Fluid
Flow 44 130-139.
804
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Transportation of heavy crude oil through closed pipelines is a challenging issue
both in offshore and in land oil transportation, because of their high viscosity and high carbon
to hydrogen atomic ratios along with the presence of Sulphur content and brine. The present
paper deals with the pressure modelling and flow steadiness analysis of two phase Canadian
Athabasca crude oil & water flow (added in order to reduce the viscous drag) in OpenFOAM
(Open Source Field Operation & Manipulation) software. The simulation modelling is done
using RAS approach and k- turbulence model, which is followed by post processing
through paraview in HPC of kanchenjungha cluster, NIT Sikkim, India.
Keywords: Openfoam; ANSYS fluent 6.2; HPC.
___________________________________________________________
806
A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil with OpenFOAM in HPC
___________________________________________________________________________________________
density than water. At the interface of the two Fig 3-Flow Velocity Distribution_80%_4
fluids, owing to the difference in density, the seconds
pressure varies drastically. The interface zone
Interpretation: After 4 seconds of flow, it has
affects the pressure typically at a zone of 10-15 been observed that the dark red zone at the top
cm along the length. In the initial part of the boundary has enhanced in size, i.e. the zone of
flow, water dominated the flow more because of high shear stress has increased, reducing the
its low viscosity and high flow ability thus flow ability of multiphase flow mixture. This
giving a roughly constant pressure plot. marked the time period where maximum
However the oil water interface dominated in pumping power was necessary for
the last part of the flow. The following flow transportation, due to high shear stress between
velocity distribution was obtained with water
layers.
velocity being 80% of the oil flow velocity.
Here the water velocity is (8 8 8) and the oil
flow velocity is (10 10 10)
807
Banerjee and Barman
____________________________________________________________________________________
The purpose of modelling the flow field is to OpenFOAM Masters Thesis NTNU
trace the velocity distribution all along the Mechanical Engineering under R
length, such that the viscous shear stress can Kristoffersen.
be modified accordingly. Hole G Fluid Viscosity effects on Centrifugal
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Pumps.
In order to create this paper, I have worked on Jignesh P Thaker & Jyotirmay Banerjee 2013
the Kanchenjungha Cluster HPC, to generate CFD Simulation Of Two-Phase Flow
data through post porcessing in paraview at NIT Phenomena In Horizontal Pipelines Using
Sikkim. I am actually indebted to the Openfoam Proceedings of the Fortieth
mechanical department of NIT Sikkim, for co- National Conference on Fluid Mechanics
operating with me throughout my research and Fluid Power December 12-14 2013
tenure. NITHamirpu Himachal Pradesh India
FMFP2013 34.
REFERENCE
Lecture material – Environmental Hydraulic
Abdul R M Nour A H Sulaiman A Z Simulation Page 66-69.
Experimental Investigation on Dynamic
Viscosity and Rheology of Water-Crude Marie E Sundt W under the supervision of Bjørn
Oil Two Phases Flow Behavior at Different H Hjertager Jørgen Osenbroch Numerical
Water Volume Fractions at American And Analytical Study of Steady State and
Journal of Engineering Research (AJER) Transient Heat Transfer In Liquid Filled
e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN: 2320-0936 Deadlegs Masters thesis.
03(03)113-120. Nadirah L Abdurahman M S Nadira H and
Andersson P Tutorial on multiphase Interfoam. Rizauddin D Rheological Study of
Petroleum Fluid and Oil-in-Water
Behrens T Open Foam’s basic solvers for linear Emulsion in International Journal of
systems of equations Solvers Engineering Sciences & Research
preconditioner smoothers. Technology.
CFD online discussion forum Available: Nour A Nour A H & Abdul H A 2012 Bari
http://www.cfd-online.com/Forum/. Pipeline transportation of viscous crudes as
Desamala A B Dasamahapatra A K Mandal T K concentrated oil-in-water emulsions in
2014 Oil-Water Two-Phase Flow Journal Of Petroleum Science And
Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline – A Engineering.
Comprehensive CFD Study in OpenFOAM user guide Available:
International Journal of Chemical http://cfd.direct/openfoam/user-guide/.
Molecular Nuclear Materials and
Metallurgical Engineering World Pathankar S V Numerical Heat Transfer & Fluid
Academy of Science Engineering and Flow.
Technology 8(4). Sengupta T K Fundamentals of Computational
Hemida H OpenFOAM tutorial: Free surface Fluid Dynamics.
tutorial using interFoam and rasInterFoam . Voigt Comparison of Turbulence Models for
Herreras N Omagogeascoa J I Labeaga Two- numerical calculation of Airflow in an
Phase pipe flow simulations with annex 20 room.
808
A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil with OpenFOAM in HPC
___________________________________________________________________________________________
809
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Fins are protrusions on heated surfaces provided to augment the heat
transfer rate. Considerable amount of work has been done in the past to design various
geometries. In the present study a pin fin with ellipsoidal beads surrounded by a
cylinder is analyzed under natural convection conditions using commercial CFD code
ANSYS FLUENT©. The heat sink is supplied with a constant heat duty of 60 W. The
size of the beads is varied and the heat transfer and fluid flow characteristics are
studied. It is concluded, based on the analysis that cylindrical fins with beads are
more effective than solid, hollow and annular cylindrical pin fins, which stresses the
importance of the study of these fins to utilize them in an effective way.
assembly is kept in a closed cubicle of ellipsoidal beads. The novelty of the present
dimensions 3× 3 × 3 m with top side open at work is in the analysis of pin fins with
ambient temperature. The material properties ellipsoidal beads.
and other conditions are specified in RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
[Balachandar et al., 2015].
A non-uniform meshing is applied to the In the present work beads are created inside
model where, mesh is extremely fine in the hollow region of the pin fin mentioned in
modelling the bead with the maximum size of [Balachandar et al., 2015]. The dimensions of
0.01 mm, whereas a tetrahedral mesh of the beads were less than that of the inner
maximum size 0.5 mm is applied to the rest radius of the pin fin. The beads were kept one
of the fin assembly. Other geometrical parts over the other with the bead in contact with
are discretised with a maximum element size the base plate being a half ellipsoid. This is
of 5 mm. A grid independence is performed done so as the increase the contact between
to ascertain the accuracy of discretisation. the heated surface and the beads. The
The following equations are solved using the introduction of beads is found to augment the
commercial CFD code ANSYS FLUENT©. natural convection heat transfer as a result of
increase in conduction when compared to
hollow cylindrical pin fin. It can be illustrated
by Figure 2 that the convection heat
conduction at the planar section along the
center of the bead is high. As a result the
temperature at the center of the plot with R=0
cm is the highest. But as one moves from the
center of the pin fin of the walls, the
conduction heat transfer decreases till the
wall. At walls, the conduction is the
maximum.
Figure 1. Side view of the present
geometry and heat sink
The Continuity equation:
∂u 𝜕v ∂w
+ + =0 (1)
∂x 𝜕𝑦 ∂z
∂u ∂u 𝜕u ∂2 u ∂2 u ∂2 u
u. + v. + w. = ν. ( 2 + 2 + )+
∂x ∂y ∂z ∂x ∂y ∂z2
g. β. ∆T (2)
The Energy equation
∂T ∂T 𝜕T ∂2 T
ρ. Cp. ( u. + v. + 𝑧. ) = k. ( +
∂x ∂x 𝜕𝑧 ∂x2
∂2 T ∂2 T
+ ) (3) Figure 2.Heat Transfer in Fins with beads
∂𝑦 2 ∂z2
The validation of the present numerical The maximum base plate temperature (which
model is described in [Balachandar et al., is a measure of overall heat transfer) of fins
2015]. Various pin fin geometries analyzed in with ellipsoidal beads is compared with the
the present work are solid pin fins, hollow annular, hollow and solid cylindrical pin fins
pin fins, annular pins and pin fins with are provided in table 1. In order to ensure a
811
Numerical Heat transfer analysis of Pin fin with Ellipsoidal beads
proper comparison, the radius of the pin fin is (higher air) to enter into the fin. The increase
kept constant at 10 mm for all the cases. in convective velocity causes an increased
heat transfer when there is a hollow space
It can be seen that fins with ellipsoidal beads
inside. However, when the introduction of
is found to be more efficient when compared
inner cylinder in an annular pin fin or
to other fins. Though conduction heat transfer
ellipsoidal beads with the present designs
was explained earlier to for the increased heat
provides a considerable amount of space for
transfer rate in fins with beads when
the convective fluid to travel. Moreover an
compared to hollow fins, the explanation is
increased heat dissipation occurs due to the
insufficient in comparison with annular and
conductive nature of inner cylinder in an
solid pin fins. It has been explained by
annular pin fin and beads in the present case.
Balachandar et al., (2015) that hollow pin
However, since the beads provide a higher
fins when optimized provides a better heat
surface area to volume ration when compared
transfer when compared to solid fins because
to the inner cylinder in an annular pin fin,
of the increase in convection heat transfer.
there is an increase in convective heat
The hollow space creates room for a
transfer.
considerable amount of convective fluid
Table 1. Comparison
Elliptical beads Annular fins with
Fin Type (with axes lengths inner cylinder radius Hollow pin fin Solid pin fin
5mm) 5 mm
Maximum Base Plate 170.8 181.2 190.3 192.4
Tempeature (ºC)
Heat transfer
coefficients (W/mK)
8.42 7.43 5.24 5.1
(X=5mm)
X axis length
180 (Y=5mm) Jubran B A Hamdan M A & Abdualh R M
1993 Enhanced heat transfer, missing
175
pin, and optimization for cylindrical pin
170 fin arrays Journal of heat transfer 115(3)
576-583.
165
0 5 10 Bahadur Raj and Avram Bar-Cohen 2007
Length (mm) Orthotropic thermal conductivity effect
Fig. 3 Effect of Y and X axis length of on cylindrical pin fin heat transfer
beads International journal of heat and mass
transfer 50(5) 1155-1162.
190
Agrawal S Simon T W North M Bissell D &
185 Cui T 2015 Heat transfer augmentation
Temperature (ºC)
But in all these designs, effective mixing fluids mix in a T-Section as shown in Figure,
happens occurs after the mixer section. Thus 1. The diameter of the channels investigated
the two fluids should flow together over a is 1000 microns with a total flow length of 22
mixing length. These causes a space mm. A mesh comprising of approximately
constraint and fabrication defects. More 15000 triangular elements is used. A
importantly, the pressure drop of the mixed preliminary grid convergence study was
fluid increases. made to ascertain the number of grids. The
numerical model for a given pressure inlet is
In the present work, an attempt has been
validated with analytical results for average
made to alleviate this problem. Two inlets
flow velocity. The objective of the present
sides forming the mixer section are modified
work is to obtain maximum mixing at the
in contrast to the conventional methods in
zone after T junction (post mixing zone). The
which the outlet side is modified.
control field zone in which the porosity is
One could easily observe that a lot of formal distributed on the two T-section inlets (pre
designs of obstacles were tried in the past. mixing zone). The entire numerical model
However, many such efforts required was created and tested using the commercial
considerable trial and errors and the operating FEM solver COMSOL MULTIPHYSICS ©.
range for each type of chaotic micromixer is
limited. Thus, a considerable amount of time
is spent on designing the shape of obstacle or
surface modification. This necessitates
computational design of micromixers.
Topology optimization is a paradigm using
which the material distribution along a given
space is optimized for a given objective
Figure. 1 Microchannel Layout
function subjected to specified constraints.
An earlier attempt to apply topological In the present work, a modification is done in
optimization to Navier-Strokes equation was the N-S momentum equation to formulate the
presented in. Simple T-Junctions are widely problem of topology optimization. A force
used for micromixing. However modifying term is added to the N-S equations that
the inlets is presumed to allow rapid mixing models scaled porosity. In the present work
of fluids. In the present work an attempt has scaled porosity is used to remove finite
been made to use topology optimization to elements from the microchannel. A scaled
arrive at an optimal surface modification of porosity (γ) is varying from 0 to 1 for the
inlets of T –junctions. The control variable geometry. Null value of γ indicates a solid
used in the present work to optimise the filled channel. If the value of γ is unity, it is
surface modifications is Scaled porosity assumed that the channel is open and
(discussed in detail later). The present streamlines can pass through that point. The
method is also aimed at bringing in a new numerical solver optimizes the microchannel
strategy that would ease the task of designers by assigning different values of γ to mesh
to arrive at optimal micromixer layout for elements to arrive at desired mixing level.
rapid mixing especially the layout that Eq. 1 shows the continuity equation. The
modifies the pre-mixing zone. momentum equation used is shown in
equation 2.
NUMERICAL MODEL
(2)
In the present work, a micromixer comprising
of horizontal microchannels having two inlets Here α (γ) is the forcing term where
and single outlet is modelled. The 2D (3)
numerical model used for numerical
experiments is shown in Figure. 1. The two
815
Topology Optimization of Pre-Mixing Zone in a T Shaped Micromixer for Enhanced Mixing
α max is a function of Darcy number modifications are absent. Figure. 2 shows the
(Da) as shown in equation 4. contour for mixing in the absence of any
surface modifications of the pre-mixing zone.
(4) It can be seen that nearly two separated fluid
Here q is the scaling coefficient and η is the zones for high and low concentration fluids
dynamic viscosity of the fluid. Mixing of two are seen from the contour. In order to
fluids is modelled by coupling the N-S quantify the result, the plot of mixing index
momentum conservation with Nernst-Planck with distance is shown in Figure. 3. As
advection-diffusion equation. The advection discussed earlier mixing index of 0 indicates
diffusion equation is shown in equation 5. absolute mixing. It can be seen that there is a
small decrease in mixing index as one moves
along the channel. This can be reasoned as
(5) the increase in diffusion between the two
Here D is the diffusivity of the medium and fluids with increase in distance.
C is the concentration.
Pressure inlet (100 Pa) boundary conditions
are applied to the two inlets and outflow (at
atmospheric pressure) is applied at the outlet.
The concentration at one inlet is considered
1000 and other as 0. Thus a concentration of
500 at the fluidic domain indicates complete
mixing. Mixing index is used to calculate the
extent of mixing at the post mixing zone. Figure 2. Concentration plot for
Mixing index of 0 indicates complete mixing. Conventional T shaped micromixer
|𝐶−500|
∑𝐸𝑙𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛 1.2
500
𝑀= 𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
(6) 1
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑓𝐸𝑙𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
Mixing Index
CONCLUSION
In the present work, an algorithm for
computational design of rapid chaotic
micromixers are demonstrated and tested to
modify the shape of the premixing zone of T
shaped micromixer. Scaled porosity is used
as a control field parameter with an objective
Figure 4. Scaled porosity distribution to get maximum mixing at the post mixing
(surface modification) zone. The surface modified using the
Variation in mixing index for surface topology optimization algorithm is presented.
modified T shaped micromixer and that The resulting topology of T-shaped
without is compared and shown in Figure. 5. micromixer is found to be efficient as a result
It can be seen that the surface modified of surface modifications inducing a strong
micromixer attains 0 micromixing vortices downstream to the surface
immediately after the mixer section for the modification.
same inlet and outlet pressure difference.
Thus the pre zone surface modified REFERENCE
micromixer is more effective than
Jog C S Haber R B 1996 Stability of finite
conventional T shaped junction.
element models for distributed-parameter
1 optimization and topology design
0.8 CMAME130203-26.
Mixing Index
Convetional T shaped
0.6 micromixer Reyes D R Iossifidis D P-AAuroux A
0.4 Manz2002 Micro total analysis systems
Modified T shaped
micromixer Introduction theory and technology Anal
0.2
Chem742623-36.
0
0 5 10 15 Gan H Y Lam Y C Nguyen N T Tam K C
Length along the Flow channel(s) Yangn C 2007 Efficient mixing of
Figure. 5 Mixing index comparison.
viscoelastic fluids in a microchannel at
low Reynolds number Micro fluid Nano
In order to further focus on the effect of fluid 3 101-108.
surface modification on the flow, the
streamlines along the flow channel are Olesen L H Okkels F Bruus H 2006 A high
plotted in Figure, 6. level programming language
implementation of topology optimization
applied to steady state Navier–Stokes
flow International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 65 975-1001.
Nguyen N-T Wu Z 2001 Micromixers—a
review JMiMi 15 R1.
817
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The key factor for the world wide technological and infrastructural
development is availability of energy. The per capita electricity consumption pattern
is yard stick to measure the growth rate of any country. Coal has vital role to play in
meeting the global demand for energy as it is the most abundant, available and
affordable fuel. There are certain negative impacts of coal combustion as greenhouse
gas emission including carbon dioxide (CO2), particulate matter (PM), release of
pollutants as SOx and NOx, carbon monoxide (CO) which is a worldwide concern for
global warming and climate change. The oxy-coal combustion is the newer and
promising technique to address the concerns related with the greenhouse gas emission
due to coal combustion. CFD is a powerful tool to predict the valuable information
regarding the combustion of coal, flame temperature, NOx & SOx formation etc. under
variable operating condition. The objective of this work is to do the comparative CFD
based study of the performance of pulverized coal combustion in air and in the
mixture of O2/CO2 using commercial CFD code Star CCM+. The eddy break up model
and Discrete Ordinate model is used for turbulence - chemistry interaction and
radiation modelling. The gas phase have been modelled by Eulerian description, solid
phase i.e coal flow is modelled by Lagrangian description and empirical sub models
are used for char oxidation and coal devolatilization .Comparison of gas temperature
profile, NOx emission and CO emission have been made between coal combustion in
air and coal combustion in various O2/CO2 mixture. It has been found that gas
temperature and thermal NOx decreases in case of O2/CO2 combustion in comparison
with the air combustion at same coal flow rate.
Keywords: Oxy-coal Combustion; NOx Emissions; Computational Fluid
Dynamics
The standard k- model is used for turbulence combustion of methane and volatile gases
modelling and solid phase combustion which is
associated with coal devolatilization and
COAL COMBUSTION MODELS
further oxidation of residual char. The coal
Coal combustion simulation includes the gas used for simulation is El Cerrejon coal, and
phase combustion which mainly includes it's properties are given in Table 3.
VM FC Moisture Ash C H O N S
wt% 34.8 50.8 5.8 8.6 69.2 4.4 9.98 1.42 0.58
flame temperature increases with increase in Higher oxygen concentration in O2/CO2 gas
oxygen concentration in the O2/CO2 gas mixture increases the NOx emission rate. An
mixture. From Fig. 2 for the case A3 (air increase in O2 percentage in mixture leads to
combustion) and O1 (oxy coal combustion)
increase in gas temperature which promotes
having same bulk equivalence ratio (the
the NOx formation further. From fig. 4 for the
flame temperature in case of air combustion
is more in comparison with the oxy coal case A3 (air combustion) and O1 (oxy coal
combustion. This is due to the higher specific combustion) with same bulk equivalence
heat of CO2 in comparison with nitrogen for ratio (the NOx emission is slightly more in
air combustion. case of A3 in comparison with Case O1. The
results shows that the majority of NOX is
2300 formed due to temperature in form of thermal
2100
NOx.
1900
1700 500
1500
T [K]
1300 400
1100 Case O1
900 Case O2
300
700
NO [ppm]
Case O3
500
200
300 Case O1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Case O2
100
Height [mm] Case O3
1300
1100 Case A3 400
900 Case O1
NO [ ppm]
for combustion in O2/CO2 gas mixture. The Conference of the ATI Engineering
flame temperature behaviour is critical for Association.
understanding pollutant emission as it is
Rowan Steven L and Celik Ismail B 2015A
temperature sensitive. With increase in Reduced Order Model for the Design
oxygen concentration in O2/CO2 gas mixture of Oxy-Coal Combustion Systems
the NOx emission increases due to thermal
Journal of Combustion Hindawi
NOX.
Publishing Corporation.
REFERENCES Toporov Dobrin D Combustion of Pulverised
coal in a Mixture of Oxygen and
Al-Abbas Hussein et. al. 2011 CFD
Recycled Flue Gas Elsevier 225
modelling of air-fired and oxy-fuel
Wyman Street Waltham MA 02451
combustion of lignite in a 100 KW
USA
furnace Fuel 90 1778 - 1795.
Balusamy Saravanan et. al. 2013 Flow field
measurements of pulverized coal
combustion using optical diagnostic
techniques Exp fluids 54:1534
Balusamy Saravanan et. al. 2015 Laser
diagnostics of pulverized coal
combustion in O2/N2and O2/CO2
conditions: velocity and scalar field
Exp fluids 56:108
Croise Eric et. al. 2000 Coal combustion in
O2/CO2 mixtures compared with air
The Canadian Journal of Chemical
Engineering 78.
Hu Yukun and Yan Jinyue 2013 Numerical
simulation of radiation intensity of oxy-
coal combustion with flue gas
recirculation International Journal of
Greenhouse Gas Control 17 473 - 480
Liu Hao et. al. 2005 Comparisons of
pulverized coal combustion in air and
in mixtures of O2/CO2 Fuel 84 833 -
840
Muto Masaya et. al. 2015 Large-eddy
simulation of pulverized coal jet flame
–Effect of oxygen concentration on
NOx formation Fuel 142 152-163
Okazaki K and Ando T NOx 1997 Reduction
mechanism in coal combustion with
recycled CO2 Energy 22 207 - 215
Perrone Diego 2015 A study of an oxy-coal
combustion with wet recycle using
CFD modelling Proceeding of 70th
822
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this study, some mechanical properties of high strength concrete under
the effect of fire flame exposure is presented. The concrete specimens were subjected
to fire flame temperatures ranging from (20-850°C) at different ages of 30, 60 and 90
days. Three temperature levels of 400°C, 600°C and 850°C were chosen of exposure
duration of 2.0 hours. After burning, the concrete specimens were quenched in a water
tank to provide the maximum shock due to sudden cooling. The test results showed
that the density, compressive strength, tensile and flexural strength decreases when
the fire flame temperatures were increased. mathematical models were proposed to
predict the compressive strength, splitting tensile strength and flexural strength of
concrete after exposure to fire flame.
Keywords: Concrete; Mathematical modelling; Mechanical Properties.
70
(O.P.C) and 10% silica fume (silica fume was
65 Mix No.
replaced from cement). For all three mixes 60
55 Mix 2
fire flame on the density of high strength 50 Mix 3
as the following: 10
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
o
Temperature C
Mix 2
temperature exposure and for all ages 55
50 Mix 3
and for mix 2, the reduction in density
45
less than reduction in mix 1 was ranged 40
between (1.4-2.0 %),(2.8-4.2 %) and 35
(5.6-8.6 %) respectively . 30
824
Mechanical Properties of Concrete Exposed to Burning
Mix 3
81%) of the initial strength. At 850°C fire 45
40
flame temperature exposure the residual 35
30
strength ranged from (29-45%). 25
20
The results showed that the binder material 15
silica fume performed poorly compared to Figure 4. The effect of fire exposure on
the compressive strength of high strength
other binder materials. Although the silica
concrete at age 30 days and 2.0 hours
fume addition increased the initial strength of period of exposure
Table (1): Test values of compressive strength of high strength concrete for all mixes
before and after exposure to fire flame
behaviour Cement and concrete Kamil Kaloush Doug Carlson George Way
Aggregtaes1574-84. and Mark Belshe 2004 Crumb Rubber-
concrete
El-GammalA K Abdel-Gawad Y El-Sherbini
http://www.precast.org/publications/sol
AShalaby 2010 Compressive Strength
utions/2004_fall/crumb_rubber.
of Concrete utilizing Waste tire
rubberJournal of Emerging trends in Mavroulidou M Figueiredo J 2010 Discarded
Engineering and Applied Sciences196- tyre rubber as concrete aggregate: A
99. possible outlet for used tyres Global
Nest Journal 1-5.
Eshmaiel Ganjian Morteza Khorami Ali
Akbar Maghsoudi 2009 Scrap-tyre Nimesh Sharma 2010 Tyre Recycling: The
rubber replacement for aggregate and new business on block
filler in concreteConstruction and http://dare.co.in/opportunities/manufact
Building materials231828-1836. uring/tyre recycling: the new business
on block.
Gintautas Skripkiunas Audrius Grinys
Benjaminas Cernius 2007 Deformation Segre N Joekes I 2000 Use of tyre rubber
Properties of concrete with rubber waste particles as addition to cement paste
additives Materials Science 13(3) 219- Cement concrete research 30(9)1421-
222. 1425.
Senthil Kumaran G Nurdin Mushule and Skripkianas G Grinys A 2005 Using tyre
M.Lakshmipathy2008 A review on rubber Waste for modification of
construction technologies that enables concrete propertiesArchitecture
environmental protection Rubberized Proceedings of conference Kaunas
ConcreteAmerican journal of Technology 132-137.
Engineering and Applied science 1(1)
40-44.
Hernandez-Olivares Barluenga Bollati
Witoszek B 2002 Static and Dynamic
behavior of recycled tyre rubber-filled
concrete Cement and Concrete
Research 32(10) 1587-1596.
J L AkasakiA C Marques M L Marques A P
M Trigo Bibliographical review of the
used tyre in concrete Universidad
Estadual Paulista (Unesp) Brasil
www.ppgec.feis.unesp.br.
Kersevicius V 2002 Rubber waste-Raw
materials for building: Technical and
economical aspect of
utilizationEnvironmental Research,
Engineering and Management 3(31)72-
77.
Kamil E Kaloush P E ge B Way P E Han Zhu
Geor 2005 Properties of crumb rubber
concrete Journal of the transportation
research board028-14.
830
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Hydrogels with unique response to the external environment can be used as
an environmental responsive sensor. Chitosan is a hydrogel which has the capability
to swell on absorbing large amount of water. The hydrophilic groups present in the
chitosan as well as in solvent medium are mainly responsible for the folding of
chitosan film during the swelling process. Initial studies on folding phenomenon have
confirmed chitosan could be a potential material for environmental responsive sensor.
This folding behavior is dependent on the mechanical properties of chitosan and it is
modified in the presence of nanoparticles. Also, the folding behavior is a function of
diffusion of solvent molecules and their interaction with chitosan. Molecular
Dynamics (MD) simulation is applied to understand the interaction mechanisms
between chitosan, nanoparticle and solvent medium. The folding behavior of chitosan
and its response time could be tailored based on the interaction mechanisms obtained
from MD.
_____________________________
as shown in figure 1. Also we would like to In the presence of water molecules, the
understand the phenomenon of adsorption of interaction between CS and HAP is hindered.
water and desorption of chitosan from HAP. Water molecules are attracted towards
Understanding the fundamental principles is hydrophilic surfaces of HAP. The water
necessary for successful design and molecules diffuse through CS chains to reach
implementation of hydrogels as sensors the HAP surface. The amine group and
hydroxyl group present in CS are responsible
for the diffusion of water molecules.
SIMULATION METHODOLOGY
Figure 2. Molecular model to represent
All simulations were performed using the interface between Chitosan, HAP and
LAMMPS [Plimpton S 1995]. Two chitosan Water.
chains, each of length 50 monomer units
were selected. Hydroxyapatite (HAP) crystal The oxygen in water molecule is attracted
has a hexagonal unit cell with space group towards the Ca2+ ion via electrostatic
P63/m and it was used to generate HAP interactions and it was confirmed using radial
nanoparticle. The chitosan chains were distribution function (RDF) as shown in
allowed to interact with HAP nanoparticle at figure 3. The PO 4 3- ion attracts water
300K. Then, CS/HAP system was solvated molecules via hydrogen bond formation as
using modified TIP3P water molecules as shown in figure 4.
shown in figure 2. The entire system was
equilibrated at 300K using NVT ensemble.
To understand the interactions, the system
was subjected to 1 ns (NVT) MD simulation.
832
Molecular Mechanism in Self Folding Behaviour of Hydrogel Nanocomposites
REFERENCES
Fernandes R Gracias D H 2012 Self-folding
polymeric containers for encapsulation
and delivery of drugs Adv. Drug Deliv.
Rev. 64 1579–1589.
Johnson B D Beebe D J Crone W C 2004
Effects of swelling on the mechanical
properties of a pH-sensitive hydrogel for
use in microfluidic devices Mater. Sci.
Eng. C 24 575–581.
Mathesan S Rath A Ghosh P 2015 Molecular
Figure 4. (a) Electrostatic interaction mechanisms in deformation of cross-
between Ca2+ and oxygen of water (b) linked hydrogel nanocomposite Mater.
Hydrogen bond formation between PO 4 3-
Sci. Eng. C 59 157-167
ion and water molecules. Green-Calcium;
Red-Oxygen; White-Hydrogen; Yellow- Plimpton S 1995 Fast Algorithms for Short-
Phosphorous Range Molecular Dynamics J Comp
It is observed that water molecules tend to Phys 117 1-19.
have downward orientation facing the Rath A Mathesan S Ghosh P 2015
hydrogen towards oxygen of PO 4 3- and Nanomechanical characterization and
upward direction facing the oxygen towards molecular mechanism study of
Ca2+ ions of HAP (figure 4 a &b) [Zhao W nanoparticle reinforced and cross-linked
et.al (2014)]. The favourable orientation of chitosan biopolymer J. Mech. Behav.
water will leave the HAP surface surrounded Biomed. Mater 55 42-52.
with highly structured water, deteriorating the
interaction between CS and HAP surface. Zhao W Xu Z Yang Y, Sahai N 2014
This in turn affects the mechanical properties Surface Energetics of the Hydroxyapatie
of CS/HAP nanocomposites. Variation in the Nanocrystal − Water Interface: A
mechanical properties of the hydrogel alters Molecular Dynamics Study Langmuir
the folding behaviour of the hydrogel. 30 13283-13292
CONCLUSION
We have performed MD simulation to
understand the behaviour of CS/HAP
nanocomposite placed in a solvent medium.
In the absence of water molecules, CS
interacts with HAP. The interaction between
CS and HAP is affected in the presence of
highly structured water molecules around
HAP. Also, the CS chains tend to move away
from HAP surface. Thus interfacial water
plays a major role in determining the folding
behaviour of CS/HAP nanocomposites.
833
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
few modes obtained from multiscale thin where δ T , δΦ and δW is first variation of
shell model are compared with molecular kinetic energy, strain energy and virtual
mechanics simulations depicting good work of transverse load Q respectively.
agreement. Finite element based discretized form of
equation of motion can be expressed as:
CONSTITUIVE LAW
d Γ − δ dT BT S d Γ
− ∫ δ dTe ρ UT Ud
The constitutive law is derived from
Γe
e e ∫ e M e
Γe
interatomic interactions through Tersoff– (6)
Brenner potential using Cauchy–Born rule. + ∫ δ d e H Qd Γ e =
T T
0
Γe
The tangent constitutive matrix D relating where, d e is vector of elemental degrees of
incremental stress (ΔS) and moment (ΔM)
freedom,B is the strain/curvature–
resultant tensors with incremental Green–
displacement matrix, U is the interpolation
Lagrange strain (ΔE) and curvature(ΔK)
matrix of displacement field, H is the
A B
tensors is expressed as: D = T transverse displacement interpolation vector
D
(1)
B andΓ e is area of a finite element. For free
where the matrices A, B and D are vibration analysis, considering the harmonic
expressed as: motion and no transverse load, the
−1 eigenvalue problem is expressed as:
∂ 2W ∂ 2W ∂ 2W ∂ 2W
= − (2)
∫ ( −ω ρ U Ud + BT DBd e )d Γ e =
A 2 T
∂E∂E ∂E∂η ∂η∂η ∂η∂E e 0 (7)
Γ e
−1
∂ W ∂ W ∂ W ∂ W
2 2 2 2 Based on the convergence study, the spatial
=B − (3) integration in Eq. (7) is carried out using 3×3
∂K∂E ∂E∂η ∂η∂η ∂η∂K
Gauss quadrature numerical integration.
−1
∂ 2W ∂ 2W ∂ 2W ∂ 2W
=D − (4) FINITE ELEMENT DESCRIPRION
∂K∂K ∂K∂η ∂η∂η ∂η∂K
For the four and eight noded elements, the
The detailed expressions for the elements of in–plane displacements u and vin
constitutive matrix D can be found in strain/curvature–displacement relationsare
literature [Arroyo and Belytschko, 2002; interpolated through Lagrangian and
Singh and Patel, 2015].
serendipity interpolation functions,
GOVERING EQUATIONS respectively. The inter–element continuity of
w, ∂w/∂x and ∂w/∂y is enforced through
The deformation of a SWCNT as continuum
improved discrete Kirchhoff constraints
shell model having radius R and length L of
[Jeyachandrabose et al., 1987] on a
surface area Γ 0 subjected to transversely
quadrilateral element wherein the rotations
distributed load Q is represented by in–plane
∂w/∂x and ∂w/∂y are interpolated as:
displacements u, v and transverse
displacement w along x, y and z directions,
835
An Efficient Locking Multiscale Finite Elements for Free Vibration Analysis of Single Walled Carbon
Nanotubes
Table 1: The free vibration frequencies of 2.0310 nm long simply supported zigzag (8,
0) CNT.
a b
Number of elements in longitudinal (x) and circumferential (y) directions, Bending
mode, tTorsional mode, cResults based on higher order Cauchy–Born rule.
836
Singh and Patel
837
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Day-by-day, the things in every field are getting reduced in size. There is
need to reduce their sizes, so that space can be utilized completely. Due to the
advances in technologies, particularly increased performance and cost reduction are
expected from mechanisms/machines in the service. Compliant mechanisms offer a
great promise in providing new and better solutions to many mechanical design
problems. This leaves us only choice of developing new mechanisms like compliant
mechanism. Compliant mechanism consists of a whole single structure without any
joint. The grippers of simple shapes can be easily designed & manufactured. Design &
analysis of the hinges are very important. The paper consists of the two design
methods most widely used for designing the compliant gripper including the FEA and
Pseudo Rigid Body Method. In this paper, comparison between two methods is done
& more optimized or more precise method can be decided. We get the more precise
results using PRBM method.
Keywords: Compliant mechanism; PRBM; Micro-gripper, MEMS
desired upon application of forces, like compliant mechanism. The compliant gripper
various joints, rigid-body mechanisms, they need simple design method and shape due to
transmit and transform force and motion manufacturing constraints. For handling
[Mankame and Ananthasuresh, 2004]. micro level objects in micro-electro-
Compliance was also used in earliest human mechanical systems (MEMS) needs precision
designs. Consider for instance bows and and accuracy this objective can be achieved
arrows. Bows are designed to store the strain by simple shape of micro-gripper, which are
energy provided by the archer. Strain energy easy to actuate and easy to experiment by
is then transferred to the arrow during the using simple MEMS components.
escape. The arrow is nothing but the
compliant to curve and oscillate during flight
to correct its trajectory [Juan Andrès Gallego
Sànchez, 2013].
Using PRBM approach, a micro-gripper was
proposed by Lin and Shih [Lin Chih Feng
Shih Chien Jong, 2011] and counter-link
lengths were optimized. Krishnan and
Saggere [Krishnan Sandeep and Saggere Figure 1. Circular hinge used in
Laxman, 2012] elaborated micro class PRBM
gripper for manipulation of complex shaped- In this paper, micro-gripper is proposed
small sized objects for any position and which is based on the PRBM for handling
proposed rotational flexures concept with micro-level objects. The circular type of
obtained a maximum geometrical advantage hinges have advantages over the other in
of 11.56. Flexural hinges design depends on stiffness and stress consideration so they are
capacity of rotation, precision of rotation, used in proposed work.
stress levels, energy consumption and energy
storage which is very significant. M. R. MATERIALS & METHODS
Arvind, A. Senthil and Bhat (2010) The dimensional constraint of a micro
developed a micro-gripper by considering the gripper is considered as (Fig.2.) 90 x 70 mm.
2D- Flexure hinge parameters of circular and There are various types of hinges like
elliptical hinges. The concluded the effects of circular, rectangular and elliptical shaped.
parameters and position of hinge on the
stiffness and output displacement of gripper.
Nah & Zhong (2006) designed and fabricated
a micro-gripper tested using Piezoelectric
actuator for wire and gear of various
displacement modes, with 170 microns stoke
and amplification factor 3 mm. Zubir &
Shirimzadeh (2009) developed a high
precision parallel jaw motion micro-gripper
by cantilever beam approach and using
PRBM approach and attended maximum jaw
displacement of 100 micron and
amplification factor of 2.85 and compared
results using FEM, they have also done
optimization of rigid links.
Fig.1. shows the parameters of a circular Figure 2. Gripper with input Force F
hinge. The PRBM technique is simple to O-fixed ends, F-input force, AB-input link
understand and apply on any lumped
839
Displacement Analysis of a Compliant Micro-Gripper Using PRBM and FEA Method
Krishnan Sandeep Saggere Laxman 2012 Mohd Nashrul Mohd Zubir, Bijan
Design and development of a novel Shirinzadeh 2009 Development of a high
micro-clasp gripper for precision flexure-based microgripper
micromanipulation of complex-shaped Precision Engineering 33 362-370.
objects Sensors and Actuators A Nah S K Zhong Z W 2006 A microgripper
Physical 176 110-123. using piezoelectric actuation for micro-
Li Y Huang X Xie Y M Zhou S W 2013 object manipulation Sensors and
Evolutionary topology optimization of Actuators A: Physical 133 218-224.
hinge-free compliant mechanism Ouyang P R Tjiptoprodjo R. C Zhang W J
International Journal Of Mechanical Yang G S 2008 Micro-motion devices
Sciences 86 69-75. technology: The state of arts review The
Limaye Padmanabh Ramu G Pamulapati International Journal of Advanced
Sindhuja Ananthasuresh G K 2012 A Manufacturing Technology 38 463-478.
compliant mechanism kit with flexible Raghavendra Aravind M R Kumar A Senthil,
beams and connectors along with Bhat Nikhil Jagdish 2010 Design and
analysis and optimal synthesis analysis of flexure-hinge parameters in
procedures Mechanism and Machine Micro-gripper The International Journal
Theory 49 21-39.
of Advanced Manufacturing Technology
Lin Chih Feng Shih Chien Jong 2011 49 1185-1193.
Multiobjective design optimization of
flexure hinges for enhancing the NOTATIONS
performance of micro‐compliant X Displacement (mm)
mechanisms Journal of the Chinese
Institute of Engineers 28 999-1003. L Length of input link (mm)
r Radius of semicircular hinge (mm)
Mankame Nilesh D Ananthasuresh G K 2004
Topology optimization for synthesis of b Thickness of structure (mm)
contact-aided compliant mechanisms t Web thickness (mm)
using regularized contact modeling
Computers and Structures 45(1) 24.
841
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In present work, the XFEM is coupled with multiscale finite lement
(MsFEM) to analyse mechanical behaiviour of heterogeneous materials. The materials
are heterogeneous at micro level and homogeneous at macro level. The effect of
heterogeneities such as voids, interfaces and cracks present at micro level in material
need to be considered.To model such defects at small scale, the XFEM is deployted in
conjunction with level set to avoid conformal meshing or remeshing. The MsFEM is
used to capture overall behaviour of material. In MsFEM, small scale heterogeneity of
macro elements in FEM are captured by numerically evaluated the base functions.
The efficiency of the method is governed by the boundary conditions used for
determination of the base functions. The capability of developed MsXFEM is
validated for periodic heterogeneityat small scale. The results show that MsXFEM
can efficiently provide macro response of microscopically heterogeneous structure.
Keywords: FEM; MsFEM; XFEM; MsXFEM.
using FEM becomes quite cumbersome. In where N is the matrix of multiscale base
this method, the modeling of a crack growth functions, u is the displacement vector of
and arbitrary discontinuities is performed by nodes on the small scale meshes within the
enriching the standard FE approximation unit cell, and u E is the displacement vector
function. The level set function Stolarska et of nodes on the coarse scale level.
al., (2001) is used to identify the location of Γt 4 3
the defects in the small scale mesh. The e4 e
actual small scale stress and strain within the
e1 e
coarsescale elements can be obtained Ω
simultaneously along with the macroscopic 1 2
Sub-
displacement field by means of downscaling
ΩK
computation.
y
METHODOLOGY
Ω
The main difference between the standard x Γ
FEM and MsFEM is the construction of the Figure 1. Schematic description of the MsFEM
base functions. The base functions used in the
u = {u1 v1 u2 v2 .. .. un vn }
standard FEM are constructed according to T
843
Adaptive Multiscale Finite Element Method for Simulation of Heterogeneous Material
844
Patil et al.
REFERENCES
Beltyschko T Moes N Usui S and Parimi C
2001 Arbitrary discontinuities in finite
elements International Journal for
Figure 5.Microscopic σxx stress of overall Numerical Methods in Engineering 50
structure 993-1013.
Singh I V Mishra B K Bhattacharya S and
CONCLUSION Patil R U 2012 The Numerical
Simulation of Fatigue Crack Growth
The XFEM is coupled with MsFEM to Using Extended Finite Element Method
analyse mechanical behaiviour of International Journal of Fatigue 36
heterogeneous material. The MATLAB code 109-119.
is developed and the multiscale base Stolarska M Chopp DMoes N and
functions are constructed numerically to Belytschko T 2001 Modelling crack
capture the small scale features induced due growth by level sets in the extended
to heterogeneities using linear and periodic finite element method International
boundary conditions. The small scale features Journal for Numerical Methods in
Engineering 51 943-960.
are modelled easily and efficiently using
XFEM. The numerical example shows that Zhang H WWu J K and Fu Z D 2010
the materials with periodic microstructures Extended multiscale finite element
method for elasto-plastic analysis of 2D
can be analyzed very accurately and
periodic lattice truss materials
efficiently as base functions are evaluated for Computational Mechanics 45 623–635.
one macro element by MsXFEM. It is also
Zhang H WWu J KLU J and Fu Z D 2010
found that the periodic boundary condition Extended multiscale finite element
results are well consistent with FEM results. method for mechanical analysis of
Hence, this method has a great potential to heterogeneous materials Acta
analyze periodic composite materials. Mechanica Sinica 26 899–920.
845
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The eccentricity between center of mass and center of stiffness produces
torsion in asymmetric buildings during earthquakes. In this paper, the inelastic seismic
behaviour of asymmetric-plan buildings is studied by using the histories of base shear
and torque (BST) surfaces. BST surface represents all combinations of shear and
torque when applied statically, lead to collapse of the structure. The two single storey
buildings are considered, one with symmetric in plan and another with strength
asymmetry in plan. The BST surfaces are drawn for these buildings. This BST
surfaces give maximum capacity of building with respect to base shear and torque
combinations. BST surface gives general information for understanding the behaviour
of asymmetrical buildings even before their dynamic analysis. Comparing the BST
surfaces of Symmetric and Asymmetric building having same capacity, it has been
found that some elements of asymmetric building enter into inelastic state prior to
those in symmetric building
Keywords: Asymmetrical building; torsion; base shear and torque surfaces;
inelastic analysis; dynamic analysis.
847
Inelastic seismic response of asymmetrical buildings
CONCLUSION
Figure 3. BST surface for single storey In strength asymmetric building, from BST
building with Symmetry in plan surface strongest resisting plane remains
essentially elastic, while other planes yield
BST surface for single storey building with significantly. BST surface helps to
strength asymmetry in plan understand the behaviour of asymmetric
The asymmetry is produced by changing the building eliminating the need of dynamic
shear strength of resisting plane 1 from f to 2f analysis.By simply calculating the shear
and for resisting planes 2 and 3 from f to f/2 strength of building columns, behaviour of
.Due to asymmetry, there is change in any building can be understood by BST
orientation of BST surface as shown in surface. Thus, plotting BST surface proves to
be a simple tool, to get reasonably accurate
848
Raut and Madhekar
REFERENCES
Dj Z Ladjinovic and R J Folic 2008
Nonlinear seismic analysis of
asymmetric in plan buildings The 14th
world conference on earthquake
engineering October 12-17 Beijing
china.
IS 456 -2007 Plain and Reinforced concrete
code of practice BIS.
Juan C De la llera and Anil K Chopra 1995 A
simplified model for analysis and design
of Asymmetric-plan buildings
Earthquake engineering and structural
dynamics 24 573-594.
Juan C. De La llera and Anil K Chopra 1995
Understanding the inelastic seismic
behaviour of Asymmetric-plan buildings
Earthquake engineering and structural
dynamics 245 49-572.
849
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Earthquakes are the most devastating natural phenomenon in terms of life
and property of any region. The damage occurred due to recent earthquakes has
demonstrated the need of seismic vulnerability assessment of RC buildings. This paper
focuses on vulnerability assessment of RC buildings by using fragility curves.
Fragility curves provide the uncertain probability of structural response when
subjected to earthquake loads as a function of ground motion intensity. A conventional
method such as High Dimensional Model Representation Method (HDMR) or
Cornell’s method involves development of large number of computational models for
the generation of fragility curves. Therefore, in this paper, the guidelines given by
HAZUS technical manual have been used for the generation of fragility curves. A
twenty story regular and irregular building RC frame is considered for the fragility
analysis. Nonlinear analysis of the building models is done by using pushover analysis
using ETABS v9.7.4. The results from pushover analysis have been used to plot
fragility curves. Spectral displacement is used as a ground motion parameter to plot
the fragility curve. The damage state probabilities corresponding to a predefined
damage state as per HAZUS (Slight, Moderate, Extensive, Complete) has been used to
check the performance of the building models. Seismic performance of the regular and
irregular building is studied to check the vulnerability of building models in terms of
damage state probabilities.
Keywords: Fragility curves; Vulnerability; HAZUS; Pushover analysis; Ground
motion parameter
function expresses the probability that an given median estimates of spectral response,
adverse event will occur as a function of the for example spectral displacement. These
value of some seismic excitation. curves take into account the variability and
uncertainty associated with capacity curve
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT properties, damage states and ground
shaking. For a given damage state, P [S | Sd ],
In this paper the methodology adopted for the P [M| Sd], P [E | Sd], P [C | Sd] a fragility
development of fragility curves is briefly curve is well described by the following
describes as follows. Pushover analysis is lognormal probability density function
carried out on building models in ETABS 1 𝑆𝑑
v9.7.4. As per the HAZUS manual the results P[ ds | Sd ] = Φ[ ln( )] (2)
𝛽𝑑𝑠 𝑆𝑑,𝑑𝑠
from nonlinear static analysis are used to plot
fragility curve. Where is Sd,ds the threshold spectral
displacement,βds is the standard deviation of
PUSHOVER ANALYSIS the natural logarithm of this spectral
displacement, Φ is the standard normal
Displacement based pushover analysis is cumulative distribution function and Sd is the
performed in ETABS v9.7.4 as per the spectral displacement of the structure. Table
guidelines given in FEMA 440 and ATC40. (1) shows how the thresholds obtain from
As per the FEMA 440 target displacement is capacity spectrum.
necessary to perform displacement based P [S | Sd] = probability of being in or
pushover analysis. This target displacement is exceeding a slight damage state, S.
given by equation (1) P [M | Sd] = probability of being in or
Δ t = C 0 C 1 C 2 C 3 S a T e 2g / 4π2 (1) exceeding a moderate damage state, M.
P [E | Sd] = probability of being in or
Where, C 0 , C 1 , C 2 , C 3 are modification exceeding an extensive damage state, E.
factors taken from FEMA 440. Capacity P [C | Sd] = probability of being in or
curve in the form of Base shear vs Roof exceeding a complete damage state, C.
displacement is obtained from pushover
analysis. This capacity curve is converted Table 1. Damage state thresholds
into ADRS (Acceleration Displacement defines with the agreement of capacity
Response Spectra) format. Performance point spectrum (1)
is obtained as intersection of capacity spectra Damage States Spectral Displacements
and elastic demand spectra. (Sd,ds)
Slight 0.7Dy
HAZUS METHODOLOGY
Moderate Dy
There has been numerous works in the Extensive Dy + 0.25(Du – Dy)
literature for the evaluation of the fragility Complete Du
curves of the structures. However, For the
development of fragility curves, guidelines Where, Sd is spectral displacement and suffix
given by HAZUS technical manual have been 1, 2, 3, 4 show slight damage, moderate
used. HAZUS methodology was developed damage, extensive damage, and complete
for FEMA by National Institute of Building collapse respectively.
Science (NIBS) to reduce seismic hazard in Ay = yield spectral acceleration
United States. HAZUS technical manual Au = ultimate spectral acceleration.
provides the procedure for deriving the Dy = yield spectral displacement
fragility curves for different types of Du = ultimate spectral displacement
structures. Building fragility curves are So now in the formula of cumulative normal
lognormal functions that describe the distributive probability, value of Sd was
probability of reaching, or exceeding, found from pushover analysis result and the
structural and non-structural damage states, value of𝛽𝛽 is taken from HAZAUS Technical
manual (table 5.11- 5.11d).
851
Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of RC Frames using Fragility Curves
view
0.6 Slight
Table 2. Description of Building Models Moderate
Description Value 0.4 Extensive
Complete
Number of Stories 20 0.2
Height of Storey 3.5 m
Grade of steel Fe 415 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Grade of Concrete M25 -0.2 Spectral Displacement (m)
Imposed Load 3 kN/m2
Slab thickness 150 mm Figure 3. Fragility Curve for Building
Model 1
Seismic Zone V
Damping 5% The fragility curve obtained considering four
damage states is shown in figure (3) and (5).
Three dimensional model of G+19 RC frames Plot of Capacity spectrum curve obtained
are considered. The model specification and is shown in figure (2) and (4). The graph
the loading data is given in Table (2). obtained of pushover curve is
Spectral displacement is used as ground converted into ADRS (Acceleration
motion parameter. The probability of damage Displacement Response Spectra) format. The
for a particular damage state is worked out. value of spectral displacement corresponding
Then comparison of values corresponding to to ultimate capacity of target displacement is
probability of damage with the regular and used to plot fragility curve. The probability of
irregular frame is done. Regular building and damage or the probability of exceedance for
model with geometric irregularities to the four damage states i.e. Slight, Moderate,
identify the effects of mass irregularity on the Extensive and Collapse can be read from the
shape of building geometry is changed by fragility curve. The table 3 shows the
reducing the no. of bays in X-direction probability of exceedance of particular
852
Bhende and Pednekar
damage state for the spectral displacement infill walls. From the results generated, it is
value of 0.365 m. concluded that this methodology gives an
Pushover Curve for G+19 idea to predict the damage level of the
Spectral Acceleration (g)
1
Fragility Curves for G+19
REFERENCES
Irregular
0.8 HAZUS technical manual MH MR1
Slight Earthquake loss estimation
Probability of Damage
0.6
methodology Department of homeland
0.4 Moderat security Washington DC USA 2003.
e
0.2 extensiv ATC40 seismic evaluation and retrofit of
e concrete buildings-volume I Report no.
0 SSC 96-01 Redwood City, Applied
0 0.2 0.4 Technology Council 1996.
-0.2
Spectral Displacement (m)
FEMA 440 Pre-standard and commentary for
Figure 5. Fragility Curve for Building seismic rehabilitation of buildings,
Model 2 Federal Emergency Management
Agency Washington DC USA 2000.
Table 3. Comparison of Probability of
Damage State Sevket and Ali et al. 2010 Fragility based
damage assessment in existing precast
Regular Irregular industrial buildings: A case study for
Damage
Building Building turkey. Structural Engineering and
State
(G+19) (G+19) Mechanics 34(1) 39-60.
Slight 0.8 0.84 Jun ji and Amr et al. 2007 An analytical
framework for seismic fragility analysis
Moderate 0.63 0.67 of RC highrise buildings Engineering
Extensive 0.33 0.37 structures 29 3197-3209.
Complete 0.26 0.29 Cornell C A et al. 2002 The probabilistic
basis for the 2000 SAC/FEMA steel
moment frame guidelines. ASCE
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS Journal of Structural Engineering
In this study, HAZUS procedure for the 128(4) 526-533.
generation of fragility curves is discussed and
the fragility curves are generated for high-rise
RC building structures without considering
853
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
-20
designed with adjustable number of plates to -40
CT_SG_1V (µε)
-80
requirement Figure. 2. The minimum weight -100
-140
punch and single plate welded to it. The -160
weight of plates that could be added was in 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Time (sec)
multiples of 154 kg or 369 kg.
Figure 4: Response of surface SG -1H
CT_SG_1H
50
-50
CT_SG_1H (µε)
-100
-150
-200
-250
-300
855
Impact Test on Reinforced Concrete Slabs
300
CT_SG_2V impacted. The damaged area on the
200
back surface i.e. scabbing (ejection of
material from the back surface) is large
100
0
damage.
-100
100
yielding/failure was also observed in
0
the test.
-100
400
second drop, partial penetration of the
300 punch into the slab as well as spalling
200
on the bottom surface were observed.
100
Subsequently upon third drop punching
Acc_Z (g)
-400
surface is almost equal to the cross-
-500 sectional area of the punch and the
0.160 0.162 0.164 0.166 0.168 0.170 0.172
Time (sec) damage on the back surface was
Figure 8: Response of accelerometer
significantly large than the front
installed on missile damage area. Due to scabbing of slab
on the bottom surface of the slab, some
EXPERIMENTAL OBSERVATIONS of the strain gauges came out with the
Experimental observations are as follows concrete chunk during second drop of
the punch and hence data for those
1. The failure was observed to be strain gauge were not available for the
localized and the damage area is almost third drop test. Also some of the strain
equal to the area of punch on front gauges recorded high strain values and
surface of the slab where punch is
856
Parmar et al.
CONCLUSIONS
The concrete is highly nonlinear material
and still requires lot of research to
understand it fully. The strength like
compressive strength, tensile strength,
shear strength etc. increases with increase
in loading rate/strain rate. The rate of
increase of strength differs in tension and
compression. The experiments performed
will be helpful in understanding the
behaviour of reinforced concrete
structures subjected to impact load.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors thank engineers of ARAI, Pune
for their help in performing the tests and
acquiring data during the test.
REFERENCES
American Concrete Institute ACI 446.4R-04
Report on Dynamic Fracture of
Concrete 2004
VTT - Technical Research Centre of Finland,
Experimental Tests for Bending and
Punching Behaviour of Reinforced
Concrete Walls under Impact Loading
August 2010.
857
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The inherent geometric nonlinearities and the presence of prestress do not
lend cable domes to classical methods of analysis and design. They are greatly
dependent on iterative methods and the use of digital computing for analysis. In this
paper, the nonlinear large displacement analysis procedure for analyzing cable domes
is formulated using the direct stiffness method and programmed in MATLAB. A two-
dimensional model equivalent to that of a three-dimensional model is used for efficient
analysis. The structural behaviour of a series of cable domes are investigated. For
domes that are adequately prestressed, the study revealed that buckling of struts or
displacements exceeding the acceptable ranges for serviceability are potential limit
states.
Keywords: Cable domes, Prestress, Large-displacement, Nonlinear, Analysis,
buckling.
859
Geometric Nonlinear Analysis of Cable Domes
And the member axial strain ε is defined as: where Q, F and R are the global internal
force, external force and residual vectors,
l− L l respectively. Note that Q and R are functions
ε= = −1 (5)
L L of U.
The response of the cable dome structure is
The member force can therefore be expressed obtained from solving the set of nonlinear
in terms of the strains as: equilibrium equations:
AE
Q= (l − L) − AEε p (6) K ΔU=R (10)
L
Stiffness is defined as the change in the ith Since R is a function of the unknown
force due to a unit change in the jth displacements, there is no direct solution for
displacement. As such, the stiffness terms of Equation 10. Iterative numerical schemes
the member stiffness matrix are derived by such as the Modified Newton-Raphson
taking partial derivatives of the end forces Method, Newton-Raphson Method or
with respect to each of the end displacements, Incremental Loading Method have to be used
as: (Krishna 1978). The Newton-Raphson
∂Qi Method exhibits the much desired terminal
kij = ( j=1 to 4 ) (7) quadratic convergence, making it an
∂u j
attractive iterative method and is adopted as
Therefore, the solution method for Eq. 10. The
computations in this method are based on the
∂Q1 ∂Q1 ∂Q1 ∂Q1 instantaneous stiffness of the structure
∂u ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4 derived anew at each iterative cycle. The
1
∂Q2 ∂Q2 ∂Q2 ∂Q2 method demands significant computational
∂u ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4
effort because the stiffness matrix has to be
k=
1
(8) computed at every iteration. The structure is
∂Q3 ∂Q3 ∂Q3 ∂Q3 therefore loaded incrementally and the
∂u1 ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4 equations are solved iteratively in a piecewise
∂Q4 ∂Q4 ∂Q4 ∂Q4 linear manner until the values of ΔU or R
converges to be within an acceptable
∂u1 ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4
tolerance.
860
Sudarshan Krishnan
861
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Table 1. Material properties of
concrete
Parameter Value
Characteristic
45 N/mm2
Compressive Strength
Modulus of Elasticity 33540 N/mm2
Split tensile Strength 2.78 N/mm2
Parameter Value
0.2% Proof Stress 1683 N/mm2
1% Extension Stress 1649 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile Strength 1848 N/mm2
Modulus of Elasticity 189600 N/mm2
Figure 1. Cross sectional view of
Cross sectional area 142.8 mm2
containment model
LOADING
Analysis has been carried out for the design
pressure (p d ) of 1.44kg/cm2(0.1413 N/mm²).
The pressure is applied on the inner surface
863
Numerical Analysis of Scaled Containment Model
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Abstract: Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) rectangular hollow beams with
centrally located single circular perforation in one web were analysed using finite
element analyses, to study the shear capacity and deformation shapes. The dimensions
of the beam were w f = 200 mm, h w = 600, t w = 2 mm, t f = 10 mm, a = 600 mm, where
h w , t w , t f , w f and a are the web height, web thickness, flange thickness, flange width
and shear span respectively. Three perforation sizes (d o ) viz., d o /h w = 0.1, 0.3 and 0.5
were used to study the effect their size on the shear performance. Based on the study,
a near linear decrease in shear capacity was seen with increasing perforation size, with
~21% drop in shear capacity for 400% increase in perforation size (from 60 mm
diameter), for the beam parameters considered. However, the mid-span deformation
corresponding to the formation of compression flange increased with increasing
perforation size.
Keywords: LDSS; Shear behaviour; Rectangular hollow beam; Perforation;
Abaqus.
sections offer better torsional rigidity in and 0.5) located at the centre of the left shear
addition to their aesthetics; hence they are span was considered (see Figure 1) for the
increasingly used as structural members e.g. study. The beam was simply supported with
columns and beams. These steel beams may load applied at the midspan. The beam was
need to be perforated for several services modelling using four noded shell element
associated with air conditioning, ventilations, (S4R) available in Abaqus (2009), with an
water, process pipes, electrical and aspect ratio of ~1 (see Figure 2). The cross-
instrumentation cables etc. Such perforations sections at both the mid-span and support
help in the reduction of floor height without were kinematically coupled in order to avoid
affecting the available head-room (e.g. local buckling at these locations (see
Lagaros et al., 2008, Hagen, et al., 2009). Theofanous and Gardner, 2010). Local
Perforated beams can be widely seen in oil imperfections were applied as per Dawson
refinery, offshore, highway bridges and Walker (1972). Two-stage material
structures, etc. Such perforations can have model proposed by Gardner and Ashraf
adverse influence on the structural behaviour (2006) for LDSS was used as material input
of beams. In the literature, Ridley-Ellis to Abaqus (2009), with Young’s modulus
(2000) was probably the first and only one to (E), yield stress (σ 0.2 or f y ), and Poisson’s
report on the shear load capacity of ratio as 209797 MPa, 755 MPa and 0.3
rectangular ‘hollow’ section (RHS) made of respectively. The FE modelling approach was
carbon steel. In this work, the effect of validated using experimental result reported
circular web perforation in the shear by Theofanous and Gardner (2009).
characteristic of rectangular hollow beams,
made of a relatively promising duplex steel
(a) (b)
(i.e. LDSS), using the general purpose FE tw load
software called Abaqus (2009). tf
hw do
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING
0.4
L2 shear capacity was seen with increasing
0.2 perforation size, with ~21% drop in shear
0 capacity for 400% increase in perforation size
0 20 40 (from 60 mm diameter), for the beam
δ (mm) parameters considered. However, the mid-
span deformation corresponding to the
867
Sonu and Singh
868
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
members. Yet, to the best of authors' thickness is employed throughout this study
knowledge, no such reported study on EHS for meshing the models. The extent of the
braces under cyclic loading has been carried refined mesh in the longitudinal direction is
out. Therefore, the primary objective of this set to ~4a at the mid-length region as shown
study is to evaluate the hysteretic behaviour in Figure. 2 for a typical brace model. A
of EHS steel braces under ULCF loading similar pattern is adopted for meshing from
using FE modelling procedure. both the ends of the brace models along the
extent of ~6a. Therefore, ensuring
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING sufficiently large refined area in the zones
The shell FE modelling approach adopted where the plastic hinge and local buckling is
here is similar to those adopted for modelling most likely to occur. The adopted element
RHS and CHS braces (see e.g. Nip et al., ratio in the regions of refined mesh is 1:1 and
2010) using the general purpose FE software, in the elastic regions of the model is 2:1 as
Abaqus (2009).The mechanical and NLCHM shown in Figure. 2.The number of elements
model parameters are extracted from the used in the analyses for various models
experimental program of Gardner et al. ranges from ~ 36,000 – 81,000.
(2010) for HR-CS of grade S355J2H, which
is adopted as reference material in the current
study. The axial tensile yield displacement,
δ y of each specimen is taken as the product of
L and the measured tensile yield strain, ε y
(=f y,meas . /E) of the cross-section where f y,meas 112 mm (~ 4a)
Normal Refined
. and E are measured yield stress and modulus
mesh mesh
of elasticity of the brace material
respectively. The cross-section (c/s) Figure 2. FE mesh pattern at mid-length
dimensions of the EHS brace models is of 63.2×31.6×3×1250 mm EHS brace.
shown in Figure. 1.
All the six degrees of freedom of all the
a/b = 1.00 a/b = 1.33 nodes at both ends of the members were
restrained, except for the axial displacement
at the loading end which is allowed for
translational movement along the global axis
2a = 48.7 mm 2a = 55.4 mm as shown in Figure. 3. Both global and local
2b = 48.7 mm 2b = 41.6 mm initial geometric imperfections were
incorporated into the FE models. Global
a/b = 1.67 a/b = 2.00 imperfection amplitude of L/1500 as
suggested in Nip et al. (2010) and local
imperfection amplitude of t/100as
2a = 60.0 mm 2a = 63.2 mm recommended in the literature (Chan and
2b = 36.0 mm 2b = 31.6 mm Gardner, 2008) are adopted. The cyclic
Figure 1. EHS model sectional loading as per the protocol outlined in ECCS
dimensions. (1986) is chosen with a strain rate of 3×10-4s-
1
Four-noded general purpose shell element at the loading end as shown in Figure.
(S4R) with five integration points through the 3through a reference point to which all the
circumferential nodes of the model in the
870
Structural Performance of Elliptical Hollow Steel Tubular Braces under Ultra Low Cycle Fatigue
Loading
a/b = 1.67
0.8 12
a/b = 2.00 a/b=1.00
0.4 a/b=1.67
W4δy/(Fy .
9
a/b=2.00
0.0
6
δy)
25
0.4 a/b = 1.00
(Fc,
20 a/b = 1.67
cum./(Fy.δy)
0.2
a/b = 2.00
15
0.0
W8.
871
Narendra and Singh
872
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
874
A Comparative Study On Effect Fibre Volume Fraction On Ex-Situ BMG Composites Through Unit Cell
Simulations
where Dp0 is the symmetric deviatoric part of determines the element deletion from the
plastic part of velocity gradient. Thus, analysis.
equivalent plastic shear strain γp is defined as The material properties and parameters used
def t ~
p for the Anand- Su model are listed in Table 1.
(t ) ( )d
p
(6) The reinforcing fibre within the matrix is
0
considered to be Steel and the properties are
A damage variable d is defined as inferred from MATweb. Steel density is
p cp considered to be 7.87e-9 tonnes/mm3, the
d (7)
fp cp elastic modulus is 200 GPa and the Poisson’s
such that d = 0 for γp less than a critical value ratio is considered to be 0.29. Von-mises
of plastic shear strain γpc and d = 1 as γp plasticity is used for steel wire with initial
evolves to failure value γpf. The value of the yield strength of 585 MPa.
damage parameter at the integration points
that with the increasing value of volume failure point accurately, a qualitative study
fraction of the fibre, the yield strength shows that with increasing fibre volume
decreases. The present damage model used in fraction, plasticity of the composite
the analysis is solely for the purpose of improves.
qualitative comparison of effect of different (a) (b)
volume fraction of reinforcement. They do
not provide the exact failure point of the
material. It can be inferred that with
increasing fibre volume fraction, the failure
point of the composite increases.
REFERENCES
Anand L Su C 2005 A theory for amorphous
viscoplastic materials undergoing finite
deformations with application to
Figure 2. Comparison of Steel reinforced metallic glasses Journal of the
BMG properties with Rule of Mixtures Mechanics and Physics of Solids 53(6)
A similar observation is made in the case of 1362 – 1396.
uniaxial compression test of steel fibre Conner R Dandliker R Johnson W 1998
reinforced Vitreloy 1and is shown in Figure Mechanical properties of tungsten and
3(b). It is also observed that the yield point of steel fiber reinforced
the material for a particular volume fraction Zr41.25Ti13.75Cu12.5Ni10Be22.5
under compression is higher than yield point metallic glass matrix composites Acta
under tension. This is consistent with the Materialia 46(17) 6089 – 6102.
behaviour of BMGs, [Anand and Su, 2005].
Schuh C A Hufnagel T C Ramamurty U 2007
CONCLUSION Mechanical behavior of amorphous
alloys Acta Materialia 55(12) 4067 –
A parametric study on effect of volume
4109.
fraction on uniaxial tension and compression
behaviour of fibre reinforced ex-situ BMGCs Tandaiya P Narasimhan R Ramamurty U
is conducted through unit cell simulations. It 2013 On the mechanism and the length
is observed that with increase in volume scales involved in the ductile fracture of
fraction yield strength decreases in both a bulk metallic glass Acta Materialia
tension and compression. Yield strength in 61(5) 1558 – 1570.
compression for a particular composite is
higher than that in tension. Though the
present damage model does not capture the
876
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
concrete members in the full range of Figure 2. Meshed concrete cube with
loading.
Gupta and Akbar (1983) presented a finite
element method for analysis of reinforced
concrete structures. Four noded isoparametric
element which is suitable for modelling of
cracks in reinforced concrete structures was
formulated. Finally, it was concluded that the
proposed formulation gives superior results
as compared to both the standard
isoparametric element and the conventional
selectively integrated element. Barzegar and
Schnobrich (1986) presented nonlinear finite
element analysis of reinforced concrete under
short term monotonic loading. A
computational procedure for analyzing C3D8 elements
membrane and flexural reinforced concrete
elements is developed. The main focus was
NON-LINEARANALYSIS OF PLAIN
on the post-cracking behavior of CONCRETE ELEMENTS
anisotropically reinforced elements. The Finite element analysis has been carried out
smeared non-orthogonal cracking model was for the concrete grades M10, M15, M20,
modified and extended to simulate the M25, M30, M35, M40 and M50. A cube of
behavior of cracked concrete considering dimensions 150 x 150 x 150 mmis modelled.
tension stiffening. At the end, experimental Two steel plates of same cross sectional area
specimens are analyzed to demonstrate the with negligible thickness of 5 mmare
relative importance of different nonlinear modelled to avoid the stress concentration
effects and the capabilities of the adopted and for proper distribution of load. The cube
numerical procedures. and steel plates are assembled assuming tie
In the present work emphasis is given to constraint for perfect bonding. The elastic
compare the applicability of concrete property, Young’s modulus 200 GPa and
smeared cracking model and concrete Poisson’s ratio 0.3 are assigned to steel
damaged plasticity model for plain cement plates. The values of inelastic strain and yield
concrete elements and also to study the effect stress of concrete material are obtained from
of mesh sensitivity on mechanical behavior Hognestad’s (1951) equation for both CDP
of plain cement concrete elements. and CSC models and the tension stiffening
parameters are obtained from Kwak’s (1990)
formula for both the models. Fixed boundary
condition is assigned at bottom surface of
steel plate and load is applied at top face of
steel plate shown in Figure1. Three
dimensional full integration cubic element
available in ABAQUS (C3D8) is used for
meshing (Figure 2). The results are obtained
for stress distribution across the surface of
the cube. Various mesh sizes considered for
present study are 7.5mm, 10mm, 12.5mm,
15mm, 25 mm and 50 mm.
Stress
Cracking (CSC) model for various mesh sizes
10 CSC FE
are compared. Figure 3 and Figure4 shows
Analysis
the variation of stress v/s strain for concrete
grade M25 using CSC and CDP model for 5 CDP FE
Analysis
different mesh sizes. It is observed that mesh
0
sizes 12.5 mm, 15 mm, 25 mm and 50 mm did 0 0.002
not show proper matching to the input curve Strain
whereas 10 mm mesh size shows good
agreement with the analytical curve. Figure 5. Variation of stress v/s strain for
Therefore, 10 mm mesh size is used for M25 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
further study. models with mesh size 10
25 20
18
20 16
Mesh 7.5 14
15 Mesh 10 12
Stress
Stress
Theoretical
Mesh 12.5 10
10 8
Mesh 15 CSC FE
6
5 Mesh 25 Analysis
4 CDP FE
Mesh 50
2 Analysis
0 Theoretical 0
0 0.002
0 0.002
Strain Strain
Figure 3. Variation of stress v/s strain for Figure 6.Variation of stress v/s strain for
various mesh sizes- CSC model, M25 M20 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
grade of concrete models with mesh size 10
30
30
25
25
Mesh 7.5 20
20 Theoretical
Stress
Mesh 10
Stress
15
15 Mesh 12.5 CSC FE
10
10 Mesh 15 Analysis
Mesh 25 5 CDP FE
5 Analysis
Mesh 50 0
0 Theoretical 0 0.002 0.004
0 0.002 Strain
Strain
Figure 4. Variation of stress v/s strain for Figure 7.Variation of stress v/s strain for
various mesh sizes- CDP model, M25 M30 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
grade of concrete models with mesh size 10
879
Joshi et. al.
880
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract:The paper reports, evaluation of stresses at notch root for three different
notched specimens using finite element analysis(FEA).Linear FEA is performed on
the three notch configurations to evaluate theoretical stress concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 )
and validated using Roark’s formulae available in the literature. Nonlinear finite
element analysis(NLFEA) is performed to evaluate local plastic stresses at the notch
root for all the three specimens and compared using Neuber’s rule and Equivalent
strain energy density(ESED), i.e., Molski and Glinka’s energy density approach. The
obtained results are thoroughly compared and discussed. The stress values at notches
by Neuber’s rule gives upper bound values while Energy density approach by Molski
and Glinka gives lower bound values. NLFEA values for notch stresses lie in between
these two values for all the three specimens.
Keywords: Notch; Neuber’s rule; Equivalent strain energy density (ESED);
Finite element analysis (FEA); Stress concentration factor.
MATERIAL PROPERTY
Johnson Cook elastic plastic material model
(Johnson et al.,1983) is used for nonlinear
analysis. For laboratory experiment at room
temperature the model is given by equation,
𝜎 = �𝑎 + 𝑏𝜀𝑝𝑛 � (5)
Johnson Cook material model parameters for
Aluminum 6063T7
Figure1. Determination of local stress and a= 90.26 MPa, b=223.13 MPa and n = 0.374
strain using Neuber’s rule. Failure Stress for the material,σ m = 175 MPa.
circular Hole
Kt
1.5
Roark
FEA (Auto Mesh)
1.0
FEA (Biased Mesh)
D= 40mm, r =5mm,
t =5mm 0.5
0.0
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000
2 3
2r 2r 2r Number of Elements
𝐾𝑡 = 3.00 − 3.13 � � + 3.66 � � − 1.53 � �
D D D Figure3. Mesh convergence of stress
𝐾𝑡 =2.42
concentration factor for specimen-1.
b) Specimen-2:Flat plate with
Semicircular edge notches RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
100
σ max ( MPa )
2 3
2h 2h 2h 80
Neuber
𝐾𝑡 = 3.04 − 5.42 � � + 6.27 � � − 2.89 � � ESED
D D D 60 NLFEA
𝐾𝑡 =2.03 40
20
σ n ( MPa )
Due to the symmetry, only one-quarter of the
model is analyzed. Appropriate boundary Figure 4.Comparison of local stresses by
condition constraints are placed at all planes of different methods for specimen-1.
symmetry. For better accuracy and due to
presence of curved geometry, the size of the Nonlinear analysis is carried out by using three
elements (4 node Quad elements for specimen- methods viz., Neuber’s rule, ESED method
1 and 2, 8 node brick elements for specimen-3) and NLFEA. Local stresses for all the three
decreases gradually with decreasing distance specimens arecalculated for different values of
from the notch root. For all the analysis mesh nominal stress (σ n ).
convergence tests have been carried out to
As a case study, Figure.4 show variation of
ensure that the results obtained through
maximum stress at notch tip with nominal
analysis are the converged values as shown in
stress for the specimen-1.The NLFEA is also
Figure.3. The FEA is carried out using
performed for specimen-2 and 3.
HYPERWORKS finite element program.
883
Khatawate et al.
884
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
that latter captures minor loops upon partial 𝜎𝑥 = −20 MPa, 𝜎𝑦 = 100 MPa; and for
R R
unloading and loading: Figures 1(d) and (e). case (ii), 𝜎𝑥 = 150 MPa, 𝜎𝑦 = −200 MPa.
R R
886
Frictional Hysteresis in an Elastic Body with Microcracks
Figure 3.Hysteresis loops correspond to Figure 5. Hysteresis loops from Eq. (2),
(a) load case (i), (b) load case (ii). with 𝐾 = 5, 𝜃𝑚 = 2.5, 𝛽 = 1.5, and
𝜖 = 10−4 (a) 𝑥(𝑡) = sin(2𝜋𝑡), (b) 𝑥(𝑡) =
SCALAR HYSTERESIS MODEL sin(2𝜋𝑡) + 0.4 sin(8𝜋𝑡).
The hysteresis loops obtained in Figure 3 Note that Eq. (2) captures key qualitative
have some qualitative similarity with the aspects of Figure 3. Figure 3 is not
loops given by Reid (1956) and Muravskii symmetric due to the small number of
(2004): see Figure 4. cracks: if the number of cracks is made
Here, we propose an empirical, scalar, larger, we anticipate that the loops in Figure
rate-independent hysteresis model that offers 3 will become symmetric.
an improvement upon Reid and Muravskii's For more detailed assessment, a direct
proposals. Let comparison of Eq. (2) with the results of
𝐾
𝜃̇ = |𝑥|+𝜖 {𝜃𝑚 + 𝛽sgn(𝑥𝑥̇ ) − 𝜃}|𝑥̇ |, (2) Figure 3 is presented. To avoid problems due
where 𝑥 is the input displacement, 𝜃 is an to lack of symmetry, comparison is made
internal variable, and the hysteretic output with the loops of Figure 3 restricted to the
𝑓 = 𝜃𝑥. The model has four parameters that first quadrant. Additionally, each case of
obey the following restrictions: 𝐾, 𝛽, 𝜃𝑚 > 0, Figure 3 has a different transformation in the
and 0 < 𝜖 ≪ 1 . Here 𝜖 is a small form of different𝑎and𝑏in Eq. (1). Therefore,
regularization parameter to cross over the the parameters 𝐾 , 𝛽 and 𝜃𝑚 are separately
singularity at 𝑥 = 0 . Figure 5 shows two fitted for each case using only first quadrant
hysteresis loops obtained from Eq. (2). data and Eq. (2).
It is seen in Figure 6 that the simple
empirical model of Eq. (2) fits fairly well the
results from finite element simulations.
887
Biswas et al.
REFERENCES
Biswas S and Chatterjee A 2014A reduced
order model from high dimensional
Figure 6. Hysteresis loops of Figure 3, frictional hysteresis, Proceedings of the
fitted individually using Eq. (2). Only first Royal Society A470:20130817.
quadrant portions are considered. The
red solid lines with dots denote FE Biswas S Jana P and Chatterjee A
results; the blue solid lines without dots 2016Hysteretic damping in an elastic
are the fitted curves. body with frictional microcracks
International Journal of Mechanical
Finally, it may be easily shown that in the Sciences In press.
single-frequency case, for amplitudes much
larger than 𝜖 , Eq. (2) predicts a per cycle Bouc R 1967Forced vibrations of mechanical
dissipation systems with hysteresis Proceedings of
2𝛽𝐾 2 the Fourth Conference on Nonlinear
𝐷= 𝑥 ,
𝐾+2 𝑚𝑎𝑥 Oscillation Prague 315.
where 𝑥𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the input displacement
amplitude. Kimball A L and Lovell D E1927Internal
friction in solids Physical Review 30
CONCLUSIONS 948-959.
Typical hysteresis loops observed in material Lord Kelvin (Thomson W) 1865 On the
damping, as in Rowett's experiment, in the elasticity and viscoelasticity of metals
hysteresis loops in the Bouc-Wen model, and Proceedings of the Royal Society of
even in our recently presented model London A14 289-297.
(Biswas and Chatterjee, 2014), all have Muravskii G B 2004 On frequency
nonzero thickness at zero deformation. independent damping Journal of Sound
In contrast, the loops proposed by Reid and and Vibration 274 653-668.
Muravskii are pinched at the origin. From a ReidT J 1956Free vibration and hysteretic
vibration damping viewpoint the latter loops damping Journal of the Royal
apparently had no physical basis. Here, Aeronautical Society 60 283.
through finite element simulations of a plate
with many small random frictional cracks, Rowett F E 1914 Elastic hysteresis in steel
we have shown a possible physical basis for Proceedings of the Royal Society of
such hysteresis loops. London A 89(614) 528-543.
Finally, we have proposed a scalar evolution Wen Y K 1976Method for random vibration
equation that captures some essential features of hysteretic systems Journal of
of such hysteresis loops. This new simple Engineering Mechanics Division ASCE
102(614) 249-263.
888
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
free end. The excitation force ft in form a tone the beam material. 1Γ and 2Γ are the
burst signal is applied at a free end of the connection coefficient matrices. Variable j
beam. The response of the structure is sensed takes the values from 0 to n-1, n representing
at a location, Ls units away from the free end. the number of translates of the scaling of
functions.
Mapping the wavelet transform coefficients
wˆ j on to the eigen-spaces of the connection
coefficient matrices, Eq. 3 is decoupled as the
following:
d 4 w j A A 2
i j j wj (4)
EI EI
4
dx
Figure 1.Schematic of a cracked
cantilever beam. where w is the displacement transform
coefficient mapped on to the eigen-space of
When the crack is in a closed condition, the the connection coefficient matrix, and j is
beam is assumed to behave as an intact beam.
In contrast, when the crack is in an open the eigenvalue of the same. Solutions of Eq.
state, the localized reduction in stiffness at 4are used in formulating the dynamic
the crack-location is modeled by a torsional stiffness matrix of WSFEs.
spring acting between the two sections The beam structure shown in Figure. 1 is
adjacent to the crack surfaces. The stiffness divided into three WSFEs. Of which, first
Krof this rotational spring is obtained in terms and third elements are the healthy beam
of crack parameters as [Sundermeyer and WSFEs; whereas, the second element is the
Weaver, 1994] cracked beam WSFE. In deriving the
dynamic stiffness matrix of the healthy beam
Ebh 2
Kr (1) WSFE, the solutions of Eq. 4 are used as the
h
72 f a interpolation functions. Thereafter, the
where E represents the modulus of elasticity essential and the natural boundary conditions
are evaluated in the transform domain
and f a h is a crack function. employing the aforesaid interpolation
functions. These two conditions take the
In the present method of analysis, the following form:
temporal dependence of the transverse
displacement variable w is approximated by a u e R1h a, f e R2 h a (5)
series of compactly supported Daubechies Terms u e and f e are the nodal dof and force
wavelet scaling functions ϕ of order N as the
vectors, respectively. The superscript e is
following:
used to represent the element level
w wˆ k k k Z (2) formulation, and h indicates the healthy
k
(defect-free) configuration. a is the vector of
Using this approximation and the orthogonal
properties of the scaling functions, the arbitrary coefficients. It is now possible to
governing equation of motion for an intact eliminate the vector of arbitrary constants and
free beam, following the Euler-Bernoulli relate the nodal dofs to nodal forces through
hypothesis, reduces to the element dynamic stiffness matrix Ke.
The second element in the assembly is a
d 4 wˆ j A 1 A 2 crack beam WSFE. To account for a local
wˆ j wˆ j 0 (3)
EI EI
4
dx reduction in stiffness, this element contains a
In this Eq. 3, I and Aare the area moment of massless rotational spring, connecting two
inertia and area of the cross section of the healthy beam segments. The approximation
beam. The term ρ represents the density of functions for transform coefficients of the
890
Analysis of a Nonlinear Flexural Wave-Breathing Crack Interaction in a Slender Beam using Wavelet
Spectral Finite Element Method
second lobe in time domain is the signature with a breathing crack in an Euler-Bernoulli
of the existence of the crack, which is beam is presented. Wavelet spectral finite
predicted by models built on either open or elements are developed for the healthy and
breathing crack assumptions. However, the cracked beam. The intermittent contact
nonlinear harmonics in the frequency between the crack surfaces is accounted for
spectrum (Figure 3) are seen only in case of a by introducing an additional bending moment
breathing crack model. acting at the nodes of the damage spectral
element. The resulting system of nonlinear
simultaneous equations is solved using an
iterative approach.
For a representative case of a cracked
cantilever beam, the velocity response shows
presence of an additional lobe in time domain
and higher harmonics of interrogating
frequency in frequency domain. This
observation demonstrates the suitability of
the proposed method in capturing the
nonlinear effects arising from the wave-crack
Figure 2.Time domain velocity response interaction.
at the sensor location.
Although the proposed method of analysis
considers only the flexural mode
approximated by the Euler-Bernoulli
hypothesis, the method is generic, and can be
further refined to accommodate the effect of
longitudinal mode coupled with the flexural
mode.
REFERENCES
Broda D Staszewski W J Martowicz A Uhl T
Figure 3. Frequency domain velocity and Silberschmidt V V 2014 Modelling
response at the sensor location. of nonlinear crack-wave interactions for
damage detection based on ultrasound-
The frequency domain representation of the A review Journal of Sound and
velocity response is shown in Figure. 2b, Vibration 333(4)1097-1118.
wherein, the frequency peaks are normalized
with the fundamental peak at 25 kHz. The Joglekar D M and Mitra M2015 Nonlinear
existence of higher order harmonics (at 50, analysis of flexural wave propagation
75, and 100 kHz), is observed in the results through 1D waveguides with a
obtained using all the proposed method. breathing crack Journal of Sound and
Results of the healthy waveguide are Vibration 344242–257.
superimposed on the respective plots, which Sundermeyer J Nand Weaver RL1995 On
high light the effect of a breathing crack. crack identification and characterization
in a beam by nonlinear vibration
CONCLUSION analysis Journal of Sound and Vibration
An analytical-numerical method, analyzing 183(5)857–871.
the nonlinear interaction of flexural waves
892
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
rolled I beams can be used for castellated Concentrated load was applied in top and
beams with cross section properties bottom flange and at the shear centre of the
calculated at a section passing through the castellated beam. Due to the presence of
center of the hole and the equations given in castellations, loading at the shear center is
code for rolled I-beams gives a conservative given by applying half of the load in top
value for castellated beams. Nonlinear flange and next half in the bottom flange.
lateral-torsional buckling of simply supported Bearing stiffeners were provided in all the
castellated beams with a wide variety of beams at the support and at the position of
modified slenderness was studied by Amin point load to prevent local yielding. Figure 1
Mohebhak(2004) and it was concluded that shows the finite element model with point
the value of C b is not constant in the whole load acting at shear center.
range of castellated beams slenderness and
the values given in the code are higher than
that determined by the finite element model
in the inelastic range which leads to unsafe
design. The effect of different postion of
loading with varying slenderness due to
concentrated load in the inelastic range for
rolled I-beams was studied by Amin
Mohebhak (2011). However, no effort has
been done to extend the study, to determine
the effect of position of loading and support
conditions on the value of C b for castellated
beams that buckle inelastically. Figure 1. Finite element model
OBJECTIVE
A non-linear analysis was performed with the
help of static Riks method in ABAQUS by
The purpose of this study is to investigate the considering both geometric and material non-
effect of beam slenderness and position of linearity. S4R element was used for
loading on the moment gradient factor of modelling. A convergence criterion based on
castellated beams that buckle inelastically. maximum norm of incremental displacement
was adopted by using static-general analysis
MODELLING AND ANALYSIS in ABAQUS and a mesh size of 26.6mm x
26.6mm was adopted.
PARAMETERS CONSIDERED
MATERIAL NON-LINEARITY
AISC provides equations to determine the
limiting length for plastic(L p ) and elastic Material non-linearity was introduced by
behaviour(L r ). For the present study simply using the trilinear elastic–plastic strain-
supported castellated beam with varying hardening stress–strain curve which was
slenderness was subjected to concentrated assumed by Amin Mobebakh (2004) in his
load and pure bending to determine the value study, with Young’s modulus of 210 GPa,
of C b . Span for the present study was taken in strain hardening modulus of 6000 Mpa and
the inelastic and elastic range based on the Poisson’s ratio of 0.3.
calculated values of L p and L r as 1.05 and
2.57m respectively. GEOMETRIC NON-LINEARITY
895
Baskar et al.
896
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
sinusoidal corrugated beams subjected to The various (M/V) values are 0.70, 0.85, 1.1,
LTB through experimental and FEM 1.42, 1.76. Note that higher (M/V) here
modelling and have given reliability based represents lesser length since only moment
design recommendations. Design procedure carrying capacity depends on length and it is
present in ANSI for flat webs can be used. higher for lesser length.
Behaviour with laterally restrained sections LOADING AND BOUNDARY
by considering variation in sinusoidal web
geometry would add more insights to the CONDITIONS
understanding. Henceforth the present study
concentrated on this area. Point load and UDL were considered for
loading. Simply supported with top flange
PARAMETERS CONSIDERED restrained is taken as the boundary condition
to study the in-plane behaviour of the
SECTION PROPERTIES sinusoidal corrugated web sections.
The values of a ranging from 50 to 200mm
with the increment of 50mm is chosen. w
values were chosen from 200 to 500mm with
an increment of 100mm is chosen for the
present study. (Refer Figure 1). Since the
corrugated web is built by wide flanges
properties of ISWB 600 is chosen for the
current studies for the plastic section. Further
the thickness of the flange and web is varied Figure 2. Boundary conditions (wired
such that it falls under all the sectional model)
category according to IS:800. All the parts
VALIDATION OF THE MODEL
were modelled as shell elements of S4R type
and analysis was carried out for the same. Primenta et al. (2015) clearly mentioned that
design of lateral torsional buckling is similar
to that of normal conventional I beams in
case of sinusoidal web sections which are
used commonly in the industries. Hence end
moments are applied on sinusoidal web
sections with a=50mm, w=200mm and
Figure 1. Geometry of corrugation
buckling analysis is done for the section. It is
then compared with the critical moment
LONGITUDINAL LENGTH ADOPTED carrying capacity of the laterally unrestrained
Longitudinal length plays major role in section as per theory.20mm mesh size was
behaviour of the girder. With the lesser adopted after mesh convergence studies.
length Shear dominates, while Moment
carrying capacity dominates as the length RESULT AND DISCUSSIONS
increases. Since behaviour is governed by 1. For the point load conditions ultimate
moment-shear interaction length was chosen load obtained shows that for the same
according to (M/V) ratio in the range 0.5 to 2. value of the w instead of going for the
The following formulas were used to arrive at higher a value lower value of 50
(M/V) values. performs better.
(1) 2. Variations have less effect on the
ultimate load carrying capacity for
higher (M/V) values.
(2)
3. As the (M/V) values decrease w values
also has significant effect on the ultimate
898
Non-Linear Behaviour of Laterally Restrained Beams with Sinusoidal Corrugated Web.
For UDL sections the following observations • For a particular type of section
are made. (plastic, compact, semi-compact or
• After reaching plasticity global slender) load carrying capacity is
buckling of web takes place near almost same when corrugation depth
supports for lesser length of the girder is more (a>100) indicating that higher
for plastic sections and buckling of value of really does not account for
flanges takes at the mid of the section increased capacity.
for increased lengths indicating • Better plastic rotation capacity is
influence (M/V) interaction. observed lesser values of w and for
Conventional I beams have higher a 100 indicating that post yielding
capacity (Figure 3.) strength can be utilized effectively for
those sections.
• Ultimate load carrying capacity I
section is much higher than that of the
corrugated sections (refer Figureures
3,4 and 5)
• In case of girders with corrugated
webs with lower w the plastic rotation
capacity is more as compared to
higher w. But ultimate load is higher
for the girders with higher w values
i.e. when the material concentration
more in the middle. So it is better to
use I sections (refer Figure 3 and
Figure 3. Behaviour for w=200, Figure 4)
(M/V)=1.42 plastic section
899
Baskar and Sadananda
Figure 4. Behaviour for w=500, (M/V) = Figure 5. Behaviour for w=500, (M/V) =
1.42 plastic section 1.1 compact section
900
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper investigates the effect of a horizontal web splice on the plate
girder with transverse stiffeners. Linear buckling and static non-linear analysis has
been carried out for the girders under pure flexural loading considering the material
and geometrical non-linearities as per Code provisions to study post-buckling
behaviour of girder. General purpose finite element package ABAQUS has been used
for analysis. Splice was designed considering various failure criteria. Correlation
between moment carrying capacity and web slenderness, panel aspect ratio, stiffness
of transverse stiffener and stiffness of splice was investigated. Reserve strength in
slender webs was investigated by carrying out non-linear analysis.
Keywords: Plate Girders, horizontal splice, transverse stiffener, web bend -
buckling.
Plate girder is a very well established field in Many theoretical and experimental
steel construction. In case of structures with investigations have been carried out for
high loads the depth of the girder becomes girders with horizontal stiffeners. In recent
very large and there is a need of splicing the years, numerical studies have been carried
girder due to limitation in transportation out for vast range of parameters in which
facilities or for convenience in execution of researchers have considered transverse and
work. The size of the horizontal splice in longitudinal stiffeners together. Rockey
web is large as compared to the normal [1965] studied the behaviour of longitudinal
longitudinal stiffeners used in girders and stiffener for webs and found out optimum
the effect of location and size of the splice is location of stiffener at 0.21 d from
to be studied. Web-bend buckling occurs in compression flange using energy methods.
case of slender webs under pure flexural Rockey and Cook [1967] carried out
loading. This makes the web plate to buckle theoretical investigation on girders with 2 to
before it reaches the yield point leading to 5 stiffeners in web and found out optimum
loss in load carrying capacity. Under cyclic location for 2 stiffeners is at 0.136d &
loading this buckling causes fatigue failure 0.284d for fixed condition at longitudinal
at web-flange junction. In order to avoid the boundaries and 0.123d & 0.275d for simply
bucking of web longitudinal stiffener is supported condition at longitudinal
provided in the compression zone of the boundaries. Cooper [1967] carried out
girder. It is necessary to investigate the experimental tests on girders with
parameters related to splicing. longitudinal stiffeners and found out
optimum location of the stiffeners at 0.2 d
from compression flange. He also proposed
requirement of moment of inertia for the
stiffener. This stiffener helps girder to
_____________________________
achieve ultimate moment and keeps stress Various parameters and their effect on the
distribution linear in the web. Azhari and behaviour of the girder was studied. The
Bradford (1993) used semi-analytical finite governing parameters for the behaviour of
stripe method considering the local buckling girder are panel aspect ratio, slenderness of
of the stiffener and optimized the location of web and location of splice. Various values of
the stiffener to maximise the web buckling the parameters considered for current study
stress. The research work on girders with are listed below.
horizontal splice is limited.
Panel Aspect Ratio= (a/d) = 0.5,1.0,1.5
METHOD OF ANALYSIS Distance of Splice from Top Flange=0.3d,
0.4d, 0.5d.
In case of pure bending load there are no Web slenderness ratio= d/t w = 80, 100, 125,
shear forces in the girder. In order to design 166.6, 250, 333.33.
the web, splice some secondary shear is Thickness of transverse stiffener=t st = 2
required. When the direct shear on a girder mm, 4 mm, 6 mm, 8 mm.
is less than 0.6 times the design shear it does
not reduce the moment carrying capacity of RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
the girder. So for all the girders the bolted
splice was designed for the shear which is LINEAR BUCKLING ANALYSIS:
0.6 times the design shear for the web. End
moments were applied to the girder. All the The stiffness of splice being function of the
parts of the girder were modelled as shell loading on the girder is not considered as a
elements using S4R elements. The bolting in parameter. The location of the splice, panel
the splice was modelled using the fasteners aspect ratio and stiffness of the transverse
for shell elements in ABAQUS. Mesh stiffener are considered as the parameters.
convergence study was carried out and The moment carrying capacities of the
element size of 30mm was found sufficient girders are calculated using simple beam
to give accurate results as compared with theory. Elastic moment is calculated when
theoretical values. The Young’s Modulus for the top and bottom flange reach at yield
the steel was taken as 200 GPa and stress. Plastic moment is calculated for fully
Poisson’s Ratio as 0.3. The yield stress for plastic section. The stiffness of transverse
the steel was given as 250 MPa. Bi-linear stiffener required to get maximum buckling
stress strain curve which was linearly elastic moment has been related to the rigidity of
and perfectly plastic was used for material plate in compression. I st is M.I. of stiffener
modelling of steel. The depth of the girder is and D c is Rigidity of plate. The girders with
1000 mm and the width of flanges in 300 lower slenderness ratio give the values of
mm. Thickness of both the flanges is 18 mm. buckling moments which are higher than the
elastic moment carrying capacities of the
girder. These values of buckling moments
have no significance. The requirement of
moment of inertia of the transverse stiffener
is reduced when the splice goes closer to the
compression flange. The minimum I st /D c
ratio for panel aspect ratio 0.5 is around
1000 for splice at 0.3d and 2000 for 0.5d.
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS
902
Non-linear Behaviour of Girders with Horizontal Web Splice
webs. It was also carried out to study the show marginally better behaviour in
contribution of splice in the moment achieving full plastic section and shows low
carrying capacity. Geometrical imperfection reduction in load. In case of higher panel
was provided as per the provisions of aspect ratio the performance of girders
EUROCODE 3 [2006]. For slender webs without splice is very poor in terms of
without splice there was of loss of strength rotation capacity. But for girders with splice
due to buckling. Girders with slender webs closer to the compression flange it shows
without splice were not able to achieve the good rotation capacity and the reduction in
elastic moment capacity. For lower panel load in post-buckling range is also less as
aspect ratio the girders with slender webs compared to girders without splice
903
Baskar and Sawant
In case of lower panel aspect ratio, the splice achieve full plastic section for girders
contributes in the girder section and gives with panel aspect ratio 0.5 only.
moment capacity more than the full plastic 5. The splice contributes for increase in
capacity of the girder. This contribution moment carrying capacity of girder
reduces as the panel aspect ratio increases acting similar to flange.
due to buckling of web. 6. The rotation capacity of girder
increases as the splice goes closer to
CONCLUSIONS the compression flange form 0.5d to
0.3d.
Based on the results of finite element
analysis, the following conclusions are REFERENCES
derived.
1. Slender webs with higher d/t ratio Azhari M. and Bradford M A 1993 Local
show loss of strength due to web buckling of I-section beam with
slenderness both in buckling and non- longitudinal web stiffeners Thin-Walled
linear analysis. Structures 15 1-13.
2. Splice at all the location provides Cooper P B 1967 Strength of longitudinally
additional stiffness and increases the stiffened plate girders ASCE J. Str. Div.
load carrying capacity. 93(ST2) 419-452.
3. The minimum I st /D c ratio required for
slender webs to achieve maximum Eurocode 3 2006 EN 1993-1-5: Design of
possible moment for panel aspect ratio Steel Structures – General Rules Plated
0.5 and 1 is 1000 when splice is at Structural Elements.
0.3d and 2000 when splice is at 0.5d. Rockey K C and Cook I T 1965a Optimum
4. For slender webs the splice at 0.3d reinforcement by two longitudinal
helps to achieve full plastic moment stiffeners of a plate subjected to pure
for girders with panel aspect ratio 0.5 bending Int. J. Solids Structures 1 79-
and 1 and at 0.4d and 0.5d it helps to 92.
904
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The in-plane behaviour of castellated beams has been studied extensively
all these years with varying hole properties, length and loading conditions. In this
paper, a numerical study has been done to determine the behaviour of castellated
beams for different section classification (i.e plastic, compact, semi compact and
slender as per IS: 800:2007) and length which is based on the moment to shear ratio.
Moment to shear ratio defines the effect of shear compared to moment that are
produced by the beam to resist the external load. In the present study the beams were
laterally restrained to prevent lateral torsional buckling. This study considers both
material and geometric non linearity. The hole shape used was hexagonal. Eigen value
buckling analysis was carried out from which the initial geometric imperfection was
obtained and was imposed to the model to initiate the buckling. From the numerical
study it was concluded that there is no constant optimum value for weld length and
hole depth, it is varying upon the section properties and also moment to shear ratio.
The variation in the load carrying capacity for different section properties, moment to
shear ratio, hole depth to web depth ratio, weld length to hole depth ratio havebeen
presented.
Keywords: Castellated beams; Moment to shear ratio; Non-linear analysis
The mode of failure depends principally upon hexagonal and octagonal opening which was
the beamslenderness, the geometry of the cut calculated from the eurocode is more than
(hole depth, angle of cut andspacing of the that of FEA result. Peyman et al., (2015)
holes or weld length) and the type of loading. proposed the empirical equation to predict the
Six potentialfailure modes which are load carrying capacity of the castellated
associated with castellated beams are: beams.
• Formation of Flexure Mechanism
• Lateral-Torsional Buckling MATERIALS AND METHOD USED
• Formation of Vierendeel Mechanism The Finite Element Analysis of castellated
• Rupture of the Welded Joint in a Web beams are done with using the ABAQUS
Post 6.11 package. S4R element was used to
• Shear Bucking of a Web Post
analyse the beams.
• Compression Buckling of a Web Post
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PREVIOUS STUDIES
The behaviour of steelis assumed to be
Boyer (1964) investigated the economy of the
homogeneous and isotropic. The material
castellated beams and reported that the
considered in the analysis is mild steel. The
savings effected depend on span, loading,
average value of yield stress (σ y ) of the steel
depth and the choice of castellated beam is
is 233.3MPa, the Young’s Modulus (Es) is
bad when the loads are too small, spans are
210 GPa and Poison’s ratio (ν) is 0.3. The
too small and the depth limitations are too
castellated beams in the current study are
restrictive. Kerdal and Nethercott (1984)
simply supported and are laterally restrained
studied the various failure modes of
to avoid lateral buckling. This helps the
castellated beams, reported that when the
girder to achieve full strength without out of
critical span is subjected to an approximately
plane buckling. Simply supported boundary
uniform moment, collapse is likely to occur
condition can be given to a girder in many
either by lateral-torsional instability in the
ways. Pinned condition was applied to one
case of unrestrained beams or by the
end and other end as roller. To provide lateral
formation of a flexural mechanism for
deflection both the edges of top flange were
laterally restrained beams and when the shear
given zero displacement in lateral direction.
is dominant the failure may be lateral
Concentrated central point load was applied
torsional buckling of web post or rupture of
in the beam for both buckling and non-linear
welded joint or by the vierendeel mechanism.
analysis.
Richard et al. (1998) investigated the web
post buckling of the castellated beams and MESH AND VALIDATION
buckling load for various geometry and
moment to shear ratio was calculated. Chung Mesh convergence study was done carefully
et al., (2001) studied the vierendeel and mesh size of 20 mm was chosen as the
mechanism in steel beams with circular web optimum size. FEmodelsof the castellated
opening, reported that the current design beams were validated with experimental
method is conservative. Chung et al., (2003) results which have been carried out by
have done the finite element investigation on Richard et al., (1998) and Zaarour et al.,
steel beams with web openings of various (1996)
size and shapes and reported that the global
shear forces in perforated sections may cause PARAMETERS CONSIDERED
both shear failure and Vierendeel mechanism Section properties : plastic, compact,
in perforated sections simultaneously. Soltani semicompact, slender
et al., (2012) reported that the load carrying M/V ratio : 0.5, 1, 1.5
capacity of the castellated beams with d h /d w : 0.55, 0.65, 0.75
906
Non-linear analysis of castellated beams
Figure 1. Variation of load with e/d h for Figure 4. Load vs deflection for plastic
plastic section with M/v=0.5 section with d =0.55d
h w
907
Baskar et al.
wire rope core (IWRC) along with overall MODELLING AND SIMULATION
helical shape.
• Performance evaluation by nonlinear The geometry of 7×7 WRI having 4 turns of
explicit analysis of WRI considering single inner strand of (1+6) configuration and
complex contact conditions among outer six strands of (1+6) configuration tied
individual wires of 7×7 configuration for with top and bottom metallic retainer bars as
various loading conditions such as shown in Figure. 1 is created using solid
compression, tension, shear/roll etc. modeling software with the geometric
parameters as mentioned at Table 1.
The FE model consisting 700152 number of
3D solid elements is created using
Abaqus/CAE software as shown in Figure. 4.
Appropriate material properties of SS304
were defined and penalty friction approach
was considered with coefficient of friction
(µ) of 0.115 for the explicit the analysis.
WRIs
WRI
retainer bar in vertical and horizontal considering geometry, material and contact
direction. The analysis is completed with nonlinearities
60
number of contact nodes and amplitude of
40
total friction, while in tension mode contrary
Displacement (mm)
20
is true.
0
60
-20 Compression
40
-40
20
-60
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0
Force (kN)
Time (s)
-40
Tension
-80
in Figure.7 & Figure.8 for compression & Figure 7. Force Vs Deflection Behavior
tension mode in vertical direction and shear (Compression/Tension)
mode in horizontal direction respectively. It 15
0
The hysteresis curve of the
compression/tension behavior is asymmetric -5
Displacement (mm)
that, when the WRI is under compression the
Figure 8. Force Vs Deflection Behavior
relative distance between the wire strands
(shear mode)
will be increasing with reduction in total
911
Patel and Kumaraswamy
In tension mode stiffness of the WRI comes tension mode are observed that increases
from the wires itself. On the other hand, for stiffness value due to increased dry
shear mode the curve is symmetric indicating friction between wire strands. On the
similar stiffness characteristics in both other hand, contact area in compression
directions for given dynamic displacement mode decreases as a function of
input. The maximum reaction force of 10.8 displacement.
kN is observed for shear mode, which is
The nonlinear computational analysis
significantly low compared to tension and
presented in this article open new field for
compression. Displacement behavior of the
designers involved in characterization of
WRI is plotted as shown in Figure. 9 for
WRIs as a function of various design
compressive mode.
parameters such as geometry, configuration,
The results plotted indicates that, nonlinear effect of number of turns, helix angle,
stiffness characteristic of WRI is in good material properties etc. that will minimize
correlation with the experimental results conduct of large number of experiments,
available in the literature. Other important time, effort and cost.
results e.g. contact pressure, damping, load
distribution in each strand, stress distribution, ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
relative deflection between contact points, The authors are grateful to Vice Chancellor
strain energy, etc. can be computed by the DIAT, Pune and Director, VRDE (DRDO),
same analysis. Ahmednagar to present this paper in the
international congress and subsequent
publication in the journal.
REFERENCES
Balaji P S Leblouba Moussa Rahman M
Eand Vuia Tshun Loo 2014
Experimental investigation on the
hysteresis behavior of the wire rope
isolators Journal of Mechanical Science
and Technology 29(4) 1527-1536
Figure 9. Displacement (mm) plot
(compression mode) Cengiz Erdonmez and Erdem Imrak C 2010
Advances In 3d Wire Rope Modeling
CONCLUSIONS And Numerical Analysis The
International Journal of Transport &
1. Significant nonlinear stiffness Logistics ISSN 1451-107X
characteristics are observed for the WRI Demetriades G F Constantinou M C and
in compression/tension mode. Reinhorn A M 1992 Study of wire rope
2. Asymmetric hysteresis behavior i.e. systems for seismic protection of
maximum stiffness in tension mode is equipment in buildings Engineering
twice that of compression mode for the Structures 15 5
given displacement and boundary Gordana K Nenad Vidanovic Vukman Bakic
conditions. In shear mode, symmetric Bosko Rasuo 2014 on finite element
stiffness behavior is observed in both analysis of sling wire rope subjected to
axial loading Journal of Ocean
directions.
Engineering (Elsevier) 88
3. Increased contact area representing
higher number of contact nodes in
912
Nonlinear Computational Analysis of Multi Strand Helical Wire Rope Isolators
913
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present work cantilever beam based energy harvesters embedded
with piezoelectric patch are proposed. The proposed harvester is harmonically base
excited oriented cantilever beam with a tip mass at its free end. Piezoelectric patch is
attached near to the fixed end of the beam. Euler-Bernoulli beam theory is applied
since the beam is slender. Nonlinear governing equations of motion are obtained using
Hamilton’s principle. Then the temporal governing equation of motion is obtained by
using single mode approximation in the generalized Galerkin’s method. Steady state
response for amplitude and voltage is obtained using method of multiple scales.
Responses under primary and secondary resonance cases are obtained. It is found that
the proposed models can be used as energy harvester for a wide range of frequency as
many resonance conditions are found due to nonlinear nature of the system.
Keywords: Oriented cantilever beam; Method of multiple scales; Piezoelectric
patches; Energy harvester; Secondary resonance.
L
The other coefficients are provided in
A v s, t y gv u s, t ds
1 2 2
T
2 0
Appendix.
m v L, t y gv u L, t I t 2
1 2 2 1
SOLUTION OF TEMPORAL
2 2
EQUATION
(1)
Method of multiple scales Nayfeh and Mook
L
EI k s, t ds mg sin u
1 2 (2004) is used to find the uniform first order
U (2)
2 0 approximate solution of Eq. (3) and (4).
Expanding the solution of system q(t ) and
, A, E , I , , k , u, v, I t , , ygv , ygu , m, and
here V (t ) in the following series form
denotes mass density, area, Young’s q(t ) q0 T0 , T1 q1 T0 , T1 O( 2 ) (5)
Modulus, area moment of inertia, Lagrange
multiplier, curvature, transverse displacement, V (t ) V0 T0 , T1 V1 T0 , T1 O 2 (6)
longitudinal displacement, mass moment of
inertia of tip mass m, angle of rotation, CASE (1): PRIMARY RESONANCE
displacement in the axial and transverse
direction of the beam, tip mass and angle of To express the nearness of the excitation
orientation respectively. frequency to the frequency of the harvester
0 ,
By using Hamilton’s principle with single
mode approximation in the generalized 0
Galerkin’s method the governing equation of here denotes detuning parameter. After
motion after scaling becomes following the procedure of perturbation
q H 2 q H 5 q H 3 q 3 H 1q 2 q H 4 q q 2 method we obtain frequency-response
equation which is quadratic in
H 6 gq H 7V H 8 q 2V (3)
F1 cos( ) F2 q cos( ) 3H 3 a 3 H10 a 3 Z1 H 7 a 3
H 8 a3
80 4 0 2 8
1
V q H13V H14 q 2 q 0 (4) 2 (7)
a F 2 a aZ 2 a2
4 2 2 2 H 7 H 8 4
1 0
Following parameters is used to 0 0
nondimensionalize the governing equation of
motion. CASE (2): SECONDARY RESONANCE
Response analysis when frequency of periodic
R5 R6 g sin( ) Rr
1 , V 8 V , , t , excitation coincides with twice of systems
R1 Cp 1 1 natural frequency 0
The other coefficients are as follows
20 2
R2 r R Rr 2
Again after following the procedure of
H1 , H 2 4 , H 3 3 2 , H 4 rH1 ,
R R R 11
1 1 1
perturbation method we obtain following
R R sin( ) R8 2
H5 5 2 , H6 6 , H7 , frequency-response equation
R11 R112
C p R112
3H 3 a 3 H10 a 3 Z1 H 7 a 3
2
H R9 R8 r , H R r , H R8 r ,
H 8 a3
8
C p R112
9 1 8 10
80 4 0 2 8
CpR
1 (8)
2
H10 H12 a F 2 2 aH aZ 2 a2
H12 R9 r 1 , H13 H , H14 H , H11 H 9 ,
3
16 2
2
a
2
7
H H
20 4
8
9 9
0 2
F1 y0 2 2 cos( ) R7 / (12 rR1 ), F2 H 6 y0 2 2
here 2 T1
915
Energy harvesting from oriented piezoelectric beam
REFERENCES
Amplitude (m)
0.01
Friswell M I Ali S F Bilgen O Adhiari S Lees
0.005
A W and Litak G 2012 Non-linear
piezoelectric vibration energy harvester
0
from a vertical cantilever beam with tip
50 55 60 65 70
Frequency (Hz) mass Journal of Intelligent Material
Systems and Structures 23 1505-1521
a
Harne R L and Wang K W 2015 Axial
Voltage vs Frequency
0.5 suspension compliance and compression
0.4
for enhancing performance of a
nonlinear vibration energy harvesting
Voltage (V)
0.3
beam system ASME J. Vib. Acoust
0.2 138(1) 011004-011004-10
0.1
Masana R and Daqaq M F 2011
0 Electromechanical modeling and
50 55 60 65 70
Frequency (Hz) nonlinear analysis of axially loaded
(b) energy harvesters Journal of Vibration
and Acoustics 133(1) 011007-011007
Figure 2. (a) Amplitude-frequency
and (b) voltage-frequency curves with Nayfeh A H and Mook D T 2004 Nonlinear
variation of amplitude of base excitation Oscillations Willey-VCH Weinheim
916
Garg and Dwivedy
APPENDIX: COEFFICIENTS
L
Ls L
L 2
k4 2 dsds ds, k5 ds ds,
0 s0 0 s
L L L
k6 ( L s) ds, k7 ds, k8 ds,
0 0 0
L L L
k9 2 ds, k10 ds, k11 2 ds
0 0 0
917
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
ηi , j ( xi , x j ) + + η1,,P ( x ) (1)
constructed ANOVA models, then it is
∑
1≤i ≤ j ≤ P
predicted by the GP model. This automatic
∑
model selection feature on the basis of error
= ηu ( xu )
u ⊆{1P} sensitiveness renders the framework as
In order to enhance the local approximation adaptive in nature.
capabilities of an ANOVA decomposition
model, it has been coupled with Gaussian NUMERICAL EXAMPLES
process (GP) modelling. Both of them have ABE-ANOVA assisted NSGA-II has been
been combined efficiently so as to render applied to test problems featuring typical
higher level of approximation accuracy. The Pareto fronts in order to illustrate its superior
detailed procedure of ABE-ANOVA has performance. The numerical investigation is
been discussed henceforth. carried out by selecting two problems, one
having a disconnected Pareto front and
The variance of GP prediction can be
another having a non-convex Pareto front,
obtained as (Sudret, 2012)
namely KUR and FON, respectively (Deb,
1 − f ( x )T r ( x )T 2001). The number of sample points utilized
for ABE-ANOVA are less than that of
σ Y2ˆ = σ y2
0 F f ( x )
T −1 (2)
ANOVA as shown in tables 1 and 2. The
F R r ( x )
excellent performance of ABE-ANOVA is
Since, Eq. (2) is a local error measure, it can clearly illustrated in figs. 3 and 4 for the
be utilized for searching regions with low same problems where ANOVA
prediction accuracy. A pre-defined error decomposition fails to capture the Pareto
tolerance limit is set so as to segregate the front adequately as shown in figs. 1 and 2.
predicted function values according to the
error magnitude. The predicted function
values for which the error has exceeded the
tolerance limit is to be approximated by
ANOVA decomposition. This feature of the
919
An Improved Approximation Strategy for Multi Objective Evolutionary Optimization
Figure 1. Obtained Pareto front for KUR Figure 2. Obtained Pareto front for FON
utilizing ANOVA utilizing ANOVA
Figure 3. Obtained Pareto front for KUR Figure 4. Obtained Pareto front for FON
utilizing ABE-ANOVA utilizing ABE-ANOVA
CONCLUSION has been observed to yield much more
accurate results with lesser computational
A novel approximation technique has been power than that of ANOVA. The significant
developed to solve multi objective improvement in the accuracy of the
evolutionary optimization. ABE-ANOVA developed framework resides in the fact that
920
Chatterjee and Chowdhury
the approximation on the local scale has been Jin Y 2005 A comprehensive survey of
efficiently handled by the GP model fitness approximation in evolutionary
employed. Hence, it incorporates the computation Soft Computing 9(1) 3–12.
advantages of both ANOVA and GP model.
Lim D 2008 Evolutionary Optimization For
Excellent results have been achieved both in
Computationally Expensive Problem
terms of accuracy and computational effort. Nanyang Technogical University.
The superior performance of ABE-ANOVA
makes it potential for real time applications. Rabitz H and Aliş Ö F 1999 General
foundations of high dimensional model
REFERENCES representations Journal of
Mathematical Chemistry 25(2-3) 197–
Deb K 2001 Multi-objective optimization
233.
using evolutionary algorithms.
Chichester UK: Wiley.
Regis R G 2014 Particle swarm with radial
basis function surrogates for expensive
Deb K Agarwal A and Meyarivan T 2002 A
black-box optimization Journal of
Fast and Elitist Multiobjective Genetic
Computational Science 5(1) 12–23.
Algorithm: NSGA-II IEEE
Transactions on Evolutionary
Sudret B 2012 Meta-models for structural
Computation 6(2) 182–197.
reliability and uncertainty quantification
In Proceedings of 5th Asian-Pacific
Deb K and Nain P K S 2007 An Evolutionary
Symposium on Stuctural Reliabilty and
Multi-objective Adaptive Meta-
its Applications (APSSR 2012)
modeling Procedure Using Artificial
Singapore 53–76 Methodology
Neural Networks In Studies in
Applications.
Computational Intelligence 322 297–
322 Springer Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.
921
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Slack adjuster is one of the important components of braking system for
vehicles equipped with pneumatic S-cam drum brake. The slack adjuster converts the
linear force applied by the brake chamber into torque on s-cam shaft and maintains
the constant gap between the brake drum and the lining by adjusting the excessive
clearance generated due to lining wear. Today’s design for automatic slack adjuster
used in all categories of commercial vehicles is same. The focus of the paper is to
provide the solution for the underutilization of the adjuster body and optimization
through the force analysis of the slack adjuster for different braking forces from HCV
and LCV.
Keywords: Slack Adjuster; Brake Chamber; S-Cam shaft; Drum Brake Lining
causing friction, which causes the wheel to Wormshaft, Worm wheel, Coil Spring,
decelerate and hence stopping the vehicle. Regulator wheel, Control Disc, one-way
clutch, Adjusting screw and clutch wheel etc.
Out of these, the Wormshaft and the Worm
wheel are the only components along with
the Housing, which are subjected to the
heavy forces from the brake chamber. For the
other components some means are provided
such that on exertion of heavy forces they
will be detached from the main working
components.
The housing or adjuster body (see Figure. 4)
is subjected to higher magnitude forces from
the brake chamber directly (at 1) and the
reaction force that will be transmitted from
the Worm wheel to Wormshaft (axial force –
at 2).
923
Design and Optimization of the Brake Slack Adjuster for Light Commercial Vehicle Braking System
Brake Chamber Area (mm2) Force (N) (Fa)s (N) (Fa)w (N)
924
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Explicit methods have constraint on time step or space step for differential
equations. The step size become very small for stiff-differential equation (SDE). Most
of the time we prefer implicit methods for stiff differential equation. This increases
the computation cost. Convergence rates may be increased by using a higher order
implicit schemes – however, they are relatively tougher to code. Explicit method with
extended stability property can reduce the computational cost. In this work we are
presenting three stage and four stage Runge-Kutta methods (RK) with enhanced
stability property. RK methods are optimized using Genetic Algorithm (GA) for better
stability. Since the stability function is multi-modal in nature we are using GA and
the result is refined using newly proposed method called multi-section method
(MSM). Enhanced stability preserving Runge-Kutta methods shows better stability
property than most of the existing methods of same kind, known to the authors.
Keywords: Explicit methods; Stability; Stiff-differential equation; Genetic
algorithm.
modified bisection method and can be It’s a first order method. a1 and a2 are free
parallelized easily. MSM can be used in variables. In Eq. (3), these are determined
single variable or multi-variable single modal using GA for better stability property.
optimization problems. Extending this to The ESPRK3-2 term scheme is
multi-modal optimization problem is also (4a)
k1 = hF (u n )
discussed.
STABILITY OF RK METHOD 1
k 4 = hF (u n + k 3 ) (5d)
Stability equation of fourth order RK method 3
is
R(hλ ) = 1 + hλ + a1 * (hλ ) 2 + a 2 * (hλ ) 3 (3) u n+1 = k 4 (5e)
+ a3 * (hλ ) 4
ESPRK4 - 3 method
where a1 = 1 / 2; a2 = 1 / 6; a3 = 1 / 24; It’s a first order method with a3 , a2 and a1 as
the optimizing variables in Eq. (3). The
For RK3 a1 = 1 / 2; a2 = 1 / 6; a3 = 0; scheme is
926
Stability Preserving Runge Kutta Method using Genetic Algorithm
927
Neelan and Nair
928
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Time series analysis is gaining popularity among the damage detection
methods for structural health monitoring. The damage features are generally con-
structed using the coefficients or prediction errors of popular time series models
like AR and AR-ARX. Even though the damage features are effective to indicate
the presence of damage, they are not found to be sensitive, especially when the in-
cipient damages are small like minor cracks. Also, identifying the exact spatial
damage location is difficult. In view of this, in this paper, we present an approach to
enhance the sensitivity of the damage features of scalar AR-ARX model to identify
the presence of damage and enabling it to locate the damage, without employing a
vector model. Numerical simulation studies are carried out by considering an ex-
ample of a simply supported beam girder minor cracks. The results of the proposed
technique is found to improve the sensitivity of the damage features devised from
the prediction errors of AR-ARX model for damage detection and damage localiza-
tion on the structures.
Keywords: Time series analysis; Autoregressive models; Singular Spectrum
Analysis; damage diagnostics; Structural Health Monitoring.
ation of the data, then the model, fit to the handling the environmental variability and
undamaged sensor data no longer predicts measurement noise.
the subsequent data and hence the residuals
are large and/or correlated. This change is NUMERICAL STUDIES
assumed to be caused by damage to the sys- In order to demonstrate the effectiveness of
tem. However, the damage features of pop- the proposed SSA augmented AR-ARX
ularly used time series models like AR and model, we consider a simply supported
AR-ARX, constructed using the prediction elastic beam as a numerical example. The
errors, are not found to be sensitive, espe- beam generates transverse elasto-plastic
cially when the incipient damage is small cracks upon loading and the time history
like minor cracks. Also, identifying the ex- responses are obtained using a cracked
act spatial damage location, with those sca- beam finite element analysis(krawczuk et
lar models are found to be difficult. On the al., ,2000). These cracks are considered as
other hand, using vector time series models incipience of damage in the beam and their
for damage localization increases the com- spatial locations are identified using the
putational cost and complexity in data han- proposed SSA based time series technique.
dling. In view of this, we present an ap- The simply supported beam girder of 6m,
proach to enhance the sensitivity of these initially without cracks in a healthy state, is
damage indices of the scalar AR-ARX as shown in Figure 1, along with its proper-
model, enabling it to locate the damage, ties. The beam is excited using random dy-
without employing a vector model. namic loading which is stochastic in nature.
Singular Spectrum Analysis (SSA) (Orope- The acceleration time history response is
za, 2010) is a novel nonparametric tech- computed using finite element analysis
nique used in the analysis of time series and with Newmark’s time marching scheme.
is based on the principles of multivariate The sampling rate is considered as 3000
statistics. SSA decomposes the vibration samples per second. Initially, 10s long ac-
signals collected from the structure in am- celeration time history data are generated
bient conditions and these decomposed sig- with random loads, environmental condi-
nals are used to reconstruct the time series. tions and measurement noise in the form of
The reconstructed time series are then pre- signal to noise ratio(SNR). This healthy
dicted using AR-ARX model to determine data is segmented into subsets of 1000 time
a damage index, based on the ratio of mo- points each. Similarly, the acceleration data
ments of the prediction errors. In this paper, for the current state of the structure, with
we follow the feature extraction technique the simulated damage at element number 6,
proposed by Sohn and Farrar, 2001, to de- by introducing cracks of 20mm length, are
tect damage. The performance of SSA is generated and segmented into subsets.
found to improve the efficiency of the Now the SSA is performed to the accelera-
damage localization process by using the tion data from the healthy and current data
AR-ARX models. Numerical studies are subsets by following the four steps of em-
carried out by solving a simply supported bedding, singular value decomposition,
beam example, simulated with single and grouping and averaging and finally recon-
multiple cracks, reflecting minor damage, struction. By choosing window size as 25,
to demonstrate the effectiveness of the pro- the number of interesting components are
posed damage diagnostic algorithm to de- determined for reconstruction using the
tect the time instant and spatial location of energy criteria as follows.
damage. Both environmental variability
s
and measurement noise are considered. It
has been observed that the proposed SSA s
i 1
based time series algorithm can satisfactori- E d
(1)
ly localize damage/crack in the structure by d
i 1
930
A Refined Time Series Model for Structural Health Monitoring
__________________________________________________________________________________________
where ‘s’ is the number of the singular dicate that the SSA certainly increases the
values of the desired signals, considered sensitivity of the AR-ARX models and we
for regrouping and ‘d’ is the number of can precisely identify the time instant of
singular values of all the signals, obtained damage as well as spatial location of dam-
using SSA. age using AR-ARX models without resort-
ing to vector AR models. The results of the
The singular spectrum plots, for baseline
studies have shown that the technique is
(healthy) data and the current data for node
capable of handling environmental as well
6, with a window length of 25 are shown
as operational variability and less sensitive
in Figure 1. By considering the energy cri-
to measurement noise.
teria cut-off as 0.99, the number of com-
ponents for reconstruction is chosen as 15.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Few of those individual SSA components
thus obtained from healthy and damage This paper is being published with the
data of 6th node with window length 25 are permission of the Director, CSIR-
plotted against each other in Figure 2. It Structural Engineering Research Centre
can be clearly seen from the figure, that (SERC), Chennai.
there is no loss of damage information if
all the 15 components are considered for REFERENCES
reconstruction. The reconstructed signal is Abdi H and Williams L 2010.Component
then subjected to times series analysis to analysis Wiley Interdisciplinary Re-
evaluate the damage index discussed in view Computational Statistics 2
sohn and Farrar, 2001. The damage indices 433–459. DOI: 10.1002/wics.101.
obtained from all the sensors using AR-
Bayissa WL Haritosa N and Thelandersson
ARX are shown in Figure 3(a) and using
S 2008 Vibration based structural
SSA-AR-ARX is shown in figure 3(b).
damage identification using wavelet
From Figure 3, it is seen that the SSA-AR-
transform Mechanical Systems and
ARX technique is able to exactly identify
Signal Processing 22 1194–1215.
the minor damage in the 6th element,
whereas, the AR-ARX technique without Krawczuk M Zak A and Ostachowicz W
SSA fails to locate the minor damage. 2000 Elastic beam finite element with
a transverse elasto-plastic crack Fi-
CONCLUSION nite Elements in Analysis and Design
34 61-73.
In this paper, we propose a damage detec-
tion technique for online structural moni- Oropeza V E 2001 The Singular Spectrum
toring of civil engineering structures by Analysis method and its application
enhancing the sensitivity of the damage to seismic data denoising and recon-
features of autoregressive time series mod- struction University of Alberta 2010.
els. In this paper, the acceleration time his- Sohn H and Farrar C R Damage diagnosis
tory signals are preprocessed using singu- using time series analysis of vibration
lar spectrum analysis and the regrouped signals. Smart Materials and Struc-
data obtained from SSA is used to con- tures 10 446 DOI: 10.1088/0964-
struct AR-ARX model and subsequently 1726/10/3/304.
the damage indices using the baseline and Sohn H Allen D W Worden K et al. 2003
current data obtained from the structure. Statistical Damage Classification Us-
Numerical simulation studies are carried ing Sequential Probability Ratio Tests
out using a simply supported beam with Structural Health Monitoring 2(1)
single and multiple cracks as an example. 57-74.
Studies presented in this paper clearly in-
931
Lakshmia and Rao
35
damage with noise
30 Healthy with noise
25
Singular Values
20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Singular Value Number
Figure 1 Singular spectrum plot of data from 6th node with window length L= 25.
Data points
15 15 15
st nd rd
1 Component of Damage data 2 Component of Damage data 3 Component of Damage data
10 st 10 10 rd
3 Component of Healthy data
1 Component of Healthy data nd
2 Component of Healthy data
Acceleration, m/s2
Acceleration, m/s2
Acceleration, m/s2
5 5 5
0 0 0
-5 -5 -5
Acceleration, m/s2
5 5
15 Component of Healthy data
Acceleration, m/s2
0 0 0
-5 -5 -5
1.2
5
1.0
4
0.8
Damage Index
Damage Index
3
0.6
0.4 2
0.2 1
0.0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Sensor Number Sensor Number
(a) (b)
Figure 3. Damage indices obtained from (a) AR-ARX model (b) SSA-AR-ARX model.
932
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the paper, the well known is new technique applied to solve the
hyperbolic Initial and Boundary Value Problem (IBVP) equations. The present
method is quite different than the numerical method. The results are compared with
the existing exact or analytical method. The present novel technique simple and
improve the accuracy and convergence of the solution. Thus, the present method is
named as novel technique. The novel technique for three dimensional thick plate
results are found to converge very quickly and are more accurate compared to
numerical methods. The present method is quite efficient and is practically well suited
for use in these problems. Several examples are given to check the reliability of the
present method. An novel technique is a non-numerical method which can be adapted
for three dimensional thick plate solving hyperbolic equations. In the current paper,
the principle of the decomposition method is described, and its advantages are shown
in the form of hyperbolic equations. Using novel technique solved many engineering
hyperbolic engineering problems and compared with numerical techniques and
comcluded that the novel technique and numerical techniques solutions matches very
closer and errors are much less. Many numerical example of a shock with a dense
hammering is presented. The detailed timings are given to illustrate the performance
of the method in three dimensions evaluation.
Keywords: Novel technique; Numerical solution; Three Dimensional Problems;
Hyperbolic.
LN (u , `u , ) = g ( x, y, z , t ) , where LN is a
, where a0 , a1 , an are n integral constants.
differential operator. LN (LN(u) = Lu + Ru +
Nu) has to be that of the highest derivative, if 4.Identifying the initial conditions and the
the problem is a one dimensional (governed terms involving the independent variable
by ODE) with only space or time as the alone as initial approximation
independent variable. If it is two dimensional ui = a0 + t a1 + t a2 + +t an + L−1 g .
2 n
like plate problems (x,y, or t) or one 5.Having obtained u i as stated above, the
dimensional time variant (x,t or y,t) or three
various u i , i = 0 to n are obtained as
dimensional like thick plate (x,y, z and t),
when come across partial differential follows. Decomposing the unknown
equation, present method is more advantage. function into a series whose components
For problems like the above with time also as are to be determined, the decomposed
an independent variable, it is only in present terms are u00 = a0 , and u0 = t a1 + L−1 g
method one comes across with only one where xi ’s are known independent
derivative operator, which is highest order
either w.r.t. x or w.r.t. y or w.r.t. z or w.r.t. variables. The integral constants a0 , an
time. Here LN(u) = Lu + Ru + Nu = g(t) are determined from the given boundary
includes both linear and non-linear terms. conditions.
The linear term is written as Lu + Ru where L 6.Finding the successive terms of the series
is chosen as the higher ordered derivative, solution by successive iteration using
and R contains the remainder terms. The Adomian polynomials, in the next
present method consists of, recursive steps, we obtain
1. The given equation u1 = a 2 xi − L−1 Ru 0 − L−1 Nu 0 = a 2 xi − L−1 Ru 0 − L−1 A0 , u 2 = a3 xi − L−1 Ru1 − L−1 Nu1 =
2 2 3
L(u , `u , )u + R (u , `u , )u + N (u , `u , )u = g (t ) is n +1
a3 xi − L−1 Ru1 − L−1 A1 , u n = a n+1 xi − L−1 Ru n−1 − L−1 Nu n−1 =
3
decomposed with the help of Adomian differential equation (3) with specified initial
polynomials as, Nu0 = A0 , Nu1 = A1 , and conditions,
Nu n = An . ∂ 2u − xt ∂ u
2
− yt ∂ u
2
− zt ∂ u
2
= exp + exp + exp (4)
n ∂t 2 ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2
d
In an Initial Value Problem(IVP), L is (a the initial conditions posed are u(x,y,z,0) =
dt n
x^2 + y^2 + z^2, u t (x,y,z,0) =0.
differential operator) and L−1 may be
regarded as multiple definite integrations PRESENT METHOD
with limits 0 to t. For IVPs, they need to be
found from initial conditions and may be The above equation (4) can be written as
du Lt u = exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u ,
identified as u |t = 0 and | x = 0 respectively. In
dt where the linear operators are
the present method for i th time interval, L−t 1 ∂ 2
∂ 2
∂ 2
∂ 2
Lx = 2 , Ly = 2 Lz = 2 and Lt = 2 .
is the two-fold definite integral from 0 to δT , ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t
with δT ∈ [ti −1 , ti ] . The same procedure for Pre multiplying both sides of the equation (4)
singularity, fractional derivative and fracture by L−t 1 ,
problems have been adopted. The subset of L−t 1 Lt u = L−t 1 (exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u ) ,
time interval [0,T] be divided into n
subintervals and so ordered that u = a + bt + L−t 1 (exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u )
0 = t0 < t1 < t 2 < < t n = T and δT = ti − ti −1 . u0 = ui = u ( x,0) + t ut ( x,0).
th
Therefore, using present method over i Using initial conditions, one can find the
interval, the solution similar to numerical unknown constants a &b .
approximation procedure. To convey the idea ∴ a = u ( x, y, z ,0) = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 , b = ut ( x, y, z ,0) = 0
and for the sake of completeness of the
present method, now one can rewrite the u 0 ( x, y , z , t ) = f ( x, y , z ) + t g ( x , y , z ) = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 .
nonlinear equation in the following form of ∂ 2u ∂ 2u ∂ 2u
A0 = exp − xt 20 + exp − yt 20 + exp − zt 20 ,
u = N (u ), (1) ∂x ∂y ∂z
2
t t t
It is convenient to find the solution of u1 = ∫ ∫ A0 dtdt = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + .
equation (1) in the series form such as, 0 0 2!
∞ In the next iteration,
u = ∑ui . (2) ∂ 2u ∂ 2u ∂ 2u
i =0 A1 = exp− xt 21 + exp− yt 21 + exp− zt 21 ,
∂x ∂y ∂z
3D HYPERBOLIC APPLICATIONS t t 1 1 1
u2 = ∫ ∫ A1 dtdt = 2 exp− xt + 2 exp− yt + 2 exp− zt ,
The present method solution of variable
0 0 x y z
coefficient fourth-order hyperbolic partial
∂ 2u n −1 − yt ∂ u n −1
2
− zt ∂ u n −1
2
differential equation in two and three An −1 = exp− xt + exp + exp ,
dimensional space variables are shown ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2
t t
below. Considering the following general un = ∫ ∫ An dtdt.
form of three dimensional wave equation, 0 0
cubic and parabolic at a point x = y = 2. Equation). The first example with a forcing
Figure (1) shows that displacement for term, has a known exact solution. A number
various z values at various time interval. of problems which are generally encountered
in engineering are solved using present
method. Most of the problems have exact
solution. Therefore the results from present
method are compared with those from the
exact solution. In all the problems it may be
observed that present method results closely
agree with the exact solution.
Abstract: In the paper, the well known Novel technique is modified to solve the
parabolic equations. The present method is quite different than the numerical method.
The results are compared with the existing exact or analytical method. The already
known existing Novel techniqueis modified to improve the accuracy and convergence.
All physical interaction occurs between the mass elements only, and thus there is no
need for explicit handling of rigid-deformable or rigid-rigid body interaction. This
also means that bodies can be partially rigid and partially deformable. It is also
possible to change whether part of a body should be rigid or not dynamically. In this
paper presents many demonstration example, and also possible applications in
conceptual design engineering, geometric modeling, as well as computer
simulation.The Novel techniqueresults are found to diverge but using Novel technique
converge very quickly and are more accurate compared to numerical methods. The
Novel technique is quite efficient and is practically well suited for use in these
problems. Several examples are given to check the reliability of the present method.
The Novel technique is a non-numerical method which can be adapted for solving
parabolic equations. In the current paper, the principle of the decomposition method is
described, and its advantages are shown in the form of parabolic equations.
Keywords: Novel technique; Parabolic problems; Initial value problems;
Analytical solution; Computer simulation; Geometric modeling.
INTRODUCTION METHODOLOGY
A novel technique applied for solving Recently, Morawetz (1991) solved a first
continuous support bridge problems. In order nonlinear wave equation(NLWE)
problem differently and applied for wav
recent years the development of the high-
speed digital computer and increased interest equations only. The solution obtained by this
in continous and linear phenomena have led method is derived in the form of a power
to an intensive study of the numerical series with easily computable components.
The decomposition method requires that the
solution of ordinary and partial differential
equations. The innovative decomposition nonlinear operator F be separated into three
method is a non-numerical method for terms as follows: F = L+R+N where N is a
solving linear and nonlinear differential nonlinear operator and L + R together form
the linear term. Here L is chosen to be easily
equations, both ordinary and partial. The
general direction of the paper is towards invertible and R is the remainder of the linear
obtaining solution for ordinary and partial term. To convey the idea and for the sake of
differential equations (PDEs). completeness of the innovative
decomposition method, a three dimensional
time variant (x, y, z, t) equation is considered With the preceding assumptions on u and N,
as shown below, the Adomian series equations are solutions of
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + basic equation. Next it is required to find
𝑅(𝑢) = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) (1)Adomian polynomials of above equation,
Where 𝐿𝑥 , 𝐿𝑦 , 𝐿𝑧 , 𝐿𝑡 are 𝑛𝑡ℎ order derivative which are needed to derive a series of
operators. Solution for u is obtained after solutions of equation by Adomian iterative
operation w.r.t. x, procedure. Here it may be noted that 𝑢𝑛 is
absent in the series because 𝑁𝑛 depends up
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + on Adomian polynomial 𝐴𝑛−1 , i.e.
𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (2)𝑢0 , 𝑢1 , 𝑢2 , … , 𝑢𝑛−1 .
1 1 1 1
u1 = a2 xi L Ru 0 L Nu 0 = a2 xi L Ru0 L A0 , u2
2 2
Now pre-multiplication by 𝐿−1
𝑥 on both sides
for equation (2)
= a3 xi L1 Ru1 L1 Nu1 = a3 xi L1 Ru1 L1 A1 ,
3 3
⇒ 𝐿−1
𝑥 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝐿−1
𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡)
− 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + n 1
u = a x L1 Ru n 1 L1 Nu n 1 =
𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (3) n n 1 i
n 1
an 1 xi L1 Ru n 1 L1 An 1 ,
This equation 𝐿−1 𝑥 𝐿𝑥 is multiplication of
integration and differentiation of 𝑛𝑡ℎ order Adomian polynomials, in the next recursive
differential equation. Therefore it yields n steps, we obtain the nonlinear terms
constants, 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 ,, and 𝑎𝑛 . Nu 0 , Nu n are further decomposed with the
help of Adomian polynomials as,
⇒ 𝑢 = ′n′ constants + 𝐿−1𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) −
−1
𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (4)Nu0 = A0 , Nu1 = A1 , Nu n = An .
Therefore the 𝑛𝑡ℎ order equation is now one can rewrite the nonlinear equation in
the following form of
u = N (u ), (1)
⇒ 𝑢 = 𝑎1 + 𝑥𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑥 𝑛−1 𝑎𝑛 +
𝐿−1 −1 It is convenient to find the solution of
𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − 𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 +
𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) equation
(5) (1) in the series form such as,
939
Ramana
Table 1. Large Deflection positions for Celia and Andrade and McKee S 1977 High
Elastica Cantilever Beam accuracy A.D.I. method s for fourth order
parabolic equations with variable
PL2 Defl. y
Slope( ) Defl. x coefficients Journal of Computational
EI and Applied Mathematics 3(1) 11-14.
1 0.46135 0.95304 0.30394 Cherruault Y and Adomian G 1993
2 0.78175 0.84791 0.49696 Decomposition methods: a new proof of
3 0.98600 0.75335 0.60740 convergence Mathematical Computation
and Modeling 18 103-106.
4 1.12119 0.67826 0.67442
5 1.21527 0.61918 0.71841 Gabet L 1994 The Theoretical Foundation of
the Adomian Method Computers and
6 1.28355 0.57193 0.74928
Mathematics with Applications 27(12)
7 1.33478 0.53337 0.77213 41-52.
8 1.37427 0.50125 0.78980
Jishe F 2009 A New Two-step Method for
9 1.40542 0.47396 0.80397 Solving Nonlinear Equations
10 1.43048 0.45034 0.81568 International Journal of Nonlinear
11 1.45100 0.42952 0.82560 Science 8(1) 40-44.
12 1.46810 0.41084 0.83421 Morawetz 1991 The decay of solution of the
13 1.48255 0.39381 0.84181 exterior initial boundary value problem
for the wave equations.Pure Applied
14 -0.26246 0.75183 0.58046
mathematics 14 561–568.
15 -3.11967 0.08885 -0.43606
P V Ramana 2014 Modified Decomposition
PL2 Method for nonlinear Van Der Pol
For 14, it is unstable and results are
EI problems International Journal of
tabulated in table (1). nonlinear Mechanics Elsevier 12-36.
P V Ramana An Emerging technique for
REFERENCES Hyperbolic engg problems SEC 2014
Adomian G 1984 Convergent series solutions Delhi.
of nonlinear equations Computer and P V Ramana and B K Raghu Prasad 2012.
Application in Mathematic 11(2) 225- Novel techniquefor fracture of laminated
230. uni-directional composites Journal of
Biazar J 2008 He’s Homotopy Perturbation Springer 37 33-57.
Method for Solving Helmholtz Equation, Pai P F and Palazotto A N 1996 Large
International Journal of Contemporary deformation analysis of flexible beams
Mathematics Sciences 3(15) 739 - 744. International Journal of Solids Structures
Biazar J and Babolian E and Nouri A and 33(9) 1335-1353.
Islam R 2003 An alternate algorithm for Raymond H P and Surjani S and David A D
computing Modified Adomian 1999 Deflections and buckling of a bent
Decomposition Method in special cases elastica in contact with a flat surface
Applied Mathematical Computer International Journal of Solids and
Implementation 138 523-529. Structures 36 1209-1229.
Biazar J and Shafiof S M 2007 A Simple Yu T X and Johnson W 1982 The Plastica:
Algorithm for Calculating Adomian The large deflection of elastic-plastic
Polynomials International Journal of deflection of a strut International Journal
Contemporary Mathematical Sciences of Non-Linear Mechanics 17(3) 195-209.
2(20) 975 - 982.
940
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present paper presents a technique for solving ordinary and partial
differential equations (ODE & PDE) linear and nonlinear by an innovative method. The
innovative method consists of decomposing a given differential equation in to linear,
nonlinear and remainder terms. The method has been applied quite extensively by
mathematicians for various cases. However, engineering applications are not that many.
In the present paper solved many Eulers and Timoshenko beams, Kirchoffs lawas for
plate problems have been solved. While applying the method to a static beam and static
problem are observed that the solution with innovative one very close to numerical and
analytical solutions. An innovative method has been applied for linear equation beam
problems to improve the simplicity, accuracy and convergence of above mentioned
problems. The beam problems can easily solve with help of innovative method, which is
decomposion technique and semi-analytical method. The decomposition innovative
method results are found to converge very quickly and are more close to exact solution.
By introducing appropriate stiffness equations with numerical values representative of
material properties, boundary conditions, and loading, the innovative technique can be
developed to model specific structural systems. These equations are mutually dependent
and may be solved using the iteration techniques that are part of the innovative technique.
A common structural problem that is difficult to solve without a special computer
program is the analysis of a slab and plate arbitrarily supported on elastic beams and
columns. The use of the innovative technique to solve this problem is demonstrated.
Equations for plate and slab bending and for beams with finite flexural and torsional
stiffness’s are derived using finite element and difference methods. These equations are
then recast into a form more convenient for an iterative solution. The use of these
equations is demonstrated with numerical examples.
Keywords: Innovative technique, convergence criteria, Eulers beam, Timoshenko
beam, Kirchoffs plate, Finite Difference, Finite Element Method.
___________________________
Abstract: The complex phenomena of flow and transport through porous media are
often simulated using mathematical models governed by set of equations which are
solved using either analytical or numerical methods.While attempting most of the
industrial or real field problems, porous media flow modeling is dominated by the
finite difference (FDM) and finite element (FEM)methods. This is due to the
robustness of current commercial codes available and their convenient usage through
Graphical user interfaces (GUI) for input and output for the system analysis under
given conditions. As hydro-geologists and researchers try to analyze even larger
systems under more complex conditions, the difficulties associated withgrid based
numerical methods like FDM and FEM become of greater significance.Few
shortcomings like, high costs in meshing and re-meshing, difficulty in adaptive
analysis and deformation can be dealt using latest developed Meshless methods.
These techniques are widely researched from past two decades and are yet to be
commercialized. The present paper attempts to review recent developments and
applications of meshless methods like EFG, PCM, RBF and with additional focus on
MLPG to various cases of porous media modeling applications like flow, solute
transport, contamination remediation, inverse modeling, management problems. In
meshless methods, some issues like computational cost, application of essential
boundary conditions, shape parameter analysisetc are to be dealt accordingly based
onthe problem to be solved. However, good accuracies, low cost to prepare input data,
ability to tackle system locally or globally lead to the successful application of these
Meshless methods.
Keywords: Porous media flow; transport process; Meshless methods.
equations in the matrix form to solve is of the like no mesh generation and ease of adaptive
form Swathi and Eldho (2014). analysis which plays a significant role.
� 𝒕+𝟏 � = 𝒇
𝐊�𝒉 (3) REFERENCES
To demonstrate the model application, a Alhuri Y Ouazar D and Taik A 2011
hypothetical confined aquifer (saturated Comparison between local and global
porous media) example is considered. The Meshfree methods for groundwater
aquifer is 1000 m x 1000 m with two wells modeling International Journal of
(one pumping and one injection)with Computer Science Issues 8 (2) 337-342.
impervious boundaries. The transmissivity Atluri S N 2005 Meshless method (MLPG)
and storage coefficient of the aquifer are for domain and BIE discretizations
taken75 m2/day and 0.001, respectively. The Forsyth: Tech Science Press.
aquifer is initially at a steady state condition
Bear J 1979 Hydraulics of Groundwater.
with piezometric head equal to 100 m
McGraw Hill Publishing New York.
throughout the aquifer. A pumping well,
extracting and injection of8000 m3/day is Ciftci E Avci C B Borekci O S Sahin A U
located in the aquifer. The Western and 2012 Assessment of advective–
Eastern boundaries are constant head dispersive contaminant transport in
boundaries with values of 100 m and 100 m, heterogeneous aquifers using a meshless
respectively. Northern and Southern method Environmental Earth Sciences
boundaries are no flow boundaries. The head 67(8)2399–2409.
variation in the aqufier at the end of 100 Kumar P RandDodagoudarGR2008Two-
dayswith 1 day time step and compared with dimensional Modeling of Contaminant
FDM and FEM solutions.From the results, Transport through Saturated Porous
present MLPG technique gave quiet Media using the Radial Point
promising results and can be used very well Interpolation Method (RPIM).
for solving the various problems that are Hydrogeology Journal 16 (8)1497-1505.
related to groundwater modeling. Kumar P R and Dodagoudar G R
2010Modelling of contaminant transport
CONCLUSION through landfill liners using EFGM,
In this paper, an effort has been made to International Journal for Numerical and
present different meshless methods and their Analytical Methods in Geomechanics 34
applications in the field of porous median 661–688.
modeling and also highlight the application Li J Chen Y and Pepper D 2003Radial Basis
of meshless local Petrov-Galerkin (MLPG) Function Method for 1-D and 2-D
method for a typical groundwater flow Groundwater Computational Mechanics
problem. Meshless methods have the 32 10-15.
potential to out-perform finite element Li Z and Mao Xian-zhong 2011 Global
methods in the future, if few shortcomings multiquadric collocation method for
are addressed. Many more researchers from groundwater contaminant source
wider computational mechanics community identification Environmental Modelling
are attempting to solve different engineering and Software 26(12) 1611–1621.
problems as these methods bringadvantages
944
Boddula and Eldho
945
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper, the Solutions of linear and nonlinear partial differential
equations are found using an extended Maclaurin series form of the decomposition
method and developing the nonlinear polynomials. Using novel technique solve
either two dimensional problems or three dimensional problems, the procedure is
unique, similarly solve either static problems or dynamic problems, the procedure is
unique. Consider the solution of partial differential equations for initial/boundary
conditions using the decomposition method. The partial solutions obtained from the
separate equations for the highest-ordered linear operator terms are shown to be
identical when the boundary conditions are general and asymptotically equal when the
boundary conditions in one independent variable are independent of other variables.
This work considers the partial solutions of partial differential equations for
initial/boundary conditions using the Novel technique. The study formally shows that
the partial solutions are always identical for all styles of boundary conditions or initial
conditions. It’s also prove that the partial solution in the space (i.e. x, y, z) or t-
direction requires less computational work if compared with other partial solutions
developed in any space variable direction. In addition, several mathematical models
that govern the heat distribution and the wave propagation phenomena’s have been
tested, and the results obtained have shown that the t-solution minimizes the size of
calculations if compared with the traditional techniques.
Keywords: Equality of Partial Solutions; Novel technique; Numerical solution;
Two & Three Dimensional Problems; Simulation.
947
The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations using Novel Technique
equation is,
𝜕2 𝑢
+
𝜕2 𝑢
= 0 (0<x<1 𝑢 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 2 + 6𝑦𝑥 2 −
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝑥4
and 0<y<1) …..(4) 𝑦𝑥 4 + − 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢)
2
The boundary conditions are,
𝑢0 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 2 +
u (x=0 , y) = - 𝑦 3 ,
𝑥4
u (x=1 , y) = - 𝑦 3 + 3𝑦 2 , 6𝑦𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑥 4 + ,
2
In the emerging decomposition method 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑢0 𝑖𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
procedure, above equation(9) can be written
as, Using Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditions
𝜕2 𝜕2
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 = 0 , where 𝐿𝑥 = , 𝐿𝑦 = , one can determine the unknown constants a =
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
5
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = −𝐿𝑦 𝑢 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 , b = − 5𝑦
2
−1 −1
(𝐿𝑥 𝑢) = −𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿𝑥 = 5
∫ ∫ 𝑓(𝑥) 𝜕𝑥 𝑢0 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 + ( − 5𝑦 )𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 +
2
𝑢 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 𝐿−1 𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) & 𝑢0 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 , 𝑥4
3𝑦 𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 6𝑦𝑥 − 𝑦𝑥 4 +
2 2 2 2
, now 𝑢1 =
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑢0 𝑖𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 2
−1
−𝐿𝑥can
Using Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditions one (𝐿𝑦determine
𝑢0 ) , the unknown
constants 1
a = - 𝑦 3 , b = 3𝑦 2 𝑢1 = −6𝑦𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑥 2 − 𝑥 4 , now
2
𝑢0 = − 𝑦 3 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 − 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) , now
𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1
𝑢1 = −𝐿−1 𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢0 ),
5
𝑢1 = − ∫ ∫(𝐿𝑦 𝑢0 ) 𝑢 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 + 𝑥 − 5𝑥𝑦 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 +
2
𝑢1 = −𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 𝑦 , now 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2 ,
𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1
𝑢 = −(𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 ) + 3𝑥𝑦(𝑥 + 𝑦) Exact (Analytical) Solution:
Exact (Analytical) Solution:
𝑢 = −(𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 ) + 3𝑥𝑦(𝑥 + 𝑦) 𝑢 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2
949
The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations using Novel Technique
Aluru N 2000 A point collocation method Noor M A and Tirmizi S I 1986 Numerical
based on reproducing kernel methods for unilateral problems Journal
approximations International Journal of Computational Appl & Maths 16
for Numerical Methods in Engineering 387-395.
47 1083–1121. Noor M A and Tirmizi S I 1991 Numerical
Reddy J N 1995 An Introduction to the Finite methods for a class of contact problems,
Element Method. McGraw Hill International Journal of Engg Sc 29
Noor and Jian-Lin Li 2009 Adomian's 513-521.
decomposition method and homotopy Ramana P V Raghu Prasad B K 2012 Novel
perturbation method in solving techniquefor fracture of laminated uni-
nonlinear equations Journal of direction comp. Journal of Springer 37
Computational and Applied 33-57.
Mathematics 228(1) 168-173.
P V Ramana 2014 An Emerging technique
Noor M A and Al-Said E A 2000 Numerical for Hyperbolic engg problems SEC
solutions of fourth order variational Delhi.
inequalities International Journal of
Repaci A 1990 Nonlinear dynamical
Computational Mathematics 75 107-
systems: on accuracy of Adomian's
116.
decomposit method Applied Math Lit 3
35-39.
950
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
EXPERIMENTAL WORK
Figure 1. Boundary conditions Drilling operation is carried out using CNC
vertical milling machine on brass and mild
In this work, brass and mild steel work pieces steel metal specimens with 3mm HSS drill
are drilled using high speed steel drill bit. bit under same operating conditions. The
The feed rate 0.1 mm/rev is given as linear feed rate used is 0.1 mm/revolution with a
velocity and cutting speed 1000 rpm is spindle speed of 1000 rpm. The forces are
applied as angular velocity. The chips
measured using Kistler force dynamometer.
removal as a result of drilling operation is
specified using displacement in direction
along the drill bit. The material properties RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
used in analysis is listed in Table 1. The The forces from experiments are compared
equivalent stress during simulation of drilling with finite element method results. Here F X
process is shown in Figure 2. The drilling and F Y are found negligible in both cases due
simulation is done for two workpiece and to the workpiece is fixed and the drill bit is
contact reaction forces were obtained.
given only translational and rotational motion
in single axis only.
952
A Three Dimensional Finite Element Modelling and Analysis of metal drilling
REFERENCES
Guo Y B and Dornfeld D A 2000 Finite
element modeling of burr formation
process in drilling 304 stainless steel
Journal of manufacturing science and
engineering 122(4) 612-619
Mackerle J 1999 Finite-element analysis and
simulation of machining: a bibliography
(1976–1996) Journal of Materials
Processing Technology 86(1) 17-44
Merchant M E 1944 Basic mechanics of the
metal cutting process Journal of Applied
Mechanics 11(A) 168-175
Moneim M E A 1981 Effect of drilling speed
on the required torque and thrust force
for non-ferrous materials Wear 66(1)
65-75
Oxford Jr. C J 1955 On the drilling of metals
1: basic mechanics of the process
Transactions of ASME 77(2) 103-111
Pal A K Bhattacharyy A and Sen G C 1965
Investigation of the torque in drilling
954
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
material has been treated with chemical Therefore it is necessary to predict the fatigue
treatment to improve its surface [Sung-Hoon life of mould. Transient temperature and
et al. 2004]. Some of the consideration pressure conditions involved in the moulding
involved in the implementation of such a process use two types of analyses i.e. thermal
program include; 1) Use of an appropriate analysis & mechanical stress analysis
material model. 2) Unstructured mesh. 3) u s i n g A N S Y S software. Further fatigue
Thermal-mechanical contact. 4) analysis is carried to get the final life of ABS
Implementation for mould filling and mould.
solidification. 5) Fatigue life prediction.
(A) BOUNDARY CONDITIONS FOR
METHODOLOGY WAX PATTERNS THROUGH FDM ABS
MOULDS
In this process, the wax patterns are produced
using the case study of “Fork” of direct I. Pouring (initial) conditions (At open
tooling. The initial conditions are room condition): Pouring time: 1 minute
atmospheric conditions since the wax pouring = 60 Sec, Pressure, 1atm = 0.10132 Mpa
(14.6959 psi), Initial temperature: 27ºC,
is performed under gravity into the mould
Final temperature = 70ºC.
cavity. The temperature of the mould is II. Under pressure conditions (Inside a
therefore, considered at 27°C as the pressure pressure vessel under air pressure):
is atmospheric (1atm) and the pouring Settling time: 90 min = 5400 Sec,
temperature is 70°C. Wax pouring is carried Pressure = 0.44815Mpa (65psi), Initial
out under gravity flow for about 1 minute at temp: 70ºC, Final temp: 40ºC
these conditions. At this stage temperature of III. Curing (final) conditions: (At open room
wax inside the mould temperature is 70°C condition): Settling time: 120 min =
7200 Sec, Pressure = 0.10132 Mpa
and pressure is atmospheric. After filling the
(1atm), Initial temp: 40ºC, Final temp:
mould cavity fully with wax material the 27ºC.
mould assembly is kept inside a pressure
vessel for uniform solidification of wax (B) MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF ABS
inside the mould cavity, which has a MOULDS
regulated air pressure of 65psi for 90 min. as In order to simulate ABS mould, mechanical
per the industry standard. This will ensure properties of ABS mould have been adopted
proper solidification of wax material without in ANSYS. In ABS mould all the parameters
any blow holes caused due to air trap while and functions are temperature dependent
pouring the wax material into the cavity. (Sung-Hoon et al. 2004).
During this period of solidification of the
wax the temperature falls to 40°C. After the
solidification, the assembly of mould is taken
out and placed again in the room conditions
for 120 min. at atmospheric (1atm) pressure.
After 120 min. the wax pattern can be taken
out easily from the mould. This process is
repeated for production of each pattern. Due
to repetition of this process the mould cavity
is subjected to different conditions of filling,
solidification phases. As the fatigue stresses Figure 1. CAD model of ‘Fork’ mould
are generated in the mould, it may fail.
956
Fatigue Analysis of ABS Mould
958
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
960
Finite element simulation of PWT induced guided wave modes in isotropic cylindrical shells
REFERENCES
Giurgiutiu V and L Yu 2004 Embedded
ultrasonic structural radar with
piezoelectric wafer active sensors for
damage detection in cylindrical shell
structures, AIAA.
Gresil M., Giurgiutiu V, Shen Y and Poddar
Figure 8.Experimental setup. B 2012 Guidelines for using the finite
element method for modelling guided
Group velocity dispersion curve plotted (as a Lamb wave propagation in SHM
function of frequency) and is shown in Figure 9. processes, 6th European Workshop on
It is clear from the dispersion plot that the group Structural Health Monitoring.
velocities estimated from experimental, and Muc Aand Stawiarski A2011 Modeling
numerical methods are closely matchin damage in cylindrical shells using
elastic wave based techniques, 18th
international conference on
composite materials.
Park H.W., Sohn H., Law K.H. and Farrar
C.R. 2007 Time reversal active
sensing for health monitoring of a
composite plate,Journal of sound and
vibration.
.
Figure 9.Group velocity dispersion plot.
962
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
964
A Computer Numerical Simulation Study between System Level and Component Level Model of a System
Under Design
channel geometry between a pair of fins of and diffusive terms. Heat transfer
the heat sink assembly is shown in Figure2. correlations for forced air convection as
The boundary conditions for the pressure, defined in Teertstra et al., 2000 are also
velocity and temperature assigned to each incorporated into the solver code.
boundary face is given in Table 1. Here u, v
and w denote the components of velocity
along X, Y and Z coordinate axes
respectively. OpenFOAM solver employed is
icoFoam which is used to compute transient
incompressible laminar flow. This solver
code is further modified to additionally solve
Figure2.Computationalgeometry
for energy equation considering convective
965
Hariram Shanmuganathan
REFERENCES
Andersson C2013 A Software Framework for
Figure 4. Heat transfer from CFD model Implementation and Evaluation of Co-
Simulation Algorithms Licentiate
Theses in Mathematical Sciences
Faculty of Engineering- Lund
University.
Bar Cohen A and Iyengar M 2002 Design
and optimization of air-cooled heat sinks
for sustainable development
Components and Packaging
Technologies IEEE Transactions 25(4)
584-591.
Figure 5. Heat sink temperatures from Teertstra P Yovanovich N M and Culham J R
System model 2000 Analytical Forced Convection
Modelling of Plate Fin Heat Sinks
CONCLUSION Journal of Electronics Manufacturing
A qualitative study of the co-simulation 10(4) 253-261.
between system level and CFD models is Viel A 2011 Strong Coupling of Modelica
reported here. These studies have shown the System-Level Models with Detailed
advantages of coupling the different CFD Models for Transient Simulation of
simulation model environments for system Hydraulic Components in their
design and optimization environment. The Surrounding Environment Proceedings
subsystems modelled in this system level of the 8th International Modelica
model are quite simple. However, the Conference Technical University
complexity of these subsystems can be Dresden Germany March 2011.
increased by considering different
966
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The factors affecting on engine timing chain system majorly affects the
working life of the engine. The main aim of this project is to reduce failure and
optimize the design of engine timing chain system. The factors like Chain speed,
chain pitch, camshaft and crankshaft revolutions and number of teeth on sprockets
includes in the design of the timing system. The optimization of the selected
parameters is carried out using statistical simulation, and increase life of the engine.
The minimum amount of vibration was achieved which led to smoothness of the
drive.
Keywords: Timing chain; Failures; Simulation; Factors; Optimize
camshaft at half the rotation speed of the higher performance than the chains being
crankshafts. used up now. They also transfer the same
• Orange chain is driving the balance amount of torque with thinner chain.
shafts. The existing down gearing drives For optimum guiding and tension of then
the balance shafts at twice the rotation of chains several polyamide plastic guides and
the crankshaft. three tensioners have been used:
• Blue chain is driving the oil pump as per • A hydraulic tensioner is driving the
figure 3. camshafts. To remove it we need to lock
the tensioner piston by using special tool.
• A mechanical tensioner is driving the
balance shafts. The tensioner is screwed
onto the block and lubricated with oil. A
mechanical tensioner is driving the oil
pump. Special tool T40011 has to be
used for locking it.
• A timing rotor for the camshaft position
sensor is provided at each back end of
the intake and exhaust camshafts. The
Figure 2.Winder Velocity Profile
chain tensioner uses spring and oil
pressure to maintain proper tension at all
times.
The chain tensioner reduces noise generated
by the timing chain. The chain tensioner is
ratchet type with non-return mechanism. To
achieve excellent Serviceability, the chain
tensioner is constructed such that it can be
removed and installed from outside of the
timing chain cover.
Where,
𝑇1 = Number of teeth on driving sprocket
𝑇2 = Number of teeth on driven sprocket
𝑥 = centre distance between driver and driven
sprocket
𝑝 = pitch of the chain
𝐶𝑐 = centre distance between driven sprockets
Using formula of chain length graphical
representation of relation between Chain
length (L) and Number of teeth (𝑇1 ) is shown Figure 4. Graphical Representation
in figure 4. Between Chain Length and Number of
Teeth
969
Abhijeet Shinde
970
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: We present novel algorithms for the numerical simulation of free and
moving boundary problems using finite element methods. We address the key
challenge of how to accommodate evolving boundaries without resorting to expensive
remeshing operations. To this end, we first describe an algorithm that recovers
triangulations conforming to moving boundaries by merely perturbing vertices in a
given background mesh while retaining the same connectivity. The algorithm relies
on a novel parameterization of the boundary over select faces of the background mesh
and is guaranteed to be robust with nominal restrictions on the meshsize and angles of
the background mesh, and smoothness of the boundary. Noting that there are no
conformity requirements on the background mesh, an evolving domain can be
triangulated by immersing it in the same background mesh, at least until the boundary
develops new features. Second, we discuss a new optimization-based directional
vertex relaxation algorithm to iteratively improve the qualities of meshes by
perturbing its vertices along prescribed directions. A distinguishing feature of the
algorithm is that the quality of the mesh is guaranteed to improve with each vertex
perturbation. We demonstrate the performance of the proposed algorithms with
numerous applications, including luid structure interactions, phase transformations,
finite deformation nonlinear elasticity and quasi-static crack propagation.
Keywords: universal meshes; directional vertex relaxation; r-adaptivity.
UNIVERSAL MESHES
We explain an algorithm for mapping a
background mesh to a boundary-fitting one
with the aid of the example in Figure 2,
where a circular domain is immersed in a
nonconforming mesh of triangles. We
emphasize that the algorithm applies
verbatim to meshing three dimensional Figure 2.Conforming mesh recovery (2D)
domains immersed in nonconforming meshes
of tetrahedra.
972
Algorithms for Free and Moving Boundary Problems
i. Identify triangles with at least one vertex vicinity of the boundary are all acute angled.
inside the domain. These are the triangles Or even simpler, by adopting background
shaded in red. meshes with all acute-angled elements. We
ii. Map the bounding edges of the identified term a background mesh as a universal mesh
collection of elements (in black) onto the for the family of domains it can be used to
boundary of the domain, using the closest triangulate. The result proved in [2013] also
point projection. provides reasonable estimates for the
iii. Relax some of the vertices lying inside the refinement required in the background mesh
domain away from the boundary. depending on the curvatures and feature sizes
Deliberate choices lie behind the simplicity of the boundary. Such estimates are crucial in
of the algorithm. First is the choice of edges automating the algorithm– background
(faces in 3D) mapped onto the boundary. meshes can be refined as and where needed,
Second is the choice of the closest point by inspecting the details of the immersed
projection to map the chosen edges onto the boundary.
boundary. Observe that with these choices, it
is easy to construct pairs of background DIRECTIONAL VERTEX
meshes and domain boundaries for which the RELAXATION
above algorithm yields tangled meshes.
Indeed, the algorithm is not even well defined While the algorithm described in Section 2
when the closest point projection to the yields an admissible boundary-fitting mesh, it
boundary becomes multi-valued. is essential to improve the qualities of
perturbed elements for use in finite element
To guarantee the robustness of the algorithm, computations. Hence we seek an algorithm
it is imperative to concurrently restrict the that holds vertices along the boundary fixed
families of domains and background meshes. and perturbs some of the remaining ones to
In [2013], we rigorously demonstrated improve the qualities of elements in the
sufficient conditions for the closest point mesh. Here again, there is a plethora of
projection to parameterize the boundary over methods in the literature but few with any
the collection of identified edges: (a) the meaningful guarantees.
domain should be C2-regular, (b) the
background mesh should be sufficiently We propose an optimization-based algorithm
refined in the vicinity of the boundary, and that guarantees improvement in the quality of
(c) elements of the background mesh with the mesh with each vertex perturbation. First
precisely one vertex inside the domain should we identify the set of vertices to be relaxed
be strictly acute-angled. and prescribe a relaxation direction d(vi) for
each such vertex vi. In our case, we choose
Conditions (a) and (b) ensure that the closest vertices in a small neighborhood of the
point projection is well defined over the boundary and the relaxation direction to be
edges/faces chosen in the algorithm. along the local normal. Let {Ki}i denote the
Condition (c) is the crucial link between the set of elements incident at vi. Denote the
boundary and the background mesh. It plays quality of Ki when vi is perturbed to vi +
a key role in ensuring that the closest point d(vi) by Qi(.
projection is in fact a homeomorphism from i. Loop over the set of vertices being
the edges/faces chosen on the background relaxed
mesh to the boundary. It is worth ii. At each vertexvi, compute
emphasizing that condition (c) is easily
satisfied in pratice by ensuring for instance,
that elements of the background mesh in the iii. Perturb vi to vi + optd(vi)
973
Rangarajan R.
REFERENCES
Rangarajan R Chiaramonte M Hunsweck M
Figure 4. Simulation of flow induced by a Shen Y Lew A 2015 Simulating
rotating propeller. curvilinear crack propagation in two
dimensions with universal meshes Int J.
The equations for Stokes flow are solved
Num. Meth. Engng. 102 632-670.
using meshes computed for the changing
fluid geometry while using a fixed Rangarajan R Lew A 2013 Analysis of a
background mesh. Such simulations are method to parameterize planar curves
challenging with Arbitrary Lagrangian- immersed in triangulationsSIAM J. on
Eulerian (ALE) methods due to the large Num. Anal. 511 392-1420.
mesh deformations required, but are easily Rangarajan R Lew A 2014 Universal Meshes
performed with universal meshes. A method for triangulating planar curves
The key computation in the algorithm is the immersed in nonconforming meshes Int. J.
resolution of the nonsmooth scalar max-min Num. Meth. Engng 98 236-264.
problem, for which we have identified robust
and efficient methods with no heuristics. At
the outset, it is not clear whether the
algorithm converges, and when it does, in
what sense the limiting mesh is optimal. We
have some useful results to address these
questions and will announce them in the near
future.
974
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Flab slab optimization using genetic algorithm based on survival fitest is
worked out using various trial error based thickness criterion. An initiation of main
depth has been taken from two way shear based on IS 456-2002 using necessary
guidelines. Matlab has been extremely explored for prepraing GUI based
programming which enables us giving input deta at front end. Material property and
perticular corner column is selected for further design and optimization procedure.
The mathematical curve of shape profile for the flat slab is initiated mathematically
which gives corrolary idea of an angle section with prisamtic shape throughout. By
modifying proper mathematical order of curvature based criterion each thickness are
optimized with number of cycles. Safety and servicibililty of regular design criterion
also fully checked for each optimized depth. The prime criterion to optimize the
mimumum cost and weight design of optimied depth. The overall economy has been
observed during calculation, which provides numerous advatages in overall way.
Systematic combination of mathematical based thickness optimization with necessary
Matalab based GUI programming technique has beeen fully utilized in the present
work.
Keywords: Genetic Algorithm; Flats slab; Minimum Cost; Matlab.
Most efficient design of simply supported A typical flat slab middle panel is considered
slab is obtained by using Genetic algorithm at and designed by Using Direct Design Method
l/d ratio =29-30, gives us the optimum cost as per IS 456:2000 and results are noted.
for our considerations.M20 and fy 500 to be Then optimization of drop panel and column
head is carried out using Genetic Algorithm
used for the optimum results. [Hatindera Singh1,
inbuilt function in MATLAB 2013R.
Hardeep Singh Rai2, Jagbir Singh3].
Optimization is carried out varying various
Maximum cost savings of 33.91% over the
parameters like finding most appropriate
conventional design is achieved in case of flat
slab with drop panel at M20 and fe415 [Kiran S. 1)Column spacing in X and Y direction.
Patil, N. G. Gore, P. J. Salunke]. 2) Column spacing in any of one direction.
977
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present paper, the key objective optimization on shell and tube heat
exchanger is based on minimization of modified entropy generation. The optimization
is carried out by using bat algorithm. Bats are the only mammals with wings and their
behaviour is based on the echolocation, which is helpful for them to detect prey, avoid
obstacles, and locate their roosting crevices in the dark. The various design
parameters are tube length, tube diameter, pitch size, baffle spacing’s, number of
tubes. The results are reported and compared with previous literature. It is found that
irreversibility loss is decreased as the effectiveness increases due to which the total
cost decreases. Bat algorithm takes much less time to converge as the number of
iterations required is small.
Keywords: Bat algorithm; heat exchanger; entropy generation.
979
Optimization of Sell and Tube Heat Exchangers by Minimizing the Entropy Generation using Bat
Algorithm
Table 2.Parameters of the optimal shell and tube exchangers for a case study
BA
Original GA BBO CSA
Present
design [Caputo et al., 2008] [Hadidi et al., 2013] [Masoud et al., 2014]
work
Ds (m) 0.894 0.830 0.801 0.826 0.875
L (m) 4.830 3.379 2.040 2.332 1.52
B (m) 0.356 0.500 0.500 0.414 0.4681
do (m) 0.020 0.016 0.010 0.0151 0.017
Nt 918 1567 3587 1754 1325
ht (W/m2 K) 3812 3762 4314 6104 3516
𝛥Pt (Pa) 6251 4298 6156 4186 2986
hs (W/m2 K) 1573 1740 2197 2083 1667
𝛥Ps (Pa) 35789 13267 13799 22534 5981
U (W/m2 K) 615 660 755 848.2 637
S (m2) 278.6 262.8 229.95 209.1 272
Ci (€) 51,507 49,259 44,536 40,343 50604
Co (€/yr) 2111 947 984 1174 449
CoD (€) 12973 5818 6046 7281 2764
Ctot (€) 64480 55077 50582 47625 53369
ε (%) -- -- -- -- 54.69
Smod_ent -- -- -- -- 0.4042
REFERENCES
Figure.3. Convergence of BA for the A C Caputo P M Pelagagge P Salini2008
case study Heat exchanger design based on
economic optimization Applied Thermal
The variation of total cost with the modified Engineering 28 1151-1159.
entropy generation number is complicated
Amin Hadidi Ali Nazari 2013 Design and
as shown in Figure.2, but the overall trend
economic optimization of shell-and-tube
is that the cost decreases with reduction in
heat exchangers using biogeography-
modified entropy. Further, the reduction of
980
Tharakeshwaret al.
981
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
METHODOLOGY
The governing equation in exterior acoustics
considering time harmonic is the Helmholtz
Figure 1. Domain truncation using PML
equation where a potential is normally
considered as the scalar variable from which Problem: Find C 2 ( D A ) such
other variables of interest like pressure and that
velocity can be derived.
ˆ k 2 0 in Ω
C 2 ( D ) g
Problem: Find such that D
k 0 in D
2
(1) n g
N
g (2) ˆ n
n (5)
D
O O
n g (3)
N
O O
lim
r n
ik O
1
r
(4) 0
A
i
where x 1 x L ; y
Equation (4) represents the Sommer field k a x
condition at ∞ which is required for
i
modelling only outgoing waves. As an 1 y W and unity elsewhere.
infinite domain is not possible for k b y
computation purpose, a finite domain with an
Finite Dimensional Weak Form:
artificial boundary O is considered as shown
Find h such that h S h where S S
h
in figure 1. This is commonly known as mesh
truncation. H and V where
1
D g
h h
983
Computational Performance of Isogeometric Analysis in Exterior Acoustics Using PML
h L
Here, p is the degree of the piecewise Error 2 D
L2 D
parametric polynomial over , i is the
w (10)
corresponding weights of the basis due to RADIATION FROM AN OSCILLATING
geometry and p is the B-Spline basis
Ni CYLINDER
defined over a non-decreasing set An unit cylinder cylinder oscillating in its
0 , 1 , 2 ,..., i ,... , n p , n p 1
given as
first mode is considered. The domain is
truncated at L 5 units along x-axis and
1 ,if i , i+1
Ni0 = W 5 units along y-axis. The convergence
0 ,otherwise graph is shown in figure 2b.
i
N ip N ip 1
i n i
i n 1
N ip 1 (8)
i n 1 i 1
After simplifications, equation 6 is written as
Kij k 2 M ij j Fi (9)
where
y Rip R jp x Rip R jp
Kij
x x x y x x
d
(a) Directivity along N
h
M ij x y Rip R jp d
h
Fi R gd
p
i
N
NUMERICAL RESULTS
Two cases are considered to show the
performance. In all the cases, wave number,
𝑘 = 2 𝜋 is considered and quadratic (b) Convergence plot
polynomial is used. The mesh in both the Figure 2. Solution of an oscillating
cases is made by equal division along radial cylinder in first mode
direction and different divisions but even
SCATTERING OF PLANE WAVE BY A
distributions along θ-directions to achieve RIGID CYLINDER
same number of degrees of freedom in IGA
and FEM. A PML layer of thickness 1.5 units A plane wave travelling along x-axis is
with 10 elements in FEM and 10 knot spans incident on a rigid cylinder of unit radius.
The domain is truncated at L = 5 units along
984
Dinachandra and Sethuraman
x-axis and W=5 units along y-axis. The provides a better alternative to FEM for
convergence graph is shown in figure 3b. exterior acoustics problems.
It is observed that IGA solution is much REFERENCES
closer to the analytical solutions than FEM
solutions from figure 2a and 3a for a fixed Bermudez A Hervella-Nieto L Prieto A and
degrees of freedom with same polynomial Rodriguez R 2007 An optimal perfectly
degree. And moreover based on the matched layer with unbounded
convergence plot shown, it is observed that absorbing function for time-harmonic
higher regularity IGA convergence is better acoustic scattering problems Journal of
than conventional FEM. Computational Physics 223 469-488
Cottrell J A Reali A Bazilevs Y and Hughes
T J R 2006 Isogeometric analysis of
structural vibrations Comput. Methods
Appl. Mech. Engrg. 195 5257-5296
Haijun Wu Wenjing Ye and Weikang Jiang
2015 Isogeometric finite element
analysis of interior acoustic problems
Applied Acoustics 100 63-73
Hughes T J R Cottrell J A and Bazilevs Y
2005 Isogeometric analysis: CAD finite
(a) Directivity along N elements NURBS exact geometry and
mesh refinement Comput. Methods
Appl. Mech. Engrg. 194 4135-4195
Laghrouche O and Bettess P 2000 Short
wave modelling using special finite
elements J. Comp. Acous. 8 189-210
Melenk J M and Babuška I 1996 The
partition of unity finite element method:
Basic theory and applications Comput.
Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg. 139 289-
314
(b) Convergence plot
Figure 3. Solution of scattering of a Peake M J Trevelyan J and Coates G 2015
plane wave by a rigid cylinder Extended isogeometric boundary
element method (XIBEM) for three-
CONCLUSION dimensional medium-wave acoustic
scattering problems Comput. Methods
The performance of IGA for exterior
Appl. Mech. Engrg. 284 762-780
acoustics is compared with conventional C 0
FEM. It is observed that the IGA gives better Simpson R N Bordas S P A Trevelyan J and
accuracy compared to FEM for the same Rabczuk T 2012 A two-dimensional
number of degrees of freedom in the isogeometric boundary element method
considered cases. The C p k continuity of the for elastostatic analysis Comput.
NURBS basis where p and k are the degree Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg. 209-212
and knot multiplicity, makes it more efficient 87-100
and its effect can be seen more clearly in
highly oscillatory problems as considered in
this paper. It can be concluded that IGA
985
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
987
A Study on the Behaviour of the Basis Functions in Differential Quadrature Method for Elasto-Static
Problems
wi N i , p (t ) ∂ 2u ∂ 2v ∂ 2u
Ri , p (t ) = (10) C1 + C + C =
0
∂x 2 ∂x∂y ∂y 2
n
∑w N
2 3
i i, p (t )
i =1 ∂ 2v ∂ 2u ∂ 2v
C3 + C + C =0
∂x 2 2
∂x∂y 3
∂y 2
BASIS FUNCTIONS USED FOR
E (1 −ν )
REPRESENTING GEOMETRY C1 = , (11)
(1 +ν )(1 − 2ν )
In DQM Lagrangian polynomials are used to E E
represent the geometry, but Lagrangian C2 = C3 = ,
2(1 +ν )(1 − 2ν ) 2(1 +ν )
polynomials can’t represent the conic shapes
exactly. On the other hand NURBS basis can u and v are the displacements along x and
represent the conic shapes exactly. Since the y directions, E and ν are the Young’s
theory and application of the NURBS basis is modulus and Poisson’s ratio which are taken
cumbersome, one can represent the conic as 21000 N/m2 and 0 respectively. P P
on CD, u = 0, T y = 0;
BASIS FUNCTIONS USED FOR
R R
To approximate the solution, the Localized where, T x and T y are the traction forces along
R R R R
Lagrangian and NURBS bases are used. The the x and y directions, P is the pressure
shape functions of the Localized Lagrangian
basis can be written explicitly and the applied on DA, θ is the angle made by the
derivatives are evaluated directly, whereas line joining centre and points along DA with
using NURBS basis functions, the derivative x -axis. The internal pressure (P) is 10 N/m2. P P
cannot be obtained explicitly. For Localized The inner radius (r 1 ) and outer radius (r 2 ) are R R R R
CASE STUDY
988
Durga Rao and Sethuraman
REFERENCES
989
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present work, algebraic methods are used to generate multi-block
structured grid over various rocket models viz. core alone rocket, rocket with two and
four fins, rocket with two, four and six Strapons. The grid data is written in
multiblock plot3d format so that the grid can be used by any standard commercial
CFD codes. Flow field visualization for one example case is also presented. It is
demonstrated that structured grid over any complex rocket models can be created
using algebraic techniques and plot3d output format.
Keywords: Rocket model; Fin; Strapon; Structured grid; Multi-block; Algebraic
techniques and Plot3d format.
REFERENCES
Figure 1. Rocket-1: Two-block grid over a core alone Rocket model (sounding
rocket) with base
(a) Front view showing 3 blocks (b) Enlarged sectional view across the
fins showing 4 blocks
Figure 2. Rocket-2: Seven-block grid over the Rocket model with 4 fins
992
Kumaravel and Unnikrishnan
(b) Mach contours and (c) Pressure contours over the fins
Figure 3. Numerical simulation of flow over the Rocket model at M = 4, α = 13.50
993
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1,
Figure 1. Geometry
995
Effect of Centre Distance Variation on Performance of Spur Gear
stress during bending but it has almost zero Also the adequate lubrication has to be
residual stress which leads to more spring provided for avoiding surface scratches on
back. For friction µs = 0.125 the residual specimen. For these the contact friction needs
stress increased drastically which reduces to be considered while simulating spring back
spring back effect. For friction µs = 0.225 analysis. The different solvers use different
the residual stress increased slightly which methods for formulation of contact to
reduces spring back effect by small amount. simulate nonlinearity. It is highly
Same thing can be seen from Figure.10, 11 recommended to use appropriate coefficients
and 12. of friction to get correct prediction of spring
back in sheet metal components.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors express their deep gratitude to
Figure 12. For Insufficient Lubrication Mech. Engg. Dept. VJTI Mumbai-19 for the
The same thing is observed from strain V/S technical support and valuable guidance for
time graph. The increase in strain reduced the this research project.
springback action, which confirms the
analysis is correct. Also it is confirmed that REFERENCES
strain hardening reduces the springback Jaber Abu Qudeiri et.al. 2013 Effect of
effect. So it is recommended to use bilinear Material and Geometrical Parameters on
isotropic hardening material model. the Springback of Metallic Sheets Life
Science Journal 10(2)
CONCLUSION
Jaydeep Shah et al. 2010 Investigating
Great importance is to be given for Springback effect in U-Die Bending
simulating the springback analysis Process by varying different Parameters,
considering material model, and the Institute of Technology, Nirma
coefficient of friction between die and punch. University Ahmedabad
997
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents a computer simulation model for smartly actuated
dorsal fin with ‘Compliant Mechanism (CM)’ and ‘Shape Memory Alloy (SMA)’.
Our idea is to design dorsal fin with a SMA based actuator that is compact with
sufficient contracting force and stroke and the fin is conceived as a Euler beam.
Herein, we report our preliminary results of a cantilever beam with SMA and select
the Nickel-Titanium (Ni-Tinol) SMA for simulating the swimming motion of a fish.
Our presented results show that the proposed computer simulation model for smartly
actuated dorsal fin with CM and SMA i efficient in computing the essential
parameters from the fish assumed as a beam.
Keywords: Cantilever beam; Shape memory alloy; Compliant Mechanism;
Dorsal fin; Computer simulation.
discussion, and finally Section 4 concludes contract or bend. The actuation unit generates
the paper with some identification about the forces and displacements within the
future scope of research. nano/micro/mili/centi ranges depending upon
the application. Furthermore, the actuators
COMPUTER SIMULATION MODEL can be arranged in series or parallel where
The method of actuation influences one actuation element can have
performance of beam and we focus on the multiplication of action quantities. In a
actuation process itself. Basically, the differentiated behaviour of elementary
actuation process converts an input energy actuation units and strategies of their
(i.e. electrical, thermal, magnetic, chemical excitation that are similar to those specific to
and optical, etc.) into output mechanical natural muscles. In SMA, below the
energy (i.e. motion, rotation, and vibration, transformation temperature (T < M f ), the
etc.) through actuator. The conversion dimension of SMA elements is x and after
depends upon the geometric characteristics of application of energy (e.g. heating) to ensure
the mechanisms and also on the material phase transformation temperature (T >A f ),
properties. The basic design process for SMA the dimension contracts to y. As the elements
is shown in Fig. 1. cool, they change automatically their shape to
the dimension and shape corresponding to
lower temperature. In the phase of
contraction, the active elements tend to bend
towards inside of the actuation unit. In
general, the SMA wires are initially in
martensitic state only and later they get
elongated through the processes of either
plastic or elastic or in a combination of them
deformations. If the SMA is heated well over
Figure 1. Basic design process for SMA the temperature of phase transformation, then
adapted from Follador et al. (2012).
the wires enter in austenitic state. In an
The primary mechanism of actuator is to austenitic state the volume of crystalline
ensure that there is enough force to network is much smaller and this causes them
initiate/oppose the extension/contraction to contract, i.e. approximately 5% of the
force. The force can be constant, an length even in condition of significant
increasing one or an antagonising one. In our opposition forces. We consider the dorsal fin
application, the anticipated advantages of as a beam as shown in Fig. 2.
SMA are: Small size, light weight, high
power to weight ratio, smooth and silent
operation, long life, and precise
controllability, etc. However, our SMA Figure 2. Conceptual description of
application has limitations also, e.g. slow dorsal fin as a beam with SMA.
response on heating/cooling, limited energy
efficiency and undesired non-linear Following Elahinia (2016) and Lagoudas
properties. An elementary linear and co-axial (2010), we note Equations (1-2) that are
actuator works on linear and axial applicable to the first half of beam (i.e. in the
contraction/extension and the system can austenitic phase) and the second half of beam
999
A Computer Simulation Model for Smartly Actuated Dorsal Fin with Compliant Mechanism and Shape
Memory Alloy
(i.e. in the martensitic phase) and with N/m2, b = 0.6 cm, and L1 / L2 =1.5 cm. The
reference to Fig. 2, they are: numerically computed results are listed in
d2 y Table 1.
Ea I = M = F ( x1 − L1 ) + M1 , (1)
dx 2 Table 1. Computed results of the
deflection of dorsal fin for Parts 1 and 2
dy x2
Ea I ==
V F ( 1 − L1 x1 ) + M1 x1 , (2) as a beam with SMA.
dx 2
Part Y1 (Simpson’s Y1 (Simpson’s
1 x1 L x2 M x 2
3
=
Y1 F − 1 + 1 1 , (3) 1 1/3 rule) 3/8 rule)
Ea I 6 2 2
1.5 - 0.00625398 m - 0.00668145 m
for x1 = 0 < x < L1 . And for the second part: Part Y2 (Simpson’s Y2 (Simpson’s
d2 y
2 1/3 rule) 3/8 rule)
Em I = M= F ( x2 − L2 ) , (4)
dx 2 1.5 - 0.0049444 m - 0.0048953 m
dy x2
Em I = V= F ( 2 − L2 x2 ) , (5) We can observe from Table 1 that both rules
dx 2
of Simpson’s integration are resulting in
1 x2 closely matching results and they converge
3
Lx2
=Y2 F − 1 2 , (6)
Ea I 6 2
closely. The results of Table 1 are
illuminating in a sense that they show that the
for M1 = − F * L2 , x2 = 0 < x < L2 . In Equations deflection in Part 2 – as expected - is lesser as
(1-6): E is the Young’s Modulus (N/m2), F compared to Part 1 because E2 / Em of 6.02E5
is the force (N), b is the width of dorsal fin N/m2 is higher than E1 / Ea of 4.5E5 N/m2, but
(m), L / L1 / L2 are the length parameter of the difference is not significant. This can
dorsal fin (m), Y / Y1 / Y2 is the deflection happen because of many reasons, e.g.
parameter of dorsal fin (m), M / M1 / M 2 = is moment is created by the force at free end
the moment parameter of beam (N-m), and I and the equivalent shear force through-out
is the area moment of inertia (m4). To ensure the beam; and they can create a situation
the compatibility between two parts, we where even when there is a difference in E
match deflection and slope at the interface. of the Parts 1 and 2, the loads affect the
Therefore, the total deflection through second deflections to a larger extent. Though our
half of the beam is proportional to the results are interesting they are only
deflection and the slope of the Part 1 and this preliminary in nature and we would like to
can result into: investigate the results reported in Table in-
detail with more variational data to arrive at
dy
Y2t = Y1 + Y2 + X2 . (7) suitable conclusions.
dx
Equations (3, 6, and 7) for the deflections are NUMERICAL EXAMPLE AND
solved numerically using Simpson’s rules of DISCUSSION
numerical integration. The deflection is As mentioned previously, the moment is
computed at the free end of beam. The results created by force at the free end of beam and
for SMA cantilever beam subjected to the the equivalent shear force remains constant
temperature gradient are computed for: F = through-out the beam. The variation in
1 N, E1 / Ea = 4.5E5 N/m2, E2 / Em = 6.02E5 temperature gradient as shown in Fig. 3
1000
Govindarajan and Sharma
allows different deflections by varying the been implanted in Euler beam and our
austenitic to martensitic transitions inside the process of design aims for application
length of the beam and hence the overall towards fish like propulsion system. In our
deflections are affected. application, the fish was conceived as an
Euler beam and in this paper we focused on
preliminary results that are reported with a
cantilever beam. Our presented results
showed that the proposed computer
simulation model for smartly actuated dorsal
fin with beam and shape memory alloy is
efficient in computing the essential
parameters from the fish assumed as a beam.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research was supported by the internal
research grants of IIT Madras through
Figure 3. Computed results of
research scheme: OE12D004.
deformation of dorsal fin as a beam with
SMA under temperature gradient. TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS
*
In our work, we have assumed only the Trademark and copyright with Mathworks,
elastic behaviour. In reality the beam is Inc., USA and **Trademark and copyright
expected to deform plastically at least in the with Ansys, Inc., USA.
martensitic phase once the linear stress limit
is reached. The plastic deformation can create REFERENCES
a hinge type of behaviour at the transition Elahinia M Shape Memory Alloy Actuators:
point and this behaviour is expected to make Design, Fabrication and Experimental
the beam a suitable choice for an actuator Evaluation Wiley USA
system. The total deflection is controlled by Follador M M Cianchetti A Arienti and
the location of temperature gradient and force Laschi C 2012 A general method for the
applied. After the plastic deformations occur design and fabrication of shape memory
SMA beam will be subjected to the alloy active spring actuators Smart
temperatures above austenitic transition point Materials and Structures 21(11) 115029.
and the beam will recover its strain, i.e. up to Lagoudas D C (2010) Shape Memory Alloys:
approximately 4-5% and return to its original Modeling and Engineering Applications
position. This cycle can be repeated as many Springer
number of times as desired and our research Shinjo N and Swain G W 2004 Use of a
that will be reported later in some other shape memory alloy for the design of an
avenue will be built upon this idea. oscillatory propulsion system IEEE
Journal of Oceanic Engineering 29 750–
CONCLUSIONS 755
Our aim was to develop a simulation model
that is integrated with the design of a SMA
actuator that is compact with sufficient
contracting force and stroke. The SMA has
1001
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
considered for the vertical drop deformable impactor (belly) and a rigid
test/simulation. As per the guidelines, the surface (ground/runway surface).
aircraft descend velocity of 9.41 ft/sec (2.87 100
m/sec) with a tail down angle of 60 was
80
chosen for belly impact simulation. This can
Accelerartion
be categorized as a low velocity transient 60
g, m/s2
analysis problem.The analysis was performed 40
in dynamic explicit environment using fuselage alone
20
general purpose FE solver ABAQUS. Belly+fuselage
0
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20
Time, sec
1004
Banakar and Akshatha
1005
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In recent years, the high cost of energy and material has led to a dramatic
endeavour for designing more efficient and economical heat exchange apparatuses. A
great deal of research has been developed to study the different heat transfer
enhancement techniques. The problem of dissipating high heat fluxes has received
much attention due to its importance in applications such as heat exchangers. The
porous materials are often characterised by its porosity which are used in heat
exchangers to increase their performance and the heat transfer rate due to its wide
contact area and tortuous shape. The metal chips and concrete are taken as porous
material for study. The experimental studies on the enhancement of heat transfer using
a porous medium are presented. The system incorporates a cylindrical cavity (shell)
with inlet and outlet ports that are thermally insulated and five tubes containing hot
water and cold water flows in shell. Performance tests under different mass flow rate
are carried out to study the effect of porosity on heat transfer enhancement. Both
Experiment and CFD are carried out to study the effect of heat transfer enhancement
and also the results are comparing with the simple heat exchanger.
Keywords: Porous Medium; CFD; porosity; heat exchanger; mass flow rate.
new axis symmetric lattice Boltzmann model are to be filled in heat exchanger to create
is used to solve a unified governing equation porous zone. The water is allowed to flow
which is applicable to both fluid and the through hot tubes at inlet temperature of
porous regions [F.M. Rong 2010]. 323K. The thermal properties of aluminium
chips and concrete are showed in Table 1.
SIMULATION MODEL
Thesimulation is performed on three Table 1. Thermal properties of Aluminium
configurations. The first is simple heat Chips and Concrete
exchanger, second contains aluminium chips
Properties Aluminum Concrete
as a porous media and third contains concrete
Chips
as a porous medium in a simple counter flow
Density (kg/m3) 2719 2300
heat exchanger. The model consists of a
cylindrical cavity with inlet and outlet Specific heat (J Kg/k) 871 750
thermally insulated ports which are
considered as shell with five tubes using Thermal conductivity 202.4 1.28
scale ratio. Mild steel cylindrical cavity of (W/m k)
length 2feet and diameter 6inches. There are
5 steel tubes of length 2feet and 4inches and
ENERGY EQUATIONS
diameter ½ inches. The simulation model
also consists of baffles for greater heat Heat loss by the hot water is equal to the heat
exchange. gained by the cold water, which is given by
following equation (1)
The inertial resistance factor is determined by the range of 90-150 and 3000-6000
using respectively, which shows the turbulent mode
of flow of fluid.
3.5(1−𝜀)
𝐶2 = (5)
𝑑𝑝 𝜀 3
The Reynolds number and Nusselt number is
calculated by using
ρVm Dh
𝑅𝑒 = (6)
µ
h.Dh
𝑁𝑢 = (7)
k
Where D h is hydraulic diameter,V m is mean Figure 3. Variation in Nusselt numbers
velocity of water, ρ is density of water, µ is with Reynolds numbers
dynamic viscosity and k is thermal The Nusselt number is highest for concrete
conductivity of water. medium and minimum for the simple heat
exchanger at the same value of Reynolds
CFD MODELLING AND number.
OBSERVATIONS
In the present study the simulations are
performed on commercial software ANSYS
FLUENT and three dimensional calculations
of steady state mass, momentum and energy
equations to solve the total heat transfer
confident for counter flow porous medium
heat exchanger. A shell and tube type of heat
exchanger is considered as simulation model
with five numbers of tubes. The whole Figure 4. Variation in outlet temperature
domain of simulation model of Counter flow of fluid with. Reynolds number
heat exchanger is discredited into 3000000 to
500000 numbers of elements and 100000- Figure 4 shows that Reynolds number
175000 numbers of nodes with fine relevance depends on the mass flow rate as mass flow
centre. The fluid (water) is allowed to flow rate increase, increases the Reynolds number.
through tubes and shell for simple heat As mass flow rate of water increase, increase
exchanger and heat exchanger with porous the temperature difference. Maximum
mediums. The inlet of fluid is considered as temperature difference occurs at concrete as a
mass flow inlet at atmospheric constant porous medium in shell.
temperature and pressure conditions. The
mass flow rate varies from 0.034 to 0.056
kg/sec per tube at the temperature 323K and
mass flow rate for shell is to be constant as
0.25 kg/sec in a normal direction to the
boundary for all mass flow rates in tubes. The
outlet is described as the pressure outlet. The
porosity of aluminium chips and concrete
medium is 0.7. The fluid is allowed to flow Figure 5. Variation in heat transfer
through heat exchanger for 30 minutes. coefficient with. Reynolds number
Figure 3 shows that increment in Nusselt Figure 5 shows that variation in heat Transfer
numbers with respect to Reynolds number or Rate at different Reynolds number. Heat
increasing mass flow rate. The Nusselt transfer coefficient is proportional to
numbers and Reynolds numbers are found in temperature difference. As reynolds number
1008
Sharma et al.
increase, increase the temperature difference length Appl. Therm. Eng. 54(1) 289–
and also increase the heat transfer coefficient. 309.
Maximum heat transfer coefficient (h) is He Y L Tao W Q 2014 Numerical studies on
occurs concrete as a porous medium in shell. the inherent interrelationship between
field synergy principle and entransy
CONCLUSION
dissipation extreme principle for
The result yields the following conclusion: enhancing convective heat transfer Int.
1. Increase the mass flow rate, increase J. Heat Mass Transfer 74 196–205.
the temperature, minimum temperature Prabhanjan D G Raghavan G S V Rennie T J
is desired and minimum temperature 2002 Comparison of heat transfer rate
occurs in the case of concrete as a between a straight tube heat exchanger
porous medium. and a helically coiled heat exchanger,
2. Increase the mass flow rate, increase Int. Commun. Heat Mass Transfer 29(2)
the Reynolds number. Increase the 185–191.
Reynolds number the heat transfer
Rong F M Guo Z L Chai Z H Shi B C 2010
coefficient and maximum heat transfer
A lattice Boltzmann model for
coefficient is desired. In case of
axisymmetric thermal flows through
concrete as a porous medium, obtains
porous media, Int. J. Heat Mass
maximum heat transfer coefficient.
Transfer 53 5519–5527.
REFERENCES Sonawane S S Khedkar R S Wasewar K L
2013 Study on concentric tube heat
Alkam M K Al-Nimr M A Hamdan M O
exchanger heat transfer performance
2001 Enhancing heat transfer in
using Al2O3–water based nanofluids
parallelplate channels by using porous
Int. Commun. Heat Mass Transfer 49
insertsInt. J. Heat Mass Transfer 44(5)
60–68.
931–938.
Zhang-Jing Zheng Ming-Jia Li Ya-Ling He
Ary B K P Lee M S Ahn S W Lee D H 2012
2015 Optimization of porous insert
The effect of the inclined perforated
configurations for heat transfer
baffle on heat transfer and flow patterns
enhancement in tubes based on genetic
in the channel Int. Commun. Heat Mass
algorithm and CFD International
Transfer 39(10) 1578–1583.
Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 87
Bejan 2004 Designed porous media: maximal 376–379.
heat transfer density at decreasing
length scalesInt. J. Heat Mass Transfer
47(14) 3073–3083.
Chikh S Boumedien A Bouhadef K Lauriat G
1995 Analytical solution of non-
Darcian forced convection in an annular
duct partially filled with a porous
medium Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 38
1543–1551.
Eiamsa-ard S Somkleang P Nuntadusit C
Thianpong C 2013 Heat transfer
enhancement in tube by inserting
uniform/non-uniform twisted-tapes with
alternate axes: effect of rotated-axis
1009
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In the present study, the operator splitting technique (OST) is used to split
the advective-dispersive transport equation (ADE) of contaminant transport in a
porous space and the resulting equations are then solved using the finite difference
method. The entitled technique is featured with treating the advective and dispersive
part of the transport equation separately. The advective part is solved by MacCormack
scheme and the solution so obtained is used while solving dispersive part implicitly at
the respective time step and spatial grid to get the final concentration. For the one
dimensional equation, the numerical solution obtained by implementing this scheme is
compared with an available analytical solution and solution by Crank Nicolson
method and for the two dimensional transport equation, only with the solution
obtained by the Alternate Direction Implicit (ADI) scheme. The OST technique
approximately gives the same solution as the other schemes with different initial and
boundary conditions. The study shows that OST method can be employed to predict
the contaminant distribution in homogeneous soils under both steady and transient
conditions. This method has been found to be capable of providing the solution for the
tested transport problems. However, for the general applicability of this technique for
the various transport situations, the stability criteria need to be developed.
Keywords: Advective-dispersive transport; Operator splitting technique; Finite
difference method; MacCormack scheme.
1011
Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium using the Operator Splitting
Technique
𝑛+1/2
+𝑟 �−𝜆(𝐶̅ )𝑖,𝑗 + µ(𝑥, 𝑦)� , (6) Case1. The one-dimensional ADE for an
incompressible and homogeneous soil,
0 < 𝛼1 ≤ 1, 0 < 𝛽1 ≤ 1 without the source/sink and decay terms, as
and 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶 𝜕2𝐶
+𝑢 = 𝐷𝑥 2 (9)
𝑛+1/2
𝐶𝑎 𝑛
= 𝐶𝑖,𝑗 + 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥
𝑖,𝑗
subjected to
1 𝜕𝐶 𝑛 ���� 𝑛+1/2 𝛥𝑡
𝜕𝐶
�� � + � � � . (7) 𝐶(𝑥, 0) = 1; 0 ≤𝑥≤1
2 𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 2
𝐶(0, 𝑡) = 1; 𝑡>0
Now, Eq. (7) can be utilized to write down
𝐶(1, 𝑡) = 0; 𝑡>0
the finite difference equation for the
dispersive part Case 2. The two-dimensional ADE [Eq. (1)]
𝑛 +1/2 𝑛+1/2 subjected to following set of space dependent
𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑎𝑖,𝑗 initial condition and time dependent
𝛥𝑡/2 boundary conditions
𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2
2𝐷𝑥 𝐶𝑑 𝑖−1,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 𝐶𝑑 𝑖+1,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 𝐶(𝑥, 𝑦, 0) = 2𝑥 − 𝑥𝑦; 0 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1; 0≤𝑦
− 2� + �
𝛥𝑥 𝛼1 (𝛼1 + 𝛼2 ) 𝛼2 (𝛼1 + 𝛼2 ) ≤1
𝑛+1/2 𝐶(0, 0 ≤ 𝑦 < 1, 𝑡) = 0.8 − 0.2𝑒 0.1𝑡 ; 𝑡>0
+𝜆(1 − 𝑟)𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 =
𝐶(0 < 𝑥 < 1, 0, 𝑡) = 0.8 − 0.2𝑒 0.1𝑡 ; 𝑡>0
2𝐷𝑦 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗−1 − 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗+1 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗
� + � 𝐶(1, 0 ≤ 𝑦 < 1, 𝑡) = 0.002√𝑡; 𝑡>0
𝛥𝑦 2 𝛽1 (𝛽1 + 𝛽2 ) 𝛽2 (𝛽1 + 𝛽2 )
+ (1 − 𝑟)µ(𝑥, 𝑦). (8) 𝐶(0 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1, 1, 𝑡) = 0.002√𝑡; 𝑡>0
𝑛 +1/2
𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 will be used as known concentration 0.8 t = 0.1
0.6 t = 0.3
Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS 0.5
Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
0.4 Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
Initially, a few numerical experiments have Crank Nicolson Method
0.3 Crank Nicolson Method
been performed to predict the contaminant Crank Nicolson Method
0.2
migration for one-dimensional transport Operator Splitting Technique
0.1 Operator Splitting Technique
situation and then these are carried out to Operator Splitting Technique
0
include situations involving two-dimensional 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Distance
transport. The validity of these OST
procedures are also checked for the studied
situations by comparing results obtained Figure 1. A concentration profileas
from them with the corresponding values obtained from theproposed OST solution
obtained from running well established when the parameters of the transport
numerical schemes to the same considered problem are taken as 𝑢 = 1 and 𝐷𝑥 = 1.
situations. The two transport situations and
their results are shown as following
1012
Tinesh Pathania
0.7 REFERENCES
t = 18000 s
y = 0.5 m
0.6 Anderson J D 1995 Computational fluid
y = 0.6 m
Concentration, C (kg/m )
0.5
y = 0.7 m
0.4 Bear J 1972 Dynamics of fluids in Porous
0.3
media Elsevier New York 579-634
Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
0.2 Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
Chapra S C and Canale R P 2006 Numerical
Operator Splitting Technique methods for engineers McGraw-Hill
0.1 Operator Splitting Technique
Operator Splitting Technique New Delhi 710-715
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Distance, x (m) Deng Z-Q Singh V P and Bengtsson L 2004
Figure 2. A concentration profileas Numerical solution of fractional
obtained from theproposed OST solution advection-dispersion equation Journal
when the parameters of the transport of Hydraulic Engineering 130(5) 422-
problem are taken as𝑢 = (0.01/3600) m/ 431
s, 𝑣 = (0.01/3600) m/s, 𝐷𝑥 = Guerrero J S P Pimentel L C G Skaggs T H
(0.01/3600) m2 /sand𝐷𝑦 = (0.01/ Genuchten M Th V 2009 Analytical
3600) m2 /s. solution of the advection-diffusion
transport equation using a change-of-
CONCLUSION variable and integral transform
In this study the suitability of OST has been technique International Journal of Heat
checked to predict one- and two-dimensional and Mass Transfer 52 3297-3304
transport of contaminants in porous media Hoffman J D 2001 Numerical methods for
under different initial and boundary engineers and scientists McGraw-Hill
conditions. In the analysis presented here, the New York 501-683
efficacy of the OST procedure to solve the
ADE for the transport situations with Huang K Simunek J and Genuchten M Th V
complex initial and boundary conditions has 1997 A third-order numerical
been explored. The OST procedure has been schemewith upwind weighting for
found to work reasonably well for the tested solving the solute transport equation
transport situations and hence may be applied International Journal for Numerical
to solve problems of similar nature. This has Methods in Engineering 40 1623-1637
been validated by running parallel numerical Kaluaracbchi JJ and Morshed J 1995 Critical
programs for the other numerical approaches. assessment of the operator-splitting
The OST outputs for the one-dimensional technique in solving the advection-
ADE without any additional terms are dispersion reaction equation: 1. First-
sensitive to the Peclet number and stability of order reaction Advances in Water
the outputs is affected with the increase of it, Resources 18(2) 89-100
particularly if the Courant number is low.
Li Y S and Chen C P 1989 An efficient split-
However, the convergence and stability of
operator scheme for 2-D advection-
the procedure has not been included in this
diffusion simulations using finite
study, factors which must be looked into
elements and characteristics Applied
before the method can be made use of with
Mathematical Modelling 13 248- 253
confidence.
1013
Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium using the Operator Splitting
Technique
NOTATION
C contaminant concentration
𝐶𝑎 advective concentration
𝐶𝑑 final concentration
𝐷𝑥 dispersion coefficient in
xdirection
𝐷𝑦 dispersion coefficient
inydirection
𝑛 time step
Pe Peclet number
𝑢 longitudinal seepage velocity
in x direction
𝑣 transverse seepage velocity in
y direction
𝛥𝑥 grid spacing in xdirection
𝛥𝑦 grid spacing in y direction
α Courant number
𝛼1 fraction of 𝛥𝑥 on the left of
node 𝑖
𝛼2 fraction of 𝛥𝑥 on the right of
node 𝑖
𝛽1 fraction of 𝛥𝑦 on the left of
node 𝑗
𝛽2 fraction of 𝛥𝑦 on the right of
node 𝑗
𝜆 first order decay rate
µ source/sink term
1014
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
as fuel. Gupta et. al., (2012) studied the ∇. �𝜈(𝜌𝐸 + 𝑝)� = ∇. �𝜆eff𝛻𝑇 − ∑ℎj 𝑗j +
effect of various operating parameters such (𝜏⃗eff. 𝜈)� + 𝑆h… (3)
as air velocity, fuel rate and moisture
𝜕
content on the performance of updraft (𝜌𝑌s) + ∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗𝑌s) = −∇J�s + 𝑅s… (4)
𝜕𝑡
gasifier using ANSYS Fluent. Muilenburg, 𝑍j−𝑍j, ox
2011) carried out an investigation on the 𝑓= … (5)
𝑍j, fuel−𝑍j, ox
combustion and gasification zones of the
A solid model of the computational
gasifier to estimate the optimum values of
domain is shown in Fig.2 with appropriate
porosity and air velocity for two different
boundary condition. The domain is
fuels.
meshed with unstructured mesh with
Present work is a case investigation which 303032 cells to capture all key parameters.
intends to improve the design of a The reaction chemistry inside the gasifier
throatless downdraft gasifier by estimating is modelled using non-premixed
few key parameters of performance i.e. combustion model. The equilibrium model
temperature distribution, equivalence ratio is used and it assumes that the chemistry is
and gas composition of the gasifier. It rapid enough for chemical equilibrium to
consists of basically two sections- hopper always exist at the molecular level. The
and reactor. Air is sucked in the gasifier non-premix combustion model considers
through four air inlets while wood is mixture fraction model to solve
loaded from the top of gasifier. Gas turbulence-chemistry interaction by using
produced is sucked from bottom outlet of probability density function method.
reactor. Wood briquettes are used as a fuel Pressure based steady state solver is used
in this gasification system. In an while SIMPLE scheme is adopted for
experimental investigation the proximate consideration of pressure-velocity
and ultimate analysis of the wood sample coupling. Second order upwind scheme is
gives the elemental proportion which is applied for spatial discretization. Steady
shown in the Table 1. The wood is loaded state converged solution is obtained which
at the rate of 25 kg/hr and air supplied is presented in the following section.
during gasification is 7.3475 x10-03 kg/sec.
Gasifier schematic with dimension is RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
shown in Fig.1. The objective of current
The supply air enters through four nozzles
study is to characterize thermal and flow
0.55 m/sec, Figure 3 shows the distribution
behaviour of product gas and to predict the
of flow in the computational at central
product gas composition. ANSYS Fluent
cutting plane. The gasification process
14.5 is used as a tool of investigation.
leads to the evolution of a thermal profile
as shown in Fig.4 which clearly represents
COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH
the combustion phenomena taking place
The mechanism which governs different inside gasifier. Core of combustion has
gasification processes taking place is due maximum temperature of about 1833.38 K
to conservation of mass, momentum, The convection effect of flow on
energy and species with appropriate source temperature distribution can be observed
terms. These equations are given below. clearly.
∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗) = 𝑆m … (1) The distribution of carbon monoxide mole
fraction or volume fraction on a central
∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗𝜈⃗) = −∇𝑝 + ∇. (𝜏̅) + 𝜌𝑔⃗ + 𝐹⃗ ... (2)
1016
Characterization of Flow and Thermal Behaviour of Product Gas Constituents in the Throat-less
Downdraft Gasifier
1017
Kane et al
1018
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Vidyapati and Subramaniam, 2013] It is lower bound on the silo width W to ensure its
obeserved that the flow rate decreases as negligible effect on the outflow of grains, i.e.,
friction increases between the grains. W > 2.5D (Nedderman et al., 1982,
However, the effect of inter-particle Vidyapati and Subramaniam, 2013). In
restitution coefficient is consistently found to addition, the mass flow rate is independent of
be in signifcant by these studies. the fill height H provided its value at the
Furthermore, for a wide enough silo, friction center line is greater than the orifice size D,
between silo walls and grains plays negligible i.e., H>D (Nedderman et al., 1982). In order
role as the grains exiting the system are to achieve steady state for a longer period,
affected by the local conditions adjacent to the exited grains are placed back into the
the orifice. system, in proximity to the top surface with
zero initial velocity.
To our knowledge, in spite of knowing the
effect of physical and material properties of
grains on the mass flow rate, the dependence
of the Beverloo parameters on these
properties is not yet explored. It is difficult to
make such a comprehensive investigation
through experiments. However, it can easily
be accomplished by utilizing discrete element
(DE) simulations[Cundall and Strack, 1979]
where trajectory of each grain is computed by
numerically integrating its equations of
motion. The advantage of DE simulations is
that the information about every grain in the Figure 1. Initial state of grains in a two
system can be extracted at any desired time dimensional silo before opening the
step of the simulation. Our aim in this study orifice.
is to examine the effect of particle size,
We model grains as cohesionless disks of
density, friction and restitution coefficients
mean diameter d with a polydispersity of ±10
on the Beverloo parameters via DE
%, to prevent crystallization in the system.
simulations. Furthermore, the effect of grain
The disks are inelastic and frictional. In all
properties on the microstrutural information,
simulations, the values of restitution and
e.g., density and velocity profiles near the
friction coefficients for interaction between
orifice will also be explored. In addition, a
walls and grains are kept constant at e w = 0.9
relationship between the Beverloo parameters
and µ w = 0.4, respectively. The inter-grain
and grains' microstructure adjacent to the
restitution and friction coefficients are,
orifice will also be studied.
respectively, considered to be fixed at e p =
COMPUTATIONAL SCHEME 0.9 and µ p = 0.4, unless mentioned explicitly.
parameters will be discussed. Figure 2 We now fit Eqn. (3) to the data displayed in
displays variation in the mass flow rate m f Fig. 2 and obtain Beverloo parameters C and
with coefficient of restitution e p for different k. The value of C is found to be nearly the
values of orifice size D. Expectedly, at a same for all restitution coefficients and equal
given e p , the amount of grains exiting the to 0.026. Figure 3 shows variation in the
system grows by increasing the orifice size. Beverloo parameter k with restitution
In addition, the mass flow rate rises with coefficient e p . We note a minimal variation
increasing the restitution coefficient from 0.4 (~ 6%) in k when e p varies in the range from
to 0.95, for all orifice sizes. It is important to 0.4 to 0.8, which is evident from a nearly
note that there is almost no change in m f constant flow rate as shown in Fig. 2.
when e p is varied from 0.4 to 0.8, which is in However, notably, the value of k decreases
agreement with two-dimensional by nearly 40 % when e p is further increased
computational study of Ristow (1997) that to 0.95 from 0.8. This reduction in k
reports variation in the flow rate by 1.2 % for corroborates well with a noticeable lift in the
mass flow rate at all orifice sizes (see Fig. 2).
Mass flow rate m f is scaled with m(d/g)-1/2, Figure 4 shows variation in the mass flow
where m is the mass of a grain. However, as rate with friction coefficient µ p for different
displayed in Fig.2 , the increase in the flow values of D. At a fixed µ p , the flow rate rises
rate becomes significant when e p is escalated with increasing the orifice size. Moreover,
beyond 0.8. The variation in the flow rate is the flow rate decreases when friction is
approximately equal to 32 % and 12 % for increased from 0 to 0.5, for all orifice sizes.
the smallest (D=6d) and largest (D=14d) In agreement with three-dimensional
orifice sizes, respectively, when e p is simulations of Vidyapati and Subramaniam
increased from 0.8 to 0.95. This result is in (2013), the mass flow rate falls nearly by 32
contrast to three-dimensional investigations % when friction coefficient is varied in the
of Anand et al. (2008) and Vidyapati and range from 0.1 to 0.5, at D=6d. It is
Subramaniam (2013), which report no important to mention here that change in the
influence of restitution coefficient on the mass flow rate lowers with increasing D, in
flow rate. the aforesaid range of friction coefficient.
Specifically, at the highest orifice size, i.e.,
1021
Bhateja and Khakhar
1022
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
_______________________________
𝐷𝑝2 𝜙3
α=
180(1−𝜙)2
1024
Design and Development Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using Computational Techniques
The FVM computation is carried out using average temperature in the bag is found to be
ANSYS Fluent 14.5 which uses 274.63 K for the surrounding temperature of
incompressible fluid. Governing equations 274 K. Fig. 3 shows the variation of average
are solved using PISO algorithm. Flow is product temperature inside the sack.
assumed to be laminar flowing in porous
medium. Solution progress under operating
conditions: P= 1.01325 bar, T= 274 K and
product temperature 298K. Volumetric heat
generation is 20 Watt/m3. Material properties
used in the analysis are given in the table 1.
Table 1. Material Properties
RESULTS
The investigation consists of steady and
transient state study where flow and
temperature distribution is predicted.
1025
Rohit and Maurya
The case simulated for a period of 7 hrs. of Chourasia M K Goswami T K 2009 Efficient
storage to study the transient cooling of sack design, operation, maintenance and
filled with potato. It is validated with management of a cold storage Journal
experimental work of Goswami and of Biological Sciences 1 70-93
Chourasia (2007) which is shown in Fig.5. Chourasia M K Goswami T K Chowdhury K
The simulated result shows the evolution of 1999 Temperature profile during cold
temperature and flow in the sack. Maximum storage of bagged potatoes: effects of
temperature is found to be at the center of geometric and operating parameters
upper half of the sack as shown in fig. 4. Trans ASAE 42 1345–51.
Cooling of the sack started from the side
surfaces and is symmetric about vertical axis. Hackett B Chow S Ganji A R 2005 Efficiency
Rate of cooling is faster in lower half than the Opportunities in Fresh Fruit and
upper half. Vegetable Processing/Cold Storage
Facilities ACEEE Summer Study on
300
Avg. Product Temperature
1026
Design and Development Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using Computational Techniques
1027
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The effects of field parameters like hydraulic gradient, dispersivity and ratio
of aquifer depth and longitudinal dispersivity to the freshwater and saltwater interface
were simulated by using coupled two non-linear partial differential equations of flow
and solute transport equation. A two dimensional numerical groundwater flow model
for simplified hypothetical freshwater lens is developed to explain the effect of various
field parameters. The results show that field parameters significantly influence on
saltwater ingression in coastal aquifers.
Keywords: Saltwater ingression; Field parameters; Numerical modelling
1028
Ukarande and Sonawane
where, Vi are the components of the seepage dimensional form in two-dimensional co-
velocity (LT-1), k ij is the intrinsic ordinate (x-y) system are defined as:
permeability of the porous medium (L2), µ is 𝑉𝑥2 𝑉𝑦2
the dynamic viscosity of the fluid (ML-1T-1), 𝐷𝑥𝑥 = + 𝛼𝑇
|𝑉| |𝑉|
ρ is the fluid density (ML-3), p is the fluid
pressure (ML-1T-2), e j are the components of 𝑉𝑦2 𝑉𝑥2
𝐷𝑦𝑦 = + 𝛼𝑇
the gravitational unit vector (LT-2), D ij is the |𝑉| |𝑉|
dispersion coefficient (L2 T-1) and C is the 𝑉𝑥 𝑉𝑦
concentration of the pollutant (ML-3). 𝐷𝑥𝑦 = 𝐷𝑦𝑥 = (1 − 𝛼 𝑇 ) … (7)
|𝑉|
Introducing the non-dimensional variables The average linear velocity (i.e. V x and V y ) in
𝑥 ′ 𝑦 ℎ 𝐶 non-dimensional form for 2-D x-y coordinate
𝑥′ = ; 𝑦 = ; ℎ′ = ; 𝐶 = ∗ ;
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝐶 system from equation (2) can be written as;
𝐾𝑦𝑦 𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝑉𝑥 𝐴 𝜕ℎ
𝐾′𝑦𝑦 = ; 𝐾′𝑥𝑥 = ; 𝑉′𝑥 = ; 𝑉𝑥 = − � � … . (8)
𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝑉 𝜃 𝜕𝑥
𝐴 𝜕ℎ
𝑉𝑦 𝛼𝑇 𝛼𝐿 𝑉𝑦 = − 𝐾𝑦𝑦 � + 𝜀� … (9)
𝜃 𝜕𝑦
𝑉′𝑦 = ; 𝛼′ 𝑇 = ; 𝛼′𝐿 =
𝑉 𝛼𝐿 𝛼𝐿 𝐾𝑖𝑗 1
𝑑 𝑊ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑉 = ,
𝐴 𝐴
= 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑑𝐿 =
𝛼𝐿 is piezometric gradient and θ is porosity of
in equation (1) and (3) and dropping the aquifer. Thus the equations (5), (6), (8) and
primes on all the terms in further analysis we (9) are Governing Equations in dimensionless
get, form.
𝜕2ℎ 𝜕2 ℎ 𝜕𝑐 SOLUTION DOMAIN
+ 𝐾𝑦𝑦 = −𝐾𝑦𝑦 𝜀 … (5)
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝜕𝑦 The rectangular two-dimensional vertical
2 2 2 cross-section of length L and depth d of
𝜕 𝐶 𝜕 𝐶 𝜕 𝐶
𝐷𝑥𝑥 + 𝐷𝑦𝑦 + 𝐷𝑥𝑦 confined coastal aquifer is shown in fig.-1.
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
2
𝜕 𝐶 𝜕𝑐 𝜕𝑐
+ 𝐷𝑦𝑥 − �𝑉𝑥 + 𝑉𝑦 �𝑑 = 0
𝜕𝑦𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝐿
(6)
where d is the depth of confined coastal
aquifer, C* is saltwater concentration, α L and
αT are longitudinal and transverse
dispersivities of medium respectively, V is the
average linear velocity, K xx and K yy are non- Figure 1. Boundary conditions and
dimensional hydraulic conductivities along x Definition sketch
and y direction respectively, and, D ij is the
dispersion tensor, whose terms in non- The L/d for the domain is 2:1. This paper
discuss the approach of synthetic confined
heterogeneous isotropic aquifer with two thin
1029
Effect of Field Parameters on Saltwater Ingression in Coastal Aquifers
unyielding layers at depth of 0.4 and 0.8 unit Parameter A is reciprocal of upstream
depth from top of aquifer as shown in figure hydraulic gradient. A boost in the value of A
1. means drop off in upstream freshwater head
seeing as other parameters kept constant.
FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION
Other parameters used are α T = 1, K x1 = 1.0,
Presently the entire flow region is divided in K x2 = 0.2, Kx1 = 0.5, K y1 = 1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and
1024 elements and 561 nodes. K y3 = 0.5, d L = 2.4, θ 1 = 0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3
Applying Galerkin’s approach in addition to = 0.26 are kept unvarying to learn effect of
Green’s Theorem, equations (5) (6), (8) and variation of ‘A’ parameter.
(9) can be written in matrix form as follows: The slope of hydraulic gradient can vary from
[𝐾1 ] {ℎ} = 𝜀 𝐾𝑦𝑦 [𝑅] {𝐶} + {𝐵ℎ1 } … (10) 0.01% to 0.5% for most realistic field
conditions (Pandit and Anand, 1980). The
[𝐾2 ] {𝐶} = {𝐵𝑐 } … (11) effect is significant for ‘A’ equal to 200 to
Head and concentration vary linearly in the 1200. For variation of ‘A’ from 200 to 10000
triangular elements. These elements are the length of ingression of saltwater increases
associated with shape functions defined for at bottom from 1.4 units and at top 0.8 units.
each node of the element, which are functions
of spatial coordinates and define the head and
solute concentration in an element in terms of
the nodal head and concentration. The
resulting matrices are square, diagonally
dominant and asymmetric in nature.
[𝑀] {𝑉𝑥 } = {𝐹} … (12)
[𝑀] �𝑉𝑦 � = {𝐸} … (13)
where [K 1 ], [K 2 ] and [M] are conductance
Figure 2- Effect of ‘A’ parameter
matrices and [R]{C}, {Bh 1 }, {B c }, {F}, {E}
are column vectors containing boundary EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘Α T ’ ON
conditions. SALTWATER INGRESSION
For more authenticity the model is validated The values of other parameters kept constant
with Ukarade S. K. and Rastogi (2003) for to observe effect of ‘α T ’ on saltwater
homogeneous and isotropic conditions. ingression. Other parameters used are A =
294, K x1 = 1.0, K x2 = 0.2, Kx1 = 0.5, K y1 =
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and K y3 = 0.5, d L = 2.4, θ 1 =
0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3 = 0.26 are kept
Based on above numerical model of Synthetic
unvarying to learn effect of variation of ‘α T ’
Heterogeneous Isotropic Aquifers yields the
parameter.
effects of assorted parameters on freshwater
and saltwater interface are discussed below. It is observed that variation of ‘α T ’ upto 0.5
the saltwater ingression increases at bottom
EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘A’ ON
by 0.81 and reduces at top by 0.52. By
SALTWATER INGRESSION
1030
Ukarande and Sonawane
deviation in value of ‘α T ’ upto 1.0 the upstream of interface increases cause boost in
ingression at bottom increases and at top interface movement towards freshwater
reduces. boundary.
Non-dimensional parameter ‘α T ’ i.e. ratio of
transverse and longitudinal dispersivity does
not effects saltwater ingression appreciably.
Non-dimensional parameter ‘d L ’ i.e. ratio of
aquifer thickness and longitudinal dispersivity
for value 10 decease the saltwater intrusion at
bottom and increases at top of aquifer.
Figure -3- Effect of parameter ‘α T ’ REFERENCES
EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘D L ’ ON Das A and Datta B1999 Development of
SALTWATER INGRESSION multi objective management models for
coastal aquifers Jr. of water resources
The values of other parameters kept constant
planning and management 125(2) 76-88
to observe effect of ‘d L ’ on saltwater
ingression. Other parameters used are A = Haipeng Guo and Jui Jimmy Jiao. 2007.
294, K x1 = 1.0, K x2 = 0.2, K x3 = 0.5, K y1 = Impact of Coastal Land Reclamation on
Ground Water Level and the Sea Water
1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and K y3 = 0.5, α T = 0.1, θ 1 =
Interface Ground Water 45(3) 362-367
0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3 = 0.26 are kept
unvarying to learn effect of variation of ‘d L ’ Henry H R 1964. Effect of dispersion on salt
encroachment in coastal aquifers U.S.
parameter.
Geol. Surv., Water-Supply Pap. 1613C
70-84.
Lee C H and Cheng 1974. On seawater
encroachment in coastal aquifer Water
Resour. Res. 10(5) 1039-1043.
Pandit A and Anand S C 1984 Ground water
flow and mass transport by finite
elements - A parametric study Proc. 5th
Int. Conf. on Finite Elements in Water
Figure 4 Effect of parameter ‘d L ’ Resources, (J.B. Liable, C.A. Brebbia,
W. Gray, G. Pinder eds) Burlington,
It is observed from plot that the shape of 0.5 Vermount, USA, 363-381.
isochlor more or less remains match but its
shifting towards freshwater. Dispersion Pinder G F and Cooper H H Jr 1970 A
numerical technique for calculating the
coefficient also increases so increase in
transient position of the saltwater front
saltwater ingression. Water Resour. Res 6(3) 875-882.
CONCLUSION Ukarande S K and Rastogi A K 2000
Seawater Intrusion Control Through
Non-dimensional parameter ‘A’ i.e. inverse of
Recharge and Recharge-Discharge Well
hydraulic gradient of freshwater which is at System presented and published in the
1031
Effect of Field Parameters on Saltwater Ingression in Coastal Aquifers
1032
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
model by considering the small parameters difficulty in solving the electric enthalpy.
inherent in the structure. The method splits Variational asymptotic method (VAM)
the 3D beam problem into a 1D linear beam provides a very effective technique to solve
analysis and 2D cross sectional analysis. the unknown warping inherent in electric
Variational asymptotic method has been enthalpy through an asymptotic analysis of
previously used by Yu (2002) to model the variational statement.
dimensionally reduced composite structures. The 3D strain for an Euler-Bernoulli beam
It has also been applied to model classical can be expressed in terms of 1D strain vector
smart beam structures by Roy et al.(2007). and 3D warping field as,
The present study introduces VAM to
capture the sensory effect and finding out the
ˆ Γòò
Γ = Γ h w+ (3)
response of the piezoelectric sensor when it ˆ = [wˆ 1wˆ 2 wˆ 3φ]
where, w
T
is the warping,
is under a time varying load. The study firstly
predicts the first three eigen modes. It also ò [ 111 23 ]T is the 1D strain vector and
captures the nodal displacement under both Γ h , Γ ò are the operator matrices as defined
damped and undamped conditions and its in Roy et al.(2007).
corresponding voltage response in time
domain under an excitation frequency which The dimensional reduction from the original
is close to its first eigen frequency. 3D formulation to a 1D formulation is done
by taking advantage of the small parameters
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION in the formulation. To construct a 1D
formulation an asymptotically correct
The mathematical formulation for the
approximation to the 3D formulation can be
piezoelectric sensor starts with the very well-
achieved as shown in Eq. (2) where the 1D
known Hamilton’s principle.
terms are discretised from the general 3D
t2
terms. For a structure to be modelled as beam
Neglecting () terms which are 3D functions, We neglect the higher order terms in kinetic
energy as well as in the work done and keep
when we try to solve Eq. (2) we find
1034
Dynamic Response of an Asymptotically Correct Piezoelectric Sensor with A Tip Mass
the terms which are functions of only x1 . for the mid node in damped as well as
undamped condition.
Unknown 3D warping functions i.e wi and
only appears in U 0 and it can be solved by
variational statement.
U 0 0 (6)
The minimization of zeroth order of strain
energy subjected to some global constraints
gives the Euler-Lagrange equation. Solving
the Euler-Lagrange equation we get the
solution of warping in terms of 1D strains.
Figure 2. First three normalized eigen
Substituting the warping in the strain energy
modes
expression and differentiating it with respect
to the strain vector we get the 1D constitutive For damped response we have considered a
model for a classical sensor model. proportional damping. The present study
F S ò (7) includes only bending mode but the theory is
very well capable of capturing axial,twist and
Here F is the force vector, S is the
bending modes in other two planes.Fig. (4)
generalized cross sectional stiffness matrix.
shows the voltage response for the mid node
MODEL VERIFICATION in time domain.
1035
Banerjee and Roy
CONCLUSION APPENDIX
The present work applies variational The electric enthalpy expression for a
asymptotic method to model and analyse a piezoelectric material can be expressed as,
piezoelectric cantilever sensor with a tip 1
mass. Though the emergence of the theory is U (T : C E : 2 E.e : E T . .E )dv
2v
many years back but applying the theory to where,
mathematically model a piezoelectric sensor
with a tip mass is a main novelty of the C E -elastic tensor at a constant electric field
present work. The theory is capable of - strain tensor
analysing multilayer as well as embedded
sensor model. The present study has e - piezoelectric tensor
considered a rectangular cross section but the E - electric field vector
theory is well capable of handling any
arbitrary cross sectional analysis. This is a - dielectric tensor at constant strain field
preliminary work and it can be very well v - space occupied by the structure.
extended to model an energy harvester.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank the
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Delhi
for their encouragement and help.
REFERENCES
Berdichevsky V L 1979 Variational
asymptotic method of constructing a
theory of shells PMM43 664-687.
Ly R Rguiti M Astorg S D Hajjaji A
Courtois C Lerichea A 2011Modeling
and characterization of piezoelectric
cantilever bending sensor for energy
harvesting Sensors and Actuators A 168
95–100.
Roy S Yu W and Han D 2007 An
asymptotically correct classical model
for smart beams International Journal
of Solids and Structures 44 8424–8439.
Yu W 2002 Variational asymptotic modeling
of composite dimensionally reducible
structures Ph.D. thesis Georgia Institute
of Technology.
1036
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper deals with the damage detection in thin plates with notch type
damage using a baseline-free refined time reversed Lamb wave method. The
effectiveness of the method has been examined for an integrated actuator–plate–
sensor system through numerical and experimental investigation. The analysis reveals
that combination of symmetric mode (S 0 ) and antisymmetric mode (A 0 ) provides
better reconstructability of an input signal, compared to the usually recommended
single-mode tuning. Damage indices (DIs) obtained from the conventional main wave
packet of the reconstructed signal are less sensitive to an increase in depth of the
notch, which is consistent with some recently reported experimental results by other
groups. A recently proposed method of computing DIs with extended signal length is
shown experimentally to have high sensitivity to the damage and lead to a low
threshold for the undamaged case when used at the best reconstruction frequency.
Keywords: Time Reversal Process, Lamb Wave, Sweet Spot Frequency, Damage
effects on Lamb wave time reversal for 28 oC) for at least 48 hours. One transducer
damage detection. Recently, Agrahari and was actuated with a five-peak Hann window
Kapuria (2015) presented a refined method modulated tone burst signal of 20 V with its
for computing the damage indices by center frequency varying from 160 to 340
introducing the concept of the 'best kHz, and the voltage output of the other
reconstruction frequency' and extended wave transducer was measured. The sampling
packet, which showed much-enhanced frequency was taken as 48 mega samples per
sensitivity to damages. In this work, we second (MS/s), and an average of six runs
establish numerically and experimentally the was taken for each test to improve the signal-
efficacy of the new method in detecting to-noise ratio of the sensor output. In this
notch-type damage in aluminium plates. paper, the reflections from structural
boundaries are not considered by choosing
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF TRP appropriate time window in the wave signals.
FOR DAMAGE DETECTION Damage is introduced in the form of notch of
2 mm width in between the wave path as
shown in Figure 2.
Notch
1038
Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures using A Refined Time-Reversed Lamb Wave
The analysis is performed using the distortion energy (DE) (Sohn et al., 2007) is
commercial FE software, ABAQUS. The used to identify the damage.
accurate prediction of Lamb wave
propagation requires a high spatial resolution (1)
as well as a good temporal resolution with at I(t)
least 20-time steps in one wave cycle, which and V(t) are the normalized original and
leads to a large computational effort if 3D FE reconstructed signals, respectively, and t i and
model is adopted. t f define the signal length used for the
In order to maintain a good spatial resolution comparison. For a perfectly reconstructed
and a reasonable computation time, a signal V(t), DI DE = 0 and a high value means
simplified 2D plane strain model is considerable dissimilarity, implying the
considered here to perform the damage presence of damage.
diagnosis without any loss of generality. Sweet Spot Frequency and Frequency of Best
Accordingly, the plate and adhesive layers Reconstruction for Undamaged Plate.
are modelled using the 2D eight-node plane The frequency corresponding to the
strain quadrilateral element (CPE8R) with maximum value of S 0 /A 0 amplitude ratio is
reduced integration, and the piezoelectric the sweet spot frequency (f ss ), at which only
actuator and sensor are modelled with the 2D the S 0 mode is excited in the plate. Its value
eight-node plane strain piezoelectric has been obtained as 270 kHz experimentally
quadrilateral element (CPE8E) featuring at and 260 kHZ from the 2D FE analysis. TRP
least 20 elements over the shortest wave has been performed at a similar range of
length (λ min ) as shown in Figure 4. The center frequency in order to get the frequency
material properties of PZT transducers, host of best reconstruction (f rc ), at which DI DE is
plate and adhesive are taken from Agrahari minimum, i.e. the similarity with the input
and Kapuria (2015). The maximum element signal is maximum. The best reconstruction
length is 0.5 mm, and the time step is taken frequency has been obtained as 200 kHz from
as 100 ns for excitation frequencies of up to experiment and 180 kHz from 2D FE
300 kHz and 50 ns for higher frequencies, analysis, which is much different from the
satisfying the resolution requirements sweet spot frequency when only S 0 mode is
mentioned earlier. The interfaces between the present.
piezoelectric elements and the adhesive
layers are electrically grounded. For DAMAGE DETECTION USING TRP
actuation, a uniform voltage as per the The damage was introduced in between the
specified modulated tone burst signal is two transducers in the form of a notch of
applied to the top surface of the actuator width 2 mm and depth varying from 0.5 mm
(PZT A). For sensing at PZT B, the to 2.25 mm. It is seen that the damage affects
equipotential condition of the electrode the forward response of the Lamb wave
surface of the sensor is imposed by coupling propagation as well as the TRP of Lamb
the electric potential degree of freedom wave.
(DOFs) of this surface.
There is an extra wave packet between S 0
Damage Index. and A 0 mode waves , generated due to the
A damage index based on the RMSD or the reflections from the damage which is
L 2 error norm, which measures the relative distorting the reconstructed signal as shown
in Figure 5. It is found that the amplitude of
1039
Kapuria and Agrahari
(a) 2D FE
(a) 2D FE
(b) Experiment
Figure 6. Variations of DI ratio based on
extended and main wave packets with
(b) Experiment notch depth
Figure 5. Reconstructed signal at PZT
at f rc for notch of width 2 mm and depth CONCLUSIONS
2.25 mm The numerical and experimental study
For the understanding of the sensitivity of the reveals that the best reconstruction of the
DI to the depth of notch, the ratios of the diagnostic signals after the TRP is generally
refined DIs to their respective threshold achieved at a frequency when both S 0 and A 0
values corresponding to the undamaged plate modes are excited. The damage index
are plotted in Figure 6 at both f ss and f rc , and computed based on the conventional main
compared with the variations in the wave packet is not very sensitive to the
conventional DIs. It is observed that while presence of notch damage, confirming its
the conventional DI comparing the main ineffectiveness for damage detection as has
mode at f ss remains very close to 1 been reported earlier. The refined DI based
(undamaged) in presence of the notch and on the extended wave packet, however, has
does not increase much with the increase in excellent sensitivity to damage depth when
its depth in both simulation and experiments, excited at the best reconstruction frequency.
the refined DI based on the extended wave This is because of the extended wave packet
packet at f rc is very sensitive to the notch captures the extra bands around the main
depth. wave packet, generated from interactions
with the damage.
1040
Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures using A Refined Time-Reversed Lamb Wave
REFERENCES
Agrahari J K and Kapuria S 2015 A refined
Lamb wave time reversal method with
enhanced sensitivity for damage
detection in isotropic plates Journal of
Intelligent Material Systems and
Structures 1-23.
Fink M 1992 Time-reversal of ultrasonic
fields-Part I: Basic principles IEEE
Transactions Ultrasonic, Ferroelectrics
and Frequency Control 39(5) 555–566.
Gangadharan R Murthy CRL Gopalakrishnan
S and Bhat M R 2009 Time reversal
technique for health monitoring of
metallic structure using Lamb waves
Journal of Ultrasonics 49 696–705.
Sohn H Park HW Law K H and Farrar C R
2007 Damage detection in composite
plates by using an enhanced time
reversal method Journal of Aerospace
Engineering 20 141–51.
Xu B and Giurgiutiu V 2007 Single mode
tuning effects on Lamb wave time
reversal with piezoelectric wafer active
sensors for structural health monitoring
Journal of Nondestructive Evaluation 26
123–134.
1041
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
______________________________
delaminated regions in the beam were theory and Timoshenko’s beam theory. Rao
assumed to undergo deformation freely et al., (2012) presented finite element
without any interaction between them. MODELING of sandwich beam with edge
Therefore the prediction regarding free debonded piezoelectric extension actuator
vibration behaviour off mid-plane from the face and edge debonded face from
delamination was not admissible physically. the shear actuator in the core. Experimental
Mujumdar and Suryanarayana, (1988) validation proved the authenticity of the
presented a model for delaminated beam, developed model. Numerical investigations
wherein the delaminated regions were were carried out to assess the effect of extent
constrained to undergo the same transverse of edge debonding under different types of
deformation, while they were allowed to actuations (EAM, SAM and SAM).
undergo axial deformation freely. Della and The sandwich beam with segmented
Shu, (2005) presented an analytical model extension and shear actuators (Figure 1) is
based on classical beam theory for a beam modelled by employing Euler-Bernoulli’s
with double delaminations. The beam with beam theory for the top and bottom faces and
two delaminated planes was modelled with Timoshenko’s beam theory for the core. The
five interconnected beams. Further, it was core consists of shear actuator of prescribed
considered that the thinnest delaminated length and the rest is filled with foam. The
layer was constrained by the other layers to shear actuator is considered to debond from
deform in a constrained mode. the inner surfaces of top and bottom faces as
shown in Figure 1 by red coloured boundary.
The debonded and healthy regions formed as
a result of debonding of shear actuator are
modelled individually and the same are
assembled by imposing constraints for
Figure 1. Piezoelectric sandwich beam
displacement continuity conditions.
Few researchers addressed the problem of
debonding of actuator from the host FINITE ELEMENT MODELING OF
structure. A delaminated piezoelectric SANDWICH BEAM WITH
composite laminate was modelled [Seeley PIEZOELECTRIC ACTUATORS
and Chattopadhyay 1999] with higher order Basic configuration of the sandwich
shear deformation and finite element penalty considered for the development of kinematics
method. The developed model was found to of deformation is shown in Figure 2. The
correlate well with the results from the displacements are u0 along the axis of the
conducted experiments. It was shown that the
sandwich, rotation of core due to shear
length of the debonded actuator was a critical
deformation ψ y , bending slope in the top and
factor and it introduced local and global
deformations, which in turn will have a bottom faces w0,x and deflection w0 .The
significant effect on the mode shapes and displacements and strains in the core, top
frequencies. A beam with debonding of face and bottom face are given in the
actuators/sensors was modelled [Sun and following.
Tong, 2002] for investigating the
longitudinal and transverse vibrations of the
beam by considering both classical beam
1043
Finite Element MODELING of Sandwich Beam with Two-Plane Edge Debonding of Piezoelectric Shear
Actuator
1046
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Critical Buckling Analysis under transverse loading is considered here for
thin spherical shells with clamped boundary conditions, due to its shape sensitivity
based uncertainty aspects. Even though, it have been majorly utilized in practical field
of structural engineering for large spanning structures under cantilevered action or in
multi-spanning aspects. The load resistance mechanism plays important role during
loading is the main criterion in the present work. In this work thin shell with steel
material is utilized where critical buckling load within elastic limit is worked out and
it is compared with literature based Classical Buckling Load. Various H/D ratios are
considered here for understanding the cumulative buckling behaviour associated with
deformation aspect. The economical stiffeners also considered with shell thickness for
dual behaviour along Meridional directions to raise transverse load carrying capacity.
Optimum numbers of stiffeners are worked out with various cross sectional properties
of rolled steel sections along meridian and parallel circle directions. The numbers of
stiffeners are decided as per buckling behaviour of each shell. Commercial code SAP
2000 is also used to calculate the internal in-plane stresses for various loading with
stiffened and unstiffened criterion. Various plots are drawn for Buckling load,
stresses, crown deflections for various H/D ratios.
Keywords: Spherical shell; Buckling; Stiffeners; In-plane stresses
Due to this reason Shell structural element (ISLB150) and Tube-section (ISB 167.6 x
proved to be much Stiffer, Stronger and most 115 x 8.0). Figure 2 & 3 represents the
economical compared to other Voluminous geometry of unstiffened and stiffened
Structural elements. But analysis of shell spherical shell in SAP 2000 respectively.
structures presents a challenge because their
formulation may become clumsy and their
behaviour can be unpredictable with respect
to the geometry or support conditions.
DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS
Using SAP 2000, the buckling load of thin
spherical shell is calculated when the shells
are subjected to externally applied load. For
the buckling of unstiffened and stiffened
spherical shell the various H/D ratio are
considered. Table 1 shows the different cases
of unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell Figure 3.Geometry of Stiffened
with their different rise and span value. Spherical Shell with C-section Stiffener
Table 1 Cases for span and rise of (L=20m, H=2m and t=0.08)
unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell
RESULT AND DISCUSSION
Cases Span (m) Rise (m)
A 20 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 Table 2 shows Buckling load factor for mode
1 to 6. The 1st mode value is considered for
B 30 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 buckling load as it gives critical value for
C 40 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell.
D 45 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 Figure 4 and 5 shows the 1st buckling mode
E 50 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 of unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell.
Figures 6 to 10 shows the Comparison of
For stiffened spherical shell, three hot-rolled unstiffened spherical shell and stiffened
section is used as stiffener profile which is spherical shell having C-section, I-section
based on the Indian Standard (SP-6). The and Tube-section stiffener profile with
sections are C-section (ISLC300), I-section different H/D ratio.
1048
Critical Buckling Analysis of Spherical Shell
4000
2000
1000
0
1/15 1/12 1/10 1/8.5 1/7.5 1/6.67 1/6
H/D Ratio
600
300
0
1/20 1/16 1/13.31/11.4 1/10 1/8.8 1/8
H/D Ratio
800
600
400
200
500
Buckling Load (kN)
14000
12000 400
10000
300
8000
6000 200
4000
100
2000
0 0
1/10 1/8 1/6.6 1/5.7 1/5 1/4.4 1/4 1/25 1/20 1/16.61/14.21/12.51/11.1 1/10
H/D Ratio H/D Ratio
Figure 6. H/D v/s Buckling load, L=20m Figure 10.H/D v/s Buckling load, L=50m
and t=0.08m and t=0.08m
1049
Desai et al.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The research work described in this
manuscript is part of Dissertation work of the
first author and carried out in the Department
of Civil Engineering, Charusat, Changa,
Anand, Gujarat.
REFERENCES
the origin. Let us assume that the The only non-vanishing equation of motion
piezoelectric material is polarized in for the upper irregular piezoelectric layer is
z − direction. given as (Liu et al., 2001)
∂ 2 w1 ∂ 2 w1 1 ∂ 2 w1
+ 2 − 2 2 = 0,
∂x 2
∂y c1 ∂t
(3)
∂ φ1 ∂ φ1 1 e15 ∂ w1
2 2 2
+ − = 0.
∂x 2 ∂y 2 c12 ε11 ∂t 2
c44 e2
where=
c1 ,=
c44 c44 + 15 and c1 is the
ρ1 ε11
shear wave velocity in the irregular piezoelectric
layer.
Figure 1. Geometry of the problem with
parabolic irregularity GOVERNING EQUATION OF
The equation of the interface containing MOTION FOR THE LOWER
parabolic irregularity is defined as ISOTROPIC ELASTIC HALF-SPACE
0 for | y |> s The only existing equation of motion for
isotropic half-space is (Liu et al., 2001)
= h ( y ) y2
x ε= (1)
∂ 2 w2 ∂ 2 w2 1 ∂ 2 w2
H ′ 1 − s 2 for | y |≤ s, + − = 0, (4)
∂x 2 ∂y 2 c22 ∂t 2
1052
Impact of Irregularity on The Propagation Behaviour of Surface Wave in A Layered Piezoelectric
Structure
SOLUTION OF THE PROBLEM For the isotropic half- space [Gubbins, 1990]
Following the perturbation technique µ2 = 15.05 ×1010 N/m 2 , ρ 2 =
12.666×103 kg/m3 .
[Eringen and Samuels, 1959; Chattopadhyay Unless otherwise stated, H ′ H = 0.1.
and Singh, 2012], the dispersion equation for
Love-type wave propagating in a 1.6
1: e15=17 C/m2
3: e15=25 C/m2
irregularity overlying an isotropic half-space
for electrically open case is obtained as 1.4 1
2
3
4 H ′ { χ1ξ1 + χ 2ξ 2 + χ3ξ3 }
1
c/c
(αβ ′ − α ′β ) 1 −
1.3
=0, (11)
3π ( βγ ′ ) 1.2
{ }
1.1
4 H ′ χ ′ξ ′ + χ ′ξ ′ + χ ′ξ ′
( )
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
3π ( X ) 0, (12)
Figure 3. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against
where expressions in Eqs. (11) and (12) are ( kH ) for different values of ( e15 ) in case
provided in Appendix A and Appendix B. of electrically open condition.
When H ′ = 0 and e15 = 0, then Eqs. (11)
and (12) reduce to 1: H'/H=0.0
1.45 2: H'/H=0.15
3: H'/H=0.30
c 2 c2 c2 1.4
c1 c2 c1
3
1
c/c
1.3
1.2
1.15
1.6
1: H'/H=0.0 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8
2: H'/H=0.15 kH
1.5
3: H'/H=0.30
1.4
1
Figure 4. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against
2
1.3
1.2
case of electrically short condition.
1.1
1.1
c/c
1.08
1054
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
4π 2 f 2
α2
= cL2
−ξ2 and β2
= 4π 2 f 2
cT2
−ξ2 ; value is utilized to detect damage in the
transducers.
A ( ξ ) ξβ ξ + β
N= 2 2
(
sin ( α2h ) cos) ( )βh
2 ,
( )
ξ 2 − β sin ( α2h ) cos
DA ( ξ ) = 2 2
( ) + 4ξ αβ cos ( ) sin ( ) and
βh
2
2 αh
2
βh
2
∑ξ πµτ −8 0 Es hs d31 N A (ξ )
VAS ( f ) = ei 2π ft
s1s2 (1−ν s ) (ξ )2 D′ (ξ )
A
π
2
sin (ξ a1 cos γ ) sin (ξ a2 sin γ ) sin (ξ s1 cos γ ) sin (ξ s2 sin γ )
×
∫
0
sin 2 2γ
(1)
INFLUENCE OF TRANSDUCER
Figure 1. Actuator – sensor pair surface DIMENSIONS ON VAS
mounted onto a plate
A plate structure of configuration shown in
From Eq. 1, it may be noted that the VAS figure 3 is considered for the study, where the
depends on the bonded area of the thickness of the plate and transducers are
transducers (actuator a 1 ×a 2 and sensor s 1 ×s 2 ) 1.5mm and 0.5mm, respectively. The
and reducing the in-plane dimensions of the actuators E 1 and E 2 are surface-mounted onto
transducers shifts the peak amplitude of the the top and bottom surface of the plate and
VAS to a higher frequency value. In case of the sensors R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are mounted
occurrence of breakage or debond, the only on the top surface of the plate. The
bonded area of the transducer will also actuators are actuated in A0 mode using 3.5
decrease. cycles amplitude modulated signal. Figure 4
shows the influence of actuator dimensions
Therefore in the event of breakage or debond
on the VAS, where the sensors R 2 and R 3
of the transducers, the following observations
shows a shift the VAS to higher frequency
as shown in Figure 2 are made.
value.
1. The peak amplitude of the VAS in case
of unhealthy actuator-sensor pair occurs
at a higher frequency value (f + ∆f).
2. A reduction in amplitude (∆A) is
observed in the VAS of the unhealthy
actuator sensor pair at a frequency
where peak VAS of healthy actuator
sensor pair occurs.
The former observation, i.e. the breakage or
debond shifts the VAS to a higher frequency
1056
Detection of Damage in Surface-Mounted PZT Transducers using Voltage Amplitude Spectrum
Figure 3. Plate with actuators surface- mounted on both top and bottom surface
1057
Ashwin et al *
Abstract: Vibration energy harvesting with multiple beams in a single device is one
of the way to harvest enough power at wider frequencies for sensors. The presence of
magnetic force between beams may change the performance of the overall system.
This paper studies a simple case of two beams in coupled magnetically is analyzed for
piezoelectric broadband energy harvesting under low frequency excitation. The effect
of magnets and their directions on bandwidth and magnitude of power are analyzed.
The numerical analysis shows that the magnetic coupling increase band width.
MATHEMATICAL MODEL
Figure 1 shows the schematic diagram of
magnetically coupled harvester. There is an
interactive repulsive force between two
coupled harvesters induced by endmost
magnets. Under base excitation, the
electromechanical equation of motion of the Figure 2. Magnet positions
system is given by;
m1x1 + c1 x1 + k1 x1 − θ v1 + F21 − F31 − F41 =
−m1xg Magnets are considered to be as point
m2 x2 + c2 x2 + k2 x2 − θ v2 − F21 − F32 − F42 =
−m2 xg dipoles, the vector from centre of magnet
dipoles are given as;
Λ Λ
v
C p v1 + 1 + θ
x1 =
0 r 21 = (d1 + x1 − x2 ) e x + [ L(1 − cos(δ1 )) − L(1 − cos(δ 2 ))] e z
R Λ Λ
1060
Magnetically Coupled Broad Band Piezoelectric Energy Harvesting
Power mW(P1)
10
0
10
-1
-1 10
10
Forward
-2
Backward
10 -2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Frequency Hz Frequency Hz
2
10 2
10
Forward X: 14
X: 13.6
1
Y: 60.98 Backward Y: 85.12
10 1
10
Power mW(P2)
Power mW(P2)
0 0
10 10
-1 -1
10 10
Forward
Backward
-2 -2
10 10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Frequncy Hz Frequncy Hz
1061
Malaji and Ali
2
10 coupling Journal of Sound and
X: 14.7
Vibration 330 2339–2353.
1 Y: 41.52
10
Friswell M I Ali S F Bilgen O Adhikari S
Power mW(P1)
0
Lees A W and Litak G 2012 Non-linear
10
piezoelectric vibration energy
-1
harvesting from a vertical cantilever
10
Forward beam with tip mass Journal of
Backward
-2
Intelligent Material Systems and
10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Structures 23 1505–1521.
Frequency Hz
2 Glynne-Jones P Tudor M J Beeby S P and
10
White N M 2004 An electromagnetic,
X: 14.8
1
10
Y: 44.34 vibration-powered generator for
intelligent sensor systems Sensors and
Power mW(P2)
0
10
Actuators-A: Physical 110 344–349.
Malaji P and Ali S 2015 Analysis of energy
-1
10 Forward harvesting from multiple pendulums
Backward with and without mechanical coupling
-2
10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 The European Physical Journal Special
Frequncy Hz Topics 224 2823–2838.
Figure 5. Magnetically coupled PEH Shahruz S 2006 Design of mechanical band-
(Both fixed magnets in same direction pass filters for energy scavenging
North downward) Journal of Sound and Vibration 292
A detailed analysis of harvester for high 987–998.
power and band width will be presented in Stanton S C McGehee C C and Mann B P
final manuscript. 2010 Nonlinear dynamics for broadband
energy harvesting: Investigation of a
CONCLUSION bistable piezoelectric inertial generator
Physica D: Nonlinear Phenomena 239
A analytical model for magnetically coupled
640–653.
piezoelectric harvesters is developed to study
the behavior of the system. Numerical Tang L and Yang Y 2012 A nonlinear
piezoelectric energy harvester with
simulations are carried out to compare linear
magnetic oscillator Applied Physics
and magnetically coupled harvesters. Letters 101 1–4.
Magnetically coupled harvesters generate
Williams C and Yates R 1995 Analysis Of A
power over wider bandwidth than linear
Micro-electric Generator For
harvesters with certain magnet directions. Microsystems Proceedings of the
International Solid-State Sensors and
REFERENCES Actuators Conference -
Ali S F Friswell M I and Adhikari S 2010 TRANSDUCERS ’95 1 8–11
Piezoelectric energy harvesting with Zhou S Cao J Wang W Liu S and Lin J 2015
parametric uncertainty Smart Materials Modeling and experimental verification
and Structures 19 1–9. of doubly nonlinear magnet-coupled
Erturk and Inman D 2011 Broadband piezoelectric energy harvesting from
piezoelectric power generation on high- ambient vibration Smart Materials and
energy orbits of the bistable Duffing Structures 24 1-13.
oscillator with electromechanical
1062
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Keywords: Piezoelectric layer; Layer wise liner theory; Finite element formulation;
Potential.
In Classical Plate Theory (CLPT), the where u0 , v0 , w0 are the in-plane and
transverse shear deformation has not been transverse displacements of point ( x, y ) on
considered in the analysis and that leads to mid-plane respectively and x ,y are the
ineffectuality of the theory for thick plate and rotations of normal to mid-plane about y and
composite laminate 0analysis. A Reissner- x axes respectively.
w
xz x 0
x It is assumed that the variation of electric
potential throughout the layer is linear. The
Linear constitutive equations of piezoelectric electric potential ф for kth layer is given by
materials, including the converse and direct
piezoelectric effects, can be written as N
k
e
C eE
Z i Z Z Z i 1
where, N ; Zi Z Z i 1
D e E h
T
h
where, Nф is shape function for electric potential and
x y z xy yz xz
T
фe is the matrix of electric potentials at
surfaces (top and bottom)
x y z xy yz xz
T
displacement vector.
K u Piezoelectric coupling matrix = B e B dv
T
11
T
0 0 0 0 e15 0 0 0
e 0 0 0 0 0 e24 0 22 0
e31 e32 e33 0 0 0 0 0 33 K uu K u d P
L L K u Ku e q
x Q11 Q12 x
L
0
y Q12 Q22 0 y
In this expression, Kuu, KuФ, KuФ, KuФ are the
0 stiffness and P, q are the external force.
xy 0 Q33 xy Stiffness and force are known quantitates.
Displacement d, Фe are unknown quantities.
The stress-strain relationship for a typical
After applying boundary conditions,
lamina L with reference to laminate co-
displacements are find out.
ordinate system by using usual
1064
Finite Element analysis of a Piezoelectric Plate based on First order Shear Deformation Theory
0.5 0.5
0.4 U_FEM 0.4 U_Heylinger
0.3 U_Semi‐analytical 0.3 U_FEM
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.05 ‐0.025 0 0.025 0.0 ‐0.5 ‐0.3 ‐0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5
U(a/2,b/2) U(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
W_FEM 0.4 Txx_FEM
0.4
0.3 W_Semi‐analytical 0.3 Txx_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
0
Z/h
0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 ‐25 ‐20 ‐15 ‐10 ‐5 0 5 10 15 20 25
W(a/2,b/2) Txx(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
Txx_FEM
0.4 0.4 W_FEM
Txx_Semi‐analytical
0.3 0.3 W_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.3 ‐0.2 ‐0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0. 0 1E‐09 2E‐09 3E‐09 4E‐09
Txx(a/2,b/2) W(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
Txy_FEM
0.4 0.4 Txy_FEM
Txy_Semi‐analytical
0.3 0.3 Txy_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.15 ‐0.1 ‐0.05 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 ‐10 ‐8 ‐6 ‐4 ‐2 0 2 4 6 8 10
Txy(0,0) Txy(0,0)
1065
Pendhari et al.
CONCLUSION
Proposed finite element model has been
developed for analysis of single layered
PVDF plate under sinusoidal loading as well
as electrical loading for simply supported
boundary condition. Results are in good
agreement with the available results for all
aspect ratios.
REFERENCES
Benjeddou A. D. Jean-F. 2000 A two-
dimensional closed-form solution for
the free-vibrations analysis of
piezoelectric sandwich plates
International Journal of Solids and
Structures 39 1463–1486.
1066
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Concrete pavements are commonly used because of their durability, their
ability to overcome sub-grade weakness, and difficult climatic conditions. The
serviceability and longevity of rigid pavement constructions depend on the rate of
pavement deterioration which is a function of factors such as material properties,
climatic effects and vehicular load characteristics. The load applied by traffic on
highway rigid pavements is of repetitive nature. This repetitive action of loads
produces fatigue damage in the pavement structure, deteriorating pavement stiffness
and supporting capabilities. Concrete in the slab is under the action of repetitive
stressing and straining, which leads to originating fatigue damage in it in the form of
internal micro-cracking, which eventually results in large localized cracks in the slab.
Cracks can occur at any location within the pavement where tensile stresses exceed
the concrete flexural strength. Tensile stresses are induced in a rigid pavement due to
bending action of concrete base under vehicular as well as climatic forces. In order to
overcome the problems associated with concrete pavements an attempt has been made
to study the behavior of polypropylene reinforced concrete in pavement structure with
the help of Finite element analysis software package ANSYS (Version 11). A 3D
Finite element model adopted by Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014) is used to
investigate the applicability of Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in concrete
pavements. Stresses and deflection observed in the model are compared with classical
approach of Westergaard’s and Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014). Obtained results
are found to be in reasonable agreement with available literature.
Keywords: Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete; Finite element analysis;
Wheel load stress; rigid pavements; etc.
point. Thus, the stresses taking place at a validate and predict the performance of
certain point can be approximated by those Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in
produced by an impact load. In addition, rigid pavement. Duncan et al (1968) was
traffic loads are applied constantly on the among the first to apply finite element
pavement resulting in a repetitive action. As a method to the pavement analysis. For this
whole, the concrete slabs receive repetitive purpose, the structural analysis package
bending stresses. Repetitive traffic loads ‘ANSYS’ (Version 11) has been used. The
deteriorate the interior of the structure of each concrete slab has been modeled as SOLID 45
layer, as well as the interfaces between the brick element, having 8 nodes with three
layers. The concrete slabs suffer flexural degrees of freedom per node, translations in
fatigue damage, which produces internal the nodal x, y and z directions. The subgrade
microcracking and localized reduction of the is modeled as Winkler foundation that
strength and stiffness of the concrete. An consists of a bed of closely spaced,
attempt has been made to study the independent, linear springs. Spring elements
applicability of Polypropylene fibre namely COMBIN 14 are used to represent the
reinforced concrete in rigid pavement with Winkler foundation which has three degrees
the help of results published for high grade of of freedom in the nodal x, y and z directions.
concrete (M30 and M40) by incorporating Data adopted for modelling purpose is as
Polypropylene fibre in mix and Finite under,
element analysis. Polypropylene fibre
a) Dimension of concrete slab: 4.5m x 3.7m
reinforced concrete consist of thousands of
x 0.16m.
small fibers which are dispersed and
b) Properties of concrete: Modulus of
distributed randomly in the concrete during
Elasticity, E = 3 x 1010 N/ m2, Poission’s
mixing, and thus improve concrete properties
ratio = 0.15, Co-efficient of thermal
in all directions. Fibers help to improve the
post peak ductility performance, pre-crack expansion, α = 10 x 10 -6 / 0C , Density , γ
tensile strength, fatigue strength, impact = 24000 N/ m3.
strength and eliminate temperature and c) Results of Polypropylene fibre reinforced
shrinkage cracks. concrete for M30 and M40 grade have
been adopted from Mohod (2015),
optimum percentage incorporation of
Polypropylene fibre in concrete mix is
0.5%. Modulus of Elasticity for M30 and
M40 grade of concrete are E1 = 3.074 x
1010 N/ m2 (M30) and E2= 2.977 x 1010 N/
m2 (M40).
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION From the results it can be seen that present
ANSYS results are slightly on the higher side
The concrete pavement slab model have been
when compared with the values of ANSYS
analysed for different wheel loads (Single
results from Imran Khan and Harwalkar,
axle load-60 kN and Tandem axel load-120
2014 and Westergaard’s. Maximum flexural
kN) by using ANSYS. Maximum flexural
stress and deflection computed by using
stresses and deflection observed for edge
Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in
Wheel loads are presented in graphical form.
pavement structure are in agreement with
Comparison of flexural stress and deflection
maximum wheel stress data reported by
with results presented by Reference Imran
reference Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014).
Khan and Harwalkar (2014) are shown in
Fig.3 and Fig 5 for different wheel loads
(Single axle load-60 kN and Tandem axel
load-120 kN).
DISCUSSION
A single element of slab has been used for
analysis by using Finite element analysis. For
validation purpose flexural stresses and
deflections developed in present ANSYS
model are compared in tabular and graphical
form. Wheel load stresses calculated using
Westregaard’s equation and Imran Khan and Figure 4. Displacement Contours in Rigid
Harwalkar (2014). The comparison is Pavement
provided in Table 1, Figure 1 and Figure 2.
1069
Mohod and Kadam
Table 1 Maximum stress in pavement for wheel load (Single axle load-60 kN)
0.7
[2]-60kN Present-60kN
0.6
[2]-120kN Present-120kN
0.5 M30-60kN M30-120kN
0.4 M40-60kN M40-120kN
Deflection
0.3
(mm)
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35
K (N/mm2)
[2] - Imran Khan and Harwalkar, 2014
Fig.5 Comparison of pavement deflection for different wheel loads.
1070
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
w( x, z ) w0 ( x) (2)
The electric field in the transverse direction is where 4 h 2 . On solving Eq. (8), we
defined as [Sulbhewar and Raveendranath, get:
2014]: ( x, z ) ( x ) ( z h ) ( x )
Ez ( x, z ) ( x, z ) z (5) (e15 1 ) z 3 3 z h 2 12 0 ( x)
(9)
where is electric potential.
where the conventional linear terms, ( x) and
The coupled constitutive relations for shear
( x) are the average and difference of the
mode piezoelectric material are given as
[Sulbhewar and Raveendranath, 2014]: surface potentials, respectively.
The higher order coupled term defines the
x Q11 0 0 x induced part of the potential and is a function
xz 0 Q55 e15 xz (6) of geometric, piezoelectric and dielectric
D 0
z e15 1 Ez properties.
Using Eq. (5), the electric field is derived as:
1072
Accurate Modelling of Shear Monomorph Sensors
t1 j 1
t2
u0 Q11 I 0u0 I1w0 I1 I 3 0
' ' '' ' 2
t1 x
w0j H wj w0j H wj ' w0' j . (14b)
j 1
w0'' Q11 I1u0' I 2 w0'' I 2 I 4 0'
Substituting Eq. (14) in Eqs. (12) and (13)
I1 I 3 u0' I 2 I 4 w0'' and using them in Eq. (11), the following
0 Q11
'
2
I 2 I 2 I '
4 6 0
discretized form of the model in terms of
matrix equations is obtained:
55 0
Q I 2 I 2 I
2 4 0
Kuu Ku U f
2
0 e15 1 (5 / 9) I 0 2 I 2 I 4 0
2
Ku
K q
(15)
(e15 I 0 h)(1 h 2 / 12)
(e I h)(1 h 2 / 12) Where Kuu , Ku , K are the global mechanical,
15 0 0
dx dt (12) piezoelectric and dielectric stiffness sub-
(1 I 0 / h )
2
matrices, respectively; U , are the global
where 4 3h 2 and I i b( zti 1 zbi 1 ) / (i 1)
mechanical and electrical nodal degrees of
freedom vectors, respectively; f and q are
As seen from the Eq. (12), the induced global mechanical and electrical nodal force
coupled term changes the structural stiffness vectors, respectively.
of the shear monomorph.
The variation on work of external forces is NUMERICAL EXAMPLES AND
given as: DISCUSSIONS
t2
The cantilever shear monomorph (h=18 mm
dV
t2
W dt ufuV wf wV and L=100 mm) of PZT 5H material [Kapuria
t1 t1 V and Hagedorn, 2007] with a tip load of 1000
S
ufu wf w dS
S S
(13)
N is studied here. The results for transverse
deflection, potential developed along the
length of monomorph, through-thickness
ufuC wf wC q0 dS dt
potential and shear stress are shown in
S figures 2 (a), (b), (c) and (d), respectively. As
seen from the results, though the
1073
Raveendranath and Sulbhewar
REFERENCES
Chee C Y K Tong L and Steven G P 1999 A
mixed model for composite beams with
piezoelectric actuators and sensors
Smart Materials and Structures 8 417-
432.
Figure 2(b). Potential developed.
Kapuria S and Hagedorn P 2007 Unified
CONCLUSIONS efficient layerwise theory for smart
An appropriate through-thickness potential beams with segmented extension/shear
distribution for shear monomorph sensors, mode piezoelectric actuators and
consistent with HSDT, has been derived and sensors Journal of Mechanics of
successfully employed in the finite element Materials and Structures 2 1267-1298.
formulation. Present formulation takes care Sulbhewar L N and Raveendranath P 2014
of nonlinear nature of through-thickness Importance of accommodating induced
potential, with the help of coupled term, potential effects in the modelling of
without adding any extra nodal degree of shear monomorph sensors Proceeding of
freedom in the formulation. Conventional 5th International Congress on
HSDT formulations based on linear through- Computational Mechanics and
thickness potential need number of sublayers Simulation (ICCMS2014) CSIR-IIT
in the mathematical modelling to achieve Madras India December 2014.
same level of accuracy as of present
formulation.
1074
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Electricity is the greatest crisis in the world on one side and another side is
environmental pollution is caused by E-waste especially due to smart devices such as
mobile phones, laptops, compact devices, computer spare parts, unrecyclicable batteries
etc. By considering these problems authors are taken up a research on energy harvesting
by using ambient vibrations. In this field so far people had done a lot of research only
by using clamped-free beam with tip mass for dynamic flexibility. In this paper the
authors are demonstrating the novel energy harvester cram by using clamp-free beam
with impact mass harvester as a tip mass. Here impact mass harvester is fulfilled the
both purposes one is for generating electricity and the another one is for dynamic
flexibility by absorbing vibrations. The mass of 9 grams lead material is considered as
a hitting mass on Lead Zirconate Titanate(PZT) patch and developed a voltage of 45.25
V is on average and 98 V is the maximum as an output at the resonance frequency of
82.231Hz for charging the impulse power applications.
Keywords: Novel energy scavenger; Vibration absorber; Clamped free beam.
1077
Viswanath and Shrikanth
REFERENCES
Ming Li Yumei Wen Ping Li Jin Yang
Xianzhi Dai 2011 A rotation energy
harvester employing cantilever beam
and magneto rictive laminate transducer
Sensors and Actuators A 166 102–110.
Anuruddh Kumar Anshul Sharma Rajeev
Kumar Rahul Vaish Chauhan VS 2014
Finite element analysis of vibration
energy harvesting using lead-free
piezoelectric materials: A comparative
study Journal of Asian Ceramic
Societies 2 138–143.
Bhuyan MS Masuri Othman Sawal Mahid
Mahammad Ali 2013 Investigation and
design of MEMS based energy
harvesters with aspect of autonomous
automobile sensors Asian journal of
scientific research 6(1) 1-15.
Vijay Kumar Sharma Srikanth K Viswanath
K 2014 Influence of cross-sectional area
of a dynamic magnifier for vibration
energy harvesting Proceedings of 4th
IRF International Conference
Hyderabad India ISBN: 978-93-84209-
00-1 69-72
Vishwanath K Allamraju Srikanth K 2014
Review and scope of scavenging micro
energy using piezoelectric materials
Advanced Materials Manufacturing &
Characterization 4(2) 96-100.
Mossi K Green C Ounaies Z Hughes E 2005
Harvesting energy using a thin unimorph
prestressed bender: geometrical effects
Journal of Intelligent Material Systems
and Structures 16 249–261.
Srikanth Korla Tansel I N 2011 Design and
testing of an efficient and compact
piezoelectric energy harvester
Microelectronics Journal 42 265–270.
1078
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents an energy-based approach for extracting the dynamic
instability parameters of dielectric elastomer actuators (DEAs) subjected to unequal
biaxial prestress. The standard sandwich model of DEA made up of neo-Hookean
material is considered for enunciating the underlying steps of theapproach. When such
actuator-model is driven by applying a Heaviside step voltage, the temporal response
exhibits a saddle-node bifurcation at the critical value of the applied step-voltage. This
threshold is referred to as the DC dynamic instability, and is one of the crucial
criterion in the design of DEAs. The proposed approach relies on establishing the
energy balance at the point of maximum stretch in an oscillation cycle followed by the
application of an instability condition to extract the critical values of the electric field
and the lateral stretches on the onset of the DC dynamic instability. Additionally, the
governing differential equation of motion is devised using the Euler-Lagrange
equation and integrated to validate the predictions of the dynamic instability
parameters. The comparison shows a close agreement, and highlights the utility of the
proposed approach in circumventing the need for performing time-integrations to
extract the dynamic instability parameters. The influence of unequal biaxial prestress
is examined by performing a parametric study. Results of the present investigation can
find their potential use in the design of DEAs subjected to transient loading.
Keywords: Dielectric elastomer actuators; biaxial prestress; dynamic instability
parameters; energy approach; equation of motion.
1 1 − 2 2 −
inferred that the dynamic instability can be
2
realized at voltages significantly less than
those corresponding to the static instability. Where μ represents the shear modulus of the
Subsequently, an energy-based approach was
elastomer. Also, E and ε represent the
suggested by Joglekar (2014; 2015) which
nominal electric field (V/2H) and the
circumvented the need for performing
permittivity of the elastomer, respectively.
iterating time integrations to extract the
dynamic instability parameters. However, When driven by a step voltage, the temporal
only the case of equal-biaxial prestress was response of the actuator (i.e., stretches as a
considered in those analyses, which function of time) is periodic up to a certain
facilitated the formulation of the governing voltage and turns aperiodic for voltages
equations in terms of a single independent exceeding this critical value. In the
stretch parameter. This paper extends this following, an energy-based approach is
approach by accommodating the case of outlined to extract this threshold voltage and
unequal biaxial prestress. the critical values of principal stretches on
the onset of the DC dynamic instability.
ENERGY-BASED METHOD OF
SOLUTION
In this method, it is assumed that the system
is conservative, and the energy dissipation
has negligible effect on the system dynamics.
When the actuator system is driven by a step
voltage, a fixed amount of electrostatic
energy proportional to the square of the
Figure 1. Schematic of a step-voltage
magnitude of the applied step voltage is
driven DEA.
imparted to the system. To obtain its
PROBLEM DEFINITION estimate, the free-energy function stated in
Eq. (1) is first expressed in terms of the
Figure 1 shows the sandwich model of a
dimensionless parameters as
step-voltage driven DEA subjected to an
1 2
unequal biaxial prestress. The stretches in
( λ1 + λ22 + λ1−2 λ2−2 − 3) −
three principal directions are denoted by λ 1 , G = 8 H ' L '2
2
(2)
Ω λ − Ω λ − e λ1 λ2
2 2 2
λ 2 , and λ 3 , respectively. Due to 1 1
2 2
2
incompressibility of the elastomer, these
1080
An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of Dielectric Elastomer
Actuators with Unequal Biaxial Prestress
where, Ω 1 = (S 1 /μ), Ω 2 = (S 2 /μ), and stagnation curve relates the applied electric
e = E ε / µ represent the dimensionless field to the corresponding stretches at the
point of maximum overshoot, and is obtained
stresses and electric field, respectively. In
as
order to derive the expression for the kinetic
energy, the following equation is used: D = (λ
1
2
+ λ22 + λ1−2 λ2−2 − 3)
1
∫∫∫
(5)
= T ρ ( x12 + x22 + x32 )dv , (3) −2Ω1 (λ1 − 1) − 2Ω 2 (λ2 − 1)
2 v
−e 2 ( λ12 λ22 − 1) =
0.
Where ρ represents the density of the de
Two conditions of instability, i.e., =0
elastomer. By using the incompressibility d λ1
conditions and the definition of the stretch
de
ratios, Eq. (3) can be simplified as and = 0 are applied to Eq. (5). The
d λ2
4
= T ρ L '4 H '(λ12 + λ22 ) resulting two equations together with Eq. (5)
3
2. (4) are then solved for the critical values of λ1 ,
4 3 λ1 λ2
+ ρL' H ' 2 +
2
2 λ2 and e. These values represent the DC
3 λ1 λ2 λ1λ2
dynamic instability parameters of the
The Hamiltonian of the actuator system can dielectric elastomer actuator subjected to the
now be written as H= G + T . Assuming that unequal biaxial pre-stress. The dynamic
the system starts from the rest, at t = 0, the instability fields predicted by this approach
stretches are equal to unity, and their time are listed in Table 1 for various values of the
derivatives are equal to zero. Therefore, the prestress ratio.
system Hamiltonian at t = 0 [denoted by H
(0)] can be obtained by setting λ 1 = λ 2 =1.0, TIME INTEGRATION BASED
and λ1 = λ2 = 0 in Eq. (2). Because the METHOD OF SOLUTION
system is conservative, the system In this method, the Lagrangian is first
Hamiltonian remains unchanged, and hence, devised as L= T − G and subsequently the
D =− H H (0) = 0 represents an energy Euler-Lagrange equation for two variables,
constraint on the system. Physically, the i.e., λ 1 , and λ 2 is applied to obtain the
equation D = 0 represents the energy-balance following two equations:
between the strain energy, kinetic energy and −λ2 2λ12
λ1 (c + λ1−4 λ2−2 ) = +
the work potential. At the point of maximum (λ1λ1 )3 (λ15λ22 )
overshoot in an oscillation cycle, because the 2λ 2 2λ λ (6)
velocity is zero, the strain energy stored in + 3 2 4 + 41 32
(λ1 λ2 ) (λ1 λ2 )
the actuator is equal to the electric work
−3c[λ1 − λ1−3λ2−2 − Ω1 − e 2 λ1λ22 ]
potential. This condition can be obtained by
setting λ1 = λ2 = 0 together with λ 1 = λ1 and
−λ1 2λ12
λ2 (c + λ2 λ1 ) =
−4 −2
+
λ 2 = λ2 in the expression of D = 0 which (λ1λ1 )3 (λ14 λ23 )
(7)
leads to the equation of the stagnation curve 2λ 2 2λ λ
+ 2 2 5 + 31 42
represented by D = 0 . Here, λ1 and λ2 denote (λ1 λ2 ) (λ1 λ2 )
the lateral stretches at the maximum −3c[λ2 − λ1−2 λ2−3 − Ω 2 − e 2 λ2 λ12 ]
overshoot position. The equation of the
1081
Bajpayee et al.
These equations are integrated using the The present analysis suggests that the critical
ODE solvers available in MATLAB. The electric field sufficient to trigger the dynamic
critical electric field is identified as the one at instability is less than that corresponding to
which the response turns aperiodic. The the static instability. These observations can
dynamic instability fields predicted using the be useful in the design of DEAs subjected to
time-integration approach are listed in Table transient electrostatic loading.
1, which show close agreement with those
obtained using the energy-approach ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
described earlier. A representative plot The authors wish to thank Department of
showing the time-history response for Science and Technology, GoI for financial
various applied electric fields (corresponding assistance through Grant No: SER-774-MID
to the case Ω1 / Ω 2 =0.75 ) is shown in
REFERENCES
Figure. 2.
Pelrine R Kornbluh R Pei Q and Joseph J
2000 High-speed electrically
actuated elastomers with strain
greater than 100% Science 287
(5454) 836–839.
Xu B X Mueller R Theis A Klassen M
and Gross D 2012 Dynamic analysis
of dielectric elastomer actuators
Appl. Phys. Lett. 100(11) Art. No.
112903.
Joglekar M M 2014 An energy-based
approach to extract the dynamic
Figure 2. Time-history response of the instability parameters of dielectric
stretch induced in DEA for different elastomer actuators ASME J. Appl.
dimensionless electric fields Mech. 81(9) Art. No. 091010.
[ Ω1 / Ω 2 = 0.75].
1082
An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of Dielectric Elastomer
Actuators with Unequal Biaxial Prestress
1083
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper presented a calculations of lead zirconate titanate (PZT) disc
at different resonance frequencies such as frequency constant, capacitance, static
displacement and static voltages under variable forces. These are the basics for
analytical studies and the design of a energy harvesters by using ambient vibrations.
The static displacement is very small for PZT-5H when the voltage is applied. It
comes under inverse piezoelectric effect. If the applied voltage is 94 mV for the disc
of 32 mm diameter and 2 mm thickness the change in displacement is 59.22X10-
12
m.And also concluded with the effect of voltage constant (g33) in generating the
static voltage which plays very important key role.
Keywords: PZT; frequency constant; capacitance; static voltage.
transmission and acquisition units self- capable of harvesting energy from the
powered. ambient vibration. By properly designing the
parameters, such as the length, diameter and
LITERATURE REVIEW
mass of the shell and hitting masses, we can
This review only shows the devices which increase energy generated. For finding these
are made by the past researchers in the area parameters we carried out parametric analysis
of energy harvesting by using ambient in SIMULINK. The main aim of the project
vibrations but the output of those devices are is to get maximum voltage & power.
only in micro watts because not availing the Analysis is carried out by varying the
tools which are available at present such as geometry, mass of a shell & stiffness of
Matlab, Catia, Ansys etc. Authors are spring. Ki Hwan described a method for
focusing on Piezo electric generation by man efficient piezoelectric energy harvesting from
powered and impact coupled devices. Power impacts using an array of piezoelectric
may be recovered passively from body heat, modules. He showed that rectifying the
breathing, blood pressure, arm motion, output of each module separately affords
typing, and walking or actively through user higher output voltage and faster charging
actions such as winding or pedalling. John than the use of a single rectifier. In addition,
Kymissis examined three different devices an increase in the rate of impacts produces an
that can be built into a shoe, and used for increase in output voltage and charging rate.
generating electrical power "parasitically" However, under real conditions, it may not be
while walking. One of these is piezoelectric practical to increase the rate of impacts.
in nature: a unimorph strip made from Piezo Instead, it is more practical to include a phase
ceramic composite material. The second is a difference. The inclusion of a phase
shoe-mounted rotary magnetic generator difference between impacts on individual
[Kymissis et al., 2012]. Later in 2002 Jose modules in the array has the same effect as an
Luis Gonzalez shown how it is feasible to use increase in the rate of impacts increase in the
the energy harvested from human body to charging rate. Another advantage of
power wearable units incorporating including a phase difference is that the forces
computing, communication and audio are distributed temporally. These methods
functions. Existing shoe mounted rotary can be used to realize more efficient
electromechanical generators can provide piezoelectric energy harvesting [Baek et al.,
enough power from walking to supply these 2012].
devices. The generators based on
piezoelectric effect are or will be also capable Later Kumar discussed the simulation studies
of powering wearable units. However more on a vibration based energy harvesting
investigation and development is necessary to system to convert the undesirable mechanical
raise the electrical output power for the vibration to useful green power. The design
existing prototypes to the power level that consists of a resonating proof mass and a
can be obtained theoretically [Gonzalez et al., spring system enclosed in housing and fixed
2012]. Spring-comprised Piezoelectric on the source of vibration. He proposed that
Energy Generator (SPEG) for random by using an array of such devices tuned to
vibration is modelled and analyzed in this slightly different frequencies, a wide
work. The work basically focuses a novel bandwidth response can be obtained [Kumar
spring comprised piezoelectric energy et al., 2012]. Shashank presented a patent as
harvester with hitting masses, which is “energy harvesting with plurality of
1085
Radial and Thickness Mode Calculations of PZT-5H Disc by using Ambient Vibrations
REFERENCES
John Kymissis Clyde Kendall Joseph
Paradiso and Neil Gershenfeld 2012
Parasitic Power Harvesting in Shoes
Physics and Media Group MIT Media
Laboratory E15-410 Cambridge MA
02139 USA.
Jose Luis Gonzalez, Antonio Rubio and
Francesc Moll 2012powered
piezoelectric batteries to supply power
Figure.2 Generation of voltage at different wearable electronic devices Universitat
trials of forces Politecnica de Catalunya C/ Jordi
Figures 1 and 2 describes the output static Girona1-3.
voltages at different applied forces. Figure 1
Ki Hwan BaekSeongKwang Hong Se Bin
indicates the values of output static voltage of
Kim Jeong Hun Kim and Tae Hyun
maximum 947 mV at the maximum force of
Sung 2012 Rectifier and structural
1086
Allamraju K.V.
1087
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Linear harvester draws maximum energy when the natural frequency of the
device matches the input frequency. Off-resonance conditions, the output power falls
significantly. To increase the total power harvested and at multiple frequencies a
hybrid energy harvester is proposed. In the present idea, cantilevered beam with
piezoelectric unimorph configuration used to harvest energy from piezoelectric strain
and permanent magnets are hung in two different places at beam with a linear elastic
spring used to harvest electromagnetic energy out of motion in a magnetic field. Both
piezoelectric and electromagnetic energies are tapped in a single device making it a
hybrid harvesting device. This study analyses hybrid harvester power output and
compares them with the stand-alone piezoelectric and electromagnetic harvester under
harmonic base motions.
Keywords: Energy harvesting; piezoelectric; electromagnetic; hybrid
harvesters.
increase the bandwidth by using multiple beam, and a tip mass is attached at the free
piezoelectric cantilevers with different end. A permanent magnet is suspended at its
dimensions and different tip masses are on end with a linear elastic spring. The copper
the same platform. However, these systems coil is placed in the axis of movement of the
significantly increase the volume and weight.
permanent magnet as shown in Figure 1.
Yang et al. (2010) developed an energy-
harvesting technique based on the Another magnet with spring and copper coil
electromagnetic method using simply also arranged similarly at a distance ′x′ from
supported beam with multiple magnets. the fixed end of the beam. The beam and
Using multiple independent transduction copper coils setup are mounted on source of
techniques in the same model is another vibration structure. This system generates the
solution for scavenging optimal power over a power from piezoelectricity and
multiple frequency. For this reason, a hybrid electromagnetism phenomena when
energy harvester is proposed. Challa et al. subjected to base excitation. To simplify the
(2009) and Yang et al. (2010) developed the analysis of this physical model, an equivalent
vibration based hybrid energy harvesting lumped mass model is used to represent the
technology based on coupled piezoelectric
harvester as shown in Figure 2.
and electromagnetic mechanisms. These
models consist a beam with piezoelectric
patches and permanent magnets rigidly
attached to the tip of the cantilever beam with
electrical circuit arrangement. It was found
that the electromagnetic system generates
high output power at low frequency, while
piezoelectric generates higher power at
higher frequency.
The proposed model is improvised from the
existing model. In the existing model the EM
part is directly attached to the tip of the
cantilever, whereas the improvised model, Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the
EM part is suspended through a spring. In proposed hybrid energy harvester.
this work, an improvised hybrid energy
harvester is modelled as a four degrees of
freedom lumped parameter model. The
hybrid system is analysed for harvested
power compared to that of stand-alone
devices. The standalone PE device consists
unimorph cantilever beam with tip mass and
the stand-alone EM device consists spring
with magnet and copper coil. Numerical
simulations are carried out to show the power
output under harmonic base motion.
MODELING OF ENERGY
Figure 2. An equivalent lumped
HARVESTER
mass model of the hybrid energy
Figure 1 illustrates the schematic diagram of harvester.
a hybrid energy harvesting device. MFC is
bonded on the upper surface of the cantilever
1089
Vibration based hybrid energy harvester for broadband harvesting
y2 r + c2 y 2 r − cm 3 y3r + k2 y2 r
m2 This section discusses the simulated results
−k3 y3r = − m2 ( y1r + yg ) obtained in this study. Numerical (2)
simulations are carried out with
y3r + cm 3 y3r + k3 y3r
m3 harmonic excitation at the base. Figure 3
(3)
=−m2 (
y2 r + y1r +
yg ) shows the theoretical powers obtained from
y3r + cm 3 y3r + k3 y3r
m3 stand-alone PE, stand-alone EM and hybrid
(4) harvester (HVEH) under the consideration of
=−m2 (
y2 r + y1r +
yg )
1mm base excited amplitude. Theoretical
Vp power plot clearly shows that the hybrid
θ y1r + C pVP + =
0 (5)
Rp harvester produce the high power in a
broader frequency range whereas the
where, k i 's and c i 's are stiffnesses and
standalone devices produces the maximum
damping coefficients. y i 's are the relative
power only at their own resonating
displacement of m i 's respectively. y g is the
frequency. Out of resonance, the stand-alone
base excited amplitude. Cp is the electrical
harvesters power reduced drastically.
capacitance of MFC. V p is voltage developed
by the MFC when subjected to mechanical RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
strain and θ is the electromechanical coupling 2
10
-2
10
Therefore, a linear harvester is carried that has through damping matching Smart
broadband like nonlinear harvesters. Further, Materials and Structures 18 1-11.
parametric study for enhancing the bandwidth
and efficiency of the harvester will be
presented in full length paper.
REFERENCES
Erturk A and Inman D J 2008 On mechanical
modeling of cantilevered piezoelectric
vibration energy harvesters Journal of
Intelligent Material Systems and
Structures 19 1311-1325.
Erturk A and Inman D J 2008 A distributed
parameter electromechanical model for
cantilevered piezoelectric energy
harvesters Journal of Vibration and
Acoustics 130 1-15.
Erturk A and Inman D J 2009 An
experimentally validated bimorph
cantilever model for piezoelectric energy
harvesting from base excitations Smart
Materials and Structures 18 1-18.
Beeby S P Torah R N Tudor M J Glynne-
Jones P O'Donnell T Saha C R and Roy
S 2007 A micro electromagnetic
generator for vibration energy harvesting
Journal of Micromechanics and
microengineering 17 1257-1265.
Ali S F and Adhikari S 2013 Energy
harvesting dynamic vibration absorbers
Journal of Applied Mechanics 80 1-9.
Shahruz S M 2006 Design of mechanical
band-pass filters for energy scavenging.
Journal of Sound and Vibration 292 987-
998.
Yang B Lee C Kee W L and Lim S P 2010
Hybrid energy harvester based on
piezoelectric and electromagnetic
mechanisms. Journal of
Micro/Nanolithography MEMS and
MOEMS 9 1-10.
Challa V R Prasad M G and Fisher F T 2009
A coupled piezoelectric-electromagnetic
energy harvesting technique for
achieving increased power output
1091
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1997; Ray et al., 2005) but the essential those of the inner, middle and outer regions
features of the bamboo microstructure that of the transverse cross section. The third set
contribute to and determine its strength and of specimens (shown in Fig. 1(c)) was
stiffness have not been clearly identified. prepared to test the mechanical strength of
the sclerenchymatous fibers.
We show that in order to obtain a reliable
estimate of the axial mechanical properties
of a particular species of bamboo,
knowledge of a small set of key parameters
is sufficient. These include the areal
distribution of fibers, average orientation
angle of the cellulose microfibrils in the
fiber secondary cell walls and size
distribution of the fibers. Apparent
sweeping simplifications like ignoring the
Figure 1. A bamboo culm showing
amorphous nature of a part of the cellulose,
different test samples extracted from it.
assuming approximate values of the
stiffness of the amorphous non-cellulosic Tension tests have been conducted on either
polysaccharides in the microfibrils, size a Universal Testing machine fitted with a 10
distribution of the parenchyma cells etc, do kN load cell or, in cases where the
not seem to affect the stiffness estimate anticipated loads were small, on a micro-
significantly. tensile stage (Deben MICROTEST, UK)
with a 300 N load cell. In all cases, the
MATERIALS AND METHODS crosshead speeds were maintained at 1
mm/min. In addition, we have used a
A bamboo culm of local variety (species
nanoindentor (Hysitron Inc., USA) with in-
Dendrocalamus Strictus) was obtained from
situ imaging function capable of applying
botanical nursery, IIT Kanpur and aged in
indentation loads of the order of 1000 µN.
the open for eight weeks for natural
Digital image correlation (DIC) was used to
seasoning. The sixth internode from bottom
monitor strains on samples during some of
end of the culm (outer diameter 71.8, inner
the tensile tests. The commercial software
diameter 32.4 and length 270 mm) was
Vic-2D (Correlated Solutions, USA) was
selected for all experimental studies
used for image correlation. Further, an open
reported herein. Basically, three kinds of
source image processing software ImageJ
samples were prepared from the internode.
(National Institute of Health, USA) was
The cross section of the internode was
used to analyse micrographs obtained from
divided approximately into three regions:
the electron microscope. Also, results
inner, middle and outer. Semi-circular
involving electron microscopy were
transverse slices of 3 mm thickness were
obtained from a Field Emission Scanning
made from each region and polished with
Electron Microscope (FESEM, Sigma,
alumina for further use as shown in Fig.
Zeiss, Germany).
1(a). These were used mainly for electron
microscopic studies.As shown in Fig. 1(b), STIFFNESS OF A BAMBOO CULM
tensile specimens were prepared with the
length in the longitudinal direction and From the point of view of mechanical
properties along the thickness representing strength, the most important elements of the
1093
Correlations between Stiffness and Microstructure of a Species of Bamboo
vascular bundle are the fibers. The fibers approaches. The comparison is shown in
are multi-lamellar tubes arranged compactly Fig. 3.The average microfibril orientation
to form bundles (Liese, 1998). Fig. 2 shows has values between 5 and 20° in our
an idealised multi-lamellar fiber wall simulations (as also in reported experiments
structure. on wood (Abraham and Elbaum, 2013)).
1094
Mannan and Basu
results were compared with the values strain across the cross section in bending,
suggested by the expressions given by thereby delaying local fracture and enabling
Vlassak (2004) and Vlasak and Nix (1994). the plant to withstand higher wind loads.
3. Tensile tests on bulk bamboo
REFERENCES
The tensile tests were carried out on bulk
Abraham Y Elbaum R 2013 Quantification
bamboo specimens and the results of overall of microfibril angle in secondarycell
Young’s modulus were compared with the walls at subcellular resolution by means
values obtained from simulations described of polarized lightmicroscopy New
earlier.Through all these experiments, the Phytologist 197(3) 1012-1019.
mechanical properties obtained from Amada S Ichikawa Y Munekata T Nagase
simulations were verified and it was found Y Shimizu H 1997 Fiber texture and
that these values match closely. mechanical graded structure of bamboo
Composites Part B: Engineering 28 13–
CONCLUSIONS 20.
We have studied the morphology and Bhalla S Gupta S Sudhakar P Suresh R
stiffness of a local variety of bamboo with a 2005 Bamboo- a functionally graded
view to establish an implementable method composite-correlation between
microstructure and mechanical
of linking the former to the latter. We have
strengthJournal of Materials Science
shown that 40(19) 5249–5253.
The axial modulus of a bamboo internode Burgert I Dunlop J 2011 Micromechanics of
can be estimated if we have reliable cell walls In: Wojtaszek P (Ed.)
measures- of (a) the average microfibril Mechanical Integration of Plant Cells
angle in the secondary cell walls of the and Plants 9 of Signalling and
sclerenchymatousfibers, (b) areal Communication in Plants Springer
Berlin Heidelberg 27–52.
distribution of the fibers and (c) size
distribution of the fibers. Hashin Z 1979 Analysis of properties of
fiber composites with anisotropic
The estimates of stiffness obtained using constituents Journal of Applied
simple ideas borrowed from the mechanics Mechanics 46 543–550.
of composite materials have been tested
Liese W 1998 The anatomy of bamboo
against experiments both on bundles of culms Tech. Rep. 18 International
fibers and samples drawn from the culm. Network for Bamboo and Rattan.
Several aspects of the bamboo Nogata F Takahashi H 1995 Intelligent
microstructure, some of which are poorly functionally graded material: Bamboo
understood, do not affect the stiffness Composites Engineering 5(7) 743–751.
estimates significantly. This is not to say Ray A Mondal S Das S and
that their knowledge is unnecessary. In fact, Ramachandrarao P 2005 Bamboo- a
they may have important role to play in the functionally graded composite-
control of fracture properties of bamboo. correlation between microstructure and
mechanical strength. Journal of
Bamboo is known to be a multiscale, Materials Science 40(19) 5249–5253.
hierarchical functionally graded material.
Vlassak J 2004 A model for chemical–
The advantage of the radial grading in mechanical polishing of a material
stiffness manifests in reducing the axial surface based on contact
1095
Correlations between Stiffness and Microstructure of a Species of Bamboo
1096
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1097
Chaudhary and Sahu
H0 0, Ρ0 2
c
w2 Aeik2z ik2 k 2 L1 Ceik3z ik3 k 2 L2 eik xct 2
FREQUENCY EQUATION
k
(1) 0 20 0 at z H (i.e. stress of the Figure 3. Variation of Rayleigh wave
velocity c with respect to wave number k
layer is zero at z H
for effect of initial stress P0.
(2) u1 u2 , w1 w2 at z=0
(3) 0 20 13 + 33 + 13 + 33 at z=0, CONCLUSION
The problem of Rayleigh wave propagation
Using all boundary conditions, we get in liquid layer over orthotropic half-space has
been studied. The liquid layer has been
M 1k MW NZ considered to be lying over orthotropic half-
tan kHM 1 (1)
ik WQ ZR MR QN space under initial stress. Frequency equation
where of Rayleigh wave has been obtained in
explicit form. Some numerical examples have
c2 been illustrated. The following are the
M1 1, M k 2 2 L1 ik ,
2 conclusions:
N k 2 3 L2 ik , Q k 2 L1 ik 2 and
1. Velocity of Rayleigh waves increases
R k 2 L2 ik 3 . with increment in wave number while
Eq. (1) is the frequency equation of Rayleigh it decreases with increasing value of
wave propagation in liquid layer lying over wave length.
an orthotropic half-space under initial stress. 2. Initial stress of the medium decreases
the velocity of Rayleigh waves.
H0 2, Ρ0 2
0.5
P0 1
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
0.0
1.0
waves in an elastic half-space of
1.5
orthotropic materialAppl Math Comput
2.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
99(1) 61-69.
2Π
k
Abd-Alla A M Mahmoud S R Abo-Dahab
Figure 2. Variation of Rayleigh wave SM and Helmy M I 2010 Influence of
velocity c with respect to wave length for rotation, magnetic field initial stress and
2
gravity on Rayleigh waves in a
P0 .
k effect of initial stress homogeneous orthotropic elastic half-
space Appl Math Sci 4 91-108.
1098
Rayleigh Wave Propagation in Liquid Layer Lying over a Pre-stressed Orthotropic Half-Space
1099
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper reports the thermostructural design criteria for unconventional
section subjected to thermal and mechanical loads. A general approach of
thermostructural analysis and estimation of buckling load factor using commercial
finite element software ANSYS is discussed. Design of section is carried out
considering both stiffened and unstiffened panels. Parametric study by varying the
height and width of stiffeners for stiffened design and thickness variation for
unstiffened design are studied. Section with unstiffened panel evolved as Mass
optimum design.
Keywords - Thermo structural, Thermal Buckling, Stiffened panel
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
(A) DESIGN OBJECTIVE
Rear Bulkhead To evolve a mass optimum section design,
Side Panel (RBH) ensuring structural integrity and stability.
(SP) Bottom Panel (BP) (B) DESIGN LOADS
deformation of bottom panel has to be Grids for stiffened panel design are modeled
restricted to 4mm or less. as beam elements. Bottom panel is stiffened
bi directionally with grids. FE model of
(D) DESIGN METHODOLOGY
section with grid and grid details are shown
Design onsets with the development of finite in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively.
element (FE) model of the section. Structural Temperature dependent material properties
analysis is carried out with the applied loads are used in FE analysis.
and boundary conditions. Bottom panel
undergoes large deformation as it
experiences high temperature. Reduction of
these deformations can be achieved by two
methods
(i) Increasing the overall thickness of bottom
panel
(ii) Stiffening the 2.5mm bottom panel by
providing grids Figure 3. Finite Element Model of
Section with Stiffenedz Panel
Table 1 Panel Temperatures
Thick Temp
Panel Material
(mm) ( C)
Top Panel 2.5 AA2014 47
Bottom Panel 2.5 Ti6Al4V 505
Side panel-
2.5 Ti6Al4V 445
Bottom ramp
Side panel-
2.5 Ti6Al4V 89
Middle
Side panel- Figure 4. Typical Parameters of Grid
2.5 Ti6Al4V 82
Top ramp
Cross Section
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL SECTION DESIGN WITH
DEVELOPMENT UNSTIFFENED PANEL
Shell model with 4 noded shell element is
Design iteration is initiated with 2.5mm
created in ANSYS. FE model of section with
panel thickness. Temperatures are applied as
boundary condition, temperatures imposed
per Table.1. By analysis deformation (Figure
and Mechanical loads as forces at free end of
3) and buckling load factor (BLF) (Figure 4)
the section are shown in Figure 2.
are obtained.
Figure 4. First Buckling mode shape In this study, the 2.5mm bottom panel is
stiffened with grids as discussed in section 3.
Maximum lateral deformation is 6mm and Analysis is carried out for different spacing
BLF is 0.1.Deformation and stability criteria and sizes of grid in order to contain the
are not met by 2.5mm thick Bottom Panel. lateral deformation to 4mm and BLF >=1.5.
Consolidation of the study is presented in
Section design is iterated with increased
Table.2.
bottom panel thickness (5 mm) and with
appropriate temperature (300 0C). Lateral Stiffened panel with T shaped Ortho grids of
spacing 100 x 60 mm and grid height of 18
deformation reduced to 1.2 mm. (Figure 5).
mm is meeting the design requirement with
Buckling load factor (BLF) improved to minimum mass. Maximum lateral
1.48. (Figure 6). Mass of the bottom panel is deformation is 3.7 mm as shown in Figure 7
10kg. and. BLF is 1.45 (Figure 8) Mass of the
bottom panel is 13.5kg.
1102
Jayanthi and Jain
compression (e.g. Shariati and Rokhi, 2008, mm, 120 mm and 180 mm from the mid-
Han et al., 2006). In the literature, effects of height (i.e. 0 eccentricity). For comparision,
perforation on cylindrical shells under unperforated columns were also tested. For
compression have been reported, both each, parametric consideration, tests were
experimentally and numerically, especially conducted on three specimens. Thus in total,
for mild steel and aluminium (e.g. Shariati 27 specimens were loaded axially in
and Rokhi, 2008, Han et al., 2006, Jullien compression, using displacement control, for
and Limam, 1998, Umbarkaret al., 2013). the study. Schematic diagram showing the
However, to the best of authors’ knowledge, nomenclature and location of the perforation
there are limited studies on the effect of are shown in Figure 1.
perforation for stainless steel cylindrical
D
tubes, in particular for slender lengths.
Therefore, an experimental investigation on Perforation
the effect of single circular perforations on d t
the load capacity and buckling mode of
circular hollow columns have been presented, e
with an attention on the size of mid-height L D
located perforation, and longitudinally
located eccentric perforation.
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY
increasing lateral deformation due to flexural e/L. A value of e/L = 0 indicates that the
buckling. perforation is located at the mid-height. It can
be seen that as the value of eccentricity
(a) 70 A increases or as the perforation moves closer
60 B to the support, the load carrying capacity of
Load, P (kN)
50
40 the column increases, suggesting that the
30 perforation located at mid-height provides the
20 most critical strength of the column. For the
10
0 farthest eccentricity considered i.e. e/L = 0.36
0 2 4 6 (or e = 180 mm), the column strength has
Axial Displacement, δ (mm) reached ~95% of the unperforated strength.
100
Pu/Puu (%)
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.5 1
d/D
Figure 3. Variation of Pu with d/D(e/L =
0.0).
A (peak-load)
B (post-peak load)
100
2 (b)
90
Pu/Puu (%)
from the mid-height, along the longitudinal Umbarkar K R Patton M L and Singh K D
axis. 2013 Effect of single circular perforation
in lean duplex stainless steel (LDSS)
REFERENCES hollow circular stub columns under pure
Ashraf M Gardner L Nethercot D A 2006 axial compression Thin-Walled
Finite element modeling of structural Structures 68 18-25.
stainless steel cross-sections Thin- Sachidananda K H Singh K D Numerical
Walled Structures 441048-62. study of fixed ended Lean Duplex
ASTM E646 Standard test method for Stainless Steel (LDSS) flat oval hollow
Tensile Strain-Hardening Exponents (n- stub column under pure axial
Values) of Metallic Sheet Materials compression Thin-Walled Structures 96
American Society for Testing and 105-119.
Materials. Shariati M and Rokhi MM 2008 Numerical
Gardner L 2005 The use of stainless steel in and experimental investigation on
structures Progress in structural buckling of steel cylindrical shells with
engineering and materials 7 45-55. elliptical cutout subjected to axial
compression Thin-Walled structures 46
Jullien J F and Limam A 1998 Effects of 1251-1261.
openings of the buckling of cylindrical
shells subjected to axial compression Theofanous M Chan T M and Gardner L
Thin-Walled Structures 31 187-202. 2009 Structural response of stainless
steel oval hollow section compression
Han H Cheng J Taheri F and Pegg N members Engineering Structures 31 922-
Numerical and experimental 934.
investigations of the response of
aluminium cylinders with a cutout Theofanous M Gardner L 2009 Testing and
subject to axial compressionThin-Walled numerical modelling of lean duplex
Structures 44 254-270. stainless steel hollow section columns.
Engineering Structures 31 3047-58.
Patton M L and Singh K D 2012 Numerical
modelling of lean duplex stainless steel
hollow columns of square, L-, T-, and +-
shaped cross sections under pure axial
compression Thin-Walled Structures 53
1-8.
Theofanous M Chan T M and Gardner L
2009 Structural response of stainless
steel oval hollow section compression
members Engineering Structures 31 922-
934.
Theofanous M Gardner L 2011 Effect of
element interaction and material
nonlinearity on the ultimate capacity of
stainless steel cross-sections. Steel and
Composite Structures 12 73-92.
1107
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Gauge change in parabolic profile locomotive wheel is studied using finite
element analysis. The study accounts for residual stresses generated during wheel
manufacturing and fitment of the wheel on locomotive wheel. A validated thermal
model accounting for heat loss to rail, brake blocks and ambient air is considered for
accurate prediction of wheel temperatures for a given train running and braking
history. Results are obtained for high friction K-type composite brake blocks used by
Indian railways for two limiting braking scenarios: (i) synchronised braking where
effort is uniformly distributed on all brake blocks and (ii) independent braking where
braking effort to decelerate a train is provided solely by locomotive brake blocks.
Bending at hub-disc and disc-rim interfaces is seen to primarily control axial
deflection of wheels. While gauge reduction is observed during braking, gauge
increase is seen during subsequent cooling. Maximum gauge increase occurs as the
wheels finally cool down to room temperature.
Keywords: railway wheel; braking; residual stress; wheel gauge.
1109
Gauge Widening/Condemning of Parabolic Profile Locomotive Wheels while Braking with Composite
Brake Blocks
running model presented in (Vakkalagadda et Figure. 2 shows change in wheel gauge, for
al., 2015a). The problem at hand is analysed repeated synchronised braking of a passenger
using a 2-D axi-symmetric thermo train, using K type composite brake blocks,
mechanical model. The domain is discretised from 140 km/h. Results are shown for 8 stop
using 8- noded, axi-symmetric, temperature braking events followed by steady train
displacement biquadrate quadrilateral movement at 140 km/h until the wheels cools
elements. Reduced integration scheme is used down to room temperature. Train is taken to
to evaluate stiffness matrices. Wheel move at a constant speed of 140 km/h for 15
diameter for new wheel considered in this min between two braking events. Total
study is 1096 mm. simulation time is 6 hours. However the
results are shown only for 4 hours as the
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION results do not vary much beyond this point. It
Figure. 1 shows residual hoop stresses in can be seen that parabolic wheel profiles
parabolic profile locomotive wheels at the results in increase in wheel gauge at the end
end of heat treatment process. Disc rim of braking cycles, but still are within
interface has highest tensile residual stresses. allowable limit. But there is a significant
Tread region is experiencing a compressive reduction in wheel gauge during the braking
stresses of around 240 MPa. It can be shown events. Hence locomotive wheel failure from
that during fitment of wheel into axle, there is
gauge condemning occurs for parabolic
a reduction of 15% in compressive hoop
residual stresses in the tread region from the wheel profile. However, such a failure is
interference fit. typically not detected as it is transient in
nature and occurs for a short period that too
during service. It can be shown that
maximum gauge reduction coincides with
maximum tread region temperature. Details
of gauge widening/condemning of straight
plate wheel under different braking
conditions are reported by Vakkalagadda et
Figure 1.Residual hoop stress contours al. (2015c). Effects of different brake blocks
at the end of heat treatment process on different wheel profiles in gauge
widening/condemning are also reported
(Vakkalagadda et al., 2016)
1110
Vineesh et al.
1111
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A trigonometric shear deformation theory for flexure of thick beam, taking
into account transverse shear deformation effects, is developed. The number of
variables in the present theory is same as that in the first order shear deformation
theory. The sinusoidal function is used in displacement field in terms of thickness
coordinate to represent the shear deformation effects. The noteworthy feature of this
theory is that the transverse shear stresses can be obtained directly from the use of
constitutive relations with excellent accuracy, satisfying the shear stress free
conditions on the top and bottom surfaces of the beam. Hence, the theory obviates the
need of shear correction factor. Governing differential equations and boundary
conditions are obtained by using the principle of virtual work. The thick fixed-fixed
isotropic beam is considered for the numerical study to demonstrate the efficacy of the
theory. Results obtained are discussed critically with those of other theories.
Keywords: Trigonometric shear deformation; thick beam; flexure; principle of
virtual work; equilibrium equations; stress.
on higher order shear deformation uniform displacement field given by Equation (1) are
rectangular beams. However, these as follows.
displacement based finite element models are Normal strain:
not free from phenomenon of shear locking
u d 2w h z d
(Averill and Reddy (1992); Reddy (1982)). x = z 2 sin (2)
x dx h dx
A study of literature by Ghugal and Shimpi
(2001) indicates that the research work Shear strain:
dealing with flexural analysis of thick beams u dw z
zx cos (3)
using refined trigonometric and hyperbolic z dx h
shear deformation theories is very scarce and The stress-strain relationships used are as
is still in infancy. follows:
In this paper development of theory and its x E x , zx G zx (4)
application to thick fixed beams is presented.
The beam under consideration as shown in GOVERNING EQUATIONS
Figure1 occupies in 0 x y z Cartesian Using the expressions for strains and stresses
coordinate system the region: (2) through (4) and using the principle of
h h virtual work, variationally consistent
0 x L ; 0 y b ; z
2 2 governing differential equations and
Where x, y, z are Cartesian coordinates, L and boundary conditions for the beam under
b are the length and width of beam in the x consideration can be obtained. The principle
and y directions respectively, and h is the of virtual work when applied to the beam
thickness of the beam in the z-direction. The leads to:
beam is made up of homogeneous, linearly
z h / 2 x zx zx dx dz
xL z h/2
elastic isotropic material. b
x0 x .
(5)
xL
q ( x ) w dx 0
THE DISPLACEMENT FIELD x0
The displacement field of the present beam where, the symbol denotes the variational
theory is of the form: operator. Employing Green’s theorem in Eqn.
dw h z (4) successively, we obtain the coupled
u ( x, z ) z sin ( x) Euler-Lagrange equations which are the
dx h (1)
w( x, z ) w( x ) governing differential equations and
associated boundary conditions of the beam.
where u is the axial displacement in x The governing differential equations obtained
direction and w is the transverse displacement are as follows:
in z direction of the beam. The sinusoidal
d 4 w 24 d 3
function is assigned according to the shear EI EI q x (6)
dx 4 3 dx 3
stress distribution through the thickness of
the beam. The function represents rotation 24 d 3w 6 d 2 GA
(7)
EI EI 0
of the beam at neutral axis, which is an 3 dx 3 2 dx 2 2
unknown function to be determined. The Thus the boundary value problem of the
normal and shear strains obtained within the beam bending is given by the above
framework of linear theory of elasticity using variationally consistent governing differential
equations.
1113
Flexure of Fixed Thick Beam using Trigonometric Shear Deformation Theory
1114
Dahake et al
The results and discussion will be presented Irretier H 1986 Refined effects in beam
in detailed paper. Paper will conclude with theories and their influence on natural
proper conclusions. frequencies of beam International
Proceeding of Euromech Colloquium
REFERENCES 219 on Refined Dynamical Theories of
Beam Plates and Shells and Their
Averill R C and Reddy J N 1992 An
Applications Edited by I Elishak off and
assessment of four-noded plate finite
H Irretier Springer-Verlag Berlin 163-
elements based on a generalized third
179.
order theory International Journal of
Numerical Methods in Kant T and Gupta A 1988 A finite element
Engineering331553-1572. model for higher order shears
deformable beam theory Journal of
Baluch M H Azad A K and Khidir M A 1984
Sound and Vibration125(2) 193-202.
Technical theory of beams with normal
strain ASCE Journal of Engineering Krishna Murthy A V 1984 Towards a
Mechanics 110(8)1233-1237 consistent beam theory AIAA Journal22
6811-816.
Bhimaraddi A and Chandrashekhara K 1993
Observations on higher order beam Levinson M1981 A new rectangular beam
Theory ASCE Journal of Aerospace theory Journal of Sound and
Engineering 6(4) 408-413. Vibration74 181-87.
20
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6
Strain
1117
Micromechanical Modelling of Spiral Wound Gasket under Uniaxial Compression
80 60
Stress (MPa)
60 45
40 30
15
20
0
0 51 53 55 57 59 61
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 Gasket Width (mm)
Axial deformation (mm)
In gasket, filler material alone helps in The gasket stress distribution obtained from
sealing whereas spiral rings are used for micromechanical analysis is compared with
1118
Nelson et al.
interface model and ASME residual stress Khan K A, M Abid and J AChattha2009
(Waterland and Bouzid (2009)) in Figure 8. Gasketed bolted flange joint’s
relaxationbehaviour under different bolt
80 up strategyP I Mech Eng E-J Pro223259-
Interface 263.
Micromechanical
Contact Stress (MPa)
REFERENCES
ANSYS 2012ANSYS Mechanical APDL
Element Reference ANSYS Inc. USA.
1119
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Prestressed precast hollow core slabs are generally machine cast with
prestressing strands as the only reinforcement. Due to various mechanical, electrical
and plumbing service requirements openings are provided in these precast slabs.
Openings in hollow core slabs can coincide with the location of strands and may lead
to their curtailment. This may lead to significant loss in strength and stiffness of slab.
Numerical analysis of hollow core slabs with and without openings was performed
using commercial finite element package to evaluate the effect of openings. Two
shear span to depth ratios and a flexural opening were considered as variables for this
study. It was observed that the strength of slabs reduced up to 44% due to provision of
opening with 43% reduction in stiffness. Comparison of numerical results with
experimental results showed good agreement.
Keywords: Hollow core slabs; finite element method (FEM); openings; prestress
core slabs using ANSYS (2012) package and tend to be off from experimental results after
found that the service load capacities of slabs large deflections. From the literature it can be
from numerical study match well with the concluded that commercial finite element
experimental results. The major observation packages can be used to predict the response
from the results was that the pre-cracking of various RCC and PSC structures with
stiffness of load deflection curves was higher reasonable accuracy.
using the finite element when compared with
experimental results. Barbosa and Riberio NUMERICAL MODELLING
[1998] have evaluated the consequences The effect of openings on the behaviour and
small changes in modelling of RCC beam strength of hollow core slabs was evaluated
using ANSYS (2012). They have utilised by modelling the slabs using commercial
various crushing and cracking models of finite element package ANSYS (2012). The
concrete along with the elastic and plastic cross sectional properties, material properties
properties of steel. They concluded that a and test setup were taken from the previous
good non-linear curve of concrete in work of the authors (Pachalla and Prakash
compression is very important in predicting 2015). The cross section of the slabs is shown
the response of the beams. Hegger et al. in Figure 1. Each slab had 9 cores and 6
(2010) have performed finite element prestressing strands of 9.53 mm diameter
analysis of slab assembly of hollow core each. The location of strands along with cross
slabs on slender beams. The observed that the sectional dimensions are shown in Figure 1.
initial stiffness matches well with the Two shear span to depth ratios (a/d) viz. 3.5
experimental results and also captures shear and 7.5 were chosen to simulate different
deformations of the section. Research (Gan flexure to shear ratios. Flexural opening of
2000, Jendle and Cervenka 2006) on bond dimensions 300 x 600 mm was provided in
between concrete and reinforcement has slabs and was evaluated with each a/d ratio.
shown that in small deflections the response The location of flexural opening in plan is
of the structures does not affect significantly given in Figure 1. The specimen details are
due to the bond-slip behaviour but the results given in Table 1.
Figure 1: Full cross section and plan view of slab (dimensions in mm)
The concrete and steel material properties prestressing strands were given as material
were taken from the material characterization inputs. The concrete was modelled using
tests done in the laboratory. Multi-linear SOLID65 element and prestressing strands
stress strain curve for concrete and were modelled using LINK180 element. The
1121
Analysis of Hollowcore Slabs with Openings: a Numerical Study
cracking and crushing properties of SOLID65 actual test boundary conditions. The load was
element were enabled to capture the exact applied in displacement control mode. The
behaviour of the slabs. The boundary isometric view of slabs with and without
conditions were modelled to replicate the openings is shown in Figure 2.
be concluded that the proposed modelling Pajari M 1998 Shear Resistance of PHC
procedure could capture the exact behaviour Slabs Supported on Beams II:
of the slabs with and without openings. AnalysisJournal of Structural
Engineering 124(9) 1062–1073.
REFERENCES
Palmer K D and Schultz A E 2011
ANSYS Inc. v 14.5 Documentation for Experimental investigation of the web-
ANSYS United States 2012. shear strength of deep hollow-core units
Barbosa A F and Ribeiro G O 1998 Analysis PCI Journal 56(4) 83–104.
of Reinforced Concrete Structures Using Walraven J C and Mercx W P M 1983 The
Ansys Nonlinear Concrete bearing capacity forprestressed hollow
ModelComputational Mechanics New core slabsHeron 28(3) 1–46.
Trends and Applications S. Idelsohn E.
Wang X 2007 Study on the Shear Behaviour
Oñate and E. Dvorkin (Eds.)Spain, 1–7.
of Prestressed Hollow core slabs by
Becker R J and Buettner D R 1985 Shear Nonlinear Finite Element Modelling
Tests of Extruded Hollow-Core Slabs Master’s Thesis 94 University
PCI Journal 30(2) 40–54. ofWindsor.
Gan Y 2000 Bond Stress and Slip Modeling
in Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of
Reinforced concrete structures Master’s
Thesis 269 University of Toronto.
Hawkins N M and Ghosh S K 2006 Shear
strength of Hollow-core slabsPCI
Journal 51(1) 110 – 114.
Hegger J Roggendorf T and Teworte F 2010
FE analyses of shear-loaded hollow-core
slabs on different supports Magazine of
Concrete Research 62(8) 531–541.
Jendele L andCervenka J 2006 Finite element
modelling of reinforcement with bond
Computers and Structures 84 1780–
1791.
Pachalla SK S and Prakash SS 2015 Effect of
Openings on the Behavior of PPHCS
Slabs under Low and Moderate Shear
ACI structural Journal (Under review)
PachallaS K S and Prakash S S2015Effect of
Openings on PrestressedHollow core
Slabs International conference on
Innovations in Structural Engineering,
December 14-15 2015Hyderabad India.
1123
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
HDMR for functions in order to understand less expensive for the approximation of fuzzy
the hierarchy of correlations amongst the finite element response quantity.
input variables. A well-ordered mapping In inverse reliability analysis (Balu and Rao,
strategy has been developed among the inputs 2013), the HDMR is used to get the explicit
and outputs. It is recognised and concluded expressions without requiring the derivatives
from the various studies that, only lower of the response functions with respect to
order interaction effect between the input uncertain variables, and FFT techniques are
variables will have an effective impact upon used to obtain the unknown design
the output responses of a precise and explicit parameters. It was concluded that optimum
physical system. The HDMR can be applied number of sample points in approximating
for various well-defined physical system by the HDMR component functions is most
making use of this property to develop a important criteria, and to capture the
specific, ordered mapping between inputs and nonlinearity outside the domain of sample
outputs. HDMR approximation techniques points, very small number of sample points
are very useful in many domains if they can should be avoided during approximation and
represent the output to good accuracy at thereby affecting the estimated solution.
sufficiently low orders. Two specific HDMR
expansions are developed i.e., ANOVA- The area known as model updating is
HDMR for statistical applications and second concerned with the correction of finite
the cut-HDMR expansion. element models by processing records of
dynamic response from test structures
In the output domain of the physical system (Mottershead and Friswell, 1993). Levin and
Alis and Rabitz (2001) assumed that data is Lieven (1998) compared various
randomly scattered over the entire domain implementations of the two algorithms
and formulated HDMR expressions, and namely the genetic algorithm (GA) and
HDMR is applied from sensitivity analysis simulated annealing (SA) for model updating
and time series analysis. Their prediction is purposes. It was concluded that model
that the dimensionality of the function is not updating using these optimization algorithms
dependent on the number of samples needed is a promising and viable approach, but the
for representation to a given tolerance which appropriate choice of updating parameters is
is the efficient means to perform high of paramount importance.
dimensional interpolation.
The HDMR expansions introduced here are
In recent years, the application of HDMR is especially useful for the purpose of
extended to uncertainty analysis. When the representing the outputs of a physical system
uncertainties are represented in terms of when the number of input variables is large.
fuzzy membership functions, analysis of The notion of “high” dimensionality is
response of the structures is done using system-dependent, with some situations
HDMR based response surface models (Balu being considered high for practical reasons at
and Rao, 2012). Implicit and explicit fuzzy
n 3 5 , while others will only reach that
analysis procedures are developed using
level of complexity for n 10 or more.
integrated finite element modelling and
HDMR based response surface generation. It For a high dimensional system, an output
was concluded that HDMR approach is f x is commonly a function of many input
mathematically elegant and computationally
variables x {x1, x2, ..xn } with n 10 2 or
1125
HDMR Based Model Updating in Structural Damage Identification
larger. HDMR expresses the output f x as updated model is then used in structural
damage identification.
a hierarchical correlated function expansion
in terms of the input variables as: REFERENCES
f ij xi , x j
N
f x f 0 f i xi Alis O F and Rabitz H 2001 Efficient
i 1 1i j N
implementation of high dimensional
f ijk xi , x j , xk .. (1) model representations Journal of
1i j k N Mathematical Chemistry 29(2) 127–
f12N x1 , x2 ,, xN 142.
where, f0 denotes the mean response to f x Balu A S and Rao B N 2013 Confidence
bounds on design variables using high-
which is a constant. The function fi xi is a dimensional model representation.
first-order term expressing the effect of Journal of Structural Engineering
139(6) 985–996.
variable xi acting alone, although generally
Balu A S and Rao B N 2012 High
nonlinearly, upon the output f x . The
dimensional model representation based
function fij xi , x j is a second-order term Formulations for fuzzy finite element
analysis of structures Finite Elements in
that describes the cooperative effects of the Analysis and Design 50 217–230.
variables xi and x j upon the output f x . Levin R I and Lieven N A J 1998 Dynamic
The higher order terms give the cooperative finite element model updating using
effects of increasing numbers of input simulated annealing and genetic
variables acting together to influence the algorithm Mechanical Systems and
Signal Processing 12(1) 91–120.
output f x . The last term
Mottershead J E and Friswell M I 1993
f12N x1, x2 ,, xN contains any residual Model updating in structural dynamics:
dependence of all the input variables locked A Survey Journal of Sound and
Vibration 167(2) 347–375.
together in a cooperative way to influence the
Rabitz H Alis O F Shorter J and Shim K
output f x .
1999 Efficient input-output model
representations Computer Physics
CONCLUSIONS Communication 117 11–20.
The HDMR techniques can be effectively
applied for construction of a computational
model directly from laboratory or field data,
creating an efficient fully equivalent
operational model to replace an existing time-
consuming mathematical model,
identification of key model variables, global
uncertainty assessments, and efficient
quantitative risk assessments, etc. In this
work, it is proposed to apply HDMR in
updating a finite element model in
conjunction with genetic algorithm. The
1126
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
*
xz xz 0 xz
2z h
k
Vc ( z ) ; Vm ( z ) 1 Vc ( z ) (1) Where
2h
where ‘k’ is the volume fraction exponent w0 o w
ox u 0,x , y v0,y 0 , oxy u 0,y v0,x ,
which is always greater or equal to zero. A Rx Ry
zero value of ‘k’ implies that the panel is
v0 u
fully ceramic. The effective material property oyz w 0,y y , oxz w 0,x 0 x
Ry Rx
of the panel is given by:
x x , x , y y , y , xy x , y y , x ,
k
z 1 y
P ( z ) Pm ( Pc Pm ) (2)
h 2 yz 2 v 1 , zx 2u 1 x
Ry Rx
Here, Pm and Pc are the corresponding
properties of metal and ceramic and ‘z’ is the *x u 1,x , *y v 1, y , *xy u 1, y v 1,x ,
thickness coordinate (-h/2 ≤ z ≤ h/2). 0 0 0
Q Q 2w M N
N u(r,s) ij u i, j Ti r Tj s ; 1 r,s 1
x y
x y x 2
x
i 0 j 0
w 2
2w
N 2 N xy Where, M and N are the number of terms in
y 2
x y
y
x y
x
R
m n u (r, s)
x
M M S
y
x y
y
Q 0
y x R y
y r ms n
Mm Nn
mn u
N
ij m n Ti r T j s ; 1 r, s 1
*
N
* *
Q
2 S 0
x x y x
x y r s ij
x
R x i 0 j 0
N *
N *
Q *
Where, ‘m and n’ are the orders of
2 S 0
y x y y
y x
y
R y derivatives with respect to r and s,
M *
M *
S *
respectively.
x
x y
x
3Q *
0
x y
x
R x
M *
M *
S * The detailed solution methodology will be
y
x y
y
3Q *
0
y x R y
y
discussed in full length paper (Upadhyay and
Shukla 2013).
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Fully simply supported boundary conditions
have been used in the present work: Simply Numerical results are presented for simply
supported boundary conditions are given as: supported immovable doubly curved
(Rx=Ry=R), panels of square (a = b) plan-
u v w u 1 v1 y 0
y form, subjected to uniformly distributed
& M x M *
x 0 at x 1 transverse load. The material properties
u v w x u 1 v1 x 0 assumed in the present work are (Oktem et
& M M *
0 at y 1 al., 2012):
y y
1129
Bahadur et al.
w*
Table 1.convergence of central deflection 0.003 R/a=30
R/a=50
for simply supported spherical shell 0.002
0.001
R/a=10
a/h=10, 0
M,N a/h=10, a/h=20, R/a=30 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
a/h
6 0.0038516 0.00303 0.004241
igure 3. Variation of non dimentional centr
7 0.0038513 0.00303 0.004241 eflection with a/h ratio for different R/a rati
0.003
0.002 Oktem R/a=30 Kiani Y Akbarzadeh A H Chen Z T Eslami
M R 2012Static and dynamic analysis of
0.001
an FGM doubly curved panel resting on
0.000 the Pasternak-type elastic foundation
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Composite Structures 2474-2484.
a/h Oktem A S Mantari J L Soares C G 2012
Figure 1. Validation of present result with Static response of functionally graded
Oktem (2012) panels and doubly-curved shells based on
a higher order shear deformation theory
Exponent (k)=2 European Journal of Mechanics A/Solids
0.005 163-172.
0.004 Upadhyay A K Shukla K K 2013
a/h=10 Geometrically nonlinear static and
0.003
a/h=50
w*
0.002
dynamic analysis of functionally graded
skew plates Commun Nonlinear Sci
0.001
Numer Simulat 2252-2279.
0
0 20 R/a 40 60
1130
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The paper presents the static analysis of thin-walled composite box beam.
The model is developed for doubly tapered thin walled composite box beam subjected
to axial loading incorporating classical laminate theory. Governing equations are
derived using minimum total potential energy principle. Utilizing finite element
method, numerical results are obtained for thin-walled doubly tapered composite box
beam under axial loading. Effects of different taper ratio and laminate stacking
sequence on the tip deflection & twist are investigated.
Keywords: Thin walled composite beam; Classical lamination theory; FE
method.
1132
Static Analaysis of Doubly Tapered Thin Walled Composite Box Beam under Axial Loading
n n
W w j j ; U u j j Table 1. Material Properties
i 1 i 1
(4)
n n
V v j j ; j j E1 = 148 GPa E2 = 9.65 GPa
i 1 j 1
G12 = 4.55 Gpa ν12 = 0.34
Table 2. Tip displacement and tip angle of twist of a cantilever beam under axial load.
W (mm) θ (rad.)
Layup Ref. value Present Ref. value Present Reference
[010/4510] 0.603 6.00E-02 1.64E-02 1.62E-02 (Lee et al., 2007)
[012] 0.3378 0.33529 0 8.19E-16 (Kollar et al., 2002)
[06/456] 0.6182 0.60016 1.02E-04 1.62E-04 (Kollar et al., 2002)
[104/204/304] 1.0489 0.96611 6.47E-04 5.99E-04 (Kollar et al., 2002)
θ (rad)
b2=0.25 b2=0.25
0.0004 0.02 b2=0.1
b2=0.1
0.0002 0.01
0 0
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1
Length (m) Length (m
Fig. 4 variation of (a) axial dispalcement & (b) angle of twist along the length at
different taper ratio
0.03
Tip θ (rad)
0.0009
0.02
0.0004
0.01
‐1E‐04 0
1 0.75 0.5 0.25 0.1 1 0.75 0.5 0.25 0.1
Ratio of b2 Ratio of b2
a b
Fig. 5 variation of (a) axial dispalcement & (b) angle of twist at tip for different
stacking sequence at different taper ratio.
1134
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1136
Strength and Vibration Analysis of Transmission Housing of a Tractor
Mode 1 f1 = 531.50 Hz
Mode 3 f3 = 920.30
1137
Ahuja et al.
REFERENCES
BabuM M and Reddy Y R 2015 Stress
Analysis of Gearbox Casing Using
ANSYS Workbench International
Journal of Science and Research
(IJSR)4 525-527.
Dai R Ma J and Zhang H 2011 Modal and
strength Analysis on a Gearbox Housing
Advanced Materials Research 154-155
1379-1383.
1138
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract The present paper studies the effect of initial stress on the propagation of
Rayleigh wave in orthotropic layer lying over an orthotropic half-space. Dispersion
equation has been obtained in closed form. It is observed that the initial stress has
significant effect on the phase velocity of Rayleigh waves. In particular initial stress
increases with the phase velocity of Rayleigh waves. Some particular cases have
been deduced. Results have been presented by the means of graph. Also the
findings are exhibited through graphical representation and surface plot.
Keywords: Rayleigh wave, orthotropic, initial stress, phases velocity.
____________________________________
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
(1) zx 1 0 at Z H (2) zz 1 0 at Z H
(3) u1 u2 at Z 0 (4) w1 w2 at Z 0
(5) zx 1 zx 2 at Z 0 (6) zz 1 zz 2 at Z 0
DISPERSION RELATION
L1 L2 0 0 0 0
L3 L4 0 0 0 0
i (1 1i k 1 ) i (1 2 i k 2 ) i 0 0 m2
0
i ( 1 i k 1 ) i ( 2 i k 2 ) 0 m1 i 0
L5 L6 0 2 m 1i (1 m 22 ) 0
L7 L8 c 13 m12 c33 0 0 im ( c 3 5 c1 3 )
Where
L5 21 12i k1 i k1
L6 22 2 2i k2 i k 2
1140
Study of Rayleigh Wave in Orthotropic Layer Lying over an Orthotropic Half-Space with Initial
Stress
3.5
3.0 P0 0.5
0.6
0.7
2.5
2.0
c
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
k
Figure 2.Variation of Rayleigh wave velocity c with respect to wave number k for
different values of initial stress.
1141
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Corrugated tubes are commonly used as energy absorbers to mitigate the
damage during impact collision. These, thin walled structures, can be of many shapes,
primarily, circular and square. In this study, the LS-DYNA dynamic simulation code
is used to study the effect of grading the corrugations on the energy absorption
characteristics of the square tubes made of aluminium alloy 6061. This study
incorporates axial as well as oblique impact loading. The wavelength and amplitude
of the corrugations are graded linearly as well as parabolic separately. Specific energy
absorption (SEA), crush force efficiency (CFE) and peak force are the major energy
absorption parameters. The simulation results show improvement in the
crashworthiness of the tube. Some of the structurally graded tubes show significantly
reduced force fluctuation and elimination of the initial peak force in square corrugated
tubes. In oblique impact, the corrugated tubes have higher energy absorption and less
force fluctuations at higher angles which is an advantage over normal tube. The
outcomes of the study are encouraging as most of the square corrugated tubes show an
improvement in CFE and SEA over the simple tube.
Keywords: Energy absorption; Crushing; Corrugated tubes; FEM; Impact;
Structural grading
1143
Energy Absorption Characteristics of Aluminium Alloy 6061 Square Corrugated Tubes under Axial and
Oblique Impact Loading
(2006) and the results obtained were in good for convergence L=105mm, Side
agreement. Length=40mm, r/D=.1 and thickness=2mm.
The mass=60Kg and the velocity=15m/s is
CONVERGENCE used for the dynamic test. Mesh Convergence
In FEA model, the mesh element chosen is necessary to obtain a sufficient mesh
2mm after convergence. Refer to Table.1 for density for an accurate deformation process
the process of convergence. The tubes used analysis.
Table 1. Convergence
Mesh size 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0
a(c)_l(c) a(l)_l(c)
100 2.00 a(c)_l(c)
a(p)_l(c)
80
Force (KN)
60 1.00
40
0.00
20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Displacement (mm)
0
0 50 Figure 4.Energy absorption
Displacement (mm)
characteristics of amplitude graded tubes
Figure 3.Comparative load-deformation
curves of tubes with amplitude grading CONCLUSIONS
Energy absorption decreases on increasing In the present study, energy absorption
the angle of impact as can be seen by the characteristics of corrugated square tubes
figure.4. It can be pointed out that the energy with structural grading has been studied.
absorption for the tubes a(l)_l(c) and Numerical simulation has been carried out
1144
Rawat et al.
_____________________________________
1147
Moment-Rotation Behavior of Stainless Steel Beam-Column Bolted Connection
Moment (kNm)
deals with friction between surfaces and 40 Frye
normal contact. For tangential property Morris
30 (1975)
penalty method is used with friction
20
coefficient of 0.3 and for normal ‘Hard’ Present
10 study
contact property is given. For meshing of the
parts 20 Node quadratic brick element 0
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015
‘C3D20RH’ is chosen. Fixed boundary
Rotation (Rad)
conditions are given to column top and
bottom faces to ensure rigid column. For the
application of moment, forces are applied to Fig. 2.Moment-rotation for double angle
connection
the far end of the beam in opposite direction
to each other so as to create a couple about 60
neutral axis of the beam. The rotations are 50
Moment (kNm)
calculated based on nodal displacement with 40 Present
respect to a reference point on neutral axis. study
30
Point A: Displacement in X-dir = dXa 20
Frye
Displacement in Y-dir = dYa 10 Morris
(1975)
0
Point B: Displacementin X-dir = dXb 0.000 0.005 0.010
Displacementin Y-dir = dYb Rotation (Rad)
dx =dXa – dXb+ original distance AB Fig. 3. Moment-rotation for top and seat
dy = | dYb – dXa | angle connection
1148
Bhavsar and Dawari
SUMMARY
Moment-Rotation behavior for beam-column
connection of double angle connection and
top and seat angle connection is studied for
steel material. Further the models are
analyzed for stainless steel material. The
connections are found to be more flexible in
stainless steel than in normal steel. A new
model is proposed for stainless steel to define
moment-rotation behavior.
REFERENCES
Bjorhovde R Andre C and Jacques B 1990
Classification system for beam-to-
column connections Journal of
Structural Engineering 116(11) 3059-
3076
Rasmussen K Jr. 2003 Full-range stress–
strain curves for stainless steel alloys
Journal of constructional steel
research 59(1) 47-61
Bouchair A Julien A Anis A 2008 Analysis
of the behaviour of stainless steel
bolted connections Journal of
Constructional Steel Research 64(11)
1264-1274
Pawar A 2011 Behaviour of steel beam to
column connection M. Tech Thesis
College of Engineering Pune, Pune.
EN 1993–1-4. Eurocode 3 2006 Design of
steel structures Part 1.4 General rules
1149
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper develops fragility curves for 3 RC frame buildings under
earthquake loading. Three models were created in SAP2000 for low, mid and high
rise buildings based on HAZUS code for analysis. Nonlinear time history analyses
were conducted using SAP2000. The maximum inter story drift ratio was considered
as the engineering damage parameter. Results were compared to show the variation of
fragilities with storey height.
Keywords: Fragility surfaces; Fragility curves; Seismic vulnerability; RC
buildings.
RESULTS
Power law model can be used to estimate the
median engineering demand parameter
(EDP), which is defined as
1151
Fragility Based Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of Reinforced Concrete Framed Structures
Fig 7. Fragility curves of 8storey building Fig 10. Fragility curves of different
for different damage states models for collapse prevention damage
state
CONCLUSIONS
Based on the results obtained, the following
conclusions can be made:
1. Theoretically, if lesser the damaging
force, lesser is the chance to reach the
highest damage state i.e., damage is in
the order of IO < LS < CP.
2. More is the damage, more is the
Fig8. Fragility curves of different models probability to fail. So the order of
for immediate occupancy damage state failure probability is CP > LS > IO.
3. Same order of probability is observed
from the fragility curves also.
1152
Veerendra Kumar and Siva Kumar
1153
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Plane strain problems of elastic eccentric rings are studied in bipolar
coordinate system in the present work. Two dimensional elastic eccentric ring has
been defined initially in bipolar coordinate system which is a coordinate system
having two foci. Stress analysis of eccentric ring is carried out subjected to uniform
internal and external pressure using Airy’s stress function approach. Stresses are
obtained with various parameters such as eccentricity, angles between two foci and
natural logarithmic ratios of two foci. Effect of eccentricity is investigated on the
stresses of the eccentric rings.
Keywords: Eccentric rings; bipolar coordinate system; Airy’s stress function.
Stress in N/m2
decreases with β. It is found from Fig. 3 that 60000
50000
value of σ α increases and σ β decreases with 40000
β. It is found from Fig. 4 that value of σ α 30000
20000
increases and σ β decreases with β.Where β
10000
is the natural logarithmic ratio of two foci. 0
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
Minimum value of stresses are obtained when
𝛼 = 𝜋/6. β coordinate in m
16000
Figure 4 Variation of stresses σ α and σ β
14000
Sigma beta through the thickness and the bipolar
12000
Sigma alpha coordinate β for 𝛼 = 𝜋/2
Stress in N/m2
10000
8000 CONCLUSION
6000 The analytical solution has been carried out
4000 to investigate stresses in an eccentric plane
2000 strain ringof bipolar coordinate system
subjected to uniform internal and external
0
pressure. Airy’s stress functionis used which
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
1157
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper studies the use of Outrigger Structural System with Belt-Truss
for high-rise RC building subjected to earthquake load and wind load. Outrigger
Structural System ties the core and peripheral columns of building which will act as a
single cantilever member against lateral load. RC building models of 30-Storey were
analysed by applying earthquake or wind load using ETABS 2015. The models
consists of Shear wall as a core of building and Outrigger systems at different levels
of building. Comparison of various parameters such as lateral displacement and base
shear of RC frame with and without Outrigger structural system, using different
materials for outrigger, providing it at more than one level. Based on this comparison,
optimum position of outrigger will be found out for higher resistance and effective
resistance against lateral forces.
Keywords: Outrigger system; Belt truss; Shear wall; ETABS 2015.
STUDY MODELS
In this study there are several models
considered for the comparisons which is as
follows,
Type I Bare Frame Structure
Type II Core Shear Wall at Center
Type III Core Shear wall at Center + L Type
Shear Wall at Corner Of Building
Type IV Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Outrigger at 10th Storey
Type V Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Outrigger at 20th Storey
Type VI Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Figure 1. Deflected shape of outrigger Outrigger at 30th Storey
structural system Type VII Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
Outrigger at 10th Storey
Type VIII Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
LOAD CONSIDERATION Outrigger at 20th Storey
Type IX Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
Seismic Load = As Per IS 1893:2002 Outrigger at 30th Storey
Importance Factor, I = 1.5
Zone Factor, Z = 0.36
1159
Comparative Study of Outrigger Structural System
Top Storey
Base Shear
Study Models Displacement Weight (kN)
(kN)
(mm)
Bare Frame 370.2 12134.65 413091.69
SW at core 310.5 13545.78 418132.60
SW at core + corner 262.3 17652.09 438265.06
RCC Outrigger at 10th storey 277.1 14182.55 419819.50
RCC Outrigger at 20th storey 270.8 13856.14 419819.50
RCC Outrigger at 30th storey 297.1 13753.91 419819.50
Steel Outrigger at 10th storey 281.9 13795.11 418457.37
Steel Outrigger at 20th storey 277.1 13643.26 418457.37
Steel Outrigger at 30th storey 297.9 13700.52 418457.37
RCC Outrigger at 20th + Belt Truss at
262.2 14070.25 419819.50
10th storey
400
Bare Frame
SW at core
Top Storey Displacement(mm)
370.2
350
SW at core + corner
1160
Senghani and Mistry
wall at centre and corner gives the less IS 875 (Part-3) – 1987CodeofPractice
displacement than the structure with forDesignLoads(OtherThanEarthquake)
outrigger at its optimum position, but its base forBuildingsandStructuresCode Of
shear is very higher than structure with Practice Bureau of Indian Standard New
Delhi.
outrigger system. Therefore outrigger
structural system is more economical and Taranath Bungale S 2005 Wind and
effective than the shear wall. Earthquake Resistant Building Taylors
and Frnci Group.
Comparison has been made between RCC &
Steel Outrigger systems for 10th, 20th, 30th
storey locations in building, conclusion can
be made that RCC Outrigger gives less
displacement than steel outrigger. Therefore
RCC outrigger is more effective than Steel
outrigger Material for outrigger like RCC and
Steel does not give major difference in base
shear.
From the comparison between structure with
outrigger and belt truss at same location and
at different locations, Conclusion can be
made that if outrigger and belt truss provide
at different location, it shows better
performance than if it is provide at same
location. And also structure with outrigger
and belt truss provide at different location
gives less displacement than structure with
shear wall at centre + corner.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors are grateful to reviewers on this
paper. The work described in this paper was
carried out in the Department of Civil
Engineering, Charusat University.
REFERENCES
1161
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon containing chemicals that
have a high vapor pressure at ambient temperature. Human breath contains low level
acetone vapour which can be used as a biomarker for early diagnosis of diabetes.
Semiconducting Metal Oxides show better selectivity for a broad range of VOCs.
Tungsten trioxide (WO 3 ) has a very high selectivity towards acetone vapour. Thin
microcantilever structure has high sensitivity. A combination of a sensitive
microcantilever with metal oxides of high selectivity can be used for gas vapour
detection. Piezoresistive readout method offers many advantages while measuring the
microcantilever displacement. In this paper piezoresistive microcantilever with
tungsten trioxide as sensing material for acetone detection is designed and optimized
using finite element method.
Keywords: Piezoresistive, microcantilever, simulation, acetone, WO 3 .
REFERENCES
Boisen A Dohn S Keller S S Schmid S and
Tenje M 2011 Cantilever like
micromechanical sensors Rep. Prog.
Phys. 74 0-30
Reddy CVB Mrunal A Khaderbad Gandhi S
Kandpal M Patil S Narasaiah C K
Rajulu G K Chary PCK Ravikanth M
Figure 5. Total displacement of cantilever Rao VR 2012 Piezoresistive SU-8
versus Acetone concentration Cantilever With Fe(III) Porphyrin
Coating for CO Sensing IEEE
Transactions on Na notechnology 11
701-706
Khadayate RS Sali J V and Patil P P 2007
Acetone vapor sensing properties of
screen printed WO thick films Talanta
72 1077– 1081
Subhashini S and Juliet A V 2015 Analytical
investigations involved in a
Microcantilever for Gas detection
Figure 6. Relative change in resistance of Indian Journal of Emerging Electronics
cantilever versus acetone molecule in Computer Communications 2 301-
interacted on sensing part 305
Wang L Kalyanasundaram K Stanacevic M
CONCLUSION and Gouma P 2010 Nanosensor Device
The optimized value of the cantilever's for Breath Acetone Detection Sensor
geometry and promising material can be used Letters 8 1–4
to detect low level concentrations of gas Liu X Cheng S Liu H Hu S Zhang D and
vapour. Microcantilever’s deflection depends Ning H 2012 A Survey on Gas Sensing
upon the piezoresistor’s length and length of Technology Sensors 12 9635-9665
sensing layer. The tiny dimensions of the
cantilever show extremely high sensitivity.
Metal oxide embedded Microcantilever
1165
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
x1
n
A I A i i A e * e (9)
interval vector (2) i 1
xn
n
B 0 B i i B e * e
1
A (10)
i 1
1 1
x / y x ,
if 0 y (3) Inserting Eqn. 10 in Eqn. 8 results in
y y
n
A I A i i A e * e
1
x y z x z y z (4) i 1
2
n
Dependency problem exists in interval A i i A e * e (11)
analysis. The function i 1
y f x (1 x) / x does not yield the n
3
A i i A e * e
same result as y f x 1 1/ x . The i 1
appearance of x twice in the fraction is not Comparing Eq. 11 and Eq. 10
accounted for in the computation. Hence B0 A0 I
affine arithmetic is developed to overcome
this problem. Bi Ai , i 1, ,n
x y X X : X y (12)
AFFINE ARITHMETIC 2
n
Consider a problem with n uncertain input B e * e A e * e A i i A e * e
i 1
variables 1 , , n .Without loss of 3
(13)
n
generality; assume that i 1,1 for A i i A e * e
i 1
i 1 n . Affine arithmetic then represents n
all variables during the analysis as Setting Z | A i | this equation simplifies to
x x0 x1 1 xn n xe e (5) i 1
n
1169
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
reported in the literature. Hence, to analyse obtained and compared with the results
such kinds of structures, shear deformation available in the literature. The comparison
theories play an important role. According to shows the accuracy of IHSDT when applied
the kinematic assumption made to predict the to the buckling problems of FGPs. Finally,
deformations of the plate, the accuracy of the effect of aspect ratio, span-to-thickness ratio
shear deformation theory vary. Classical plate and type of loading is studied.
theory (CPT), first order shear deformation
theory (FSDT), third order shear deformation MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
theory by Reddy (TSDT) and several other
modified two-dimensional polynomial and Typical functionally graded plate with
non-polynomial theories have been employed dimensions axbxh has been considered. The
for the various analyses of the FGPs. material properties of the plate vary across
Polynomial shear deformation theories the thickness either according to the
(PSDT) consider polynomial shear strain exponential law (Eq. 1) or by the power law
function whereas, non-polynomial shear (Eq. 2).
deformation theories (NPSDT) consider non-
Pe = P0 e ( 2 ) (1)
N z+ 1
polynomial shear strain functions. The non-
polynomial functions may trigonometric, Where, P e represents effective material
logarithmic, exponential, hyperbolicor properties at any section across thickness, P 0
inverse hyperbolic functions. These above represents the property at bottom surface.
mentioned shear deformation theories are
Pe = Pm + ( Pc − Pm )( z h + 1 2 ) (2)
N
essentially two-dimensional which assume
plane stress condition and have constant
value of transverse deflection across the Where, P m and P c represents the properties
thickness. Modified polynomialshear of metal and ceramic respectively. N is an
deformation theories are employed by Thai exponent which controls the distribution of
and Choi (2013), Sobhy (2013), Bateni et al. the variation across the thickness.
(2013), and Swaminathan and Naveenkumar
Displacement field. Inverse sine hyperbolic
(2014) whereas, non-polynomial shear
shear deformation theory [Grover et al.,
deformation theories have been employed by
2013] which satisfies the condition of zero
Zenkour and Sobhy(2010), Sobhy (2013),
transverse shear strains at the top and bottom
Nguyen (2014) and Kulkarni et al. (2015) to
of the plate has been given in the eq. (3).
find out the buckling response of FGPs either
by analytically or by numerical method. Governing Equations. Hamilton’s principle
In the present work, a recently developed (Eq. 4), which considered the variation of
inverse hyperbolic shear deformation theory strain energy stored in the plate (Eq. 5) and
(IHSDT) developed by Grover et al. (2013) variation of work done due to external loads
has been employed for the modelling of (Eq. 6), has been employed.
∂w
FGPs. IHSDT has proven its applicability for u ( x, y, z )= u0 ( x, y ) − z 0 + f ( z )θ x
laminated composites and sandwich ∂x
structures and extending it for FGMs is the ∂w
objective of the present study. The plates are v( x, y, z )= v0 ( x, y ) − z 0 + f ( z )θ y (3)
∂y
considered under the action of in-plane loads.
Hamilton’s principle is employed to obtain w( x, y, z ) = w0 ( x, y )
the governing equations. The obtained Where, f(z)=g(z)+Ωz such that g(z)=sinh-
equations are then solved analytically by 1
(rz/h) and Ω=-2r/[h(r2+4)0.5], r=3.
using Navier-type solution. Analytical
solution is free from any numerical errors and ∫ (δ U + δ W )dt =
0 (4)
ensures the accurate solution of the governing T
Where, U and W are the strain energy stored The K matrix is the matrix of stiffness
in the system and work done due to external coefficients and G is the matrix containing
unit in-plane load. The vector Δ contains five
forces.
field variables. The above eigenvalue
σ xxδε xx + σ xxδε xx problem is solved for the parameter λ to
h /2
δ U =∫ ∫ +τ xyδγ xy + τ yzδγ yz dzdxdy (5) obtain the critical buckling load.
Φ − h /2
+τ xzδγ xz RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
1172
Kulkarni et al.
Table 1: Validation for the non-dimensional critical buckling load for functionally graded
plate (b/a=1, Uniaxial in-plane load)
Power Index (N)
a/h Theory
0 0.5 1 2 5 10
5 Thai and Choi (2013) 16.0211 10.6254 8.2245 6.3432 5.0531 4.4807
Nguyen (2014) 16.1003 10.667 8.2597 6.3631 5.0459 4.4981
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 16.0837 10.6624 8.2524 6.3578 5.0432 4.4919
Present 16.1003 10.6722 8.2597 6.3631 5.0459 4.4974
10 Thai and Choi (2013) 18.5785 12.1229 9.3391 7.2631 6.0353 5.4528
Nguyen (2014) 18.603 12.1317 9.3496 7.2687 6.0316 5.4587
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 18.5977 12.134 9.3473 7.2671 6.0307 5.456
Present 18.603 12.137 9.3496 7.2687 6.0316 5.4579
20 Thai and Choi (2013) 19.3528 12.5668 9.6675 7.5371 6.3448 5.7668
Nguyen (2014) 19.3593 12.5652 9.6702 7.5386 6.3437 5.7689
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 19.3579 12.5697 9.6696 7.5382 6.3434 5.7676
Present 19.3593 12.5705 9.6702 7.5386 6.3436 5.7681
Abstract: Long-term monitoring system has become very important tool which
enables to obtain basic information about actual structural behaviour in time about
stress and deformation level. This process of analysis and design in structural
engineering requires the consideration of different partial models of loading, structural
material, structural elements and analysis type. All of these, need an adequate
modelling as individuals and as coupled sets to catch a behaviour of interest. This
paper proposes an innovative algorithm to facilitate quantitative measures to evaluate
coupled partial models in structural engineering. Adapting graph theory and utilising
variance based sensitivity analysis enable evaluation and drawing conclusions
regarding the combinations of partial models. The algorithm is applied in bridge
engineering, analysing bridge behaviour considering dynamic loading, creep and
shrinkage material models and temperature influence which significantly affect
structural behaviour considering geometric nonlinear effects.
Keywords: Partial model; Model choice; Graph theory; Sensitivity analysis.
ASSESSMENT METHOD
The proposed assessment method addresses
global models, consisting of several coupled
partial models. The assessment approach
used extends the concepts of sensitivity
analysis and graph theory. The individual
quality of the PMs and their influence on the
global response are taken into account during
the assessment. In general, the quality of the
coupling of the PMs also affects the global
quality. As the method is based on graph
theory, a future extension to consider data
coupling quality is possible. Figure.1. Example of a graph with seven
partial models
GRAPH THEORY
S
Each M i are described using an uncorrelated,
A graph is used to map the combinations of
partial models for an engineering problem uniformly distributed, discrete random
[Kaveh, 2006]. By definition, a graph is a parameter as
collection of finite sets of vertices V and X iM 0,1 , with i 1,..., nM (2)
edges E, i.e. G V , E . Thus, the vertices of The values of Xi are either 0 or 1, where 0
a graph correspond to the partial models and indicates a deactivated model class and 1
the edges correspond to the coupling of the indicates an activated model class. The model
partial models as shown in Figure 1. The path output of each of these combinations is
is indicated by the shaded vertices and their retrieved and the terms
solid line edges in Figure 1. The global, V E Y / X i ,V E Y / X i and V Y can
complex and coupled model, which is a
collection of partial models and their be calculated directly without the need for the
couplings is represented by a so called path full sensitivity scheme.
through the graph π.
QUALITY OF COUPLED PARTIAL
MODELS
v0 , e1 ,..., vi 1 , ei , vi ,..., ep , v p (1)
The weighting factor of the vertex bij is
denoted as the quality of the partial model
1175
Evaluation of Coupled Partial Models using Graph Theory and Sensitivity Analysis
PM ij within the global coupled model. This Shrinkage models simulate the time-
dependent shortening of concrete. All
factor is computed as follows
shrinkage models used in this paper assume a
STiMC .MQPM i , j constant shrinkage strain along the cross
bij nM , with PMi , j M i (3)
section, which is in general calculated as
STi
MC
i 1
c,sh c,sh t , td (6)
nM
The sum of the total effect indices Si 1
MC
Ti
1176
Naik and Balu
speed of 90 kmph and the frequency response of model choice on the global response. It
is examined. first identifies the influence of the partial
models on a specific response and detects
interactions that may exist between the partial
models classes. And second it estimates a
quantified measure for the dependency of the
response quality on the descriptions of the
partial model.
REFERENCES
ACI 209 1992 Prediction of creep, shrinkage,
Figure 3. First mid span displacement for and temperature effects in concrete
diff. schemes structures American Concrete Institute.
The conclusion that could be drawn after AIAA (AIAA-G-077-1998) Guide for the
investigating the amplitude spectra of the verification and validation of
dynamic response is that the initial state of computational fluid dynamics
the bridge when the vehicle traverses a bridge simulations Tech representations
is of importance, not only because of road American Institute of Aeronautics and
unevenness but also due to long term Astronautics.
deflection. Now the sensitivity indices for Babuska I and Oden J 2004 Verification and
𝑀𝐶
DIF are calculated with 𝑆𝑇𝑖 = 0.14. Thus, the validation in computational engineering
quality of the global model depends on the and science: basic concepts.
quality of the chosen loading and creep Computational Methods in Applied
models and graphed as in Figure 4. Mechanics and Engineering 193 4057–
4066.
Gardner N and Lockman M 2001 Design
provisions for drying shrinkage and
creep of normal strength concrete ACI
Material Journal 98159–167.
Kaveh A 2006 Optimal Structural
AnalysisJohn Wiley Chichester.
Kawatani M Nishiyama S and Yamada Y
1993 Dynamic response analysis of
highway girder bridges under moving
vehicles Technical Representation 2137
Osaka University.
SaltelliARatto M Andres T Campolongo F
Fig. 4. Graph of significant model classes Cariboni J Gatelli D Saisana M and
Tarantola S 2008 Global Sensitivity
CONCLUSION Analysis-The primer John Wiley
Chichester.
The dynamic effects due to the bridge-vehicle
interaction are influenced by the creep
deformations. The two partial models with
their plausible descriptions of the dynamic
loading and material are interrelated. The
assessment procedure extends the use of
sensitivity analysis to quantify the influence
1177
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
REFERENCES
Gurley K and Kareem A 1999 Application of
wavelet transforms in earthquake wind
and ocean engineering, Engineering
Structures 21 149167.
Kim H and Melhem H 2003 Damage
detection of structures by wavelet
analysis Engineering Structures 26
347362.
Lee Y Y and Liew K M 2001 Detection of
damage locations in beam using the
wavelet analysis, International Journal
of Structural Stability and Dynamics 1
455465.
Liew K M and Wang Q 1998 Application of
wavelet theory for crack identification
in structures Journal of Engineering
Mechanics 124 152157.
Ovanesova A V and Suarez L E 2004
Applications of wavelet transforms to
damage detection in frame structures
Engineering Structures 26 3949.
Quila M Mondal S and Sarkar S 2014 Free
vibration analysis of an un-cracked and
cracked fixed beam IOSR Journal of
Mechanical and Civil Engineering
7683.
1181
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Modelling high stress gradients like crack propagation are still a challenge
to numerical methods. This paper is an attempt to address such problems using
Element Free Galerkin (EFG) method, one of the most popular MeshFree techniques.
Computation of Stress Intensity Factor (SIF) employing strain energy release rate has
been explained and is adopted for crack propagation identification. Results of the
investigation have been compared, verified and validated with the study reported in
literature. Enhancement to computational capabilities by way of strain energy based
refinement of integration and triangular cells have been proposed with illustration to
demonstrate efficacy of the technique.
Keywords: Element free Galerkin; Crack propagation; Strain energy; Stress
gradients; Stress intensity factor
CRACK PROPAGATION
To verify the SIF computation, a plate fixed
on one of its shorter edges and uniformly
loaded on the other is considered for the
analysis. A pre-initiated vertical crack at the
centre of the plate has been created in the
geometric model and determination of SIF
has been attempted to arrive at nodal density
and distribution for convergence and
accuracy. The smooth distribution of results
is clearly evident in EFG method and SIF
value is in good agreement with closed-form.
The material properties of steel are
considered throughout the paper and the plate
is 2mm.
Crack propagation path identification
attempted by Patrıcio and Mattheij (2007)
using XFEM has been considered for
investigation by proposed technique. The
geometry of the plate is shown in Figure 1,
where the crack is inclined at an angle of
67.5deg to the edge of the plate. One of the
shorter edges of the plate is constrained and
on the other end uniformly distributed loaded
is applied. The crack propagation has been
simulated and SIF for crack growth has been
computed. Crack growth is indicated by SIF
being higher than critical SIF (KIc). The von
Mises stress distribution in the plate at
different iteration step of the crack growth is
presented in Figures 2. Crack propagation
obtained has been compared with the results
reported by Patrıcio and Mattheij (2007).
S
j 1
( j)
IC
( j)
ATC
(2)
(i )
STC
ATC
Step 1
Step 6
where Vc is the volume of the ith cell; and
are the stresses and strains; n is the Figure 4. Displacement plot of adaptively
refined plate with inclined edge crack
number of Gauss points in the integration
cell, wj is Gauss weight in the numerical
integration of the cell energy.
1184
Patel et al.
The displacements and stresses are computed Analysis with the Element-Free
for very coarse density of nodes and Galerkin Method International Journal
integration cells in the initial iteration. This for Numerical Methods in Engg. 56
has been followed by the refinement of top 331–350
20% of the strain energy levels. The Haussler-Combe U and Korn C 1998 An
refinement of integration and triangular cells Adaptive Approach with the Element-
around the crack tip occurs after every Free-Galerkin Method Computer
iteration and the strain energy distribution for Methods in Applied Mechanics and
the same are carried out. Figure 3 shows the Engineering 162 203-222
strain energy in the integration cells in
iterations. About 75% reduction of nodes can LianYP X Zhang Y L 2012 An adaptive
be observed with acceptable accuracy. finite element material point method
Further Displacement distributions along and its application in extreme
with the refined nodes (Figure 4) are deformation problems Computer
presented. Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engg. 27 275–285
CONCLUSION
Liu G R 2009 Mesh Free Methods Moving
The crack propagation analysis in plate with beyond the Finite Element Method
angled edge crack using EFG method has Second edition, CRC press Taylor and
yielded results that are in very close Francis group New York
agreement with that reported in literature
(Patricio and Mattheij, 2007). 86% of Liu G R and Bernard B T Kee 2005 An
reduction in number of nodes and 56% of Adaptive Meshfree Least-Squares
integration cell reduction has been Method Report Centre for ACES
accomplished by the scheme suggested and Department of Mechanical
adopted has greatly reduce the computational Engineering, National University of
efforts without compromising on stability, Singapore
convergence and accuracy. Liu G R and Gu Y T 2005 An Introduction to
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Meshfree Methods and their
Programming Springer Netherlands
The authors are grateful to Technical
Education Quality Improvement Programme Liu G R and Tu Z H 2002 An Adaptive
(TEQIP) for funding this study. Procedure Based on Background Cells
for Meshless Methods Computer
REFERENCES Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Belytschko T Lu Y Y and Gu L 1994 Engg. 191 1923-1943
Element-free Galerkin method Patrıcio M & Mattheij R 2007 Crack
International Journal For Numerical propagation analysis CASA report 07-
Methods In Engineering 37229-256 03
Belytschko T Y Y Lu and L Gu 1995 Crack Yiqian H Haitian Y and Andrew J D 2014 A
propagation by element-free Galerkin Node-based Error Estimator for the
methods Engineering Fracture Element-free Galerkin (EFG) Method
Mechanics 51 2 295-315 International Journal of Computational
Gye-Hee L Heung-Jin C and Chang-Koon C Methods 11(4) 24
2003 Adaptive Crack Propagation
1185
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Analysis of two way slab under concentrated load is one of the difficult
tasks in designing of structures. There is no certain method found in the design codes
or reference books for analysis of two-way slab subjected to concentrated load.
Moreover, the analysis of RC slab is done using yield line theory in order to carry out
the deflection, shear force, bending moment for different boundary conditions. In this
paper, RC slab subjected to uniformly distributed load is analyze in STAAD PRO v8i
having different boundary conditions and different span ratio in order to derive
relation between bending moment by STAAD PRO v8i and bending moment by IS
456:2000. Moreover for advanced study, the bending moment co-efficient for positive
and negative bending moment of slab is find out for particular location of
concentrated load by using different boundary conditions and different span ratio.
Keywords: Concentrated loading; RC two-way slab; Finite element method;
bending moment.
REFERENCES
1187
Study on Analysis of RC Slabs under Concentrated Loading
Table 1 Bending Moment Co-efficient for Location (0.1, 0.1) and (0.9, 0.1)
For (0.1,0.1) and (0.9,0.1) of SPAN RATIO
SPAN 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2
Long Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.052 0.049 0.045 0.038 0.031
Long Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.024 0.023 0.021 0.018 0.014
TYPE 1
Short Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.065 0.066 0.067 0.067 0.066 0.064 0.06
Short Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.03 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.047
Long Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.052 0.049 0.045 0.038 0.031
Long Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.024 0.023 0.021 0.018 0.014
TYPE 2
Short Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.065 0.066 0.067 0.067 0.066 0.064 0.06
Short Span(-Ve) 0.028 0.03 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.047
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.091 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.083
Long Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.051 0.049 0.046 0.042
TYPE 3
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.1 0.102 0.104 0.106 0.107 0.11 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) 0.019 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.019 0.016 0.014
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.09 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.083
Long Span (-Ve) 0.059 0.055 0.052 0.052 0.051 0.049 0.046 0.042
TYPE 4
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.099 0.099 0.104 0.106 0.107 0.11 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) 0.019 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.019 0.016 0.014
Long Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.089 0.083 0.078 0.072 0.067 0.056 0.046
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 5
Short Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.091 0.09 0.088 0.086 0.084 0.079 0.072
Short Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.062 0.065 0.067 0.069 0.07 0.072 0.071
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.09 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.082
Long Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.055 0.052 0.052 0.051 0.047 0.047 0.043
TYPE 6
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.099 0.099 0.104 0.106 0.109 0.109 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
Long Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.089 0.083 0.078 0.072 0.067 0.056 0.046
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 7
Short Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.091 0.09 0.088 0.086 0.084 0.078 0.072
Short Span (-Ve) 0.059 0.062 0.065 0.068 0.07 0.071 0.073 0.073
Long Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.138 0.135 0.131 0.128 0.125 0.117 0.109
Long Span (-Ve) 0.015 0.013 0.015 0.018 0.021 0.023 0.026 0.028
TYPE 8
Short Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.143 0.145 0.147 0.15 0.152 0.155 0.155
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
Long Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.138 0.135 0.131 0.128 0.125 0.117 0.109
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 9
Short Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.143 0.145 0.147 0.15 0.152 0.155 0.155
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
1188
Katrodiya D.G.
1189
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
presented so far. Hence in this study, an devised for: 1) centrally located perforation
attempt has been made to assess the structural with perforation size (diameter, d p ) varying
behaviour of stainless steel square hollow from 10-30 mm and 2) mid-height located 10
sections with single circular perforation of mm size perforation at different transverse
different sizes at mid height of the column eccentricities (e t = 0-15 mm) from the face
and with varying eccentricity (from the face centre-line. In order to compare the
centre) of the perforation along transverse perforated results with that of unperforated
axis of the column through an experimental column, tests on unperforated specimens
investigation. were also conducted. For each data point,
three tests were performed, thus resulting in
EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION 27 tests in all. The results of the tests are
reported in the form of ultimate load capacity
Square hollow sections of 50 x 50 x 1.5 mm (P u ) shown as a variation of the perforation
(width (B) x depth (D) x thickness (t)) cross size (d p ) and eccentricity (e t ).
section were procured from the local market;
cut and ends prepared into lengths each with
150 mm. In order to determine the 150 Pu C1
mechanical properties of the stainless steel C2
material, tensile coupon tests were performed 100
P (kN)
L t D
C1 C2
dp
et b
B (b)
Figure 2. a) P vs δ curve and b)
Figure 1. Typical specimen with a deformation pattern at Pu (C1) and post-
centrally located circular perforation. Pu (C2) for centrally located perforation
(dp/b=0.64).
The test specimen ends were inserted for 5
mm in specially prepared steel support
sleeves, to simulate fixed end conditions, and RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
tested in a 1000 kN capacity UTM. The net
unsupported length (L) is taken as ~140 mm. Load (P) vs axial displacement/shortening (δ)
Thus the length/depth ratio considered for the curves were obtained for all the specimens
tests is ~ 2.8. This ratio agrees with similar tested. A typical variation of P vs δ and
values (~3.0) taken for stub column tests in deformation pattern corresponding to P u and
the literature (see Theofanous and Gardner, post-P u are shown in Figure 2, for a centrally
2009, Patton and Singh, 2012). Typical located perforation of size d p /b = 0.64 or d p =
specimen with a centrally located perforation 30 mm (where b=inner width). From Figure
is presented in Figure 1. Two test sets were 2b, an initiation of the local buckling at mid-
1191
Experimental investigation of hollow stainless steel square stub column with single perforation under
axial compression
Pu (kN)
local buckling (and lateral / transverse
displacement) with apparently a localised 80
buckling near the diametrical ends (at mid- 40
height) of the perforation can be seen. Signs
of local buckling can also be seen near the 0
support as a result of the fixed end conditions 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
imposed, this however, appears to have dp/b (a)
remained unchanged for the rest of the 1.5
experiment (see Figure 2b).
Pu/Puu
1
A) EFFECT OF PERFORATION SIZE
(D P ) 0.5
Variation of P u and P u /P uu (P uu = P u
corresponding to unperforated column) with 0
d p /b are plotted in Figures 3a and 3b 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
respectively. A decrease in the ultimate load dp/b (b)
capacity can be seen for increasing the
perforation size, with 200% increase in Figure 3. a) Pu with dp/b and b) Pu/Puu
perforation from 10 mm, a near linear with dp/b.
reduction of~11.6% in P u can be observed
(Figure 3a). At first this may be associated
with the reduction in the material area due to
perforation. From Figure 3b, it can be 200
inferred that with a perforation size of 64% of 150
Pu (kN)
B) EFFECT OF TRANSVERSE
ECCENTRICITY (ET) 1.5
Figure 4 shows the variation of P u and P u /P uc 1
Pu/Puc
Based on the experimental study, it can be simulation and test results Thin-Walled
concluded that increase in perforation size Structures 80 1-12
reduces the load carrying capacity of the Narayanan R and Chow F Y 1984 Ultimate
column. With 200% increase in perforation capacity of uniaxially compressed
from 10 mm, a near linear reduction of perforated plates Thin-Walled Structures
~11.6% in P u can be observed corresponding 34 241-264
to centrally located perforation. For the
smallest perforation (d p /b = 0.21) considered Patton M L and Singh K D 2012 Numerical
the reduction in P u is found to be very small modelling of lean duplex stainless steel
(~2%). No significant change in the load hollow columns of square, L-, T-, and +-
capacity could be seen for the transverse shaped cross sections under pure axial
variation of perforation eccentricity, for the compression Thin-Walled Structures 53
perforation size considered. 1-8
1193
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
rT ( x) {cor(s1, x) ... ... ... cor (sn , x)} (3) Meshfree formulation is derived using
Mindlin formulation with strain displacement
rT (x) is a vector of correlation between the relations based on Marguerre’s shallow shell
given nodes and point of interest. theory and von Kármán's assumptions. The
nonlinear algebraic equations for the system
are given by:
P and R in eq. (2) are given by:
[K L + K NL (δ)]δ = F (7)
p1 ( s1 ) ... pm ( s1 )
P ... ... ... (4) K T Δδ = ΔF (8)
p1 ( sn ) ... pm ( sn ) The tangent stiffness matrix K T may be
written as:
cor ( s1 , s1 ) ... cor ( s1 , sn )
K T = K L + K NLT + K σ (9)
R ... ... ...
(5) where K L and K NL are linear and nonlinear
cor ( sn , s1 ) ... cor ( sn , sn ) stiffness matrices, respectively. F is the load
vector and K σ is the geometric stiffness
cor is the correlation between the given nodes matrix. Rectangular background mesh with 4
and point of interest. In the present × 4 Gaussian quadrature is employed in all the
formulation, Gaussian correlation function is examples for numerical integration of weak
used which is given by: form.
1195
Large Deformation Analysis of Point Supported Conoidal Shells Using Element Free Galerkin Method
20
10
-3
-10
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
x/b
1.5
1200
based meshless method for numerical
4
2000
composite conoidal shell structures
1500 Computers & Structures 43(3) 469–476
1000 Geometry: a/b = 1 ; t = a/100; Gu L 2003 Moving kriging interpolation and
a/hh = 5; hl/hh = 0.25
Material :Orthotropic element-free Galerkin method
500 E1 / E2 = 25, G12 / E2 = G13 / E2 = 0.5,
G23 / E2 = 0.2 and 12 = 0.25. International Journal for Numerical
0 Methods in Engineering 56(1) 1–11
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
Deflection, w = wc/h
Kim Y H and Lee S W 1988 A solid element
Figure 6. Nonlinear central deflection formulation for large deflection analysis
versus load for laminated composite of composite shell structures Computers
conoidal shell & Structures 30(1) 269-274
1197
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Hoppers are tall structures used to store large quantity of ash. They are
subjected to different static and dynamic loading due to the unique characteristic of
the stored material. It is very difficult to identify the magnitude and distribution of
stresses and deformations. High collapse rate of hoppers and lack of adequate
remedial measures to counter it pushes forth the importance of a detailed study in the
matter. Conventional methods of analysis are insufficient to handle the complexity of
such a structure. Finite Element (FE) analysis tool is used to obtain detailed insight
and structural behaviour of hoppers. Non-linear FE analysis is performed using
commercial software ANSYS Mechanical (R16) to calculate the stresses and
deformations in the plates and stiffeners of hopper. Design methodology is developed
to carry out non-linear FE analysis of hopper and same is presented here. In addition
to this the weight of hopper is predicted by finalising the size and space of the
stiffeners for different plate thicknesses.
Key Words: Flue Gas; ESP; Finite Element; Ash.
1199
Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of ESP Hopper
Meshing tool. Details of mesh are shown in respectively which is well below the
Figure 2. allowable limits as per IS:800 standard.
The same analysis is repeated for hopper
plate of 5mm thickness and stiffeners. The
predicted weight the two cases i.e. 6mm plate
thickness and 5mm plate thickness is shown
in Table 2.
Figure 3. Mesh
1200
Patel et al
CONCLUSIONS
Design methodology is developed to carry
out FE analysis of large size hopper of
trapezoidal shape. The same design
methodology is employed to evaluate hopper
design with different plate thickness and
stiffener size. Stresses and deformations in
the plates and stiffeners are predicted and
they are found to be within allowable limits.
Weight of hopper is also predicted by
finalising the stiffeners size and spacing for
different plate thickness. This method can be
used as ready reference for the design of
large hoppers.
REFERENCES
ASME code for pressure vessel design:
ASME section VIII Division 2.
General construction in steel- Code of
practice: IS: 800, 1984 & 2007.
Jianbao Fu 2010 3D Finite element analysis
of wall pressure on large diameter silos
1201
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The current paper briefly discusses about the formulation of B-Spline
wavelet based finite element formulation for bi-material interface problems.
Numerical examples based on 1D bi-material interface problems are solved and the
results are analysed and validated against the available analytical solutions.
Convergence study is also performed on a bar using wavelet finite element method
(WFEM) for different resolutions and order of scaling functions of B-spline wavelets.
B-spline WFEM is able to accurately capture the strain jump at the interface, along
with stress continuity.
Keywords: B-spline wavelet on the interval; scaling function; wavelet function
1203
B-Spline Wavelet Finite Element Method and Its Application to Elastic Bi-materials
1205
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The Past devastating earthquakes have revealed that there is urgent need
to ensure the safety and integrity of nonstructural components and equipment
especially in nuclear safety related structures. Qualification of these equipment for
beyond the design basis level earthquake necessitates consideration of the structural
nonlinearity for generation of the Floor Response Spectra (FRS). This paper
addresses the experimental and analytical work on generation of floor response
spectrum. Push over and shake table experiments were performed on 3 storeyed
RCC framed structure. A simplified analytical approach is explained to derive
earthquake-induced floor spectra in a RCC structure deforming beyond elastic
limits. In this approach, initially, the performance of the structure is evaluated using
pushover analysis. Floor spectra of the structure is then obtained considering the
degraded stiffness and increased damping evaluated at each performance level from
pushover curve. The floor spectra for nonlinear structure generated using this
method is validated by experimental results.
Keywords: Equivalent damping; Pushover analysis; Shake table test; Floor
response spectra; linear time history analysis
_____________________________
1207
Floor Response Spectra considering Structural nonlinearity effect: Experiments and Analysis
is plotted in Figure. 2. The results obtained history analysis is carried out. Nonlinear
from the shake table tests were also used in response spectra can be obtained by two
plotting the dynamic pushover curve. The methods viz., direct time integration
peak floor acceleration for each base technique by considering nonlinear
excitation was noted and base shear was characteristics of the structural elements or
calculated as sum of product of the mass of equivalent linear analysis considering
each floor and peak floor acceleration of equivalent damping and stiffness reduction
each floor. The relative displacement of due to nonlinearity. The former method
each floor with respect to table is obtained being time consuming, the later method is
from the displacement transducers attached used in this project work to generate the
to each floor. The pushover curve in terms nonlinear spectra.
of peak floor displacement v/s base shear
was plotted for 0.025g, 0.05g, 0.9g, 0.9g
repeat, 0.95g and 1g (repeated 3 times) peak
base excitation.
ANALYTICAL SIMULATION
Analytical simulation of the structure is
carried out using linear analysis and Figure 3. Comparative pushover curves
nonlinear analysis. Initially, free vibration
analysis is carried out. Then pushover PROPOSED METHOD
analysis is performed in SAP2000 using
user defined hinge properties derived An accurate method to generate floor
considering Kent and Park concrete stress response spectrum is evolved in this report.
strain model (Kent and Park, 1971) and It is named as equivalent linear method.
bilinear steel stress strain model. Analytical This method utilises the pushover curve to
pushover curve is shown in figure 2. generate floor response spectrum using
linear time history analysis. This method
needs accurate modelling of damping and
stiffness in order to achieve good results.
The equivalent stiffness Ke (Figure. 3) is
calculated in terms of initial stiffness Ki at
each ductility value. Where Ki is the
stiffness of the structure before cracking
occurs. The stiffness value of 0.5Ki is
obtained as the stiffness at the yielding of
Figure 2. Stiffness with ductility
the structure.
Generation of response spectra is carried
out using time history analysis of the The nonlinear behaviour is also to be
structure. Time history analysis can be done represented by equivalent viscous damping
using modal time history analysis and also factor, ζ eq consisting of elastic and
using direct time integration method. In hysteretic energy dissipation [Jacobsen,
order to obtain linear floor spectra mode 1930]. The equivalent viscous damping is
superposition technique with modal time divided into two parts as given by the
equation given below.
1208
Kothari et. al.
RESULTS REFERENCES
Floor response spectra are generated for two ASCE Standard 4 1998 Seismic analysis of
linear cases (0.025g and 0.05g) and two safety – related nuclear structures
nonlinear cases (0.9g; ductility 1.57 and 1g; FEMA 273 1997 NEHRP Guidelines for
ductility 3.57). The comparative FRS for 1g Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings
base excitation is shown in Figure. 5. Building Seismic Safety Council
Washington D C
Gulkan P and Sozen M 1974 Inelastic
Response of Reinforced Concrete
Structures to Earthquake Motion ACI
Journal 71 604-610
Jacobsen L S 1930 Steady Forced
(a) First Floor (b) Second Floor
Vibrations as Influenced by Damping
ASME Transaction 52(1) 169-181
Kelly T E 1978 Floor Response of Yielding
Structures Bull NZNSEE 114
Kent D C and Park R 1971 Flexural
Mechanics with Confined Concrete
(c) Roof Journal of the Structural Division
ASCE 97 ST7 1969-1990
Figure5. Comparison of Experimental
and Analytical floor spectra for 1g base Medina R A Sankaranarayanan R and
excitation (3.57 ductility) Kingston K M 2006 Floor response
spectra for light components mounted
CONCLUSION on regular moment-resisting frame
1209
Floor Response Spectra considering Structural nonlinearity effect: Experiments and Analysis
structures Engineering structures
28(14) 1927-1940
Priestley M J N 2003 Myths and Fallacies
in Earthquake Engineering Revisited
The Mallet Milne Lecture IUSS Press
Pavia Italy
Sewell R T Cornell C A Toro G R and
McGuire R K 1986 A study of factors
influencing floor response spectra in
nonlinear multi-degree of freedom
structures The John Blumo Earthquake
Engineering Center Stanford
University Report No. 82
1210
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
INTRODUCTION
Since last one decade uncertainty
Flutter is a dynamic aeroelastic instability quantification in aeroelasticity has become
phenomena caused by self-excitation leading active research area. The main goal of
to catastrophic failure of aircraft structure. uncertainty quantification is selection of risk
The physical reason for instability in based design criteria over conventional
structure is the pumping of aerodynamic margin of safety based design criteria for
power to the aeroelastic system, at the point aeroelastic qualification of aircraft structures.
where aerodynamic power is equal to Pettit (2004) demonstrated the importance of
dissipated power of structural system, called uncertainty quantification in aeroelasticity.
stability boundary (Flutter point) and the Uncertainty quantification of an airfoil in
resulting oscillation is simple harmonic in LCO was carried out by Beran et al. (2006)
nature. In the case where aerodynamic power using torsional stiffness (nonlinear) and
is greater than the dissipated power then initial pitch angle with Gaussian
oscillation is continuously diverging leading characteristics. Ueda (2006) carried out the
to failure. sensitivity analysis of an airfoil in steady
flow regime. Castravete and Ibrahim (2008)
For flutter prediction, various methods have
investigated the effect of stiffness
been reported in the literature. 𝑘 method was
uncertainties on flutter of cantilever beam
attributed to Theodorsen (1935), in which
using Monte Carlo simulation and first order
artificial damping was introduced and the
perturbation technique. Li and Yang (2010)
flutter point was obtained where artificial
showed the effect of uncertainties in airfoil
damping is zero. 𝑝𝑘 method was proposed by
parameters on flutter using Monte Carlo
Hassig (1971), where both 𝑝 type and 𝑘 type
simulation. From the literature reviewed it is
analyses were carried out and the
observed that no studies have been reported
aerodynamic loads were assumed to be
on probabilistic flutter analysis of airfoil
simple harmonic in nature. Irani and Sazesh
using modal approach considering unsteady
(2013) proposed a new method called
aerodynamics. It is also noted that there are
stochastic approach, in which additional
no such studies reported using perturbation
white noise is added in lift force and the
techniques.
flutter velocity is obtained at a point where
the variance of response is maximum.
In this paper, the effect of structural and moment of inertia about reference point and
aerodynamic uncertainty on flutter semi chord respectively.
characteristics of 2DoFs airfoil system in Now, using Theodorsen’s Unsteady Thin-
unsteady flow regime is carried out using
Airfoil Theory, the lift ( 𝐿 ) and moment
modal approach and first order perturbation
(𝑀1⁄4 ) can be expressed as:
technique. The statistics of frequency and
damping obtained at critical flow velocity are 𝐿 = 2𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑈𝑏𝐶(𝑘)�ℎ̇ + 𝑈𝛼 + 𝑏� 12 −𝑓�𝛼̇ � +
also compared with those obtained using 𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑏 2 (ℎ̈ + 𝑈𝛼̇ − 𝑏𝑓𝛼̈ ) (2𝑎)
Monte Carlo simulation.
𝑀1�
4
MATHEMATICAL MODEL 1
= −𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑏 3 �2 ℎ̈ + 𝑈𝛼̇
DESCRIPTIONS 1
+ 𝑏 �8
HEAVE AND PITCH AIRFOIL 𝑓
− 2� 𝛼̈ � (2𝑏)
The airfoil model having two degrees of
freedom namely heave ( ℎ ) and pitch ( α ) where, Theodorsen function 𝐶(𝑘) is a
considered for aeroelastic analysis is shown complex valued function of reduced
in Figure.1. Here, P, Q, R and S are the frequency (𝑘 = 𝑏𝜈⁄𝑈). Equation (1) can be
aerodynamic center, middle of the chord, written in matrix form as:
reference point (i.e., where the heave
𝑀𝑆 {𝑞̈ } + 𝐾𝑆 {𝑞} = 𝑀𝐴 {𝑞̈ } + 𝐶𝐴 {𝑞̇ } + 𝐾𝐴 {𝑞}
displacement (h) is measured) and center of
mass respectively. The dimensionless (3)
parameters f and g ( −1 ≤ 𝑓 ≤ 1 and where 𝑀𝑆, 𝐾𝑆 , 𝑀𝐴 , 𝐶𝐴 and 𝐾𝐴 are structural
−1 ≤ 𝑔 ≤ 1 ) determine the locations of the inertia, structural stiffness, aerodynamic
points R and S respectively. inertia, aerodynamic damping and
aerodynamic stiffness matrices respectively
and 𝑞 is time dependent displacement matrix.
Substituting {𝑞} = {𝑞�} exp(𝑝𝜏) where
𝜏 = 𝑈𝑡⁄𝑏 in equation (3) and expressing
𝑝 = 𝑖𝑘 (i.e. simple harmonic motion in
excitation) in the coefficient of aerodynamic
inertia and aerodynamic damping matrices,
equation (3) can be reduced as:
2
�𝑝2 𝑀𝑆 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴 + 𝑈𝑏 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴 + 𝑈𝑏 2(𝐾𝑆 −
Figure 1. Schematic of an airfoil system 𝐾𝐴 )�{𝑞�} ={0} (4)
The Lagrange’s equations with virtual work The coefficient of {𝑞�} in equation (4) is
principle are used to derive the equation of called flutter determinant (i.e. eigenvalue
motion of an aeroelastic system. The problem with 𝑝 as complex eigenvalue and
equation of motion can be written as: {𝑞�} as eigenvector).
𝑚ℎ̈ + 𝑚𝑏𝑥𝛼 𝛼̈ + 𝐾ℎ ℎ = −𝐿 (1𝑎) PERTURBATION APPROACH
𝐼_𝛼 𝛼 ̈ + 𝑚𝑏𝑥_𝛼 ℎ ̈ + 𝐾_𝛼 𝛼 The mathematical stochastic model of an
= 𝑀_(1 ⁄ 4) + 𝐿(□(1/2 airfoil is generated by using first order
+ 𝑓))𝑏 (1𝑏) perturbation method. In perturbation
where 𝑥𝛼 = 𝑔 − 𝑓 . 𝐾ℎ and 𝐾𝛼 are linear approach the field variables are expanded via
heave and pitch stiffness respectively. Taylor series which can be written as:
𝑚, 𝐼𝛼 and b are the mass of an airfoil, mass 𝜕𝛽
𝛽 = 𝛽0 + | 𝛿𝑟 (5)
𝜕𝑟 𝑟=𝑟0
1212
Probabilistic Flutter Analysis: A Perturbation Approach
where 𝛽0 , 𝑟 are the mean field quantities and 𝑎 = 𝑓. 𝑏. Table 1 gives the descriptions of all
random parameters respectively. The the random parameters considered in this
derivatives of the field quantity are evaluated analysis with their mean and standard
at the mean value of the random variables. deviation values.
Now applying first order perturbation
The variation of mean frequency and
technique to equation (4) via Taylor series
damping (𝑝0 𝑉 = 𝜔Γ𝛼+𝑖𝜔Ω𝛼 ) with various flow
expansion considering parameters
𝑝, 𝑀𝑆 , 𝐾𝑆 , 𝑀𝐴 , 𝐶𝑆 , 𝐾𝐴 and 𝑏 and separate speed is shown in Figure. (2). Here, negative
zeroth order and first order term, the of Γ is called modal damping and Ω is modal
equations are obtained as follows: frequency. The dimensionless mean flutter
0
speed ( 𝑉 ) and the corresponding reduced
�(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆0 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴0 + 𝑏𝑈 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴0 + frequency (𝑘) obtained from the analysis are
�𝑏0 �
2 7.998 and 0.0626 respectively. The present
𝑈2
(𝐾𝑆0 − 𝐾𝐴0 )� {𝑞� 0 } = {0} (6) results are found to be very close to those
0 reported by Li and Yang (2010).
�(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆0 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴0 + 𝑏𝑈 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴0 +
2
�𝑏0 � 𝑟 𝑟
𝑈 2 (𝐾𝑆0 − 𝐾𝐴0 )� �𝑞� ′ � + 2(𝑝)′ 𝑝0 𝑀𝑆0 {𝑞� 0 } =
𝑟 𝑟
− �(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆′ + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴′ +
𝑟 𝑟
(𝑏)′ 𝑟
𝑈
(−𝑖𝑘)�(𝑏)′ 𝐶𝐴0 + 𝑏 0 𝐶𝐴′ � +
𝑟 𝑟 𝑟
1
𝑈2
�(𝑏 0 )2 �𝐾𝑆′ − 𝐾𝐴′ � + 2𝑏 0 (𝑏)′ {𝐾𝑆0 −
𝐾𝐴0 }�� {𝑞� 0 } (7)
Table 1 Various random parameters and their uncertain values [Li and Yang, 2010]
𝜎
Parameters Distribution �)
Mean (𝜇 𝐶𝑉 = 𝜎
�
𝜇
𝑏 normal 0.25 0.2 % 0.0005
𝑥 normal 0.0625 2% 0.00125
𝑚 normal 24.04 0.2% 0.04808
𝜌∞ normal 0.7364 (H = 5 km) 1.5% 0.011046
𝑎 normal -0.125 1% 0.00125
Pettit C L 2004 Uncertainty quantification in
CONCLUSION
aeroelasticity: recent results and research
In this paper, the probabilistic flutter analysis challenges Journal of Aircraft 41(5)
of an airfoil (with structural mass as 1217-1229.
uncertain) has been performed using Beran S P Pettit C L and Millman D R 2006
Perturbation approach and MCS considering Uncertainty quantification of limit-cycle
unsteady aerodynamics and modal flutter oscillations Journal of Computational
analysis method. The results obtained from Physics 217 217-247.
the Perturbation approach is found to be quite Ueda T 2005 Aeroelastic analysis
close to those obtained from MCS. considering structural uncertainty
Aviation 9(1) 3-7
REFERENCES Castravete S C and Ibrahim R A 2008 Effect
Theodorsen T 1935 General theory of of stiffness uncertainties on the flutter of
aerodynamic Instability and the a cantilever beam AIAA Journal 46(4)
mechanism of flutter NACA TR 496. 925-935.
Hassig H J 1971 An approximate true Li Y and Yang Z 2010 Probabilistic flutter
damping solution of the flutter equation analysis and risk assessment of an airfoil
by determinant iteration Journal of 27TH International Congress of The
Aircraft 8 885-889. Aeronautical Sciences (ICAS 2010) 1-6.
Irani S and Sazesh S 2013 A new flutter Ji-ming L and Wei W 1987 First order
speed analysis method using stochastic perturbation solution to the complex
approach Journal of Fluids and eigen values Applied Mathematics and
Structures 40 105-115. Mechanics (English Edition) 8(6) June
1987.
1214
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: A simple layer wise finite element formulation based on B-spline basis
function is presented in this paper. Here, the variation of out of plane displacements is
modeled by linear Lagrange interpolation and inplane variation of displacements is
interpolated by B-spline scaling function. The geometric nonlinearity and proportional
damping are considered in the model. The buckling and postbuckling response of
symmetric cross ply laminated composite plate subjected to uniform and concentrated
inplane mechanical edge loadings are reported. The dynamic instability regions are
traced by the periodic solutions with periods T and 2T to Mathieu type differential
equations. Moreover, the nature of linear and nonlinear response in stable and unstable
regions is studied.
Keywords: Buckling; Postbuckling; Dynamic instability; Layerwise finite element.
at each of the two end points 0 and 1. These Considering inextensibility in transverse
results in a group of (2𝑗 + 2𝑚 − 1) knots normal direction, the displacement
𝑗
𝑗 2 +𝑚−1 components(𝑢1 , 𝑢2 , 𝑢3 ) along global
arranged in a sequence of {𝜉𝑘 }𝑘=−𝑚+1 with coordinate directions (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) at any generic
m-tuple knots at 0 and 1. Now, B-spline point in the laminate can be expressed as
functions can be generated by mth order
𝑁
divided difference of the function (𝜉 𝑗 −
𝑚−1 𝑢1 (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑢(𝑥, 𝑦) + ∑ 𝑢𝐼 (𝑥, 𝑦)Ф𝐼 (𝑧)
𝜉)+ with respect to 𝜉 𝑗 as, 𝐼=1
𝑁
𝒋 𝒋 𝒋
𝑩𝒎,𝒌 = (𝝃𝒌+𝒎 − 𝝃𝒌 ) ×
𝒋 𝒋 𝒋
𝑢2 (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑣(𝑥, 𝑦) + ∑ 𝑣 𝐼 (𝑥, 𝑦)Ф𝐼 (𝑧)
[𝝃𝒌 , 𝝃𝒌+𝟏 , … … . . , 𝝃𝒌+𝒎 ]𝝃𝒋 (𝝃𝒋 − 𝝃)𝒎−𝟏
+ (1) 𝐼=1
𝛹 = 𝛹1 ⨂𝛹2 (2)
1216
Layerwise Solution for Nonlinear Static and Dynamic Stability of Laminated Composite Plates using B-
Spline Finite Element Method
𝑚
concentrated inplane edge loading [Figure
∑ 𝑢𝑖 𝛹𝑖 𝑚 3]. The nondimensional critical buckling
𝑖=1
∑ 𝑢𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 load 𝜆𝑐𝑟 = 𝑃𝑎/𝐷 of a thin (𝑎/ℎ = 100)
𝑢 𝑚
𝐼 simply supported isotropic plate subjected to
{𝑣} = ∑ 𝑣𝑖 𝛹𝑖 ; {𝑢 𝐼 } = 𝑖=1
𝑚 central concentrated load is obtained from
𝑤 𝑣
𝑖=1
∑ 𝑣𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 present formulation as 25.134, which
𝑚
{ 𝑖=1 } compares well with reference [Daripa and
∑ 𝑤𝑖 𝛹𝑖 Singha, 2009] value of 25.674.
{ 𝑖=1 }
𝑚 A thick (𝑎/ℎ = 10)simply supported
∑ 𝑈𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 laminated plate [0/90/0/90/0] subjected to a
𝑖=1 pair of compressive edge load P at a
𝑚
𝑈𝐼 distance c from bottom edge is analyzed and
{ 𝑉𝐼 } = ∑ 𝑉𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 non-dimensional critical buckling loads 𝑃̅ =
𝑊𝐼 𝑖=1 𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝑎/𝐸2 ℎ3 are presented in Table 1 for
𝑚
different positions of concentrated load.
∑ 𝑊𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 Material properties considered for the
{ 𝑖=1 } present analysis are,𝐸1 = 3𝐸2 , 𝐺12 = 0.6𝐸2 ,
(4) 𝐺13 = 𝐺23 = 0.5𝐸2 , 𝛾12 = 0.25.
RESULTS
In the first part, convergence study and
accuracy of the present element is validated
by comparing results with the following
benchmark problems, (i) static analysis of
laminated plate to determine stress
distribution across thickness of plate, (ii)
computation of critical buckling loads.
Distributions of stresses are determined
along transverse direction of a thick
composite plate using present method which
are found to be in good agreement with 3D
elasticity solutions of Pagano, 1967. The Figure 3. Plate subjected to
validation results are not presented here for concentrated inplane loading
the sake of brevity. The, convergence study Table 1. Non-dimensional critical buckling
is done with increasing element number as load 𝑃̅ = 𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝑎/𝐸2 ℎ3 for various positions of
well as scale of spline element. The point load
numerical studies show that only a single
element with 2×2 scale of cubic B-spline 𝑐/𝑎
𝑏/𝑎
function gives converged results. The effects 1/6 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6
of various inplane loadings and boundary 0.5 2.572 2.319 1.802 2.319 2.572
conditions on critical buckling loads and 1 5.474 3.749 3.063 3.749 5.474
post buckling equilibrium paths of a 1.5 7.073 4.063 3.636 4.063 7.073
laminated composite plate are examined. 2 7.240 4.938 4.695 4.938 7.240
Two types of loading condition are
considered here, uniformly distributed Postbuckling equilibrium paths of the cross
compressive in-plane loading and ply [0˚/90˚/0˚/90˚/0˚] laminated composite
1217
Mondal and Ramchandra
1218
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Finite element (FE) analyses were performed using ABAQUS, to compare
the strength of Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) fixed ended circular, square and
flat oval (with semi-circular curves) hollow slender columns, keeping the material
cross-sectional areas same. The dimensions considered were l (flat length) of 50 mm,
r (curvature radius) of 50 mm, w (distance between flat plates) of 100 mm; radius of
65.89 mm; and breadth of 103.5 mm for the flat-oval, circular and square cross
sections respectively; and thickness of 20 mm. The heights of the columns were
varied from 1000-3500 mm. Based on the FE study, it was observed that load capacity
or strength of the columns are in the order circular > square > flat oval sections for all
the heights modelled. It was also seen that the difference between values of load
capacity between flat-oval and circular or square increases with increasing column
height.
Keywords: ABAQUS; Slender; Flat oval; Circle; Square; fixed; LDSS.
1220
Strength of Fixed Ended Square, Flat Oval and Circular Tubular LDSS Slender Columns Under Axial
Compression
6000 Pu r65.89
r65.89
(a) l103.5
l103.5
5000 l50w100r50
l50w100r50
4000
P (kN)
3000
2000
1000 δu
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 (a) (b) (c)
δ (mm)
Figure 3. P vs δ for (h = 2500 mm) (Circular) (Square) (Flat oval)
1222
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
keeping same material cross sectional area 0.2% proof strength, σ cr is the elastic
(or material consumption). For comparison, buckling stress.Young’s modulus (E) =
results of circular LDSS cross section are 197200 MPa, and σ 0.2 = 657 MPa were
also included. FE results are then compared
considered for the LDSS material modelling
with EN 1993-1-4 (2006).
(Theofanous and Gardner, 2009). The present
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING FE modelling procedure was validated
against the experimental data (Theofanous
Numerical analyses of the stub polygonal and and Gardner, 2009) obtained for a similar
circular LDSS hollow columns were study on square hollow stub column. Figure 2
performed with the help of general purpose shows typical cross-sectional shapes used in
FE package, Abaqus (2009).9 stub columns the analyses and nomenclature used were
of thickness (t) 5 mm and height (H) 600 mm TRI, SQR, PEN, HEX, HEP, OCT, NAN,
were considered for the study. Eight regular DEC, CIR for triangle, square, pentagon,
polygons (viz., triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon,
hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon and decagon and circular cross-sections
decagon) and one circular cross sections were respectively.
considered, such that the perimeters are equal
P (load)
(=800 mm), and hence the same material
cross-section. This condition was achieved by
considering side lengths of 266.6 mm,
200mm, 160 mm, 133.3 mm, 114.2 mm, 100
mm, 88.8 mm and 80mm for triangular,
square, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal,
octagonal, nonagonal and decagonal; and
radius of 127.3 mm for circular sections
respectively. The FE modelling procedure
adopted herein follows those widely accepted
shell finite element modelling for similar type Figure 1. Typical boundary conditions
of studies (see e.g. Zhu and Young, 2012, and FE mess (triangular cross section)
Patton and Singh, 2012, Young and
A B C
Ellobody, 2007). Typical boundary
conditions of the numerical model with FE
mesh are shown in Figure 1. The bottom end
of the column was fixed supported while only
D E F
longitudinal translation was allowed at the
loaded end. Four nodded shell elements
(S4R) were selected for meshing the
geometry. Typical mesh size consisted of ~10
x 10 mm to 10 x 15 with aspect ratio of ~1 to
G H I
1.5, and was decided based on mesh
convergence analyses. Local imperfections
were incorporated into the model based on
imperfection amplitude
Figure 2. Typical cross-sectional
Wo = (0.023 * σ 0.2 * t ) / σ cr ,where σ 0.2 is the
shapes.
1224
Effect of Cross-Sectional Shape on Compressive Strength of LDSS Stub Columns
Load, Pu (kN)
2000
lesser (~≤ 7). The deformation at P u , i.e. δ u
1500
also increases with increasing number of
polygonal sides until octagon, and for higher 1000
1225
Brahma et al.
1226
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1229
Dhinde and Desai
PROBLEM FORMULATION
1 ∞
1 Figure. 3 compares the variation of maximum
∫ ∫ 𝐺1 (𝑌, 𝜂) sin[(𝑌 − 𝑊)𝜂] 𝑝(𝑎𝑊)𝑑𝜂𝑑𝑊 pressure 𝑝𝑚𝑎𝑥 normalized by 𝑃/𝑎0 𝑐 and
𝜋
−1 0 contact size 𝑎/𝑎0 𝑐 with respect to layer
= 𝑑𝑢1 (0, 𝑌)⁄𝑑𝑌 (8)
where Y = y/𝑎, W = 𝑦 ′ /𝑎, 𝜂=𝜉𝑎 , 𝜇1 is the
rigidity modulus of the layer, 𝐺1 (𝑌, 𝜂 ) is the
modified Green’s function obtained after
differentiating 𝐺(𝑦, 𝜉) with respect to y and
normalizing. Equations (7) and (8) are
converted into a system of linear equations in
the unknown pressure through Gauss-
Chebyshev quadrature. As the semi contact
size ɑ is not known apriori, the solution is
obtained iteratively by guessing ɑ and Figure 2.Effect of layer thicknesst on the
solving for the unknown pressure. By pressure distribution in the contact region
monitoring the pressure at the contact edge y 0 < 𝑦 < 𝑎during wedge indentation of
= ± ɑ which should be zero for the correct layer-substrate system
solution, the value of ɑ is appropriately
modified and the steps are repeated. thickness t /𝑎0 𝑐 for wedge and cylindrical
indentation when the layer is softer( 𝛼 =
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 1/10).
1234
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Boundary value problems for a softening material suffer from loss of
uniqueness in the post-peak regime. Numerical solutions to such problems shows
mesh dependency due to lack of internal length. So a regularisation method which
introduces a characteristic length is required to get mesh independent results. A
second gradient model introduces a characteristic length by taking into account the
second gradient of the displacement in the principle of virtual work and subsequently
regularising the solution of the boundary value problem. In this context a second
gradient finite element code is developed in MATLAB for both one dimensional and
two dimensional problems and results show mesh independency. Even though unique
solution is not achieved a finite number of solutions are achievable.
Keywords: Localisation; Regularisation Method; Second Gradient Model.
1236
Second Gradient Finite Element Method
CONCLUSION
A second gradient model does not ensures
uniqueness of the corresponding boundary
value problem solution but instead of infinite
Figure 1. Mesh Dependency number of solutions by using a classical
model we get finite number of solutions for a
second gradient model. The characteristic
length introduced using material properties
can regularise the solution and mesh
independency can be achieved.
REFERENCES
Aifantis E C 1984 On the microstructural
origin of certain inelastic models
Journal of Engineering Materials and
Technology ASME 106326–330.
Aifantis E C 1984 On the microstructural
Figure2. Mesh Independency origin of certain inelastic models
Journal of Engineering Materials and
TechnologyASME 106326–330.
Bazant Z P 1976 Instability, ductility and
size effect in strain softening concrete
Journal of Engineering Mechanics
ASCE 331-344
Besuelle P Chambon R 2006 Modelling the
Post-Localisation regime with Local-
Second Gradient Models: Non-
uniqueness of Solutions and Non-
persistent Shear Bands Springer
Proceedings in Physics 106 209-221.
Figure3. Mesh Independency Borst R D 1991 Numerical Modelling of
Bifurcation and Localisation in
1237
Santosh and Rajagopal
1238
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: While doing vibration analysis in terms of the dynamic response of a beam,
the end conditions, in most of the cases, are assumed to be fixed, simply supported,
free or sliding imposing an ideal condition of end support displacement. But, in real
engineering structures the end supports are non-ideal (for example welded, riveted etc)
and allow certain degree of translational or rotational motion of the load at the
boundaries. This paper presents a methodology to represent the real engineering
boundary conditions in terms of translational and rotational stiffnesses and formulate a
general free vibration equation that can be universally applied for all possible
boundary conditions. Fourier sine series approximation of modal displacement has
been assumed for initial frequency analysis and effect of variation in stiffness values
on the vibration characteristics has been presented both for free and forced vibration
conditions for undamped and damped beam. Numerical assessment considering an I-
beam has been presented for validation and acceptance of the outcome. The results
have been presented both for theoretical assessment and simulated results in
ABAQUS for validation. The results indicate considerable effects on the vibration
characteristics and dynamic response for a non ideal boundary condition at lower
values of boundary spring stiffnesses. This technique provides a simplified and
convenient tool for obtaining vibration response for real engineering boundary
supports. Further, the beam model can be extended for analysis of plate structures
considering non-ideal boundary conditions.
the spring stifnesses at both ends of the damped forced condition as a function of
beam. non-ideal boundary conditions.
Many of the earlier analysis on dynamic
THEORETICAL ANLAYSIS
response of a forced beam system have
mostly considered simplified and ideal end FREE VIBRATION OF UNDAMPED
conditions as pinned and fixed (infinite BEAM
translational stiffness, hence lateral
displacement=0) These end conditions are Representation of beam with general
convenient for theoretical computation for boundary condition is presented in Figure.1
derivation of frequency and mode shape
equation and further can easily be extended
to response of beam system with different
loading conditions.
But these simplifications may lead to
generation of errors and can deviate the
response from actual practical analysis.
Considerable research publications can be Figure 1. Representation of Beam with
traced in respect of the problem of free approximation of real end joints (welded/
vibrations of beams with elastic restraints clamped/bolted/pinned) between load
using Fourier series approximation [Wang bearing beam and its support structure to a
and Lin 1996, Li 2000] using Fourier sine combination of translational and rotational
and cosine series. Further, on the similar springs.
method, studies on the use of the concept of
arbitrary support using linear and torsional In Figure 1 above the spring stiffness ‘ K R ’
springs have been reported investigating the and ‘ K ’ represent rotational and translational
T
free vibration of beams on elastic foundations spring constants respectively and the second
Wang (2011).Again all the above methods subscript 0 and L represent the end positions
have resorted to demonstrating the relevance along the beam length (x=0 and x=L).
and accuracy with respect of degenerated w( x, t ) is the lateral displacement of the
cases of ideal boundary conditions. This beam at a distance x from x=0 position and at
analysis have also presented variation of only time t.
the natural frequency and the efficacy of
change in mode shape characteristics has The equation of motion for free flexural
been neglected. vibrations of a uniform elastic beam ignoring
shear deformation and rotary inertia effects is
A recent publication has [Mahapatra et al (in
4 w ( x, t ) 2 w ( x, t ) (1)
press)] has presented the effect of non-ideal EI A 0
x 4
t 2
boundary conditions on the free vibration
response of an undamped beam. The where w ( x, t ) is the lateral displacement at
presented results indicate considerable effects distance x along the length of the beam and
on the vibration characteristics of the beam in at a time t, EI is the flexural rigidity of the
terms of frequency and mode shape Also, the beam, is the mass density and A is the
effect of translational stiffness change has a mass density of the beam.
larger effect in changing the vibrational
characteristics in comparison to rotational Complete solution to Eq (1) can be written in
stiffness The model presented in the paper the form
has been utilises in this paper to further w( x, t ) X ( x) Cos t (2)
analyse the beam response in forced and
X (x) being the modal displacement function
and is the natural frequency.
1240
Effect of Damping on The Dynamic Response of a Beam with Non-Ideal Boundary Supports
Assuming Fourier sine series approximation with Eq (7) and Eq (6) the steady state
of modal displacement as [Mahapatra et al (in response for forced vibration response of an
press)] undamped beam is given by
X 0 1 t
x0 (3) w( x, t ) Qi ( )Sin i (t )d X i ( x) (8)
X ( x) X L x L 1 i 0
m Where X i (x) is obtained from Eq(6).
Am sin m x 0 xL
m 1
FORCED VIBRATION OF DAMPED
m
m BEAM
L
The the equation of free vibration of a free- The equation of motion for forced vibration
free beam is given by the equation of a damped beam is given by
X
2 m
2
RESULTS
Figure 7. Effect of variation of force for
rotational stiffness= 0 a acting at x=0.2 with
forcing frequency = 100rpm and in a time
span of 0-0.03sec in an undamped beam
1242
Effect of Damping on The Dynamic Response of a Beam with Non-Ideal Boundary Supports
1243
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Concrete elevated water tank degradation has been observed in several
water tank located in Baramati, Pune. In this study a survey was conducted to collect
and document instances of deterioration in concrete ESR’s located throughout the
district. The main causes of deterioration were observed to be corrosion,
efflorescence, and scaling. A guideline for identifying the basic causes of
deterioration in the district of Pune and a guideline for the selection of suitable
condition assessment of reinforced concrete ESRs by using various non-destructive
techniques and strengthening by various retrofitting methods were proposed.
Preliminary work was conducted to evaluate the corrosion of elevated water tank
using various non-destructive methods in Baramati region. The investigation showed
that a better and more reliable prediction of corrosion could be obtained by analyzing
the data from above measurements jointly by considering the effects of environmental
conditions.
Keywords: Concrete; Corrosion; Reinforcing steel; Elevated Water Tank.
1) Half cell potential method calculated with the help of resistivity meter
2) Resistivity method then find out corrosion of component of RCC
3) Cover depth measure ESR’s is 75%. These all factor helped the
4) Carbonation test deterioration of the structure at a faster rate.
5) Chloride content test. Hence to meet up the requirements of
advance infra-structure and any natural
SEISMIC ANALYSIS METHODS calamities new innovative materials/
Elevated water tanks consist of hugewater technologies in civil engineering society has
mass at the top of a slender staging which are started to the function of the various
most critical consideration for the failure of structures. With structures becoming old and
the tank during earthquakes. Elevated water the increasing bar for the constructed ESR’s
tanks are critical and strategic structures and the old ESR’s have started to show a serious
damage of these structures during need of additional retrofits to increase their
earthquakes may endanger drinking water durability and life.
supply, cause to fail in preventing large fires The water tank is modelled using the finite
and substantial economic loss. Since, the element software SAP 2000. When a tank
elevated tanks are frequently used in seismic containing liquid vibrates, the liquid exerts
active regions also hence; seismic behaviour impulsive and convective hydrodynamic
of them has to be investigated in detail pressure on the tank wall and the tank base in
[Waghmare and Madhekar, 2013]. Seismic addition to the hydrostatic pressure. In order
analysis of elevated water tank involved two to include the effect of hydrodynamic
types of analysis. Equivalent static analysis pressure in the analysis; tank can be idealized
and Dynamic analysis. For dynamic analysis by an equivalent spring mass model, which
there are again two sub types: Response includes the effect of tank wall-liquid
Spectrum Analysis and Time History interaction. The parameters of this model
Analysis depend upon on geometry of the tank and its
flexibility. When a tank containing liquid
CORROSION INVESTIGATION, with the free surface is subjected to
MODELLING AND ANALYSIS OF horizontal earthquake ground motion, tank
WATER TANK wall and liquid are subjected to horizontal
To evaluate the corrosion status in the RCC acceleration. The liquid in the lower region of
ESRs, the study on the assessment of the tank behaves like a mass that is rigidity
corrosion affected structure of concrete water connected to tank wall. This mass is termed
tanks is carried out. Systematic investigation as impulsive liquid mass whish accelerate
is carried out as per methodology given along with the wall and include impulsive
above. The investigation involves visual hydrodynamic pressure on tank wall and
inspection, non-destructive test using half cell similarly on base. Liquid mass in the upper
measurement and cover depth measurement region of tank undergoes sloshing motion.
and resistivity measurement. The chemical This mass is termed as convective liquid
analysis is carried out to determine chloride mass and it exert convective hydrodynamic
content in the collected concrete powder pressure on the tank wall and base. Thus,
sample. On the basis of the results obtained total liquid mass gets divided into two part,
from various in-situ and laboratory tests we i.e. Impulsive mass and convective mass. In
can conclude that the water tanks at spring mass model of tank liquid system,
Baramati, Pune is suffering severe damage these two liquid masses are to be suitably
due to lack of cover over the reinforcements, represented.
carbonation, chloride attack, corrosion of
reinforcements and due to poor maintenance. CASE STUDY
The reinforcements in columns, braces and Elevated Steel Water tanks are designed for
dome are corroded up to 60%, 70% and 50% DL, LL, and WL (using provisions of IS 875
respectively. The resistivity of the concrete
1245
Retrofitting and Rehabilitation o f Elevated Water Tank After Investigation of Corrosion Status by Non
Destructive Techniques
Part 3 1987) and seismic loads using IS 1893- performance of Elevated water tank having
1984. In this work find out the capacity of different bracings configuration.
structure by using IS 1893-1984 and IS 1893-
2002. The tank is located in Baramati, Pune PUSHOVER ANALYSIS OF ELEVATED
district. The capacity of tank is 6.5 MLD. In WATER TANK IN FULL CONDITION
this project first comparison between the BEFORE AND AFTER RETROFITTING.
value of seismic force by both code. Find out The formation of hinges in the given
the performance point of both cases and find structure after the deformation is as show in
out required strength of structure to maintain figure 1.
tank in working condition or satisfy. The
structure is then checked for safety under the ANALYSIS OF ELEVATED WATER
design lateral force and vertical load. This TANK IN FULL CONDITION FOR
structure consists of 12 columns out of which BASE SHEAR
8 column of 500 mm dia. and remaining 4
column of 600mm dia. This tank also consist The values of base shear at different
rectangular beam of different size. Beam of condition when tank is full condition are as
size 250 x300mm provided and circular beam shown in figure 2.
of 750 mm provided at the base of tank.
Capacity: 650m3; F.S.L.: 541.00; L.D.L.:
536.00; GL: 521.00; Foundation Level:
1246
Nayak and Thakare
provides the value of response factor (R) and required capacity of given structure is 226
importance factor (I) is different for different KN but at this condition capacity of given
types of structure. Seismic zone is divided structure is 160 kN. Retrofitting of given
into four categories which is five categories structure is carried out by provision of single
in IS 1893-1984. Due to changes in basic bracing on compression side. From the
value of seismic force the seismic force of analysis by providing single bracing the 60 %
given structure is different as compare to of story drift ratio is reduced as compare to
seismic force calculated by IS 1893-1984. In previous. By provision of single compression
the analysis of seismic force by IS 1893-2002 bracing capacity of given structure is increase
the effect of impulsive and convective by 380 KN which is satisfactory for given
pressure is consider which is not consider in structure.
old code.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
With
retrofiiting This paper has been undertaken as part of
6 Without improving awareness level project for
retrofitting
5 refineries towards corrosion, repair and
retrofitting method and for preventive
Storey level
Most of the water tank got failed due to Gaikwad Madhukar V Mangulkar Madhuri N
negligence of concept of sloshing effect of 2013 Comparison Between static and
the water tank. Given structure is not capable dynamic analysis of elevated water tank
to carry the seismic force calculated by International Journal of civil engineering
considering IS 1893-2002.For given demand and technology 4(3) 12-29.
of existing story drift ratio of water tank has Waghmare M V Madhekar S N 2013
not fulfilled the criteria of permissible drift as Behaviour of Elevated Water Tank under
IS 1893-2002, so it observe that there is need sloshing effect International Journal of
of increases stiffness of that staging frame to Advanced Technology in Civil Engineering,
get drift ratio within permissible. The ISSN: 2231 –5721 2(1).
1247
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this paper evaluation of stress concentration factor at notch root for three
different notched geometries using finite element analysis (FEA) is presented. All the
three specimens are subjected to uniaxial tension. In FEA selection of finite elements
and method used for meshing plays important role in obtaining accurate results. Two
types of methods used in preprocessing part of FEA viz., auto meshing and biased
meshing are thoroughly discussed. It is found that the biased meshing gives more
accurate results with less number of elements when compared to auto meshing. Finite
element analysis using biased mesh is carried out for all the three geometries to
evaluate theoretical stress concentration factor ( 𝐾𝑡 ) and validated using Roark’s
formulae.
SPECIMEN-3: SEMICIRCULAR
GROOVE IN CYLINDRICAL BAR. 10
0
-5000 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000
Number of elements
Figure4.Percentage error in 𝐾𝑡 Vs
number of elements.
As an initial step auto meshing is done with
2D elements with coarse mesh size of 5mm.
Figure3.Semicircular groove in cylindrical A four noded quadrilateral element is used.
bar. For the analysis a load of 2000N is applied at
single point constraint. For coarse and
2ℎ 2ℎ 2 2ℎ 3 automesh (mesh size = 5 mm) the percentage
𝐾𝑡 = 3.04 − 5.42 ( ) + 6.27 ( ) − 2.89 ( ) difference in error in 𝐾𝑡 is 51.77% when
𝐷 𝐷 𝐷
compared with Roark’s equation(theoretical)
For D=40 and r=h=5mm as shown in Figure.4.Further with automesh
𝐾𝑡 =2.03 option, mesh is made finer by gradually
MATERIAL PROPERTIES decreasing the element size up to mesh size
of 0.2 mm. Mesh size of 5 mm resulted into
Material used is Aluminium6063T7. 39 number of elements. Where as with 0.2
Modulus of elasticity :E=60400MPa mm, the number of elements are 24412
Poisson’s ratio :=0.33 (Figure. 5). The percentage difference in
Density :=2.7e-6 kg/mm3 error in 𝐾𝑡 is 2.47% with mesh size of 0.2
mm when compared with Roark.
LINEAR FEA OF SPECIMEN-1 FOR
CONVERGENCE OF RESULTS
WITH AUTOMESH OPTION
1249
Validation of Theoretical Stress Concentration Factor for Varying Notched Geometries using FEA
3.0
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
2.5
A linear FEA of three specimens with
2.0
varying notch geometry is performed. For
linear analysis the value of 𝐾𝑡 will remain
Kt
1.5
Roark
same irrespective of magnitude of axial load.
1.0
FEA (Auto Mesh) For specimen-1 and 2,an axial load of 2000N
FEA (Biased Mesh)
is applied and a load of 20000N is applied to
0.5
specimen-3.The convergence of 𝐾𝑡 value is
0.0
studied with respect to theoretical Roark’s
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 formulae and Finite element analysis.
Number of Elements Figure.5 show variation of 𝐾𝑡 with number of
Figure 5.Convergence of stress elements. As number of elements increased,
concentration factor. the value of 𝐾𝑡 converged to approximately
exact value. Also as the number of elements
LINEAR FEA OF SPECIMEN-1 FOR increases, the percentage difference in error
CONVERGENCE OF RESULTS between Roark and FEA values decreases as
WITH BIASED MESH OPTION. shown in Figure.4. From the Figure.4 and 5,
Convergence can be achieved if biased it is also clear that better convergence is
meshing is employed in the critical region obtained with biased meshing without
(vicinity of notches). Biasing is one of the increasing the number of elements. Therefore
useful feature in commercial FEA for the analysis of all the specimens, biased
software.With this feature even without meshing is used.
increasing the number of elements one could
achieve better results by appropriate
arrangments of nodes and elements. For
convergence study using bias option,1mm
mesh size is selected and biasing is done in
critical region.Bias intensity in the steps of
0,5,10 and 20 is selected and the results for
specimen-1 as a case study is shown in
Figure.4 and 5.
For specimen-1, with mesh size of 1 mm for
all the 4 bias intensities, the number of Figure 6.Meshing of Specimen 1 with 2D
elements generated are 1100. With 0 (zero) elements.
bias intensity, the % difference in error of 𝐾𝑡 Figure.6, show meshing of specimen-1 using
between Roark and FEA is 11.15%. With 20 biased mesh. Owing to symmetry only one
bias intensity, the error is 1.23% (Table quarter of all the three models are meshed.
1).Since % error is less for bias intesity 20, it The specimens-1 and 2 are meshed with 2D,
is used for all the three specimens. 4 noded Quadrilateral element, which result
Table 1.Results for Linear Analysis. in 1100 number of elements with biased
mesh. Specimen-3 is meshed with 3D, 8
Specimen 𝐾𝑡 𝐾𝑡 % error noded brick elements, that result in 106880
(Roark) (FEA) number of elements. Appropriate boundary
condition constraints are placed at all planes
1 2.42 2.39 1.23 of symmetry. Figure.7,8 and 9 shows
2 2.27 2.16 4.84 maximum Von-Mises stresses in Specimens-
3 2.03 1.91 6.01 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
1250
Khatawate et al.
REFERENCES
Flifilippini M 2000 Stress Gradient
Calculations at Notches International
Figure 7.Maximum stress in specimen-1.
Journal of Fatigue 22 397-409.
Glinka G 1985 Calculation of Inelastic
Notch-tip Strain-Stress Histories under
Cyclic Loading Engineering Fracture
Mechanics 22 839-854.
Molski K and Glinka G 1981 A Method of
Elastic-Plastic Stress and Strain
Calculation at a Notch Root Materials
Science and Engineering 50 93–100.
Neuber H 1961 Theory of Stress
Figure 8.Maximum stress in specimen-2.
Concentration for Shear-Strained
Prismatic Bodies with Arbitrary
Nonlinear Stress-Strain Law ASME
Journal of Applied Mechanics 28 544-
550.
Pilkey D Walter 2008 Peterson’s stress
concentration factors John Wiley & Sons
Inc Hoboken New Jersey 84.
Seeger Timm and Heuler Paul 1980
Generalised Application of Neuber’s
Figure 9.Maximum stress in Specimen-3 Rule Journal of Testing and Evaluation
8 199-204.
CONCLUSION
Young W C & BudynasR G 2002 Roark's
In this paper linear FEA of three different Formulas for Stress and Strain Mc.Graw
notch geometry is performed to assess stress
Hill Co. New York 781.
concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 ). The selection of
finite elements and method used for meshing Zheng M and Niemi E1997Analysis of the
the model plays important role in obtaining Stress Concentration Factor for a
the accurate results. For all the three Shallow Notch by the Slip-Line Field
specimens, two methods are used for Method Int. Journal of Fatigue 19191–
meshing, viz., auto and biased mesh. It is
194.
found that with biased meshing, FEA results
converged with Roark’s formulae with less
number of elements when compared to auto
meshing. Therefore biased meshing is used
1251
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: This paper presents a force based finite element model for linear static
analysis of 2-D curved tapered Timoshenko beam elements having variable depth and
uniform width. The force interpolation functions are selected such that equilibrium of
bending moments, axial forces and shear forces are satisfied in the strong form at any
internal point, devoid of any additional assumption for variation of displacement.
Hence the derived element stiffness matrix is exact even for curved tapered members
with variable depth. Displacement based finite element approach that is commonly
used in commercial finite element packages, uses an assumption for the distribution of
displacement along the element, which do not satisfy the governing differential
equations of the Timoshenko element. Hence, such approaches do not provide closed
form exact solutions for the deflection of a tapered beam and requires discretization
using a large number of elements. The results of a linear static analysis of a 2-D
curved tapered cantilever Timoshenko beam obtained using the proposed model were
compared with those of discretized displacement based models to highlight the
accuracy and computational efficiency of the proposed force based finite element
model in analysing 2-D structures with complex geometries.
Keywords: Force based formulation; Timoshenko beam; Curved tapered
member
1253
Force Based Linear Static Analysis of 2-D Curved Tapered Timoshenko Beam Elements
CASE STUDY
∫ ( ) ( ) ( ) (13)
1254
Rajapakse et al.
Figure 3. Tip displacement variation with displacement based methods was illustrated
respect to number of elements using an example.
Figure (3) illustrates that displacement based
models require very fine discretization using ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
at least 32 elements for the convergence of
the displacement of the free end. The study was conducted with the financial
support of the National Research Council of
On the other hand, the proposed force based
model provides an exact answer under the Sri Lanka under grant 15-127.
assumptions of Timoshenko beam theory,
using just one element. The accuracy of the REFERENCES
results is only conditioned by the Gauss- Fédération internationale du béton Task
Lobatto numerical integration procedure. Group 4.4 2008 Practitioner’s guide to
This highlights the fact that the proposed finite element modelling of reinforced
force based model provides accurate results concrete structures Fédération
for the linear static analysis of 2-D curved internationale du béton 123-131.
tapered Timoshenko beam members. Molins C Roca P and Barbat A H1998
Furthermore, it is evident that the proposed Flexibility-based linear dynamic
force based model is computationally much analysis of complex structures with
more economical than the discretized curved-3D members Earthquake
displacement methods when it comes to the Engineering & Structural Dynamics
linear static analysis 2-D curved tapered 27(7) 731-747.
members. Spacone E FilippouF Cand TaucerF
1996Fibre beam-column model for non-
The proposed force based model can be
linear analysis of R/C frames: Part I
utilized for the linear static analysis of
Formulation Earthquake Engineering &
complex structures consisting of the
Structural Dynamics 25(7)711–725.
assembly of curved tapered members and
prismatic members. This could be useful in
performing linear static analysis of historical
structures consisting of curved members
(arches) as well for modern structures having
complex architecture.
CONCLUSION
A force based formulation was adopted for
the linear static analysis of 2-D curved
tapered Timoshenko beam elements with
uniform width and variable height. This
formulation permits 2-D modelling of any
structure consisting of such members and
provides accurate results for the linear static
analysis, where the numerical integration
technique used and the assumptions of
Timoshenko beam theory were the only
conditions on the accuracy of results.
The superior computational efficiency and
the accuracy of results of the proposed force
based model when compared with discretized
1255
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
RESULTS
Table 1 Results of axial loading on RC Square columns with cover and without cover
Table 2 Results of ductility of RC Square columns with cover and without cover
1257
Effect of Cover to Longitudinal Reinforcement of Square RC Column for Axially Compression Testing.
Sr.
Specimen Py (ton) Δy (mm) Pmax(ton) Δmax(mm) μ
No. μavg
-
3 C200x200x500-1 79.21 -0.001492 82.706 2.0
0.002984
-
4 WC200x200x500 -3 78.91 -0.001487 86.46 1.85
0.002756
-
5 WC200x200x500 -5 77.043 0.002134 82.039 1.82
0.003887 1.8
-
6 WC200x200x500 -2 81.42 0.001935 92.135 1.73
0.003361
1258
Narule and Bambole
CONCLUSIONS
1) The ductility of without cover column conference on Earthquake
specimen is lesser than column with cover to EngineeringVancouver B C Canada
reinforcement at top and bottom August 2006.
2) Without cover specimens failed at mid Rochette P and Labossiere P 2000 Axial
height and were taken higher load than testing of rectangular columns models
specimens with cover confined with composites ASCE J
Compos Const 2000 4(3) 129–36.
3) The effect of top and bottom cover to
vertical reinforcement of square column G Wu Z S Wu and Z T Lu 2006 Design-
increases the global vertical deformation and oriented stress–strain model for concrete
also on stress-strain behaviour of column. prism confined FRPComposites
construction and building materials 21.
REFERENCES
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Committee 440 2008 Guide for the design
and construction of externally bonded
FRP systems for strengthening concrete
structures ACI 440 2R 08.
Mander J B Priestley MJ N and Park R 1998
Theoretical stress–strain model for
confined concrete ASCE J Structural
Engg114(8)1804–26.
Xiao Y and Wu H 2000 Compressive
behavior of concrete confined by carbon
fiber composite jackets ASCE J Mater
Civil Engg12(2)139–46.
Daisuke Kato and L I Zhuzhen 2004 Effect of
reinforcing details on axial load capacity
of RC columns Proceeding of world
1259
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In this work, analytical solutions are presented for the analysis of laminated
composite plates using a nonlocal third order shear deformation theory considering
the surface stress effects. The nonlocal formulations are based on Eringen’s (1972)
theory of nonlocal continuum mechanics and the third order plate theory of Reddy
(1984; 2004). The mathematical formulations for surface stresses are taken from
Gurtin and Murdoch’s work (1975; 1978). In nonlocal theory size effects are taken
into account by assuming that stress at a point depends on strain at that point as well
as on the strain at neighbouring points. Analytical solutions of bending and vibration
of simply supported laminates and isotropic plates are presented using this theory to
illustrate the effect of nonlocality on deflection and vibration frequencies for various
span to thickness (a/h) ratios.
Keywords: Size effect; Nonlocal theory; surface stress; laminated composites;
third order shear deformation theory; analytical solutions.
Gurtin and Murdoch also gave the surface 1 1.7 0.86972 0.00921
equilibrium equation as 3 3.4 0.87006 0.00672
σs iα,α +σ i3 = ρs üi
(7) Table 1 shows that with increase in nonlocal
where ρs is the surface density. To satisfy this parameter by keeping the surface stress
equation we assume the linear variation of constant the value of w̅ increases and the
σ zz through the thickness. value of ω̅ decreases. For a fixed nonlocal
EXAMPLE: ANTISYMMETRIC parameter with increase in surface stress, the
value of w̅ increases and ω̅ decreases. It is
CROSS-PLY LAMINATED PLATE
also observed that the percent change in the
A simply supported antisymmetic cross-ply value of w̅ for a fixed value of surface stress
laminated plate subjected to a uniformly and with increase in nonlocal parameter
transverse distributed load is considered. decreases as the value of a/h increases. Figure
Both static bending and free vibration 1 clearly shows that the value of
analysis have been performed. The thickness nondimensional stress value increases as the
of all the layers are equal and each layer is value of nonlocal parameter increases.
orthotropic with following material
3
properties. E 1 = 175 ×10 Mpa, E 2 = 175
×103 Mpa, G 12 = 3.5 ×103 Mpa, G 13 = 3.5
×103 Mpa, G 23 = 1.4 ×103Mpa,
ν 12 =ν 13 =0.25,ν 21 =(E 2 /E 1 )ν 12 .The
dimensionless shear stress values are
calculated as follows. τ̅ yz = τ yz (a/2, 0, 0) (h/
(bq 0 ))and τ̅ xz = τ xz (0, b/2,0)(h/(bq 0 )).
The dimensionless maximum centre
deflection and fundamental frequency are
obtained as w̅ = w × (E 2 h3/q 0 a4) × 102 and ω̅
=ωh √(ρ/G 13 ) where a, b, h are the length,
width and thickness of the plate respectively.
Table1. Dimensionless maximum
deflections and fundamental natural
frequency in simply supported anti
symmetric crossply laminated plate under
sinusoidally distributed transverse load.
a/b a/h μ τs(N/m) w̅ ω̅
1 10 0 0 1.05268 0.02440
0 1.7 1.05271 0.02439
0 3.4 1.05273 0.02438
1 0 1.05314 0.01824
3 0 1.05405 0.01329
1 1.7 1.05316 0.01822
3 3.4 1.05409 0.01328
20 0 0 0.86949 0.01235
0 1.7 0.86963 0.01234
0 3.4 0.86976 0.01233
1 0 0.86959 0.00923
3 0 0.86979 0.00673
1262
Raghu and Rajagopal
REFERENCES
1263
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
In bonded type anchorage, the load is and surfaces. In ATENA 3D, each macro-
transferred through the bond strength element has its own joints, lines and surfaces.
between the bonding agent (resin) and the Anchor bolt is considered as macro-elements
anchors. Holes are drilled and the bonding with rib. The micro-elements are surrounded
resin is inserted. Bonded type includes with epoxy as a filler material and the system
capsule type and injection type fasteners is embedded in concrete cube. All the
contacts are defined. A 3D interface element
Concrete anchors may fail due to either
tensile load or shear load. But both load acts has been defined in ATENA between epoxy
differently on the anchorage and may cause and anchor, and the contact between epoxy
different failure mechanism at different and concrete is made perfect. Brick meshing
situations. The transfer of load to the base was performed on the finite element model.
materials is either by friction or by bonding Half model was taken for analysis to reduce
strength of resin. the complexity in analysis. All the nodes
The failure that happen due to tensile loading were well merged before starting the
are, (i) Pull out failure, (ii) Anchor material analysis.
failure (steel failure), (iii) Concrete break out
failure and (iv) Concrete Blow out. Out of
these failure mode, the concrete breakout
failure is the most common one as the
strength of anchor rod and the resin is
generally well above the tensile strength of
concrete.
(a) (b)
Figure. 2. FE model for analysis
Smeared approach has been adopted to define
the material properties for material point of
view, which are valid within a certain
material volume. Material model for concrete
in ATENA has been included with the
following effects of the concrete behaviour:
(i) Non-linear behaviour of concrete in
compression including hardening and
A of concrete in tension
softening, (ii) Fracture
based on nonlinear fracture mechanics, (iii)
Biaxial strength failure criterion, (iv)
Reduction of compressive strength after
cracking, and (v)Tension stiffening effect.
Figure. 1. Concrete breakout failure in For concrete, complete equivalent uniaxial
chemical anchor during pull out stress-strain diagram as considered in the
present study.
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING, In ATENA, a fictitious crack model based on
MATERIAL PROPERTIES, LOADING a crack-opening law and fracture energy is
AND ANALYSIS used for tension after cracking. It is used in
combination with the crack band. Since the
The geometrical model is composed of three-
previous research works showed that the
dimensional solid regions called “macro- exponential crack opening law, as shown in
elements”. Each macro-element is defined Figure. 3, is reasonably good for predicting
separately, and it is composed of joints, lines the response of reinforced concrete (Sasmal
1265
Numerical Simulations for Evaluation of Performance of Chemical Anchors Embedded in Concrete
principal strain in the anchor bolt system Hence, development of sustainable concrete
during progression of pull out load is shown by using various supplementary cementitious
in Figure. 6. materials (SCMs) needs a special and
dedicated study to evaluate the performance
of anchorage systems embedded in the
concrete.
(a) (b) REFERENCES
ATENA theory manual 2006 ATENA
Program Documentation- part 1 Theory
Cervenka Consulting Predvoje 22
(c) Czech Republic 207.
(d) Comite Euro-International du Beton (CEB)
Figure.5. Progression of damage at CEB Model Code 90 Bull
different stages of pull out loading d‟information No. 203 Paris France
1990.
Sasmal S Novák B and Ramanjaneyulu K
2011 Numerical analysis of fiber
composite-steel plate upgraded beam-
(a) (b) column sub-assemblages under cyclic
loading Journal of Composite
Structures93 599-610.
Van Mier JGM 1986 Multi-axial strain-
softening of concrete Part I fracture
(c) (d) Materials and Structures RILEM
Figure.6. Principal strain distribution at 19(111) 179-90.
different stages of pull out loading
The load-slip behaviour of the anchor bolt
embedded in concrete (with compressive
strength of 25 MPa and 50 MPa) is studied.
These two strengths are typically the
minimum strength for normal strength and
high strength concrete being used by
structural engineers. It is found that the
increase in the compressive strength and the
corresponding improvement in the other
properties such as tensile strength and
fracture behaviour, has significant influence
in the pull out behaviour and damage
sequence. The influence of other material
characteristics on the pull out performance
and damage process is being studied. The
results indicate that the performance of
anchorage system greatly depend on the
improved/newer properties of the medium.
1267
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
deformation theory. U is the strain energy In Eq. (1), K is the bulk’s modulus and G is
stored in the bar and V is the potential the modulus of rigidity.
energy developed by the external forces. It is The global displacement function u is
assumed that principle of minimum potential approximated by u cii , i=1, 2,…,nf,
energy remains valid for bilinear elastic
where i is the set of orthogonal functions
material, unless one considers a cyclic
loading problem. developed through Gram–Schmidt scheme.
The necessary starting function to generate
the higher order orthogonal functions is
selected by satisfying the relevant geometric
boundary conditions, i.e. u 0 at 0 ,
du
u 0 at 1 and 0 at f .
d
1269
Growth Of Yield Front In Statically Indeterminate Bar By Using Domain Decompostion Method
SOLUTION FOR ELASTIC DOMAIN Let Lbe and Lbp be the lengths of the elastic
When domain 1 and domain 2 as fully elastic, and the post-elastic regions of domain 2 and
displacement functions can be expressed as the local normalized coordinates in these two
u1 cii1 and u2 cii 2 regions are 2 and 2p respectively. Hence,
e
2 1
A 2 i 2 j 2 d2 ci F . j
' '
f
Lb 0
the zeroth approximation, and the problem is where the computational domain is divided
solved as an extension of elastic solution. In into two sub-domains based on the location
subsequent approximations the value of of singularity point within the domain
g is updated until a final convergence is assuming linear strain hardening material
achieved, following the iterative scheme of behavior following von-Mises yield criterion.
Kachanov (1971). The effect of bar aspect ratio on the plastic
front location of the statically indeterminate
FOUR REGION FORMULATION bar has also been reported. The proposed
In this case, at a certain load, yielding occurs method has been validated successfully and
in both the domains 1 and 2 simultaneously. also tested for the stability of its iterative
So, the whole bar now has four regions with scheme. The method has the potential of
domain 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b, out of which 1a application in many other structural
and 2a are elastic regions whereas 1b and 2b mechanics problems involving material non-
are elasto-plastic. linearity. A sample result obtained from
Let L fe and L fp be the lengths of the elastic solution is given in Figure. 3.
and the post-elastic regions of domain 1
respectively, and hence the corresponding
normalized local coordinates are 1e x L fe
and 1p x L fe L fp . Displacement
functions of elastic and post-elastic regions
for domain 1 and domain 2 can be expressed
as u 1e ciie1 ; u 1p ciip1
u 2e ciie2 and 2
p p
i i2 u c
respectively. Substituting these assumed
displacement functions, the governing Figure 3. Growth of elastic-plastic front
equation is obtained as with load for different aspect ratios (AR).
REFERENCES
n n K 1 2 2 2G1 2 2
c i Hill R (1950) The Mathematical Theory of
i 1 j 1 2 3 L fe
Plasticity Oxford University Press
K 1 2 2 2 g 1 2
1 Oxford
A1 i1 j1 d1
' ' e 1
2 3 Owen D R J and Hinton E (1980) Finite
0
1271
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
opening in case of wall with opening by Table – 1. M20 Concrete, Steel Fe 415 with
diagonal reinforcement. Attempt has been poisons ratio 0.20 is used.
made to study improvement in behaviour of
RC shear wall with and without opening and ANALYSIS
concealed diagonal braces by analysing with Analysis of shear wall model of six 1000 x
FEM software ETAB. 1000 x 100 mm was done by applying quasi -
Many researchers have tried to study behaviour static lateral load to observe structural
of reinforced concrete wall with or without behaviour including shear stresses and load
openings. Observations of failure mode, carrying capacity of the shear wall at
mechanism and effect of staggered opening maximum permissible stresses (τ c max. ).
recorded after strong earthquake shows that,
From the observed shear stresses in wall cross
shear walls with staggered openings are more
section, maximum shear stress for each
seismic resistant than shear wall with regular
increment of load was obtained and same are
openings [Mosoarca Marius, 2014].
plotted against the loads. From these plots load
Investigations on the structural behaviour like
carrying capacity of plain wall and plain wall
deformation, stress distribution and dynamic
with braces was obtained. Also the load
characteristics are presented and discussed
carrying capacity of shear wall with opening
using FEM software StaadPro and concluded
and wall with opening and braces were
that, distribution of stress varies with location
obtained. Figure –1, 2, 3 and 4 shows the
and number of openings [Potty et. al., 2008].
graphical representation of maximum stresses
Axial force and bending moment varies with
against gradually increasing loads. Load
the height of shear wall. Deflection of shear
carrying capacity of plain wall was increased
wall increases when openings are introduced.
by 22.50 % and load carrying capacity of wall
Similar response is experienced by
with opening increased by 24.19 % when
[Chowdhury et. al. 2012] in study carried out
braces were provided.
on 6 - story frame shear wall buildings with the
help of FEM software ETABS under Table: 1. Geometry of model
earthquake load. From this study it was
concluded that equivalent static analysis shows
Sr.no. Member Size (mm)
that stiffness as well as seismic response was
affected by size of openings as well as their
location and there was reduction in drift in 1 Beam 200 x 300
shear wall with increase in thickness around
2 Brace 100 x 200
openings.
3 Plain Wall 1000 x1000
MATERIAL AND METHODS
In this paper FEM analysis and study of Wall with opening 1000 x
4
behaviour of RC shear wall with and without 400 x 400 mm 1000x100
openings and improvement in its behaviour by
using concealed braces are proposed. The
details of geometry of RC shear wall model
and top and bottom members are given in
1273
Behaviour of RC Shear Wall with and without Opening using Concealed Bracing
REFERENCES
1274
Mahadik and Bhagat
Cao W L Jianwei Zhang Hongying Dong and Farzad Hatami Ali Ghamari Alireza Rahai
Min Wang 2011 Research on seismic 2012 Investigating the properties of steel
performance of shear walls with concrete shear walls reinforced with Carbon Fiber
filled steel tube columns and concealed Polymers (CFRP) Journal of
steel trusses Earthquake engineering and Constructional Steel Research 70 36–42.
engineering vibration 10 535-546. Mosoarca Marius 2013 Seismic behaviour of
CAO Wanlin Jianwei Zhang, Jingna Zhang, reinforced concrete shear walls with
Min Wang 2009 Experimental study on regular and staggered openings after the
seismic behavior of mid-rise RC shear strong earthquakes between 2009 and
wall with concealed truss Front. Archit. 2011 Engineering Failure Analysis 34
Civ. Eng. 3 370–377. 537–565.
Cao W L Xue S D and and Zhang J W 2003 Mosoarca Marius 2014 Failure analysis of RC
Seismic Performance of RC Shear Walls shear walls with staggered openings
with Concealed Bracing Advances in under seismic loads Engineering failure
Structural Engineering 6 1-13. analysis 41 48-64.
Chowdhury Sharmin Reza Rahmn M A Islam Potty N S Thanoon W A Hamzah H. H
M J and Das A K 2012 Effects of Hamadelnil A M M 2008 Practical
openings in shear wall on seismic Modelling Aspects for Analysis of Shear
response of structures International Walls Using Finite Element Method 08
Journal of Computer Applications 59 10- 89-98.
13. Wallace John and Moehle Jack 2012
Dan D Fabian A Stoian V 2011 Theoretical Behaviour and design of structural walls –
and experimental study on composite lessons from recent laboratory tests &
steel–concrete shear walls with vertical earthquakes Proceedings of international
steel encased profiles Journal of symposium on engineering lesion learned
Constructional Steel Research 67 800- from the 2011 Great East Japan
813. Earthquake 1132-1144.
1275
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
__________________________
PLENUM CHAMBER
A plenum chamber is a housing containing a
gas or fluid (typically air) at positive Figure 3. Plenum Chamber
pressure (In this case pressure lower than
atmospheric pressure). One function of the CALCULATIONS
plenum is to equalize pressure for more Estimating of required Air Mass Flow and
even distribution, because of irregular Boost Pressures to reach a desired
supply or demand. A plenum chamber can horsepower. Air mass flow and boost
also work as an acoustic silencer device. pressure are calculated for required horse
1277
Designing and Testing of Compressor Mapping Test Cell for High Horse Power Turbocharger
power. This data is essential for selecting ΔPloss = Pressure Loss between the
the appropriate compressor and turbo Compressor and the Manifold (psi).
charger. To plot the compressor operation
point following calculations are carried out. 𝑃1𝑐 = 𝑃𝑎𝑚𝑏 + Δploss (4)
Calculation of mass flow rate. Where,
𝐴 𝑏𝑠𝑓𝑐
𝑚̇ = 𝑃 ∗ ∗ (1) P1c = Compressor Inlet Pressure
𝐹 60
Where, (psi)
𝑙𝑏 Pamb = Ambient Air pressure (psi)
𝑚̇ = 𝐴𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑖𝑛 . ΔPloss = Pressure Loss due to Air
𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑃 = 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑘𝑤. Filter/Piping (psi).
𝐴
= 𝐴𝑖𝑟 𝑡𝑜 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜. 𝑃2𝐶
𝐹 𝑃𝑟 =
𝑃1𝐶
(5)
bsfc= Fuel consumption in lb/ min*hp
RESULTS
Calculation of required manifold pressure to
meet the power. Compressor map were plotted using test rig.
𝑚̇∗𝑅∗(460+𝑇𝑚) For two turbocharger operating points were
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑁 (2) plotted for 2L and 5 L engines from the
𝑉𝑒∗𝑉𝑑∗ 2
above calculation.
N = RPM
Ve = Volumetric efficiency.
Vd = Engine displacement in cubic inches.
Preq = Manifold pressure in psi.
R = Universal gas constant =639.6
Tm = Intake manifold pressure in
Fahrenheit
Depending upon flow rate, charge air cooler
characteristics, piping size, number/quality
of the bends, throttle body restriction, etc.,
the plumbing pressure drop can be Figure 4. Compressor map
estimated. This can be 1 psi or less for a
very well designed system. On certain Red point in the figure 4 shows the
restrictive OEM setups, especially those that operation point of the 2L and 5L engine for
have now higher-than-stock airflow levels, turbocharger 1. It is clearly seen that both
the pressure drop can be 4 psi or greater the points lie on the right side of the choke
line. Which implies that the compressor is
𝑃2𝑐 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑞 + Δploss (3) too small for the engine. So larger
Where, compressor is required to maintain desired
𝑃2𝑐 = Compressor Discharge flow rate for the engine. Figure 5 shows the
Pressure (psi). compressor map for turbocharger 2.
Preq = Manifold Absolute Pressure For 2L engine the point is in a very efficient
(psi). area of the map, but since it is in the centre
of the map on the top end there would be
1278
Kumbhalkar and Khairnar
1279
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: In pressure vessel (PV) design, piping to vessel nozzle interface is a cause
of concern for vessel and piping designers. This interface causes the pipeline to exert
additional forces and moments (termed as external loads) on to the vessel shell
through nozzles. The origin of the load may be self weight, thermal expansion,
seismic excitation etc. A vessel that is inadequately designed may lead to failure and
thus cause a safety hazard. So PV designer needs to know these external loads at
design stage itself. Accurate estimation of maximum acceptable external loads on
PV/tanks/equipments is not available in literature. To address this, many design
companies have adopted a nominal convention that are followed by both vessel and
piping designers. These are in the form of thumb rule, empirical formulae or in tables
without giving the basis. In most of the cases, these values differed quite substantially.
In the present study, non-linear elasto-plastic finite element analyses were performed
on a typical nozzle located on a dished end of a pressure vessel. The nozzle was
subjected to 3 forces (FA, VC and VL) and 3 moments (MT, MC and ML) for which the
limit loads were evaluated using ASME Section VIII division 2 procedure. The results
were compared and conclusions were drawn. From this study, it was observed that
using the limit load procedure, the nozzles can take much more loads than that are
presently used in PV industry. The details of analysis performed along with results are
presented in this paper.
Appendix-P (2007) (3) Piping Handbook Method (Victor Helguero, 1986) Loads in
Tabular form etc. The nomenclature of the Young’s modulus = 202204.1 MPa
forces and moments that can act on a nozzle Poisons ratio = 0.3
is shown in Figure. 1.
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL
General purpose (FE) software COSMOS/M,
(1999) was used for the present study. Based
on the objective of the analysis, the three
dimensional model of the pressure vessel was
generated with 4-node quadrilateral shell
element comprising cylinder, head and
nozzle. Full 360-degree was modelled A cap
Figure 1. Forces and moments in an on the nozzle was provided to apply the
attachment to a vessel forces and moments. The cap was made as a
stiff one by using very high youngs modulus
OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY (1000 times). This will cause the force and
As mentioned above, even though there are moments directly applied on to the
some crude ways of calculating the external nozzle/vessel without having any local
loads, their basis is not very clear or yielding. The aspect ratio (length to width
unknown. Also in most cases, these values ratio) was maintained to less than 2 at the
differ quite substantially among themselves. locations of interest. The final model consists
The objective of the present study is to of 2033 nodes and 2144 elements are shown
estimate the maximum external load that can in Figure. 2.
exert on a nozzle and compare it with Small deformation theory was assumed and
methods being used in the present pressure the material is assumed to behave as elastic-
vessel industry. This is achieved by perfectly plastic model. Von-Mises yield
performing a non-linear limit load analysis criterion with isotropic hardening rules of the
using the procedure mentioned in the material model has been used in the study. In
pressure vessel design code ASME section the numerical procedure of the calculation
VIII division-2. The details of the study along force control solution techniques were used.
with the method used and the conclusions Modified Newton-Raphson method for
drawn are presented in this paper. equilibrium iterations schemes were
PROBLEM DEFINITION employed in the analysis.
A cylindrical pressure vessel of ID 2000 mm DISCUSSION & CONCLUSIONS
and thickness 60 mm have a hemispherical Non-linear elasto-plastic finite element
head (t=30 mm) and nozzle which are analysis was performed for the pressure
subjected to 3 forces FA, VL, VC and 3 vessel for incremental applied load. The non-
moments MT, MC and ML. The limit loads are linear FE analysis gets aborted when the
evaluated for each of the 6 loads mentioned convergence is not achieved. As per ASME
above. Section VIII division-2 Part-5, the load up to
Height of cylindrical shell 3000 mm which it converges in the finite element
Dished end type = Hemispherical analysis is defined as limit load. A factor of
Dished end thickness = 30 mm safety of 1.5 shall be provided to estimate the
Nozzle location = Middle of the dished end maximum permissible load/moment
ID of the nozzle = 600 mm, t=30 mm
Height of the nozzle = 276 mm The variation of axial displacement with
Nozzle to dished end weld leg size = 30 mm incremental axial load (FA) is shown in
Material = ASME SA 516 g 70 (carbon steel) Figure.3. From this the last converged load is
Specified minimum yield strength = 260 MPa
1281
Acceptable External Loads on Nozzle of a Pressure Vessel by Non-Linear Finite Element Method
4819163 N. The deformed shape at this load N. The deformed shape at this load is shown
is shown in Figure.4. n Figure.7. The variation of rotation with
torsion (MT) is shown in Figure.8. From this,
the torsion limit load is 142736 N-m. The
variation of rotation with circumferential
moment is shown in Figure.9. From this the
limit circumferential moment (MC) is 949118
N-m.
5.0
4.0
Figure. 2 FE Model of the Pressure Vessel Limit Load is the Last converged Load
= 4182739 N
2.0
6.0
1.0
5.0
0.0
4.0 0 2 4 6 8 10
axial Push (FA) , MN
Displacement, mm
Limit Load is the
3.0 Last converged Load
= 4819163 N
Figure.6 Variation of Displacement with
2.0
Circumferential Shear Force (VC)
1.0
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
F Displacement, mm
0.160
Axial Torsion (MT), MN-m
0.120
0.040
0.000
0.000 0.003 0.006 0.009 0.012 0.015
Rotation, Radian
0.80
Circ. Moment (Mc), MN-m
Figure.5 Von-Mises stress distribution (on 0.60 Limit Load is the Last converged Load
= 949118 N-m
The results of the limit loads predicted by Bhabha Atomic Research Centre. I am
FEA along with the maximum allowable thankful to Shri Vivek Bhasin, Head, Reactor
load/moment (as per ASME) are shown Structures Section, who gave me the
inTable-1. Table-2 shows the comparison of opportunity to work in the prestigious section
the predicted FEA results with the methods of BARC.
that are being used in the industry. Vast
REFERENCES
difference can be observed in the values
calculated by different methods. ASME 2010 Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code Section VIII Division-2,
As can be seen from Table-2, the allowable
external loads based on different methods American Society of Mechanical
presently being used in the pressure vessel Engineers, New York, NY.
industry are highly conservative. It can be API-650 2007 American Petroleum
seen that in reality, these vessels can take Institute code API 650 Appendix P
much more loads than the loads that are being Washington DC 10th Edn.
used now. These lower loads restrict the COSMOS/M 1999 Finite Element
piping designers to more stringent condition Software Version 2.5 SRAC
in their design. If one follows the present California, USA.
industry practise, wherein lower loads are Victor Helguero M 1986 Piping Stress
used for design will make the piping design Handbook, Chapter 8, "Design Criteria
and its support costlier. for Allowable Loads Moments, and
Stresses 2nd edition.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work is the outcome of the summer
training I had at Reactor Structures Section,
of Reactor Design & Development Group of
Table 1.Results of Limit Loads predicted by Non-Linear FEA.
Predicted Limit Load, Required Safety Max. Allowable
Load Type based on Non-linear Margin as per the Nozzle Load= Limit
FEM ASME Code Load/1.5
Axial Push, FA (N) 4819163 1.5 3212775
Longitudinal Shear, VL (N) 4182739 1.5 2788493
Circumferential Shear, VC (N) 4182739 1.5 2788493
Torsion, MT (N-m) 142736 1.5 95157
Circumferential Moment, MC (N-m) 949118 1.5 632745
Longitudinal Moment, ML (N-m) 949118 1.5 632745
1283
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
structure. The super structure of the three types of isolators are with vertical
Building is of conventional RCC beams and capacity W=2000 kN (type I), W=2500 kN
columns with tie beams at intermediate (type II) and W=3000 kN (Type III). There
levels. The outer wall of RCC with are 12 numbers of Type I isolators, numbers
minimum thickness of 250mm. The floor is on 4 of type II isolators and 2 numbers of
supported on base isolation system type III isolators.
foundation. The base isolators are connected
between columns base and the pedestals. FIXED BASE ANALYSIS
The pedestals are connected with raft at the The analysis is carried out for fixed base of
bottom. the structure initially and modal analysis is
performed. The frequencies and mass
participated in dominant modes for fixed
base system and isolated base system are
given in table 1 and table 2 respectively.
Response spectrum analysis is then carried
out considering the two horizontal and the
vertical excitation inputs of OBE and SSE
motions separately.
CONCLUSION
A detailed methodology of design
calculations for base isolators is presented in
this paper and proper grouping of isolators
is done in three groups to prevent torsional
mode of the structure during earthquake Mode III (X direction Freq=7.16 Hz)
excitation. The frequency of the structure is Figure. 4 Mode shapes of Fixed Base
reduced from 3.2 Hz in Z direction and 7.17 system
Hz in X direction to 0.497 Hz and 0.505 in
X and Z directions. Thus peak acceleration
is reduced from 0.508 g to 0.105g for SSE
earthquake and there is 62 % reduction in
base shear and thus the forces in the
members. The fixed base building has 8
mm peak lateral displacement at the top of
the structure while the base isolated
structure has peak lateral displacement of
102 mm in SSE.
1286
Nagender et al.
1287
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Finite element analysis of free vibration of isotropic skew plates with
different edge conditions has been considered. The analysis has been performed for the
edge conditions SSSS, SCSC, CCCC and CFFF. The variations in natural frequency
of the plate using aspect ratio as 1 i.e. rhombic plate with different skew angles have
been explored using ANSYS 15.0 software. An 8-noded shell element (SHELL 281) is
employed and mesh size has been taken as per convergence study. For the ease of
comparison of results with the existing literature, the natural frequencies obtained are
converted into non-dimensional frequency parameter. The results are found in good
agreement with the available ones. The dependence of frequency on aspect ratio has
also been studied for SSSS and CCCC boundary conditions.
[K] and [M] are overall stiffness & mass effect of the skew angle and aspect ratio on
matrix and {δ} is displacement vector. the non-dimensional frequency parameter is
FEA involves three stages of activity: studied in particular.
1. Preprocessing,
2. Processing and CONCLUSION AND DISCUSSION
3. Post processing.
The study of free vibration analysis of a thin
In this study, finite element analysis is rectangular isotropic skew plate shows
conducted using ANSYS software. An 8 following conclusions:
noded shell element (specified as SHELL The present solutions agree very well
281 in ANSYS) with no of element division with the results obtained by using the
taken as 100 is used. The element has eight new version of the differential
nodes with six degrees of freedom at each quadrature method. When the skew
node: translations in the x, y, and z axes, and angles are low such as0 and
rotations about the x, y, and z-axes. Thus 15𝑜 excellent agreement between the
each element has 48 degree of freedom in present results and the results of
total. SHELL281 is well-suited for linear, Wang is obtained. However, when
large rotation, and large strain nonlinear the skew angles are increased a
applications. The modal analysis is maximum of 2.5% discrepancy is
performed by using different edge observed from the comparison
conditions of the plate as SSSS, CCCC,
The effect of boundary conditions
SCSC and CFFF. Where S, C and F stands
(B.C) on natural frequencies in each
for simply supported, clamped and free edge
mode is studied. The natural
conditions.
frequency is more in case of any
The details of the isotropic rectangular
edge clamped when compared to
plates are as follows:
simply supported condition.
Material: Steel. Natural frequency increases with
Modulus of Elasticity: 2×1011 N/m2. increase in the skew angle and is
Poisson’s ratio: 0.3. different for different mode shapes.
Density: 7800 kg/ m3. Increase in skew angle increases the
Thickness: 0.02m internal stiffness of the skew plate
and the mass of the plate decreases.
RESULTS The frequency of the first five modes
The natural frequencies are expressed in all increases with increasing aspect
terms of the non-dimensional frequency ratio. The skew angle45𝑜 makes the
parameter λ curve distinct for comparison of the
frequency parameter.
𝜌ℎ Since it is rare for all three of these
𝜆 = 𝜔𝑎2 √ (3)
𝐷 parameters to be prescribed in a
Six typical rhombic plates with different given design, this paper has shown
support conditions have been analyzed. The that there is considerable scope for
avoiding unwanted resonances.
1289
Free Vibration Analysis of Isotropic Skew Plate
REFERENCES
Bardell N S 1992 The Free Vibration of
Skew Plates using the Hierarchical
Finite Element Method Computers and
Structures 4(5/6) 841-874.
Leissa A W 1973 The free vibration of
Rectangular plates Journal of Sound
and Vibration 31(3) 257-293.
Srinivasa C V Suresh Y J and Kumar Prema
W P 2014Free flexural vibration on
laminated composite skew plates
International Journal of Engineering
Science and Technology 4(4) 13-24.
Wang Xinwei Wang Yongliang and Yuan
Zhangxian 2014 Accurate vibration
analysis of skew plates by the new
version of the differential quadrature
method Applied Mathematical
Modeling 38 926-937.
Zhou L and Zheng W X 2008Vibration of
skew plates by the MLS-Ritz method
International Journal of Mechanical
Sciences 50 1133-114.
1290
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Due to its simple type of construction, leaf spring is commonly used in
vehicles and in many other machinery suspension systems. Several researchers have
studied the different aspects of leaf spring design and an extensive review work is
done. It is observed that in theoretical research work, the constituent bundle of
prismatic beams is usually modeled as a single beam under three point loading.
However, there is insufficiency in modeling of roller support mounting at the two eye
ends and in addition, the asymmetry in the geometry of the leaf spring have not been
addressed properly. In the present paper large deflection profiles of leaf spring
corresponding to different loading conditions is analyzed theoretically, by considering
it as a beam with initial curvature. The boundary conditions of the system are
identified and system governing equation is derived through appropriate satisfaction
of kinetic and kinematic constitutive relations. The very nonlinear nature of the
problem requires continuous geometry updation with corresponding changes in
boundary conditions. Solution of the geometrically nonlinear governing differential
equation is obtained by using an iterative variational method. Numerical computation
is done on MATLAB® computational platform and validation is carried through some
dedicated experimentation.
Keywords: Leaf spring; Three point bending; Large deflection; Variational
Method.
PROBLEM FORMULATION
In actual applications leaf springs are
clamped centrally and load is supported at the
two eye ends. One of the eye is hinged on
frame and the other end is fitted with the
frame through a shackle. Hence, the end
supports of the spring are essentially roller
supports which allow free planar movement.
To determine the load-deflection behaviour
of the master leaf spring, we focus on free
body diagrams of an equivalent curved beam
system as shown in Fig. 1. The free body
diagram is drawn in equilibrium position,
attained after application of load in a
particular load step. The particular Figure 2. Schematic diagram of (a) left
configuration is a function of its previous roller and (b) its free body diagram
geometry and locked-up stress field. Vertical
1292
Large Deflection Analysis of Leaf Spring under Three Point Bending
From force equilibrium conditions, the deflection curve at point A1 and it is the
W RyL RyR and F RxL RxR . The eccentri- origin of Oxyz and Osnz coordinate systems.
city of load W , with respect to the mid-span At point A1 , RL has normal and tangential
vertical line is eW ( ve towards x axis). The
components N L and TL along ‘ s n ’
centre distance between the two rollers is L ,
coordinates and horizontal and vertical
measured in Ox ' y ' z ' coordinate. To describe
components PxL and PyL , along‘ x y ’
the spring support system in greater detail,
schematic diagram of the left end roller is coordinates. The coordinate systems Oxyz and
shown in Fig. 2(a). It is apparent from the Ox ' y ' z ' are related by the transformation
figures that points A , B are roller centres, equations x x'eL cos L and y y'
whereas points A0 , B0 are contact points of the
eL sin L . Now it is easy to compute the
rollers with frame. Point A1 is the virtual bending moment induced in the beam, as
contact point between the roller and the leaf given below,
spring. It is assumed that at this point the
slope of the beam is tangential to pitch circle
of the roller and hence the radial line AA1 is M x PyL x PxLw , 0 x xW (2a)
normal to the beam centre line. At a M x PyL x PxL w W ( x xW )
particular load step i , applied load W i is F ( w x w) , xW x L (2b)
known (= W i 1 W ), but F and L are W
L
RyR L WxW F w x , xW eW (1) w"
W 2 PyL x PxLw EI ( s) 2 3/ 2
[1 ( w' ) ]
In Eq. (1), xW is the location of load , 0 x xW (3a)
application point and w x is the correspond-
W
PyL x PxLw W ( x xW ) F ( w x w)
ing y coordinate. Besides deflection w other W
for a given Li 1 . The unknown vector ci tion is based on a variational principle using
carries the length dimension and it is Galerkin’s assumed mode method. The
computed by the application of variational displacement functions are approximated by
principle. Eq. (3) is expressed in variational linear combination of sets of orthogonal
coordinate functions, developed through
form, by using deflection field w as the
Gram-Schmidt scheme and substituted in the
weight function.
governing equilibrium equation. The final
L w"
solution of the large displacement geometric
wEI ( s) 2 3/ 2
( PyL x PxL w) nonlinear problem is obtained iteratively with
0
[1 ( w' ) ]
the help of MATLAB® computational
simulation. For the purpose of validation, a
dx 0, 0 x xW (4a) dedicated experimental set-up is made, and
good agreement is found. The present paper
L
wEI ( s)
w"
2 3/ 2
PyL x PxLw
paves the way following which, the problem
can be extended in the domain of nonlinear
0
[1 ( w' ) ]
material behaviour.
W
W ( x xW ) F ( w x w) dx
REFERENCES
0, xW x L (4b)
Ahmed S R Mamun A A and Modak P 2014
Analysis of stresses in a simply-
In Eq. (4), assumed series solution of w(x) is supported composite beam with
substituted and it is expressed in matrix form, stiffened lateral ends using displacement
[ K ]ci R , which is solved for the - potential field. International Journal of
unknown coefficient ci through an iterative Mechanical Sciences 78 140-153.
scheme as detailed in the next section. Almeida C A Albino J C Menezes I F and
Paulino G H (2011) Geometric
The Iterative scheme
nonlinear analyses of functionally
We note that in the current domain 0 x L , graded beams using a tailored
s Lagrangian formulation Mechanics
0 ds cos L whereas for the previous
Research Communications 38(8) 553-
s
0 ds cos L
i 1 559.
domain, we had . The
iteration at each load step starts with an Ghuku S and Saha K N 2015A theoretical
and experimental study on geometric
assumed value of L( Li 1 L) and the
nonlinearity of initially curved
problem domain is validated by using cantilever beams Engineering Science
kinematic relation L'eL cos L eR sin R and Technology An International
s
0 ds cos . In addition, the solution is Journal
10.1016/j.jestch.2015.07.006.
doi:
Abstract: In this paper, an efficient finite element model for structural analysis of
lifting beam with arbitrary cross-section is presented for the purpose of understanding
of variation in the analysis results and the stresses produced due to use of various
meshing attributes and also analysis results are discussed. Objective is to find out the
efficient way for discretization of the problem and minimise the errors in analysis
besides the basic thumb rules. The study starts with the geometry study of lifting
beam, load cases acting on structure and conventional guidelines for meshing,
particularly for NASTRAN solver tool.
Lifting beam is used to assist in the hoisting process of an aero-engine variant. Lifting
beam is a solid or fabricated metal beam, suspended from hoist designed to provide
multiple lifting points. Beam is made up of five big sub-assemblies. This paper also
includes the discussion about meshing approach for structure in static analysis with
subassemblies having line, sliding contacts between. Hypermesh, a tool from
‘Hyperworks’ is used to mesh the components and NASTRAN is a solver. The results
of analysis are shown in pictorial forms for stress induces with the use of Hyperview
tool form Hyperworks. The advantages, disadvantages and the potential application of
the method for discretization of structural members as compared with conventional
approach are also discussed.
Keywords: Linear Static analysis; Finite Element Analysis; Lifting Beam;
Meshing; Hyperworks; NASTRAN
Welded beam has four parking positions to After studying eight load cases, first load
park the beam on gantry. Engine is made up case i.e. when beam is lifting whole engine,
of eight different modules. According to is found as critical load case with weight
stripping sequence of the engine, at a time 6311 kg. In this case front and rear mounts
engine is attached to maximum two mounts are connected to the engine.
and whole weight is supported through that
DISCRETIZATION OF MODEL
two mounts.
Geometry study and load case study is
In this paper a beam, supported at four
important activity before proceeding for
parking positions and mounts and trolley are
meshing of any model. As the beam is made
locked at their respective position, is
up of five different sub-assemblies and it is
analysed. So this case is under linear static
required to position them as per load cases.
analysis.
So sub-assemblies are meshed separately.
PROBLEM DEFINITION Before creating IGES files all standard
Objective of the project is to analyse the components e.g. nuts, bolts, washers, shafts,
beam as a structural member for weight of gears, racks, couplings, some supporting
6311 kg i.e. for total engine weight, and also members, and hand wheels, etc. are removed.
effective way to discretization the model to Geometry is categorised as 1-d, 2-d, or 3-d based
make FEA model closer to the realism. on dominant dimensions and type of element is
Create a 3D model as per the existing selected accordingly.
drawing of the model in CATIA. Perform the
1-d elements are used as; Rigid (yellow
structural analysis on meshed model for
critical loading case of engine stripping steps. colour elements in figure 1) for nuts, bolts
Project also deals with evaluating the and washer arrangements, loading the beam
meshing approaches for such fabricated with concentrated masses and to apply the
models. common constraint condition to a set of
element nodes, also BEAM can be used with
METHODOLOGY the additional input i.e. area of cross section
Create the 3D model of the beam 2-d elements are used sheet metal parts
using CATIA as per the design having width to thickness ratio greater than
drawings. 20 e.g. C-channels, supporting plates,
Convert 3D model to IGES/STEP rectangular tubes (blue colour elements in
format and import to HyperMesh for Figure. 1), etc.
meshing. Study the load cases and
find out the critical cases and apply
them to meshed model.
Export the meshed model into .bdf
format i.e. input file for NASTRAN
and perform structural analysis.
Find out high stress concentrated
Figure 1. 1-d, 2-d and 3-d Elements
areas and review localised meshing
and correct it if required. 3-d elements are used when all the three
dimensions are comparable i.e. mounting
LOAD CASE STUDY
1296
Linear Static Analysis of A Structural Member by Finite Element Method
CONCLUSION
After review the area of maximum VonMises
it is found that the rigid element is used for
locking pin (red colour pin in figure 5). In
real world such pins can share the stresses, Figure 7. guide for mounts (top plate) is
but rigid elements never share the stresses. So supported on two members
BEAM, stress sharing element must be used
at such critical position (Figure 6). And also
in actual model a solid block is used to guide
the pin, which may also contribute in sharing
the stresses.
Some plates are used as reinforcement as
shown in figure 7, as per conventional rule
such plates should be meshed with 2-d
elements. In such cases welds plays the role
to support the member on outer peripheral Figure 8. stresses in locking pin
elements only, and all the elements laying The welding technique discussed in this
inside-portion of the member will be left paper is on conservative side and also saves
hanging with no physical support. Reaction about 20% of total meshing time.
loads will come on outer member only and
produces the errors in the results. So such REFERENCES
components must be meshed with 3-d M R Shirazizadeh H Shahverdi 2015 An
elements as sown in figure 6. (brown colour) extended finite element model for
structural analysis of cracked beam-
Considering all above corrections, model is columns with arbitrary cross-section
re-meshed and analysed again. Stress at International Journal of Mechanical
critical area is reduced to 58.5 MPa and stress Sciences 99 1–9.
in locking pin is 47 MPa. (figure 8), Tian-ji li Si-Wei Liu Siu-Lai Chan 2015
maximum deflection value is remained as it Direct analysis for high-strength steel
is. frames with explicit-model of residual
stresses Engineering Structures 100 342-
355.
Nitin Gokhale Sanjay Deshpande Sanjeev
Bedekar Anand Thite 2008 Practical
Finite Element Analysis Finite to Infinite
Publication Pune.
T R Chandrupatla & A D Belegundu 4th
edition, Introduction to Finite Elements
in Engineering Pearson Higher
Education Inc Upper Saddle River NJ
07458.
Figure 6. Re-meshed model
1298
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1300
Crashworthiness and Multiobjective Optimization of Axially Loaded Aluminium Elliptical Tapered Hollow
Sections
Each factor (i.e, each of the 3 design variables) Mean Squared Error (RMSE) metrics were
is given 4 levels (discrete values) and this used and the values are displayed in Table 2.
gives us a total of 64(43) possible Genetic algorithm is used to solve this multi
combinations. Analyses are carried out on objective optimization problem. It is a
nonlinear code LS-DYNA in order to get the technique used to generate solutions for
data points. optimization and search problems. The
Using the obtained data, nonlinear regression algorithm itself is based on the evolutionary
is performed using MATLAB’s ‘fitnlm’ process of natural selection and uses processes
function for each of the objectives. The like reproduction, crossover, mutation and
objective functions thus obtained are shown in selection to arrive at a set of ‘optimal’ points in
table 2. In order to check the fitting accuracy the solution space of the problem.
of these functions, the R-squared and Root
Table 1. Validation & Convergence
Validation Convergence
1301
Upadhyay et al.
REFERENCES
Abdul-Latif Baleh A R Aboura Z 2006 Some
Improvements on the Energy Absorbed in
Axial Plastic Collapse of Hollow
1302
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
1304
Semi-analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending
u×10-12 Dz×10-7
1306
Semi-analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0
1307
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
0.9
Uttarkashi_Bhatwari
0.8 Chamoli_JosimathT
Uttarkashi_GhansialiL
0.7
Uttarkashi_RudraprayagL
0.6 Uttarkashi_TehriT
PGA (g)
0.5 Uttarkashi_UttrarkashiT
Dharmshala_BandlakhasL
0.4
India Burma Border_DolooT
0.3 India Burma Border_KatakhalL
India Burma Border_KatakhalT
0.2
India Burma Border_PynurslaL
0.1 India Burma Border_SilcharL
1309
Incremental Dynamic Analysis of RC Building Frames
1.0
Probability of yielding
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
PGA (g)
1310
Sabharanjak and Dawari
0.9
0.8
0.7 Buildings 2012.
0.6
0.5 FEMA P-58-2 Vol 2 – Implementation
0.4 Guide Seismic Performance
0.3
0.2
Assessment of Building 2012.
0.1
0.0 Mander J Dhakal R 2007 Incremental
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 dynamic analysis applied to seismic
PGA (g) financial risk assessment of bridges
Engineering Structures 29 2662-2672.
Maniyar M 2009 Incremental Dynamic
analysis of 3 story RCC building
Ph.D. Thesis SGSITS Indore.
Mwafy A Elnashai A 2003 Static pushover
versus dynamic collapse analysis of
RC building Engineering Structures 23
407-424.
Nicknam A Mahadavi N A 2008
Figure 5. Probability of collapse of comparative study of the traditional
present work and Maniyar performance and the incremental
dynamic analysis approaches14th
SUMMARY World Conference on Earthquake
Engineering, Beijing China.
From the IDA curve, we can understand the
behavior of building under a particular Ramamurti V Rajarajan S Rao G 2002 An
earthquake and define the performance incremental approach for large
stages of the structure such as yield and displacement response of structures
collapse. In this study, the methodology for subjected to dynamic loads Finite
obtaining seismic collapse capacity is Elements in Analysis and Design 38
defined. A set of 14 different time history 823-833.
data is used to assess the seismic capacity of Vamvatsikos D Cornell A 2002 Incremental
the structure. From the fragility curves, 50% dynamic analysis Earthquake
yielding occurs at PGA of 0.1g and building Engineering and Structural Dynamics
completely yields at PGA of 0.4g. Also, 31(3) 491–514.
50% collapse occurs at PGA of 0.2g, a
complete collapse occurs at PGA of 0.9g. Vamvatsikos D Cornell A 2002 The
incremental dynamic analysis and its
REFERENCES application to performance-based
earthquake engineering 12th European
Asgarian B Sadrinezhad A Alanjari P 2010
Conference on Earthquake
Seismic performance evaluation of
Engineering 479.
steel moment resisting frames through
incremental dynamic analysis Journal
of Constructional Steel Research 66
178-190.
1311
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: There are different methods for force identification from the responses on a
structure. In this paper, a time domain spectral finite element method using an eight
noded element having Gauss-Lobatto Legendre (GLL) points as nodes are formulated
using Timoshenko beam theory. The mass, damping and stiffness matrices are
formulated. Then this is solved using Newmark time integration technique. A forward
problem i.e, predicting the response from the force input on a cantilever beam is
solved. This is compared with experiment to validate the algorithm. Experiments are
conducted using modal hammer to excite a beam to measure the acceleration
responses. The numerical and experimental methods are compared and results are
discussed. Then the same technique is used to solve the force identification problem
or inverse problem numerically. It is seen that there is a close match between the
numerical simulation and the force. Further, force reconstruction will be carried out
from the experimental response data.
Keywords: spectral element; time domain; force reconstruction.
alternate methods which are accurate and used in formulating the spectral finite
computationally effective should be used. element formulation
One of the methods used is the spectral finite
Step1: Placement of nodes
element method. There are two different
kinds of spectral finite element approaches, (1 − 𝜉)𝑃𝑁′ (𝜉) = 0 (1)
one is based on frequency approach where Where 𝜉 ∈ [1, −1] are the roots of the
fast Fourier transform (FFT) [Martin and Legendre polynomial and 𝑃𝑁′ (𝜉) denotes
Doyle, 1996] is used and another is based on the first derivative of the Legendre
time domain where orthogonal functions like polynomial of degree N.
Legendre and Chebyshev is used along with
discretisation typical for the FEM [Kudela et Step2: Displacement field approximation for
al., 2007] This results in its high accuracy the node placement as per equation (1)
and excellent convergence properties. The Step3: B matrix formulation which is
use of these polynomials, the nodes is placed differentiation of displacement field
not equidistant and these functions are
Step4: Arriving at the mass, damping,
orthogonal leading to the inertia matrix to be
stiffness and force matrices
diagonal and computationally easy and
accurate. The FFT methods provide excellent Step5: Solve using Newmark integration
convergence and using single element, one
can calculate the force from response.
However, this method requires the use of
throw off elements due to the periodic nature
of FFT. For complex geometries, this
becomes more complicated. Hence some
other methods using Laplace transforms are
also described in literature [Igawa et al.,
2004]. However, all these work well for
Figure-1 cantilever beam with tip
simple geometries. In this paper, time
transient force
domain approach is followed where complex
geometries can also be solved taking A cantilever beam is shown in Figure-1 is
advantage of finite element techniques. solved using this technique. A triangular
pulse is simulated at the tip of cantilever and
ELEMENT FORMULATION
response is calculated at the tip using spectral
A spectrally formulated eight noded finite element method. To evaluate the
Timoshenko beam with Gauss Lobatto computer program, an experiment is
Legendre points as nodes is used. The conducted in which the tip of cantilever is
stiffness, mass and damping matrices are excited using a modal hammer and response
derived using Gauss Lobatto Legendre at the beam tip is measured using
weighing functions. The individual matrices accelerometers. The same input is fed in the
are assembled and the resulting equation computer program and predicted responses
containing stiffness matrix along with mass are compared. The force history in Newton is
and damping matrices are then solved using shown in Figure-2and the corresponding
time integration methods. Here Newmark responses along with the comparison with the
integration scheme is used as it gives good spectral finite element method are shown in
stability while solving. Following steps are Figure-3.
1313
Inverse Problem on a Timoshenko Beam using Time Domain Spectral Finite Element Method
CONCLUSION
The time domain spectral finite element
gives a very good match with experiment
with fewer numbers of elements. There is a
good match between the experiment and the
calculated values. Further, the challenge lies
in force reconstruction from the measured
experimental response data.
REFERENCES
Dennis B H Weiya Jin G S Dulikravich Jovo
Jaric June 2011Application of the finite
element method to inverse problems in
1314
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: Braking system is essential part of automobiles. Disc brakes are being used
in automobiles due to its high braking capacity. However in disc braking system a
huge amount of heat generation occurs, since all the kinetic energy of the vehicle gets
converted into heat at the disc pad interface due to friction with in a very short span of
time. Thermal analysis is carried out to estimate the amount of temperature generation
with respect to time in disc brakes of both four wheelers and two wheelers. ANSYS
software has been used to do this time varying transient thermal analysis on the brake
disc system. A mathematical modelling has been done with suitable assumptions to
calculate the amount of heat generation in each time step. Appropriate boundary
conditions are applied to simulate the models. The amount of temperature generation
with respect to material properties, thickness of the disc and time of braking are
studied.
Keywords: transient thermal analysis; friction; heat generation
clutches and brakes when the sliding speed Initial velocity, U and final Velocity, V in
exceeds a critical value. Zhu et al. 2009 each time step are calculated assuming a
established the theoretical model of a three- linear variation of velocity.
dimensional (3D) transient temperature field Kinetic energy in that time domain is
to predict the change of brake shoe’s
temperature field during hoist’s emergency KE 1 / 2 M (U 2 V 2 ) (4)
braking. Heat flux in that time domain is
Q KE (5)
2 At
ASSUMPTIONS where, A is Area of contact and t is the time
All kinetic energy of the vehicle at disc brake period of the substep.
rotor surface is converted into frictional heat
or heat flux.Thermal conductivity and ANSYS MODELLING
specific heat is assumed to be constant in all Transient thermal analysis for brake discs has
temperatures.The disc material is considered been performed using ANSYS 14. Ten node
as homogeneous and isotropic.The domain is tetrahedral elements are being used for meshing
considered symmetric about z-plane. Bike is the entire disc into finite number of segments
undergoing constant deceleration Analysis is with an element edge length of 0.01m. The
done considering two wheel braking system material properties such as thermal
for cars and one wheel braking system for conductivity, specific heat, density are
bikes. applied on the material through material
model tab in the pre-processor as given in
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING table 1.
Mass of car, m = 1800 kg Table 1. Material properties
Velocity of the vehicle, V = 112 km per hour Thermal Specific
i.e., 31.29 m/s Density
Material conductivity heat
(kg/m3)
Kinetic energy possessed by the body = (W/m.k) (J/kg.k)
881157.69 J Cast iron 50 438 7150
Deceleration produced in the vehicle due to Carbon 100 1000 1750
braking = -7.82 m/s2 (considering 4 sec SiC/Al 180 800 2800
braking) MMC
Distance travelled by the vehicle during these Ceramic 120 750 3100
4 sec = 62.6 m
Diameter of wheel of a Toyota innova car, d In the solution tab first transient analysis has
= 647.5 mm (courtesy Toyota) been selected. In the settings option the initial
temperature of the material is set to be 40
For one rotation of the wheel the vehicle will degree Celsius. Heat flux is being applied to
move = πd = 2.034 m one surface of the disc in all time domains
Number of rotations before stopping of the one by one as given in table 2. Table 2 shows
vehicle = 32 (approx.) four time domains, but in the analysis for cars
32 time domains were used.
Total kinetic energy and total time are
divided into 32 sub divisions.
1316
Study Of Thermal Behaviour Of Brake Disc Materials
Table 2. Heat flux in each time disc is very thin and unlike the car disc there
domain for cars is no hub present here.
1317
Panda and Timmaraju
REFERENCES
Belhocine A chao D Nouby M Yi Y B Abu
Bakar 2014 Thermal analysis of both
ventilated and full disc brake rotors with
frictional heat generation Applied and
Computational Mechanics 8 5–24
1318
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
Abstract: The use of adhesive bonds over mechanical joints is increasing, especially
in the aerospace industry. This work aims to inspect the health of adhesively bonded
lap joints with the help of wave propagation studies carried out using Spectral Finite
Element Method (SFEM). SFEM is tailor made technique formulated in frequency
domain to study wave propagation problems. Ultrasonic guided waves are used for
inspection. The joint is modelled using two beams representing the adherands and a
double beam representing the lap joint. The double beam is formulated as a
combination of two beams and continuously distributed elastic spring foundation. The
elastic foundation basically models the adhesive bonding between the two adherands.
The wavenumbers corresponding to incident and reflected components of axial,
bending and shear modes are obtained in the spectral domain. The spectrum relation
shows that the shear mode starts propagating only after a certain frequency called the
cut-off frequency. For the beam on elastic foundation, there is an additional cut-off
frequency depending on the value of foundation stiffness called the foundation cut-
off. As the value of foundation stiffness goes on increasing, the foundation cut-off
approaches the shear cut-off and at a particular value of foundation stiffness, the two
cut-off frequencies have same value. By varying the value of foundation stiffness, the
bond quality can be inspected.
Keywords: Adhesively bonded lap joint; Wave propagation; Spectral Finite
Element Method.
1320
Inspection of Adhesively Bonded Lap Joints Using Spectral Finite Element Method
1321
Paunikar and Gopalkrishnan
CONCLUSION
The SFEM formulation correctly predicts the
spectrum relation and the group speeds for
the beams. All the modes are also captured
(b) Dispersion Relation for a standalone beam configuration. Further,
Figure 4. Plots for double beam KF = the wave propagation behaviour for the single
1e11 N/m lap joint will be obtained by establishing
connectivity in different elements. Various
cases of bonding will be studied by changing
the values of foundation spring stiffness of
the double beam.
REFERENCES
Doyle J F 1997 Wave Propagation in
Structures Spectral Analysis Using Fast
Figure 5(a): Velocity history for a 200 kHz Discrete Fourier Transform Springer-
pulse applied axially at the load tip of an Verlag New York Inc 74-91
infinite beam capturing the axial mode
Gopalakrishnan S Chakraborty A and
Mahapatra D R 2007 Spectral Finite
Element Method Wave Propagation,
Diagnostics and Control in Anisotropic
and Inhomogeneous Structures
Springer-Verlag London Limited 40-54
Reddy J N 2004 Mechanics of Laminated
Composite Plates and Shells Boca
Raton: CRC Press
Figure 5(b): Velocity history for a 200 kHz Samaratunga D Jha R Gopalakrishnan S
pulse applied transversely at the load tip 2014 Wave propagation analysis in
of an infinite beam capturing the shear adhesively bonded composite joints
and bending modes using the wavelet spectral finite element
method Composite Structures 122 271-
An infinite beam with KF = 0 is subjected to 283
a modulated pulse of 200 kHz. The load is
1322
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
modes of vibration. The objectives of the damping coefficient of the Structure 1 and 2,
study is to analyse the response of connected respectively. Let ω1 = k1 m1 and
structure considering various model of
friction force of friction damper, namely ω2 = k2 m2 be the circular frequencies and
(model 1) Coulomb friction characteristics, ξ1 = c1 / 2m1ω1 and ξ 2 = c2 / 2m2ω2 be the
(model 2) velocity dependent coefficient of damping ratios of Structures 1 and 2,
friction, (model 3) equivalent linear respectively. Let α and λ be the mass and
coefficient by statistical linearization frequency ratio of two structures,
technique and (model 4) viso-plasticity respectively, expressed as
model, subjected to stationary as well non-
m1
stationary random process using Monte Carlo α= (1)
simulation. m2
ω2
ADJACENT STRUCTURES COUPLED λ= (2)
ω1
BY FRICITON DAMPER
Let f s be the limiting force in friction
Considering two adjacent SDOF structures damper also termed as slip force. The couple
connected with friction damper as shown in system remains in the non-slip mode until the
Fig. 1(a) and corresponding mathematical frictional force in the damper is less than the
model shown in Fig. 1(b). limiting friction force. The force in friction
Friction damper attains to the limiting slip force, the
Damper condition for slippage will be initiated.
Structure 1 Structure2 Considering the coupled system subjected to
ground motion, the equations of equilibrium
can be written as
x1 (t ) + c1 x1 (t ) + k1 x1 (t ) + f s =
m1 −m1
xg (t ) (3)
x2 (t ) + c2 x2 (t ) + k2 x2 (t ) − f s =
m2 − m2
xg (t ) (4)
x1 (t ) (a)
x2 (t ) where x1 (t ) and x2 (t ) are the displacement
fs
m1 m2 response relative to the ground of Structure 1
and 2, respectively (as shown in Fig.1);
xg (t )
k1 c1 k2 c2
is the ground acceleration; x (t ) and
x(t ) are
the first and second derivative with respect to
time of the displacement response.
1324
Response Analysis of Adjacent Structures Connected by Friction Damper
2α
where f max is the maximum value of friction
coefficient attained at large value of sliding VISCO-PLASTICITY MODEL (MODEL 4)
velocities; f=
min f max − Df represent the friction
The Visco-plasticity model also called as
coefficient value at essentially zero velocity, xr is hysteretic model, is based on the principles of
the relative velocity of damper ends and a is theory of visco-plasticity, which makes use
constant. The equation of motion of the two of a model that accounts for sticking and
connected structures in the slip mode are sliding by itself. The frictional force
given by mobilized in the damper is given by
x1 (t ) + c1 x1 (t ) + k1 x1 (t )
m1 f1 = µ RZ (13)
(7)
+ f s sgn( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) = −m1
xg (t ) and corresponding equation of motion of two
x2 (t ) + c2 x2 (t ) + k2 x2 (t )
m2 connected structure is given by
(8)
− f s sgn( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) =−m2
xg (t ) y1 (t ) + c1 y1 (t ) + k1 y1 (t ) + f1 =
m1 −m1
y g (t ) (14)
where sgn denotes the signum function. y2 (t ) + c2 y 2 (t ) + k2 y2 (t ) − f1 =
m2 −m2
y g (t )
(15)
DAMPER FORCE BY EQUIVALENT
where Z is a non-dimensional hysteretic
LINEAR COEFFICIENT BY
component satisfying the following non-
STATISTICAL LINEARIZATION
linear first order differential equation, which
TECHNIQUE (MODEL 3)
is given by
The equations of motion of structures
dZ
connected with friction damper, damper force =
q B ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t))
dt
by Coulomb friction model, are non-linear η −1 (16)
− γ x1 (t ) − x2 (t) Z Z
and the corresponding equivalent linearized η
equations is given by − A1 ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t)) Z
1325
Patel C. C.
RMS x2
RMS x1
expressed as
0.0 0.0
xg (t ) =
x f (t ) (17) 0.3 0.3
RMS xa2
RMS xa1
..
..
x f (t ) + 2ξ f2ω f x f (t ) + ω 2f x f (t ) =
−(
xs (t ) +
x0 (t )) Figure 2. Time variation of nonstationary
(18) RMS responses of adjacent structures
xs (t ) + 2ξ ωs xs (t ) + ω x (t ) =
2 2
−
x0 (t ) (19) connected by friction damper
s s s
where
y0 (t ) input white-noise random process CONCLUSIONS
with constant intensity of the PSPD S0 . The
It is observed that nonstationary response for
ωs and ξs generally represent the velocity dependent friction coefficient (model
predominant frequency and damping ratio of 2) is in very good agreement with that of
soil strata, respectively. visco-plasticity model. The Coulomb friction
In present study the nonstationary earthquake model (model 1) little-bit overestimate the
excitation xg (t ) is nonstationary random responses, whereas, equivalent linearize
model (model 3) underestimate the responses.
process
x f (t ) to be obtained considering the
The response quantities due to non-stationary
input white-noise random process
x0 (t ) , and stationary random excitations show
multiplied by modulating function A(t ) . almost similar trends in the results.
The extensive Monto Carle simulations
which are based on the equation of motion REFERENCES
with condition of separation and reattachment Bhaskararao A V and Jangid R S 2006
is to be used to compare the degree of Harmonic response of adjacent structures
accuracy of each of above four damper force connected with a friction damper Journal
model. of Sound and Vibration 292 710-725.
1326
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016